《One Piece: Wielder of the Void》 1. Tru Kingdom --- Under the expansive blue sky, a flock of seagulls soared gracefully, their cooing echoing over the tranquil sea. Yet, at the shoreline, a different scene unfolded. The golden sands of the beach stretched endlessly toward the horizon, merging with the tranquil coastline. Behind it, a lush forest stood like a towering green fortress, its dense canopy soaring skyward as if reaching for the heavens. On the beach, under a sun umbrella, a child of about five or six years old lounged leisurely, basking in the sun. He was almost completely bare, wearing only a pair of short beach trunks. Standing behind him were five or six burly men, and two or three young women tending to him. The boy seemed particularly relaxed and at ease, utterly unconcerned with the world around him. "Prince Anos, is the sun too strong? Should we find a shadier spot for you?" one of the maids asked cautiously, as the boy, with his eyes closed and a piece of fruit in his mouth, basked in the sunlight. The boy opened his eyes slightly, showing no expression. He glanced briefly at the maid before closing his eyes again and replied languidly, "Just move to the shade under the trees if it''s too hot. I''ll stay here and enjoy the sun." The maids exchanged helpless glances, while the burly guards standing behind them wiped sweat from their brows. Despite the boy''s words, none dared to leave, remaining dutifully by his side. Although the boy lay there enjoying himself, his thoughts drifted far away. It had been a week since he had found himself in this world, and he still couldn''t quite grasp the reality of it. How had he ended up here? He vividly remembered eating at a restaurant, and then suddenly, he woke up as a child in someone else''s room & gained the memories of his current body. After a few days, though, he had grown accustomed to this new environment. He had to admit, the air here was incredibly fresh, almost indescribably so. His name was Anos Drexus, prince of the Kingdom of Tru, and the only heir to the throne. The elderly king, having fathered a son at the age of seventy, doted on him immensely. No matter where he went, he was always surrounded by bodyguards. Like now, he hardly had to worry about anything and spent his days enjoying himself without a care in the world. But Anos wasn''t entirely content. Despite having been here for several days, he still hadn''t figured out what world he was in or why he was here. This book is hosted on another platform. Read the official version and support the author''s work. He had grown weary of this mundane life. For someone who used to be a hardworking office worker, this kind of leisure was something he once dreamed of. The Kingdom of Tru wasn''t very large. Surrounded by the sea, its economy was modest at best. But Anos didn''t care about these things. Besides, he is too young to take on any responsibilities, and the old king wouldn''t burden him with such matters. Lying on the beach under the scorching sun, life could almost be called luxurious. Each day passed in monotonous leisure, but he didn''t need to worry about the future. "Prince Anos, there seems to be someone in the sea!" one of the maids suddenly exclaimed, pointing toward the water. Anos, shaken from his reverie, immediately sat up and looked toward the sea. Sure enough, there was a figure bobbing on the waves, drifting toward them on a makeshift raft. After a moment of watching, Anos turned to the guards behind him, who stood unperturbed. Exasperated, Anos shouted, "What are you waiting for? Go save him!" The guards sprang into action, stripping off their clothes and diving into the sea. After some time, they returned with the man, who looked nearly drowned. The guards dressed swiftly and resumed their posts without a word. Anos walked over to the unconscious man. Though he looked close to death, his rising and falling chest indicated he was still alive. Finding a stranger adrift in this remote place piqued Anos''s curiosity. He turned to the maid. "Bring some food over!" "Prince Anos, this man looks like a pirate! Should we help him?" the maid asked, eyeing the man''s attire nervously. "A pirate?" Anos paused. He had heard the term often but hadn''t given it much thought. But now, a real, live pirate had washed ashore, and Anos couldn''t help but feel curious. "Just bring the food! What''s there to worry about? With so many people here, are we really afraid of one man?" Convinced by his logic, the maid hurried off and returned with some fruit. The man lying on the ground was weak but not dead. He had merely fainted. Anos squatted beside the pirate, a playful smile on his face. He patted the man''s cheek lightly, enough to rouse him. The pirate opened his eyes, saw the child beside him, and weakly muttered, "Is there¡­ something to eat?" Hearing this, Anos grinned and offered the fruit. The pirate, who had seemed on the brink of death, sprang to life at the sight of food. He snatched the apple and devoured it ravenously. The people around watched in silence, astonished by the pirate''s transformation. How long had he been starving? After regaining some strength, the pirate lay back down, staring at the sky, a sinister smile on his lips. "Thank you, little guy. You saved my life. But how can I repay you?" he asked with a twisted grin. Anos, intrigued, asked, "And how do you plan to thank me?" "Such a bold little brat. How about I eat you instead?" The pirate''s face contorted grotesquely as he stared at Anos. Sand began to Tremble & roots emerged from the ground, the pirate tried to summon his powers but failed. Anos was momentarily startled but quickly sighed, turning to the guards. "This guy is hopeless." "Do you know who I am? I''m a pirate¡­" the man began to boast weakly. The guards stepped in front of Anos, shielding him. "Prince Anos, you should step back. Pirates are ruthless." "Stop chatting and deal with him already!" Anos ordered, frustration evident in his voice. Despite the pirate''s apparent weakness, the guards hesitated, realizing he was a Devil Fruit user. "He''s a Devil Fruit user¡­!" one of the guards shouted, eyes wide with fear. "A Devil Fruit?" Anos''s mind raced. Was this the world of One Piece? The guards were struggling. Though the pirate was weak, his Devil Fruit powers made him dangerous. The maid, clutching Anos, began to retreat, but he pushed her away gently, saying, "Put me down. Why are we running?" "But, Prince Anos, he''s dangerous! We should retreat¡ª" "He''s too weak to even stand. We''re not in any real danger." Anos''s voice was firm, even as his heart raced with excitement. Reluctantly, the maid put him down. The pirate, noticing Anos''s calm demeanour, grew angrier. He tried to summon his powers again, but the guards quickly tackled him, pushing him toward the sea. Realizing his mistake too late, the pirate stumbled into the water. As soon as he touched it, his strength left him, and he collapsed, the wood bindings around the guards vanishing instantly. --- 2. Devil Fruit ---- The pirate was now lying helplessly by the seashore, and the fear that had restrained everyone had vanished. Only at this moment did they realize that what Anos had said was indeed true! The pirate, sprawled on the sand, could only glare furiously, lacking even the strength to speak. Anos approached slowly, concerned that the pirate might survive once the tide receded. He turned to the burly men who had been knocked down earlier and ordered, "Throw him back into the water. This scum I saved him but then had the nerve to try and eat me? How despicable¡­" The bodyguards lifted the pirate''s arms while gripping his legs, then tossed him into the deep water. With no further threats to consider, Anos stepped into the sea, a sinister grin spreading across his lips. He looked back at his followers and commanded, "Bring me fruits and a knife! I want to test something" "Anos-sama, you don''t need to dirty your hands. Let me handle this," one of the bodyguards suggested hastily. "Do as I say!" Anos said with a stoic face. The group fell silent and followed his orders without further comment. Once everything was prepared, Anos approached the pirate in the water, his grin widening ''let''s see if this theory from my previous life is true'' He muttered to himself, "I never thought I''d find myself in the world of pirates. How have I not discovered this before, in all these years? I wonder if it''s fate, being given such a rare opportunity now." Despite his thoughts, Anos showed no mercy. If he couldn''t kill this pirate on land, then he''d make sure to do it in the sea. Everyone watched in tense silence, fearing something unexpected. Anos stepped forward and plunged the knife into the pirate''s chest without hesitation. The pirate couldn''t react, like a dead fish caught in the tide, helpless against his fate. The maid behind Anos screamed in shock, clearly unaccustomed to such violence. But Anos didn''t flinch. As the blade pierced the pirate''s chest, he focused on the fruit plate. As blood spilled from the pirate''s mouth, his body began to sink beneath the waves. Though uncertain, Anos picked up the fruit plate. It held various fruits, like bananas and apples, but he only had eyes for one. His anticipation was rewarded. One of the apples started to change, its vibrant red skin turning dull and withered. The once-luscious fruit transformed, its surface now marked with a strange, spiral pattern, and it took on the texture and colour of aged, rotten wood. "Anos-sama, what''s happening to the apple?" a bodyguard exclaimed, wide-eyed. The story has been taken without consent; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident. Only a Few people in the Kingdom of Tru had ever seen a Devil Fruit. The bodyguards were stunned to witness one appear before Anos so unexpectedly. Anos, however, remained silent, staring at the transformed fruit, excitement building within him. Before he could react, a voice echoed in his mind: [ Ding, congratulations to the host for activating the system. Would you like to proceed? ] Anos froze, stars of excitement dancing in his eyes. The people behind him exchanged puzzled looks. It was just one death, yet their lord seemed overly delighted. None of them could grasp the magnitude of Anos''s exhilaration. The voice in his mind distracted him from everything else. The Devil Fruit in his hand felt almost irrelevant now. Ignoring the slain pirate, he backed away from the shore, his thoughts racing. The thrill of his first kill was drowned out by the unexpected arrival of the Devil Fruit. Now, the voice in his head was all he could focus on. "Everyone, return to the palace at once! We''re leaving!" Anos commanded sharply. He couldn''t wait to unlock this new world but needed to ensure nothing strange happened to his body first. The palace was just a few miles away, a short journey on foot. Misinterpreting his urgency as excitement over the mutated apple, the group hurried to follow, running towards the palace. Back at the palace, a different tension brewed. Men in white uniforms bearing the emblem of "Justice" stood around, speaking with the old king. Anos, arriving at the scene, immediately recognized them. After all, knowing where he was meant knowing who they were. The emblem of "Justice" was unmistakable. But he had no time for them. He rushed towards his room, clutching the Devil Fruit, but his father, the old king, intercepted him. "Anos, why are you in such a hurry?" the king said with concern in his voice. "Is that¡­ a Devil Fruit?" a voice cried out in disbelief, drawing everyone''s gaze to Anos and the transformed apple in his hand. Even the old king, caught off guard, showed signs of both surprise and curiosity. But the word ''Devil Fruit'' had already echoed through the hall. The marines attention snapped to Anos and what he held. He knew what it was, but seeing it here, in his son''s hands, with the Marine present, made his joy evaporate. His frown deepened, anxiety overtaking him. "Where did you get that, boy?" demanded a young marine, his aura commanding and his face stern. "This is Vice Admiral Sakazuki," the king introduced reluctantly, his voice steady. "Ah, Vice Admiral Sakazuki, pardon my rudeness earlier. I found this on the beach. It looks a bit odd, doesn''t it?" Anos replied politely, bowing. Inwardly, Anos cursed his luck. ''Damn it, to run into Akainu here? What a nightmare!'' Sakazuki''s frown deepened, clearly unsatisfied. But before he could press further, another marine, darker and more imposing, placed a hand on Sakazuki''s shoulder. "We have more urgent matters, Sakazuki," said Zephyr. Zephyr turned to Anos, a faint smile softening his rugged features. "You''ve had quite the stroke of luck. Take care of that Devil Fruit and use it to protect your kingdom." "I will, sir!" Anos replied with a grin. Z''s words reassured Anos that the fruit wouldn''t be taken from him, and the old king relaxed, smiling as well. "Father, I''ll be in my room. Please continue your discussion," Anos said in a playful tone. The old king, eager to avoid more attention on his son, nodded quickly. "Yes, yes, go on." Anos left, still feeling the weight of several gazes on him. He hated this lack of control. Only once he reached his room and sensed no one following did he relax. He placed the Devil Fruit by his bed and sat down his heart racing. Taking a deep breath, he closed his eyes, focusing his thoughts. "System, system¡­" he whispered in his mind, desperate to reconnect. If anyone were near, they could almost hear the frantic beating of his heart. Anos sat there, waiting anxiously. Finally, the mechanical voice returned: [ Would the host like to activate the system? ] Though the voice was robotic, to Anos, it sounded like the sweetest melody. "Activate it!" he exclaimed without hesitation. The mechanical voice continued, [ System activating¡­ Please wait¡­ ] Before his eyes, a blue vortex swirled, mysterious and deep. It seemed to invite him into another realm. In this space, everything floated around him, awaiting his choice. [ The system has been activated. This world is the world of One Piece, and this system is the Universal Mall, offering items equivalent to those found in the One Piece world ] ---- 3. System --- Anos was almost speechless with disbelief. Everything around him felt like something out of a fanfiction story it was just too overwhelming. It all seemed surreal, yet every detail was intensely vivid. Suddenly being transported from his original world to this one was already disorienting enough, but what was happening now made him question the nature of reality itself. Despite his confusion, Anos felt both nervous and exhilarated. With a slightly trembling voice, he asked, "What exactly does the Universal Mall System do?" [ Host can purchase Universal products based on their needs or exchange items of equivalent value in beris. The mall offers a variety of goods, abilities, skills, as well as self-defence and offensive capabilities ] Listening to this mechanical voice, Anos found himself deeply engrossed, unable to tear himself away from it. The most incredible part was that this system had chosen him. He was elated just thinking about it. As a prince of a kingdom, if he used money to buy things, this system would make it all too easy. After staying in the system''s space for a while, his initial excitement began to fade. At last, Anos asked curiously, "System, is there any initial reward, like a starter gift pack?" [ All items in the system mall must be purchased with money. Would you like to use one Beri to open the starter gift pack ] "One Beri?" Anos was momentarily stunned. At the age of five or six, he had rarely encountered anything that required money, and he was uncertain how expenses worked in this new world. But then he suddenly remembered that in the world of One Piece, everything was transacted in Beris. Feeling a surge of excitement, he immediately said, "Start!" Although he didn''t have any Beris on him, the system allowed for the exchange of valuable items instead of money. Anything of equal value could be traded, which meant that all his belongings were potential currency within the system. The balance in his account displayed a total of 353.4 million Beris. Surprised, Anos wondered what he possessed that was worth so much. Then it hit him it must be the Devil Fruit lying beside him! But it was too late now. The system would automatically identify and use the nearest items belonging to him for exchange. [ This is only one time exchange, after this you can purchase from Beris or until the system is updated ] He still didn''t know what kind of Devil Fruit it was or what abilities it granted. However, one thing was certain: it was related to plants in some way. Even if he didn''t use it himself, he thought it would make a great gift for someone else. But now, it was too late. Anos was no longer disheartened, though. He was eager to see what was in the starter gift pack. As he heard the sound of Beli being deducted, a golden door suddenly appeared before him. When the door slowly opened, the system''s voice echoed again, [ Congratulations to the host for receiving an initial gift package. Would you like to open it? ] Seeing the golden glow emanating from it, Anos was thrilled. It looked like something incredibly valuable. He quickly said, "Open it!" [ Congratulations to the host for receiving a One Piece World Package, which includes the top three forms of Haki and the Marines Rokushiki training method ] The system''s announcement was clear, but Anos wasn''t entirely pleased or surprised. The most concerning part was a footnote added by the system, stating that he must run 10km, do 500 push-ups, and do 1,000 frog jumps every day for ten years. Although these tasks weren''t overly complicated, the requirement to maintain this regimen daily was daunting. For a child, running 10km a day seemed almost impossible, not to mention the rest of the training. Was this a gift pack for beginners, or some kind of cruel joke? The whole thing seemed questionable. A case of theft: this story is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation. Anos was stunned, thinking about the gruelling years ahead. He could foresee a decade of hardship. Yet, he knew that in this world, strength was everything. If he didn''t push himself, who knew what fate awaited him in the future? Fortunately, his father, the old king, was still in good health, so Anos didn''t need to worry about taking over the kingdom just yet. But if the king were to fall ill in a few years, how would Anos handle the transition? With a smile, Anos accepted his fate. Despite the absurdity of the system''s starter gift, it was something he could live with. After exiting the system space, Anos glanced at the empty bed beside him, where the Devil Fruit had been. It was gone now. Though he had expected it, he still felt a pang of disappointment. At that moment, the old king suddenly entered the room and asked anxiously, "Anos, where did the Devil Fruit go?" Not wanting to reveal too much, Anos smiled and replied, "Don''t worry, Father. I didn''t eat that thing. I felt it was a bad omen, so I disposed of it." "Good, good. That fruit was indeed a curse. Our kingdom cannot afford the troubles it might bring," the old king said with relief, completely believing his son''s words. The Kingdom of Tru was located in the South Blue, the second weakest of the four seas in the One Piece world. Anos was well aware of this fact. Ever since realizing he was in the world of pirates, he understood that the East Blue was the weakest of the seas, while the North Blue was considered the strongest. But being one of the weakest seas had its advantages and disadvantages. On the one hand, it meant fewer encounters with pirates. On the other, whenever pirates did show up, they could easily ravage the entire kingdom. "Father, what were those Marine men doing here earlier?" Anos asked curiously. The old king thought for a moment, then smiled. "It seems they were looking for the wife of the Pirate King, who is rumoured to be hiding in our country. The Marine wants to capture her and came here to inform us." "The Pirate King''s wife?" Anos was taken aback. When he had studied the world of pirates, he had always used the Age of Exploration as a timeline. He hadn''t expected to be so close to such historic events. But this was good news. At least it meant that the main characters of the future pirate era had not yet emerged, giving him plenty of time to carve out his path. Even though he was excited, Anos knew he needed to focus on his training. His priority was to make the most of the next ten years. He was determined to become strong enough to protect his kingdom from any threat. "Father, starting tomorrow, I will begin rigorous training. I must become powerful. I will ensure that no one dares to bully us or act recklessly in our kingdom," Anos declared seriously. The old king was overjoyed to hear this. The white hairs on his head seemed to turn black again with renewed hope. He patted Anos on the shoulder and said, "Good son. If you have the will, then pursue it. I''m still strong enough to hold this throne for a while longer. You won''t need to take on these burdens just yet." "Don''t worry, Father. You''ll live for many more years," Anos said with a smile. Although the old king''s health was declining, Anos was deeply grateful for his father''s care and guidance in this new world. Growing up, Anos had never known his mother, and he was acutely aware of the sacrifices his father had made. The Kingdom of Tru was poor, both in military and economic terms. People often struggled to find enough food, and the kingdom had seen little improvement over the years. Being in the South Blue meant there were no favourable opportunities for trade or economic growth. Before reaching his current position, Anos hadn''t thought much about the kingdom''s issues. All he could do now was wait and address the problems one by one in the future. The next day, Anos began his training in earnest. He was determined to face the challenges ahead with full preparation. The Kingdom of Tru was relatively safe and peaceful, so there was no immediate danger. Still, the old king assigned a few guards to follow Anos during his training, just in case. Anos''s daily routine was rigorous. He would wake up early and run 10km through the forest. For a child, it was an immense task. The first few days were the hardest. After completing his exercises on the first day, he didn''t want to get out of bed the next. He felt like quitting, but he persevered. After a month of training, his initial laziness had mostly disappeared. He could now run 10km in one go. Day after day, year after year, Anos continued the same regimen. Even the palace staff couldn''t understand why he chose to endure such hardship when he could have lived comfortably. But his perseverance won him the respect of the kingdom''s ministers. They saw in him a tenacity and determination that refused to yield, qualities that earned their admiration. This routine continued for several years. In the seventh year, the old king''s health deteriorated rapidly. At over eighty years old, his condition was to be expected. After his daily training, Anos began involving himself in state affairs. The Kingdom of Tru had few significant issues, as it had always been impoverished and overlooked. Five years ago, the execution of the Pirate King in Loguetown changed the world. His last words ignited the Great Pirate Era, and even the South Blue saw a surge in pirate activity. This led to a further decline in the kingdom''s already fragile economy. Fortunately, most pirates consist of ordinary people, and the kingdom''s lone army is sufficient to restrain most of them. However, occasionally, we encounter exceptionally powerful individuals, making heavy casualties unavoidable. The "Great Pirate Ara" has dawned, and many dreams of becoming pirates. As a result, the entire Kingdom of Tru has plunged into destitution. Anos had foreseen this when he first engaged in state affairs. However, achieving prosperity for the entire Kingdom of Tru remains challenging, at least in the short term. Yet, for Anos, with his modern perspective, managing these issues may not be as daunting, especially considering that he also possesses a unique system. Now, in the eighth year of the Great Pirate Ara, Anos is 14 years old and stands at about 1.8 meters tall, with a well-proportioned and muscular physique. Although he has not actively participated in the kingdom''s governance, his elevated status has drawn the attention of many throughout the realm. The old king is bedridden, nearing the end of his days and detached from the outside world. Aside from training and attending to state affairs, Anos spends most of his time by the old king''s side. --- Thank you for reading! 4. Future Times are changing rapidly, and even the Kingdom of Tru must now prepare for the future. There are about 60 Kingdoms in the South Blue, and the Kingdom of Tru is considered one of the least notable among them. On this day, after Anos finished his morning run, he arrived at the palace hall, where many officials were already waiting for him. As soon as he sat on the throne, an elderly man stepped forward and said, "Your Highness, our coastal areas have been affected by pirate attacks almost every month recently. Shouldn''t we come up with a better plan to address this?" "Our Kingdom''s funds are limited, and the distance between the Kingdom of Tru and the coastline is too vast. With our current military strength, we can''t protect all areas effectively!" Anos also looked helpless, at least for now, the situation seemed beyond his control. At fourteen, Anos appeared mature and composed, carefully considering all aspects of every issue. Even for seasoned officials, he was a convincing leader. While listening to their reports, he realized that this issue wasn¡¯t new it came up almost every time they met. He had been contemplating these problems for the past year or two, and now was the time to find a solution. Looking at the concerned faces around him, Anos sighed but then smiled slightly. "I already have some plans for our kingdom, and I may need your help in the future to prepare a comprehensive budget." "Your Highness, if you need anything, just ask. We will do our best to serve the kingdom and its people. It¡¯s time for us, old bones, to make our final contributions," said a thin elderly man standing at the front. "You are all heroes of the Kingdom of Tru. I propose to cultivate various flowers and herbs throughout the kingdom to establish our unique national attributes." Anos stood up, walked a few steps forward, and spoke to them. The dozen people standing in the hall exchanged puzzled looks, unsure of what Anos meant. Anos noticed their confusion but didn¡¯t elaborate. Instead, he took out a bottle of an unknown liquid from his pocket, and the exquisite decoration on the bottle piqued everyone''s interest. Anos sprayed the liquid, and soon the hall was filled with a pleasant fragrance. "This is the scent of tulips. It¡¯s called perfume. Although other kingdoms produce it, theirs is far inferior. I have the formula to create this. Currently, if we grow food, it may be stolen by pirates. Instead, we should grow something they can''t easily take away." "This is an idea I¡¯ve been considering for some time. Once we grow enough flowers, the surplus workforce can focus on making perfumes. We¡¯ll sell these overseas so that all kingdoms recognize Tru''s unique products from the South Blue." Anos smiled as he continued. No one raised objections. These seasoned officials could foresee the potential benefits of his proposal. "Your Highness, if the people switch to this, won¡¯t we lose our food supply?" asked the elderly man at the front. "Don''t worry, I''ve considered that. Everyone will be taught how to cultivate these plants properly. After the harvest, we¡¯ll buy the flowers from them, providing payment they can use for food or other necessities." "If they prefer, they can sell the perfume directly for cash. This way, we can keep production within the kingdom and provide jobs. Only in this way can we move toward prosperity." Anos spoke passionately. Everyone nodded in agreement, recognizing the feasibility of his plan. Given the current situation, even a small improvement would be better than their current state. What the kingdom lacks most is money. Once the plan is in place, Anos will have the resources to achieve whatever goals he sets. Almost everyone agreed with his proposal, and no one voiced objections. In such a chaotic era, preserving the kingdom¡¯s economy and the people¡¯s livelihood requires strong leadership. Stolen from its rightful place, this narrative is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings. Though Anos is only fourteen, these old officials see him as the perfect candidate for king. "Your Highness, I feel my age. From now on, the kingdom''s future is in your hands. It¡¯s time for us to follow the old king into retirement and let the younger generation take the lead," said one minister tactfully. Indeed, most of the ministers were in their sixties or seventies, the same age as the old king. They had devoted their lives to the Kingdom of Tru. At their age, they should have been enjoying a peaceful retirement, but the kingdom¡¯s weakness prevented it. Anos respected their sentiment, understanding that they felt no attachment to their positions. But he couldn''t let them retire just yet. "You have sacrificed everything for this kingdom. You should be enjoying a peaceful life now, but it will take a few years for our kingdom to stabilize. I hope you can endure for a bit longer until we¡¯ve trained a new generation. I promise you; I will ensure you can live in peace afterwards." Anos walked in front of them, bowed respectfully, and spoke in a firm, serious tone. "Your Highness is too kind. We just worry that our abilities and energy are insufficient and might hinder your plans. But if you need us, we will continue to serve the kingdom as long as we can," said the elderly minister. Anos felt deeply moved. Although they hadn''t achieved much, these people were still invaluable to the kingdom. "That''s all for today. Everyone, please return to your duties. I''ll have others implement our plan, and I will need your support." Anos smiled warmly. Under the palace dome, the elderly ministers didn¡¯t know what else to say. They understood their limitations and trusted that Anos had his methods in place. After dismissing the ministers, Anos returned to the old king. Despite everything, the old king was still his father, and some duties could not be ignored. The old king¡¯s face was lined with age, and his wrinkles had deepened. But when he saw Anos, he lifted himself, smiled, and called weakly, "Anos, come here..." "Father, how are you feeling today?" Anos sat beside him and asked gently. "I¡¯m fine. No issues lately." The old king smiled but then added, "Take the throne tomorrow. The Kingdom of Tru is yours now." "What are you saying? The kingdom still needs your guidance. I am just helping." "I know my condition, son. There¡¯s no need for comforting words. I¡¯ve lived long enough. I just feel guilty leaving you with such a struggling kingdom." The old king smiled sadly, his eyes glistening with tears. "Don''t worry. I will make the Kingdom of Tru prosperous. It won¡¯t remain like this," Anos reassured him. "You''ve always been different. I believe in you. But with pirates running rampant now..." Before he could finish, Anos picked up a crystal ball from the bedside table and crushed it effortlessly into powder. Seeing this, the old king felt reassured. His greatest fear had been that his son might not be able to protect himself. The old king smiled warmly. "I see. If you ever feel overwhelmed, consider joining the World Government." "Don¡¯t worry about the future, Father. Rest now. I will make sure you see a stronger Kingdom of Tru." "That''s good to hear, but I won¡¯t be around to see it. Our kingdom, though, still has hope." The old king¡¯s hands trembled as he pulled out a parchment from under his pillow. It appeared to be a treasure map. "This map has been kept in the palace for generations. Now, it¡¯s yours. You can follow it when you¡¯re ready." The old king handed it to Anos. The Kingdom of Tru was different from other Kingdoms. It had no nobles and was mostly impoverished. In recent years, pirate raids have left the people in dire straits. The old king smiled warmly & said, "Remember son, The decisions you make will come at a certain price or consequences. And by the time you''ve realised that you made the wrong decision, it will lead to your & the kingdom''s downfall." Anos accepted the map, more focused on comforting his father than on the treasure. "I¡¯ll take care of everything. Don¡¯t worry." Anos knew his father wouldn¡¯t live much longer, perhaps only two more months at most. But he had already begun implementing plans for the Kingdom two years ago. His perfume idea was a good one. Even if food was grown, it would likely be stolen by pirates. But flowers and herbs were different they held no value to outsiders. The palace coffers were nearly empty. Maintaining a Kingdom under such circumstances was the next challenge. After talking for over half an hour, Anos left, visibly saddened. His father''s condition was worsening, and he knew the end was near. As he stepped outside, a guard rushed over. Seeing Anos, the guard bowed deeply and said, "Your Highness, a large number of pirates have appeared at Nanniwa Port. Captain Daiki asked us to inform you immediately and hopes you have a plan!" Faced with this sudden news, Anos remained calm. Seeing the guard¡¯s nervousness, he asked, "How many troops do we have there now?" "Your Highness, we have about 500 troops at Nanniwa Port, but the pirates number around 1,000." "Let¡¯s go. I¡¯ll head there immediately." Anos spoke decisively. Nanniwa Port wasn¡¯t far from the palace, and given his current speed, he could reach it in half an hour. At Nanniwa Port, the situation was tense. A young man, about 20 years old, stood at the forefront, his eyes fierce and resolute. This was Daiki, the kingdom¡¯s most loyal subject, and a formidable fighter. When Anos was ten, he began training a group of people in the techniques of the Marines'' Rokushiki and taught them Haki. Although their numbers were few, Daiki was the strongest among them. Facing seven or eight pirate ships, Daiki showed no fear, but his fists were clenched. Such a large pirate crew was intimidating. The most critical issue is that no one knows the reason for these pirates coming to the Kingdom of Tru. ¡°What¡¯s the current situation?¡± Daiki was observing the arrival of the pirate ships when suddenly a voice sounded behind him. He turned around and saw that Anos had already appeared behind him. --- Thank you for reading! 5. Pirates --- Hearing the noise, Daiki immediately turned his head. When he saw Anos¡¯s face, he respectfully said, "Your Highness, why are you here?" "Something big has happened. How could I not arrive?" Anos replied, slightly exasperated. Daiki took a deep breath, chuckled softly, and then became serious. "The other side has eight ships and around a thousand men. It¡¯s quite a challenge for us." "Perfect," Anos said nonchalantly. "Keep as many alive as you can, we¡¯re short on construction workers." Daiki and the others were left speechless. What could be going through His Highness¡¯s mind? As the enemy fleet neared, many of the five hundred men in the army began to panic. Most had never seen battle before. The lead ship bore a skull and crossbones flag, its ominous symbol growing clearer by the minute. Before the army could react, enemy cannon fire was already raining down. "How¡¯s your training with the techniques I taught you?" Anos asked Daiki. "I¡¯ve nearly mastered it, but didn¡¯t you say not to use it in front of others?" Daiki responded, puzzled. "Doesn''t matter when it''s on your doorstep. Capture them alive if you can, we¡¯ll need them for rebuilding the kingdom," Anos said with a grin. While Anos and Daiki stayed calm, the soldiers behind them were far from composed. Only a select few, personally trained by Anos over the years, stood firm, exuding confidence. The pirate cannons continued to roar, but their accuracy was inaccurate. Despite the bombardment, not a single soldier on their side was hurt. Those who had been fearful began to feel emboldened. "I¡¯ll observe from here. You go and capture them. If they resist, feel free to kill them, but try to keep the pirate ships intact. Our kingdom isn¡¯t wealthy, and those ships are valuable. Keep them alive if possible, they¡¯ll make fine workers for us," Anos ordered Daiki with a sly smile. Daiki smiled in return and replied confidently, "Understood." He turned to his troops and shouted, "We¡¯ve trained long enough! Now it''s time to show them what we¡¯ve got! Follow me!" With that, Daiki charged forward, followed closely by several dozen men, all showing no signs of fear. As they reached the shoreline, they leapt into the air, running toward the pirate ships as if walking in the air. The sight left not only the pirates but even the soldiers behind Daiki dumbfounded. These men were the best of the best, handpicked by Anos himself, and had undergone rigorous training. For the rest of the soldiers, it was like watching a dream. And the pirates? When they saw men flying through the air, fear gripped their hearts. "Fire the cannons! Don¡¯t let them near the ship!" a pirate commander shouted in desperation. But it was already too late. Numbers wouldn¡¯t help them now. Despite the many pirates and the barrage of cannon fire, none of Daiki¡¯s men were touched. They landed on the pirate ships effortlessly, cutting through the crew as if they were in an uninhabited land. No one could stand against them. Even the pirate captain, who had initially appeared somewhat imposing, fell just as easily. But just as the battle seemed over, one pirate leapt a hundred meters into the air, moving faster than even a Marine using Soru. "Devil Fruit, huh?" Anos mused, watching from a distance. It was obvious this was the power of a Devil Fruit. But it was just one man and no match for the overwhelming force on their side. To make things worse for him, the pirate charged directly at Anos. If you encounter this narrative on Amazon, note that it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it. "Do you know who I am? I¡¯m the Jumping Man, user of the Jump-Jump Fruit! Uncle Defa Mo..." the pirate captain boasted, clearly unaware of his precarious situation. But before his feet even touched the sand, a boot appeared out of nowhere and kicked him square in the face. He flew hundreds of meters before crashing to the ground, unconscious. The soldiers watching from the sidelines were left in shock, their jaws practically on the floor. They had been surprised when Daiki¡¯s men took to the sky, but Anos¡¯s speed was something else entirely. In an instant, Anos had crossed hundreds of meters and knocked the Devil Fruit user out cold. "I thought he¡¯d be stronger," Anos muttered, unimpressed. "Even with a Devil Fruit, he¡¯s still weak." Still, it was surprising to see two Devil Fruit users appear in such quick succession in the South Blue. Within half an hour, the thousand-strong pirate crew was defeated. If not for Anos¡¯s order to preserve the ships, it might have been over in ten minutes. Daiki returned to Anos using Geppo and landed beside him with a grin. "Your Highness, it¡¯s done." "Good," Anos replied calmly. "Have them check the supplies on the pirate ships. As for the prisoners, take them back for evaluation. They¡¯ll be useful later." There was no surprise in Anos¡¯s voice, this outcome was exactly what he expected after putting so much effort into training these men. If they couldn¡¯t handle a group of pirates, that would have been disappointing. "Your Highness, the ships are filled with goods. Would you like to take a look?" Daiki asked. "Nothing worth seeing. Just gather the valuables and send them to the palace. As for the ships, remove the pirate flags and use them as civilian vessels from now on," Anos replied. "Understood, Your Highness." "And make sure to keep that Devil Fruit user under control. We may have a use for him," Anos added with a smirk. Though the fruit wasn¡¯t particularly powerful, a Devil Fruit user could still be useful under the right circumstances. In under an hour, everything was wrapped up. It was almost too easy. Even Anos found himself somewhat disappointed, feeling like it hadn¡¯t even been a real fight. After Anos left, the soldiers who had been watching began buzzing with excitement. The transformation in their abilities had amazed them all. Daiki, too, was impressed. He had always thought Anos was powerful, but the speed and strength he displayed had exceeded even his expectations. A Devil Fruit user couldn¡¯t even withstand a single kick. "Handle that guy carefully. Don¡¯t let him die," Daiki instructed the soldiers. "His Highness has plans for him." "Yes, sir!" came the soldiers¡¯ unified reply, their voices filled with confidence after witnessing the overwhelming power of their commanders. --- "Let go, bastards!! Do you know who I am? I am a Devil Fruit user. Jumping..." Bang! Before the tied-up pirate captain could finish his words, Daiki kicked him directly in the face. Still reflecting on the precision of Anos''s earlier kick, Daiki shook his head helplessly. "You¡¯re in this state, and you still dare to brag about being a Devil Fruit user?" Daiki muttered with a sigh of disbelief. "Captain Daiki, everything has been cleared. A total of 951 pirates were captured, along with eight pirate ships, a shipload of food, and a large amount of gold, silver, and jewellery," a soldier reported as he hurried over. "All the gold, silver, and jewellery will be sent to the palace. As for the pirate ships, they will be remodelled. Remove the pirate flags, and from now on, they¡¯ll serve as cargo ships for our Kingdom," Daiki responded calmly, adopting a more authoritative tone, much like Anos. The scene of five hundred soldiers guarding nearly a thousand pirates looked rather comical, but none of the pirates had any thoughts of resisting. After all, their captain had already been captured right before their eyes what was there to fight for? More than that, it was the overwhelming strength of the opponent. The sight of those dozen men had truly instilled fear in the pirates. It was almost absurd, they had barely set sail when they encountered such a formidable group. They were truly down on their luck. Onlookers began to gather around, watching the spectacle with great interest. Events like these were a rarity in the Kingdom of Tru. The people''s fear of pirates seemed to vanish in an instant. Daiki led the captured pirates at a slow pace, deliberately giving the citizens of his Kingdom time to witness the state of the once-feared criminals. He wanted them to see that the pirates, who had once caused so much terror, were nothing more than captives now, and that their Kingdom is strong enough to protect its people. Anos, meanwhile, had begun laying the groundwork for a new generation of young leaders. After all, once the kingdom was under his full control, changes both in thinking and in action needed to be initiated without delay. While the Kingdom of Tru had developed some basic self-defence capabilities, there was still a long way to go before it could truly thrive and defend itself against external threats. Just one month later, a significant event occurred in the Kingdom of Tru: the old king passed away. The impact of this loss was profound, even for Anos. At 85 years old, the old king had died peacefully of natural causes. In his final moments, he was at peace. As his only son, Anos naturally succeeded him as king. "Anos-sama, you will need to assume the throne tomorrow. It would be best if you rested early tonight," a maid reminded him late that night as he stood alone outside the palace, gazing up at the starry sky. Anos glanced at her but said nothing, continuing to look up at the stars. To others, it might have seemed like he was grieving his father, but only Anos knew what was really on his mind. The news of the old king''s death had not yet reached the entire kingdom, but the people were already aware that a new king would soon take the throne. Every citizen eagerly awaited Anos''s next steps, hoping he would lead the Kingdom of Tru into an era of prosperity and strength. Bearing the weight of these expectations, Anos stood there under the stars, deep in thought. He understood his mission, and rather than shrink from it, he smiled slightly and began walking toward his quarters. From now on, no one above him would protect him, everything would be up to him to create. He is alone, alone in the world of... --- Thank you for reading! 6. Treasure Early the next morning, the palace was bustling. Old ministers and young talents alike were gathered, all waiting for one person. Anos finally appeared, dressed in a king¡¯s attire entirely different from what he had worn in the past, a golden crown resting on his head. At just fourteen or fifteen, he still looked a little immature, but there was no denying his imposing presence. As he entered the main hall, everyone bowed respectfully, offering their congratulations on his ascension to the throne. Anos stood at the foot of the throne, gazing silently at the chair above him. He had been in this room many times before. When he had acted as regent, he had almost casually sat in that chair without much thought. But this time, it was different. The room remained silent. No one spoke. Everyone waited patiently for what would happen next. --- Anos exhaled sharply, then began walking forward with long strides. The moment he sat down, everyone below bowed and shouted in unison, "Your Majesty..." Anos still felt slightly uncomfortable with the formality, but at that moment, the long-silent system finally spoke. [ Ding, congratulations to the host on ascending the throne. To express our congratulations, the system has sent a special gift... ] Anos, who had been confused moments earlier, was now shocked. He hadn¡¯t expected to become king, and even more surprising was that the system could give him items. It was truly astonishing. Regaining his composure, he looked at the ministers below and, with a smile, said, "There¡¯s no need for formalities. This kingdom doesn''t belong to me alone it¡¯s the result of everyone¡¯s joint effort. I may be the leader, but you are the one who will ensure that the kingdom runs smoothly. In the future, we¡¯ll need your continuous support to thrive." After speaking respectfully, Anos stood and saluted the gathered ministers. The ministers were a bit taken aback, but when Anos saluted, they bowed deeply once again. This time was different from before¡ªhe was now their king, the leader of the nation. When such a person offers recognition, it elevates those who receive it. "Everyone, the road ahead will be difficult, and it might not be as smooth as we¡¯d hope. I hope we can all work together, hand in hand so that the Kingdom of Tru can become what we¡¯ve envisioned." Anos stood and spoke again. "Your Majesty, the Kingdom of Tru will certainly become what we¡¯ve dreamed of, or else I, for one, will not stand for it!" Daiki declared boldly. "You¡¯ve got some nerve saying that," Anos replied with a chuckle. "From now on, you¡¯ll be responsible for Protecting the entire Kingdom of Tru. The weight on your shoulders will be great, but I trust you¡¯ll live up to the responsibility and the trust placed in you." "Rest assured, Your Majesty. As long as I¡¯m here, I¡¯ll never allow any pirates to set foot on the land that belongs to the Kingdom of Tru," Daiki responded, his earlier playfulness replaced by a serious expression. Anos smiled, acknowledging Daiki¡¯s commitment. There were many challenges ahead, and Anos planned to address them all today. "Everyone, as you might remember, we¡¯ve discussed a plan before. Starting now, all the coastal areas of the Kingdom of Tru will be cultivated with flowers and plants. Our goal is to create a national brand and ensure that more than half of our citizens can secure stable jobs and incomes." "The plan has already begun. The construction of the perfume factory, ten kilometres from the palace, started half a month ago. This is just the first step. There¡¯s much more to do; textiles and other industries are in the plans." "Therefore, the burden on all of you will not be light. For the sake of the kingdom and the people, I urge you to take your work even more seriously in the coming days." Anos spoke with conviction. The construction of the perfume factories was no secret most people were already aware and eager to work in them. However, Anos¡¯s true intentions went beyond this. With wealth, he could purchase goods from other worlds, ensuring the Kingdoms prosperity. Right now, his focus is on developing the kingdom for the better. His matters would have to wait. "Your Majesty, if your plan goes ahead, we might face a food shortage. The surrounding countries already struggle with food supplies. How do you plan to address this issue?" an elderly minister named Akio asked. The tale has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the violation. Anos smiled and answered directly, "Don¡¯t worry, Minister Akio. I¡¯ve considered this. Once people switch to growing flowers and plants, food will indeed be their main concern. But I¡¯ve already taken measures to address this." "And where will the people¡¯s food come from?" Akio pressed. "Minister Akio, Your Majesty, I¡¯ve already begun purchasing large quantities of food from other Kingdoms. You have nothing to worry about," Daiki stepped forward and said. "I believe it would be in our best interest to join the World Government. This would protect us from pirate attacks in the future," a middle-aged man, who appeared to be in his forties, suggested. He had a moustache and an intelligent look about him. Anos smiled. "You raise a valid point. Joining the World Government could indeed offer protection from pirates. But have you considered what the World Government will demand in return?" The man looked stunned. He hadn¡¯t thought that far. He had only considered the deterrent effect of the World Government. The others were also deep in thought, and Akio spoke again, this time with a serious tone. "The World Government does not engage in charity. And let''s not forget that South Blue isn¡¯t exactly their priority. Additionally, their annual tribute of ¡®Heavenly Offerings¡¯ would cripple our economy." "Minister Akio is right. Our kingdom is already strained. If we have to offer up Heavenly Offerings, it will further impoverish our people. At that point, why would we even need pirates to plunder us?" Anos added. The middle-aged man who spoke earlier fell silent. He hadn¡¯t considered the impact of paying the tribute. He¡¯d simply thought the World Government¡¯s protection would help. "Alright, for now, let¡¯s continue with the plan. We¡¯ve gathered the population data, and our goal is to meet at least 20% of the kingdom''s employment needs in the first phase. We¡¯ll figure out the rest as we move forward and improve the kingdom¡¯s economy," Anos concluded. "Yes, Your Majesty..." the ministers responded in unison. Soon after, word of the king¡¯s decisions spread throughout the Kingdom of Tru. Surprisingly, there were few objections. Most people welcomed the news and looked forward to working. Growing flowers and plants provided many with a stable livelihood one person could tend several acres, and the returns from these lands could sustain entire families. The climate was ideal for cultivation, and there were no restrictions on which varieties to plant. The entire Kingdom of Tru was swept up in this new wave of agriculture. Visitors from other kingdoms were intrigued by the developments in the Kingdom of Tru. For Anos, the greatest advantage was that, with sufficient wealth, he could ensure a continuous supply of food and other resources. The system allowed him to obtain whatever he needed. In the palace hall, after explaining his vision and plans to the ministers, Anos quickly left. His curiosity about the gift from the system was growing. Back in his room, he closed the door and sat on the edge of his bed, focusing inward. Opening the system¡¯s interface, he was surprised. [ System, where¡¯s the gift you promised? ] [ Congratulations, host. The system is offering a lottery draw as a gift. The items in the lottery come from the Universal Mall. What you receive depends on your luck. ] Anos was speechless. A lottery draw? Still, it was better than nothing. "Start the lottery!" Anos commanded. The system space shifted from its usual blue to pink, with a button in front of him. Without hesitation, Anos pressed the button. The screen spun, and when it stopped, Anos gasped in amazement. In front of him is a long sword a tachi, to be precise. Its name was displayed: the Demon Sword Muramasa. Any anime fan would know this legendary blade. Anos knew of its formidable reputation. He hadn¡¯t expected the system to deliver such a powerful item from another world. Beside his bed, the Demon Sword Muramasa stood upright. Its faintly glowing red scabbard and the hilt made of an unknown material exuded an eerie aura, making it clear that this was no ordinary sword. The sword''s malevolent energy was palpable, enough to make anyone shudder when near. Anos grasped the hilt, and a strange power surged through him, establishing a connection between them. "I¡¯ll make sure your reputation is upheld in this world," Anos murmured, gazing at the demonic sword. However, a thought crossed his mind he didn¡¯t know any swordsmanship. Owning such a legendary blade wouldn¡¯t help him much without the skill to wield it. With that in mind, Anos recalled that his system space contained over 300 million in resources. Now was the time to use it. Placing the Demon Sword Muramasa by his bedside, Anos entered the system space once more. "System, is there a way to acquire advanced swordsmanship techniques?" Instantly, the words "Hiten Mitsurugi-ryu" appeared on the screen. But the price tag below made Anos gulp. The entire technique cost 500 million a sum far beyond what he had available. His 300 million, which he thought was substantial, now seemed like nothing compared to the cost of the swordsmanship manual. He couldn¡¯t afford it. With a sigh, Anos exited the system space and looked at Muramasa, now dormant beside the bed. "Don¡¯t worry, I¡¯ll master you soon," he promised with a smile. The sword¡¯s faint red light gradually dimmed until it looked like an ordinary blade. The Demon Sword Muramasa was about one meter in length, with a blade around 70 centimetres long. If Anos could master Hiten Mitsurugi-ryu, his combat abilities would improve dramatically. But for now, he remained a pauper with no way to afford the technique. At that moment, he recalled something his father had left him before he died¡ªa treasure hidden somewhere in the kingdom. Though Anos didn¡¯t know what the treasure contained, he trusted that his father wouldn¡¯t have left something so valuable without a reason. After thinking for a while, Anos decided it would be better to take practical action. He lifted his pillow and retrieved a roll of parchment. The location was recorded on it, with even the specific mountain peaks meticulously marked. This time, the treasure wasn¡¯t hidden at sea but rather on a high mountain located within his kingdom. After reading it, Anos felt curious. Why had his father been unwilling to open it until the very end? What was hidden inside remained a mystery. However, based on his knowledge of the One Piece world, there were many places where one could gather great wealth. But one needed to reach a certain level of strength before venturing on such a journey. For now, almost everything in the kingdom had been arranged smoothly, and there was little to worry about. The only remaining task was to sell the first batch of goods once they were ready. However, this process was expected to take at least a year. --- Thank you for reading! 7. Arrival Of Garp At present, the entire royal treasury contains less than 200 million Beris at most. For Anos, this amount of money can only cover the food needs of the people. Therefore, if his strength cannot increase, Anos can¡¯t protect himself or the people of his Kingdom. After studying the treasure map for a while, Anos was slightly surprised. The names and places marked on it were clearly within his kingdom. But the key issue is that Anos had never even left the capital of this kingdom since his birth, let alone knew anything about the world outside. After pondering for a long time in his small chamber, Anos stood up, picked up his demon blade, and walked out of the room. ¡°Summon Daiki, I need to ask him something,¡± Anos commanded the maid stationed outside the door. ¡°Yes, Your Majesty¡­¡± As the details of the situation started to unfold, it was evident that making use of the treasure map was immediately necessary since it wouldn¡¯t be of much use in the near future. After nearly half an hour, Daiki arrived promptly. Upon seeing him, Daiki bowed respectfully. ¡°Your Majesty, I heard you were looking for me?¡± ¡°Yes, I want to ask if you¡¯re familiar with a place called Takao Mountain in our kingdom?¡± Anos asked directly. ¡°Your Majesty, I¡¯ve never heard of it. Why do you ask about such a place all of a sudden?¡± Daiki replied. Anos didn¡¯t hold back and handed Daiki the treasure map left behind by the old king. Daiki glanced at it and then, somewhat perplexed, said to Anos, ¡°Your Majesty, this seems to be Baterilla, the area closest to the Kingdom of Tru within our territory.¡± ¡°Is it far from here?¡± Anos inquired. ¡°Not too far. Our kingdom isn¡¯t large, but it would still take at least a day to get there,¡± Daiki replied. Anos thought for a moment, feeling an inexplicable familiarity with the name, but ultimately couldn¡¯t place it. ¡°Prepare to leave tomorrow morning. We will go together,¡± Anos ordered. ¡°Yes, Your Majesty¡­¡± Despite these new plans, Anos¡¯ daily training continued uninterrupted. His routine of running, push-ups, and frog jumps had been part of him for so long that it took less than half an hour to complete. A ten-kilometre run would take mere minutes if he used his abilities, but Anos took it seriously, believing that some things needed to be done with diligence. The next day, just after dawn, they set sail. It was Anos¡¯ first time leaving the palace, and though his expression was calm, excitement surged within him. In the One Piece world, what most people crave is freedom but can such freedom truly exist? Following the coastline, they observed the living conditions of various places, and it became apparent to Anos that most people lived in misery. This only solidified his resolve to change the kingdom¡¯s situation. Their ship, originally used by pirates, was quite large, capable of accommodating 300 to 500 people. With the flag changed, it looked much more imposing and dignified. The former pirates are now laboured on construction projects within the royal city¡¯s borders. ¡°The feeling of being at sea is laboured. Once things settle here, I¡¯d love to explore more,¡± Anos said, standing at the bow of the ship. ¡°The future of the kingdom is in your hands, Your Majesty,¡± said one of the maids behind him with a smile. Anos turned to her, smiling slightly. ¡°The future belongs to all of us. Alone, I can¡¯t achieve much.¡± Royal Road is the home of this novel. Visit there to read the original and support the author. ¡°Yes, Your Majesty, but Lina is honoured to serve you,¡± replied the maid. ¡°I hope everything unfolds as we imagine. At least that way, we won¡¯t have to worry about the future for a long time,¡± Anos said softly. Around fifty people accompanied Anos, each with specific duties. He didn¡¯t want to draw too much attention, so they proceeded quietly. However, even in the calm South Blue, surprises are inevitable. Midway to their destination, a naval warship approached. The seagull flag flying proudly from its mast was unmistakable, even from afar. However, it was the ship¡¯s unique silhouette that truly captured Anos¡¯ attention. ¡°Your Majesty, there¡¯s a Marine warship approaching. What should we do?¡± Daiki asked urgently. ¡°Do nothing. Whatever happens, do not reveal your abilities,¡± Anos commanded, his tone serious. Daiki had long been curious why, despite years of training, Anos hadn¡¯t explained this policy. But he followed orders without question. Staring at the warship a kilometer away, Anos immediately recognized its dog-head figurehead. He knew exactly who was aboard. ¡°Do your best to avoid contact with the Marines. We don¡¯t want any encounters,¡± Anos ordered again. ¡°Yes, Your Majesty¡­¡± ¡°I didn¡¯t expect it to be Garp! I can¡¯t believe I¡¯m seeing Vice Admiral Garp here in the South Blue,¡± Anos murmured to himself. He had no intention of clashing with Garp or even meeting him. The reason for Garp¡¯s presence in the South Blue was still unknown, and Anos didn¡¯t want to find out the hard way. As the ships neared, Anos¡¯ crew skillfully steered away, avoiding a direct encounter. But just as they thought they were in the clear, a middle-aged man in a suit appeared on their deck. His large frame and unmistakable square face confirmed it: Vice Admiral Garp had made his appearance. ¡°Wow, haha¡­ I almost punched this ship into pieces, thinking it was a pirate vessel! Luckily I held back!¡± Garp laughed heartily, paying little attention to the surprised looks from Anos and his crew. Anos, keeping his composure, stepped forward and said respectfully, ¡°Vice Admiral Garp, it¡¯s an honour to see you here in the South Blue. I never expected such a distinguished figure.¡± ¡°You know me, kid?¡± Garp asked, though with no hostility. ¡°Of course, how could I not? I¡¯m Anos, King of the Tru Kingdom. My father often spoke of you. I never imagined I¡¯d meet you in person,¡± Anos replied with a smile. As the conversation continued, Daiki and the others relaxed, realizing that Garp had no ill intent. Garp grew even more intrigued. He looked at Anos and asked with curiosity, ¡°I didn¡¯t expect you to become the king of this kingdom at such a young age. It seems the burden on your shoulders isn¡¯t light. Is your Kingdom struggling right now?¡± ¡°Thank you, Vice Admiral Garp, for your concern. I believe things will improve in the Kingdom of Tru in the days ahead.¡± ¡°Haha, you¡¯re quite an interesting fellow. How about joining the Marines and working under me?¡± Garp stared directly at Anos as he made his offer. Anos rolled his eyes. The blatant attempt at recruiting him left him speechless. ¡°Vice Admiral Garp, if I weren¡¯t the king of Tru, I might have happily followed you. But as you can see, many citizens are relying on me to lead them toward a better life. So I¡¯m afraid I must decline your offer!¡± Anos replied with a smile. ¡°Well, that¡¯s what you say now, but your Kingdom is not thriving. If you ever find ruling to be no fun, you can always join the Marine. I¡¯ll save you a good spot,¡± Garp chuckled. ¡°I appreciate the offer, Vice Admiral. If the opportunity arises in the future, I¡¯ll certainly consider it.¡± ¡°Where are you headed? Do you need assistance? I can stick around for a bit to ensure things go smoothly.¡± Before Anos could reply, Daiki stepped in. ¡°Thank you for your concern, Vice Admiral. His Majesty simply wishes to assess the state of the kingdom, to better understand the situation and decide how best to address it.¡± For a brief moment, Garp¡¯s eyes turned sharp as he locked his gaze on Daiki, but the intensity passed quickly. He returned to his usual jovial self, his dog-head hat perched atop his head. After observing the crew for a while, Garp grinned at Anos. ¡°Well then, I¡¯ll take my leave. I have a feeling we¡¯ll cross paths again.¡± Everyone was left wondering what exactly the old man meant by that. Did he board their ship just to exchange a few words? What happened next stunned Daiki. Garp suddenly stepped into the air using Geppo, flying straight back to his warship in an instant. It was only then that Daiki understood why Anos hadn¡¯t allowed anyone to display their abilities from the start. If his hunch was correct, these training methods and abilities must be closely tied to the Marine. Pov- Garp Back on the warship, as soon as Garp sat down, a voice behind him shouted impatiently, ¡°Garp, next time you disappear like that, could you at least give me a heads-up?¡± ¡°Crane, don¡¯t worry so much. I just went to have a look.¡± Garp replied with a straight face. ¡°Did you discover anything?¡± Tsuru asked directly. She could tell from Garp¡¯s expression that the ship wasn¡¯t as ordinary as it seemed, so she pressed him with a serious tone. ¡°The people on that ship aren¡¯t ordinary. I didn¡¯t expect such a small kingdom like Tru to have this level of strength,¡± Garp said. ¡°What do you mean? Are they all Devil Fruit users?¡± Tsuru asked, concerned. ¡°No, not at all. It¡¯s just that their physical training is exceptionally advanced, comparable to the best in our Marine,¡± Garp explained. ¡°That¡¯s all? Many places have people who, with proper training, can achieve similar results. What¡¯s so surprising about that?¡± Tsuru replied indifferently. ¡°You don¡¯t get it, even after I¡¯ve explained it. No point in discussing it further. Maybe we¡¯ll meet that young king again. He¡¯s quite an intriguing person.¡± Garp smiled slightly and dismissed the subject. After all, as Tsuru had pointed out, with the right training, others could also reach the level of the Marine. He wasn¡¯t entirely sure If what he saw was significant, so he decided to test things out, but the outcome seemed to align with his initial thoughts. In any case, Garp wasn¡¯t too concerned. As long as the other party wasn¡¯t a pirate, a kingdom having such strength was understandable. After all, he knew very well that without a few powerful figures, a Kingdom would easily fall prey to pirates. Pov ¨C End ---- Thank you for reading! 8. Baterilla On the ship where Anos and the others were sailing, everyone still looked confused as they watched the Marine warship move away. Daiki walked up to Anos and asked, ¡°Your Majesty, do you know that old man?¡± ¡°Of course I do. He can be considered the pinnacle of strength in this world. More importantly, he¡¯s currently the most powerful person in the Marine.¡± Anos slightly raised the corner of his mouth, praising him without hesitation. ¡°Really? But judging by his subordinates, he didn¡¯t seem that impressive,¡± Daiki said, a look of surprise on his face. ¡°You¡¯re mistaken, Daiki. That old man is quite fierce, and his perception of his opponents is extremely sharp.¡± Upon hearing this, Daiki¡¯s expression darkened. He wanted to ask more but hesitated. Seeing that Anos didn¡¯t seem concerned, Daiki paused before asking, ¡°Your Majesty, is the method you used to train us related to the Marine?¡± Anos smiled and patted Daiki¡¯s shoulder. Without any reservations, he said, ¡°You¡¯re right. The training method I used for you is a system the Marine has never shared with outsiders. It¡¯s also their most powerful set of techniques Rokushiki¡± ¡°I see¡­¡± Only then did Daiki understand why Anos hadn¡¯t allowed them to display their full strength. If the results of their training, just a group of a hundred, had reached this level, he couldn¡¯t even imagine the strength of those still in the Marines. He wasn¡¯t surprised but had lingering questions. How did His Majesty, at just ten years old, come across such secret techniques? But now wasn¡¯t the time to ask. What mattered was his loyalty to his kingdom and his king. ¡°Stop thinking and get ready to move. We¡¯re only halfway, and we need to reach our destination before nightfall,¡± Anos said directly. ¡°Yes, Your Majesty¡­¡± Anos, having regained his calm, looked at the slowly departing warship, deep in thought about why Garp had come to the South Blue. This place was far from the Marine¡¯s headquarters, quite a journey for him. There had to be a reason for his presence here. The South Blue was relatively weak and didn¡¯t have many pirates. It didn¡¯t seem like a place that would warrant the strongest in the Marine¡¯s attention. Moreover, with few Kingdoms here allied with the World Government, there was little reason for a visit. ¡°It seems Garp¡¯s purpose for being here is related to Baterilla.¡± After all, it was the birthplace of the Pirate King¡¯s son and the final resting place of the Pirate King¡¯s wife. Most people didn¡¯t know about the connection between Garp and Pirate King Roger, but Anos, with his broader understanding of the one-piece world, was well aware. The treasure indicated by the map was also in Baterilla, where the Pirate King¡¯s wife had remained. If there wasn¡¯t a connection between the two, how could it all be a coincidence? Anos had always believed there was more to the story. As the king, he had at least some knowledge of the situation in Baterilla. A case of content theft: this narrative is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation. The island¡¯s population hovered around 20,000, with most of it surrounded by mountains. Though connected to the sea, it wasn¡¯t a particularly hospitable place for human settlement. As they sailed on, Anos wasn¡¯t in the mood to enjoy the scenery. Instead, he walked along the coastline of his kingdom. The entire Kingdom wasn¡¯t large. It took just a day to sail across it, and with their current slow pace, the land seemed even smaller. As night fell, a maid who had been by Anos¡¯s side reminded him, ¡°Your Majesty, we should reach Baterilla Island in about ten minutes. Master Daiki asked me to inform you.¡± ¡°We¡¯re almost there?¡± Anos asked with a sigh. ¡°Yes, Your Majesty, but it¡¯s already dark. Should we spend the night on the island?¡± ¡°Yes, inform them to anchor five miles off the island. We don¡¯t want to disturb the residents,¡± Anos ordered. ¡°Understood, Your Majesty¡­¡± Anos wanted to avoid causing alarm among the islanders. A ship arriving at night could easily be mistaken for pirates, creating unnecessary panic. Since it was already dark, the ship had enough space for everyone to rest, and there was no need to rush. The next morning, Anos led the group toward the location marked on the treasure map. Baterilla Island was not small, though much of it was covered by mountains and forests. They chose to land in a secluded area to avoid disturbing the locals. Walking through the dense forest, Anos asked curiously, ¡°Daiki, are you sure we¡¯re heading in the right direction?¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry, Your Majesty. If the map is accurate, we should be close,¡± Daiki assured him. They had been walking for hours, leaving around 20 people to guard the ship. The treasure map didn¡¯t seem like much to go on, especially given the size of the island. As they trudged through the dense forest, the sweltering heat began to take its toll. ¡°Daiki, didn¡¯t you say we were almost there? What¡¯s going on?¡± Anos shouted in frustration. ¡°Your Majesty, this forest is strange. I feel like we¡¯ve been going in circles. I¡¯m not sure what¡¯s happening,¡± Daiki replied, looking helpless. The sweat on everyone¡¯s faces was proof of the oppressive environment. Anos noticed something odd, too. There were no sounds of birds or any signs of life around them. ¡°Your Majesty, please rest here. I¡¯ll climb a tree to get a better view,¡± Daiki suggested respectfully. ¡°No, don¡¯t split up. This place feels dangerous,¡± Anos commanded. Anos walked toward a massive tree, its top hidden in the canopy. It was at least ten meters wide, and he realized they had passed it multiple times. It felt like they were stuck in a loop. ¡°System, can you analyze this?¡± [ Apologies, host. This system is the universal Mall system and does not provide support in such situations ] Anos was frustrated. The system wouldn¡¯t help, but he sensed there was something they were missing. ¡°Daiki, has no one ever mentioned anything strange about this part of Tru?¡± Anos asked. ¡°I¡¯m sorry, Your Majesty. This area has never been fully explored,¡± Daiki said, lowering his head. ¡°Forget it. Let¡¯s focus on finding a way out,¡± Anos said, sighing. ¡°Your Majesty, should we try cutting down these trees?¡± a soldier suggested, swallowing nervously. ¡°No, they¡¯re too large. It would take too long,¡± Daiki responded. ¡°There¡¯s some truth to that,¡± Anos interjected. ¡°But given our limited options, let¡¯s try it.¡± ¡°But, Your Majesty, we didn¡¯t bring tools. Relying on manpower might not be enough,¡± Daiki cautioned. ¡°It doesn¡¯t matter¡­¡± Anos suddenly drew a sword, his demeanour becoming fierce. ¡°Muramasa, it¡¯s up to you to help us now,¡± Anos said to the demon sword in his hand. He pulled out the sword, and his eyes turned red. Although he hadn¡¯t mastered swordsmanship, his raw strength combined with the power of the demon sword Muramasa was enough to cut the massive trees. The soldiers, including Daiki, looked on in awe and fear as Anos unleashed the power of the demon sword. Muramasa¡¯s evil aura made even the most seasoned soldiers uneasy. ¡°What kind of weapon is that?¡± one soldier asked nervously. ¡°I think we¡¯d better keep our distance,¡± another soldier replied. ¡°Your Majesty is incredible,¡± someone else murmured, both in fear and admiration. But Anos was focused solely on controlling the bloodthirsty energy of Muramasa. The sword trembled in his hand, almost as if it wanted to break free, but Anos gripped it tightly. The forest around them filled with The sword¡¯s dark aura. Anos held on, trying not to let the sword¡¯s power overwhelm him. After nearly half an hour, Muramasa¡¯s wild energy began to subside. The sword¡¯s evil aura dissipated, and it became calm in Anos¡¯s hand. The blade gleamed, reflecting its extraordinary nature. ¡°Muramasa, since you¡¯ve accepted me as your master, you¡¯ll follow my commands¡­¡± Anos whispered a cold smile on his lips. The blade trembled slightly in response. With Muramasa in hand, Anos slashed at the enormous tree in front of him. The tree, nearly ten meters thick, was cleaved in half by the sword¡¯s energy. As the tree fell, a sound like shattering glass echoed through the forest, and the oppressive heat vanished. A cool breeze swept through, and they were finally able to see the road. ---- Thank you for reading! 9. Blessing or curse - 1 Immediately afterwards, the scene before everyone no longer resembled the original forest. "Your Majesty, there''s a road ahead!" Daiki shouted excitedly, his voice was filled with enthusiasm. After all, they had searched this area many times without ever finding a road. However, as the massive tree slowly toppled, the surrounding scenery seemed to transform entirely. Anos noticed the change immediately. He glanced at the road ahead and then back at the enormous tree still falling. As the giant tree descended, countless others snapped under its weight. The moment it crashed to the ground, a tremendous noise echoed, and even the earth began to tremble. Daiki quickly ran to Anos, gazing at the fallen tree. He couldn¡¯t understand why all their previous problems had suddenly been resolved by the tree¡¯s fall. "Your Majesty, what exactly is happening?" Daiki asked respectfully, his curiosity evident. Anos was unsure himself. He had observed the massive tree before but never expected its fall to dissolve the barrier that had perplexed them. "I''m not entirely sure. It seems this treasure holds more mysteries than we anticipated. If we can claim it, our Kingdom of Tru will prosper," Anos said with a smile. "Indeed, Your Majesty. Now that the barrier is lifted, we should reach our destination before nightfall," Daiki replied. "Then let''s move quickly. We can investigate the details later," Anos said, patting Daiki on the shoulder. None of them could explain the sudden changes and the area remained difficult to comprehend. It felt as though the land had shifted on its own. A path, nearly two meters wide, had appeared before them, but no one knew where it led. According to the treasure map: "Open the barrier, and the treasure will reveal itself." This confirmed that the path likely led to the treasure, though it was uncertain what dangers were hidden ahead. Anos sheathed his demon sword, Muramasa, running his hand along the scabbard before securing it at his waist, ready to move forward. "Your Majesty, please allow me to lead. We don¡¯t know what dangers might await," Daiki urged, concerned. "Don¡¯t worry, Daiki. Both our lives are valuable, but with my strength, I should go ahead." Anos smiled. "Your Majesty, you always think of us..." "Whatever you command, I will follow without hesitation." "A king like you is truly worthy of our loyalty!" The soldiers behind him, moved by Anos'' words, praised him wholeheartedly. As they pressed onward, none of them noticed that the felled tree behind them was slowly disappearing, vanishing in silence as they moved farther away. "Your Majesty, you''ve been working hard. Would you like to rest?" Daiki asked after they had been walking for nearly an hour. "No need. Let¡¯s finish this quickly. This level of exertion is nothing for us," Anos replied calmly. Daiki smiled and continued following Anos. They had been walking for an hour, yet the trail showed no end. The towering trees on either side added to the unease they all felt. Despite Baterilla Island¡¯s vastness, it felt odd that at their speed, they hadn¡¯t reached the summit after an hour of walking. Although they had been ascending steadily, it seemed as if they were walking in circles. A case of content theft: this narrative is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation. After ten more minutes, Anos finally sensed something was amiss. The situation felt similar to what they had encountered earlier the surroundings were disorienting, making it impossible to determine the direction. "Daiki, use Geppo to get a view from the sky. See what¡¯s going on," Anos commanded, his voice serious. What was supposed to be a simple treasure hunt now felt like a labyrinth. Upon hearing the order, Daiki leapt into the air, using Geppo to ascend. From above, everything seemed normal. Yet, strangely, despite walking for an hour, they had only covered a few miles. After landing, Daiki reported, "Your Majesty, according to the treasure map, we¡¯re close to the location, but despite walking for nearly an hour, we¡¯ve only covered five miles. The road ahead doesn¡¯t add up." "We can''t waste any more time. Let the others wait here. You and I will proceed by air. I want to see what¡¯s keeping us trapped in this loop." Anos'' voice, now tinged with frustration, betrayed his earlier calm. This place, part of their kingdom, had remained a mystery for so long. How had no one ventured this far before? The treasure, passed down from an unknown era of kings, had remained untouched. And the most baffling question: why had the Pirate King placed his wife here? He must have known something crucial about this place. Anos and Daiki left the soldiers behind and took to the skies, flying directly toward the mountaintop. Upon reaching the summit, they saw nothing but rocks no trees, no vegetation, just barren stone. "The treasure trove is supposed to be here, but I don¡¯t see anything," Daiki said after surveying the area. "Father wouldn¡¯t have protected something insignificant. If the map points here, the treasure must be somewhere," Anos said, trying to reassure himself, though doubts were creeping in. The summit was barren, and no hiding place seemed apparent. The two of them began searching again. Within moments, they had scoured the entire mountaintop, but there was still no sign of treasure. "Could this be some sort of trap? There''s nothing here at all!" Anos cursed inwardly. This place was far from what he had imagined. "Your Majesty, is it possible the treasure map itself is flawed?" Daiki wondered aloud. "Who knows? When my father gave it to me, we didn¡¯t ask for more details," Anos said, shaking his head. "So, what should we do now?" "What else? Let''s head back," Anos sighed. Resigned, Anos sat on a rock, contemplating their return. But sometimes, fortune comes unexpectedly. As soon as he sat, Anos felt the stone beneath him shift. The entire rock lowered slightly as if suspended. Daiki noticed too. The two exchanged glances, and joy spread across their faces. "It looks like the treasure is beneath this rock. Let¡¯s move it aside," Anos said with a grin. Daiki lifted the rock easily. Beneath it, they discovered that the entire mountain was hollow stones suspended in midair, creating an illusion of solidity. "Your Majesty, let me go down first to investigate." "No need. There shouldn¡¯t be any danger. Let''s go down together," Anos decided, jumping into the darkness below. As they ventured deeper into the hollow, a shiver ran through the air, the shadows growing thicker with each step. Looking down, it appeared almost bottomless, and it was very dark inside. No one knew what was hidden beneath. However, there was no need to overthink it. The only certainty was that something valuable was down there. When the two of them jumped into the hole, some unknown force caused them to be suspended in mid-air, halting their descent simultaneously. "Daiki, lean against the side of the mountain and descend slowly. Make sure to be cautious," Anos called out seriously. "Yes, Your Majesty..." Neither of them had any idea what was inside. They could only rely on this method and begin their slow descent. What exactly was hidden beneath the mountain? No one truly knew. However, based on the current situation, it was clear there were certainly unusual items below. From Anos'' perspective, nothing in the world of One Piece was surprising. After all, strange events were commonplace here. As they continued to descend along the rocky edge, it remained pitch black, but they could vaguely sense unusual movements below. Upon reaching the bottom, the scene before them completely shattered Anos'' expectations. Even Daiki was stunned. The so-called treasure was unlike anything they had imagined. "Your Majesty, what... what is this?" Daiki asked, unable to contain his confusion, and looked directly at Anos. At that moment, Anos was running his hands over the massive, dark structure, the shock in his eyes undeniable. There was no need for further words; he already knew exactly what the enormous object beneath their feet was. A massive structure that filled the entire mountain. But it wasn¡¯t treasure or gold. It was the kind of weapon that people across the world of One Piece dreamed of... "Daiki, it seems we''ve struck it rich this time. But whether this is a blessing or a curse, we cannot yet say. Once we leave, we must make sure that no one finds out about what¡¯s hidden here. If word gets out, the entire Kingdom of Tru could be engulfed in the flames of war!" Anos spoke with a grave expression, his voice devoid of emotion. He already understood the gravity of the situation. How had the kings who ruled for generations managed to hide such a massive weapon inside this mountain? "Your Majesty, what exactly is this?" Daiki asked again, unable to hold back his curiosity. As they descended into the hollow, the treasure slowly revealed itself. What was hidden beneath their feet was not gold or riches but something far more valuable something that could change the fate of the Kingdom of Tru forever. --- 10. Blessing or curse - 2 Thank you," Mohammed Alshamsi ", for becoming an Elite member on P@treon. Shoutout to you. Enjoy --- In this dark environment, the two of them couldn''t see everything. It was normal for Daiki to have such doubts. Anos didn''t say it out loud, but he already felt like he was dreaming. It was unimaginable that the Ancient Weapon Pluto, which everyone was pursuing, actually existed in the Kingdom of Tru. No matter how you think about it, it shouldn''t be here. How could such a remote place like the South Blue store something so important? Now Anos understood his father''s word after giving the map "The decisions you make will come at a certain price or consequences. And by the time you''ve realised that you made the wrong decision, it will lead to your & kingdom''s downfall" There was almost no rust on it. A giant ship, almost entirely made of steel, lay at their feet. For the technological level of this era, the sight of such a thing was truly puzzling! "You don''t need to know the origin of this thing. At least for now, for you, for me, and the entire kingdom, all it can bring is disaster!" Anos said with a frown. "Then what should we do now?" Daiki asked in disbelief. "Leave, and bury this matter for now. When our kingdom has enough strength, we will retrieve it. At the very least, it could completely change the fate of our kingdom." Anos replied. "Understood, Your Majesty..." "It seems that Pirate King Roger knew about this as well. I never expected this thing would be here," Anos thought to himself. After just one glance, Anos immediately took Daiki, and they began flying upwards. Needless to say, the magnetic field emanating from this place was coming from the ship. Such a massive steel ship, let alone one built hundreds of years ago, was beyond comprehension, even for Anos. He had reason to believe it was a creation far ahead of its time. Finally, the two climbed back up. They looked at each other and saw the serious expressions on each other''s faces. Daiki quickly blocked the entrance with rocks. From the outside, it looked the same as before, without any trace of change. Standing once more on the mountain peak, Anos sighed slowly and gazed into the distance. The restlessness and uneasiness in his heart were evident on his face. "Your Majesty, should we station guards here in the future?" Daiki asked. "No, just leave it as it is. This thing has been hidden here for hundreds of years without being discovered. If we start guarding it too conspicuously, we won''t have the strength to deal with anyone who might come across it!" Anos said calmly. "Understood, Your Majesty." "Let''s go. We should start heading back, and make sure we don''t disturb anyone on the island," Anos instructed. Originally, they had come here with high hopes, expecting to find treasure. Maybe a warehouse filled with gold. But now, it seemed this discovery was anything but a blessing. Support creative writers by reading their stories on Royal Road, not stolen versions. At least for the current state of their kingdom, it had no immediate benefit. On the contrary, it could bring great disaster. ---- Royal Palace After returning, Anos and the others never mentioned a word about their treasure-hunting experience. Two years slowly passed after that incident. During those two years, Anos continued his daily training and completed the tasks provided by the system. At the very least, during this time, he focused on mastering the three types of Haki, which were crucial in this world. Anos, in his room, looked at his now darkened hand. It was now hundreds of times harder than steel. Whether it was strength or speed, Anos had grown exponentially stronger compared to his former self. At this age, Anos had officially turned sixteen, standing around 1.9 meters tall. He was a strikingly handsome young man. Although he now wore aristocratic clothing daily, without the crown and with short hair, Anos looked particularly distinguished. In the past two years, the entire Kingdom of Tru has undergone significant changes. Perfume trading had swept across the pirate world. Despite the daunting price of 50,000 Beris per bottle, the product was still scarce in many places. This single product had already brought immense wealth to the Kingdom of Tru and drastically improved the living conditions of its residents. There was no longer the food and clothing shortage that plagued the kingdom just two years ago. Every face was now filled with smiles. The low production cost allowed them to create such expensive goods. The cost of making a bottle of perfume was less than 100 Beris, yet its daily production easily met the demands of the entire pirate world. However, relying solely on one perfume factory wasn''t enough to elevate the living standards of the entire kingdom. After the first year, perfume production became secondary, and the real primary business shifted to textile machines purchased through Anos'' system. Today, no other cloth in the pirate world could compare to the textiles produced in the Tru Kingdom. It wasn''t just because of the fabric, but more so because all the silk threads used for weaving were sourced from the system space. "Your Majesty, Your Majesty..." Anos was honing his Armament Haki when there was an urgent knock on his door. After glancing at his iron-black hand, Anos quickly retracted his Haki. Once the black aura disappeared, his hand returned to its normal appearance. "What''s going on? Why are you so anxious?" Anos opened the door and asked the maid waiting outside. "Your Majesty, I apologize for the intrusion. The King''s Guard just sent word that a shipment dispatched seven days ago was hijacked by pirates. Lady Suzu and Captian Daiki have sent me to ask for your guidance," the maid said anxiously. "Have they identified which pirates were responsible?" Anos asked calmly, his expression unchanged as though the matter didn''t concern him. "Your Majesty, they didn''t provide specific details, but Captain Daiki is waiting for you in the palace hall right now," the maid replied. "I see. I''ll head over now," Anos said with a slight smile. Upon seeing Anos smile, the maid, who had been nervous moments earlier, immediately relaxed, her admiration for the king evident. Anos didn''t waste any more words. After acknowledging her, he started making his way toward the palace hall. The value of the stolen goods equated to nearly a week''s income for the Kingdom of Tru, so there was no room for loss. Even though he maintained a calm demeanour, Anos was still intrigued by the situation. But considering the era they lived in, it wasn''t entirely surprising for goods to be stolen at sea. After all, in an era dominated by pirates, only the Marines posed a significant threat. For merchant ships, pirates were a constant menace. Upon reaching the hall, Anos saw Daiki pacing back and forth, his anxiety written on his face. "Your Majesty, you''re here..." Though Daiki had been quite agitated, upon seeing Anos, he immediately composed himself and respectfully greeted him. "Where''s Suzu? Isn''t she in charge of the merchant fleet? Why isn''t she here when something this serious has happened?" Anos asked calmly. Daiki lowered his head in obvious embarrassment, his clenched fists showing his frustration. "Your Majesty, Suzu has already ordered an investigation into which pirate group is responsible. She couldn''t come here right away, but she asked me to consult you for further guidance," Daiki explained. "Nothing is pressing going on in the kingdom now. It seems someone is specifically targeting us. Let Suzu join me we''ll head to sea to investigate," Anos said. "Your Majesty, allow me to handle this. The Kingdom of Tru cannot afford to be without you!" Daiki urged. "There''s no need for further discussion. Stay here and protect the kingdom. Your strength isn''t weak, so don''t let me down," Anos said with a smile. He wasn''t particularly upset about the cargo being stolen. It wasn''t worth his energy. However, the goods on an entire ship were worth several billion Beris, a substantial amount. It couldn''t be given up so easily. -- 11. Red-Haired Pirates ---- Anos watched as Daiki left, and anger began to rise within him. It wasn''t about the goods being stolen, but the attitude of the person responsible that left him deeply dissatisfied. After a short while, Daiki returned, dragging along a young woman who appeared to be about twenty years old. She kept her head down, not daring to speak. "Is this your attitude after what happened?" Anos snapped angrily. "I''m sorry, Your Majesty. This was all my fault. The goods were stolen, and I am willing to accept any punishment," Suzu said, falling to her knees, her head still bowed. "I entrusted you with managing the shipments because I had faith in you. When things go wrong, I should be the one to address them." "The goods have been stolen, and your first reaction should have been to track them down immediately, not hide behind others. If this is how you plan to act in the future, how will our kingdom survive?" Anos''s voice thundered across the room, and Suzu, still kneeling, couldn''t hold back her tears. Nearby, Daiki and several others stood in silence, too afraid to speak. This was the first time any of them had seen their king so furious. Suzu bowed fully to the ground, her tears splashing against the deck. Seeing this, Anos sighed, his anger cooling. He chose not to press the matter further. "Get up. Is everything ready?" Anos asked, directing the question to Suzu. "Yes, Your Majesty. Everything is prepared, and we are ready to set sail at any time," she replied quickly, rising to her feet. "Good. Let''s head out. Once we''re aboard, tell me everything in detail. I want to know exactly how the goods were stolen," Anos said, turning toward the ship. Suzu followed quietly, her head still lowered. The ship had already been fully prepared. Although the crew was smaller this time, around fifty soldiers from the Royal Guards accompanied them. As the sails unfurled, the once-stationary ship, Tempest, began to move slowly. The people standing at Nanniwa Port waved as the ship departed. Once on board, Anos stood on the deck, a sense of relief washing over him. For now, at least, he didn''t have to carry the heavy burden of the kingdom. "Your Majesty¡­" Suzu approached Anos hesitantly. "Tell me, what happened when the goods were stolen?" Anos asked. "According to reports from those who returned, the robbery was carried out by pirates. The problem occurred near the Calm belt. We encountered a group of pirates heading for the Grand Line, which led to the disaster." "Have you identified which pirate crew was responsible?" Anos asked calmly. "It was the Red-Haired Pirates¡­" Suzu answered. "Them!" Anos was both shocked and surprised. He hadn''t expected to cross paths with Shanks and his crew so soon. But after thinking about it, he realized they were pirates after all. Robbery was their trade what else could be expected? "Alright, there''s no need to dwell on it. In that case, it wouldn''t hurt to make a trip to the Grand Line," Anos said with a smile. "You''re not angry with me, Your Majesty?" Suzu asked, surprised. Stolen from Royal Road, this story should be reported if encountered on Amazon. "There''s no reason to be angry. Encounters with pirates are unavoidable, and the power of the Red-Haired Pirates is far beyond your control," Anos replied. "Thank you for your understanding, Your Majesty. But what should we do about the stolen goods?" Suzu asked hesitantly. Anos thought for a moment, a sly grin crossing his face. "Why bother chasing after them? We don''t even know where they are. In this vast ocean, finding a pirate crew is nearly impossible. Let''s keep moving and see what happens along the way." "Yes, Your Majesty," Suzu nodded. There''s a big mountain with rivers going up it from each blue and 1 that goes down to the grand line. So if you go up the mountain into the grand line and then through the calm belt you''d be on the other side of the red line and in the other blues. Or skip the mountain and go throw both parts of the calm belt. But the dangers of the sea were much greater than those on land. Anos stood on the deck, gazing at the rolling sea. The anticipation of adventure made the ocean appear even more beautiful to him. In the South Blue, they were in relatively safe waters. The Tempest was a massive, wooden ship, over a hundred meters in length. It was one of the largest ships sailing in this era. Powered by three large sails, it required at least fifty people to operate. Anos had modified Tempest with the help of System & seastone now it can be said that it''s one of the best ships for travelling the seas. In addition to living quarters, the ship was equipped with entertainment areas, including swimming pools. Even from a distance, the ship''s majesty was clear. The Tru Kingdom''s flag, a red crescent moon, flew proudly atop the mast, giving the vessel a distinct and luxurious appearance. But, in this vast ocean, their world was confined to this one ship. "Which direction should we go next, Your Majesty? Should we head to Calm Belt or explore elsewhere?" Suzu asked. "Did you bring a Log Pose?" Anos inquired. "A¡­ Log Pose?" Suzu clearly didn''t understand the term. Hearing this, Anos shook his head. How could someone in charge of shipping not know what a Log Pose was? "Never mind. When we dock, find a place to buy one. In the Four Seas, a regular compass works just fine, but in the Grand Line, only a Log Pose will guide you to the next island. These are things you need to be aware of. Don''t be clueless like today," Anos said, reclining back. "Yes, Your Majesty," Suzu replied, embarrassed by her ignorance. The wind pushed the ship gently, though at a slow pace. When the wind was calm, the ship barely moved through the water. Fortunately, this voyage wasn''t urgent. They couldn''t realistically recover the stolen goods anyway pirates never stayed in one place long enough to be tracked down. Finding them would be nothing short of a miracle. Still, luck might surprise them. Perhaps fate had something unexpected in the sea. "Make sure the crew is well-rested when necessary, and that they''re ready for action when needed. This voyage is long, and there''s little to do until we reach land. Make sure we replenish supplies and learn more when we dock," Anos said to Suzu, his tone relaxed. Anos''s ability to sense things from miles away allowed him to monitor the sea for potential dangers. For now, it seemed calm enough. "Understood, Your Majesty," Suzu replied. The days dragged on, and boredom crept over the crew. At first, the adventure had seemed exciting, but after several days at sea, seeing the same endless expanse of water, their excitement faded. Not a single island was in sight. Anos lay back in his deck chair, frustration building. The view was the same every day just sea and sky. Even the beauty of the ocean had lost its charm. Suzu, reclining on a nearby chair, felt the same way. She had little experience at sea, having primarily overseen shipments. This prolonged voyage was wearing her down. "Suzu, why do pirates enjoy life at sea so much? Don''t you find it boring?" Anos asked lazily. "Yes, Your Majesty. Life at sea is boring. The food isn''t great, and it''s hard to sleep," Suzu replied, equally listless. "What''s happening today? The weather suddenly got so hot and muggy. Did the navigator say anything?" Anos asked. "Your Majesty, the navigator said last night that we should reach Grand Line in a week or two. There shouldn''t be any unusual weather in the Four Seas, but¡­" Before she could finish, the sky darkened, and massive storm clouds rolled in from the distance. Along with the clouds came towering, thirty-meter-high waves. "Your Majesty, please head inside! It''s too dangerous out here!" Suzu shouted as soldiers, who had been lounging, snapped to attention. The waves ahead were enormous, and the crew suddenly realized their lives were at risk. The Tempest began to turn, trying to escape the oncoming waves. But Anos stood up and yelled, "What''s the navigator doing? If we turn now, we''ll all die! Tell him to face the waves head-on!" Anos was losing patience. This navigator was unqualified. How had they even made it this far? Following his command, the ship straightened, pointing directly at the approaching waves. The crew braced themselves. Days of boredom had suddenly turned into a fight for survival. Even Anos felt a surge of adrenaline as he focused on the massive wall of water ahead. There was no time to question why the waves had come or what had caused the storm. The dark clouds abosignalled only one thing heavy winds and torrential rain were imminent. "Tell the navigator: No matter what happens, we must keep the ship moving forward!" Anos ordered. For the people of the Tru Kingdom, this voyage was extraordinary. Most of them had never sailed before, and many couldn''t afford even a small boat. --- 12. New Navigator --- It was already an incredible feat to have sailed the ship to this point, let alone to face such enormous waves. "Everyone, get ready! Lower the sail quickly, and hold on to anything you can! Don''t get swept away by the waves!" Anos shouted once more. The soldiers behind him were prepared for the incoming waves, their expressions were focused and serious. The towering waves stood at least thirty meters high. Although their ship was relatively large, a wave of this size could easily shatter it with just one blow. In a panic, the crew scrambled up the mast to cut the ropes holding the sails. As the massive wave drew closer, the anxiety on their faces became more pronounced. Meanwhile, the navigator at the wheel, steering the rudder, was completely bewildered. It was his first time encountering such a monstrous wave, and he couldn''t understand why his king insisted on riding it head-on. Anos stood alone at the front of the deck, summoning the demon sword Muramasa from his system space. His eyes remained fixed on the approaching wave. He paid no attention to the anxious crew behind him and didn''t even hear Suzu''s frantic shouting. As the wave was about to crash into the Tempest, Anos bellowed, "Devouring Slash!" In an instant, faster than the eye could follow, the demon sword Muramasa was unsheathed. A massive arc of light slashed through the wave, cleaving it in two. The crew was left utterly dumbfounded, their jaws practically hitting the deck in disbelief. The wave had been split down the middle, and the force of the strike had carved a deep gap into the sea for miles ahead. The Tempest sailed through the parted wave unharmed, though the split waters began to surge back together, causing the ship to shake violently. Fortunately, after a few tense moments, the ship finally stabilized. Watching the huge wave slowly recede, the entire crew aboard the Tempest ship began to relax and collapsed onto the deck, one by one, with no intention of getting back up. Even the navigator at the wheel felt as if half of his life had drained awaat that moment. However, the soldiers who followed, after witnessing Anos''s powerful slash, had stars in their eyes, almost ready to burst out. This was the first time Anos had used a Devouring Slash, and even he didn''t expect to display such overwhelming power. As the sword cleaved through the waves, even he was taken aback. "Your Majesty, you''re incredible! I thought I was done for!" Suzu was so frightened that she knelt on the ground, the fear in her eyes all too apparent. "Alright, it''s fine," Anos said calmly. "But after today, you need to find me a better navigator. We can''t let someone third-rate guide us anymore. Who knows what disasters might happen in the future?" Anos sighed. The navigator aboard the Tempest was simply too inadequate. "Your Majesty, you''re truly amazing..." "Indeed, Your Majesty is extraordinary..." Listening to the praises of the soldiers behind him, Anos shouted helplessly, "Stop flattering me and make sure no one is injured! Check if everyone on the ship is accounted for!" "Yes, Your Majesty..." The synchronized voices of dozens of people echoed across the sea. "Suzu, where are we now?" Anos asked. "Your Majesty, the compass was broken in the impact, so I''m not exactly sure where we are," Suzu replied sheepishly, her voice tinged with embarrassment. Anos was speechless. He couldn''t even muster a response to this level of incompetence. It was beyond frustrating. "Are you telling me that we only had one compass on this ship?" Anos asked, disbelief clear in his tone. After hearing this, Suzu stared at Anos nervously and nodded, her fear palpable. Anos slapped his forehead in frustration. It was his first voyage at sea, and yet here he was, stuck in a situation like this. Without a compass, finding a place to dock in the vast ocean was nothing but a pipe dream. But their luck wasn''t running out just yet. It seemed as if fate had smiled upon them. As the two were fretting, a pirate ship suddenly appeared on the horizon, moving swiftly toward them. The genuine version of this novel can be found on another site. Support the author by reading it there. They didn''t even have to search it was coming straight to them! "Cheer up! Looks like our compass is coming to us!" Anos said with a sly grin on his face. Suzu scrambled to the railing, glancing in the direction Anos had indicated. The pirate ship, though small in the distance, was clearly making its way toward them, nearly lost on the horizon if one didn''t pay attention. "Your Majesty, they''re pirates!" Suzu said, worried. "It doesn''t matter. Now that we''ve finally come across a group, let''s make the most of it!" Anos said with excitement. He was visibly eager, and the soldiers behind him were equally fired up. How could they be afraid of pirates now? Everyone was ready for action. As the two ships closed in on each other, the pirate flag became visible a large skull emblazoned on the sail. The pirates were already preparing to fire. But they wouldn''t get the chance. As soon as they were close enough, Anos vanished. When he reappeared, he was already aboard the pirate ship. The ship had about forty or fifty pirates on board, and the captain, standing on the deck, was busy barking orders. "Men, it seems we''ve got some big business today! Get ready to fire!" "Cap¡­ Captain¡­" one of the younger crew members stammered, trembling as he spoke. He was pointing at Anos, now seated in the captain''s spot. The pirate captain turned impatiently, ready to curse, but froze when he saw Anos sitting in his place. "Who are you?" the pirate captain demanded. "I''m the captain of the ship you were just about to fire on. Shouldn''t we settle this now?" Anos replied with a calm smile. "How did you even get here?" the captain muttered to his subordinate. "Captain, he appeared out of nowhere. I think he might be a Devil Fruit user," the crewman whispered. Several pirates rushed to the deck with weapons drawn, surrounding Anos. Gaining some confidence from his men, the captain shouted arrogantly, "You''re just one man. We outnumber you. How do you expect to win?" "Look behind you," Anos said, still smiling. When the captain turned, he saw more than a dozen of Anos''s men soaring through the air toward the pirate ship. The confident smirk he wore moments ago evaporated, replaced by wide-eyed fear. "Captain, we can''t take them on!" one of the crew members whispered. "You don''t need to tell me, I can see that!" the pirate captain snapped. Turning back to Anos, who was still seated calmly in his spot, the pirate captain tried to flatter him. "You''re a pirate too, right?" "Excuse me?" Anos said, raising an eyebrow. At that moment, a dozen guards from the Tempest landed on the pirate ship''s deck. Seeing them, the pirates gave up, tossing their weapons to the ground. "What''s the name of your pirate crew?" Anos asked. "Our crew is the Barlow Pirates. I''m Barlow, We''re heading to the New World. There are 51 of us, and we have around 30 million beris worth of gold and silver. If you want, you can take it all just leave us some food," Barlow said, his voice trembling as he explained the situation in detail, clearly afraid of displeasing Anos. Anos stood up, a satisfied smile on his face. He had no particular grudge against pirates, but his crew needed the resources. "Well then, if you''ve been so forthcoming, what are you waiting for? Take the 30 million beris!" Anos ordered his guards. "Yes, Your Majesty," they replied, enthusiastically rushing to search the ship. Soon, they returned with a large chest brimming with jewellery. "Your Majesty, it''s all here. It''s worth exactly 30 million beris," a guard reported. "Good, at least this trip wasn''t a waste. Making money this way is quite fast!" Anos mused aloud. Meanwhile, Barlow watched, his heart sinking as his treasure was taken, though he dared not protest. "Who''s your navigator?" Anos asked. "Navigator? Uh¡­ I am," Barlow answered, bewildered. "You?!" Anos was surprised. "How did you survive the huge wave just now?" For a small ship like theirs, a 30-meter wave could easily send it to the ocean''s depths. Yet Barlow and his crew were unharmed, and the ship appeared intact. "The wave? Oh, that. We were far enough away to catch the surge, so we just rode it in. Honestly, I didn''t expect such massive waves in the Four Seas," Barlow explained with a laugh. "That''s not what I meant¡­" Anos replied, exasperated. Seeing Barlow''s natural navigation abilities, Anos grinned. "Your skills aren''t bad. How about becoming my navigator?" The other party''s navigation skills must surpass those of his navigator. What mattered most now was where they were headed next. Anos didn''t trust his navigator for the journey ahead. "Haha, don''t be ridiculous, I''m a pirate¡­" Barlow said with a smile. "This is King of the Tru Kingdom, his influence is immense. With His Majesty, you can travel anywhere in the world, unlike you, who lives on the edge every day," said a guard standing beside Anos. "His Majesty??" Barlow stared at Anos in disbelief. In his experience, most kings he had encountered were bloated and sluggish. But this king was young, strong, and exuded a commanding, handsome presence. It was hard for Barlow to believe. Barlow glanced at the Tempest with a reluctant expression. Was it his turn to make a choice? "What''s your aspiration?" Anos asked suddenly. After all, everyone in the pirate world chased dreams. The question caught Barlow off guard. A dream? He wasn''t sure he had one. "If I had to say, it would be to find my brother, who became a pirate," Barlow said after a moment''s thought. "That''s a noble goal, but with your crew''s strength, you won''t make it to the Grand Line. You''ll likely be killed halfway," Anos remarked with a smirk. "Huh? You might be right, but I still intend to follow my path!" Barlow replied with determination. "What''s so great about your tiny ship? Isn''t your goal to find your brother? Become my navigator. On this ship, you can go anywhere across the seas." Anos''s eyes shifted to Barlow''s crew as he spoke. Noticing this, Anos added with a smile, "If you''re worried about them, I can find suitable roles for them aboard." In truth, the people of the Tru Kingdom had limited sailing experience, and many aspects of ship management were beyond their expertise. For example, it had taken significant effort to remove just two sails, causing chaos among the crew. Now that Anos had a clearer understanding of his crew''s sailing abilities, he realized how ill-equipped they were for such responsibility. With more ships on the horizon, the Tru Kingdom wouldn''t remain as it was. Their navigation skills would need to improve significantly to meet the kingdom''s growing demands. It wasn''t every day that someone like Barlow came along. As long as he didn''t cause too much trouble, why not bring him aboard? Pirates did have their strengths. Their survival skills and ability to handle emergencies far surpassed those of Anos''s crew. "Captain, since His Majesty has offered, shouldn''t we seriously consider it?" one crew member suggested. "That''s right, Captain¡­" another chimed in. The crew began persuading Barlow, pointing out that if they joined the Tempest, they wouldn''t have to live as pirates anymore, nor constantly worry about survival. Truthfully, Barlow was beginning to waver. Anos was only seeking a more capable navigator. After all, the upcoming journey was full of uncertainty, and relying solely on his current navigator left him feeling uneasy. After the massive storm they had survived, it was clear that Barlow, despite his short stature, possessed impressive navigational skills. In the vast sea, without a qualified navigator, even a ship as large as the Tempest could capsize in a storm. --- 13. East Blue --- "We are still in the Four Seas. If we were to head to the Grand Line as I imagine, it would probably be colder by now," Anos said calmly. Seeing that Barlow was still hesitating, Anos continued to smile and asked, "Do you have any bounty on your head now?" Upon hearing this, Barlow instantly became excited and replied arrogantly, "The bounty on me is 300,000 Beris" "Doesn''t that make you just a small, walking money bag? With your strength, you probably won''t even make it to calm belt before someone captures you to claim your bounty," Anos remarked with a grin. "Yes, Captain, you forgot about the two bounty hunters we ran into a few days ago. We almost died!" Two crew members looked at Barlow with pleading expressions. It was rare for them to find such a good place to rest. Although they wanted to take risks, it seemed safer to stay here. Barlow understood. However, he also needed to raise his level and take responsibility for his crew. They weren''t inherently bad people, just unfortunate souls who eventually chose the pirate life. After thinking it over, Barlow respectfully stood before Anos, bowed deeply and said, "I, Barlow, Captain of the Barlow Pirates, from today on, I am willing to serve as your navigator, Your Majesty." It wasn''t surprising to see Barlow compromise. After all, faced with such a powerful figure, these pirates had little choice. Anos just wanted to find a navigator quickly and leave this ghostly place. As for the future, they''d deal with that later. He wasn''t worried about anything happening to them in the meantime. Despite the weakness of Barlow''s pirate crew, they excelled in other areas. Their cooking and navigation skills were superior to those on Anos''s ship. When they set sail again, Anos casually drew his sword and sliced through Barlow''s ship, splitting it into pieces that sank into the sea. Seeing this, the pirates, who were still cautious, became far more obedient. Aboard the Tempest, Anos lounged on a deck chair, enjoying his leisure. With Barlow and his crew joining, they no longer had to worry about their course. The voyage was smooth, at least for now. From South Blue to Calm Belt, they encountered no major obstacles. But when they reached the Grand Line/ Paradise, everyone was amazed. As Anos stood at the helm of the ship, the vast expanse of the ocean stretched before me, sparkling under the sun. This was Paradise, the first half of the Grand Line, a realm that promised adventure and danger in equal measure. Anos''s heart raced with anticipation and fear, he had heard countless tales about this place, where islands hid secrets and powerful pirates roamed. Stolen from its original source, this story is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings. "Your Majesty, we''re about to start sailing in paradise. Shall we head straight into the Grand Line, or do you have another destination in mind?" Barlow asked, rushing over. "Are you confident about crossing Grand Line/Paradise?" Anos asked seriously. This was no small matter. "Yes, Your Majesty. I believe so. The Paradise possesses highly volatile and unpredictable weather conditions, but aside from that, it''s just like navigating anywhere else," Barlow replied confidently. Hearing this, Anos relaxed a little. Although he wasn''t worried for his life, the ship was valuable, and his kingdom was far too poor to afford a new one. "Barlow, if you are that confident then, Let''s head to the East Blue first. I heard the Pirate King was executed in a town there. Since we''re so close, it wouldn''t hurt to take a look," Anos said. "Really? We should check it out!" Barlow agreed, clearly excited. Every pirate dreamed of becoming the Pirate King. Though they were no longer pirates, that desire lingered in their hearts. "What''s the plan? Make sure everyone stays safe and no one falls into the sea," Anos commanded seriously. "Don''t worry, Your Majesty," Barlow replied earnestly, feeling a deep sense of loyalty toward Anos. But Grand Line/Paradise posed a real challenge. Even Barlow, with all his experience, found it daunting. Still, he kept both hands firmly on the ship''s wheel, focusing intently to avoid any mistakes. Even with such trust placed in him, Barlow kept his eyes locked on the sea ahead. His small frame looked almost comical against the massive ship''s wheel, but his determination was unwavering. The other crew members, including the guards, stood ready for action. Anos felt a rush of excitement. The thrill of this adventure was simply exhilarating. As we sailed deeper into Paradise, the Tempest began to accelerate. Barlow shouted, "Quick, Storm incoming. Everyone, hold on to something so you don''t fall overboard!" The crew leapt into action, swiftly furling the sails as instructed. Everyone grabbed onto something sturdy as the ship sped toward the East Blue. Barlow skillfully manoeuvred the ship into the ocean currents his hands never left the wheel. Once inside the waters of Paradise, Barlow let out a sigh of relief. Even for a seasoned sailor, this moment felt like a battle against nature itself. As the ship approached the Storm, Barlow ran to Anos, panic in his eyes. "Your Majesty, our ship is too large. When we reach the epicentre of the storm, ocean currents caused by clashing magnetic waves and climates will converge, but I fear the pressure may be too much for the keel. It could break." Anos paused, then replied, "We''ve come this far. There''s no turning back. Just keep going. If the keel breaks, I''ll handle it." As they neared the Storm, the combined waters formed a towering column. For a wooden ship like the Tempest, the pressure could indeed be devastating. Anos stepped to the bow, placing his hand on the ship''s figurehead. His hand instantly turned black as he infused the ship''s keel with Haki, reinforcing its structure. "Keep moving forward, Barlow. I''ll take care of the rest," Anos shouted. Barlow nodded, his determination clear. He gripped the wheel tightly, eyes focused on the destination. As they sailed deep into the grand line & passed through the calm belt, the immense pressure made the Tempest creak, but thanks to Anos''s Haki, the ship held together. They survived the crossing and began Approaching the East Blue. Anos, feeling the ship steady, relaxed and retracted his Haki, allowing the keel to return to normal. "Your Majesty, that was incredible!" Suzu exclaimed, tears of relief in her eyes. The rest of the crew looked equally relieved and overjoyed. "Boys, there''s a ship ahead! Prepare to board!" someone shouted. They had barely made it into the East Blue before encountering a group of over a dozen pirate ships, all flying the same flag. "Your Majesty, they''re pirates..." Suzu said, looking at the fleet ahead. The shouts of the pirates made their intentions clear they were coming to loot. "Prepare for battle," one of the guards ordered as the ship''s cannons were aimed at the approaching fleet. "Don''t fire. We can''t afford to damage our ship," Anos said calmly. Everyone fell silent. Barlow and his crew, who had joined just some days ago, were still adjusting to Anos''s mindset. How could he be so calm, facing a fleet of pirates? "I understand, Your Majesty. I''ll go and capture their ships," one of the guards said respectfully. They had learned that Anos never let an opportunity to make money slip by. The pirate ships ahead could be worth hundreds of millions of Beris, far more valuable than the Barlow Pirates'' old ship. The guards smiled knowingly. Raiding pirates for their loot was always a profitable venture, and with a powerful crew behind them, they felt unstoppable. "Be careful. Don''t damage the ships, and leave their navigators to me. We''re in desperate need of skilled sailors," Anos said with a devious smile. --- 14. Fighting The Pirates --- Before they could act, the pirate ships had already begun moving closer at a rapid pace. It seemed the pirates had the same idea as them, they didn''t want to destroy the ship by shooting it to pieces, as that would diminish its value. The pirates took advantage of their numbers, and many were already on the deck, shaking their heads and shouting. As the distance closed, dozens of guards immediately jumped into the air, using Geppo (Moonwalk) to fly quickly toward the pirates. However, instead of panicking, the pirates calmly began preparing their cannons to attack. Anos observed all of this. These pirates were clearly not like the Barlow Pirates he had encountered before. They appeared to be well-trained and battle-hardened. On the largest ship, a man dressed in a black robe and a black hat, reminiscent of a Western cowboy, stood quietly at the bow. He calmly watched the guards approaching from the air. Anos sensed that this individual might not be as simple as he appeared. His calm expression didn''t seem to stem from the size of his crew. "Have you identified all the pirates with bounties that I asked you to find earlier?" Anos asked Suzu beside him. "We have, Your Majesty. The group across from us is known as the Devil Pirates, and their captain is Camolong. He''s supposed to be on the Grand Line. I''m not sure why he''s here," Suzu reported. "Devil Pirates? What''s the bounty on them?" Anos inquired. "Your Majesty, Camolong''s bounty is..." Suzu started, scanning the bounty posters in her hand. After a moment, she found it. "The bounty is 50 million Beris!" Suzu could hardly believe it. In this era of pirates, a bounty of 50 million Beris was considered extremely high. It wasn''t like in the past when pirates with bounties exceeding 100 million were common. Now, even pirates with bounties over 10 million were considered major threats. Anos looked ahead with interest. He wasn''t in a rush to take action, he had no concerns about his guards being easily subdued. If Camolong had a bounty of 50 million, it was almost certain that he was a Devil Fruit user. But why would someone from the Grand Line show up here? With questions in mind, Anos maintained his calm. The soldiers using Geppo continued their advance, unfazed by the projectiles heading their way. "Captain, their techniques resemble those of the Marine. Could they be connected to the Marines?" asked a vulgar-looking man with long hair, stepping out from behind Camolong and respectfully addressing him. "Let''s wait and see. They don''t seem like Marines, but they''re probably connected to them. Just a bunch of pests. Nothing to worry about," Camolong replied with a dismissive smile. Camolong''s long-haired crewmate grinned sinisterly, eyeing the approaching guards with malicious intent. Meanwhile, Anos used his observation skills to sense something unusual on the pirate ship a strong energy presence. It was difficult to determine Camolong''s exact intentions or why he had come to the East Blue. This story is posted elsewhere by the author. Help them out by reading the authentic version. "You stay on the ship. I''ll go over and take a look," Anos said, smiling as he disappeared from the deck of the Tempest. In an instant, Anos was speeding across the water, heading straight for Camolong''s ship. But just as he arrived on the pirate ship, a massive blade came slashing at him. Fortunately, Anos reacted quickly, leaping back twice to avoid Camolong''s first strike. "Heh, didn''t expect someone this strong?" Camolong smirked as he stared at Anos, gripping his large sword tightly. From the power of that strike, Anos estimated that Camolong was at least as strong as a Vice Admiral. "Is it supposed to be an honour to be called strong by a pirate? A 50 million Beris bounty is quite a bit of money. I wonder, would you be willing to follow me to the Marine Headquarters?" Anos asked with a grin. "Haha! You''re ridiculous. If you want to take me to Marine Headquarters, you''ll have to show me your strength first. If you can prove yourself, then sure, I''ll go with you!" Camolong sneered, showing no signs of worry. "Let''s see then!" Anos responded. The two locked eyes, each sizing the other up. The rest of the pirate crew watched the scene unfold from hidden positions, curious about the upcoming battle. Camolong remained calm, seemingly confident in his victory. "For years, no one has dared to challenge me. You''re the first. I''ve been chasing power on these seas, so show me what you''ve got!" Camolong said with a sinister grin. As soon as he finished speaking, his massive blade came crashing down again. The force of the attack tore a long gash through the deck. Though Anos dodged the attack, he was slightly distressed. He felt the ship should be his, and seeing it damaged like this annoyed him. Despite Camolong''s strength, Anos did not draw the demon sword Muramasa. Instead, he decided to rely on his fists and kicks to test the pirate''s true power. He charged forward, using his Rokushiki. As he approached, Anos shouted, "Finger Pistol!" His finger shot toward Camolong, aiming straight for his chest. Sensing the danger, Camolong retreated, parrying the attack with his blade. The basic Finger Pistol technique, though powerful, was meant more as a probing strike. As his first attack failed, Anos quickly pulled back. Camolong responded by launching a barrage of small spikes from his body. Anos narrowly avoided being pierced by the spikes. The spikes weren''t ordinary they carried a hallucinogenic effect. As they grazed Anos, he felt his energy drain, and his vision blurred. "Hahaha! You knew my bounty, but you didn''t research who I am? I''m a Stinger Fruit user from the Paramecia class. The spikes I shoot out also cause hallucinations!" Camolong laughed. ''Is he truly that foolish, or just blinded by arrogance?'' Anos wondered, his eyes narrowing as his opponent recklessly unveiled his abilities in the heat of battle. This battle highlighted his lack of experience. Although he had immense power, his combat skills needed refining. Realizing his mistake, Anos summoned every ounce of his remaining strength and unsheathed Muramasa. Instantly, a fierce, cutting aura surged across the sea, commanding the very air to tremble in its wake. "Slash!" In a blink, Anos disappeared, leaving no trace behind. A powerful slash followed, nearly splitting the entire ship in half. But Anos wasn''t aiming to kill Camolong. He knew that as a Devil Fruit user, Camolong wouldn''t go down with just one hit. Instead, Anos chose to destroy the ship, knowing Camolong would be forced to retreat to avoid falling into the sea. As Anos landed back in the water, the spikes on his body dissolved in the seawater. Slowly, he swam back to the surface. Luckily, Anos hadn''t eaten a Devil Fruit, or he wouldn''t have made it. Lying on the debris of the destroyed ship, Anos panted heavily, watching as pirates floundered in the water. Camolong stood on another ship, glaring at Anos with anger. He hadn''t expected such a powerful attack. Meanwhile, the guards who had been advancing earlier had all retreated, sensing there was no point in continuing. There were too many pirates to engage in a direct confrontation, and Camolong''s full strength remained unknown. Anos, now lying on a plank, looked at Camolong with a smile. Back on the Tempest, Anos gave no further orders to pursue the fight. Suzu, standing beside him, looked concerned for her king. "Prepare to leave," Anos ordered calmly. "Yes, Your Majesty..." Suzu replied, signalling to Barlow to set sail. Barlow, standing at the bow, turned and shouted, "Raise the sails! Set course!" As the crew hurried to prepare, the pirates on Camolong''s side refrained from attacking again. Camolong now understood that Anos still had plenty of strength left, despite the damage dealt to him. "Your Majesty, are you alright?" Suzu asked worriedly. As the distance between them and the pirates increased, Anos finally collapsed on the deck, unconscious. Though the seawater had lessened the effects of Camolong''s attack, the toxins were still in his body. Despite the retreat, Suzu and the crew were relieved the pirates hadn''t pursued them. What they didn''t know was that Camolong''s crew wasn''t interested in the minor treasures on the Tempest. Camolong was more concerned with something hidden beneath the waters. --- 15. Logue Town ---- Anos''s sudden fainting caused everyone on the ship to panic, and Suzu froze in place, too scared to move. The two sides had only been fighting for a short time, but Anos had already been seriously injured. Others began to sigh, acknowledging the strength of Camolong''s forces as truly formidable. When Anos regained consciousness, he was almost fully recovered. After all, no matter the situation, he would only ever be severely injured never fatally. Because of¡­ Anos slowly opened his eyes, gazing at the clear blue sky and the white clouds above, as well as the massive ships sailing with the wind over the sea. "I was careless¡­" he muttered to himself. He remained lying down, his thoughts suddenly racing. Indeed, this time, he had been careless. Such a simple situation had left him covered in scars, all in the name of gaining experience. But after this incident, Anos realized one thing: next time, if he has the money, he''ll buy himself combat experience. At least then, he wouldn''t be caught off guard but the problem is it''s very expensive to buy anything useful for his combat style. He needs at least 1 Billion Beris to increase his strength in a short time. This might happen again, or perhaps other unforeseen circumstances would arise due to his carelessness. For now, the real issue is that he has no funds, and the tens of millions of Beris left on the ship are useless to the system except for purchasing some food. "Your Majesty, you''re finally awake¡­" Suzu, who had been sitting next to Anos''s reclining chair, whispered as she cried. Since Anos had fainted, Suzu had stayed by his side almost constantly, afraid to even blink for fear that something might happen to her King. She knew that if anything did happen, she would not be allowed to return to the kingdom. She''d be torn to pieces before that happened. "What''s wrong? How long have I been unconscious?" Anos asked with a faint smile. "Your Majesty, you''ve been asleep for more than 4 days this time. Suzu was scared to death!" Seeing Suzu crying, Anos smiled gently and comforted her. "Don''t worry, I''m fine." "Fine? After you passed out, your entire body started turning green. Even the ship''s doctor thought you were beyond saving!" Suzu wailed, her tears falling even more freely. The other guards standing behind her looked equally grim, their faces filled with guilt and concern for their King. "I''m fine, don''t worry," Anos reassured them as he sat up. He glanced around and asked Suzu, "Where are we now?" "Ah? Let me ask!" Suzu quickly ran off toward Barlow. Watching her dash off, Anos closed his eyes in exasperation. He couldn''t believe he had entrusted such an important responsibility to someone like her in the first place. Suzu returned after asking Barlow and reported, "Your Majesty, we are nearing Loguetown now!" "Good, I understand." At that moment, Anos began to wonder why Camolong had allowed them to pass. Why would such a powerful individual remain in East Blue or is he here for something like treasure? When the crew saw that Anos had woken up, the former members of the Barlow Pirates began to act freely, celebrating wildly alongside the guards loyal to Anos. They drank and shouted, enjoying their brief freedom. Even though they weren''t pirates, Anos didn''t stop them. After all, it was a good way to alleviate the boredom of life aboard the ship. This narrative has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road. If you see it on Amazon, please report it. The only serious person onboard was Barlow, the ship''s navigator, who was responsible for guiding the ship''s course. While the ship could sail with the wind, even a minor miscalculation could result in a vast deviation from their destination. The real challenge was that there was no clear navigation, and missing their mark could mean ending up somewhere completely unexpected. Nearly eight hours later, Suzu called from the deck, "We''re here!" Anos, still lying on his chair, opened his eyes slightly. The island ahead came into view. Those who had been drinking quickly sobered up. The port of Loguetown was packed with ships of all kinds merchant vessels and pirate ships alike lined up side by side. Pirate flags could be spotted from a distance. Though East Blue had fewer pirates compared to the other seas, Loguetown served as their final supply station before entering the Grand Line. The number of pirates on the island was staggering, with the era of pirates already in full swing. Pirates in the four seas now outnumbered the Marine. Though pirates often avoided conflict in Loguetown, knowing it was a Marine base, some exceptions inevitably arose. "Your Majesty, may I explore a bit after we dock?" Suzu asked timidly. "Sure, but don''t wander too far. With so many pirates around, someone like you, without any combat skills, might be kidnapped by any random crew." Anos''s words made Suzu nervous again, though she knew he was right. Seeing all the pirate ships was a clear reminder of the dangers in Loguetown. "Why don''t you come with me¡­" Suzu suggested softly. "Tell the others to split up some should stay on the ship while the rest go ashore to gather supplies," Anos ordered. "Understood, Your Majesty." Though many of them didn''t care much about the Pirate King, they were curious to see the place where he had been executed. After all, someone who had led an entire generation of pirates deserved some recognition, even if it meant visiting a dangerous place like this. Loguetown itself wasn''t particularly large just a small island with a naval base. But what stood out was the town''s lax security, at least for now. Despite the sheer number of pirate ships at the docks, the Marines had done nothing, further demonstrating how loose security was in Loguetown. When the nearly 100-meter-long ship docked at the port, it immediately drew a crowd. Most of the onlookers were pirates. Their hungry gazes said everything about their desire for this massive ship. The other pirate vessels docked nearby were much smaller, barely a dozen meters long, and could easily be overturned by strong winds. Anos''s enormous ship was one of the largest vessels Loguetown had ever seen. The pirates at the port eyed the ship with envy and ambition. "Captain, this ship looks impressive. It''s not a pirate ship should we take it for ourselves?" a tall, burly man standing at the port said to his captain. "Not yet. Let''s wait until they leave and then make our move. We don''t want to draw the Marine''s attention." The captain, a man with a cunning smile, warned his companion. Many of the pirates had the same idea. After all, which pirate would pass up such a prime target? As Anos''s ship docked and the gangplank was lowered, he slowly descended with his entourage, unfazed by the many pirates gathered at the port. "Brother, your ship looks good. Care to share it with us?" A scruffy-looking man, brandishing a long knife, approached Anos as he stepped off the ship. Anos glanced at his guard captain and asked, "Do they all share this sentiment?" The guard captain, already on alert, gave the surrounding pirates a cold stare. "Anyone else with the same idea, step forward. We can discuss the distribution." The crowd of pirates erupted in laughter at this challenge. "Seems like everyone here is interested in your ship. It''s too flashy for such low-key behaviour. Why not let the veterans take it off your hands?" someone in the crowd jeered, causing even more laughter. Anos turned to his captain, Haruya. "Are they all planning to come forward?" "Yes, Your Majesty, it seems so," Haruya replied with a grin. A sinister smile crept across Anos''s face. He knew this was the perfect opportunity. "Stay here and deal with them. Some of those pirate ships look valuable auction them off once we''ve stripped their sails. That''ll save us time looking for a market," Anos said calmly. Haruya, well aware of Anos''s strategy, understood immediately. With that, Anos moved forward with Suzu trailing behind, while his guards remained at the port. Before long, the sounds of combat erupted behind them. Though the pirates vastly outnumbered Anos''s crew, their combat skills were no match for his elite force. "Your Majesty, this is a Marine base. Are we really okay with this?" Suzu asked nervously. "What''s the issue? We''re not pirates, nor are we the Marine. It''s merely a conflict between a Kingdom and pirates. The Marines won''t intervene; they would also want this," Anos replied with a smile. "Oh, I see¡­" Suzu finally relaxed. What Anos couldn''t foresee was that this skirmish with the pirates would soon draw the attention of the Marine Headquarters. But for now, that didn''t concern him. What mattered most was the money. Robbing pirates was far faster than doing legitimate business, and there were plenty of pirates out there some with fortunes rivalling entire Kingdoms. Besides, this method wouldn''t just earn him the people''s love, it wouldn''t violate anyone''s moral standards either. At worst, he was a pirate hunter. Catching a few pirates for fun didn''t sound bad at all. The streets of Logue Town weren''t particularly wide, but the commerce on both sides was thriving. Pirates were indeed despicable in many ways, but in a place like Logue Town, which had a naval garrison, they always made sure to pay their dues, no matter what they did. "You go ahead and accompany the others to purchase the supplies needed for the ship. There''s little need to worry about safety here. I''ll head to the centre of Logue Town and take a look around. We''ll meet back on the ship afterwards," Anos said, looking at Suzu. "But Your Majesty, didn''t you mention there are many pirates here?" Suzu asked. "There''s no need to worry now. Haruya is already cleaning up the pirates at the port. Those remaining in Logue Town will naturally hear about it and steer clear, so don''t worry too much over it." "Alright¡­" Suzu understood what Anos meant he wanted to be rid of them so he could explore elsewhere. Without asking further questions, she followed Barlow and headed in another direction. ---- 16. The Revolutionary Army --- Anos stood there, watching Suzu and his subordinates walk farther and farther away, his face calm and composed. "You have followed me all this way. Shouldn''t you show yourself?" Anos said, still looking in the direction where Suzu and his group had gone. A voice suddenly broke the silence. He likely had no idea who he was speaking to, but he still said it. From the shadows of a nearby building, not long after Anos had spoken, a man emerged. He was cloaked, with a tattoo resembling the sole of a shoe etched on his face. The man had a resolute expression that radiated confidence and authority. His powerful presence was something even Anos could sense. "You''re quite the young King. How about we find a place to talk?" the stranger suggested. Anos smiled but remained silent. He neither agreed nor objected. They walked side by side, neither saying a word. Anos knew very well the significance of the man walking beside him, his identity, and his status. Soon, they reached the beach. The sound of waves crashing against the rocks echoed around them as they stood by the shore. "King of the Tru Kingdom, why have you come to the East Blue?" the man asked, his voice calm and expressionless. Anos smiled and responded with a question of his own. "Hasn''t the leader of the Revolutionary Army also come here? I''m not sure if our purposes align, but I''m just here to enjoy. What about you? What are your plans?" The man''s expression froze for a moment, then turned neutral. He seemed curious and cautious as he asked, "You know who I am?" "Of course, I know. I know far more than you think. I didn''t expect to see you here, of all places," Anos replied, maintaining his composure. The man standing before him was none other than Monkey D. Dragon, the leader of the Revolutionary Army. Anos had recognized him the moment he saw the tribal tattoo on his face. After all, Dragon was the only man in the world with such a distinctive mark. Anos hadn''t expected to meet Dragon, the leader of the revolutionary army, in a small place like Loguetown. It was surprising, to say the least. However, Anos could also tell that Dragon was not yet as formidable as he would be in the future. Even so, Dragon''s current strength was nothing to be underestimated. Dragon stared out at the sea, appearing unfazed by the young man standing beside him. For most of the world, the Revolutionary Army was barely known, let alone its leader. Yet, the young man before him had not only recognized him but also knew his identity. "What do you think of the Revolutionary Army, King of Tru?" Dragon asked his tone even. "Most organizations with lofty ideals only exist because they exploit the suffering of others," Anos replied, offering a critique based on his knowledge of the future. His words were blunt but true. The Revolutionary Army operated in secrecy, unknown to many, but to someone like Anos, who possessed foresight, these things were nothing new. In many cases, the Revolutionary Army would use any resource available, with little regard for the consequences. "Do you think it''s wise to speak like this in front of me?" Dragon asked calmly. "The Revolutionary Army has a mission. The world is overrun by pirates, and the Marine''s are powerless to stop them. I aim to create a world where everyone can live without conflict." This story has been taken without authorization. Report any sightings. Dragon spoke passionately, trying to sway Anos with his vision. "How long has it been since you visited my kingdom? Tru is not what you think it is. I do not quarrel with the Revolutionary Army, but I have no interest in joining it either. You''ve followed me from Reverse Mountain. Was it just to have this conversation?" Anos asked with a hint of amusement. "If possible, I hope your kingdom could become a stronghold for the Revolutionary Army," Dragon said. Anos chuckled, though he found the suggestion ridiculous. Dragon''s ideas seemed naive to him. "Mr. Dragon, I suggest you focus on building your power in the East Blue and the North Blue. The South Blue is a barren land, it''s not worth your time," Anos said flatly, rejecting the proposal without hesitation. Dragon wasn''t offended. Instead, he stared at the young man before him with intrigue. At fifteen or sixteen, Anos already showed extraordinary potential. If they could recruit him in the future, he would be a valuable ally. Anos, however, had no desire to continue the conversation. With one last look at Dragon, he turned and walked away. After Anos disappeared around the corner, Dragon remained standing there, now joined by several others. "Why did you let him go?" one of them asked. The speaker had an enormous head disproportionate to his body, making it hard to call him human at all. Had Anos still been there, he would have immediately recognized the person as Emporio Ivankov, "Queen" of the Kamabakka Kingdom and a Devil Fruit user whose strength was formidable. The others surrounding Dragon were all prominent figures within the Revolutionary Army, destined to become legends in their own right. They had also noticed Anos and, after a bit of investigation, learned he was the King of the Kingdom of Tru in the South Blue. However, they were all astonished by the young king''s strength. Dragon didn''t answer Ivankov''s question immediately. He stood in silence, staring at the rough sea. After a while, he calmly said, "We couldn''t stop him." His words left the others shocked. Dragon''s strength was already renowned across the pirate world. How could a boy barely in his teens escape him? At fifteen or sixteen, Anos was still a young man, but to them, he seemed no more than a child. Even with some strength, how powerful could he be? As Anos walked through the streets of Loguetown, his mind wandered back to Dragon''s tattoo. Despite their brief conversation, he could feel the immense aura Dragon radiated. Loguetown was unusually quiet. With most of the town''s inhabitants drawn to the commotion at the harbour, the streets were nearly deserted. Anos found himself at the execution platform, where Gol D. Roger, the Pirate King, had been executed. The high platform stood only five or six meters tall, with a spiral staircase leading to the top. As he stood in the square, looking at the platform, it was as though he could see the moments before Roger''s death. The sky was bright, but for Anos, it felt as though a cold wind blew through the square. Loguetown called the "Town of the Beginning and the End," was where Roger''s life had begun and ended. His legendary life had left an indelible mark on the world. As Anos stood there, two Marines on a rooftop nearby were watching him closely. "Captain Kakuku, King of Tru has caused quite a stir here. Should we intervene?" one of the Marines asked. "Yulu, how many times have I told you? We mind our own business. Pirates have been flooding Loguetown for years. We don''t have the manpower to deal with them, so if someone else steps up to help, let them," Kakuku replied, leaning against the railing. Despite his nonchalant attitude, he was curious about Anos. A king from the South Blue, here to visit the execution platform of the Pirate King? It was an unusual sight. "Captain, do you think the King of Tru has ulterior motives? Should we investigate?" Yulu asked, eager to probe deeper. "If you want to, go ahead. But I''m taking the chance to rest. We rarely get help dealing with these pirates," Kakuku said, dismissing the idea with a wave of his hand. Meanwhile, at the harbour, chaos reigned as guards rounded up pirates with bounties, tying them up and attaching wanted posters to their bodies. Pirates lay strewn across the ground, their defeat clear for all to see. Staying here proved convenient. By the end, the guards had split into several teams, with many of the remaining crew members also joining in. Some headed directly to the pirate ships to search. They truly resembled pirates, eagerly snatching up anything valuable they found. With a dozen pirate ships, the amount of gold, silver, and jewels collected was significant. Moreover, the combined bounty of those captured on the ground totalled tens of millions. By following Anos, this group not only gained strength but, more importantly, valuable combat experience. There wasn''t much to see in Loguetown. It seemed rather ordinary now. Though many things were for sale, most of the goods were basic supplies for life at sea. This town had largely developed thanks to pirates. The luxurious architecture surrounding the square made that clear. After lingering in the square for about half an hour, Anos began to move. He had seen enough and Anos felt like he had spoken to the Pirate King, Roger In the past, this square would have been crowded, but now it stood empty. Most of the people were gathered at the port. They quietly watched the Tempest and observed everything the guards were doing aboard. Some cheered, while others appeared sorrowful. After the Thousand-Handed Pirates were finally captured, with their bounties hanging over their heads, no one else dared to speak, much less challenge them again. At least fifty or sixty captives were bound together and escorted by five or six guards as they marched forward. The curious locals from Loguetown, eager to witness the spectacle, followed closely behind. Since the execution of Pirate King Roger, Loguetown had attracted many pirates, but there had never been a large-scale battle like this. --- 17. Roya Kingdom ---- The guards were doing their duties, and the Tru Kingdom now resembled a real pirate stronghold. As for Anos, after leaving the execution platform in Central Square, he began touring all of Logue town. It was indeed a prosperous place. Compared to his own Kingdom, even the Royal City was not as thriving. The advantages were obvious, but so were the drawbacks. After all, Logue town was quite small and didn''t offer much to explore. As Anos wandered, he suddenly remembered that the original protagonist had been in the East Blue. If he went to see him now, it should be fine. Since they had already come this far, it wouldn''t take much effort to get there. But how could things go so smoothly? They had only been away from their Kingdom for seven days. Just as Anos considered visiting the protagonist, the sound of a "purururu¡­" came from his coat. When he reached into his pocket, he pulled out something resembling a snail with a crown on its head. This was Anos''s personal Den Den Mushi. Cultivated alongside him from birth, the snail-like creature could communicate over long distances, functioning much like a mobile phone. Anos pressed a small bump on the snail''s shell, and with a "hiccup," a voice came through the line. "Your Majesty? Is that you, Your Majesty? It''s me, Daiki, the captain of the Royal guards¡­" Daiki''s voice sounded worried, and the Den Den Mushi imitated his concerned expression. Anos, still calm, responded, "It''s me, Daiki. What''s going on?" "Your Majesty, I have urgent news to report¡­" "Calm down," Anos replied with a frown. "You''re the captain of the Royal Guard. Can you not panic every time something happens?" Though he tried to maintain his calm tone, Anos had already sensed that something serious had occurred in the kingdom, though he wasn''t sure what. Daiki took a deep breath, and the Den Den Mushi mimicked the action. "Your Majesty, the Roya Kingdom has launched an attack on the Tru Kingdom, and they''ve enlisted the help of pirates. We''re struggling to defend ourselves." "Have you investigated why the Roya Kingdom attacked?" "Yes, Your Majesty. Our kingdom''s rapid growth over the past two years has caused tension, and now the Roya Kingdom seeks to suppress us. Moreover, the pirates they''ve hired include several Devil Fruit users. They''ve begun attacking indiscriminately across our land." Daiki was trying to stay composed, but his voice betrayed his anxiety. "How far have they advanced?" "The Roya Kingdom is still being held at the border by our army, but the pirates are different. They''ve already caused significant damage in multiple areas." Anos listened carefully and then, with forced composure, said, "Delay them for a few more days." "Understood, Your Majesty." After hanging up, Anos''s eyes filled with anger, his calm fa?ade completely gone. He stood there, his entire body shaking with rage. He pulled out another Den Den Mushi, and when the line connected, he said coldly, "Get everyone on the ship. We''re leaving immediately." Without waiting for a response, he ended the call and turned toward the port. By now, the guards had already started escorting captured pirates to the naval base. Upon receiving Anos''s orders, they realized something was wrong, leaving the prisoners and heading straight for the ship. Unauthorized usage: this narrative is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings. When Anos arrived at the port, a large crowd had gathered. Pirates were mingling with the locals of Logue town, all there to witness the spectacle. Without delay, Anos boarded the ship. The crew, including Suzu, hurriedly followed suit. Though they didn''t know what had happened, the urgency in Anos''s actions told them something serious was unfolding. "What''s going on, Your Majesty?" Suzu asked anxiously. "The Kingdom of Tru was attacked just two days after I left!" Anos responded, his voice filled with fury. His hands gripped the railing so tightly that the wood splintered beneath his fingers. Realizing the gravity of the situation, Suzu immediately rushed to Barlow and shouted, "Barlow! Set sail now!" The crew, though confused, followed orders. They didn''t know if they were fleeing from a greater pirate threat or something else entirely, but there was no time for hesitation. They hadn''t even had a chance to explore Logue town properly before they were forced to leave in such a rush. If they had known, perhaps they wouldn''t have come this way at all. As the sails unfurled, the Tempest began to pull away from the port, disappearing into the horizon as onlookers watched in confusion. The pirates they had captured earlier were handed over to the naval base, and none escaped. What was meant to be a smooth visit to Logue town had turned into a chaotic departure. Anos, preoccupied with the crisis at hand, ordered the ship to speed up and head for South Blue. Upon their return, they were surprised to find that Camolong and his crew were still lingering around, dragging something massive between their ships. Several pirate vessels were on guard, keeping a close watch on the surroundings, ready to fend off any interference. Anos had no desire to fight, but it wasn''t up to him now. The Devil Pirates weren''t going to let them pass without a challenge. As the Tempest approached, the Devil Pirates attacked with their cannons thundering toward the ship. Anos guards scrambled to defend the ship, either intercepting cannonballs mid-air or kicking them away. As they drew closer, Anos saw Camolong standing on his ship. His eyes gleamed with anger as he shouted, "Camolong, I''m not in the mood for games today. I don''t care what you''re doing, but I need to cross Reverse Mountain now. If you try to stop me, I won''t hold back!" "Hah, hah, hah¡­ I didn''t expect you to show up here. Now that we''ve got what we came for, do you think we''ll just let you go?" Camolong sneered. Before he could finish, Anos, already in a foul mood, unsheathed the demon sword Muramasa, its dark energy pulsing with malevolent power. Even Camolong, though experienced, was taken aback by the intensity of the sword''s aura. For a boy of fifteen or sixteen to wield such power was truly remarkable. "I see you''ve got quite the sword there. It''s almost a shame to take it from you," Camolong said with a sinister smile. With unwavering determination, Anos activated his Armament Haki, his body transforming into what looked like black steel. Camolong, now truly fearful, braced himself for the fight. Anos leapt onto Camolong''s ship, and in an instant, most of the Devil Pirates collapsed, overwhelmed by his Conqueror''s Haki. "Conqueror''s Haki!" Camolong gasped, now filled with regret for challenging Anos. If a person can use their Haki to such an extent, what can a pirate like him do in this situation? Camolong already had some regrets, but now he could only fight for his life. It''s unclear how many members remain in the Demon Pirates, but now only about a dozen can still stand or move. However, when these dozen faced the King''s guards, almost all were powerless to resist. "Camolong, you hurt me due to my carelessness before. Now I want to see, what else can you do?" Anos asked coldly. On the vast blue sea, although there was no wind, Camolong felt as though he had fallen into an ice cellar. "Don''t think that just having Haki makes you invincible. What matters is your ability!" Camolong retorted. "Then watch closely. Since our previous battle isn''t finished, I don''t mind wasting more time to give you a proper lesson!" Anos said, his eyes turning red, resembling those of a demon. Meanwhile, aboard the Tempest, Suzu urgently gave orders: "What are you standing around for? His Majesty is fighting personally! Bring up the fruits prepared in the cabin!" There were no guards on the ship at that moment. They didn''t understand why it was so difficult to simply bring out the fruits for the offering. Suzu didn''t explain much, but since the order had been given, someone would surely follow through. This time, Anos showed no mercy, continuously using his Observation Haki to track Camolong''s every move. Camolong intended to use his long sword to mask his Devil Fruit powers, hoping to land a fatal strike like before. But this time, things would not go as planned. As Anos approached, he held Muramasa across his chest. Gathering his strength, he softly commanded, "Zero Edge" As soon as the words left his mouth, a horizontal slash cut through the air. Despite Camolong''s caution, a large portion of his hat''s brim was sliced off. "Thousand Pine Needles!" In an instant, Camolong unleashed his Devil Fruit ability. Thousands of silver needles shot from his palm, each piercing through the hull with incredible force. But despite this, Anos effortlessly dodged every single attack. "We don''t need to keep watching. His Majesty''s strength is beyond imagination, Camolong is indeed powerful and terrifying, mastering his Devil Fruit so well. But for now, focus on your duties." "The Devil Pirates have been here for days, so they must have collected significant treasure. His Majesty wants to finish quickly and transport everything to the Tempest. We''ll deal with the rest once we return¡­" No one on the pirate ships was conscious; all had been knocked out. Since the Captain couldn''t join the King''s battle, he decided it was better to use the time to plunder everything they could. There were over a dozen pirate ships to search, which would take time. But when the first pirate ship was searched, someone shouted in surprise. "Captain Haruya! There''s a ton of treasure here!" a guard yelled excitedly. Haruya quickly rushed down with a few men, and the sight before them left them speechless. Piles of gold and silver filled the cabin, and their eyes gleamed with excitement. There was at least a billion beris worth of treasure on the ship. More than a dozen men eagerly began packing it up. --- 18. Space-Space Fruit ---- The Tempest was still quite far from the dozen pirate ships, but these ships were almost all connected. While they were fighting over there, the looting had already begun here. In less than half an hour, Some guards had finished collecting all the treasures. "Captain, there''s a huge log, about a hundred meters long, behind their boats. Should we pull it back as well?" one of the guards asked Haruya. Haruya had already noticed it, but they couldn''t transport it back at the moment. If they had more time, they could probably bring it back slowly, but the main issue was that time was running out. "Pack up all the treasures and take them back. As for the log, leave it. We don''t have time for that now," Haruya shouted. Meanwhile, Anos was still locked in a fierce battle with Camolong. He could have already defeated Camolong but chose not to, allowing his guards to finish their task. After the guards had carried all the treasures back to the ship, Anos calmly asked, "Camolong, do you still want to fight? I don''t have time to play anymore. If you don''t stand down, I''ll have to take your 50-million-beris bounty instead!" Camolong, somewhat out of breath, hadn''t expected the kid he hadn''t seen in just two days to have grown this powerful. He also noticed his ship being looted, but there was nothing he could do. "Go ahead! But next time we meet, I''ll kill you!" Camolong said, sounding fierce despite his cowardice. Anos didn''t care. He had already wasted half an hour here and had no desire to linger. As soon as Anos left, Camolong collapsed onto the deck, beads of sweat dripping from his forehead. Was Anos incapable of dealing with Camolong? The swordsmanship of the Anos could have killed him, but Anos didn''t want to push him that far. After all, if Camolong chose to go down with him, Anos might survive, but the crew of the Tempest could face dire consequences. No one fully understands the ultimate power of Devil Fruits, and Anos wasn''t willing to take that gamble. Better to leave with the treasure than risk it all. Camolong could only watch as the Tempest disappeared in the sea, powerless to stop them. As soon as they crossed East blue, Suzu eagerly asked, "Your Majesty, why did you let Camolong go?" "We don''t have the luxury of targeting so many people right now. The most important thing is to avoid drawing the attention of the Marines and the World Government," Anos replied. For a notorious pirate like Camolong, his death would surely draw attention from other pirates, the Marines, and the World Government. Let alone the fact that Tru kingdom is still in its infancy, how can we take on the world at this stage? Suzu seemed to understand. No matter what he did, the key was to keep a low profile. Anos already knew this. He understood the situation in the world of One Piece better than anyone. If it were just him, he might have been reckless, but now too many people depended on him. Although the Kingdom of Tru wasn''t a major power in the one-piece world, it was still a place he had to protect in this world. In the world of One Piece, there are only two ways to grow stronger: training hard or eating a Devil Fruit. But this time, the attack on the Kingdom of Tru served as a wake-up call for Anos. "Your Majesty, we managed to secure three valuable items from the Devil Pirates." Haruya approached with three men, each carrying a small box. Haruya smiled as he presented them to Anos. On the deck, Anos looked at the boxes curiously. Seeing their size, he mused, "Could these be¡­ Devil Fruits?" "How did Your Majesty know?" Haruya asked, visibly surprised. "It''s not hard to guess. The size of the boxes gives it away. It''s not like I''ve never seen a Devil Fruit before," Anos replied with a slight smile. "True, Your Majesty, but I''ve never seen these particular types before," Haruya admitted as he opened the boxes. Inside were indeed three Devil Fruits, each with a unique shape. The one in the middle emitted a faint blue glow. "Is this type mentioned in the Devil Fruit Encyclopedia?" Anos asked Suzu. "Your Majesty, the one on the left is the Cigarette Fruit, a Paramecia-type. It''s practically useless. The one on the right is the Iron Fruit, which can turn anything it touches into steel. But the one in the middle isn''t even listed in the Devil Fruit Encyclopedia!" Suzu reported, and Anos was slightly taken aback. A Devil Fruit not listed in the Encyclopedia was rare indeed. The Devil Pirates must have found these somewhere, but now they belonged to the Kingdom of Tru. Anos stepped forward, inspecting the fruits. Apart from the Iron Fruit, he wasn''t sure what the Cigarette Fruit could do. It seemed useless. But the blue-glowing fruit intrigued him; it felt eerie and cold to the touch, clearly something powerful. If you come across this story on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen from Royal Road. Please report it. Anos gently placed his hand on it and, closing his eyes, asked the system in his mind, "System, can you tell me which series this Devil Fruit belongs to?" [ The system requires a fee of 100 million beris for an answer. Do you want to pay? ] The system''s voice echoed, surprisingly asking for money. Despite his frustration, Anos responded, "Pay." With a "ding," his account balance dropped significantly. [ The fruit is a Paramecia-type Space Space Fruit, capable of manipulating space. It allows for space defence, attack, and movement. After awakening, it can fold space, traverse worlds, and more ] Anos was stunned. He hadn''t expected to stumble upon such a rare power. He had always planned to grow stronger through hard work, avoiding the use of Devil Fruits, but this one was on another level. He had hit the jackpot. Although they had lost a ship full of goods, the treasures and these three Devil Fruits, especially the Space Fruit, made up for it a hundred times over. "What''s wrong, Your Majesty?" Suzu asked, noticing something off in Anos''s expression. "Huh?" Anos snapped out of his thoughts and smiled. "Are you alright, Your Majesty?" Suzu asked again. "Yes, I was just thinking," Anos replied with a grin. Without further hesitation, he picked up the blue-glowing fruit. The glow was eerie, but compared to the future potential, what did that matter? "Your Majesty, we''re not sure of this Devil Fruit''s powers yet. Are you sure you want to eat it?" Suzu asked, surprised by Anos''s intent. "It doesn''t matter. As for the other two Devil Fruits, see if anyone''s willing to eat them. If not, we can auction them off later," Anos said, smiling. "Very well, Your Majesty. But have you considered the consequences? Eating a Devil Fruit means becoming a landlubber!" Suzu reminded him, concerned. "Yes, Your Majesty, we know you''re determined, but this Devil Fruit isn''t even in the Devil Encyclopedia. If it turns out to be useless, there''s no second chance!" Haruya chimed in. Anos had already taught them the one important rule: you can only eat one Devil Fruit in your lifetime. But Anos just smiled and, in front of everyone, took a bite of the glowing fruit. "Ugh¡­" The moment he bit into it, a wave of nausea hit him. The taste and texture were beyond disgusting. Though he almost gagged, Anos swallowed it. After eating, his face turned green, and he sat down, trying to catch his breath. He tossed aside the remaining half of the fruit. The others weren''t surprised. Anos had already warned them about the horrific taste of Devil Fruits. You only need one bite to gain the power. But strangely, after consuming the Space Fruit, Anos didn''t feel any immediate change. "What ability did you gain?" Suzu asked eagerly. "You''ll have to guess," Anos teased. "Can''t you just tell us, Your Majesty?" Anos had no intention of revealing his ability yet. Better to keep it secret and strike when least expected. Despite having gained the Space Fruit''s power, Anos remained cautious. The true strength of the World Government''s top figures was still a mystery. This uncertainty weighed on Anos''s mind. "Let''s set sail, Barlow. The kingdom is waiting for us," Anos commanded. "Yes, Your Majesty," Barlow replied. No one knew what abilities Anos had gained from the Devil Fruit, not even those closest to him. The Tempest sailed on calm seas. Though the journey was slow, the atmosphere aboard the ship was entirely different now. It would take more than a week to reach their kingdom in the South Blue. During that time, they would have to keep in touch with the Kingdom of Tru through the Den Den Mushi. ---- Meanwhile, the Kingdom of Tru was under heavy siege by the Royal Kingdom and several pirate groups. Even the royal city was stretched thin, forced to send more soldiers to combat the pirates. Yet, despite the kingdom''s recent economic boom, they had lost two islands within days. The Kingdom of Tru had grown stronger in recent years, both in terms of military and economy. But even so, they struggled to fend off the onslaught from so many pirate crews. With a small population and widespread fear, the kingdom''s situation was dire. The only hope for the Tru Kingdom now lay in the swift return of their leader, Anos, and the Tempest. Word had spread of their successful plundering of the Devil Pirates, which offered a glimmer of hope to the citizens. But the looming threat of the Roya Kingdom and their pirate allies was relentless. They had formed a coalition that had no intention of stopping until the Kingdom of Tru was completely subdued. In the royal city, Barlow''s brother, Darian, was overseeing the defence efforts. He stood at the city walls, looking out at the encroaching enemy forces. His heart sank at the sight of the Roya Kingdom''s flag flying in the distance. Despite his best efforts to hold the front lines, their forces were dwindling, and morale was at an all-time low. "Captain, the enemy has breached the eastern gate!" one of the soldiers shouted, rushing towards Darian. Darian clenched his fists. "Send reinforcements! We cannot let them reach the royal palace!" he shouted. The palace, where Anos and the royal family resided, was the heart of Tru. If the palace fell, so would the kingdom. However, Darian knew they were running out of time. He could only hope Anos would return soon. ---- Back aboard the Tempest, Anos was deep in thought. Although the Space Fruit had granted him incredible power, he wasn''t fully accustomed to it yet. The ability to manipulate space was unlike anything he had experienced before. While training hard had been his primary path to strength, this fruit had opened up a realm of possibilities that seemed almost limitless. During the voyage, he had begun experimenting with his new abilities. At first, it was difficult to control. He could create small pockets of space that allowed him to move objects or shield himself momentarily. But as the days passed, he found that his power expanded the more he practised. He could bend space around him, creating portals that allowed for instant travel across short distances. Yet, the real challenge was in learning how to control the advanced abilities that the fruit promised. Anos knew that mastering the fruit''s full potential, such as folding space or even traversing different worlds, would take time, discipline, and caution. On the fourth day of their journey, Anos called his crew to the deck. "Everyone, gather around. There''s something I need to show you." Suzu, Haruya, and the rest of the crew assembled before him, curious about what Anos had in store. Anos held out his hand, and with a focused expression, he began manipulating the air around him. At first, it seemed like nothing was happening, but then a shimmering distortion appeared. Slowly, the distortion grew until it formed a fully visible portal in front of the crew. The crew gasped in amazement. "This¡­ this is incredible!" Haruya exclaimed. "Is that¡­Devil Fruits power?" Suzu asked, her eyes wide. Anos nodded. "Yes. It''s one of the powers of the Space Fruit. With this ability, I can move across vast distances in an instant." He stepped through the portal and reappeared on the other side of the ship. The crew was stunned into silence. "With this power, we can move faster than any ship on the sea. But this is only the beginning. Once I master the fruit''s full potential, we''ll be able to travel between worlds." "Between worlds?" Haruya echoed in disbelief. Anos smiled faintly. "That''s the long-term goal. For now, I need to focus on defending our kingdom." The crew nodded, impressed and reassured by their captain''s growing power. If anyone could save the Kingdom of Tru, it was Anos. Finally, after more than a week of travel, the Tempest approached the shores of the Kingdom of Tru. The once-thriving coastline was now in ruins. Smoke billowed from several areas, and the distant sound of cannon fire echoed through the air. "Captain, we''re home, but it looks like the battle is still raging," Barlow said grimly, staring at the devastation. Anos stepped forward, his eyes narrowing as he took in the scene. "Prepare for battle. We''re going to retake our home." The crew swiftly armed themselves, ready to fight for their kingdom. Anos, feeling the weight of his new responsibilities and powers, took a deep breath. This was it the moment that would define the future of the Kingdom of Tru. As the Tempest sailed into the war-torn harbour, Anos knew one thing for certain: with the power of the Space Fruit and the loyalty of his crew, they would not only reclaim their land but also step in a new era for the kingdom. The battle for Tru was about to begin. ---- 19. Killing Pirates ---- The battle between kingdoms may be more humane, but pirates hold no such principles. Everywhere they went, they burned, killed, and looted, severely impacting the economy of the Tru Kingdom. No one knew how many people had died at their hands. Daiki and the remaining members of the Royal Guard''s fought back against the pirate invasion, but their forces were ultimately limited to just a few hundred. According to their reports, about 40 pirate crews, with a total of nearly 7,000 to 8,000 members, had invaded the Tru Kingdom. This invasion had a devastating impact, and they struggled to cope with it. During the return of Anos, troubling news arrived from the royal city every two hours, each message more infuriating than the last. On the one hand, Daiki had begun organizing an evacuation to the royal city while simultaneously marshalling forces to resist both the pirates and the Roya Kingdom. The hardship involved was unimaginable. As the Roya Kingdom launched its attack on the Tru Kingdom, it coincided with Anos and his Crew''s arrival in Logue Town. Though the return journey took only Four days, much had transpired in that time. Fortunately, by the time the invaders reached the kingdom''s hinterlands, the giant ship, Tempest, had already entered the Tru Kingdom''s waters. When they docked at Nanniwa Port, no one was there to greet Anos. Through a phone call, he learned that at least 30 pirate crews remained within the kingdom, their exact locations unclear. But one thing was certain: their target was the palace. "purururu..." Anos picked up the receiver and directly called Daiki. Once connected, he asked seriously, "Where has the Roya Kingdom advanced?" "It''s Your Majesty..." The sound on the other side was chaotic, not Daiki''s voice, but another guard, clearly excited. The Den Den Mushi mirrored their exaggerated expressions. "Your Majesty, we are currently defending the royal city. Nearly three thousand pirates are outside, preparing to attack. Darian and the captain of the guard are resisting the Roya Kingdom''s forces." Hearing this, Anos felt a suffocating weight. His fears over the past few days had come true. The pirates had attacked the royal city, meaning most other areas had likely fallen. It had been less than three years since the kingdom was entrusted to them, and this situation was a grievous failure. Anos'' expression hardened. His previous patience was gone. He had been too lenient, hoping to show mercy even when mistakes were made. Now, that leniency had led to disaster. Disembarking quickly, he headed straight for the royal city without waiting for anyone. The guards accompanying him hurried to follow. As for Suzu, she remained aboard the Tempest. After all, the treasure on board now totalled 2 billion beris. If she left, there would be no protection if pirates attacked again. At Anos''s current speed, the royal city was only ten minutes away. His simmering anger was becoming harder to contain. He had no intention of sparing anyone who dared bring ruin to his kingdom. As they neared the city walls, they saw the fierce exchange of gunfire between the defenders and the pirates. The sound of the shots was deafening. Thousands of pirates stood below the walls, all wearing expressions of grim determination. Among the pirates, Anos noticed several Devil Fruit users. Though they were not particularly strong, they posed a significant threat to his guards. If you discover this tale on Amazon, be aware that it has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road. Please report it. In just a week of fighting, the kingdom had been brought to its knees. Anos found this hard to accept. Despite their extensive training, the guards''s lack of actual combat experience was painfully evident. They had power but fought like civilians, not soldiers. Gazing at the pirates, Anos'' expression darkened. The demon sword Muramasa at his waist resonated with his rage, glowing red, ready to unleash a storm of violence. As Anos entered the battlefield, the guards and citizens atop the city walls roared with excitement. Their king, the symbol of their kingdom, had come to fight. Standing alone before thousands of pirates, Anos remained undaunted. "Your Death is HERE BASTARDS!!!" At the mention of the death, the citizens inside the royal city erupted in cheers. The five-meter-high city walls were manned by guards and volunteers, all staring down, eager to witness their king''s power. Many were worried, but Anos'' display of confidence inspired them. Hundreds of guards readied themselves for battle, but before they could act, Anos shouted, "Stand down! Your priority is to protect the people inside the city. Leave these scum to me!" His voice was cold, and he stared at the pirates as though they were already dead. The demon sword Muramasa trembled at his side, its bloodthirsty nature barely contained. With a hand on the hilt, Anos stood motionless for a moment. Then, with a sudden gust of wind, he vanished. When he reappeared, the pirates were already collapsing, their bodies torn apart before they could even react. The gate of the royal city became a bloody battlefield, and fear rippled through the pirate ranks. The once-confident pirate crews now desperately sought to flee. But they couldn''t escape. "Men, we outnumber them. Charge forward, and the treasures of Tru kingdom will be ours! We''ve come this far there''s no turning back now!" a pirate captain shouted, rallying his terrified comrades with promises of wealth. But Anos, his eyes blood-red with rage, was unstoppable. His movements were invisible, leaving rows of bodies in his wake. This time, he had no intention of sparing anyone. They had brought his kingdom to ruins and only death awaited them. The guards and citizens on the city walls watched in awe as their king fought alone against thousands. Though the scene was bloody, it was an inspiring sight a testament to the strength of their king. Despite their large numbers, internal divisions among the pirate crews prevented them from cooperating effectively. While many pirates remained, some weaker ones began to retreat, prioritizing their survival over riches. But Anos did not need to chase them down. Anos stood among the pirates. There wasn''t a trace of blood on him. He looked exactly as he did when he arrived, except for his eyes, which had turned dark red, giving him a strange and terrifying appearance. The demon sword Muramasa pulsed with a strange, blood-red light, terrifying anyone who saw it. After absorbing so much blood, the Demon Sword Muramasa had become even more eerie. The blood-red light on the blade, although alluring, filled onlookers with dread. The pirates were now broken, their numbers dwindling, and they scrambled to flee. Even those with Devil Fruit powers were helpless against the wrath of Anos. Anos remained motionless, watching as the remaining pirates scattered. Behind him lay a field of mangled bodies. "Capture the survivors," he ordered his guards calmly. "They will rebuild what they destroyed." "Yes, Your Majesty!" came the unanimous reply. With the pirates scattered, the Roya Kingdom would likely retreat soon after hearing of their defeat. After the guards on the Tempest Ship arrived, they were about to rush forward when they were stopped by other guards. Anos'' message was relayed to them exactly as it had been delivered. In less than five minutes, nearly seven to eight thousand pirates were dead. However, in this short period, the pirates began to devise a better response plan. Fortunately, they weren''t a united pirate group. Their interests hadn''t been distributed evenly, and grudges among them prevented perfect cooperation. Although they still had a large number, some of the weaker pirates were completely terrified and began to slowly retreat. For these pirates, everything was profit-oriented, but now, faced with heavy losses, their priority shifted to saving their lives. But having come this far, withdrawal was impossible. However, for Anos, this was only the beginning. He had never sought to invade other kingdoms until he was strong enough. Now, after being attacked, he had no choice but to address the kingdom''s weaknesses in military and governance. Currently, about 3,000 soldiers in the Tru Kingdom were training in the Rokushiki, but only 400 to 500 had mastered even one form. Strengthening the kingdom was now his top priority. Despite the devastation, the pirate invasion had revealed internal flaws, and fixing them would strengthen the kingdom in the long run. With the pirate threat neutralized and the royal city secure, the people began to leave their homes, cheering for their king and picking up the bodies of the fallen. Anos marvelled at the change in his people. Just three years ago, they had been indifferent, disillusioned, and devoid of hope. Now, they were full of life and enthusiasm. As prosperity grew, Anos'' support reached unprecedented heights. "Long live the king!" the people chanted, their voices swelling like a tidal wave. "Long live Your Majesty¡­" "Long live Your Majesty¡­" The voices surged like a wave, with women and children joining in, especially the children, whose admiration for Anos was immense. In the world of pirates, it was almost impossible for women to make a living. But things were different here. Two massive factories had been established: one for making perfume, which required hard labour and was dominated by men, and another for textiles, which was almost entirely run by women. At this moment, the Tru Kingdom stood united under their young king, and his reign, though just beginning, promised strength and growth for years to come. However, As the kingdom continues to flourish, its growing wealth will catch the envious eyes of neighbouring rulers and pirates. Whispers of greed will spread throughout the land, and the threat of invasion will loom ever closer. ---- 20. Marine Headquarters ---- For the first time, Anos realized the strength of his subordinates, but it was still not enough. There are as many strong people in this world as there are carp crossing a river. If you''re not careful, unexpected situations can happen at any moment. Seeing so many admirable people, Anos felt an inexplicable sense of pride rising from the bottom of his heart. ---- Meanwhile, in another location, there stood a dense cluster of buildings, particularly one at the forefront, towering at least a hundred meters high, with the prominent word "Marine" displayed on it and the Marine''s emblem in the centre. The logo, a seagull holding scales in its beak, symbolized absolute justice. Watchtowers dotted the area, and the coastline was lined with massive cannons. This island, though large and located near the sea, had an interior vastly different from others. It is home to the Marine Headquarters, soon to be one of the three major forces in the world of One Piece and the strongest single entity. The Inhabitants here were Marine personnel and their families. Naturally, only high-ranking naval officers'' families could live here. The entire Marine Headquarters was as impenetrable as a fortress. One glance was enough to instil a sense of dread. It was a solemn, formidable place. At that moment, inside the central building, a group of people sat with serious expressions, discussing something important. Though it resembled a formal meeting, their behaviours, like picking their noses or eating snacks, were anything but professional. "Crrckk¡­ crrck¡­ crshh¡­" "Garp, you idiot, can you stop eating for a second?" In the usually silent room, the sharp crunch of Garp munching on crackers cut through the air, starkly out of place in the tense atmosphere. The middle-aged man sitting at the head of the table, with a pigtail and glasses, glared at Garp, his voice filled with irritation. This man was Sengoku, the current Fleet Admiral of the Marines, and a supremely powerful figure. A goat stood beside him, and after hearing Sengoku''s outburst, it, too, cast a mocking glance at Garp. "Sengoku, mind your own business. What does my eating have to do with anything?" Garp replied indifferently. "You still have the nerve to say that? We''re discussing something serious. Can you at least pretend to be professional?" Sengoku was so frustrated that he was momentarily at a loss for words. In the room, over a dozen people were present, watching the scene unfold, but their faces showed little concern. "Can we stop bickering over trivial matters? Fleet Admiral Sengoku, please proceed. We all have duties to attend to," one of them spoke up in exasperation. It was clear to everyone that Garp and Sengoku could argue endlessly. Sengoku sighed, realizing that further arguing with Garp would be pointless. Shifting his focus, Sengoku turned to Garp again and said, "Garp, you should accept the position of admiral this time. No one else in the Marines is as suitable for the role as you. Please don''t turn it down." Help support creative writers by finding and reading their stories on the original site. "Forget it. Being an admiral comes with too much responsibility. I prefer staying a vice admiral. If you need an admiral, let them do it," Garp responded his expression still full of disdain. Garp''s nonchalance was met with a furious outburst from Sengoku, who shouted, "Garp, you old fool! Stop passing the responsibility" But, Garp added, "Besides, we already have candidates for admiral! Can''t these three alternates, Vice Admiral Akainu, Vice Admiral Kizaru, and Vice Admiral Aokiji, meet your expectations?" All three alternate admirals were present in the room. Only Sakazuki aka Vice Admiral Akainu, seemed focused, while the other two looked indifferent. "Forget it. We''ll discuss the admiral position later. Let''s move on to other matters." Sengoku changed the subject, his expression shifting to one of absolute seriousness. Behind Sengoku, a wanted poster of Anos was displayed, detailing all his known attributes. The change in Sengoku''s demeanour caused the others to follow suit, becoming more focused. Even Garp now watched with interest. After glancing around to ensure everyone was paying attention, Sengoku began speaking slowly, "The man you see behind me is Anos Drexus, the New king of the Tru Kingdom in the South Blue. Historically, their kingdom has been impoverished, but in recent years, the king has drastically changed their situation¡­" Garp, unamused, interrupted bluntly, "Sengoku, isn''t it a good thing that their Kingdom is improving? This little guy seems competent. Why is this relevant?" "Garp, will you shut up and let me finish?" Sengoku snapped, furious. "Yes, Garp, if the Fleet Admiral is bringing it up, there must be more to the story," Tsuru chimed in. "Can we all stop interrupting and let the Fleet Admiral finish? I''ve got work to do," said a man in his thirties wearing a yellow suit, Kizaru, tilting his mouth in his usual careless manner. The attention In the room shifted instantly. Sengoku, standing up and looking frustrated, addressed everyone sternly. "What concerns us now is not their economic strength, but their capabilities in other areas." Sengoku pulled out a Den Den Mushi. Its eyes glowed, projecting a scene onto the wall. The footage displayed a battle between the Royal Guards and pirates in Logue Town, revealing Anos and his allies. This Den Den Mushi was a projector type, rare and typically reserved for powerful figures in major Kingdoms. When the projection appeared, even the previously indifferent Garp began paying close attention. No one could believe what they were seeing. The most shocking part was that the Royal Guards of the Tru Kingdom were using the Rokushiki! For the Marines, the Rokushiki had only started becoming widespread two years ago, yet there was a foreign military using it. This was enough to alarm everyone. "Was this a traitor''s doing?" Garp asked Sengoku, his expression serious. The Six Powers were one of the Marine''s trump cards, and if this knowledge spread, it could have significant consequences. Sengoku sat down thoughtfully, then replied, "It''s unlikely to be a traitor. These techniques have only been popularized in the Marines for two years, but it''s clear the other side has been using them for much longer. That''s why we''re having this emergency meeting to decide who will investigate the situation." "From their techniques, it''s clear they''re using the Rokushiki, whether it''s Shigan or Geppo. They''re identical to our skills. We must investigate thoroughly," said Tsuru "Fleet Admiral Sengoku, no matter how they acquired these techniques, I suggest we eliminate them immediately. If we allow them to continue, they''ll become a major threat," Akainu said fiercely. "We should investigate first. We don''t know the full situation yet. The Tru Kingdom has developed rapidly in recent years. Who will take the mission to assess what''s happening?" Sengoku asked, scanning the room. There was silence for a moment. Garp, recalling his past encounter with Anos, felt uneasy. "Garp, you know the South Blue better than anyone. Why don''t you go check it out?" Sengoku suggested. But Garp stood up abruptly, shouting, "No way! I''m taking time off next week. I need to look after my adorable grandson. Let someone else handle this!" His refusal didn''t surprise anyone. After all, this task involved dealing with a nation, not pirates. It required a delicate approach. Seeing no better options, Sengoku''s eyes landed on Aokiji, who was leaning back in his chair, seemingly indifferent to the entire conversation. "Aokiji, since everyone else is occupied, I''ll leave this matter to you. But remember, don''t act rashly. Your mission is to gather intelligence," Sengoku ordered. "Hey, hey, hey¡­ Fleet Admiral, I''ve got things to do too, you know? Don''t push this boring job on me," Aokiji responded lazily. But Sengoku was firm. "This matter is settled. You''re the best candidate." With Garp no longer an option, Aokiji was the Marine''s most promising candidate for admiral. This assignment would push him further toward that promotion. Sighing, Aokiji reluctantly agreed. "Alright, fine. For the sake of the Marines, I''ll handle it." Akainu, however, was visibly displeased. He, too, was a candidate for admiral, and it bothered him that such a minor task could determine Aokiji''s promotion. Nevertheless, the decision was final. "Aokiji, the Tru Kingdom reported that the neighbouring Roya Kingdom has begun an invasion. No matter what happens, do not get involved in their war. Your mission is solely to gather information," Sengoku emphasized. "We''ve seen that the Tru Kingdom already possesses the Rokushiki. What if they also have someone with Haki? What am I supposed to do then? I''m not signing up to get killed!" Aokiji joked in his usual laid-back tone, though everyone knew he could handle the situation. --- 21. Future plans --- When Aokiji said this, others could understand. A Kingdom undergoing such drastic changes in just a few years, learning even the Marine''s Rokushiki technique, and mastering two forms of Haki, it''s not impossible. "~This is so scary~ What if our Vice Admiral Kuzan dies there after we pass?" Kizaru quipped, his lips curling into a sarcastic smile as he glanced at Aokiji. "Kizaru, can you stop making those remarks? It''s just a small Kingdom in the South Blue. There''s nothing to worry about," Akainu replied coldly. "Alright, let''s settle it like this for now. Aokiji, let me emphasize this again you are not allowed to get involved in their internal war. Once it''s over, avoid taking action unless necessary. If someone finds fault with our Marine, it could become complicated." Sengoku stressed. "Yeah, yeah, I understand, Fleet Admiral Sengoku..." Aokiji answered lazily. --- Meanwhile, Anos had no idea that the Marine was already aware of them. But even if he did, what could he do? Now that he had started leading the Royal Guards, Anos was no longer concerned about others finding out. They didn''t belong to a World Government member kingdom, so they had no obligation to worry about it. After spending years in this world, Anos had come to understand the rules well enough. Currently, the entire Tru Kingdom is focused on extinguishing the flames of war. The only silver lining was that ever since the pirate groups were eliminated, the Roya Kingdom''s progress had completely stalled, with faint signs of retreat. In the palace, Anos sat at the head of the room, looking seriously at the people gathered below him. Unlike before, most of those gathered were now young officials. The older generation, having served the previous king, had begun to retire, and power had been handed over to this new generation. "Losta, can you brief us on the current state of business?" Anos asked, directing his gaze at a woman in her thirties. Wearing glasses and a formal suit, Losta exuded a graceful and elegant demeanour. Losta stepped forward, pulling out a small notebook from her pocket. Respectfully, she began, "Your Majesty, our kingdom''s main industries are perfume and textiles. Over the past two years, our perfume business has expanded globally." "On the Grand Line, we have agents responsible for selling our products. As for textiles, we are still in the early stages of establishing global sales channels, but the results are not yet significant." "Currently, the perfume production workforce, including flower cultivators, totals around 120,000 people. Our monthly revenue from perfume averages 5.5 billion beris, which comfortably sustains the kingdom''s economy. Textile production is still nascent, yielding a net profit of 1.3 billion beris monthly, but this is just the beginning." "For the next phase of expansion, I propose that we extend our reach beyond the Four Seas. I await your guidance, Your Majesty." Though Anos wasn''t deeply familiar with business strategies, he appreciated Losta''s diligence. While listening, he mused about the economic future of the kingdom. Although the war with the Roya Kingdom had subsided, relying solely on perfume and textiles for the economy seemed insufficient. After a moment of thought, Anos replied, "I hadn''t fully considered the scope of the perfume business before. How much inventory do we currently have?" "Your Majesty, we have nearly one million bottles of perfume in stock, more than enough for our current market demands," Losta answered. Perfume had become a luxury product. Expanding its global market would require significant effort, especially since most wealthy consumers were concentrated outside the kingdom. "Ensure your ministry carefully plans for this expansion. Our kingdom''s business portfolio won''t be limited to just these two industries. We''ll nurture business acumen among our citizens. We''ll discuss the details later," Anos said. Unauthorized usage: this tale is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings. "Your Majesty, what are your intentions regarding the next steps?" Suzu, standing nearby, asked cautiously. However, sensing the gravity of the situation, she withheld her full question. "The Ministry of Commerce must develop a comprehensive plan, including population demographics, employment statistics, and living conditions. Also, prepare for expansion. I intend to take control of the Roya Kingdom, so we must be ready," Anos declared firmly, his words igniting a sense of purpose in the room. Anos''s announcement stunned everyone. The Roya Kingdom was far larger than Tru, yet Anos spoke of annexing it. "Your Majesty, do you mean to declare war on the Roya Kingdom?" Losta asked hesitantly. "What? Do you think it''s impossible?" Anos replied sternly. Since a conflict had already occurred once, it was likely to happen again. He would not allow the Roya Kingdom to disrupt his plans. Though Tru''s overall strength had grown, some elements of its traditional mindset persisted, and major shifts were still needed. "Your Majesty, I fully support your ambitions, though my capabilities are limited. I would gladly follow you into the Roya Kingdom if I could," Losta said earnestly. Anos smiled at Losta''s loyalty. It was reassuring to have someone on his side. He had already devised a strategy before making this decision. The Roya Kingdom, having financed pirates to attack their kingdom, had revealed its weaknesses. With Tru''s King''s Guard now at the border, the next step was a direct invasion of Roya. Changing an entire Kingdom''s mindset, however, would be no small task. "Losta, how much money do we have available?" Anos asked. "Your Majesty, after accounting for essential expenditures, we have around 3 billion beris available for mobilization. This is the surplus after covering the Kingdom''s living expenses," Losta reported. Anos sat deep in thought. With 3 billion beris at his disposal, plus the nearly 2 billion in reserve funds, they had the means to finance a successful campaign. "Losta, proceed with preparations for our takeover of the Roya Kingdom. Once we seize control, we must ensure that the Kingdom quickly stabilizes and gets back on track," Anos ordered. "Understood, Your Majesty," Losta replied, adjusting her glasses. "That concludes today''s meeting. We''ll discuss the rest later," Anos said. As he left the palace hall, Anos headed directly to the royal garden. The tranquil environment was perfect for reflection, and more importantly, it was his private space where no one would disturb him. Despite the serenity, Anos felt uneasy. He activated his Observation Haki to scan the area, only relaxed when he sensed no immediate threats. The garden, more accurately described as a vast forest behind the palace, housed a large, open square. Standing in the centre, Anos''s focus for the day was mastering his Devil Fruit abilities. Since gaining his powers, he had lost his ability to touch seawater, and now he was determined to master the full potential of his Space-Space Fruit. However, he knew it wouldn''t happen overnight. With a bit of concentration, his right hand emitted a sky-blue glow. Though the power of space manipulation eluded him, he was determined to figure it out without revealing too much to others. His greatest asset remained the mysterious system embedded within him. Stepping into the system''s virtual space, he felt a wave of security wash over him. The sci-fi design of the place gave him confidence. "System, do you have detailed information on the abilities of the Space-Space Fruit?" Anos asked. He had come to trust the system as an omnipotent force. Moments later, the system displayed the fruit''s abilities and training methods on a panel in front of him. The information included detailed instructions on honing the powers of the Space-Space Fruit. The most critical revelation was that mastering the fruit''s powers hinged on mental strength. In the later stages, the strength of one''s mind would dictate how far the fruit''s abilities could be pushed. The Space-Space Fruit encompassed defence, attack, and movement. After awakening the fruit''s powers... However, the system didn''t reveal anything about the fruit''s awakened abilities, leaving Anos slightly disappointed. But the foundational training methods were enough for now. --- On the same day, Suzu sat in the courtyard, looking at the newspaper that had just been delivered. To everyone''s surprise, the headline in the newspaper was about the situation in her country. "With the special combat techniques of the Tru Kingdom, all the pirates in Logue Town were captured..." As Suzu read the headline and scanned the details below, fear crept over her, and sweat began to form on her forehead. The main reason for her anxiety was Anos''s previous warning: all the techniques practised by the Royal Guard were naval combat skills. If these techniques were exposed, it would most likely provoke hostility from the Marines. And now, it was being broadcast openly in the newspaper. Suzu knew she wasn''t the only one to receive this news. After confirming the contents, Suzu hurried toward the palace. At that moment, Anos was still focused on practising and honing his Devil Fruit abilities, unaware of the situation unfolding outside. The entire Kingdom of Tru was now in turmoil. While the royal city remained stable, elsewhere, pirate raids and wars had not ceased. However, none of this seemed to disrupt the everyday lives of the people. The people of the Tru Kingdom, barely scraping by through farming, had been extremely poor before. Now, they relied on two factories, which were enough to support the kingdom''s living expenses. In the past two years, these factories had not only expanded the economy within the Four Seas but had also begun to spread their influence along the Grand Line. Furthermore, the factories stimulated the commercial economy in the surrounding areas, making the kingdom more prosperous. The people, benefiting from the economic boost driven by these factories, had become entirely self-sufficient. Suzu stood outside Anos''s chamber in the palace until nightfall. When she finally saw Anos return, she rushed forward without hesitation. Her face was serious, her expression tense, and she no longer resembled the calm & composed woman. --- 22. Arrival of Aokiji I have made a mistake in Losta''s gender I have fixed it! Sorry for the inconvenience. ---- Anos glanced at Suzu, standing in front of him, particularly noting her nervous expression. She had been waiting for quite some time. "What''s going on?" Anos asked directly. It was so dark now that he couldn''t see her face, but under the courtyard light, he could still make out her worried expression. "Your Majesty, the events in Logue Town have already been published in the newspapers. I believe the Marine must have noticed it too!" Suzu said anxiously. "Go back and rest. I''ve known about this for a while." Anos had long anticipated that since Logue Town was the Marine''s base in East Blue, it was natural for many eyes to be on it. "But, Your Majesty, don''t you need to be concerned about this matter?" Suzu pressed. "Don''t worry about the Marine. Based on the usual timing, I expect they''ll send someone to investigate within the next few days. Even if this is exposed, there''s nothing to fear," Anos replied calmly. "I see." Suzu felt a weight lift from her chest and sighed in relief. However, she couldn''t shake the feeling that her king was keeping certain things from them. Yet, it was difficult to probe further. Anos gave a slight smile and said again in a composed tone, "Go back and rest. Don''t stress about anything else." "Then, Your Majesty, please rest early as well." As Suzu''s figure disappeared into the distance, Anos remained unfazed by the incident. Since he had no qualms about parading his Royal Guards, he naturally wasn''t worried about the Marine discovering them. Since arriving in this world, Anos had grasped the workings of everything in detail. After all, he wasn''t the only one who knew the Marine''s Rokushiki. Still, he couldn''t guess who the Marine Headquarters would send or how they would approach the matter. Regardless, his contingency plan was already in motion. No matter who came, the outcome wouldn''t change much. This time, Anos had no intention of going to the front lines of the Tru Kingdom, so he felt confident leaving everything to Daiki. In the entire Tru Kingdom, Anos didn''t believe anyone could be more powerful than Daiki. Though the Kingdom of Roya was larger than the Kingdom of Tru, their military forces were roughly equivalent in size. While their weapons were nearly the same, the Kingdom of Roya severely lacked in other aspects. The most critical factor was food supply. Anos had a system that could provide an unlimited supply as long as there was money, but the Kingdom of Roya wasn''t so fortunate. If you spot this tale on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation. The newly enthroned king of Roya, in his desire for luxury, had nearly destroyed the Kingdom, leaving the people filled with complaints. This type of unrest had been most prevalent a year ago, with many citizens of Roya expressing a desire to join special armies. Indeed, some had even defected to the Kingdom of Tru. Many had heard about the living standards in the Kingdom of Tru. Even some of their soldiers had no desire to fight anymore. On the battlefield, Anos devised a subtler strategy. Using his system, he produced hundreds of thousands of leaflets and had them distributed to the front lines. Soon, the entire Kingdom of Roya plunged into internal disputes. Sometimes, victory didn''t require brute force; other strategies could achieve the same ends. Throughout the entire conflict, Anos never once appeared. Daiki led the Royal Guards in an assault on Roya''s capital, capturing it in less than five days. This was the westernmost point of the Kingdom of Roya. If the capital fell again, the Kingdom of Roya would cease to exist in the pirate world. The Kingdom of Tru had expanded not just in land area, but more importantly, its population had nearly doubled. In this era, that was critical. If one wished to become a true power, territory was essential, but so was the population. The more people there were, the more could be trained for future strength. The war had dragged on for six days, and the situation within the Kingdom had stabilized. The people''s economy had also begun to recover and grow. As Anos continued to refine his Devil Fruit abilities, he suddenly opened his eyes, smiling slightly as he looked toward the sea. He was still in his back garden when he sensed something. With his advanced Observation Haki, he could now use this perception more maturely. Without needing to focus, he already knew guests were arriving. Leaving the palace, Anos made his way to the seaside. This beach, the closest to the palace, was where he had first received the system. Observing the surroundings, Anos sat on a fallen tree near the shore, quietly gazing out at the sea. Before long, as he had anticipated, a man slowly approached on a bicycle along the beach. As the bicycle wheels turned, the sea beneath them froze into a path of ice, supporting the rider''s weight. "Hey¡­ little brother, could you tell me how to get to King Tru''s palace?" As soon as Aokiji pedalled onto the shore, he saw Anos resting in the distance and casually called out to him. "I wonder what brings you here?" Anos responded with a smile. Aokiji, towering nearly two meters tall, was at least a head taller than Anos. After landing, Aokiji set his bicycle down and lazily strolled over to sit beside Anos. Sitting there casually, he listened to Anos'' words, though he still maintained a relaxed demeanour. "I''m here to see the king of Tru kingdom. I have something to ask. So, I was wondering, can you take me to him?" Aokiji had seen Anos''s photo before, it wasn''t hard for him to recognize the young man before him. He was just fishing for information. After all, the goal of his visit was to understand the situation. "No problem, but isn''t it a bit unusual for a Vice Admiral of the Marine Headquarters to arrive in such a way?" Anos said with a smirk. Though he had never met Aokiji personally, from the way he reacted, it was easy to guess that Aokiji had seen his photo. "Well, well¡­ I didn''t expect you to recognize me. I am surprised," Aokiji said lazily. He wasn''t curious about how Anos knew who he was. By this point, many things didn''t need to be explained tactfully. Anos, for his part, had always had a favourable impression of Aokiji. Among the Marines, he was one of the few who could be at least reasonable to talk in this situation. The two sat together on the tree, talking as though they were old friends who hadn''t seen each other in years. The sea breeze wasn''t too warm, largely due to Aokiji''s Ice-Ice Fruit powers. "Vice-admiral Aokiji, would you be interested in taking a tour of our Tru kingdom?" Anos asked with a smile. "That sounds troublesome. If it''s possible, I''d rather just lie down and rest. But since King Tru invited me, I don''t mind taking a look," Aokiji replied. "There may be something that''ll catch your interest. After all, you''ll have to report back to our Kingdom once you return to Marine Headquarters. Naturally, I''ll give you the full tour," Anos said calmly. Aokiji''s expression grew more serious. He hadn''t expected Anos to already be aware of the purpose of his visit. --- 23. Marines Legacy Thank you," Cbnr2336 ", for becoming a Elite member on P@treon; shoutout out to you. Enjoy --- Pov - Aokiji Aokiji had only been in this place for a short time, but he was already taken aback by the depth of knowledge the young man beside him possessed. This Tru Kingdom is remote and insignificant to most of the world but has somehow become aware of the inner workings of the World Government''s CP divisions. And this boy, this Anos, knew more than just the basics, he seemed to have an understanding of their methods as well. Even if Aokiji didn''t want to believe it, he had to face the reality: this kid knew things he shouldn''t. "Why are you so certain of these things?" he finally asked, trying to get to the bottom of it. "Did I say something surprising? I''m sure you, Vice Admiral Aokiji, are quite familiar with the World Government''s intelligence units, from CP0 to CP9. You don''t need me to explain their moral character, right?" Aokiji listened quietly, his unease growing with every word. The young king''s tone was confident, almost taunting. He didn''t stop there, though. Anos continued, "But I also believe that whether it''s the World Government or your Marine Headquarters, no matter how important matters are in our Tru Kingdom, you won''t have the time to deal with them." "The seas are changing, Vice Admiral. The Great Pirate Era is upon us. How many troops do you think we can afford to manage things on our end?" Aokiji could sense the hidden meaning in his words. This boy was no fool. The coming age of pirates, the Four Emperors rising, the Shichibukai all of it was looming over the horizon. Anos was already preparing for it, clearly ahead of most others. His confidence was unsettling. Aokiji kept his gaze fixed on the young king, his concern deepening. It was as if Anos had thought of everything, and that sense of control, of being several steps ahead, left Aokiji with an uncomfortable feeling in his gut. But the conversation was going nowhere productive. It was a futile dialogue at this point. So, shifting the subject, Aokiji asked, "Your training methods here seem familiar, don''t they?" Anos didn''t hesitate. "The Rokushiki of the Marine became an official part of your training two years ago. It''s designed to push the limits of your body in attack, defence, and movement. Combined with Haki, it''s bound to become one of the Marine''s strongest assets. Am I wrong?" Aokiji''s heart sank further. The boy didn''t bother hiding the truth he knew too much. How was it possible for someone so young and from such a small Kingdom to have access to this kind of intelligence? The only thing Aokiji could think of now was whether there were spies from the Tru Kingdom within the Marine Headquarters. That was the only explanation, right? But as if reading his thoughts, Anos dismissed the idea. "Don''t worry, Vice Admiral Aokiji. None of this information came from your Marine Headquarters. Two years ago, our Tru Kingdom was too poor to send anyone to infiltrate high-ranking positions." "Besides, and more importantly, I expect you, Marine, to explain what it did to our kingdom in the coming years. If Fleet Admiral Sengoku isn''t willing, I won''t hesitate to make this public myself. Imagine the damage this "Big news" would do to your Marine''s reputation, especially in the Great Pirate Era." Aokiji clenched his fists slightly as the boy''s words dug deeper. Anos was referring to events that happened ten years ago in the Tru Kingdom. He knew exactly what had transpired. And so did Aokiji. Baterilla Island¡­ over two thousand pregnant women had been killed during the Marine''s involvement, an incident that haunted Aokiji to this day. It had been a stain on the Marine, one that he''d been personally involved in. Yet now, walking down the streets of this foreign land, surrounded by the silent watch of its people, he was left with no choice but to swallow his emotions. Sengoku had warned him repeatedly before he arrived. "No matter what happens, don''t take action in the Tru Kingdom," Sengoku had said. Aokiji hadn''t understood the gravity of those words until now. The boy''s knowledge of the past and his willingness to use it left Aokiji with a mounting sense of unease. For the first time in a while, Aokiji dropped his usual lazy demeanour. His gaze sharpened, and though he remained calm on the surface, he let his intent pierce through the mask. He didn''t bother hiding the murderous glint in his eyes. Anos, though, didn''t flinch. He even smiled. "There''s no need for such hostility, Vice Admiral. I respect you. Look at the incident at Ohara. Weren''t you disappointed by the Marine''s recent actions? Isn''t that what made you realize their flaws?" Aokiji gritted his teeth at the mention of Ohara. The massacre of innocent scholars, children, and civilians had left him disgusted of himself. But Anos wasn''t stopping there. He was provoking Aokiji on purpose. "Isn''t it funny? You know so much," Aokiji muttered, his voice betraying only the faintest hint of irritation. "A little guy like you, aware of Marine''s secrets. It''s embarrassing." Support the creativity of authors by visiting Royal Road for this novel and more. Despite his words, Aokiji knew they held no weight. This fifteen- or sixteen-year-old had seen through everything. And he wasn''t even being discreet about it. But now, Anos cut to the heart of the matter. "I''m not here to blackmail you with this information. But what happened on Baterilla Island in my Tru Kingdom deserves an explanation from your Marine" His words were sharp, his presence intense, and for a moment, Aokiji sensed that the boy''s Conqueror''s Haki was on the verge of erupting. Had they not been in public, the air between them might have ignited. Aokiji chuckled. "That''s not for me to decide, Fleet Admiral Sengoku''s the one who''ll handle this. I''m just a messenger. It''s a hassle either way." Though his tone remained lazy, he knew full well the stakes. The Baterilla Island incident remains a haunting scar on the Marine''s legacy, a chilling reminder of their darkest failures, an incident that must never reach the public''s ears. Anos, with his knowledge, was a dangerous threat. Aokiji felt the weight of the situation pressing down. The Great Pirate Era was coming, just as the boy said. And with it, the Marines were already spread thin. They couldn''t afford to divert resources back to some small, distant kingdom in the South Blue. Anos knew this too. He was no fool. As confident as he seemed, he wasn''t delusional enough to believe his kingdom could stand against the might of the Marine. If it weren''t for the shifting tides of the Great Pirate Era, his kingdom would have been crushed by now for mastering the Rokushiki alone. Yet, as Aokiji and Anos finally reached the gates of the palace, the boy extended a courteous invitation. "Vice Admiral Aokiji, you''ve come so far. Why not stay a few days and experience our local customs? Maybe you could even offer guidance to the future leaders we''re cultivating." Aokiji smirked. "It''s rare to have some free time, but I wouldn''t want to impose, Your Majesty." "Oh, come on. I imagine you''ll be promoted to Admiral soon. The highest rank. I''m sure there''ll be plenty of chances to bother you in the future." Aokiji couldn''t help but raise an eyebrow. "Where''d you hear that from? You seem well-informed for a small Kingdom" Since he''d arrived, Aokiji couldn''t shake the feeling that he was being watched. Every move he made, every word he spoke this boy had anticipated them all. It was like being exposed, laid bare. A strange feeling for a seasoned vice admiral. It wasn''t Anos'' words that unnerved him. It was the sense that, despite his experience and rank, he was being completely outmanoeuvred by this boy who couldn''t be more than sixteen or seventeen. And that, perhaps, was the most troubling realization of all. Pov - End ----- Anos smiled, now that his goal had been achieved. At least in his own kingdom, this was his home court, and he would never be swayed by others. "I know a lot of things, more than you can imagine" Anos spoke calmly, and before anyone realized it, they were already in the palace. Before Aokiji could ask more questions, a guard approached and said respectfully to Anos, "Your Majesty, Haruya and the guard captain have led the army to attack the capital of the Roya Kingdom. The captain has sent word, seeking guidance on whether to proceed with a direct assault or await further orders." "Ah... things are progressing quickly," Anos remarked, glancing at the guard before turning to Aokiji. "Vice Admiral Aokiji, would you be interested in heading over there to observe?" "I don''t mind. It won''t hurt to take a look," Aokiji replied casually. After all, his primary mission here was to assess the strength of the Tru Kingdom''s military, and the battlefield would offer the best insights. "Tell Daiki to hold off for now. I''ll be bringing our Vice Admiral from the Marine Headquarters to witness the situation," Anos instructed the guard. Everything had already been planned. If Daiki wanted to consult on such matters, he could easily do so through a Den Den Mushi. There was no need to send a messenger for trivial updates. No one could quite understand what their king had in mind. The battle against Roya Kingdom was practically a foregone conclusion, and there were no significant threats. But Anos had his own thoughts. Initially, when he didn''t know that Aokiji had come to investigate, he had considered countless scenarios, even preparing for the worst case of facing Akainu. But he was confident that the Marine Headquarters wouldn''t send Akainu to this region. The fastest way to get to the capital of the Roya Kingdom was by sea, which would take at least two days. However, it had taken Daiki just five days to attack the enemy''s capital. Nearly none of the Roya Kingdom''s soldiers they encountered along the way had offered any resistance. Thus, they naturally arrived at their destination without much trouble. If they desired, they could storm into the Royal City of the Roya Kingdom without significant effort. Among the dozens of kingdoms in the South Blue, the Roya Kingdom''s military strength wasn''t particularly weak, but it wasn''t especially outstanding either. However, its other aspects have been notable in the past. This time, Anos had brought most of his kingdom''s high-ranking officials to witness the situation firsthand. As the royal ship set sail, Daiki and the others, who had already reached the Roya Kingdom''s capital, were waiting. The total number of troops the Tru Kingdom had sent to attack the Roya Kingdom amounted to about 10,000. Though the Roya Kingdom had a larger population and military, there was a significant difference. Since the current King of the Roya Kingdom had ascended the throne, he had faced widespread opposition from both the citizens and the military, which had been severely mismanaged. When the people of the Roya Kingdom saw the relatively better conditions in the Tru Kingdom, many of them stopped resisting. In several places, they even opened the city gates, welcoming the army of the Tru Kingdom. As a result, Daiki and his forces had faced little resistance and had already reached the Roya Kingdom''s capital. --- Two days later, when Anos and Aokiji arrived, they were greeted by an astonishing sight at the city walls. Standing atop the walls were not soldiers, but pirates, using the city''s inhabitants as human shields to prevent Daiki and his forces from entering. Remarkably, there was no sign of battle at the city gates. From start to finish, Daiki''s troops had not suffered any losses. In the five years since the new King of Roya had taken power, the kingdom had been ravaged to the point that words could hardly describe it. As the royal ship docked in the capital of the Roya Kingdom, Anos observed the scene with a smirk. "Vice Admiral Aokiji, what do you think of this?" Anos asked, still smiling. "Your Majesty, most of the troops within the city are under control, but the number of pirates inside far exceeds our expectations," Daiki said, standing beside Anos. "What''s going on? Why are there so many pirates in the Roya Kingdom?" Anos inquired. "Your Majesty, this is all tied to the King of the Roya Kingdom. Most of these pirates hail from the West Blue, and their total number is about 8,000. There are only two major pirate crews among them, but many are quite powerful." "The Roya''s King promised these pirates that if they helped him conquer the Tru Kingdom, they would be given all the treasures within our royal palace. That''s why so many pirates have come to assist the Roya Kingdom," Daiki explained respectfully. "What do you think, Vice Admiral?" Anos turned again to Aokiji. "Oh, King Tru, don''t involve me in this. I''m just here to observe, not to intervene," Aokiji replied lazily. "Are you ready?" Anos asked, glancing at Daiki. Daiki grinned, clearly understanding the signal. --- 24. Roya Kings Palace ---- It took so much effort to finally get Vice Admiral Aokiji from the Marine Headquarters to here. Naturally, he was not just here to watch. "Vice Admiral Aokiji, although I don''t expect you to take action this time, I just want to trouble you about something. There are so many pirates in the city. I wonder if you can use your strength to break the city gate?" Anos said. "This is a troublesome matter. It would be bad if our Fleet Admiral found out," Aokiji said lazily. "Vice Admiral, you misunderstood. I didn''t ask you to hurt anyone. I just wanted you to help me break the opponent''s city gate. This shouldn''t be a big problem for you, right?" Anos repeated. "With your people''s strength, it shouldn''t take much effort to open a city gate, right?" Aokiji wasn''t stupid but couldn''t pinpoint exactly what was happening. Still, he sensed that the little guy in front of him seemed to be tricking him. Seeing Aokiji still hesitating, Anos said in a deep voice to Daiki beside him, "Next, take down Royal City at all costs. By then, there will be no need to leave any pirates behind. Kill them all." "Your Majesty, those people¡­" "War inevitably causes losses. If Vice Admiral Aokiji doesn''t want to, we have to do this!" Anos said with a sombre face. "Okay, it''s just a door. I''ll help you," Aokiji responded, looking at Anos''s expression with helplessness. He had enjoyed good food and drink over the past few days, and doing such a thing didn''t violate the orders of Fleet Admiral Sengoku. Destroying a door doesn''t harm anyone, so there wouldn''t be any special consequences. Hearing that Aokiji had agreed, Anos''s smile immediately bloomed. He then exchanged a look with Daiki, who began retreating slowly. Just when Aokiji was about to act, a few people nearby aimed their Den Den Mushi at him. Not to mention how Aokiji could become an Admiral, he pressed his hand to the ground, and frost began spreading toward the gate. Although they were about a hundred meters away from the gate, this distance was no problem at all for someone on the verge of becoming an Admiral. The entire gate of the Roya Kingdom''s capital was sealed in ice in an instant. When the ice shattered, nothing could stop the Tru Kingdom''s forces. Of course, at the moment the gate shattered, hundreds of the Royal Guards using Geppo, along with many others moving swiftly, rushed to the city walls in an instant. The hostages were also rescued in an instant. As for the pirates, none of them on the city walls survived. However, every scene was recorded by the Den Den Mushi. This was all part of Anos''s plan. By the next morning, the newspaper gulls had already started delivering news about the day''s events, which immediately became headlines. The news that "The Roya Kingdom in the South Blue was occupied by pirates, and the Marine Headquarters Vice Admiral worked with the Tru Kingdom to rescue the Roya Kingdom" piqued everyone''s curiosity. The key moment was when Aokiji used his power to break open the Royal Capital''s gate, a whole photo of the act was displayed prominently in the newspaper. The headlines, content, and photos all confirmed the incident''s authenticity. Especially the image of pirates holding hostages emphasized the truth of the situation. Anos''s motive was to provide a pretext for occupying the Roya Kingdom. First, the pirates captured the Roya Kingdom, and their goal was to save the people there. Aokiji''s presence only added authenticity to the situation. After all, this was a solid demonstration from a Marine headquarters Vice Admiral. The witnesses, evidence, and facts were all laid out. Even though the Roya Kingdom had now become part of the Tru Kingdom, no one from the outside world dared to raise objections. Not even the World Government could object to this. Anos simply wanted the world to know. Otherwise, Daiki could have led his forces to invade the Royal Capital from the very beginning. He had delayed this long just to wait for this plan to unfold. A case of theft: this story is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation. Anos had every reason to believe in his judgment. Even if Marine Headquarters sent someone, the outcome would not change. Even Akainu, the most difficult to reason with, might be a hundred times more complicated than Aokiji but still easier to manage. Akainu is someone who upholds absolute justice in the Marines. He would never allow pirates to create such threats. Now that all his goals had been achieved, Aokiji still didn''t realize that he had been used. "Losta, count how many Beris there are in the entire Roya Royal Palace. When the time comes, all of it will be used for the people of Roya Kingdom," Anos ordered as soon as he entered the city gate, calling out to Losta behind him. Before the king''s capital was fully taken, Anos was already thinking about how to divide the spoils. Even the usually lazy Aokiji looked at Anos with disdain. Losta walked forward gracefully, adjusting her glasses, and said elegantly, "Don''t worry, Your Majesty. I''m happy to take care of such matters." "We''ve occupied the Royal Capital now, and there are likely no more obstacles. As for the Devil Fruit users in Roya''s Royal City, Daiki and the others will be responsible for capturing them. Keeping them alive will serve me well later," Anos said to Daiki. "Yes, Your Majesty¡­" "What do you plan to do with those Devil Fruit users?" Aokiji asked curiously. "Of course, they must be executed. These people have already caused me to lose many soldiers, so they must pay the price," Anos replied bluntly. However, he didn''t explain the real reason. In this world, countless people have Devil Fruit powers. Although no one knows where these fruits come from, Anos had at least figured out one thing how to control the location where a Devil Fruit reappears after its user dies. Since gaining space-based abilities, Anos has learned to manipulate spatial barriers. Though this area wasn''t vast, it was more than sufficient. Aokiji glanced at the young ruler beside him. It was hard to believe this kid had such cunning tactics at the age of sixteen. When he saw the newspaper, he might just go mad. Aokiji marvelled at the discipline and teamwork of the Tru Kingdom''s troops. It shocked him that most of them were trained in the Rokushiki, with team coordination even stricter than the Marines. A kingdom that was once in such a state of ruin could develop so significantly in just two or three years. Aokiji found it truly unimaginable. What would this little guy become when he grows up? What intrigued Aokiji more, and the main reason he had been following Anos, was understanding how Anos knew so much about the Marine Headquarters and the New World. The people In the Roya Kingdom did not resist as expected, especially those in the royal city. Some of them even danced and celebrated that Anos had brought the army to liberate them. After all, to prepare for this moment, he had spent a lot of money to produce a pamphlet for the Tru Kingdom, explaining the benefits they would enjoy after becoming citizens of the Tru Kingdom. Although the Roya Kingdom does not belong to the World Government, those within the World Government remain very concerned about the situation in South Blue. If the Tru Kingdom merges with the Roya Kingdom, it could become the largest Kingdom in the entire South Blue region. However, the Roya Kingdom is in such poor condition now that it''s unclear how long it will take to recover. At the very least, it will take more than two years for it to reach the level of the Tru Kingdom, mainly because its population and land area are much larger. "Mr. Aokiji, I wonder what you think after seeing the guards of my Tru Kingdom today?" Anos asked as he walked alongside Aokiji. In this royal city, the two of them seemed to be walking as if it were their own Kingdom, without any sense of discomfort. Aokiji was even more surprised. He hadn''t expected this little guy to ask him such a question. It was true that he had initially wanted to investigate the Tru Kingdom''s army, and what he discovered this time surprised him. The Marine''s Rokushiki skills seemed to be employed more skillfully here, and their training methods appeared even more effective than those in the Marine. After thinking for a moment, Aokiji said leisurely, "It''s quite impressive. I hope you can maintain law and order here and prevent pirates from appearing in the South Blue. That would be your greatest achievement." "I think you can rest assured on that point. At least within my jurisdiction, such a situation won''t happen," Anos replied. "Oh, I''ve come across such a complicated situation this time. How am I supposed to report it when I return to Marine Headquarters?" Aokiji asked, looking troubled. "What if you just tell the truth?" Anos asked curiously. "Didn''t you mention earlier that after merging the Roya Kingdom with the Tru Kingdom, the World Government would send people to observe you, and most likely CP agents would come to your Kingdom?" Aokiji said. "Is that what you''re worried about? There''s no need. In the South Blue, there''s nothing here worthy of the World Government''s full attention. In the end, they just want us to join the World Government. If there''s no downside, we''ll join. It won''t harm our Kingdom," Anos said with a smile. "I remember you saying something different two days ago. Didn''t you say that joining the World Government meant serving the Celestial Dragons and paying the heavenly tribute, which could lead to serious suffering for our people?" Aokiji squinted at Anos. "Does Vice Admiral Aokiji believe the Celestial Dragons are short on money? They already live in luxury. At least when it comes to wealth, there''s no need to worry. When the time comes, I''ll offer them a few rare treasures to replace the heavenly tribute," Anos said. "I''m really curious about what you''ll be like in the future, and even more curious about how far this Kingdom will develop. But I don''t want you to push the boundaries with Marine Headquarters. If that happens, I won''t be able to help you," Aokiji said. "I''m not as reckless as you think. I''m quite content staying in this peaceful corner. There''s no need to clash with the World Government & Marine''s," Anos replied with a grin. "Then that''s for the best." Aokiji was now really curious about what kind of strength Anos had. Was Anos a Devil Fruit user? From the time he arrived until now, he had never seen Anos take action, and his behaviour had been completely normal. This unsettled Aokiji the most. Without realizing it, the two had followed the army and arrived in front of the Roya King''s palace. There had been no resistance along the way, only some trouble from pirates. But now, in front of the palace, almost all the pirates causing trouble had been arrested, including those with Devil Fruit abilities. However, the palace gave everyone a foreboding feeling. If you used Haki to observe, you could sense a very sinister presence inside, as if something that shouldn''t exist in this world was there. "Do you feel it?" Anos asked, glancing seriously at Aokiji. "Of course. I''ve got a bad feeling about this." Aokiji dropped his lazy demeanour and matched Anos''s serious expression. "Daiki, have everyone retreat immediately. Without my order, no one is allowed within 500 meters of the palace. Put everyone on high alert, and make sure you''re prepared for battle," Anos called to Daiki, who stood nearby. Then, in a low voice, he said to Haruya, "Haruya, evacuate the city''s residents as fast as possible. You must do this quickly and thoroughly." ---- 25. Big Dawg --- No one understood what had happened. Although Daiki believed in Anos, he was still stunned upon hearing these words. "What are you standing there for? Hurry up and get ready!" Anos yelled again. It was only at this moment that everyone realized the situation had become very serious. Even when attacking the Roya Kingdom, Level 1 combat readiness had never been called for. Even Aokiji, as a Marine, felt a chill from what was hidden in the Royal Palace of the Roya Kingdom. At this moment, all the guards of the Tru Kingdom, who had been surrounding the area, began to retreat quickly. Losta, now commanding these guards, ordered the people outside the palace to leave. Nobody knew what was hidden in the palace, but the only certainty was that it wasn''t something simple. The release of powerful energy sent shivers down people''s spines. Daiki commanded all the guards to assist Losta in helping the people retreat. However, at that moment, blue smoke began to emit from the palace, spreading in all directions. People inside the palace began running out in a frenzy as if their lives depended on it. "Vice Admiral Aokiji, have you seen anything?" Anos asked seriously. "It seems like a Devil Fruit power. The user hasn''t mastered it yet. If it spreads among the Citizens, no one in the entire city will survive," Aokiji replied with a grim expression. "I came here just to investigate, but the situation has escalated. I might have to step in." "Daiki, Losta, hurry and arrange the retreat!" Anos shouted as he prepared to rush inside. As the smoke thickened, those who hadn''t yet escaped began collapsing to the ground, while those who had already started fleeing scrambled for the exits. "King Tru, this situation is getting tricky. This is an issue between your two Kingdoms, so it''s not convenient for me to get too involved," Aokiji said, preferring to observe from the sidelines. After all, inter-nation conflicts weren''t something he could directly interfere with. His main role now was to prevent suffering among the civilians. Beyond that, he couldn''t do much. Anos didn''t push further but smiled, saying, "I hope Vice Admiral Aokiji will ensure the safety of these people. As for the rest, our Royal Guards can handle it." Suddenly, a dog-like creature emerged from the palace. Calling it a dog, though, didn''t quite capture its size this beast stood nearly as tall as a building, around 20 meters high. Smoke billowed from its body, making it hard to describe it as merely a dog. "Help!" "Someone, help me!" Those attempting to flee from the palace screamed as they ran. "Damn it! What is the King of Roya thinking, feeding a Devil Fruit to a dog?" Anos said angrily. Fortunately, the creature hadn''t mastered the Devil Fruit powers, making it unable to fully utilize its abilities. Anos didn''t hesitate. The demon sword Muramasa appeared in his hand. Aokiji, watching with curiosity, wanted to see the strength of the person who had trained the Royal Guards to such a high level. What kind of power did their king possess? When the demon sword appeared, Aokiji couldn''t help but be impressed. As someone who had lived for decades, he could tell that the sword in Anos'' hand was no ordinary weapon. Anos used Geppo (Moonwalk) to swiftly close the distance, instantly appearing two hundred meters away from the massive dog. A swift slash of his sword followed, but what happened next shocked everyone. The sword''s light passed through the creature without harming it. The genuine version of this novel can be found on another site. Support the author by reading it there. "A Logia-type?" Anos was speechless. Without Haki, both the guards and the civilians would have been helpless against this creature. The beast was using natural energy, emitting demonic energy uncontrollably. Normal attacks were useless! At this moment, the only one in the entire Tru Kingdom who could properly wield Haki was Anos. But even with Haki, approaching this massive beast seemed impossible, rendering any efforts futile. Meanwhile, the people of the city had begun evacuating in an orderly manner, aided by the Royal Guards. Yet, fear gripped them all as they saw the enormous creature. None could deny the terror they felt. The Roya Kingdom had unleashed something unimaginable, and Anos was convinced that no one in the palace had survived the Devil Fruit''s destructive power. "I didn''t expect him to be a swordsman. But without Haki..." Aokiji muttered, watching Anos battle. Before he could finish speaking, he saw Anos''s arms turn black as Haki infused into Muramasa. "Zero Edge!" A slash imbued with Haki flew straight toward the gigantic canine creature. The beast, sensing the threat, howled and moved to counterattack, sending smoke rolling toward Anos. But the sword''s energy struck first, and with a single blow, the massive creature fell to the ground. With the beast''s death, the Devil Fruit''s power dissipated. The palace grounds fell into eerie silence. No one had survived, their faces frozen in the fear they had felt moments before. Initially, there had been a great buildup of energy, possibly the result of the Devil Fruit, but now, there was no longer anything to fear. The conflict between the Tru Kingdom and the Roya Kingdom had ended. In the end, none of the Roya Kingdom''s royal family had survived. "A flying slash? Impressive!" Aokiji mused to himself. Even though the creature had been unable to control the Devil Fruit''s powers, the energy it radiated had been overwhelming. For a swordsman to unleash such flying slashes, Anos was clearly beyond the ordinary. To have reached this level at such a young age was an achievement most could only dream of. Still, Aokiji didn''t realize that Anos''s strength was far greater than what he had shown. After the battle, Anos descended from the sky. The Roya Kingdom was no longer a threat, they simply needed to annex the territory peacefully. But for everyone involved, this battle had been a harrowing experience. Fortunately, it was over now. This incident would make headlines across the kingdom''s newspapers. "Thank you, Vice Admiral Aokiji, for everything you''ve done for us," Anos said, approaching Aokiji. "Quite surprising. King Tru was right to be cautious. I didn''t expect such skill from you," Aokiji responded calmly. "I didn''t expect the Vice Admiral to say such things. Wielding a sword is merely self-defence, nothing more," Anos replied with a smile. "Your Majesty, now that the situation in the palace is resolved, do the people still need to evacuate?" Daiki asked, stepping forward respectfully. "No need. You and Losta should take a headcount of the citizens in the Roya Kingdom. Follow Tru Kingdom''s rules, counting each family. We''ll also need to assess their living conditions, as these people will soon be our citizens. Treat them well," Anos instructed. "Understood, Your Majesty." "Now that your kingdom''s matters are settled, I''ve learned what I needed, so I''ll be heading back to Marine headquarters to report on the situation," Aokiji said. Anos, respecting the formalities, still extended the offer, "Are you sure you won''t stay for a while? As the Vice Admiral, it would be our pleasure to host you." "It''s not necessary. This place is too complicated right now. It''s best for both of us if I leave quickly," Aokiji responded. With that, Aokiji turned to leave, not giving Anos the chance to insist further. As he walked away, a smile spread across Anos''s lips. The real fun was just beginning. "Losta, ensure the people know that Vice Admiral Aokiji came to the Tru Kingdom to assist us in saving Roya. Spread the word about our alliance with the Marines," Anos said. "Don''t worry, Your Majesty. Everything is arranged," Losta replied, adjusting her glasses. "Now, let''s explore the Roya Kingdom''s luxurious palace. Maybe we''ll relocate here someday," Anos remarked, stepping toward the palace. "Should we clean it up first?" Losta asked. "Is that necessary? Let''s explore the palace first" Anos replied. "Understood, Your Majesty." Losta followed as Anos led the way. Inside the palace, the wealth was evident. Despite the Roya Kingdom''s poverty, the royal family had spared no expense in building this palace. Anos didn''t pay much attention to it. No one was going to clean up the remnants in King Roya''s palace now, as most people had already gone to maintain order. Although almost no one in the entire Roya Kingdom opposed the invasion by the Tru Kingdom, there were still many who sought to take advantage of the chaos. Anos stepped over the corpses and strode toward the palace with a commanding presence. With every step he took, the surroundings only reinforced a single impression: luxury. For a place as impoverished as the Roya Kingdom, the construction of such a palace must have demanded significant sacrifice and labour from its people. The highest point of the palace towered about a hundred meters into the air. Its facade bore a resemblance to European architectural styles, and the massive columns that lined the entrance were nothing short of awe-inspiring. Upon stepping through the palace gates and seeing the marble laid out on the ground, even someone with little experience could sense how costly it was. The floor gleamed, polished to a smoothness that mirrored one''s reflection. No trees flanked the road on either side; instead, a vast expanse of neatly maintained lawn stretched out in front of the entrance. The vibrant green of the grass was inviting, tempting anyone to lie down and rest upon it. The road underfoot extended straight ahead, and every detail along the way was meticulously designed. This path led from the palace''s main gate all the way to the grand hall. The distance was at least three hundred meters, and due to the demonic power unleashed by the massive dog, the entire road was littered with corpses. No one had taken the time to count them precisely, but there were undoubtedly at least a thousand bodies scattered across the grounds. --- 26. Kingdom of Roya - ---- The corpses in front of him no longer shocked him. Perhaps he had gradually adapted to such an environment. After all, since arriving in this world, he had to face such scenes frequently. For him, there was no room for kindness anymore. He stepped over the corpses and slowly made his way toward the palace hall, while Losta followed closely with a few others. If it weren''t for the presence of so many corpses, the palace scenery could be described as perfect. Even with the bodies scattered about, its beauty was hardly diminished. However, upon entering the palace, everyone was astonished by the opulence inside. The dome was circular, rising at least fifty meters high. In the vast hall, even the sound of their breathing echoed. At the top of the hall sat the throne, clearly belonging to the King of Roya. The golden seat was made of pure gold. A massive red gemstone, nearly two meters wide, was embedded at the top. It was large enough to seat two or three people. The walls and pillars of the palace were adorned with gold. Decorating the hall alone must have cost billions of Beris. As a kingdom with a vast land area, the Roya Kingdom had subjected its citizens to harsh living conditions. It was unimaginable just how extravagant the king must have been. There were no corpses in the hall they must have fled. This only enhanced the elegance and luxury of the setting. The dome of the palace was entirely made of glass, allowing sunlight to pour in and making the entire palace appear even more magnificent. "Your Majesty, this place is truly astounding!" Losta exclaimed in awe, clearly overwhelmed by the grandeur. "I wonder how many lives were sacrificed to build this. But now, I''m more curious about one thing just how much treasure does this king have in his vault?" Anos smiled as he spoke. "Your Majesty, we will make an inventory as soon as possible and report back," Losta responded. Did you know this text is from a different site? Read the official version to support the creator. "What do you think about relocating the palace here in the future?" Anos asked. "It''s not impossible, but the two places are far apart. I think the location of our palace in Tru Kingdom is better. The Nanniwa Port has been established and refined, and all commerce is centred there. This place isn''t as convenient," Losta replied. "You''re right, but it''s a shame to let such a magnificent structure go to waste," Anos said with a sigh. "The commercial plans I had in mind will be implemented here as soon as possible. After staying here for two days, we''ll head back." "Let''s organize the plans thoroughly. I don''t expect cities like Seavane City and Moonveil to reach our current state within two years, but at the very least, we must solve the people''s survival issues within that time. What comes next will be your responsibility." "You must provide me with a plan before we return. You''re not only the kingdom''s treasurer but also the protector of the people''s welfare." Anos spoke calmly to Losta, with a poker face. Losta, despite her cautious demeanour, felt a surge of excitement within. This was a monumental project, and even she had to approach it with great care. Fortunately, she and his team had already been planning, so now it was just a matter of fine-tuning based on the current situation of the kingdom. When Losta was first recognized by Anos, she was just a palace official responsible for external communications. Anos had been impressed by her cleverness and quick thinking, promoting her from the lowest rank to a top position within the kingdom. Anos''s decision had proven wise. Losta had demonstrated immense value in managing Tru Kingdom''s affairs. From the poverty of the Kingdom''s early days to the profound changes achieved in just over two years, while the plans were issued by Anos, Losta was the one who executed them, often exceeding expectations. Now, hearing about this new mission, Losta felt less anxiety and more responsibility. Pushing up her glasses, Losta crossed her hands at her waist and bowed respectfully. "Your Majesty, rest assured, I will present a thorough plan in two days." "You have worked hard on this, and the kingdom will not forget your contributions. You will be rewarded for all your efforts." "Your Majesty is too kind," Losta replied quickly. Anos looked at the bent-over Losta and patted her shoulder reassuringly. Though Losta was nearly ten years older than Anos, her sharp thinking commanded everyone''s respect. "Let''s see what happened to the King of Roya. I wonder where he''s fallen?" Anos said with a smile. "King of Roya? Your Majesty, that large man lying in front of the hall earlier must have been King of Roya!" Losta suddenly remembered. When they first entered, he had noticed the large, lifeless figure wearing a crown. There were no other people left in the palace, so most had died outside. As for the king, a man of little physical strength, he couldn''t have escaped faster than the others. "Really? Then we''d better go have a look..." Anos, filled with childlike curiosity, walked outside. He hadn''t paid much attention to the corpses earlier. But now, stepping out, he saw the massive figure of at least five or six hundred pounds lying on the ground. His luxurious attire, unique to the Roya Kingdom, and the ornate crown on his head, adorned with dozens of large gems, confirmed his identity. --- 27. King of Roya - 2 --- As for the big fat man''s face, no one cared to see it. He was dead now, and Anos didn''t even think about taking one last look at him. The air in the grand hall seemed to thicken with the stench of death, yet Anos remained unfazed. His sharp eyes scanned the lifeless body sprawled on the floor, his contempt hidden beneath a stoic expression. "I''ve never seen what he looked like before, and I don''t care to know now. What matters is that he''s dead, and that''s enough," Anos muttered, his voice cold, cutting through the heavy silence of the room. The room itself, once a symbol of wealth and power, now seemed hollow. The golden tapestries that hung on the walls had lost their sheen, and the once-polished marble floors were now stained with dirt and blood. It was a kingdom in ruins, a Kingdom brought to its knees by years of misrule and negligence. The man who had once ruled it, the "King" was now nothing more than a corpse, a reminder of how quickly power could slip through one''s fingers. After kneeling beside the body and inspecting it for a moment, Anos confirmed the man''s identity. His lip curled in disgust as he stood back up, wiping his hands as though the mere act of being near the dead king had sullied him. "I don''t know how this guy survived all these years. As a king, leaving your Kingdom in such a disgraceful state before dying is shameful beyond measure," Anos said, his voice laced with disdain. He turned sharply toward Losta, his trusted aide, who stood respectfully a few paces behind. Losta was a young woman, her sharp features framed by dark hair pulled back in a tight braid. She had always been efficient, resourceful, and loyal a perfect fit for the role she played in Anos'' court. "Losta, make sure to take whatever valuables he has left on him. He certainly won''t need them where he''s going. Have everything sent to the treasury. We''ll need every resource we can gather to restore this kingdom," Anos ordered. "Of course, Your Majesty. I''ll handle it personally," Losta replied with a confident smile. She stepped forward, her sharp eyes already assessing what could be salvaged from the dead king''s robes. His jewelled rings and the gilded sceptre would undoubtedly fetch a good price. As Anos spoke, a few of the soldiers behind him exchanged uneasy glances. Though the man lying dead before them had been a failed king, he had still worn the crown. And now, only moments after his death, his body was being stripped of its worth. Some of the younger soldiers, still new to the harsh realities of war and power, found the sight unsettling. But Anos was beyond caring for appearances. The king had brought his downfall upon himself, and sentimentality had no place in this moment. His kingdom had been ravaged enough. Now, it was time to build something new, something stronger. A sense of grim satisfaction settled over the room. The body of the fallen king was still warm, yet already, the remnants of his reign were being swept away, as if he had never truly existed at all. --- Outside the Palace A case of literary theft: this tale is not rightfully on Amazon; if you see it, report the violation. The palace courtyard was alive with activity, a stark contrast to the cold stillness inside. People milled about, no longer afraid, their faces lit with hope and relief. The oppressive rule that had hung over them like a dark cloud had finally lifted, and now, for the first time in years, the citizens of the Tru Kingdom felt the stirrings of freedom. "Captain Daiki, there are too many people unwilling to leave. They all want to see our king. What should we do?" A young guard approached Daiki, his face creased with concern as he gestured toward the throng of people that had gathered outside the palace gates. Daiki, captain of the royal guard, stood tall and imposing in his armour, his expression a mix of frustration and responsibility. He scanned the streets, which were packed with citizens who had once been on the verge of fleeing. Now that the "big dog" had been defeated, the threat was gone, and everyone wanted to return home. But they weren''t just going back they wanted a glimpse of their saviour, the king who had fought to restore peace. The streets were overcrowded, but the atmosphere was jubilant. There was no fear or anger in the air, only smiles, laughter, and the buzz of excited voices. "Everyone wants to see the face of His Majesty," the guard continued. "At least to remember what the king who came to save them looks like." Daiki sighed deeply, running a hand over his short, cropped hair. He wasn''t accustomed to seeing this kind of enthusiasm. In his experience, people in conquered territories were often fearful or desperate to escape. But here, even after being occupied, the ordinary citizens seemed filled with joy, as if they finally had something or someone to believe in. "Captain, how should we proceed?" the guard asked again, looking to Daiki for guidance. After a moment''s thought, Daiki spoke. "Let them be for now. But keep an eye on the crowd. Maintain order and ensure nothing gets out of hand. There''s always a chance that someone in that crowd might hold ill intentions toward His Majesty. We can''t afford to be careless." "Yes, sir," the guard responded quickly before hurrying off to relay the orders. Daiki watched him go, his gaze eventually drifting toward the palace. He, too, wanted to catch a glimpse of Anos, to see the man who had brought them this victory. But as captain of the king''s guard, his duty came first. His priorities were clear, and maintaining the kingdom''s newfound peace was paramount. On the surface, Daiki appeared calm and composed, but beneath the armour, the weight of his responsibilities pressed heavily on him. He wasn''t just a guard captain; he was essentially the general of the entire kingdom, managing its military might, defending its borders, and supporting its king. And now that the kingdom was beginning to rebuild, Daiki knew his role would be more crucial than ever. --- Elsewhere in the Palace "Ryze, come here," Daiki called out, spotting one of his trusted men a few feet away. Ryze, who had been chatting with some of the younger soldiers, immediately straightened up and hurried over to his captain. "Captain Daiki, what are your orders?" Ryze asked, saluting with respect. "How are the captured pirates? His Majesty made it clear that any Devil Fruit users must be contained and monitored closely," Daiki said, his tone stern. Ryze nodded quickly. "They''re all under control, Captain. Each one has been fitted with Seastone restraints. They''re being held in reinforced cages, and there''s no chance of an escape. We''ve taken every precaution." "Good. And how many Devil Fruit users have been identified?" Daiki pressed. "We''ve confirmed eleven in total, all captured in the Roya Kingdom. According to their interrogations, they''re from the West Blue. We''ve documented their abilities in detail, and we can present the reports to you and His Majesty whenever you''re ready," Ryze reported, his voice steady and precise. "Make sure not to let your guard down. This is when mistakes are most likely to happen. Keep your men on high alert," Daiki instructed. --- The Following Day The excitement in the Tru Kingdom had not yet died down, but now the attention of the world was focused elsewhere on the Marine Headquarters. News of the Tru Kingdom''s recent actions had spread like wildfire, reaching every corner of the pirate world. The Roya Kingdom had been attacked by the Tru Kingdom, but the newspapers highlighted how its citizens were saved by a force led by none other than Vice Admiral Aokiji. Even the World Government, upon seeing the reports, was left powerless to intervene, their influence over the situation slipping through their fingers. As the story spread, the name of the Tru Kingdom reached the lips of every pirate, Marine, and government official in the world. It was no longer a mere footnote in the South Blue. It had become a Kingdom of importance, one whose alliance with the Marines was now clear. The headlines blared, "We are forever friends with the Marine," ensuring that the whole world knew of the kingdom''s allegiance. --- 28. Latest News --- The latest newspaper stirred up significant attention, making waves across the world. Not only did it contain news of the alliance between the Tru Kingdom and the Marines, but it also featured photographs of Anos and Aokiji in conversation. The most noteworthy aspect is that Anos wouldn''t miss this chance to promote his Kingdom. The various flashy advertisements were hard to ignore. In this era, few people fully understand the power of such marketing strategies. Meanwhile, at Marine Headquarters, everyone was left in shock. Aokiji hadn''t even returned to Marine Headquarters yet, but the Den Den Mushi in his pocket had rung countless times already. ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª At Marine Headquarters: "Wow, Bwahaha¡­" Laughter echoed as Garp glanced at Sengoku, unable to contain himself after seeing the newspaper. "Garp, you idiot, stop laughing! Don''t you want to go back to East Blue? Get out of here, and don''t let me see you again!" Sengoku shouted, his temper flaring. But Garp continued to grin and munch on his snacks as if nothing had happened, still holding the newspaper. The most prominent part displayed pictures of Anos and Aokiji together. "I didn''t think we old-timers would be outplayed by a young king. The key to rescuing a Kingdom overtaken by pirates with the help of a Vice Admiral. That kid made a clever move. Even the World Government is probably having a headache now, and yet they can''t say a word." Garp chuckled, but there was a note of admiration in his voice. Taking control of a kingdom without drawing criticism was a truly brilliant strategy. The key point is that with this newspaper''s publication, Marine Headquarters is now seen as having formed an agreement with the Tru Kingdom. The involvement of a Marine Vice Admiral means there''s no way for Marine Headquarters to avoid responsibility. "Garp, what do you think we should do now? I specifically told Aokiji before he left not to get involved in any conflict between the two Kingdoms. But now look at this! Everything has been announced so openly." Stolen content alert: this content belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences. Sengoku''s frustration hadn''t subsided. "What''s the point of dwelling on it now? Instead of that, why not figure out what the young king wants? This whole situation feels like a chessboard, and we''ve been pulled right into it," Garp replied. However, Anos''s intention, from the moment he arrived in Logue Town and allowed his subordinates free rein, was to ensure the involvement of a Marine, thereby demonstrating trust between his Kingdom and Marine Headquarters. Although the situation had evolved, the outcome still aligned with his goals. The war between the two Kingdoms had only escalated the situation, pushing everything to a breaking point. Now, Marines found itself in a tight spot. The last thing they wanted was to get caught up in such a complex situation. The Marines uphold absolute justice, remaining neutral to all Kingdoms and powers. But now, this incident had tipped the scales of their so-called justice. Regardless, this event had a massive impact on the Marines, and they were powerless to stop it. The era of pirates had arrived, and as all the forces on the sea converged, piracy had reached its peak. The Marines were already stretched thin dealing with pirates. Handling the distant Tru Kingdom, where the influence of the World Government was weak, was almost impossible. The South Blue, one of the weakest of the four seas, meant that even if something significant occurred there, Marine Headquarters could only suppress the news. In the office of Fleet Admiral Sengoku at Marine Headquarters, Garp and Sengoku exchanged glances, both feeling a mix of frustration and helplessness. Garp, however, wasn''t too bothered, but Sengoku, the strategic mind of the Marines, was deep in thought. His usual sharp intellect was at a loss for solutions. "I''ll head back tomorrow. This won''t have much of an effect on the Marines. I doubt the King of Tru will do anything drastic. We''ll wait until the pirate situation settles, then handle it," Garp said. "That''s all we can do." Sengoku agreed. ---- What they didn''t realize was that in the coming days, the economic development of the Tru Kingdom would accelerate rapidly. All merchant ships began flying the flag of the Tru Kingdom alongside the Marine emblem, allowing them to sail freely. Even if they encountered pirates, there was no need for fear. Most pirates wouldn''t dare to attack them. This was precisely Anos''s plan. Money is the lifeblood of his Kingdom, and this was the cheapest and simplest way to maximize its benefits. After this incident, other neighbouring Kingdoms may have entertained thoughts about the Tru Kingdom, but its power was enough to make them reconsider any aggressive actions. With the downfall of the Roya Kingdom, the Tru Kingdom had risen to become the largest Kingdom in South Blue. The population of the Tru Kingdom also became the largest among all South Blue Kingdoms. Anos decided not to use the opulent Roya Palace after taking over the kingdom. Instead, he ordered its demolition, placing all valuable items in the royal treasury. Using the old Roya Palace would have only given critics something to gossip about, and it wouldn''t have benefited the Tru Kingdom at all. The Royal Palace of Tru, situated near the coast, became the centre of the kingdom''s economic growth. These developments were crucial and could not be neglected. Anos didn''t share the same mindset as the previous King of Roya. He didn''t see the point in living luxuriously when the Kingdom''s economy could be improved instead. Most rulers didn''t think this way or didn''t even have the concept of doing so. These kings rarely valued their inherited thrones, which is why their Kingdoms had fallen into poverty. One month after the incident, the first major summit was held in the Royal Palace of Tru. Hundreds of participants attended the meeting as the Tru Kingdom prepared to implement sweeping reforms. --- 29. Reforms -1 --- Early in the Morning The entire perimeter of the palace was filled with people, most of them were ordinary citizens. Naturally, there were guards present to maintain order. Since the transition from the Roya Kingdom to the Tru Kingdom, the people had been eagerly anticipating this meeting. After all, this could be the moment that would change their destiny. Not only the people of Roya but also the original citizens of Tru placed great importance on the event. Many had travelled thousands of miles to witness the meeting firsthand, eager to learn about its outcome as soon as possible. Such a prosperous gathering was rare, even in a world as vast and varied as One Piece. The crowd continued to swell, with more and more people arriving by the minute. Anos, who was inside the palace & was well aware of the situation outside. However, he felt somewhat helpless given the sheer size of the gathering. Before the meeting began, he had arranged a national live broadcast, but only a few people stood in front of the broadcast stations. Daiki, the person in charge of security for the event, stood on top of the palace walls and addressed the crowd below. "Everyone, I am Daiki, the Captain of the Royal Guards. His Majesty has ordered that no one may enter the palace due to overcrowding. His Majesty has placed live broadcast stations in every district where you can watch this important meeting." Most of the people had never seen a live broadcast before, which explained why they had gathered at the palace gates. After hearing Daiki''s announcement, he and the King''s Guard began explaining the situation to the crowd. The process lasted over half an hour, but eventually, the crowd began to disperse. For those who refused to leave, an additional live broadcast station was set up in front of the palace. Unlike the typical live broadcast using Den Den Mushi, these stations were items that Anos had acquired through special means, offering more stability. After all, obtaining a Den Den Mushi capable of live broadcasting was nearly impossible at the moment. They had to be raised from a young age, or they would be entirely useless. Inside the palace hall, the large space was filled with tables and chairs. Since the meeting could last a while, standing discussions were not allowed. Stolen content warning: this content belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences. Many unfamiliar faces could be seen at the gathering. Anos presided over the meeting, with Losta responsible for its content. They had been discussing these matters for several days, and the agenda would unfold slowly. Everyone seated remained attentive and maintained a high level of focus. No one chatted or made eye contact; all were eagerly awaiting Anos''s arrival and the official start of the nation''s new chapter. The meeting was scheduled to begin at 8 a.m., and the King''s Guard was tasked with safeguarding both the interior and exterior of the palace. Due to the recent prominence of the Tru Kingdom in the headlines, even newspapers from the New World had sent reporters to cover the event. At Anos''s Residence "Your Majesty, the meeting is about to begin. Are you ready?" Outside the door, servants and maids called out softly. Shortly after, Anos opened the door. His appearance was strikingly different today. Dressed in standard royal attire, a white uniform with a light yellow shirt beneath and a white bow tie, Anos looked perfect, as if the outfit was made for him. A golden crown rested on his head, simple yet elegant, without any gemstones. "Has everyone arrived?" Anos asked the maid, who was bowing as she greeted him. "Your Majesty, everyone has gathered and is waiting for you," she replied. Most attendees had arrived long before dawn, with some arriving as early as 6 a.m. They had been sitting and waiting for the meeting to begin. Anos nodded slightly, then retrieved a thick stack of documents from his room. "Take this, and let''s go," he instructed the maid as he handed her the papers. Anos himself placed great importance on the meeting. After all, it involved the Kingdom''s future, and opportunities like this did not come often. Now that the kingdom had been stabilized, the next step would be comprehensive economic development. As long as the flow of money Continued, the rest would fall into place. Outside, whether it was the live broadcast station in the capital or the former Roya Kingdom, all live broadcast stations in the cities were packed with people. The army was on hand to prevent overcrowding and damage. Citizens had abandoned their daily tasks to gather at these stations, eager to find out what benefits might come to them as a result of this meeting. Despite the crowds, a surprising calm filled the air. No one argued about who was in the front or who was behind. By 6 a.m., the live broadcast had already begun. The palace hall was empty at first, but it soon filled with people as the start of the meeting drew closer. The people were anxious, unsure of how this meeting would impact their lives. However, after nearly a month of promotion, everyone understood that the meeting would address the future direction of the kingdom. "It''s His Majesty!" "His Majesty has arrived!" In an instant, all eyes turned to Anos as he entered the palace hall, dressed in royal attire. Cheers erupted from the crowd, as it was the first time many had seen their king in person. Though he was young, no one dared to underestimate him. Inside the palace hall, everyone immediately stood and bowed when Anos appeared. As he reached his seat, Anos smiled and said, "Please, be seated! Today''s discussions will be lengthy, and this is a meeting for the entire Kingdom. I hope we can all stay focused and make decisions that can be implemented on schedule." "Yes, Your Majesty. We will adhere to the principles of the meeting," Losta responded respectfully. Anos sat down at the head of the hall. A camera was positioned at the front, far superior to a Den Den Mushi in terms of both image clarity and sound quality, with no risk of interference. Once Anos was seated, the others followed, all sitting upright with serious, focused expressions. --- 30. Reforms -2 --- This is a live broadcast for the entire Kingdom. Any misstep could attract widespread criticism. It was the first time Anos had handled such an event, but he maintained an air of calm and indifference as if he had done this countless times. "Your Majesty, here is the agenda for today''s meeting, as per your request," said Suzu, who acted as the secretary for the occasion, looking particularly stylish. Suzu wore formal professional attire: her hair was neatly tied in a bun, with a white blouse, a pencil skirt, black stockings, and five-centimetre heels. She looked poised, elegant, and impeccably professional. "Just set everything down for now. Sit close by and be ready to take notes when necessary," Anos replied softly, a gentle smile on his face. "Yes, Your Majesty," Suzu responded, bowing slightly before taking her place nearby. After Suzu sat down, Anos adjusted his royal attire and straightened his posture. The crown on his head gleamed under the light, emphasizing his composed and dignified presence. Meanwhile, the technical crew moved swiftly, positioning the camera about five meters away, ensuring that every detail of the king''s appearance was captured for the kingdom-wide broadcast. Now, all the live screens across the Kingdom of Tru displayed Anos. A deep silence fell over the room, and the entire Kingdom seemed to hold its breath. The weight of the moment was palpable no one spoke, and the air itself seemed to be still. Even the faintest sounds, from the soft rustle of clothing to the quietest breaths, could be heard. Anos cleared his throat twice before smiling warmly. With a wave of his hand, he began, "Greetings, people of the Tru Kingdom. Some of you may not yet know me, so let me introduce myself. I am Anos Drexus your king. I am just an ordinary man, living in the same land as you." "It is both an honour and a privilege to serve as your king, and it is an even greater blessing to call you my people. This is not only my pride but also my responsibility" "More than two years ago, when I ascended the throne, I made a vow: to ensure that the people of Tru, live the prosperous lives you deserve. My goal was simple no one in this kingdom should have to worry about their next meal, shelter from the cold, or their safety" "As the King of Tru, today marks the first national live broadcast meeting. The purpose of this meeting is to lay out our vision for the future and explain how we will achieve it." "Whether you are an original citizen of Tru or one of the new citizens from the Roya Kingdom, I want you to know that we are all part of the same family now. From this moment forward, we stand united. You are no longer defined by your past but by your present identity as proud citizens of the Kingdom of Tru." Find this and other great novels on the author''s preferred platform. Support original creators! "The people of this Kingdom, have given us authority, honour, and status. In return, I will work tirelessly to create the prosperous future you deserve. Let me make one thing clear: the people will always come first in our Tru Kingdom" "As your king, I will share in both the joys and the struggles of this journey with you. We are in this together." "I know you have high expectations for me and my Subordinate. If there are any shortcomings in the future, I invite you, the people watching this broadcast, to offer your honest feedback. Together, we will build a brighter future." Anos finished his speech with a respectful nod, scanning the room as a symbol of his dedication. The room remained stunned. The officials were speechless, many of them wide-eyed. It was almost unthinkable for a king to speak so openly and humbly to his people, especially during such a public event. What they didn''t realize was the impact his speech had on the Kingdom. As soon as His Majesty''s words echoed across the land, a collective silence fell over the Tru Kingdom. For a brief moment, it was as if time stood still. But then, like a dam breaking, cheers erupted from every corner of the Kingdom. Cries of "Long live the King!" rang out from the live broadcast stations. Some of the citizens were even moved to tears. It was no surprise that emotions ran so high, especially among the former citizens of the Roya Kingdom. After years of suffering and oppression under their previous rulers, they had now found themselves under a kind and just king who genuinely cared for them. It was as if they had escaped hell and entered paradise, with a ruler who prioritized their needs. Anos''s direct and heartfelt communication resonated deeply with the people. For many, this was their first time seeing their king in person, and now, the image of Anos was etched into their hearts forever. Even the soldiers tasked with guarding the broadcast station found themselves moved by the king''s words. Their usual stern expressions softened as they processed the moment. This first public appearance had already caused a sensation across the Grand Line. Even the reporters from other kingdoms stood in awe, their Den Den Mushi snapping pictures and relaying the scene to their home Kingdoms. These seasoned reporters had met many leaders, but it was clear that among all the rulers in the world, Anos was unique. No other king would have spoken so candidly and compassionately to his people. The camera crew began to pull back, shifting focus to the grand palace hall once more. With the King''s address completed, it was official the meeting had begun. The gravity of the event made everyone watching fall into respectful silence, afraid to miss a single word. After a brief moment to compose themselves, the officials prepared to commence the first national meeting of the Tru Kingdom. "This is the inaugural national meeting of the Tru Kingdom," Losta announced, standing proudly. "Allow me to introduce the structure and rules of today''s session. "First, this meeting is led by our esteemed King of Tru, with 176 attendees present. The entire meeting is being broadcast live across the kingdom." "As we proceed, discussions will cover a variety of topics, and I ask that everyone remain quiet until it is their turn to speak." Losta, as the host, had the authority to set the tone for the meeting, her voice was steady, filled with the responsibility she bore. No one in the room spoke, fully understanding the importance of this moment. Though many had never participated in such a formal meeting before, they realized the gravity of the occasion. Some felt a mix of excitement and nervousness as they sat in the presence of their king. Outside the palace, the broadcast continued to be viewed not only by the citizens of Tru but by international audiences as well, thanks to reporters from across the Grand Line. There was no need to hide the content of the meeting. The transparency was part of what made this event so groundbreaking. "It seems there are no objections," Losta said with confidence. "If that is the case, I hereby declare the first national meeting of the Kingdom of Tru officially Begins!" With that, the meeting began in earnest. The room once again fell into respectful silence, and the historic event commenced. --- 31. Reforms -3 ---- After Losta finished speaking, Anos sat down with a calm demeanour and began to explain, "The purpose of convening this meeting today is primarily to discuss the comprehensive development of our Kingdom''s livelihood for the future." "Many among you may not have been involved in such initiatives before, so we will begin with the fundamentals to ensure everyone understands the vision ahead." "The first topic is the overall arrangements for the former citizens of Roya Kingdom, who have now joined Tru Kingdom" Anos paused for a moment, letting his words sink in before continuing, "The citizens of the former Tru Kingdom have reached a stable standard of living. They have access to sufficient food, clothing, employment, and a sense of purpose." "Our Kingdom has cultivated its brand and developed robust economic resources. Now, the integration of the new citizens from Roya Kingdom will become our top priority." Anos looked directly at Losta, signalling her to continue. "Minister of Commerce Losta, please explain the economic site planning for the former Roya Kingdom." "Yes, Your Majesty," Losta rose respectfully and addressed the assembly. She unfolded a draft paper that detailed the economic strategies and said loudly, "By His Majesty''s directives, we have already begun sorting and evaluating the overall situation of the former Roya citizens." "The total population of Roya Kingdom was 27.68 million. However, approximately 25.25 million were struggling to meet their daily needs for food and clothing." "Their economy was severely impoverished, leaving the majority of the populace in a state of economic stagnation." Losta''s voice grew more formal, "To address this issue, we have outlined future plans to ensure that these individuals are brought into the fold of our growing economy." "This includes access to employment, housing, and essential services. We will work to elevate their standard of living to match that of our existing citizens. The plans are as follows¡­" What Losta delivered was nothing short of an official report, not only aimed at Anos but also for the entire leadership of the Tru Kingdom. Her words carried a sense of urgency, as she outlined the measures needed to integrate the Roya citizens seamlessly. As Losta finished, murmurs spread among the citizens and officials present. There was a palpable sense of both hope and uncertainty. From today, they knew the Tru Kingdom would establish new processing plants that would produce wine, beverages, tobacco, food products, household items, and more, providing jobs and boosting the economy. For the people of Tru, this meeting marked the beginning of a new era one where expansion and prosperity would define the Kingdom''s future. Though this meeting had a strategic purpose, it also served as a powerful form of public relations, spreading news to the world that the Tru Kingdom was on the rise, with no additional help from the world government. The citizens, however, were more subdued than expected. There were no shouts of excitement, as everyone remained focused and introspective, eager to hear how these changes might affect them personally. The narrative has been illicitly obtained; should you discover it on Amazon, report the violation. Despite the enthusiasm surrounding new opportunities, they all understood that even with the creation of new factories, there was still much work ahead. The sheer scale of the population meant that many people might still find themselves competing for these jobs. Fortunately, the expanded territory of the Tru Kingdom could accommodate these developments. The resources and manpower existed to support the growth that Anos had promised. Once Losta concluded her speech, every attendee was scribbling notes furiously, not wanting to miss any details. This was not merely a formal affair it was the beginning of a new chapter in the kingdom''s history. Among the attendees were not only the original citizens of the Tru Kingdom but also the newly integrated citizens of Roya and key military leaders. For all of them, this meeting represented more than just policy, it was a chance to leave behind a life of instability and aimlessness. There was no longer any distinction between the old and new citizens. Most of the attendees were young, brimming with energy and ambition. They were quick thinkers, ready to take action, and far more dynamic than the older generation. Now that the leadership was in place, the focus turned to implementation. There was no need to worry about the bigger picture, everything was in motion, and all that remained was to follow the plan. The transparent and open nature of the Tru Kingdom''s politics had reshaped the way the people viewed their government. It gave them a renewed sense of trust in their leaders and hope for their future. This moment, indeed, marked a political transformation for the kingdom, fostering an optimistic outlook for generations to come. ---- Meanwhile, thousands of miles away, in far-off lands, people from other kingdoms were watching the meeting''s live broadcast, witnessing the Tru Kingdom''s rise in real-time. "Vivi, why are you here? Didn''t I tell you that your father is busy today? Go outside and play for now," a voice called out. In the same palace, a small girl no more than seven or eight years old with long blue hair crept in quietly. Her innocent, curious face peeked around the corner. She appeared beside a middle-aged man, who seemed to be in his forties. This little girl was none other than Princess Vivi of Alabasta. At that moment, the palace was watching the live broadcast of the Tru Kingdom''s summit. The broadcast was being streamed across many kingdoms, including the desert Kingdom of Alabasta, one of the largest kingdoms on the Grand Line. Unlike many other island kingdoms, Alabasta had a sprawling landmass. The middle-aged man was none other than King Cobra, ruler of Alabasta, a man known for his strong leadership and compassionate rule. "Father, what are you watching?" Vivi asked curiously, her bright eyes sparkling with interest. King Cobra, dressed in his regal black attire and wearing a crown, glanced at his daughter and smiled warmly. "I''m keeping an eye on important matters in other Kingdoms, my dear. Now go along and play with your friends. Don''t stay here and disturb us." "Father, I promise I won''t make any noise. Can''t I stay and watch?" Vivi pouted playfully. At this moment, it wasn''t just King Cobra in the room. Several of his advisors and ministers were also present, listening intently to the broadcast. Faced with his daughter''s tantrum, Cobra could only sigh with a chuckle, lifting her onto his lap. "This is the first major summit of the Tru Kingdom," Cobra said quietly, his eyes fixed on the screen. "Their king, Anos, is showing the world a new kind of leadership, where transparency and forward-thinking are at the forefront." "It''s rare to see a Kingdom so openly share its plans for the future. It''s something we could all learn from." For Cobra and the other kings watching, this summit was a revelation. Few rulers dared to think so far ahead or plan in such detail. The scope of the Tru Kingdom''s economic development, its infrastructure projects, and the careful management of its population were stunning to behold. As Cobra watched Anos speak with confidence and clarity, he realized that the world was changing. The Tru Kingdom''s rise could mark the beginning of a new era of governance, where kings were no longer isolated rulers but global leaders working to improve the lives of their people. "Father, will our Kingdom be like that one day?" Vivi asked, her voice full of hope. King Cobra smiled at his daughter and said, "One day, Vivi. One day." ---- 32. King of Alabasta ---- The people in the room were fixated on every move displayed on the screen, analyzing every word and action with utmost attention. The conference was unlike anything they had ever seen before. It wasn''t just the content that intrigued them but the gravity of the situation that unfolded before their eyes. At the centre of the screen, the King of Tru Kingdom, Anos, remained seated. Despite being only 16 years old, he exuded a maturity and stability that made him seem much older. His demeanour radiated authority and calm control, traits uncommon for someone his age. Even among the other leaders in attendance, there was a sense of reverence whenever Anos took the floor, though today, he was content to observe. "What''s the population of our Kingdom?" Cobra, the King of Alabasta, suddenly asked those seated behind him. This was not something he usually dwelled upon. Alabasta had always been a powerful and respected kingdom in the Grand Line. Yet, as he watched the developments in the Tru Kingdom, Cobra couldn''t help but reflect on his Kingdom. The ministers behind Cobra exchanged glances. The answer was obvious, but the question held a deeper meaning Cobra wasn''t simply asking for numbers. He was questioning the trajectory of his Kingdom''s future. Could Alabasta, despite its ancient history, keep pace with the rapid rise of smaller, more strategically positioned kingdoms like Tru? "Your Majesty, although our Kingdom covers a vast land area, most of it is desert. In terms of population, it may not rival the Kingdom of Tru." (over 10 million) One of the ministers finally spoke up, his voice steady but respectful. Cobra leaned back slightly, considering the implications. Alabasta was indeed vast, but much of its land was an arid, uninhabitable desert. It wasn''t a kingdom rich In resources or fertile land. The coastal cities and the capital of Alabasta were densely populated, but they could not compete with the potential Anos had harnessed in the South Blue. "Think about it," Cobra said after a long pause, "a Kingdom run by a teenager has surpassed our kingdom, which has stood for thousands of years. The Tru National Conference is a revelation for us. We must take a moment to reflect on our position in the world." He did not reprimand the minister for stating the truth. After all, the state of their Kingdom wasn''t something that could be ignored. As they watched the ongoing discussion in the Tru Kingdom, Cobra felt a strange sense of discomfort an awareness that his kingdom was, perhaps, not as stable as he had once thought. Watching the people on the screen, speaking freely and confidently, Cobra felt a growing sense of shame. The ministers in Tru were young, full of vitality and vision. The energy they exuded made Cobra wonder about the future of his own Kingdom, which was still held by tradition and bound by the weight of its past. "Dad, what are you watching?" Vivi, who was seated beside Cobra, finally asked the question that had been on her mind since they began watching the broadcast. She was accustomed to meetings of state, but this was different. There was a sense of urgency, a directness in the conversation that she found unusual. She couldn''t quite grasp what was so important about a national meeting in a kingdom far away from the Grand Line. After all, Tru Kingdom was located in the South Blue a place many considered distant and insignificant. She also couldn''t understand the language being spoken on the screen. The other leaders were speaking in terms she was unfamiliar with. Was their culture so different? Are their concerns so foreign? How could a kingdom like Tru be on the verge of surpassing a legacy as long-standing as Alabasta''s? "Vivi, watch closely. That young king is destined to lead an era. Even I am deeply moved by what I''m witnessing," Cobra responded, his voice calm but tinged with emotion. Vivi looked at her father in surprise. It wasn''t often that Cobra expressed such admiration, let alone for someone younger than herself. The idea of a boy not much older than her ruling a kingdom with such success was difficult to comprehend. Her gaze turned back to the screen. The figure of Anos remained seated, his posture steady, his presence commanding despite his silence. "Your Majesty, I believe that the conditions of the Tru Kingdom are vastly different from ours," one of the ministers behind Cobra added cautiously. "We should be careful in making comparisons. Many things cannot be covered in one discussion." Cobra turned to face the speaker, his eyes narrowing. "Do you think I don''t know that?" he asked, his tone sharp but not angry. "The key issue is not in the conditions but in the vision." He paused and turned back to the screen, his gaze focused on the young king once more. Anos hadn''t spoken yet in the broadcast, but his presence was palpable. "Anos, the King of the Tru Kingdom, is someone I have watched with great interest. I met his father twice during my travelling to the seas." "This young man took the throne at the age of fourteen. Now, at sixteen, he has already cleaned up the mess his father left behind. He has stabilized the economy, strengthened the military, and revitalized his people''s hope." Cobra''s voice softened as if speaking more to himself than to those in the room. "It can be said that under his leadership, the Tru Kingdom is on the path to becoming the most powerful Kingdom in the entire South Blue." Vivi''s eyes widened in surprise. "Dad, are you serious?" "Yes," Cobra responded, his lips curling into a faint smile. "It''s only a matter of time." "Don''t worry, Dad. I will make sure that our kingdom becomes even stronger than theirs." Vivi''s voice was filled with determination, her fists clenched at her sides. Cobra smiled, proud of his daughter''s resolve. He knew that Vivi would one day lead Alabasta, and he wanted her to see what true leadership looked like. "I know you will, Vivi. And when that time comes, I will be here to support you." ---- Meanwhile, in a dimly lit room elsewhere in the world, several elderly men watched the developments in the Tru Kingdom with grim expressions. They were members of the World Government, and their interest in the young king was not out of admiration, but out of concern. Stolen from Royal Road, this story should be reported if encountered on Amazon. A kingdom rising in power so quickly in the South Blue could pose a threat to the balance of power they had so carefully maintained for centuries. An elder with a long goatee was the first to break the silence. "Send CP2 to inform the King of the Tru Kingdom that it''s in his best interest to join the World Government." "Are you sure that''s wise?" asked another elder, a bald man in a white robe who held a long sword in his hands. "Shouldn''t we investigate further before approaching him? It''s hard to believe that a kingdom from such a weak region could rise to such prominence so quickly." The goateed elder nodded. "It is suspicious, I agree. But CP0 has already conducted some preliminary investigations. It seems there is nothing out of the ordinary....yet" The elder with the sword frowned. "Weren''t the wife and child of Pirate King Roger once in this kingdom?" Another elder, this one with a moustache, leaned forward, eyes narrowed in thought. "Yes, I recall hearing about that. The wife of the Pirate King was indeed in the Tru Kingdom." "Then we must tread carefully," the goateed elder warned. "If the legacy of the Pirate King lingers in this kingdom, it could cause complications. Still, it would be in our best interest to bring them into the fold. It''s better to have them under our control than to let them operate independently." The moustached elder nodded. "Very well. Let CP2 deliver the message. We will offer them membership in the World Government. If they decline, we''ll proceed with more¡­ decisive measures." As the meeting concluded, the elders'' decision was clear. The Tru Kingdom''s rise had not gone unnoticed, and now, the World Government would take steps to ensure that Anos and his people would not disrupt the delicate balance of power in the seas. ---- Back in Tru Kingdom, the meeting continued throughout the morning. Anos remained mostly silent, observing the discussions unfold around him. The room was filled with ministers, advisors, and young leaders, all of them passionate and full of ideas. Anos had already set the agenda, and now it was up to his team to implement his vision. Losta, his one of the most trusted advisor, was handling most of the proceedings. She was efficient, methodical, and could command the room just as effectively as Anos himself. She had made all the necessary arrangements, ensuring that the kingdom''s plans for economic growth and military expansion were well underway. The purpose of the conference was clear to show the people of the Tru Kingdom the prosperous future that awaited them. But Anos knew that the real challenge lay not in the promises made today but in the execution of those promises in the coming months and years. Unbeknownst to Anos, many outside forces were watching his kingdom closely. The World Government had already begun deliberating their next move, and the attention of kings and rulers from across the seas was now firmly fixed on the Tru Kingdom. But for Anos, this was just the beginning. As the morning session came to an end, Losta approached Anos and spoke softly. "Your Majesty, should we take a break before resuming this afternoon?" Anos nodded. "Yes, that will be all for this Morning. Inform the relevant parties to begin preparations for the afternoon session. We have much to discuss regarding economic and commercial development." "Make sure the ministers and advisors are ready to implement these plans swiftly. We cannot afford delays. This is the time to move forward decisively." Losta bowed slightly, her expression calm but focused. "Understood, Your Majesty. I will ensure everything is in order. The issues discussed this morning will be prioritized, and I will handle any misunderstandings personally." Anos stood up slowly, his youthful figure hiding the burden of leadership he had carried for the past two years. As he scanned the room, he could feel the eyes of his ministers and advisors on him, waiting for his next move. Despite his age, Anos had a natural ability to command respect. His sharp eyes, thoughtful demeanour, and ability to anticipate problems before they arose were qualities that set him apart from the other kings of the South Blue. As the attendees began to file out of the room, murmuring among themselves, Anos remained still, thinking about the next steps for the Tru Kingdom. His mind wandered briefly to his father, the previous king, who had left him with a kingdom in turmoil. Anos had been just fourteen when his father passed away unexpectedly, leaving him to pick up the pieces of a faltering Kingdom. The kingdom had been on the brink of economic collapse, its military forces weakened, and its influence in the South Blue dwindling. Yet, Anos had managed to reverse the decline. Now, at sixteen, he was leading the kingdom into a new era of prosperity, but he knew the road ahead was still fraught with challenges. "Your Majesty," Losta interrupted his thoughts as she returned to his side. "There is one more matter we need to address before we take a break for lunch. The merchants'' guild has sent a request for additional resources to expand trade routes into the Grand Line. They believe that now is the opportune moment to capitalize on the kingdom''s growing reputation." Anos turned to her, his expression contemplative. "The Grand Line¡­ expanding trade routes into that region is a risk. But it''s a risk worth taking. We need to diversify our trade partners, especially if we plan on sustaining the economic growth we''ve seen over the past year." "Tell the guild they will have the resources they need, but they must be prepared to face the dangers of those waters." Losta nodded, taking note of his decision. "I will relay your message, Your Majesty. The guild will be pleased to hear of your support." As Losta stepped away to carry out her duties, Anos turned his gaze to the large map of the world that hung on the wall. His eyes traced the familiar routes of the South Blue, the kingdom''s primary domain. But beyond that, his gaze lingered on the Grand Line, the unpredictable and perilous sea that connected the world''s most powerful Kingdoms. The Tru Kingdom had managed to secure a strong position within the South Blue, but Anos knew that true power came from venturing beyond the safety of one''s borders. The Grand Line was where the real power struggles took place where the Marines, pirate crews, and other powerful kingdoms vied for dominance. If the Tru Kingdom wanted to cement its place in the world, it would have to engage with those forces sooner or later. Anos had no illusions about the difficulty of such an endeavour, but he also knew that remaining isolated would limit the kingdom''s potential. He was pulled from his thoughts by the sound of the doors opening behind him. Losta had returned, accompanied by a group of high-ranking ministers and military officers. Among them was the newly promoted General Haruya, the head of the kingdom''s armed forces, a man whose loyalty to Anos had been crucial in stabilizing the kingdom after his father''s death. "Your Majesty," Haruya greeted him with a respectful bow. "The military is ready for the next phase of our expansion. We''ve completed the training of our recruits, and our forces are now fully equipped. We await your orders." Anos nodded, pleased with the report. "Good. We need to ensure that our military is prepared for any potential threats, especially now that we''re expanding our trade routes. Pirates and hostile forces are likely to take notice of our increased activity in the Grand Line. We must be ready to defend our interests." Haruya straightened, his expression resolute. "Understood, Your Majesty. I will see to it that our naval forces are prepared to escort the merchant fleets. We will not allow any harm to come to our people or our goods." "That''s exactly what I expected," Anos replied. "We cannot afford to show any weakness, especially now. The world is watching us." As Haruya and the other ministers took their leave, Anos found himself alone once more, standing in front of the world map. His mind raced with plans for the future. He had brought the kingdom back from the brink, but now came the real challenge of ensuring that the kingdom''s newfound prosperity could be sustained and defended. In the shadows of the room, a figure stepped forward. It was Barlow, the kingdom''s intelligence officer, and one of Anos''s most trusted advisors. His presence was always understated. But his contributions to the kingdom''s stability were undeniable. He had been responsible for keeping a close watch on the internal and external threats that loomed over the kingdom. "Your Majesty," Barlow began, his voice low and measured. "I''ve received word from our contacts within the World Government. It seems they''ve taken a keen interest in the Tru Kingdom''s recent developments. There have been murmurs that they may send envoys to invite us to join their ranks." Anos raised an eyebrow, though he was not entirely surprised. The World Government had long sought to bring influential and growing kingdoms under their control, offering protection in exchange for loyalty and a hefty tribute known as the "Heavenly Gold." "They must see our success as a potential threat to their control in the South Blue," Anos mused aloud. "It was only a matter of time before they tried to intervene." Barlow nodded in agreement. "Indeed, Your Majesty. The World Government rarely leaves such matters. They would prefer to have you as an ally rather than a potential rival or enemy. The decision to join them could offer certain advantages, but it would also come with a price." Anos knew that joining the World Government would provide certain protections most notably, the ability to call upon the Marines for assistance in defending the kingdom against pirates and other threats. But it would also mean sacrificing some of the kingdom''s autonomy and being subjected to the World Government''s often rigid and corrupt bureaucracy. "We''ll consider their offer when it comes," Anos said after a moment of contemplation. "But I won''t rush into an alliance that could compromise our Freedom. The Tru Kingdom must stand on its own two feet. We''ve come too far to become another pawn in the World Government''s game." Barlow smiled slightly, appreciating his king''s resolve. "As you wish, Your Majesty. I will continue to monitor the situation closely and keep you informed of any further developments." With that, Barlow slipped back into the shadows, leaving Anos to his thoughts. The weight of leadership pressed down on his shoulders, but he welcomed the challenge. His vision for the Tru Kingdom was clear, and he would not allow external forces to dictate its future. ---- 33. Experiment on Devil Fruits -1 ---- They had meetings from morning to night, and the people outside had been watching the entire time. For these observers, every topic discussed related to their interests. However, the portions of these meetings that were broadcast publicly were, in fact, irrelevant. The truly significant matters were those that could not be revealed. Before this public meeting, many had already started discussing various topics, primarily focusing on military and political matters, as well as potential future concerns. Most of these discussions revolved around real-time political strategies and military strengthening theories within the pirate world. It had only been half a month since the Roya Kingdom merged with the Tru Kingdom, yet the military and political systems of both Kingdoms had already been integrated. The number of people involved in facilitating this cooperation remains unknown. What is certain, however, is that Anos had already begun recruiting soldiers with strong physical abilities for training, and they were undergoing rigorous preparation based on the Marine''s training methods. It Is estimated that within a few years, the entire Tru Kingdom will be able to dominate the entire South Blue. Although they could achieve this even now, they are not in a hurry. Their priority is to conserve their strength and recover. Currently, the Tru Kingdom has an army of approximately 500,000 soldiers. However, only a small percentage are eligible for selection into the Marine Guard. Even with only 10,000 chosen, it would still be more than sufficient. During the one-day meeting, almost all future strategies were decided. The people could already feel the growing prosperity of their kingdom and eagerly cooperated with the policies handed down from above. Soon after, the Tru Kingdom entered a period of economic development. However, there was still one more pressing issue to address. The pirates with Devil Fruit abilities who had been encountered while conquering the Roya Kingdom posed a significant challenge. ---- The tale has been taken without authorization; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident. Three days after the meeting. Anos met with Daiki, alone in the palace hall. The meeting was highly confidential. It wasn''t just that the meeting itself was confidential the content of their conversation was of the kind that must never be revealed. "Daiki, how are you handling the pirates with Devil Fruit abilities?" Anos asked calmly, standing beside Daiki. "Your Majesty, they are all imprisoned in the royal city. Each of them is wearing a Seastone restraint. I can guarantee that there will be no issues," Daiki replied respectfully. "I asked you to investigate their Devil Fruit powers earlier. Have you identified them all?" Anos asked again. "Everything has been thoroughly researched and recorded. I have it all here for Your Majesty to review," Daiki responded, pulling out a sheet of paper filled with details. Anos glanced at the list, then sighed. "Seventeen Devil Fruit users! How did so many come from the West Blue?" "Your Majesty, some of them acquired their Devil Fruits through auctions, while the others obtained theirs through luck or theft," Daiki explained. "Tomorrow, bring all of them secretly to the hidden chamber in the back mountain. Make sure no one sees them during the transfer," Anos commanded, his tone serious. "Yes, Your Majesty¡­" Though Daiki didn''t understand the reasoning behind the order, he followed Anos''s instructions without question. When Anos reviewed the Devil Fruit abilities on the list, he found a few of them quite valuable, while others were nearly useless. The most impressive among them was the Superhuman-type Petrification Fruit. Its users could turn anything they touched into stone a power that would be invaluable for the kingdom''s future infrastructure projects. As for the other Devil Fruits, though some were less remarkable, they all had their unique uses. For the Tru Kingdom or Anos, Devil Fruits were no longer a rarity. In the old Roya Palace, they had found six additional Devil Fruits. Though their quality varied, it was still an impressive haul. Anos''s plan was simple: to convert all these Devil Fruits into the kingdom''s strength. Each fruit had unique potential that could be harnessed for the benefit of the Kingdom. Possessing a dozen Devil Fruits, even for a kingdom on the Grand Line, was considered a rare luxury let alone for a kingdom outside it. Anos looked at the list once more. If these fruits were converted into Beris, the kingdom would be wealthy for a time. But what they truly needed now was not money. It was the ability to Prepare for future disasters. ---- Early the next morning, Daiki and his Marine Guard secretly transferred all 17 pirates with Devil Fruit abilities to the hidden chamber in the back mountain. The area behind the palace was completely secluded, with no chance of intrusion. Although there were no additional guards, the only access was through the palace itself. Anos arrived at noon. Some of the pirates once feared and domineering, were now terrified. The so-called secret chamber was a cave, but it was vast enough to accommodate thousands of people. When Anos entered, Daiki and his guards immediately bowed in respect. As for the restrained pirates, they were powerless mere lambs awaiting slaughter. Bound with ropes and wearing Seastone collars, they had no hope of escape. Their former glory as feared criminals of the West Blue was now a distant memory. All they could do now was struggle for survival. Anos nodded to Daiki and his guards, then turned his gaze to the pirates, a faint smile playing on his lips as he assessed their worth. "Let''s start" --- 34. Experiment on Devil Fruits -2 ---- There were no windows in the entire underground chamber and only a long, dimly lit passage led to this secluded place. The stone walls were cold, damp, and thick, muffling any noise from outside. Even without speaking, the sound of breathing echoed faintly, amplifying the suffocating tension in the air. Anos took a slow, measured glance at the group of captives before him. These pirates weren''t just any band of lowly thieves; they had blood on their hands, specifically his soldier''s blood. They were responsible for the deaths of at least two hundred men. They had left nothing but destruction in their Path, and now, their arrogance would be tested in ways they couldn''t even imagine. "Daiki, have the others step outside for a moment. We''ll stay and have a¡­ discussion with these gentlemen," Anos said, a twisted smile curling at the corner of his lips. His calmness was unnerving, especially considering the tension that filled the room. Before Daiki could respond, the guards began Leaving, with only the two of them and the group of captured pirates. Once the heavy iron door slammed shut, the silence that settled in the room was suffocating. Daiki could feel the weight of it pressing down on him, the uncertainty gnawing at his insides. What was his Majesty planning? Why had they brought these men here? "It seems you''re the young king of the Tru Kingdom, right? I''ll give you one last chance. Release me now, or you''ll regret it." "My uncle is a big pirate on the Grand Line. If he finds out you''ve captured me, your entire kingdom will be crushed!" one pirate, a burly man with a jagged scar across his face, shouted, his voice loud and threatening. Anos remained silent, his dark eyes locked onto the pirate, but his attention seemed elsewhere. Instead, he turned to Daiki. "Did you bring the fruits I asked for?" His tone was casual, almost too casual for the situation. "Your Majesty, these men have murdered countless soldiers, and two of them even slaughtered civilians. Are you certain we need to offer them fruit?" Daiki''s voice held a tinge of frustration, his brow furrowed with confusion. "Offer them fruit?.. You''ll understand soon enough," Anos replied, his words laced with an enigmatic smile. Daiki could only stand there, perplexed. His Majesty always had a way of keeping people in the dark about his true intentions. But this time, something about the whole situation felt even more unusual. The pirates, meanwhile, exchanged glances. This story has been unlawfully obtained without the author''s consent. Report any appearances on Amazon. Their overconfidence showed in the way they laughed and smirked as if they hadn''t just been captured and brought to an underground chamber in chains. "Haha, bring the fruits already! I''ve been dreaming of food like that. Didn''t expect a brat like you to be so generous." "Let me go and throw in a hundred million Beris while you''re at it, and I''ll forget this ever happened!" another pirate, this one with a wild beard, laughed mockingly, as though the situation were nothing more than a joke to him. The other pirates, all wearing the same smug expressions, chimed in with laughter, their indifference palpable. They didn''t realize the situation they were in. Their bravado only served to irritate Anos further, but outwardly, he remained calm and composed. "Shut up!" Anos finally snapped, his voice echoing against the stone walls. "If any of you speak again, I''ll make sure that you are boiled in hot metal." The silence that followed was immediate, the pirates taken aback by the sudden shift in his tone. The weight of his words hung in the air, a chilling reminder that their fate rested entirely in his hands. "Daiki, bring everything here," Anos ordered, his voice lowering back into the calm, composed tone from earlier. "No matter what you see next, don''t say a word when you leave this room. Understood?" Daiki, still confused and somewhat unsettled, nodded. "Yes, Your Majesty." As Daiki moved to gather the requested items, the pirates continued to watch warily, their earlier arrogance slowly giving way to unease. Something wasn''t right, and they could sense it now. The room felt heavier, as though the very air was thickening with tension. Suddenly, a faint blue light began to emanate from Anos'' body, growing brighter by the second. The pirates stared, bewildered, as a protective barrier like a dome formed around the room. It sealed them in, cutting off the world outside, even blocking out sound. What had been an echoing chamber a moment ago now felt like a void, an isolated pocket of space. "This is¡­" Daiki muttered, his eyes widening as he glanced around the room, trying to comprehend what was happening. Anos turned toward him. "Which one of them possesses the Lithification ability?" he asked coolly. Without hesitation, Daiki pointed at the pirate with the scarred face, the one who had been speaking earlier. "Him." The scarred pirate''s face twisted in rage. "You bastard! What are you planning?!" he bellowed, struggling against the chains that bound him. "Daiki, kill him," Anos commanded coldly. Daiki didn''t hesitate. In an instant, he moved with lightning speed, his fingers piercing through the pirate''s chest with terrifying precision. The scarred man''s eyes widened in shock, his mouth opening as if to speak, but no words came out. He slumped forward, dead before he hit the ground. The other pirates, who had been so cocky just moments before, stared in horror as their comrade''s lifeless body crumpled to the floor. But Anos'' attention wasn''t on them. His gaze was fixed on the rows of fruits lying in the corner of the room. As Daiki turned to follow his gaze, he saw the moment that would change everything. One of the bunches of bananas began to shimmer, its bright yellow peel darkening into a rich, earthy hue. A strange, swirling pattern formed on the skin, transforming the ordinary fruit into something far more sinister. It was a Devil Fruit. The pirates, who had been frozen in terror, finally began to understand. Their faces paled as they realized what was happening. This man, the king of Tru, could extract Devil Fruits from their very bodies. It was an ability, unlike anything they had ever seen. "No..no..no..no....King of Tru, please¡­ we were wrong. Give us another chance! We''ll do anything you ask! We will be your slave, Just¡­spare us!" the bearded pirate pleaded, dropping to his knees, his voice shaking with fear. Anos barely glanced at him, his mind already working through the possibilities. This was power true power. The ability to strip Devil Fruit users of their abilities, to control the very essence of what made them formidable. "I don''t have that kind of kink," Anos thought, his lips curling into a smile as he stared at the transformed fruit. He had once speculated about this power, but to see it in action here, now confirmed everything. The world of pirates would never be the same again. The balance of power had shifted, and he held the key to its future. ---- 35. Experiment on Devil Fruits -3 ---- In this space barrier, Devil Fruit abilities can only be attached to fruits within the chamber. Otherwise, there is no way to break through this space barrier. This limitation was once a mystery, one that even the world''s top scholars couldn''t fully explain, but now that barrier stood before them like an unbreachable wall of reality. The very existence of the fruits in this space was a revelation. Yet, for Anos, the young king of Tru Kingdom, it was simply another step toward his grander ambitions. "Daiki, what do you think of this?" Anos smiled, picking up the Devil Fruit in his hand and offering it to his lifelong friend, Daiki. The fruit glistened under the dim light of the underground chamber. Its strange patterns, swirling and uneven, made it appear otherworldly as if it didn''t belong to the natural world. Its skin was rough, almost uninviting, but the power it contained was unmistakable. Daiki hesitated before responding, his mind racing to comprehend the implications of what he was seeing. "Your Majesty, I feel like I''m dreaming right now. I didn''t expect you to be able to extract a Devil Fruit from these corpses. This¡­ this is unprecedented." He glanced around the underground chamber, his eyes tracing the glowing blue light that surrounded them, emanating from the walls, flickering like a distant storm. "And this blue light¡­ it''s not the same as before. What exactly is it?" Daiki didn''t finish his sentence. His mind was too clouded with questions, each more daunting than the last. How had Anos, his king, managed to manipulate the space within this chamber so effortlessly? How had he obtained the knowledge to harness such power? Anos chuckled softly, his calm demeanour betraying none of the immense burdens of the secrets he carried. He had never been one to flaunt his power, but this moment was different. He could see the curiosity and even the fear in Daiki''s eyes. It was natural. After all, the power of the Space Fruit was not something to be trifled with. Few had ever seen such abilities wielded in such a manner. "Yes," Anos said, his voice steady. "This is the power of the Space Fruit, but it''s not quite what you imagined, is it? It''s far more complex than just opening portals or warping across distances." Daiki swallowed hard, trying to push back the awe rising in his chest. "Your Majesty, how long have you had this ability? This is¡­ this is incredible. With such power, Tru Kingdom¡­" "Ah, but that''s exactly why I''m telling you this now, Daiki," Anos interrupted, his smile fading. "You''ve always been by my side, and because of that, I trust you with my life. What you see here, the fruits, the barrier, and even my powers, must remain a secret." "Not a word to anyone. Our kingdom is still far too weak. If word of this spreads, if the world catches even a whisper of what we''ve done here, we will be crushed under the weight of their greed." The air In the chamber grew tense as Anos''s words sank in. Daiki knew the truth behind them. The world was vast, and the forces that controlled it were ruthless. The Yonko, the Marines, and even the revolutionary army would come bearing down on the tiny island kingdom of Tru if they learned of this. "Don''t worry, Your Majesty. I swear by my life that I will not let a third person know what happened today," Daiki replied with a serious tone, his voice steady with conviction. This content has been misappropriated from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere. He wasn''t just speaking as a loyal subject he was speaking as a man who had been by Anos''s side since they were children. He would die before he betrayed him. "Good," Anos nodded. "Devil Fruits are a blessing, but there are far too few of them. This," he gestured to the fruits on the ground, "is only the beginning." Daiki glanced toward the other pirates, unconscious but still alive, lying haphazardly on the stone floor. His hand instinctively went to the hilt of his sword, the steel glinting in the eerie blue light. "Your Majesty, what about these pirates? They''ve seen too much, haven''t they?" Anos'' eyes flickered with something cold as he looked at the group of captives. "Kill them. There are two Zoan-type users among them, decent but not worth much. You can take their fruits if you like, but their abilities are weak. I''ll find better ones for you later, fruits more fitting of your abilities." Anos spoke with the air of someone discussing something as trivial as the weather. To him, these pirates were nothing more than pawns, their lives expendable in the face of his ambitions. Daiki, understanding this, unsheathed his sword with a smooth, practised motion. "Yes, Your Majesty¡­" he said, though the excitement in his voice betrayed him. Daiki had never thought about gaining a Devil Fruit ability before, but now that Anos had opened this door, it was impossible to resist the temptation. If his king was willing to share such power, then who was he to deny it? With swift, efficient strokes, Daiki dispatched the pirates. They were weak, no match for someone of his skill, and the deed was done in mere moments. Their blood pooled on the cold stone floor, but Daiki felt no remorse. These were pirates, after all, men who had pillaged and murdered without a second thought. Their lives held little value in the grand scheme of things. As the pirates continued dying, the fruits in the chamber began to change. One by one, they morphed, their surfaces rippling as if alive, and in a matter of minutes, seventeen new Devil Fruits had materialized from the corpses. Daiki watched in awe, the process still a marvel to him despite all he had seen today. Anos observed the fruits with a calm, calculating expression. "They''re not top-tier fruits, but they''re useful nonetheless," he said, more to himself than to Daiki. Once the fruits were collected, Daiki turned back to his king. "Your Majesty, how should we deal with the bodies?" Anos glanced at the seventeen corpses strewn across the floor. With a flick of his wrist, he dispelled the space barrier, his fingers glowing faintly with blue energy. He stretched his left hand out toward the bodies, and in an instant, they were enveloped in the same faint blue light. "Exile¡­" Anos whispered the word, and with it, the bodies vanished as if they had never been there at all. Far away, somewhere in the depths of the sea, the corpses dropped one by one into the cold, dark waters, sinking to the bottom where no one would ever find them. It was as if they had never existed. The power of the Space Fruit had limitless potential, and Anos was only beginning to unlock it. If fully developed, he could become a force unlike any the world had ever seen. He could bend the very fabric of reality to his will. Daiki, overwhelmed by everything he had witnessed today, could hardly contain his thoughts. He knew now that his king was destined for something far greater than ruling a small kingdom in the South Blue. With powers like these, Anos could take on the world itself. There were now more than a dozen Devil Fruits in the possession of Tru Kingdom, and when combined with those stored in the palace, the total reached nearly thirty. Though many of the fruits were weak or useless, the sheer number of them was enough to build a formidable army. A force that could stand against even the most powerful pirate crews. But Daiki knew the kingdom''s resources were limited. They couldn''t risk revealing their strength too early. For now, secrecy was their greatest ally. Anos led Daiki out of the underground chamber, the cool night air a stark contrast to the heavy atmosphere they had just left. The moon hung low in the sky, casting a pale light over the landscape. As they walked, Anos spoke again. "How far have you progressed with your Haki training?" "Your Majesty, I can now coat my weapons with Armament Haki, but my Observation Haki is still lacking. Sometimes I can sense things, but I can''t focus on specific details. It might take me another two years before I fully master it." Anos nodded thoughtfully. "You haven''t been training for long, and you''ve made good progress. But from now on, your role will expand. You won''t just be the captain of my guards anymore. You''ll oversee the entire army." "Domineering power must become the standard among our forces. Haki is the key to survival, far more reliable than Devil Fruits." Daiki understood the gravity of his words. Haki was rare in the Four Seas, and even on the Grand Line, it was a skill few possessed. Yet here, in a quiet corner of the South Blue, they were planning to incorporate it into their military training. "But Your Majesty," Daiki said, his brow furrowing in concern, "we lack a proper training ground. You''ve said before that the practice of Haki and the Rokushiki must remain a secret, but we haven''t found a suitable location to conduct this training." Anos paused, looking out over the horizon. The kingdom lay in the distance, its walls and towers faintly illuminated by the soft glow of the moon. He took a deep breath, feeling the cool wind brush against his face. ---- 36. Arrival of CP2(Cipher Pol)- 1 --- Daiki was able to express this, but Anos did not object. He understood it quite well. The Tru Kingdom, with its rapid development, would naturally attract attention. A few hundred soldiers may not draw much concern, but tens of thousands of elite troops would surely make waves. The World Government would not sit idly by, and even the Marines would take issue with such a force being amassed in a relatively small kingdom. "If the Tru Kingdom truly seeks to grow, then we must tread carefully. Consult Losta on the matter and find a secluded location. Within a year, I will secure a more permanent, hidden base for your training, where no one will discover you," Anos instructed calmly, his gaze focused. After a moment of thought, Daiki spoke. "The only location that fits your description is Sky Island. It''s isolated and has enough space for training a large force without attracting unwanted attention." Sky Island was a mythical and mysterious place, far removed from the eyes of the World Government and the public. Its high altitude made it almost impossible to find for those unaware of its existence, providing the perfect sanctuary for a secret military force. "Your Majesty, we''ve selected candidates of the right age from the army for training, but the numbers are overwhelming. Even if all of our Royal Guards were deployed as instructors, we still wouldn''t have enough manpower to manage such a large group!" Daiki explained, the frustration clear in his voice. Anos, unperturbed by Daiki''s concerns, gave a firm response. "Dispatch the entire Royal Guard, all five hundred of them. That will be sufficient to guide the recruits during the early stages of their training." "We don''t have the luxury of time. The battles we''ll face in the future will be far beyond what you can currently imagine." He continued, "In this era of Pirates, the tides are unpredictable. Although we reside in the South Blue, the threats we may face could arise from anywhere. Prepare yourselves; the world beyond is much larger and more dangerous than you think." Daiki nodded, though hesitation lingered in his mind. He had initially wanted to object. With the Royal Guards fully committed to training, who would remain to protect Anos? But then the realization struck him Anos did not require protection from ordinary men. His strength surpassed that of anyone in the kingdom, perhaps even the entire South Blue. What was there to fear? "The spatial capabilities we currently possess are insufficient to construct a stable space channel¡­" Anos muttered, his thoughts drifting as he pondered the future. Stolen content warning: this tale belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences elsewhere. ---- Over the next several months, the Tru Kingdom began to make headlines across the world. The newspaper stories detailed the rapid modernization of the once-quiet kingdom in the South Blue. Its infrastructure and economy were growing at a breathtaking pace, catching the eye of many, from the World Government to notorious pirate crews. Even rival kings and queens marvelled at the sudden rise of this once-overlooked kingdom. But, despite all the attention, the reports were carefully curated. The Tru Kingdom only allowed the world to see what it wanted them to see. Beneath the surface, things were developing even faster. Shipbuilding, papermaking, and various other industries were thriving, while the economy outpaced expectations. The kingdom was now well on its way to becoming a formidable player on the world stage. --- But on this day, an ominous presence cast a shadow over the palace of Tru. Several uninvited guests arrived, their footsteps echoing across the palace grounds. These men were dressed uniformly in black suits, ties, and black sunglasses. They looked like agents of some underground organization. Their faces were stern, showing no emotion, and their movements were precise as if they had done this many times before. The leader of the group stood out, towering over the rest at a height of at least two meters. He was thin, but his aura radiated power and control, sending chills down the spines of anyone who dared to meet his gaze. This incident occurred six months after the first national meeting of the Tru Kingdom. The presence of outsiders wasn''t unusual the kingdom had become a hub of activity as businessmen, pirates, and curious adventurers flocked to see what all the fuss was about. The palace guards had grown accustomed to large numbers of visitors, and their initial response to the approaching group was no different. "I''m sorry, gentlemen, but the palace is off-limits to visitors. Please feel free to explore the other areas," one guard said politely, maintaining his composure. But the tall, two-meter man in the lead said nothing. He calmly removed his sunglasses, revealing a pair of cold, calculating eyes. Without warning, he lashed out with a swift kick that sent the guard flying across the palace grounds. The guard crashed to the floor, motionless, his life snuffed out in an instant. The other guards stood in stunned silence, frozen by the sudden violence. Before they could even react, the tall man struck again. In a blur of motion, the remaining three guards fell to the ground, their bodies were lifeless. The attackers showed no emotion, no remorse. They hadn''t spoken a word, and their faces remained cold and expressionless as if this was routine for them. They began their march toward the palace, undeterred by the carnage they had just caused. However, such brazen violence could not go unnoticed for long. The commotion quickly reached the other members of the palace staff, and reinforcements rushed to the scene. Unfortunately, most of the guards left in the palace were regular soldiers, untrained in advanced combat. The elite Royal Guards had already been dispatched to train recruits, leaving the palace defended by less-experienced personnel. These ordinary guards carried firearms, but they were no match for what they were about to face. As nearly seventy soldiers charged toward the intruders, two of the attackers stepped forward, revealing their Devil Fruit abilities. One of them began to emit bubbles from his body, seemingly harmless at first but deadly upon contact. As the bubbles spread out, each one exploded like a cannonball upon impact, tearing through the ranks of the soldiers. The soldiers had no chance. In mere moments, the once-organized defence was reduced to chaos, bodies strewn across the palace grounds. The loud explosions and sounds of destruction echoed through the palace, drawing the attention of more guards. However, these ordinary soldiers were little more than cannon fodder against the overwhelming power of the intruders. As the palace descended into chaos, the true nature of the attack began to unfold. ---- 37. Arrival of CP2(Cipher Pol)- 2 --- At the same time, more and more soldiers began to attack them from all sides, swords raised and guns ready, but the expressions of a select few among the attackers remained unchanged. These particular six men had faces like stone no fear, no joy, no anger, no sorrow. Their calm composure persisted, much like it had from the moment they entered the palace grounds. The chaos around them seemed irrelevant, not a single emotion flickered in their eyes. They were like machines, soulless beings, moving forward without hesitation. After the initial clash, these six men adjusted their suits with precision, brushing off the dust with a quiet elegance. They didn''t seem to care about the soldiers now lying unconscious around them, some groaning in pain while others were too injured to move. They acted as if they had been performing a chore, and now that it was done, they merely wanted to move on to the next. Just as they continued to advance toward the palace''s deeper chambers, a dark figure suddenly darted toward them from the shadows. Moving with incredible speed, this figure man threw himself at the two-meter-tall man leading the group. His leg swung out, aiming for the giant''s head with deadly precision, a kick that would have taken down a normal opponent. However, the tall man blocked the attack effortlessly with his arm. His expression remained unchanged, showing neither surprise nor concern for this sudden assault. It was as though he had expected it all along. "Haki? In a place like this?" the tall man said, his voice betraying a hint of amusement, though a sneer still lingered on his lips. "I never would have thought that someone like you could appear in a small kingdom of the South Blue. It''s almost laughable." This was the first time the tall man had spoken since entering the palace. His voice, calm but filled with arrogance, hung in the air like a taunt. Despite the words, there was a layer of mockery behind them, a subtle implication that the man facing him was nothing more than an insignificant insect. Haruya, the dark figure who had attacked, landed gracefully a few feet away. He stood tall and revealed his true nature a warrior capable of using Haki. The sheen of Armament Haki still shimmered faintly on his leg where it had connected with the tall man''s arm. Although his initial attack had been effortlessly blocked, Haruya did not hesitate. His eyes locked onto his target as he surged forward once again, this time faster, his body a blur of motion. This time, his legs were fully coated in Armament Haki as he charged toward the group. Leaping into the air, he used Geppo, the Skywalk technique, to propel himself high above them. From the peak of his jump, he descended with explosive force, aiming to strike down the tall man directly. It was a move he hoped would break through his opponent''s defence. But Haruya had gravely underestimated the figures standing before him. The tall man took two steps back as Haruya plummeted downward, but just as Haruya was about to make contact, another figure stepped forward. This man wore a red tie that contrasted sharply with the rest of his formal black suit. He moved with lightning-fast reflexes, positioning himself between Haruya and the tall man. This content has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere. As Haruya''s leg connected with the red-tie man, he immediately knew something was wrong. The man had sensed the attack, but he hadn''t even flinched. He hadn''t raised his hands, nor had he moved to defend himself. Instead, he allowed Haruya''s full-force strike to land directly on his body without so much as blinking. Haruya''s attack hit the ground, causing the stone tiles beneath their feet to shatter. Pieces of debris shot into the air, and dust clouded the surroundings. When the dust settled, Haruya looked down in disbelief. The red-tie man stood there, his body coated in a thick layer of Armament Haki, his skin now black and hardened. His feet had sunk deep into the shattered tiles, but his body remained completely unharmed. He was unfazed by the attack, as though Haruya''s best efforts were nothing more than a light breeze. Haruya began to step back, realizing the situation was dire, but before he could retreat, the red-tie man struck. With incredible speed, he grabbed Haruya''s leg with his right hand, his grip like iron. Without hesitation, he pulled Haruya toward him and threw a powerful left-handed punch into Haruya''s stomach. Even with his quick reflexes, Haruya had barely any time to defend himself. He crossed his arms over his abdomen, reinforcing them with Haki, but the punch was too strong. The impact was so forceful that it sent shockwaves through his body, knocking the wind out of him. Haruya was hurled through the air, slamming into the wall behind him. The stone cracked and crumbled from the force of the impact. When he fell to the ground, Haruya coughed violently, blood splattering from his lips. His injuries were severe; his body trembled as he struggled to stand, but his legs gave out beneath him. He collapsed, unable to move. This was no ordinary foe. These men were the strongest he had ever encountered. Their strength was overwhelming, beyond anything he had faced before. "Who are you¡­?" Haruya gasped weakly, barely able to speak. "Why have you forced your way into my royal palace?" The tall man at the front, the leader of the group, stepped forward once more. "We are CP2," he said in a cold, emotionless tone. "We are here to find your king, Anos." The words sent a chill through Haruya. CP2 is one of the Cipher Pol organizations. Their reputation was infamous, and if they were here, it could only mean trouble. The man with the red tie, still standing above Haruya, laughed darkly. "Boss, why bother talking to this insect? Let''s just crush him already." The red-tie man''s eyes gleamed with malicious intent as he stepped toward Haruya, clearly intending to finish him off. His twisted smile showed just how little he cared about their mission. It was clear that he took pleasure in toying with his opponents before delivering the final blow. "You South Blue ants are so weak," the red-tie man sneered. "But you gave me a good laugh today, so I''ll leave you with a parting gift." He raised his hand, and a white bubble began to form on his palm. The strange energy inside the bubble shimmered as it grew. Just as the man was about to place the bubble on Haruya''s chest, intending to finish him off with some unknown technique, a hand shot out from the side and grabbed the man''s wrist in mid-motion. The red-tie man''s eyes widened in shock as he turned to see who had stopped him. Standing beside him, holding his wrist firmly, was none other than Anos, the king of Tru. "Are all CP2 agents as pathetic as you?" Anos asked, his voice dripping with disdain. "I can''t believe the Five Elders waste their time training trash like you." "Your Majesty¡­" Haruya gasped, his voice barely audible as he recognized his king standing before him. The red-tie man, who had been so confident moments ago, now found himself speechless. His arrogance evaporated as he realized who he was up against. Ignoring the red-tie man entirely, Anos called out to his men, "Get him treated. Take him away immediately." Two figures appeared from the shadows, moving swiftly to Haruya''s side. They lifted him gently and began to carry him away, but their path was soon blocked by one of the other CP2 agents. "Interesting," the tall man with sunglasses said as he stepped forward. "You must be King Anos of Tru. I''m surprised you know about the Five Elders. Tell me, how did you come by such knowledge?" Anos didn''t respond immediately. He cast a glance around the courtyard, surveying the carnage. Bodies littered the ground, and blood stained the cobblestones. He had lost many of his men today, but his expression didn''t show anger. Instead, a cold smile played on his lips. As the tall man approached, Anos''s calm demeanour shifted in an instant. His body tensed, and his eyes darkened with fury. "CP2?" he growled. "You dare to invade my Kingdom, storm my palace, and murder my people? Do you have any idea what you''ve just done?" Before the red-tie man could react, Anos vanished from sight. His speed was so incredible that none of the CP2 agents could follow his movement. When he reappeared, Anos was already beside the shorter CP2 agent who had blocked Haruya''s escape. Without warning, Anos delivered a brutal kick aimed at the agent''s head. Though the agent raised his hand to block, the force behind Anos''s strike was overwhelming. The agent was sent flying, his body crashing through several walls before finally coming to a stop. Bang! Bang! Bang! The two men carrying Haruya wasted no time. Taking advantage of the distraction, they disappeared from the courtyard, escaping with Haruya in Silence. As the dust settled, the entire palace was quickly sealed off. No word of the battle would leave these walls. --- 38. Showing Treasure --- Anos glanced at the group. Even though the man with the red tie was the one speaking, it was Anos who should be angry now. "Tell me, how did you learn about the Five Elders of the World Government?" The tall man, with an expression as cold as his voice, stepped forward. His eyes locked on Anos, analyzing him as if trying to gauge his next move. Anos leaned back slightly, his posture relaxed, but his eyes betrayed a glint of something sharp and dangerous beneath the surface. "First, tell me the purpose of your visit. Did the Five Elders send you here? Are you here to invite me to join the World Government?" Anos asked with a smile still on his face, a mix of amusement and challenge in his voice. "That''s right..." The tall man''s tone was measured, but it carried the weight of authority. Anos''s smile widened slightly. "That''s enough," he said, his voice a shade lower, more menacing. "Now that the message has been delivered, shouldn''t it be up to me, King of Tru, to make things a little more interesting?" The tension in the air thickened. The tall man''s expression didn''t falter, but a subtle gleam of excitement lit his eyes. "Huhuhu... this is getting interesting..." The tall man smiled a sinister, calculated smile. "Seal the palace and ensure no interruptions while I speak with the CP agents," Anos commanded. His voice carried an authority that didn''t need to be questioned. Yet, strangely, no one moved or responded to the command. Anos didn''t acknowledge the silence. Instead, he turned his gaze back to the tall man. "Behind the palace lies the treasure of the Tru Kingdom. Perhaps you''d like to see it? After all, this palace is my residence. Any damage to it wouldn''t be good, would it?" Anos''s provocations were obvious, his tone teasing as if daring the tall man to act. One of the subordinates behind the tall man glanced at him, worry creeping into his eyes. He stepped forward and whispered, "Boss, if things get out of hand, it could cause problems for us..." The tall man didn''t even turn to look at him. "Hmph, no one cares about this remote place in the South Blue!" he replied dismissively, his voice dripping with disdain. "Since there''s no issue," Anos said, gesturing casually with his hand, "follow me..." The smile Anos wore was polite, almost gracious, but the tension in his jaw gave away the effort it took to maintain it. They moved as a group, walking through the grand halls of the palace. The mountain behind the palace could only be reached by passing through it. There were no exceptions. After all, Anos frequently trained there, and he wasn''t shy about showing off the path to his would-be opponents. These guys would make for good sparring partners, though he didn''t know their full strength. But he was curious. As they approached the palace doors, a familiar figure appeared in the distance. "Guren, you''re just in time," Anos called out. "Inform Daiki to prepare some fruit for our guests from CP and have him deliver it to the back mountain as soon as possible." The author''s narrative has been misappropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon. Guren, catching up to the group, blinked in confusion. "Huh?" She hadn''t quite caught on to the situation yet. But seeing Anos lead the group in a new direction, she whispered under her breath, "What''s going on?" However, she wasn''t foolish. She quickly realized what was happening and, without missing a beat, discreetly used the Den Den Mushi to contact Daiki. She relayed Anos''s instructions, knowing better than to ask any more questions at this point. As the group passed through the archway, the surroundings changed. Towering trees lined a narrow path, and a long staircase stretched upwards, leading to a vast platform at the top. It was a place where Anos often trained, and its eerie quiet added to the atmosphere of brewing conflict. The platform was expansive, covering over 20,000 square meters. It was more than enough for a full-scale battle and far enough from the palace to avoid collateral damage. The air was still, heavy with anticipation. Of the six CP agents trailing Anos, all but one, who was still recovering from a previous encounter, seemed confident. They exchanged glances, their expressions calm but focused. The tall man stepped forward, breaking the silence. "Where''s the treasure?" he asked, his voice impatient after the long walk. "We''re not there yet," Anos replied casually. "What''s the rush? Haven''t the World Government trained you to endure a bit of waiting?" His words were laced with sarcasm, though his tone remained light. The group didn''t react to the provocation. They were too focused on the task at hand to let small jabs faze them. Besides, they had come here prepared, their confidence in their abilities unshaken. As they continued down the path, the forest thickened around them. Anos led the way, the CP agents following close behind. Despite the tension, there was a strange calm to the situation, as if everyone knew what was coming but none were eager to be the first to strike. "By the way," Anos asked, breaking the silence, "how should I address you?" The tall man glanced at him. "CP2 Division Chief, Olvia Omoro," he replied, his voice clipped. Anos nodded thoughtfully. "I see. And the rest of your team?" Before Olvia could respond, the man with the red tie interrupted. "You talk too much, King. Where''s the treasure?" His impatience was palpable, his voice laced with frustration. "Patience," Anos said, his tone still calm. "Have some fruit first." He gestured toward the square where Daiki and a few attendants had just arrived, carrying trays of fresh fruit. "Your Majesty, as you requested..." Daiki said, bowing respectfully as he placed the fruit before the group. Anos barely glanced at the offering. "Take it away, and don''t return until ordered," he commanded, his tone suddenly cold. Daiki hesitated. "But Your Majesty..." "Just follow orders!" Anos snapped, his expression darkening. "Yes, Your Majesty..." Daiki bowed deeply before turning to leave with the attendants. The man with the red tie smirked, his eyes glinting with amusement. "I didn''t expect the little Tru Kingdom to have so many capable people. Perhaps we should bring more CP agents to take a look?" Anos''s smile faded, his tone growing dangerous. "Maybe we can discuss that once we''re done here." As he finished speaking, Anos stomped his foot on the ground. In an instant, a sky-blue barrier rose across the square, shimmering with a strange light. "A Devil Fruit power?" Olvia Omoro asked curiously. His tone wasn''t worried, merely intrigued. One of the agents immediately moved to the edge of the barrier, striking it with his fist. The moment his hand made contact, his attack turned to stone, crumbling into dust without leaving a trace. "Boss, this barrier is strange..." the agent muttered, pulling back with a frown. Olvia grinned, clearly unbothered by the development. "King of Tru, what are you planning? Do you intend to go to war with the CP?" The man with the red tie stepped forward, his expression hardening. "Enough games. If you think you can defy the World Government, then show us what you''re capable of." Anos slowly turned to face the group, a half-smile on his lips. His voice was dangerously soft, almost flirtatious, as he said, "Funny how you put it. You came to my palace, killed my soldiers, and now ask if I plan to oppose the World Government? Do you truly believe the entire world is under your control?" "In that case," the man with the red tie said coldly, "why waste more words?" His face twisted into a sneer, and without warning, countless bubbles began to form around him, floating toward Anos. The others stood back, watching the unfolding scene with bated breath. Anos remained unfazed, his smile never wavering. He stood tall, radiating confidence as if the red-tie man and his attacks were little more than an amusing distraction. ---- 39. Downfall of CP -1 ---- The Spatial Devil Fruit revealed its power at that moment. All the bubbles vanished as they approached Anos, but hundreds of kilometres away at sea, explosions erupted. On the sea, a pirate ship sailed, its crew terrified by the strange and terrifying scene unfolding in the West Blue. The man in the red tie, in the middle of combat, realized something was wrong. His Devil Fruit abilities were nullified, and he couldn''t land a single blow on his opponent. The group, who thought they had victory secured, now looked shocked. "What is this kid''s Devil Fruit ability?" the man in the red tie shouted angrily. "A Paramecia-type Spatial Ability. I never thought this Devil Fruit would reappear after a hundred years!" The tall man''s expression grew wary. He knew this power well. The higher-ups in the CP department had long desired this rare Spatial Devil Fruit. "Stop standing around! Attack together and take him down!" the tall man ordered. "Muramasa¡­" Seeing their serious intent, Anos called out. The Demon Sword Muramasa appeared from thin air, hovering quietly before him. "You dare come to my Kingdom of Tru and kill my soldiers? You''ll stay here and pay for it with your lives." Anos gripped Muramasa in one hand and pointed at them with the other. "What are you waiting for? Take him down!" the tall man shouted, charging at Anos. Spatial abilities, when wielded correctly, can surpass even Logia''s powers, making them almost impossible to counter. If you find this story on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the infringement. The tall man aimed a Haki-infused kick at Anos, but it passed through him as if he were a mirage. Even with Haki, his attack had no effect. Realizing the gravity of the situation, the others quickly followed, charging forward. Meanwhile, in the palace near the rear mountain, hundreds of armed soldiers stood guard. They wore identical white masks, revealing only their eyes, and black combat uniforms. Their sole purpose was to ensure that no one disturbed Anos. Despite the fierce battle within, the noise didn''t reach those outside. After several minutes of relentless attacks, Anos smiled and slowly drew Muramasa. The powerful aura of the blade filled the air. "Be cautious! That sword is no ordinary weapon!" the tall man warned. Only five of them could continue the attack, one had been severely injured by a previous strike from Anos and was barely conscious. "King Tru, are you planning to defy the World Government?" the man in the red tie threatened, realizing they were losing. "You don''t need to remind me. Joining the World Government is already decided, but you made a grave mistake by attacking my soldiers. You''ll pay dearly for that." Anos grinned as he spoke. "King Tru, I advise you to stop resisting. Come with us, and I guarantee no harm will come to the Tru Kingdom. If you continue, your entire kingdom will be destroyed for your stubbornness!" Olvia Omoro threatened. "Is this how the CP department operates? Do you threaten when you''re unable to win? Have you considered that if you die here in the South Blue, no one will care, and your disappearance won''t affect the Kingdom of Tru?" Unfazed, Anos continued with a smile. He wasn''t interested in wasting more words with them. Now that Muramasa was drawn, it wouldn''t return without tasting blood. With his spatial abilities, Anos''s swordsmanship had reached new heights. Anos began gathering his strength. There was no need to use Haki. None of his opponents had Logia-type Devil Fruits, so it wasn''t worth expending extra energy. This was more than just a battle; Anos aimed to test his strength and sharpen his skills. Normally, Anos trained alone with no sparring partners. Now, they had come to him, providing the perfect opportunity. Olvia Omoro understood the gravity of the situation. His orders from the Gorosei were to secure the Kingdom of Tru''s allegiance, but there was no strict timeline. If they failed, no one would pay much attention to the small South Blue kingdom. For someone powerful enough to rival the CP department to exist here seemed unimaginable. But the impossible had become reality. Anos knew that if he dealt with the aftermath carefully, he could eliminate them without leaving a trace. "Kova, deal with King Tru! Hurry and find a way to break this spatial barrier!" Olvia Omoro ordered. At this point, his team was powerless against the spatial abilities Anos controlled. It was like trying to fight a Logia user without Haki. ---- 40. Downfall of CP -2 --- Anos had never been the type of person to rush things. From beginning to end, he watched with a detached curiosity, allowing the opposing group to make their moves. He was always more interested in what tricks they would come up with. After all, to him, they were lambs ready for slaughter, trapped within his domain. The swirling mist surrounding the battlefield was thick, a reflection of his Space-Space Fruit powers. It distorted the air, creating a sensation of unease for his enemies as if they were disconnected from reality itself. With a simple thought, he could manipulate this space, bend it, twist it, even reshape it. But he chose not to, not yet. He wanted to see what they would do. His lips curled into a faint smile. Amusing, he thought, watching them carefully from a distance. They think they can break free. He knew the truth. No matter how strong or resourceful they were, his space barrier was an inescapable trap. The dome of shimmering energy was a solid, indestructible force, a void that sealed them in this location. And unless they found a way to destroy the barrier, they had no hope of leaving. Not alive, at least. At first glance, Olvia Omoro and the others appeared to be nothing more than a well-coordinated team. Their movements were fluid and synchronized, and their cooperation was seamless and flawless. They were the best the Cipher Pol divisions had to offer agents trained in the art of assassination, espionage, and manipulation. They had taken down many powerful adversaries before, and today, they faced a swordsman they underestimated. Olvia was leading them, his sharp eyes never leaving Anos. So confident, Anos thought. But for how long? Even a natural-type Devil Fruit user, like one of the feared Admirals of the Marines, might fall prey to the hands of these agents. Their precision and teamwork were unmatched. However, Anos was no ordinary opponent. He had been observing them closely, noticing their tactics, waiting for them to reveal their strengths. And in their overconfidence, they had already suffered. Out of the original six Cipher Pol agents, one had been gravely injured during their initial skirmish. The man lay at the edge of the field, groaning in pain, unable to fight. Another had disappeared, likely searching for a way to disable the space barrier. That left four members, all of whom had shown considerable skill in their own right. Their strength was not something to take lightly, that much was clear. Two of the remaining four had demonstrated their Devil Fruit abilities, and Anos had taken note of them. But there was still an air of uncertainty surrounding the other two. What hidden powers lay within them? What surprises would they attempt to spring? He sought to challenge himself, and this moment was the perfect opportunity. The battles ahead would be far more intense, with opponents stronger and more cunning than any he had faced before. This was his chance to push his limits, sharpen his skills, and prepare for the inevitable trials. In the future, only those who adapted and grew would survive, and he was determined to be among them. He could feel the weight of what lay ahead, but instead of fear, it ignited a fire within him driving him to become even stronger. Anos mused, gripping the hilt of his demon sword, Muramasa. Whatever tricks they have, they will not be enough. He had grown tired of watching. His desire to toy with them had faded, replaced by the need to finish this fight. Let''s end this. With a sudden surge of energy, Anos gathered his power. The space around him seemed to shudder, bending to his will. He raised Muramasa high, its blade gleaming ominously in the dim light. This tale has been unlawfully obtained from Royal Road. If you discover it on Amazon, kindly report it. "Dark Cleave!" Anos shouted, his voice reverberating through the battlefield. In an instant, nearly a dozen sword lights materialized, flashing through the air like streaks of lightning. They surged toward the remaining four Cipher Pol agents with blinding speed, their edges shimmering with deadly precision. The power behind the attack was immense each sword light was capable of splitting the earth in half, and if these opponents weren''t seasoned fighters, this attack alone could have killed them outright. The energy behind the Dark Cleave attack was palpable, the air crackling as the sword lights sliced through it. Each streak of light was infused with Haki, making them nearly impossible to deflect or avoid. From below, the attack surged upwards, striking with such force that the ground itself began to split apart, creating deep, jagged fissures in the marble flooring beneath their feet. Olvia Omoro, quick as ever, reacted immediately. His Observation Haki flared for his life, his senses tingling with danger. In a blur, he moved, retreating at lightning speed, just barely avoiding the deadly sword lights. But as he turned to regroup with his team, he saw the destruction left in their previous position, blood-red slash marks scarred the marble floor. "Boss, who would''ve thought this kid was a swordsman?" the man with the red tie shouted, his voice tinged with surprise and frustration. Anos''s expression didn''t change. He stood tall, his eyes narrowed as if daring them to come closer. The aura of dominance surrounding him was overwhelming. He wasn''t just a king by title his presence alone commanded authority. Olvia''s gaze darkened as he observed the young king. The realization began to dawn on him. They had misjudged him. Severely. "Don''t talk nonsense," Olvia snapped, his voice harsh. "The opponent''s attacks are lethal. One misstep, and we''re dead. Stay alert. Our goal is to hold him off until we find a way to break the barrier. He''ll suffer later!" Olvia''s sharp orders snapped his team into action. The time for playing around had passed. It was clear that Anos was a far more formidable opponent than they had anticipated, and if they weren''t careful, this battle would be their last. They shifted into a more serious stance, gathering all their strength for what was to come. As Olvia spoke, his body began to change. His human form melted away, replaced by something far more primal. His clothes shredded as his body grew in size, muscles bulging, fur sprouting across his skin. This was his true form, the full power of the Silver Moon Wolf a mythical zoan-type Devil Fruit that gave him the ferocity of a legendary beast. The transformation was complete, and Olvia towered over the battlefield. His once-human eyes now glowed with a predatory gleam, his sharp teeth bared as a low growl rumbled from his throat. "Silver Moon Wolf, the Mythical Zoan Devil Fruit," Anos muttered under his breath, a small smirk curling his lips. "It seems we''ve caught a big one today." He had read about this Devil Fruit in the encyclopedia. Among all the animal-type fruits, the mythical varieties were the most powerful, their abilities transcending the norm. To see one in action was rare. To face one in combat is even rarer. No wonder he''s the leader of CP2, Anos thought, tightening his grip on Muramasa. But I''ll bring him down all the same. Olvia''s transformation had shifted the balance of power, but Anos remained unfazed. He had faced powerful foes before, and no matter how strong this wolf-man was, he would fall. The man in the red tie, meanwhile, revealed his own Devil Fruit ability. His was a Paramecia-type the Bubble-Bubble Fruit. With a flick of his wrist, he conjured large bubbles that floated through the air. But these weren''t ordinary bubbles. They shimmered with an unnatural light, pulsing with energy, and as they drifted toward Anos, they exploded violently, sending shockwaves across the battlefield. Anos dodged swiftly, moving with grace as the explosions rocked the ground around him. He felt the heat of the blasts, but his space barrier shielded him from the worst of it. The third fighter had been the one seriously injured at the start of the battle, and as of now, his Devil Fruit ability remained a mystery. From the looks of it, he was in no condition to fight, barely conscious as he lay by the water''s edge. But Anos''s focus was on Olvia now. As the massive wolf charged toward him, claws outstretched, Anos gathered his energy. This fight''s far from over. Suddenly, Anos''s body froze. It was as if something had taken control of him, his muscles locking in place. Even Muramasa fell from his grip, clattering to the ground. What...what is this? In an instant, Olvia took advantage of the situation. He lunged forward, striking Anos directly in the abdomen with a powerful punch. This time, the blow connected, sending Anos flying across the battlefield. He crashed into the ground, skidding more than ten meters before coming to a stop. Anos''s head spun, his vision blurry, but at the last moment, he regained enough control to shield himself with Armament Haki, protecting his vital organs from the worst of the damage. Even so, the pain was intense. He slowly pushed himself up, blood dripping from the corner of his mouth. Damn it, he thought, wincing. What kind of attack was that? The realization hit him like a ton of bricks. Mental attacks... It was a rare and dangerous ability, one that few could guard against. If not for his immense willpower, that attack might have left him completely helpless. Olvia, seeing his moment of triumph, barked orders to his team. "While he''s down, finish him off!" Olvia didn''t want to miss such a good opportunity. Although the opponent had the ability of the Space Devil Fruit, it was clear that Anos''s actual combat experience was much weaker in comparison. The Cipher Pol agents sprang into action, rushing toward Anos, weapons were drawn. Anos squatted on the ground, took a deep breath, and then slowly stood up. By this time, they had already closed the distance. "Barrier..." A blue light curtain suddenly appeared around Anos, blocking the others from reaching him. However, he seemed overly confident in his Space Fruit. The moment Olvia Omoro rushed forward, he transformed into the Silver Moon Wolf and attacked the space barrier with a powerful claw. Although Anos believed the barrier to be an impenetrable defence, several cracks appeared almost instantly. While the cracks were slowly mending, if the opponent continued attacking swiftly, hiding behind the barrier would no longer ensure his safety. "Muramasa..." At Anos''s command, the Demon Sword Muramasa, which had been lying on the ground, flew toward the barrier. --- 41. Downfall of CP-3 ---- After holding the sword again, Anos slowly inserted Muramasa into the scabbard, his stern eyes fixed on one of his opponents. His focus was unwavering. He would not make the same mistake twice, especially not against the one capable of mental attacks, the most dangerous of them all. Anos knew this battle would require every ounce of his skill, and he had no intention of failing. His attacks would now be directed solely at this adversary. The opponent, sensing the shift in Anos''s focus, prepared to launch another spiritual attack. But Anos, having anticipated this move, was already a step ahead. "Double Dragon Slash¡­" In an instant, Anos removed the protective barrier and unsheathed Muramasa, slashing twice in rapid succession. As he unleashed the Double Dragon Slash, two spectral dragons materialized in the air, roaring as they surged toward the mental attacker. Their power shook the battlefield, and everyone watched in awe as the dragons closed in on their target. But this time, Anos didn''t immediately sheathe Muramasa. Instead, he watched the dragons as they flew, assessing the trajectory of his attack. His calm, calculating gaze followed their every move, ensuring that this strike would land true. The man with mental abilities, realizing the danger he was in, began to retreat, but Anos''s dragons were faster. He could barely raise his defences in time, and even then, it wasn''t enough. As the dragons descended upon him, Anos performed another technique. He sheathed Muramasa with a sharp click and called out, "Echolance¡­" The battlefield trembled as Anos activated the Echolance. This was not an ordinary attack. Instead of a blade strike, the technique utilized ultrasonic waves that emanated from the quick sheathing of Muramasa, disorienting anyone caught in its radius. The enemy soldiers dropped to their knees, clutching their ears in agony, overwhelmed by the power of the sound waves. The man with mental abilities, despite his efforts to defend himself, was struck down. The dragons pierced through him, and though there was no blood, no visible wound, his life force had been drained. His body crumpled to the ground as though a puppet with its strings cut. The tale has been taken without authorization; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident. "Die¡­" From behind, Olvia Omoro, a man with the appearance of a beast, snarled in fury. His Silver Moon Wolf form had him glowing with blood-red eyes, his anger palpable. Olvia was not willing to let his comrade fall without a fight, and he charged forward with deadly intent. His claws gleamed under the dim light, leaving deep cracks in the ground with each swipe. Every attack reverberated with power. But even Olvia''s rage wasn''t enough to shake Anos. "If not for my spatial abilities," Anos thought as he dodged, "a head-on confrontation with him would be fatal." The battlefield was littered with bubbles, remnants of the previous enemy''s attack, and each was ready to explode at the slightest touch. The man in the red tie had used this method to try and trap Anos, hoping to dictate his movements. Still, Anos remained calm. Two more fighters stood at the ready, their speed nearly blinding. They moved like lightning, attacking with incredible precision and force. It was a coordinated assault from four powerful foes, and yet Anos held firm, using his mastery of spatial manipulation to evade their strikes. However, he knew that staying on the defensive forever wasn''t a viable strategy. He had to find an opening in their relentless assault. As the minutes dragged on, Anos studied their movements, searching for a weakness. Time was on his side. His enemies were tiring, their breathing becoming laboured as the fight wore on. Meanwhile, Anos stood untouched, his space-based abilities allowing him to evade harm while observing the battlefield. The frustration on Olvia''s face was clear. He hadn''t anticipated that they would be unable to harm their opponent. Just as Olvia and the others were ready to launch another assault, Anos made his move. With a swift motion, he drew Muramasa again, his form blurring as he activated his spatial abilities. "Get away!" Olvia Omoro shouted, realizing too late what was happening. The rest of the fighters scattered, using their Haki to shield themselves. But Anos wasn''t giving them a chance this time. The moment one of them lowered their guard, Anos was there, his sword gleaming as he pressed it against their throat. "Goodbye," Anos whispered in his victim''s ear, his voice chilling. The blade of Muramasa, now coated with Armament Haki, sliced clean through. Blood spurted from the man''s neck as he collapsed, clutching his wound. His Haki had failed to protect him from Anos''s deadly strike. The others, seeing their comrade fall, realized the futility of continuing the fight. Olvia clenched his fists, his rage barely contained. His wolf-like eyes flared, but even he had to admit that they were outmatched. "Kova, how''s your search going?" Olvia barked, his voice strained with desperation. "Boss, none of my attacks are affecting this barrier! I''m still searching!" Kova replied, frantically examining the surroundings. His hands shook as he tried to find a way to disable the spatial barrier that Anos had constructed. For the first time in his life, Olvia Omoro felt trapped. He had never faced such an overwhelming power before. Even as his comrade lay dead on the ground and the rest of his team faltered, Anos stood unfazed. "It doesn''t matter if you break the barrier," Anos said coolly, his voice cutting through the tension. "Even if you do, none of you will leave the Tru Kingdom alive." Outside, Daiki and the soldiers of the Tru Kingdom stood ready, their ranks perfectly aligned. Anos had given strict orders to remain vigilant, and now they waited for the final signal. As the last of Anos''s enemies continued their futile attempts to break the barrier, Daiki paced impatiently, his sharp eyes scanning for any sign of movement. His senses were heightened, waiting for any change inside. Meanwhile, Anos continued to press his advantage. His enemies were growing more desperate with each passing second, their attacks becoming less coordinated as exhaustion set in. Finally, after what felt like an eternity, Kova stopped, panting heavily. His face was pale with fear, his body trembling as the reality of the situation dawned on him. "It''s over," Anos said softly. And with that, he raised Muramasa once more. ---- 42. Carelessness ---- The battle between the two sides had raged on for nearly half an hour. Both sides had endured heavy clashes, but it was Anos who managed to remain composed despite suffering some injuries. Although his body bore the marks of combat, the wounds weren''t deep enough to cause lasting damage if treated properly. Anos''s strategic mind was already calculating his next move, knowing his injuries could be managed with the right care. On the other hand, Olvia Omoro and his subordinates were in a dire situation. They had started the fight with confidence, their elite training as CP2 agents bolstering their morale. But as the battle wore on, the intensity of the confrontation and Anos''s relentless attacks began to wear them down. What had once been a team of highly skilled agents was now a group of desperate men, cornered like ants on a hot plate, scurrying in search of a way out. "King Tru, do you really intend to take things this far? Is there no room for negotiation?" Olvia Omoro''s voice was cold, his eyes narrowed in frustration. Despite his usual composure, the cracks in his calm demeanour were beginning to show. His team was dwindling, and the pressure was mounting. Anos looked at him with a sly, sinister smile, his demeanour radiating malevolence. He didn''t seem concerned about his injuries or the prolonged nature of the fight. He appeared to be enjoying himself, revelling in the chaos and suffering around him. His confidence remained unshaken, and his eyes gleamed with a cruel, calculating glint. "Do you really think it matters if I stop now?" Anos responded, his tone dripping with sarcasm. "You, the leader of CP2, would never allow us to leave peacefully. I know you well enough. The moment you step out of this kingdom, you''ll come after us with everything you''ve got. So why bother pretending?" "Instead of worrying about what happens next, you should start accepting the reality that you won''t be leaving here alive. Why not stay? It''s quite pleasant, don''t you think?" The grin on Anos''s face widened as he surveyed the increasingly desperate group. His words were laced with mockery, designed to instil doubt and fear. It was clear that Anos was not merely fighting for survival, he was enjoying the psychological warfare, relishing the terror he inspired in his opponents. One of Olvia''s subordinates, a man wearing a red tie, couldn''t contain his frustration. His voice was filled with rage as he shouted. "Boss, why are you wasting time with this guy? Just kill him already! If we take him down, the barrier will collapse. When that happens, we''ll make sure this entire kingdom is reduced to rubble!" His eyes were wild with desperation, reflecting the hopelessness of their situation. Anos laughed, the sound echoing through the battlefield like the cawing of a crow over a corpse. "Oh, really?" he mocked, his tone dripping with sarcasm. "Do you honestly think that''s all I''ve got? How many times have you threatened me like this? And yet, here we are, still locked in the same situation. You''re amusing, I''ll give you that. But you''re playing a losing game." The man with the red tie clenched his fists, his frustration boiling over. He knew the truth deep down. Without finding a way to neutralize Anos''s spatial abilities. It didn''t matter how long they fought or how hard they tried. Sooner or later, they would tire, and a single strike from Anos could be fatal. Olvia, however, remained focused. His mind was racing, searching for a strategy to overcome their seemingly invincible opponent. This book was originally published on Royal Road. Check it out there for the real experience. "Guike, stay close to me from now on. Don''t act recklessly. Wait for the right moment. When you see an opening, strike quickly and kill him!" Olvia barked his orders with authority, his voice tinged with urgency. He was a seasoned leader, and he knew they had no margin for error. Olvia''s observations were sharp. Using his Kenbunshoku(Observation) Haki, he had already sensed the presence of multiple strong individuals outside the barrier. Although the unexpected presence of reinforcements surprised him, his immediate priority was to deal with Anos. Once they had neutralized their primary threat, they could assess the new situation. Until then, there was no room for distractions. Guike, a veteran of many battles, nodded in acknowledgement, his expression serious. Meanwhile, Kova, another member of the CP2 team, abandoned his search for an exit and repositioned himself closer to Olvia and the others. Out of the six agents who had arrived with CP2, two were already dead, and one was seriously injured. Only three remained, and it was becoming increasingly clear that Anos could strike at any moment. The tension in the air was palpable, and even these highly trained agents were beginning to feel the weight of impending doom. "You don''t seriously think the Space-Space Fruit is only for defence, do you?" Anos''s voice cut through the air like a knife. He was smiling again, his gaze fixed on the remaining three agents. His words were a taunt, designed to provoke a reaction. Olvia''s face went pale. He had feared this revelation from the beginning. The other two agents may not have fully understood the implications of Anos''s words, but as the leader of CP2, Olvia knew exactly what they were up against. The mission from the higher-ups had been clear: retrieve the all-powerful Devil Fruits, particularly the Space-Space Fruit, which was classified as one of the most dangerous and overpowered fruits in existence. The Space-Space Fruit''s abilities were nothing short of terrifying. Among Devil Fruits, it was considered a bug a fruit whose powers transcended the normal limits of logic and reason. The ability to control space itself was a despair-inducing power, one that could easily spell doom for anyone unfortunate enough to face its wielder. Olvia had initially assumed that Anos only knew how to use the fruit''s defensive capabilities, creating barriers and manipulating the battlefield to his advantage. But Anos''s words confirmed Olvia''s worst fears Anos was not limited to defence. He had mastered the fruit''s offensive potential as well. This was no longer a battle for survival; it was a struggle against an overwhelming force of nature. The barrier surrounding them was proof of the fruit''s incredible power. Despite the immense force of the attacks exchanged within it, not a single leaf outside the barrier had moved. The spatial manipulation was so precise, so absolute, that it left the surrounding environment completely undisturbed. Olvia''s hands trembled slightly as he realized the full scope of their predicament. He had been confident at the outset, but now his confidence was eroding. Anos''s power was far greater than he had anticipated, and the young king''s taunts only deepened the sense of dread creeping over him. "Guike, suppress his movements. Kova, support with side attacks. We can''t let him have any room to retaliate!" Olvia''s voice cracked slightly as he issued his orders. He was no longer thinking of victory he was thinking of survival. If they could at least keep Anos from attacking, they might have a slim chance of making it out alive. The two agents sprang into action. Guike focused on restricting Anos''s movements, while Kova moved into a flanking position. The man in the red tie, however, had his own plan. With grim determination, he began to release a large bubble something he had never used before. The bubble was at least three meters in diameter and shimmered with vibrant, rainbow-like colours. "Both of you, stay back! I''m going to take him down with me and break this barrier!" the man in the red tie shouted, holding the massive bubble above his head. His intent was clear he was willing to sacrifice himself to destroy Anos and free his comrades. But Anos was not about to let that happen. He had fought too hard to let these invaders ruin his plans now. Just as he prepared to strike, Kova rushed forward, forcing Anos to react defensively. Anos activated his Space Jump ability, disappearing in an instant and reappearing a short distance away. Unlike traditional teleportation, Space Jump allowed him to move freely within the spatial boundaries he controlled. He could appear anywhere within the space at will, making it nearly impossible to predict his next move. "Echolance" Anos roared as he reappeared behind the man in the red tie. His sword flashed through the air, the attack swift and deadly. Before Kova could warn his comrade, Anos''s blade came down. But Olvia, ever vigilant, was already on the move. Transforming into his Silver Moon Wolf form, Olvia appeared beside Anos, launching a ferocious claw strike at him. The attack was precise and devastating. Anos, caught off-guard by the combined assault, had no time to defend himself. Olvia''s claws raked across his chest, leaving three deep, bone-exposing wounds. Blood poured from the injuries, staining Anos''s clothes as he was hurled against the edge of the barrier. His body slammed into the invisible wall with a sickening thud. The young king, no more than sixteen or seventeen years old, crumpled to the ground, trembling from the pain. His hands shook uncontrollably as he struggled to catch his breath. This was the closest he had ever come to death, and the realization sent a shiver down his spine. If not for his rigorous training, which had enhanced his physical endurance, he might have died from the blow. ---- 43. Healing Abilities --- Anos had possessed such a great advantage in the beginning, but now, standing battered and broken, he realized how quickly the tides of battle could turn. He had given his all, leveraging years of experience, yet still ended up in this predicament. The irony wasn''t lost on him. But he had no regrets about the injuries that marred his body. However, now that things had escalated to this point, Anos knew it might become impossible to control what happened next. The battle had taken an unexpected turn, and if he didn''t act soon, the consequences would be dire. There was no room for missteps anymore, not with the entire Kingdom''s future hanging in the balance. His lack of any superhuman recovery ability meant he had no choice but to endure the pain and fight through it. Every breath was a struggle, yet he knew that his two opponents weren''t going to show him any mercy. He couldn''t allow himself to fall now. "Hufufu¡­ I''ve lost so many people, yet here I stand, still not dead. Is that such a surprise to you?" Olvia''s voice echoed through the tension-filled air, the gleam in his eyes indicating he felt victory was almost assured. The werewolf still maintained his transformed state, knowing full well that his strength, speed, and reflexes were far superior when he embraced the beast within. Whether attacking, defending, or even moving, Olvia, in this form, was the perfect fighter relentless, brutal, and nearly unstoppable. Anos, on the other hand, was anything but confident. He wasn''t getting carried away by the minor victories he had managed to scrape together during the battle. Each small win had been at a tremendous cost. Despite his serious injuries, his face remained composed. His sharp gaze tracked every movement Olvia made, never letting his guard down. In the distance, the other figure, Kova, loomed like a shadow, watching Anos with the same predatory gaze. The air was thick with the sense that one misstep would be fatal. Anos winced, his voice weak but defiant. "I''m not dead yet¡­ Isn''t it a little too early for you to be celebrating?" His face had begun to lose its colour, pale from the loss of blood. His wounds refused to stop bleeding, no matter how hard he tried to stem the flow. Just outside the barrier that encased the battlefield, Daiki was anxiously watching, his heart pounding in his chest. Daiki had sensed the shift in the battle''s momentum, rushing to the edge of the invisible barrier that kept him locked out and Anos trapped within. His palms pressed against the surface of the barrier, frustration bubbling beneath his skin. No matter how loudly he shouted, his voice would never penetrate the barrier. He couldn''t be heard inside, and the voices of those within couldn''t be heard by those outside. It was an Impenetrable dome, isolating the events inside from the rest of the world. "You said it yourself, King Tru," Kova taunted, stepping closer. "In your current state, how do you think you can defeat the two of us? King Tru, you should just give up. Let''s end this quickly. There''s no need for mercy anymore." Kova''s smile was smug, his confidence swelling as he saw Anos faltering. In their eyes, the battle was already over, and the victory was theirs for the taking. Anos, though gravely injured, wasn''t ready to concede defeat. He leaned heavily on Muramasa, the demon sword that had been his companion through countless battles, struggling to push himself back up. You could be reading stolen content. Head to the original site for the genuine story. Anos''s muscles screamed in protest, but he gritted his teeth and forced himself to stand. Time was slipping away, and Anos knew if he didn''t act soon, everything could be lost. The fate of his kingdom, his people, and his very life rested on his ability to hold on for just a little longer. Although his allies were positioned outside the barrier, their strength would mean little if Olvia and Kova decided to flee. These two weren''t ordinary enemies they were powerful and resourceful. If they wanted to escape, the forces waiting outside wouldn''t be enough to stop them. And that wasn''t the worst of it. Anos knew that if either of them made it out, they''d immediately contact others through their Den Den Mushi. They''d summon reinforcements, and Anos''s already precarious situation would become a death sentence. This was why he had kept the barrier up for so long, despite his injuries. The barrier was the only thing keeping his enemies contained. If he lost consciousness, even for a moment, the barrier would likely dissolve on its own, leaving him and the kingdom vulnerable to a brutal, unrelenting war. Gripping his sword tightly, Anos resolved himself to keep these two inside the barrier, no matter what. There was no alternative if they escaped, it would all be over. "System, is there any medicine that can quickly heal my wounds?" Anos reached out with his mind, calling upon the mysterious system that had been his secret weapon in countless battles. He wasn''t alone in this fight. Though it was rarely seen by others, the system was always with him, offering him advantages no one else in this world possessed. With it, he was a step closer to invincibility. It wasn''t as If he had an easy path ahead, even with the system. No matter how gravely injured he was, Anos could rely on the system to help him recover if he was willing to pay the price. But what if even with the system''s help, the cost was too high? A voice rang out In his mind, cold and mechanical. [ If the host is seriously injured, rapid self-healing abilities can be purchased. Your current balance is one billion fifty million Beris. Would you like to choose randomly? ] A moment of hesitation flickered through Anos''s mind. A random selection? Now, of all times? The system''s random selections had never been kind to him. He had spent fortunes on random draws in the past, with bizarre results sometimes useful, often completely ridiculous. The system wasn''t infallible. It was as much a gamble as it was a tool. He recalled one of the earlier purchases a fully automated textile machine had been his goal, but what he had gotten instead was a set of women''s underwear. It had been an Infuriating and humiliating mistake. Since then, the word "random" has left a bad taste in his mouth. But now, with two enemies staring him down and the future of the kingdom on the line, there was no time for careful decisions, he had to act fast. "Agree¡­" he gritted out, barely able to focus on the system''s interface as pain clouded his vision. As soon as he gave the command, the system''s balance hit zero, and a familiar roulette wheel appeared in his mind, spinning rapidly. He didn''t even have the energy to watch it unfold. Outside the barrier, Daiki''s frustration boiled over. His fists, now clad in Armament Haki, struck the ground in rage. Each punch cracked the marble beneath his feet, but it was no use. He couldn''t breach the barrier, and with every second that passed, Anos''s condition worsened. The helplessness was eating away at him. Inside the barrier, Olvia, who had been watching Anos in silence, finally relaxed. His confidence surged. He stopped maintaining his werewolf form, returning to his normal appearance. Now shirtless, Olvia pulled out a pair of sunglasses and nonchalantly placed them on his face, as if the fight was already over. "King Tru, by now, you should have accepted your fate. There''s no need to keep resisting. Wouldn''t it be better if you just surrendered?" Olvia''s voice was smooth, but the smugness in his tone was unmistakable. Kova seemed to agree, nodding in silent approval. But just as the two of them prepared to finish Anos off, something unexpected happened. Anos, who had been lying on the ground moments ago, suddenly stood up. The wounds covering his body began to close, healing rapidly right before their eyes. The two opponents froze, their eyes widening in disbelief. No one had seen this coming. Among the Devil Fruit abilities in this world, there were indeed those that could heal the user, but Anos had the power of a space-based Devil Fruit. He wasn''t supposed to possess any healing abilities. Yet the evidence was right in front of them his wounds were closing at an astonishing rate. "Olvia," Anos said, his voice calm but laced with a strange amusement. "Who were you talking about just now?" Something was unnerving about the way Anos smiled as he stood there, his strength seemingly returning. Even he was surprised by what had happened. The system had always been unpredictable, but this time, the random selection had granted him something extraordinary. (Ahem!....Plot Ar-) When the roulette wheel stopped spinning, the ability it landed on was one he never would have expected a healing technique from another world, from the world of Naruto. This was no ordinary self-healing ability, this was the power of the Sage of the Six Paths, a legendary figure with the ability to regenerate almost instantly. Anos blinked, still processing the reality of what had just occurred. The balance of one billion Beris he had spent was worth every coin. He would have gladly paid ten billion or even a hundred billion for an ability like this. ---- 44. Learning lesson ---- Suddenly gaining the most powerful Healing ability from the Naruto world, Anos found himself overwhelmed by what he had become. He had seen the anime of Naruto & he knows how powerful this ability is, but experiencing it firsthand was entirely different. His body was a furnace of strength, with energy surging through every fibre of his being. At times, he wondered what he would ultimately become. Would he be the king he had long strived to be, or something far greater? Something far more dangerous? He gazed down at his hands. They no longer felt like his own, alien almost, yet undeniably powerful. His body''s self-healing ability was unlike anything he had ever imagined. Cuts and bruises that would normally leave scars healed in moments, the flesh knitting itself back together as if time itself had reversed. The wounds, which had looked fatal just moments ago, were sealing before his eyes, skin regrowing and muscles rejoining at an astonishing speed. There was no denying the wonder of his newly acquired abilities, yet Anos couldn''t help but feel a sense of detachment from it all. The body, this machine of pure power, was something beyond human now. Was it still his? Could he still control this monstrous strength? That question lingered in the back of his mind. In other aspects of his newfound form, especially in terms of physical strength, he felt almost godlike. There seemed to be no end to the boundless energy within him. He could run for days, fight for weeks, and not be tired. A mere flex of his muscles could snap steel, and with every step, the ground seemed to quake beneath his feet. Anos grinned slightly, though there was a hint of unease in his eyes. He was more than a king. Now, he was something closer to a living weapon. But even these immense physical powers came with a price. The use of his spatial abilities drained his mental strength, pushing his mind to its limits. Every time he teleported, his consciousness strained, and though he had mastered space-jumping to a remarkable degree, he knew there was a limit. Anos wasn''t invincible, not yet. However, even without fully honing his abilities, he already sensed that his strength, even in its current state, might be enough to make him force to reckon with. And then there was Olvia. Olvia Omoro, a man so sure of his victory minutes earlier, now stood frozen in disbelief. His mouth opened and closed as if trying to form words, but no sound came out. How was it possible that Anos, who had been battered and bloodied just moments before, was now standing tall, full of life? Olvia''s mind raced, trying to make sense of what had just occurred. Was this some sort of trick? Or was Anos truly this powerful? He didn''t know how to comprehend the sight before him, and the shock was written all over his face. Just moments ago, Olvia had been confident, determined that he and his allies would triumph. He had stood with the certainty of someone who had never known defeat, someone who had always been able to manipulate events to his advantage. But now, Olvia couldn''t help but step back, his earlier confidence evaporating like mist in the sun. Fear, creeping and undeniable, began to take root in his chest. Anos, sensing the shift in Olvia''s demeanour, smirked, his eyes gleaming with the thrill of his victory. Stolen content warning: this content belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences. "It seems that this matter is settled," he said in a voice that carried both finality and satisfaction. "Thank you for the lesson you taught me today." Without waiting for a response, Anos vanished, disappearing in an instant as if he had never been there at all. His mastery over space-jumping had reached a frightening level. Now, as long as it was within a limited range, no walls or barriers could stop him. He could go anywhere, anytime, in the blink of an eye. This was his dominion, and in this world, he was untouchable. Olvia, still reeling from the sudden shift in events, stood in disbelief. His mind raced, trying to understand how he had been bested so thoroughly. Anos had not only defeated him physically but had also broken his spirit. Olvia had never felt so powerless, so outmatched. The fight had left him drained, both mentally and physically. Every muscle in his body ached from the effort, and his once fierce fighting spirit was now a mere flicker of its former self. As Anos reappeared behind Olvia, the old man could barely react. In one swift motion, Anos punched him squarely in the chest, his fists coated in Armament Haki. The Impact was so powerful that it sent Olvia flying across the battlefield, crashing into the edge of the now-vanishing spatial barrier. Meanwhile, Kova, who had been a symbol of arrogance and superiority moments earlier, found himself dominated by an overwhelming sense of fear. The once-proud CP Division now looked like nothing more than a pack of beaten dogs. They had been utterly humiliated, and Kova''s pride had been shattered along with any hope of victory. Anos, however, had no intention of killing them outright. Instead, he smiled, a gesture that was both mocking and ominous, before dismissing the spatial barrier that had trapped them. He had other plans for them. The moment the barrier disappeared, Kova tried to make his escape. Panic coursed through him, overriding any rational thought. His mind screamed at him to run, to get away before it was too late. But Daiki had anticipated his move. In a flash, Daiki closed the distance between them, his speed unmatched. Before Kova could take more than a step, Daiki delivered a swift kick, sending him sprawling on the ground. Without hesitation, Daiki pulled a restraining ring from his belt and secured it around Kova''s wrists. Though Kova''s strength likely exceeded Daiki''s, the man was in no state to fight back. The fear and confusion had robbed him of his will, and Daiki subdued him effortlessly. After restraining Kova, Daiki hurried to Anos''s side. His voice was filled with concern as he asked, "How are you, Your Majesty?" He had seen the extent of Anos''s injuries earlier, and while his king now stood as though unharmed, the tattered state of his clothing was a testament to the ferocity of the battle. Anos merely smiled, his expression calm and unreadable. "Do you think I''m in trouble?" Daiki hesitated, stunned by the question. He wasn''t sure how to respond, so he remained silent, watching Anos curiously. "Take these three into custody," Anos ordered. "Interrogate them about the World Government. I want to know more. And if they refuse to talk, just let me know. We''ll use the Devil Fruit if necessary." He didn''t place much hope in these prisoners. Three of the six who had come were already dead, leaving only these three, one of whom was gravely injured. Yet, Anos was thorough. He would wring every drop of information from them. Daiki nodded and set to work, but as he searched Olivia''s unconscious body, he found something unusual: a golden Den Den Mushi. Intrigued, Daiki inspected it, his curiosity piqued. Before he could experiment with it, Anos appeared at his side, snatching the device from his hands with lightning speed. "Daiki, don''t press this thing carelessly," Anos warned, his tone stern yet patient. "Do you know what this is?" Daiki furrowed his brow in confusion. "Isn''t it just a Den Den Mushi, Your Majesty?" "It is, but not just any Den Den Mushi. It''s called Marine''s Buster Call, This one can summon the ten warships and ten vice admirals, all descending on our location. Press it, and they''ll know exactly where we are, launching a devastating attack on our royal city." Daiki''s eyes widened in horror, cold sweat forming on his brow. He had never encountered such a powerful device before, and now, understanding its true function, he realized the gravity of the situation. As Daiki processed this information, Anos turned his attention to the fruits that had mysteriously transformed. Two of them had changed, each bearing intricate patterns that hinted at immense power. One fruit, pale yellow with circular textures, caught Anos''s eye immediately. This was no ordinary Devil Fruit. It was the Psychic Devil Fruit, capable of mental attacks, something that could even affect Anos himself if wielded by the right person. Anos studied the fruit, his expression growing more serious with each second. This was a weapon, a tool that could shift the balance of power in the world. If given to the wrong person, it could be catastrophic. But if placed in The hands of someone trustworthy, it could dominate the seas and even challenge the Four Emperors. His thoughts turned inward. This psychic power was invisible and intangible, making it one of the most dangerous abilities in existence. How could one defend against it when there was no way to see or sense it? The more he thought about it, the more Anos realized that sparing Olvia and his allies might have been a mistake. He would need to reconsider how to deal with them in the future. He had learned his lesson¡­ ---- 45. End Of CP -1 --- He knew too much about this world, more than anyone should. As King of Tru, Anos had seen enough betrayal, power struggles, and political games in his last lifetime (from anime, games, novels, etc). But even after all this time, something was unnerving about the CP2 agents Olvia Omoro and his men who had fallen into his hands. The layers of secrecy surrounding them hinted at more than just blind loyalty to the World Government. These people were hiding something deeper. And Anos knew that if he didn''t extract every piece of information from them, it might come back to haunt him. He stood in the dimly lit chamber, watching the prisoners closely. "Isn''t it necessary to pry some words from these guys?" he muttered, The thought weighed heavily on his mind. He had long learned that information was more valuable than any weapon, more dangerous than any Devil Fruit. If something unexpected were to happen later, without knowing what these CP2 agents held in their minds, the consequences could be devastating. At that moment, the three members of CP2, including Olvia Omoro, sat shackled with restraint collars around their necks. These collars weren''t just any ordinary shackles, they were specialized devices designed to suppress the abilities of Devil Fruit users, rendering them powerless. The proud agents, once so confident in their abilities, now sat silently, their eyes no longer carrying the same arrogance. They could no longer use their powers or strength, which left them with no choice but to sit obediently, their gazes lowered to the floor, their minds racing for an escape that didn''t exist. Anos glanced at them, his gaze piercing through the gloom. His dark eyes gleamed with a calculating coldness, his mind always working, always three steps ahead. He raised his right foot, and with a swift stamp on the stone floor, the familiar sensation of the boundary space came into being. The barrier that separated them from the rest of the world shimmered into existence once again, enveloping them in an invisible dome of silence. No sound could escape, no prying eyes could intrude. Inside this barrier, the truth would be revealed, one way or another. "Your Majesty..." Daiki, Anos''s loyal second-in-command, spoke hesitantly, his brow furrowed with confusion. He had been standing at the edge of the chamber, observing the situation, yet still unsure of what Anos intended to do. Before Daiki could piece together the plan, Anos began walking toward Olvia Omoro, his steps deliberate and slow, like a predator closing in on its prey. Olvia Omoro, who had been sitting in eerie silence, suddenly let out a low chuckle. "Huhuhu... It seems King Tru has changed his mind," he said with a sly smile. The arrogance that once coloured his words had faded, replaced with a quiet understanding. He was aware of his impending fate, but he still clung to a shred of his former confidence. "You''re right," Anos replied, his voice as calm as ever. "I''ve changed my mind. I realized that I already know most of what you do, and there''s no need for me to learn anything more from your mouths." Omoro raised an eyebrow but said nothing, waiting for the king to continue. The author''s content has been appropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon. Anos crouched down, meeting Olvia Omoro''s gaze at eye level. "But I can still talk to you about these things," Anos continued, his tone smooth yet chilling. "Consider it a final courtesy a compensation of sorts before you die." The room grew colder. Daiki, ever cautious, instinctively moved to the edge of the barrier, his eyes scanning the perimeter. Despite knowing the barrier provided complete protection, he couldn''t shake the feeling that something might go wrong. His hand rested lightly on the hilt of his sword, ready to act at a moment''s notice. Though there was no danger here, Daiki knew better than to let his guard down. "Tell me, what do you know?" Anos asked, his voice barely above a whisper, yet it carried the weight of command. Olvia Omoro, for the first time since his capture, no longer exuded that air of superiority. He had resigned himself to his fate. Why struggle when the end was inevitable? Still, something was intriguing about this conversation, and so he decided to indulge Anos. "I have to admit," Anos began, a small smirk playing at his lips, "in some ways, I admire the CP departments. The way you operate under direct orders from the World Government is... efficient." "But let''s be honest, it''s not the World Government that commands you, is it? You only follow the orders of those five old men The Five Elders." Omoro said nothing, but the flicker in his eyes gave him away. Anos leaned in slightly, watching for every twitch of emotion. He wasn''t just fishing for information; he was confirming things he already suspected. "Let me guess," Anos continued, his smirk widening, "Besides the Space Series Devil Fruits that the Five Elders have you searching for, the other fruits you''re tasked with finding are the surgical ones. You''ve been looking for the Ope Ope no Mi, haven''t you?" The look of surprise on Olvia Omoro''s face was brief, but it was enough. Anos had hit the mark, and he knew it. Olvia''s silence was all the confirmation he needed. "King Tru," Olvia Omoro said, his voice measured, though the astonishment still lingered in his tone, "I must admit, I''m surprised. Who would have thought that a small kingdom in the South Blue could learn so much about events in the New World?" Anos chuckled, rising to his feet. "The New World? I haven''t heard that term in a while. I can only imagine what''s happening there now." He began pacing slowly, his gaze distant as if recalling something long forgotten. "But if I had to guess, I''d say the most powerful force on the seas right now is still the Whitebeard Pirates. And the surviving members of the Rocks Pirates¡­ well, they''ve all grown in power, haven''t they?" Olvia''s eyes darkened slightly at the mention of the Whitebeard Pirates, but he remained silent, listening. "I wouldn''t be surprised," Anos continued, "if the World Government is having a harder time controlling things now. The balance of power is slipping through their fingers, and there''s no telling how things will play out. But if you survive long enough, Olvia, you might get to see how this world changes." "It sounds like I won''t survive, though, doesn''t it?" Olvia Omoro''s smile returned, though it was more subdued now. The resignation in his voice was undeniable. Anos nodded, his gaze hardening. "That''s right. It''s unlikely you''ll make it out of here alive." Olvia Omoro took in a slow breath, his expression unchanged. He had accepted his fate long before this moment. Struggling now would be futile. "Daiki," Anos called out to his second-in-command, who remained vigilant at the edge of the barrier, "take care of the CP agents. Make it swift." Daiki nodded, stepping forward without hesitation. The other CP2 agents were already on the verge of collapse, their injuries severe. It would take only a flick of his wrist to end it all. Daiki''s blade gleamed in the dim light as he approached the men, his movements efficient and cold. Within moments, the deed was done. Only Olvia Omoro remained, sitting in the centre of the room, his eyes meeting Anos''s without any sign of hatred. "So, King Tru," Olvia began speaking again, "this trip to the South Blue has certainly been enlightening. I never imagined that a kingdom like yours could harbour someone as powerful as you. But if the World Government learns about your existence, I wonder what state things will be in then?" Anos chuckled once more, the sound low and dangerous. "You''re right to be concerned, Olvia Omoro. If the World Government finds out about our strength, even I can''t predict what will happen." "But in two years, the seas will change drastically. Not even the World Government will be able to control it. Let alone your CP divisions none of them will have the power to stop us." Olvia Omoro''s eyes widened slightly. "Why are you so certain that the seas will change so much within two years?" "The New World," Anos said, his voice dropping to a conspiratorial whisper, "is only so big. And the pirates? They''re restless. Everyone wants to be the next Pirate King. They all want to know the truth behind the One Piece." As he spoke, the tension in the room grew thicker. The mention of the legendary treasure, the One Piece, had a way of stirring emotions in even the most hardened of men. "Given that, the island of Laugh Tale will become a battleground for the greatest powers on the seas. The remaining members of the Rocks Pirates will play a key role in this. And as for the Marines¡­ well, they won''t have the time or resources to deal with what''s happening in the Four Seas." Olvia''s lips curled into a small smile. "Thank you, King Tru. I never expected to receive such insight before my death." Olvia Omoro truly expressed his sincere thanks this time. He understood what Anos had said, but now, connecting all the pieces made him realize just how frightening the little guy in front of him truly was. --- 46. End of CP-2 --- However, Daiki, who was standing next to Anos, looked utterly confused. He couldn''t figure out what the two people were discussing. The conversation between his king and the others seemed to be filled with strange terms, things he had never encountered in his life. As a person who had spent most of his time within the confines of his kingdom, this exposure to ideas and realms far beyond his comprehension was unsettling. He had never even heard of the term "New World," let alone any of the other concepts being casually thrown around. The New World was an enigma to him, a place that seemed to hold weight and significance in the conversation, but to him, it might as well have been a myth. This place they mentioned seemed to represent something far beyond his understanding. Though he didn''t understand, Daiki meticulously wrote down the words in his mind. Despite his ignorance, he trusted Anos completely. If his king deemed these things important, then they were undoubtedly vital for the future. Following his king had always led him to victory, to safety, to progress. Anos had a vision for their kingdom, and Daiki was certain that vision extended to this "New World" they kept referencing. One day, he believed that Anos would guide him there, into the heart of it. In Daiki''s mind, the South Blue would one day become the most powerful region in the seas, just as Anos had said. "Olvia Omoro, tell me do you have any last wishes before your death?" Anos asked, his voice almost playful, as though the imminent death of the CP2 chief was a mere formality. "If possible, I wouldn''t mind helping you fulfil them!" Olvia simply smiled a small, soft gesture. He shook his head slightly, the movement subtle, almost as if death no longer bothered him. It was clear to him that he had lost, and the resignation in his eyes reflected this acceptance. He had never imagined this would be his end, never thought he''d fall at the hands of someone like Anos. Still, there were no unfulfilled wishes left in him. His journey, in his eyes, had reached its final destination. Anos tilted his head, watching the man''s calmness with mild curiosity. "Since you don''t have any wishes, I suppose I can tell you one last thing before you die." His voice dropped, the smile on his lips growing a little more sinister. "There is an overlord among the Five Elders that you worship so dearly." Olvia Omoro''s smile didn''t falter, though a flicker of understanding passed through his gaze. Anos didn''t give him any more time to react. With a quick motion, he placed his hand on Olvia''s head. In an instant, Olvia Omoro''s entire body disappeared, vanishing into thin air without a trace. All that remained on the ground was the restraining collar that had once bound him. The disappearance was eerie, the suddenness of it unsettling, but Daiki had seen this technique before. This was Anos''s most powerful ability space decomposition. A technique that allowed Anos to obliterate anything in his path, reducing objects, even living beings, to nothingness. Anos could crush any object into a state of oblivion, making it impossible for anyone to trace the destruction back to him. It was a terrifying ability, one that few could counter or defend against. The genuine version of this novel can be found on another site. Support the author by reading it there. In this world, it was nearly impossible to find anyone with knowledge about the inner workings of Anos''s techniques. His abilities were as exclusive as he was, and he preferred it that way. Despite the victory, when Olvia vanished, Anos felt a strange emptiness in his heart. He couldn''t quite place why. Perhaps it was because someone like Olvia had challenged him, and it would be hard to find an opponent as formidable in the future. The thought left him feeling somewhat hollow. Anos wasn''t a pirate. He didn''t crave endless bloodshed or chaos, and in different circumstances, he might have spared Olvia''s life. But things were different now. Too many people relied on him, and the weight of their lives hung on his decisions. He couldn''t afford to be sentimental. The life of one man, no matter how strong or familiar, was not worth risking the peace and stability of his kingdom. The Kingdom of Tru couldn''t afford such a gamble. Olvia''s death wasn''t a personal vendetta it was a calculated necessity. Even though Olvia had once been an acquaintance, perhaps even a rival, Anos held no mercy for those who threatened the future of his kingdom. There was no room for leniency in this game. As for the other CP2 agents, they were still scattered across the battlefield, lying on the ground one by one. They had once been formidable opponents, powerful in their own right. These were agents trained to handle the most difficult missions, to face the deadliest threats in the world. But they had failed, all because of one fatal flaw arrogance. They had underestimated Anos, underestimated his power, and that mistake had cost them everything. Despite their physical training and discipline, they never truly saw Anos as a serious threat. If they had faced him with the respect and caution he deserved, perhaps the battle might have ended differently. But now, it was too late. After all this was over, Anos sighed, his chest rising and falling as the tension left his body. Slowly, he stood up. His expression was completely different from earlier. The playful demeanour was gone, replaced by a seriousness that made the air around him feel heavy. The change in his expression didn''t go unnoticed. Daiki, standing next to him, felt a tremendous pressure settle over him. His king''s seriousness always had that effect on him. Anos''s power and authority radiated off him in waves, making it almost impossible for Daiki to stand unaffected. However, after Olvia''s death, something strange happened. The moment the CP2 agent was gone, his Devil Fruit ability immediately transferred to a nearby fruit. The glowing fruit emitted a soft, purple light, drawing Daiki''s attention. "Daiki," Anos said, turning his attention to Daiki, "Take Olvia''''s Zoan-type Mythical Beast Devil Fruit and eat it. I''ve told you about Devil Fruits before. Don''t betray my trust!" Daiki''s heart pounded in his chest. He knew exactly what the Zoan-type Devil Fruit was capable of, and now, His Majesty the King was asking him to use it. This was more than just an order it was a symbol of Anos''s trust in him. If he consumed this fruit, it would change his life forever. Though excitement rushed through him, Daiki remained composed. Kneeling before his king, he looked up with determination in his eyes. "Your Majesty, I will not fail you. I will live up to your trust." Anos watched him for a moment before nodding. "We''ve known each other for years. I believe in you. But you understand, don''t you? Once today''s events come to light, the consequences will fall on our kingdom." The weight of his words hung in the air. "Our kingdom may not be able to withstand the repercussions of what''s to come," Anos continued, his voice quieter now. "The World Government, the Marines... they won''t take this lightly." "Yes, Your Majesty¡­" Daiki''s voice was resolute, his loyalty unwavering. "Go ahead. Eat the Devil Fruit," Anos commanded. "Olvia Omoro never unlocked its full potential. Don''t let me down." With a deep breath, Daiki approached the fruit. It seemed to hum with energy, its faint purple glow casting a shadow over the battlefield. He reached out, his hands trembling slightly, and picked it up. The anticipation in his chest was almost overwhelming. Closing his eyes, he took a sharp bite. The taste was vile, almost unbearable, but Daiki forced it down. Immediately, he gagged, the foul taste nearly making him vomit. His body shuddered as he felt the power of the Devil Fruit begin to flow through him. Just as he was about to take another bite, Anos''s laughter echoed through the air. "Did you forget what I told you? One bite is enough." Daiki blinked, staring at the fruit in his hand. "Ah? Is that so?" Anos chuckled, shaking his head. "Yes. One bite is all you need." Relieved, Daiki dropped the fruit, wiping his mouth with the back of his hand. He could feel the Devil Fruit''s power coursing through him, though he didn''t yet know how to control it. It would take time, months, perhaps, to fully understand his new abilities. "We''ll make preparations to leave in three days," Anos said, turning away from the battlefield. "Inform the surrounding kingdoms that the Tru Kingdom will join the World Government. This is just the beginning. The momentum we''ve built will serve us well in the future." --- 47. New World --- After saying that, the two began walking back directly, their footsteps echoing on the stone pathway that led through the heart of the castle. The sky overhead was starting to dim, painted in the soft hues of dusk. The once-vibrant sounds of the kingdom bustling with activity were slowly fading as the day drew to a close, but even in the quiet, the weight of Daiki''s question lingered. "Your Majesty, what are the New World and One Piece?" Daiki asked, his voice tentative yet laced with curiosity. Anos, who was walking ahead, briefly paused. The question amused him, as a faint smile tugged at the corners of his lips. Without turning around, he began his explanation, his tone confident and steady, as though he were speaking of something he had known intimately for a long time. "The New World," Anos began, his voice deepening with emphasis, "is the second half of the Grand Line. It''s where the truly powerful individuals gather." "The challenges there are unlike anything you''ve seen in the first half of the sea. The islands, the weather, the people everything is more extreme." "Those who survive there are among the strongest in the world." As he spoke, Anos''s gaze grew distant, as if he could see beyond the walls of the kingdom and into that fabled sea. It was clear that the New World held a special place in his mind, not just as a destination, but as a proving ground for those with true strength. Daiki nodded thoughtfully, trying to absorb the weight of what the New World represented. He had heard stories of tales of immense danger and unimaginable riches, of entire crews swallowed by the ferocious seas or torn apart by the creatures that lurked beneath the waves. But hearing it from Anos, the king himself, made it all seem more real, more tangible. "And One Piece?" Daiki pressed, the excitement bubbling in his voice. "What exactly is it?" Anos chuckled softly, shaking his head. "As for One Piece... It''s always been called the great treasure, but until now, no one knows what it is." "Some think it''s gold or jewels, others believe it holds unimaginable power. But the truth? Only Roger''s crew knows for sure." His tone turned more serious as he continued, "The Pirate King, Roger, left it on Raftel known as the Ultimate Island, a place no one has reached since his crew." "Whatever One Piece is, it''s hidden there, waiting for someone strong enough to claim it." Daiki blinked, his mind racing with the possibilities. "A great treasure?" he muttered to himself. "Could it be that much wealth?" Beside him, Haruya, who had been silently listening, suddenly burst out in excitement, his voices overlapping. "Does that mean there''s a lot of money involved?!" Haruya exclaimed, his eyes wide with excitement. Anos glanced over his shoulder at the two, shaking his head with a sigh. "What are you thinking? No one knows what One Piece truly is." "If it were just a pile of gold and silver, do you think the Pirate King''s crew would have lived such hard lives after his death?" The question hung in the air, sobering the excitement of the young men. Anos''s words carried more weight than just his role as king they spoke of knowledge gained through experience and observation. It wasn''t the first time Daiki realized how much there was still to learn about the world. "I''m sorry, Your Majesty," Daiki said sheepishly, his face flushed with embarrassment. "I don''t know much about these things. I''ve only heard rumours." Anos gave him a reassuring smile, the corners of his eyes crinkling slightly. "It''s fine. Soon enough, you''ll see for yourself." Stolen from its rightful place, this narrative is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings. As they walked through the corridors, the stone walls of the castle reflected the faint orange glow of the setting sun. The grandeur of the Tru Kingdom''s palace was something to behold, a symbol of the prosperity the kingdom had recently achieved under Anos''s rule. Yet, beneath the surface, there was still a tension that couldn''t be ignored. The upcoming voyage would take them far from the safety of the kingdom. "We''ll set sail in three days," Anos announced, breaking the quiet as they exited the castle and stepped onto the wide balcony overlooking the city. "Then, I''ll show you what the Grand Line looks like with your own eyes." Daiki glanced out at the city below, the flickering lights of the evening torches being lit one by one, giving the kingdom a soft, warm glow. Last time, Anos had intended to tour the Grand Line, but the sudden attack from the Roya Kingdom had delayed the journey. Now, the opportunity had arisen once again, and Daiki could sense that this time, there would be no interruptions. "This time, our destination is the Holy Land, Mariejois," Anos said, his voice firm. "It presents a rare chance for us to strengthen our position in the world." "To get there, we''ll have to cross the Grand Line and its dangers, but I believe this is the right moment." The mention of Mariejois made Daiki pause. He had heard of the Holy Land the seat of power for the World Government, home to the Celestial Dragons. It was a place of opulence and control, a place where kings and nobles bowed to greater forces. For a moment, Daiki wondered what kind of reception awaited them there. "The Tru Kingdom has nothing to fear from joining the World Government," Anos continued as they walked down the steps of the castle. "We were once poor, unable to afford the Heavenly Tribute. But now things have changed. Our economy is strong, and we can stand on equal footing." Daiki followed Anos down the long stone steps, their footfalls echoing through the courtyard. The platform above them, where the battle against the Roya Kingdom''s forces had taken place, was still in ruins. The scars of that conflict were etched deeply into the stone, a grim reminder of the price of survival. The CP division had been completely wiped out during the battle. To outsiders, the kingdom seemed untouched by strife, its peaceful exterior hiding the truth of the devastation that had occurred. Yet, the Tru Kingdom had managed to hold its ground, emerging victorious against its enemies. "The next step is negotiating with the World Government," Anos said quietly as they reached the bottom of the steps. "It won''t be easy, but it''s a necessary step." Everything in the Tru Kingdom was developing steadily, but Anos knew that there was still much work to be done before they could achieve their ideal vision. Despite the progress, the kingdom''s growth had already caught the attention of neighbouring Kingdoms, and envy was beginning to fester. Since the defeat of the Roya Kingdom, no surrounding Kingdom dared challenge the Tru Kingdom''s authority. But that didn''t mean they weren''t watching closely, waiting for a chance to strike. Rumours had begun to spread about the prosperity of the Tru Kingdom. The living conditions of its people were the envy of many, and citizens of the nearby Kingdom had started migrating toward its borders, hoping to find better lives. The influx of new residents had not gone unnoticed. Anos welcomed these newcomers with open arms. "A growing population means a stronger economy," he had often said. He knew that the strength of a kingdom wasn''t determined solely by wealth, but by the people who lived within its borders. Still, the stability of the kingdom rested on a delicate balance, and Anos was well aware of that. But, too much population will also harm the kingdom in the long run... --- After the Tru Kingdom''s announcement that it would join the World Government, many of the kingdom''s lower-class citizens were concerned. To them, joining the World Government meant increased taxes and the loss of independence. They feared the worst. But Anos had anticipated this reaction. The very next day, the kingdom began issuing public notices, explaining the benefits of joining the World Government. Most importantly, the notices reassured the people that the costs associated with membership wouldn''t fall on their shoulders. The tension that had gripped the kingdom began to ease as the truth became clear. Many had feared that their kingdom would face the same fate as the neighbouring Solbe Kingdom, which was known for its oppressive taxation and ruthless extortion of its people to pay the Heavenly Tribute. But the Tru Kingdom was different, and Anos had made sure the people knew it. --- Three days later, Anos stood at Nanniwa Port, gazing out at the horizon. The ship before him was smaller and sleeker than the grand vessels usually seen in the kingdom''s fleet, but it was perfect for the journey ahead. Unlike before, Anos was not setting out as a mere traveller. This time, he was leaving as a king, heading for the Holy Land, Mariejois, to secure the future of his kingdom. At his side, Suzu stood with a small notebook, listing off the supplies for the journey. "Your Majesty, everything is prepared. We have 50 bottles of rose perfume, 2,000 sets of fine clothing, a golden sceptre symbolizing your authority, and several other items. They''re all loaded on board." Anos nodded, satisfied with the preparations. "Your Majesty, may I come with you this time?" Losta asked eagerly, her eyes filled with excitement. "I''d love to see the New World with my own eyes." Anos smiled and placed a hand on her shoulder. "There will be plenty of opportunities for that in the future, but for now, the kingdom needs you here. Once we''ve stabilized, you can travel wherever you wish." "Don''t worry, Losta. This time, we''re going with His Majesty for a bit of fun. If there''s a chance next time, I''ll speak to His Majesty and personally take you along!" Daiki added with a smile. "I understand..." Losta replied, looking disappointed. "Now that everyone''s ready, let''s head out quickly! I''m eager to see what Mariejois looks like now!" Anos said. This was the second time Anos left the kingdom, but unlike before, this time he had a clear objective. All that remained was to move toward the destination. ---- 48. Laboon --- "Hey! Shall I show you a giant whale" Anos said while Looking at the sky. "A Whale?" Haruya said with confusion. "Yes! His name is laboon" Anos said with a bored voice. "Inform Them to head towards Reverse Mountain" Anos spoke with interest. "Yes! Your majesty" Haruya hurried to inform Anos''s order. As they arrived Near the Mountain. The twisting climb of the seas, battling against the current, always seemed like an absurd, almost impossible task. After all, it felt like avoiding a significant detour, only to dive headlong into an even greater challenge. The ship creaked under the pressure, its sails full as they ascended the mountain. The windless zone is notorious for being infested with Sea Kings, where normal ships could be easily destroyed. The sea wind howled as the ship climbed the impossible waterway, its prow cutting through the water as if it were slicing through solid rock. The crew braced themselves, knowing that their journey was still long and fraught with danger. This time, the navigator on the ship was still Barlow. He had been with them for some time, though his origins as a pirate were still a part of his past. Since giving up his life as a pirate, Barlow had found a new purpose in guiding this crew, his once-grand dreams of treasure and conquest now a distant memory. Having tasted the quiet life, he now preferred life on this ship, away from the chaos of the New World. After all, there was a kind of peace in navigating the seas, a rhythm that even the wildest waters couldn''t break. The wind in his hair and the constant hum of the sea beneath him was different from the violence of piracy but no less exhilarating. The sea ahead looked calm, almost identical to when they had set out. There were no obstacles, just the smooth stretch of water leading up the mountain, which seemed to vanish into the clouds. But they knew better than to trust appearances. This was Reverse Mountain, after all a place where the seas flowed upwards, defying logic and nature. Upon arriving at Reverse Mountain again, the crew found themselves once more staring in awe. No matter how many times they had witnessed it, the sight of water flowing uphill never ceased to amaze them. It was a phenomenon that subverted the laws of physics, a force of nature that seemed to exist solely to challenge their understanding of the world. "Tell Barlow to slow the ship when we descend," Anos ordered Haruya, his trusted second-in-command. "There may be something unexpected ahead." Haruya nodded, his sharp eyes scanning the horizon for any signs of danger. The thought of what might be waiting for them at the base of the mountain lingered in his mind. Anos stood still at the helm, his hand resting on the hilt of his sword, his thoughts wandering to the stories he''d heard about the Laboon. His mind drifted to one particular legend the massive whale, a creature said to have roamed these waters for over fifty years, ever since the official story began. Would they encounter it today? He wondered, a faint smile playing on his lips. The story has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the violation. As the ship picked up speed, its sails catching the strong winds that pushed them towards the Grand Line, the crew''s anticipation grew. Their eyes widened as the sea stretched out before them, vast and endless. The horizon held mysteries they had yet to uncover. Then it appeared. At first, it was just a dark shape beneath the waves, a shadow too large to be a normal sea creature. The crew began to murmur among themselves, uncertainty tingling in the air. But as they drew closer, the shape became clearer a massive fish, larger than their entire ship. Though only its head breached the surface, it looked like a mountain rising from the depths of the ocean. "Your Majesty, be careful..." Daiki leapt to the bow of the ship, his hands gripping the hilt of his sword. His body was tense, every muscle ready for action. Anos, standing tall and confident, was unfazed by the sight. He seemed more amused than anything. After all, this was the first major creature from the official storyline that they had encountered. Seeing Haruya ready for battle so quickly brought a chuckle to his lips. "Come down, it''s fine! Stop worrying!" Anos called out, his voice carrying over the deck. Daiki, startled by Anos''s easy demeanour, paused for a moment before recalling Anos''s earlier instructions to inform Barlow. It clicked Anos had known about this whale all along. Haruya quickly approached Anos, still slightly confused. "Your Majesty, did you know this creature would be here?" "We''ll talk about it when we get closer," Anos replied, a mysterious smile playing on his lips. "I''m curious to see just how big this thing is." The ship slowed as Barlow expertly adjusted the sails and began the descent. Thanks to the preparations, they gradually came to a stop about fifty or sixty meters from the enormous whale. The crew gathered at the ship''s edge, staring in awe at the creature before them. It was truly gargantuan its eyes alone were as big as half their ship. "Wow¡­ this guy is enormous!" Suzu, one of the younger crewmembers, exclaimed. Her voice was filled with a mixture of fear and amazement as she gazed up at the whale. Even the seasoned sailors among them couldn''t hide their astonishment. Many of them had never ventured beyond their home seas, and the world beyond the horizon was still a vast unknown. Only Barlow and a few others had travelled far and wide, seeing the wonders and dangers of the ocean. But even they had never seen something like this up close. Anos, for all his regal composure, felt a thrill of excitement deep in his chest. Seeing this enormous creature in person was different from watching it on a screen. The sheer scale of the whale, Laboon, made him feel small in comparison. "Your Majesty, this thing is massive!" Daiki muttered, his gaze never leaving the whale. "Well, it''s the largest island whale in the sea," Anos replied, his tone almost casual. "It might not be the biggest creature in the world, but it''s certainly up there." "Woooooooooo¡­" The whale''s low, rumbling cry echoed through the sea, sending waves rippling outwards. The sound alone caused their ship, the Tempest, to shudder under the force. It was as if the very ocean was responding to the whale''s voice. The crew braced themselves, clinging to the ship as the waves rocked them. For a moment, it felt like the ship might be torn apart by the sheer power of Laboon''s voice. "Your name is Laboon, isn''t it?" Anos called out from the bow of the ship, his voice steady and clear. The massive whale, its dull eyes slowly focusing, turned towards them. The crew collectively held their breath as Laboon''s gaze settled on them, its enormous eyes scanning the ship. The sheer weight of its attention was enough to make even the most seasoned sailors nervous. If Laboon opened its mouth, it could swallow their ship whole, crew and all. The thought crossed everyone''s mind, a silent, unspoken fear hanging in the air. As Laboon tilted its head, the slight motion sent waves crashing into the ship. The Abri groaned under the pressure, nearly smashing into the rocky cliffs of Reverse Mountain. If it weren''t for Barlow''s quick reflexes, they would have been capsized right then and there. "Your Majesty, do you¡­ know this creature?" Suzu asked, her voice trembling slightly as she glanced between Anos and the massive whale. "I wouldn''t say I know him," Anos replied with a grin. "But I''ve heard of him." Laboon, sensing something familiar in Anos''s words, seemed to calm slightly. Its massive head loomed above them, casting a shadow that engulfed the entire ship. The crew, still on edge, watched in silence as the whale''s curiosity seemed to grow. Anos, watching the creature intently, could feel its emotions. Laboon was not just some mindless beast. It was a living being with thoughts, memories, and a purpose. He might not have the power to hear the voice of all things yet but he didn''t need it to understand Laboon''s longing. "You don''t need to doubt me," Anos said, his voice soft but sure. "I''ve heard your name, Laboon. I know why you''re here. And if you''re willing, I can help you find what you''re looking for." The whale blinked slowly, its massive eyes filled with something that resembled hope. Laboon, almost after fifty years of waiting, seemed to understand that Anos wasn''t just any sailor passing through. He might be the one to end its lonely vigil. Anos, still smiling, watched as the great whale''s excitement grew. He didn''t need to be able to hear the voice of all things to know what was coming next. This was the beginning of something great. --- 49. Enternal Pose --- After Laboon heard what Anos said, there was hesitation in his eyes, but he quickly shook his head, creating a huge wave in an instant. "Wooooooooooo..." "Your Majesty, please stop speaking with him. If we continue, everyone on this ship will be frozen with fear!" Suzu, terrified, sat on the deck with tears in her eyes. It was clear she was overwhelmed by fear. The others were also a bit frightened, and even Daiki was at a loss when faced with the situation. Anos, however, was the only one who laughed out loud. "Let''s move on, the mission is more important. This whale can wait for another time!" Anos smiled and ordered the people around him. These people had no intention of staying any longer. One by one, they seized the moment to leave. Facing such a massive creature, even if it sneezed, their small ship could be sunk instantly. Barlow, on the other hand, wished he could use both his hands and feet to get the ship moving faster. He even wished the ship had wings to fly away. To him, the danger felt overwhelming. Just a brief conversation made them feel like their lives were in danger. If they continued talking, this whale could easily crush them if things went wrong. "Goodbye! I''ll talk to you again if we get the chance. If you''re willing, you can visit the Tru Kingdom in the South Blue!" Anos shouted to Laboon as the ship began to sail. Not long after they left, an old man who seemed to be in his fifties emerged. His eyes were cloudy, and he watched as the ship disappeared, then slowly receded into Laboon''s enormous head. This journey wasn''t an adventurous one, just a mission. It lacked the intensity of the voyages the protagonists experience on the Grand Line. Besides, at this time in the first half of the Grand Line, there weren''t as many pirates as they expected. Still, encountering even one or two pirates along the way would be considered lucky. This story has been stolen from Royal Road. If you read it on Amazon, please report it After all, the sea was vast, and the chances of encountering a small pirate crew were slim. "Suzu, where does the Log Pose we acquired point to?" Anos asked curiously. "Your Majesty, the Log Pose we have only leads to Alabasta. It''s the only Eternal Pose we could purchase on the Grand Line." Suzu replied, her appearance noticeably different from before. She had adopted the style Anos preferred: a white shirt, hip-hugging skirt, black stockings, high heels, long ponytail, and black-rimmed glasses. Suzu was filled with expectations for this voyage. After all, a capable king like Anos was a rarity in many places. However, Anos picked up on a crucial point the Eternal Pose led to Alabasta. He was quite impressed by that Kingdom. Suddenly, Anos seemed to remember something important. "Daiki, when we arrive in Alabasta, we will stop there for a week. During that time, I have a task for you. It must be completed by then!" Anos'' face turned serious, surprising those around him. Suzu hadn''t expected that just the mention of Alabasta could make their king so grave. Daiki wiped the smile off his face, his expression now serious. "Please give me your command, Your Majesty!" "In the Alabasta Palace, there is something very important stored about Baterilla Island. It''s crucial to us. I need you to destroy the records kept there. Can you do it?" Since everyone on the deck was a close confidant of Anos, there was no need to hide anything. Though Suzu was curious about what exactly was kept on Baterilla Island, judging by their expressions, it was clear that this matter was of great importance. Even though Suzu couldn''t guess the exact nature of it, the seriousness on Daiki''s face was undeniable. "Your Majesty, don''t worry! I will definitely accomplish this mission!" Daiki said with determination. "Don''t rush. After all, the item is stored in the palace, and this order isn''t urgent. Just do your best," Anos said, relaxing a bit and smiling at Daiki. "Your Majesty, you once said this matter concerns the survival of our kingdom. Even if I die, I will fulfil the task!" Daiki responded resolutely. "Then let''s see what happens!" Anos replied with a smile. The rest of their voyage was largely uneventful. Their destination was Alabasta, and though they passed several islands along the way, none presented any significant obstacles. The ship had ample supplies, so they continued onward without needing to stop. However, the Tru Kingdom was making headlines regularly, and there were few secrets left by the time Anos and his crew embarked on their journey. Before their arrival, Alabasta had already begun making preparations. ---- In Alabasta''s palace: "Minister Zuo, where are they expected to be now?" King Cobra asked a man about his age, but with a fat face and large ears. "Your Majesty, the King of Tru Kingdom is estimated to arrive in two days. However, we are unsure if they will stop in Alabasta," replied the left minister. "Don''t worry! They will definitely stop here. After all, they need to go to Mariejois, and the Eternal Pose to Mariejois is only available here in Alabasta!" Cobra said with a confident smile. "But Your Majesty, how could such a small kingdom in the South Blue know about the Eternal Pose?" the minister asked. "You underestimate them. If they didn''t know, do you think they could conduct such large-scale maritime trade, even involving the Marines, and still manage to silence their opponents?" Cobra responded. He did not believe that Tru Kingdom lacked intelligence. From what he had read in the newspapers, it was clear that Tru Kingdom was far more capable than it appeared. ---- 50. Sea Cat --- In the grand Royal Palace of Alabasta, preparations were well underway for the arrival of a guest unlike any other the young King Anos of the Tru Kingdom. The sprawling halls, filled with intricate tapestries and pillars adorned with alabaster carvings, hummed with the anxious energy of attendants and servants, all bustling about in anticipation of the momentous occasion. The palace, a symbol of ancient strength and power, now found itself hosting one of the most significant events in recent history. Anos, a figure that invoked both awe and fear across the seas, was no ordinary person. His rise to the throne in the South Blue was one marked by decisive action and an unyielding will. The Tru Kingdom, under his rule, had quickly transformed from a struggling nation to a thriving powerhouse. The people of Alabasta had heard tales of his leadership of how he had resolved their food crises, ensuring that no citizen went hungry, and how the economy had blossomed under his reign. This was why the Tru Kingdom had become a place of fond memories for many. Yet, as King Cobra of Alabasta prepared to meet Anos, his thoughts were less concerned with the young king''s reputation and more with the gravity of their meeting. For Cobra, the situation was dire. Alabasta had long-held secrets that could change the course of history, and in the hands of the wrong person, they could spell disaster. The key to those secrets was none other than the Eternal Log Pose, a device that pointed directly to the Holy Land of Mariejois a treasure found only within the boundaries of Alabasta on the entire Grand Line. This single artefact, so innocuous in appearance, held immense value. And only the Royal Palace of Alabasta had the means to control its power. Cobra, with the weight of his kingdom''s future pressing down on him, had made a decision. He had declared boldly that the world would come to Alabasta, knowing that the Eternal Pose would draw in not just kings, but pirates, revolutionaries, and perhaps even forces far darker. It was a risky move, but Cobra had faith that Anos would be among the first to arrive. Anos, known for his far-reaching ambitions, wouldn''t miss this opportunity. The mention of Pluton, the ancient weapon capable of untold destruction, was enough to draw anyone''s attention especially when it was rumoured to be hidden within the sands of Alabasta itself. What made the situation even more dangerous was that only one person in the world could currently read the ancient Poneglyphs, the key to unlocking Pluton''s secrets. And that person was a wild card, whose loyalty to any particular cause or king was uncertain. Anos knew that nothing was guaranteed. Even though the original plan had been set in motion, the presence of so many powerful players could change everything. Anos understood this well. His appearance in Alabasta would likely disrupt the delicate balance, forcing pirates, marines, and even revolutionaries to act in unpredictable ways. That was why, before making his move, he had dispatched Daiki, his most trusted confidant, to eliminate any hidden dangers. Anos was not one to gamble. Love what you''re reading? Discover and support the author on the platform they originally published on. He preferred to neutralize threats before they ever had a chance to grow. As the towering walls of the Alabasta palace loomed on the horizon, memories of the past weighed heavily on Anos''s mind. If not for his recent visit to Mariejois, he might have overlooked the importance of this moment. But now, he knew better. The potential threat to his kingdom could not be ignored, and any failure to act now would only invite disaster in the future. Even though no one could predict how the Tru Kingdom would evolve over the coming years, Anos was determined to protect his people by snuffing out any threat while it was still in its infancy. He had no delusions of grandeur or dreams of conquest he simply sought stability for his kingdom. And now, that stability was being threatened by the very sands of Alabasta. "When I learned that the ancient weapon Pluton was hidden within my kingdom, I couldn''t believe it," Anos had admitted to Daiki in a rare moment of vulnerability. "But now, we must do what is necessary to ensure our survival." The voyage to Alabasta had been long, but Anos and his crew were well-prepared. The vast desert kingdom appeared before them two days after setting sail, its endless stretches of sand shimmering under the oppressive sun. Alabasta was unlike any other Kingdom they had encountered before. It wasn''t just its size that set it apart it was the harsh, unforgiving climate that greeted them as soon as they neared the shore. The bright, golden sands stretched far beyond the horizon, blending seamlessly with the pale blue sky. It was a landscape devoid of the greenery and life that they had seen on previous islands. Only a few scattered trees clung to life in this arid wilderness. Such stark contrasts were a hallmark of the Grand Line, where the environments of neighbouring islands could differ drastically, even if they were only a few days apart. Suzu, one of Anos''s most loyal companions, wiped the sweat from her brow as she stepped out onto the deck. She was wearing a wide-brimmed sun hat, but even that couldn''t shield her from the scorching heat. "Your Majesty, this Grand Line is truly something else. Just yesterday, it was freezing cold, and now it''s unbearably hot!" Anos glanced at her from his recliner, a slight smirk playing on his lips. "That''s the Grand Line for you. It''s an unpredictable place, filled with dangers and mysteries that have drawn people from all over the world. It''s also where dreams are made and broken." He lounged under the shade of a large umbrella, dressed casually in beach shorts and oversized sunglasses, sipping on a cold drink. "But it''s also the place where we''ll find the answers we''re looking for," he added. Suzu wasn''t the only one feeling the effects of the heat. The entire crew seemed to be suffering from the rapid temperature change. But for Anos, this was nothing out of the ordinary. There wasn''t much to do aboard the ship except relax and enjoy the rare moments of peace between adventures. "Your Majesty," Daiki spoke up, his voice tinged with curiosity. "Ever since we entered the Grand Line, I''ve noticed a bird following us. I don''t know if it''s my imagination, but it''s been flying above us for quite some time." Anos didn''t even bother opening both eyes. He simply shifted slightly on his recliner, peering up at the sky through one eye. "You''re not imagining it. That bird has been with us since we set sail." Daiki''s eyes widened as he looked up at the sky. "Is it... watching us?" Anos chuckled softly, his demeanour calm as always. "Most likely. There are countless eyes on us, Daiki. Not just from that bird. We''re being watched by nations, pirates, and even the Marines. But don''t let it bother you. We haven''t done anything suspicious." Still, Daiki couldn''t shake the uneasy feeling that crept up his spine. He stood up, scanning the sky intently. "But what if¡ª" "Relax," Anos interrupted, his tone dismissive. "Let it watch. We''re far from being the only ones under scrutiny. We''re sailing the seas, after all. Even if this bird disappears, something else will take its place soon enough." Suzu, ever observant, chimed in, "Do you think it could be a new bird? You know, one of those that deliver the World Economic news?" Anos nodded, taking another sip of his drink. "Most likely. They have their ways of keeping an eye on things. Don''t worry about it. We have bigger concerns ahead." Their conversation was interrupted when a crew member shouted from the crow''s nest. "Your Majesty... there''s a giant cat!" Anos sat up, curious. He removed his sunglasses, and sure enough, there was a massive lucky cat on their sailing path. Its snow-white body gleamed in the sunlight, and one of its paws was raised as if to greet them. The creature stood over fifty meters tall, its lower half submerged in the water. To most people, such a sight would have been terrifying, but Anos and his crew had seen far stranger things on the Grand Line. Suzu grinned. "So cute!" she exclaimed, as the cat''s massive form loomed over them. "What did you think it was?" Anos replied with a smirk. "It''s just one of Alabasta''s famous Sea Cats. Keep sailing." And with that, Anos leaned back into his recliner, unbothered by the peculiar sight, as the ship continued toward the vast desert kingdom of Alabasta, where even greater mysteries awaited them. ---- 51. Arrival in Alabasta --- "Your Majesty, should we disembark at Nanohana in Alabasta? Or proceed directly to Alubarna, their royal capital?" Suzu asked. "Nanohana?" Anos pondered briefly and then responded, "Let''s stop here. It will give us a chance to observe the customs of Alabasta and better understand the situation in this kingdom." "Understood, Your Majesty. I will make the necessary arrangements immediately!" Suzu replied. In Anos''s memory, Nanohana was known for its perfume production, but given Alabasta''s current state, it was unlikely they could even grow flowers, let alone produce perfume. Yet, an idea soon came to him. Currently, his kingdom''s trade couldn''t extend into the Grand Line due to high costs. However, if there were an intermediary base kingdom for sales, these costs could be significantly reduced. After a moment of thought, he dismissed the idea for now. The heat was unbearable, and he already felt like diving into the sea for relief. But as someone who had eaten a Devil Fruit, he knew the sea was deadly for him. The weather in Alabasta was relentlessly intensely hot and incredibly dry. Even in the shade, his lips were drying out within minutes. The ship moved sluggishly through the region, relying entirely on wind power, but wind was a rare commodity in Alabasta. As nightfall approached, they finally arrived in Nanohana. As expected, it had a massive port. Numerous ships were docked there, and among them, a few pirate ships could be spotted. But there was no time to worry about that now. Once they finally docked, the crew eagerly rushed to disembark. Having spent so much time aboard the ship, even though provisions were still sufficient, the monotony of eating the same meals every day had grown tiresome. "This is Nanohana!" Anos surveyed the buildings ahead, which resembled slums. Support the creativity of authors by visiting the original site for this novel and more. There was no aesthetic appeal, and in comparison to his own Tru Kingdom, this place was severely lacking. Not to mention the strong winds and sand that picked up at night. Only two scraggly trees lined the coastline, and beyond that, there was nothing but sand. "Your Majesty, we''ll have to spend the night here. Tomorrow, we can continue to Alubarna," Suzu informed him. "That will suffice. I already feel more comfortable on land. I just want to find a place to rest for the night. We''ll discuss tomorrow''s matters in the morning." Anos was eager to find a comfortable place to rest and sample the local delicacies of Alabasta. He had heard about the exotic dishes here, such as scorpions and centipedes. Particularly the scorpions, which were as large as lobsters he imagined they must taste quite good! "Your Majesty, since we''ve arrived, should we notify the local Alabasta garrison to avoid any misunderstandings?" Daiki suggested. "Good point. Go ahead and notify them," Anos replied. "We''ll scout ahead, find accommodations, and grab a meal along the way," Suzu added. Anos observed the dilapidated Nanohana. The buildings were built at varying heights, and the road ahead sloped upward. Using his Observation Haki, he scanned the entire city, imprinting its layout in his mind. The broad road beneath his feet was covered in sand, and the wind had swept it to the outskirts of the city. At this rate, it wouldn''t be long before the area became uninhabitable. Yet, the locals seemed oblivious to this reality. Even if they were aware, what difference would it make? It was hard to imagine what Alabasta had once been like. For such a vast country with a rich history spanning thousands of years, its former grandeur must have been far greater than what it had become. Although it was now evening and the sky hadn''t fully darkened, the stars were starting to appear. The city seemed to lack proper streets, and only a few people wandered about. When Anos and his entourage arrived, the locals stared at them curiously. Perhaps they were accustomed to pirates, as the sight of formally dressed newcomers didn''t seem to excite them. As the king of the Tru Kingdom, Anos''s visit to Alabasta was akin to a diplomatic mission. He wore his crown and royal attire to represent his kingdom. His royal guards marched in disciplined steps, while Suzu had already donned her coat. Nightfall was approaching, and the temperature difference was stark. The sweltering heat of the day had given way to a cool breeze, bringing a noticeable chill to the air. Their formal attire attracted a fair amount of attention from passersby. What surprised them, however, was the sight of soldiers waiting for them up ahead. Armed with rifles, they stood in two neat rows, forming a welcoming formation. Before the group even reached them, the leader of the soldiers had already hurried forward. Upon seeing Anos''s royal attire, the middle-aged man bowed respectfully and declared, "Captain Igaram of Alabasta''s Royal Guard welcomes His Majesty, King Anos of Tru Kingdom..." Daiki immediately grew tense. They hadn''t notified Alabasta of their arrival, yet a welcoming party was already prepared. Something was off. Anos remained composed, offering a slight smile, "King Cobra is too gracious. It was rude of us not to inform him in advance." "Your Majesty is too kind. King Cobra has expressed his hope that, after King Anos has rested, you will come to Alubarna, where he will host a banquet in your honour," Igaram said with a smile. "I wonder, how did Captain Igaram know of His Majesty''s arrival?" Daiki asked with a stern expression. --- 52. Princess Vivi -1 --- Daiki followed closely behind, his eyes scanning the surroundings with meticulous attention. As the captain of the Royal Guards, he never allowed his guard to drop, even when his King, Anos, appeared unbothered by the potential dangers. Though Anos was undeniably powerful, it remained Daiki''s responsibility to eliminate any threat that dared come too close. Protecting the King wasn''t just an obligation it was his life''s purpose. "Daiki, the King of Alabasta is very hospitable," Anos said, sensing the tension in his captain. His voice was calm, a stark contrast to Daiki''s ever-watchful stance. "You don''t need to be so vigilant. It was our mistake to arrive without notice. Captain Igaram''s reception was already more than we could have asked for. There''s no need to be overly cautious about anything else," he added with a smile, glancing back at Daiki. Daiki gave a subtle nod in acknowledgement, though his gaze remained sharp. For a kingdom as vast as Alabasta, it was customary for such subtle political manoeuvrings to occur, but Daiki wasn''t one to relax in unfamiliar territory. "King Tru is indeed generous," Igaram interjected, his voice filled with formality. "However, Alabasta still must respond formally to your arrival," he said, pulling a folded newspaper from the inner pocket of his coat. He carefully unfolded it and presented it to Anos, though the Anos showed little interest. The front-page headline contained vital information about specific routes related to the journey of Anos and his entourage. The publication wasn''t from one of the major news sources, instead belonging to a smaller outlet, likely one that thrived on sensationalism. Still, the fact that someone had reported their voyage in such detail was concerning. The sun was setting over the arid landscape of Alabasta, casting a golden hue over the dunes in the distance. Above them, a lone seagull circled, its keen eyes fixed on the group. Anos''s attention shifted momentarily to the bird, and an unsettling feeling crept into his mind. Being watched, even from above, was something he had grown used to as a ruler. But this felt different. "Captain Igaram," Suzu''s voice cut through the air as she stepped forward. Her soft-spoken tone did little to hide her concern for her King. "His Majesty is tired from the journey. Could we arrange for a place to rest? We can discuss the matters at hand tomorrow." Igaram, ever the dutiful officer, nodded immediately. "Of course. His Majesty King Tru is here at our invitation. Your lodgings have been prepared in advance. If there is any shortcoming in our hospitality, please forgive us." Anos watched the exchange with an air of calm authority, a subtle smile playing on his lips. He knew not everyone in his retinue would be accompanying him to their lodgings. Daiki, Suzu, and the select few members of the Royal Guards would remain by his side, while the rest, including Barlow and the other crewmates, would stay aboard the ship. Supplies were low, and some needed to disembark to gather provisions, but a watch would still be kept over the vessel throughout the night. As they walked through the narrow streets of Rainbase, Daiki couldn''t help but notice the dilapidated state of the city. It was a far cry from the grandeur one would expect of a kingdom like Alabasta, though there were still glimpses of its former glory hidden beneath the layers of decay. You could be reading stolen content. Head to the original site for the genuine story. Yet, despite its condition, there was a strange allure to the place an undeniable charm that captivated those who visited. Igaram led the group to a sprawling manor at the edge of the city. It stood in stark contrast to the worn buildings they had passed earlier. The estate''s architectural style was modern, entirely unlike the traditional designs prevalent in Alabasta. The manor was nestled behind the mountains, shielded from the relentless desert winds and the abrasive sandstorms that plagued the region. Green trees and vibrant flowers adorned the grounds, a sharp contrast to the arid wasteland beyond. It felt as though they had stepped into a completely different world. "Your Majesty" Igaram began as they approached the entrance. "This is His Majesty King Cobra''s vacation palace. By his direct order, we have prepared this place for your stay tonight." Servants, dressed in formal attire, stood in two neat rows outside the manor. They bowed in perfect unison as the group arrived, their postures a reflection of the respect and deference owed to visiting royalty. Daiki took note of their disciplined manner, but his focus remained on his surroundings, always alert. "I will visit Alubarna tomorrow. I must personally express my gratitude to King Cobra for his hospitality," Anos said with a smile, casting a glance at the servants. Igaram bowed deeply in response. "You are most welcome, Your Majesty." He gestured for the servants to stand at ease before continuing to lead the way inside, making sure to uphold the image of a grand kingdom. Every movement was calculated, each gesture filled with the respect due to a king. However, just as they were about to enter the grand hall, a blur of motion caught Daiki''s eye. A young girl, no more than seven or eight years old, darted out from behind a pillar and rushed past them. Instinctively, Daiki moved to intercept, but Anos raised a hand, signalling for him to stand down. "Wait," Anos said calmly. Igaram, who had missed the girl''s sudden appearance altogether, continued leading the way inside, oblivious to the commotion behind him. Once inside the palace, Igaram remained outside, bowing as he addressed Anos once more. "Your Majesty, should you need anything during your stay, do not hesitate to call upon the servants. I will be stationed outside to escort you if needed." "Thank you, Captain," Daiki replied, his voice polite but distant. Anos, however, remained silent, maintaining his regal composure. As a king, it was his duty to project strength and control at all times. The palace itself was a marvel of design. The lower floor was a vast, open hall with ceilings that soared at least ten meters high. A massive chandelier, glistening with ornate crystals, hung from the dome above, casting a warm, golden light over the space. The upper floor housed the living quarters, where the group would retire for the evening. Once Igaram and his men had departed, the Royal Guards took up their positions around the palace, ensuring that no threat could approach unnoticed. Inside the hall, servants moved about efficiently, bringing tray after tray of food to the long dining table that stretched across the room. "Your Majesty, after such a long journey, you should eat something," Suzu suggested gently, watching as Anos reclined on the grand sofa near the centre of the hall. Anos, who had been lost in thought for a moment, nodded. "Alright," he said, sitting up slightly. His eyes then shifted toward the pillar from where the young girl had appeared earlier. "And you, young lady over there why don''t you join us? You must be hungry as well." Suzu blinked in surprise, glancing in the direction Anos had spoken. "Who¡­?" she began, unsure of what her King was referring to. "Come out. His Majesty has spoken," Daiki said sternly, his sharp eyes fixed on the pillar. He had noticed the girl earlier, and now his voice carried a tone of authority. From behind the pillar, a small head of blue hair slowly emerged, and a young girl cautiously stepped forward, her eyes wide with curiosity. Daiki moved quickly, ready to act if necessary, but Anos''s voice cut through the tension once more. "Stop, Daiki," he commanded. Immediately, Daiki froze, retracting his hand. "Come here, little one. Running around at your age isn''t your father worried about you?" Anos asked, his tone soft and warm as he smiled at the girl. The girl''s eyes widened even further. "You¡­ you know me?" she asked, her voice filled with both curiosity and a hint of awe. "Your Majesty, do you know her?" Suzu inquired, mirroring the girl''s confusion. Anos chuckled softly. "In the future, we will encounter many people and many situations. When dealing with others, you must pay attention to every detail." Daiki and Suzu exchanged glances, still unsure of what their King was referring to. Anos gestured toward the girl. "Her clothes, her demeanour, her familiarity with this place it''s not difficult to piece it together." Daiki stared at the girl for a moment, his gaze narrowing as he studied her more closely. Her fine clothes and the air of confidence she carried marked her as someone important. This was no ordinary child. "Come here, Princess Vivi. You must be hungry, too, right?" Anos said with a knowing smile. Vivi blinked, her face lighting up with a mixture of surprise and admiration. "How did you know?" she asked, her voice barely above a whisper. "It''s simple," Anos replied. "Your appearance and your familiarity with this palace made it obvious." Suzu''s eyes widened as the realization sank in. "Princess Vivi? Here? But we''re miles away from Alubarna¡­" Vivi, still in awe, stepped closer to Anos. "You are amazing!" ---- 53. Princess Vivi -2 --- Vivi was not shy and sat directly across from Anos, her eyes widening as she gazed at the spread of food on the table. The delicious smells filled the room, making her stomach growl loudly, causing her to blush in embarrassment. Anos, sitting calmly, noticed her discomfort and broke the silence. "How did you get here?" he asked, casually taking a bite of the roasted meat in front of him. Without hesitation, Vivi began to explain, her voice full of excitement, "I followed Igaram-san. I overheard my father saying that the King of Tru kingdom was coming here, and he talks about you so often that I got really curious. I wanted to see what you looked like for myself!" She paused for a moment, then added with a mischievous smile, "So I secretly followed Igaram-san." As she spoke, her small hands eagerly grabbed pieces of food, her cheeks puffing out as she ate hurriedly, as if she hadn''t eaten in days. Her enthusiasm was both adorable and amusing, prompting smiles from everyone at the table. Suzu and Daiki, seated nearby, exchanged glances of surprise. They had never imagined that such a young girl could be so bold as to follow an important figure like Igaram. Her determination was impressive, and both of them silently admired her bravery. "She''s quite something," Suzu whispered to Daiki, who nodded in agreement. Vivi continued eating, her face lighting up with every bite. "This food is amazing!" she exclaimed between mouthfuls. "We don''t have anything this good back home." Just as they were finishing up their meal, a loud commotion suddenly erupted outside the room. The clanking of armour and hurried footsteps echoed through the halls. Moments later, the doors to the dining room burst open, and Igaram, looking flustered, entered with the guards. The moment Igaram saw Vivi, his expression softened, and he let out a long sigh of relief. "Princess Vivi, how could you leave the palace like this? His Majesty has been worried sick!" he said, a mix of relief and frustration in his voice. Vivi, still chewing, looked up at him with innocent eyes. "I''m sorry, Igaram-san. I was just too curious, so I came here. But there''s nothing to worry about now," she said with a sheepish grin, her mouth still full of food. Igaram, clearly exasperated but relieved that Vivi was safe, turned toward Anos and bowed respectfully. "My sincerest apologies, Your Majesty King Tru. It seems our princess has caused some disturbance. I''ll take her back to the palace right away." But Anos waved him off with a smile. "No need. She can stay here tonight. We''ll head to Alubarna together in the morning," he said, his tone lighthearted and reassuring. "Are you sure, Your Majesty?" Igaram asked, his brow furrowed in concern. He was still worried about Vivi''s safety. "If you''re uncomfortable, you''re welcome to stay outside with your guards tonight," Daiki suggested as he stood up from the table, trying to offer some comfort to Haruya''s concerns. Anos, however, smiled again and gestured for Igaram to relax. "Sit down and have something to eat with us. There''s plenty of food, and no need to rush," he said, offering his guest hospitality. "No, Your Majesty," Igaram declined politely, his voice respectful. Royal Road is the home of this novel. Visit there to read the original and support the author. "We have our duties to tend to, and I wouldn''t want to impose. Since Princess Vivi is here, I may have disturbed you more than I intended. Please forgive me for the trouble," he said, bowing once again. Anos chuckled softly. "There''s no need for such formality. Princess Vivi is quite charming. She can stay here tonight and have some fun. It''ll be a good experience for her," he said, glancing over at Vivi, who was still happily munching away at the food. Vivi, feeling more at ease now, turned to Haruya with a wide smile. "Igaram-san just tell my father I''ll be back tomorrow morning. There''s no need for him to worry!" she said, her voice filled with confidence. Igaram sighed deeply, realizing there was no arguing with her. He turned and exited the room, pulling out a transponder snail to contact the palace. Back in Alabasta, the palace was in chaos. Servants and guards were running back and forth, their faces filled with worry. King Cobra stood at the entrance to the palace, his expression was stern but anxious. He had not seen his daughter since the early morning and was growing increasingly concerned. As Cobra waited, pacing back and forth, a middle-aged man came rushing toward him, holding a transponder snail. "Your Majesty! We found her!" the man shouted breathlessly. Cobra''s eyes widened, and he quickly stepped forward, grabbing the man by the shoulders. "Where is she?" he asked urgently. "Princess Vivi followed Captain Igaram and secretly travelled to the seed fields. She''s currently staying at the palace there with King Tru," the man explained, his voice steady now that the situation was under control. Cobra let out a long sigh, a mix of frustration and relief washing over him. "This girl...," he muttered, his earlier anger quickly fading as he processed the news. The man continued, "Captain Igaram reported that King Tru will bring Princess Vivi back to the capital tomorrow morning. He''s stationed his guards outside the palace to ensure her safety, so you don''t have to worry anymore." Cobra nodded slowly, the tension in his shoulders finally easing. "That''s good to hear. Make sure Igaram keeps a close eye on her. We can''t let her wander off again," he instructed, his voice calmer now that he knew his daughter was safe. Back at the palace, the group had finished their meal, and they now sat on the sofas in the large sitting room. Without much in the way of entertainment, they sat quietly, exchanging glances, unsure of what to do next. "You don''t seem very old," Vivi said suddenly, breaking the silence as she looked directly at Anos, her big blue eyes filled with curiosity. Anos blinked, caught off guard by the comment. Before he could respond, Suzu, seated nearby, laughed and answered for him. "Our king is only seventeen years old. Not only is he good-looking, but he''s also quite capable. In a few years, maybe you can ask your father to arrange a marriage with him!" she teased, winking at Vivi. Vivi blushed at the remark but giggled. "Maybe in a few years, that wouldn''t be impossible," she said playfully. Daiki, not wanting to miss out on the fun, joined in. "I think it''s a great idea! Though you''re a little young right now, Princess," he said with a laugh. Anos sighed, shaking his head at his two companions. "Can you two stop teasing her? She''s still a child. Don''t say things like that in front of her," he scolded gently, though there was a hint of amusement in his voice. But before he could say anything else, Vivi stood up and walked over to him, looking him up and down with a serious expression. After a moment, she nodded and said, "You''re not bad-looking. My father talks about you a lot. You must be very capable. Maybe in a few years, their suggestions won''t be so crazy after all!" Anos caught completely off guard, choked on his saliva. He coughed, trying to recover from the surprising comment. "Ahem...!" He cleared his throat; he is not a paedophile like Drake & diddy. Meanwhile, Daiki and Suzu couldn''t help but laugh at the scene, their laughter filling the room. "Your Majesty, it looks like you''ve made quite the impression on Princess Vivi," Daiki joked, still grinning. Even Suzu, who was usually the more composed of the two, was covering her mouth to stifle her laughter. Everyone in the room was laughing, except for Anos, who sat there, feeling utterly lost. As he watched Vivi return to her seat, he found himself thinking about what she might look like in a few years. It wasn''t entirely out of the question. Alabasta was a powerful and wealthy kingdom, and a marriage alliance would be politically advantageous. But it''s against his moral standards. He won''t marry if he doesn''t love that girl or the girl doesn''t love him; it will destroy both of their lives. "Suzu, please check if the bedrooms are ready. Let''s get some rest," Anos said, standing up and stretching. He was eager to end the conversation and avoid any more teasing. "Right away, Your Majesty," Suzu replied with a smirk, standing up and heading toward the doors. As Suzu left the room, Vivi turned to Daiki and asked curiously, "What''s wrong with the king? Did I say something weird?" Daiki chuckled and patted her on the head. "Don''t worry, Princess. Our king is just a little shy. If you want to marry him someday, you''ll have to wait a few more years until you''re all grown up," he said with a wink. "That''s right, Princess Vivi. Our king is one of a kind. With his help, Alabasta will surely overcome its current struggles and thrive," Suzu said as she re-entered the room, her tone playful yet sincere. Vivi, oblivious to the deeper implications, simply smiled and nodded, pleased with the attention she was receiving. --- 54. Princess Vivi -3 --- The people''s unwavering trust in Anos had grown to unimaginable heights. It was something almost palpable in the streets of the Tru, also a Kingdom once barren, now flourishing under his wise and resolute rule. In just over two years, Anos had completely transformed the landscape of Tru. What was once a dry, desolate land had become a rich and progressive kingdom, a place where prosperity no longer seemed out of reach. To the people of Alabasta, this miraculous change sparked envy and curiosity. Princess Vivi, though young, felt the weight of her kingdom''s plight. Alabasta had always been her home, a place rich in history and culture, but it was crumbling under the weight of poverty and drought. The people were suffering. And each day, Vivi watched her father, King Cobra, wear himself thin, his once jet-black hair now streaked with grey as he fought to keep their kingdom from falling apart. It was this deep love for her kingdom and her father that made Vivi so attentive as Suzu and Daiki, two visitors from Tru, spoke casually about the transformation their country had undergone. Though much of their conversation was wrapped in humour, perhaps to entertain the young princess, Vivi took every word seriously. The spacious room was warmly lit by the flickering lanterns, their glow casting long shadows on the walls. The trio sat in an informal setting, the two adults lounging in preparation for bed, while Vivi stood near the large window, gazing out into the night. Outside, the desert winds howled softly, carrying with them the scent of sand and the memory of oases long lost. "Is what you''re saying true?" Vivi''s voice broke the momentary silence, her tone much more serious than before. Gone was the playful, carefree child they had seen just moments ago. Now, she was the princess of Alabasta, standing tall with concern etched in her young face. Suzu and Daiki exchanged curious glances before sitting back down, intrigued by the sudden shift in Vivi''s demeanour. It was unusual for such a young girl to be so focused on matters of state, but then again, Princess Vivi had always been different. Her heart was with her people, and her mind seemed much older than her years. "Well, of course, it''s true," Suzu responded, smiling softly as she adjusted the cushion behind her. She could see that Vivi''s question was not idle curiosity. There was genuine concern in her eyes, a weight no child her age should have to carry. "But what exactly are you asking about, Princess Vivi?" "Is it possible to lift Alabasta out of poverty? Right now, my kingdom isn''t what it used to be. Many of our people don''t even have enough food to eat anymore," Vivi said, her voice trembling slightly. "I have seen my father working day and night. His hair is turning white from all the worry, and he''s still young... I want to help him. I want to do something anything that will make a difference." Tears began to pool in Vivi''s blue eyes as she spoke, and Suzu''s heart ached for her. Despite her best efforts to remain composed, the young princess was overwhelmed by the burden she felt. This content has been misappropriated from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere. It wasn''t right that someone so young should feel such responsibility, but then again, Alabasta''s problems weighed heavily on every soul within its borders, young and old alike. Suzu took a deep breath, composing her thoughts before responding. She knew she had to tread carefully with this conversation. "What I said earlier is true, Princess. Your father, King Cobra, speaks highly of King Anos. He respects and values our king''s leadership, which speaks volumes about your father''s wisdom as well." Daiki, who had remained silent thus far, nodded in agreement, adding, "Two years ago, Tru was far worse off than Alabasta. You may not believe it, but we didn''t even have enough water, let alone food." "Our lands were dry and cracked, and the people were losing hope. But look at us now we have industry and agriculture, and while we may not be wealthy, no one in Tru goes hungry anymore." Vivi listened intently, her hands clutched tightly together as if trying to absorb the hope radiating from Suzu and Daiki''s words. "Our king worked tirelessly to ensure that every citizen had a job, a goal, something to strive for," Suzu continued. "People no longer have to fear for their safety or their future. And when you walk through the streets of Tru now, you can see the joy in people''s eyes. That''s what King Anos has done for us." As Suzu spoke, her voice was filled with pride, and it was clear she wasn''t just telling a story to comfort a little girl. She was speaking from her own lived experience. Vivi could sense this, and though she didn''t fully understand the mechanics of governance and economy, she could tell that what Suzu described was real. Tru had changed for the better, and it was all because of King Anos. "Princess Vivi, you don''t need to worry about these things right now," Daiki interjected gently. "King Anos will be visiting Alubarna tomorrow. Your father will meet with him, and they can discuss these matters in detail." But Vivi was no longer paying attention to Daiki''s reassurances. Her mind was racing, and her heart was pounding in her chest. Suddenly, a wild idea took root, one that she couldn''t shake. It felt reckless and impulsive, but at that moment, it was the only solution that made sense to her young, determined mind. "I''ve made up my mind," Vivi declared, her voice firm and resolute. "I want to marry him." Her words hung in the air, and for a moment, neither Suzu nor Daiki could react. They stared at the young princess, dumbfounded by the boldness of her statement. "Haha¡­ little Vivi, don''t you think you''re too young to be thinking about marriage?" Suzu asked, a nervous laugh escaping her lips. "Besides, King Anos is much older than you. We shouldn''t rush into such decisions." But Vivi didn''t waver. "I''m not that young," she insisted. "And I can wait. Ten years at most. If marrying him means saving Alabasta, I''ll do it. I don''t care how old he is." The conviction in her voice left Suzu and Daiki speechless. They exchanged worried glances, unsure how to respond to such a serious declaration from someone so young. "Suzu, this is your mess. You''ll have to deal with it," Daiki muttered under his breath, quickly standing up. "I''m going to bed." Before Suzu could stop him, Daiki had already disappeared from the room, leaving her alone with Vivi. Suzu sighed, glancing at the young princess who stood before her, still determined, her tear-filled eyes reflecting a strength far beyond her years. What was she supposed to do now? She couldn''t just ignore this Vivi was serious, and it was clear she wasn''t going to drop the subject easily. "Little Vivi, let''s go to bed for now," Suzu said gently, trying to steer the conversation in a different direction. "We''ve been at sea for days, and we all need rest." But Vivi wasn''t about to let go. She stared at Suzu, her large blue eyes filled with a mixture of desperation and hope. "What if my father doesn''t agree? What if he doesn''t want me to marry King Anos?" Suzu sighed, rubbing her temples as she tried to think of a way out of this conversation. "Vivi, listen, what I said earlier doesn''t count, and neither does what you said." "When we return to Alubarna, you can speak with your father. And when your father meets with King Anos, they can discuss things. But marriage? That''s not something you or I can decide." "But the people of Alabasta can''t wait much longer," Vivi whispered, her voice trembling with emotion. "My father told me that the oases are disappearing faster than ever, and the crops are failing. I don''t know how much longer we can survive like this¡­" Suzu''s heart broke as she watched the tears finally spill from Vivi''s eyes. The weight of her words hit hard, and Suzu regretted ever bringing up Tru''s success in the first place. She hadn''t meant to plant such heavy thoughts in the young girl''s mind. "I shouldn''t have brought this up," Suzu muttered to herself. But she forced a smile and took a deep breath. "Vivi, our Kingdoms are far apart. Tomorrow, when your father and King Anos meet, they''ll talk. But for now, let''s get some rest, okay?" Vivi wiped her tears, managing a small, tired smile. "Alright¡­ I understand." "Good," Suzu said, relieved. "Now, off to bed." As Vivi climbed into bed, Suzu couldn''t help but feel a pang of guilt. The young princess was carrying so much weight on her small shoulders, and Suzu only hoped that tomorrow''s meeting would provide some relief for both her and her father. But for tonight, at least, they could rest. --- 55. Princess Vivi -4 --- Early the next morning. Anos finally had a good night''s sleep after what felt like an eternity of sleepless nights on the turbulent seas. Though he had become accustomed to the sway of the ship during long voyages, the stability of an immobile bed was foreign to him. It took hours for him to find comfort and relax, but as his mind slowly drifted into sleep, the world outside carried on. When he finally stirred, the sun was already high in the sky, signalling the late morning. He sat up slowly, stretching out his arms. His muscles were still sore from the previous days of travelling. It might have been nice to sleep in more, he thought, but duty beckoned him. There was much to do, and he had no time to waste. Despite the reluctance tugging at him, Anos forced himself out of bed and prepared to face the day. As he descended the grand staircase of the villa, he noted the luxurious surroundings. Alabasta''s grand architecture was impressive, even to a reincarnated human-like Anos. The palace where he stayed was one of many grand estates scattered throughout the kingdom. The marbled halls and carefully designed interiors hinted at the Kingdom''s wealth and history. But even in such grandeur, Anos couldn''t shake the feeling that something was missing in the movement of the waves beneath his feet, the salty breeze that filled his lungs. Here, on land, everything was still. Too still. When he reached the bottom of the stairs, he was greeted by the sight of a long table filled with breakfast foods. The aroma of freshly baked bread, exotic fruits, and grilled meats filled the air. The servants had gone to great lengths to ensure the king''s morning meal was perfect. Yet, despite the effort, Anos''s sharp eye noticed something most of the food, while plentiful, was plain by royal standards. But for the common people of Alabasta, this spread would be considered an extravagant feast. "Your Majesty, good morning!" Anos turned his gaze toward the voice. Suzu, one of his trusted aides, stood before him. Today, her outfit was entirely different from the day before. She wore a miniskirt and a tube top, but she had also draped a large coat over her shoulders, paired with a wide-brimmed hat that cast a shadow over her face. Her change in appearance was striking. Anos cocked his head, eyeing her attire with mild curiosity. "What''s going on with your outfit today?" Suzu chuckled softly, spinning in place to show off her ensemble. "I''m getting ready to head out after breakfast. The weather in Alabasta is unbearable so hot that if you don''t protect your skin properly, you''ll burn under the sun. This outfit is to keep me cool and covered." Anos gave a slight nod, half-listening. His mind was elsewhere, already drifting back to thoughts of his ship. Land did not suit him, and he longed to return to the sea. "Where''s Daiki?" he asked, shifting the conversation. "He''s outside and others are preparing the carriage. We can depart as soon as you''ve had breakfast," Suzu said, glancing at the large spread before them. "Ah¡­" A massive yawn escaped Anos''s mouth before he could even think to respond. His body, still not fully accustomed to sleeping on land, felt sluggish. This novel''s true home is a different platform. Support the author by finding it there. The idea of eating didn''t appeal to him, especially with such tiredness weighing him down. "Is everyone ready? Aren''t we going by carriage this time?" Anos asked, his tone laced with exhaustion. "No, Your Majesty," Suzu said with a grin. "I''ve discussed it with Daiki. We''re still taking the ship. The carriage outside is for Princess Vivi." Anos rubbed his forehead, a slight frown crossing his features. "Alright, forget breakfast then. Let''s just get going." But before he could take another step, Suzu grabbed his arm with surprising firmness. She flashed him a meaningful smile, one that made it clear she wasn''t about to let him skip the meal entirely. "Your Majesty, you should have something to eat. You know how long these journeys can be. If you skip breakfast, we''ll have to stop for food later, and that will only delay us further. You wouldn''t want that, would you?" Anos let out a low groan. He didn''t have the energy to argue, so he waved his hand dismissively. "Fine, do whatever you want." With a satisfied nod, Suzu quickly began packing the breakfast into containers, wrapping the food with practised efficiency. While she busied herself with this task, Anos stifled yet another yawn. He was desperate to return to his bed aboard the ship. At least on the water, he could find solace in the familiar rhythm of the waves. As Suzu finished packing the food, she turned to Anos with a bright smile. "All set! We can eat on the road, and you can rest on the ship if you''d like." Anos didn''t respond, instead turning toward the door and walking outside. The cool morning air of Alabasta greeted him, offering some relief from the stuffy villa. Yet, despite the pleasant breeze, the harsh sun overhead reminded him of the intense heat that awaited them later in the day. The sky was clear, and the bright rays reflected off the sandy streets, making it difficult for him to keep his eyes open. When Anos and Suzu stepped out of the estate, two teams of soldiers were already assembled outside, standing at attention. Daiki had organized the men with military precision, ensuring they were ready to depart at a moment''s notice. "Your Majesty King Anos," Igaram greeted with a respectful bow. "It''s an honour to see you up so early. The Alabasta Guards and I are prepared to escort you to the Alubarna Palace." "Spare me the formalities," Anos said, waving his hand dismissively. "I thought we were taking a ship and that you''d be escorting Princess Vivi to Alubarna by carriage?" "That was the original plan, Your Majesty," Igaram replied, still maintaining his respectful tone. "But Princess Vivi insisted on travelling with you by ship. I''ve adjusted our plans accordingly." Just as Igaram finished speaking, a cheerful voice called out from nearby. "Good morning, King Anos~!" Anos glanced up and saw Vivi approaching, her long ponytail swaying behind her as she skipped toward him. Her attire today was entirely different from the regal dress she had worn the previous day. Now, she wore a lighter, more casual outfit suited for the journey. However, Anos barely acknowledged her, his mind still groggy from lack of sleep. "Daiki, is everything on the ship ready?" Anos asked, ignoring Vivi''s enthusiastic greeting. "Yes, Your Majesty. Everything is prepared for departure. We''re ready when you are," Daiki confirmed. "Good," Anos muttered. "Let''s go. I''m eager to meet the King of Alabasta and get this over with." Though Vivi had greeted him warmly, Anos hadn''t bothered to engage her. Yet, Vivi didn''t seem to mind. Instead, she happily walked beside him, her cheerful demeanour contrasting with his cold indifference. She acted as if they were already close friends, even though they had only recently met. Anos, still half-asleep, barely noticed Vivi''s presence beside him. Even with Suzu and Vivi flanking him, he had no interest in making conversation. His thoughts were solely focused on getting back to the ship, where he could lie down and sleep until they reached Alubarna. "King Anos, how did you find your stay in Alabasta?" Vivi asked, her voice filled with curiosity. Anos turned his head slightly, giving her a brief glance before continuing to walk forward without a word. Vivi didn''t seem discouraged by his silence. Instead, she kept pace with him, her smile unwavering. Behind them, Igaram watched the interaction with a mixture of frustration and helplessness. His princess, the pride of Alabasta, was being ignored by a foreign king, and there was nothing he could do about it. The King of Tru had no interest in conversing with her, and yet Vivi didn''t seem to mind at all. It was as if she understood that Anos''s cold demeanour wasn''t personal. What frustrated Igaram even more was the strength of Anos''s guard. Each member of the Tru Kingdom''s elite looked formidable. Igaram had sparred with many powerful warriors in his time, but even he could tell that these guards were in a league of their own. He wondered if he could even match one of them in a duel. That thought alone sent a shiver down his spine. Still, Igaram couldn''t let his concerns show. He had a duty to fulfil, and part of that duty was ensuring the safety and comfort of Princess Vivi during this diplomatic mission. Even if King Anos seemed indifferent, Igaram had to remain vigilant. As the group made their way to the harbour, the sun continued its ascent, its heat becoming more oppressive with each passing minute. Anos squinted against the harsh light, wishing he could close his eyes and block out the world for just a little longer. Finally, they arrived at the docks, where the ship awaited them. Anos took one look at the vessel, and a sense of relief washed over him. Soon, he would be back on the sea, where he belonged. "Let''s get going," Anos muttered, already stepping toward the gangplank. Vivi followed closely behind, with a smile on her face. ---- 56. Kidnapping --- The long, narrow road stretched from the peak of the mountain down to its base, weaving through the lush greenery and rocky outcrops that dotted the landscape. This was no ordinary road, carved meticulously through centuries of wear, use, and nature''s force, yet it retained a sense of ancient dignity. Below, the sprawling port city of Nanohana spread out in all its sun-drenched splendour, bathed in the golden light of late morning. The port shimmered, and from the palace halfway up the mountain, they could already make out their ships. The Tempest, a trusted vessel that had seen many adventures, was quietly docked at the port. Though sturdy and reliable, it looked rather small compared to some of the larger merchant vessels and warships anchored nearby. Its presence, however, was enough to stir something in the hearts of Anos''s crew. Here in Alabasta, it seemed out of place too small for the grand port and too modest in comparison to the Alabasta Kingdom''s magnificent ships. Yet, this ship carried with it stories, battles, and the lives of the people who called it home. Anos, standing with his hands behind his back, took in the view. His gaze swept over the port, lingering momentarily on the pirate ships that were still docked there. He narrowed his eyes slightly, sensing something odd. These ships, which they had seen the previous evening upon their arrival, remained undisturbed. No soldiers were attempting to confront the pirates, no alarms had been raised, and the people of Nanohana moved about their business without the usual panic or dread that followed the presence of pirates. "Strange..." Anos muttered under his breath. Although Alabasta''s military wasn''t the most formidable in the world, it was certainly nothing to scoff at. In Tru Kingdom, such open defiance, the brazen docking of pirate ships flying their flags, would never be allowed. It would be considered a blatant act of provocation a challenge to the kingdom''s sovereignty. The very sight of pirate flags fluttering in the wind would send shockwaves through Tru Kingdom, spurring action from the highest levels of authority. But here, in the bustling port of Nanohana, not a single soldier stood guard near the ships. Daiki, who had been silent, noticed Anos''s discomfort. "They''re not worried," he said, breaking the silence. "These pirates¡­ it''s as though they''ve been permitted to dock here. It''s unusual." "Indeed," Anos replied, his voice low. "If this were Logue Town or any port within the Tru Kingdom, they would have been dealt with by now. But Alabasta... perhaps the kingdom has other priorities." He turned his attention back to Abby. The familiarity of the ship brought a fleeting sense of comfort, though that quickly dissipated when a crew member came rushing towards them as they boarded. If you discover this tale on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the violation. "Your Majesty," the crew member called, his voice thick with anxiety, "Barlow hasn''t returned since he left yesterday!" The urgency in his tone immediately put Anos on alert. He straightened up, eyes narrowing. "What do you mean? He hasn''t returned? What about others?" "Neither of them has come back," the man said, visibly distressed. "They went to purchase supplies yesterday, and when we woke up this morning, they were still missing. We''ve been trying to reach them, but there''s been no response. The crew is worried, Your Majesty." The news set a ripple of unease through the crew. Anos frowned, his mind already racing. Barlow had been with him for more than half a year, a capable navigator and trusted companion. This wasn''t like him. Alabasta was a peaceful kingdom, and while the land was foreign to them, it was not hostile. Or at least, it shouldn''t have been. "Why wasn''t I informed earlier?" Anos asked, his tone sharp, mirroring the tension rising within the group. "I-I''m sorry," the crew member stammered, "we thought they''d return by morning, but now¡­" Anos exhaled deeply, calming himself. He couldn''t allow fear to cloud his judgment. "Chris," he addressed another crew member, "did you contact them via Den Den Mushi?" "I did, Your Majesty," Chris replied, his voice tense. "There''s been no contact since early morning. I''m not sure what''s happened." Anos closed his eyes for a moment, letting the breeze from the sea wash over him. He could feel the weight of leadership, the responsibility for every single person aboard the Abby. Barlow and others were valuable members of his crew if something had happened to them, it would reflect poorly on his ability to protect his own. It was not a situation he would tolerate lightly. "I''ll take a carriage to Alubarna," Anos finally said, his voice cutting through the rising chatter of the crew. "Stay here and continue searching for them. Do not rest until they are found. If you uncover anything suspicious, report it to me immediately." "Yes, Your Majesty," the crew replied in unison, though their uncertainty was palpable. The last thing Anos needed was discontent or panic spreading among his Subordinates. He had to remain composed, a pillar of strength, even as his worry simmered beneath the surface. "Your Majesty, let me send some men to search as well," Igaram offered. "We cannot allow the navigator and your crew to go missing without any reason. We can handle this quietly." Anos shook his head. "No need, Igaram. Without the navigator, we''ll take a carriage to Alubarna ourselves. I''ll need you with me to navigate the political landscape." Igaram gave a curt nod, understanding that this was more than just a search for missing crew members. Alabasta was an ally, but any sign of weakness or failure to protect his crew could be exploited by enemies. Vivi, who had been standing nearby, spoke up. "King Anos, perhaps it''s best if we wait here a little longer. They may return on their own. My father wouldn''t mind if we were delayed a bit." Anos gave her a small, strained smile. "It''s not just about keeping appointments, Princess. Agreements between our kingdoms are more than just formalities they are bonds of trust. If I falter now, it won''t just reflect on me but on Tru Kingdom itself." Vivi looked thoughtful, then nodded in understanding. "I see. My father has always valued those bonds too." Anos turned to Daiki. "Stay behind and manage the search. We must find Barlow, and if something has happened to him, I need you to deal with it swiftly and discreetly." "Understood," Daiki replied. "We''ll use Haki to scan the area. If they''re still within the city, we''ll find them." "Good," Anos said, stepping off the ship. "I want Barlow found before we return." As they disembarked, Anos couldn''t shake the growing feeling that something was amiss. His instincts, honed over years of navigating the dangerous seas of the Grand Line, told him that this wasn''t a simple disappearance. If Barlow had encountered someone stronger and more dangerous, then Alabasta might not have been as peaceful as it seemed. The heat of Alabasta beat down on them as they boarded the carriage. Anos wiped a bead of sweat from his brow, trying to focus on the journey ahead. He glanced over at Vivi, her serene face betraying no sign of the growing tension. The white carriage, ornate and polished, trundled down the road, drawn by two majestic white horses. The sun reflected off the iron frames, making the carriage gleam in the harsh light. As they moved further from Nanohana and closer to Alubarna, the capital of Alabasta, the oppressive heat became ever more difficult to ignore. Yet, for Anos, the discomfort of the heat paled in comparison to the weight of responsibility that hung over him. Somewhere in this vast kingdom, Barlow was missing. And as much as Anos hated to admit it, his disappearance could mean far more than just a delay in their journey. It could be the sign of something far worse lurking in the shadows of Alabasta. --- 57. Heavenly Tribute --- This was already considered a high-end reception, with an elegance befitting royalty. Although the speed wasn''t fast, and the journey was much farther than taking a ship, the slow pace allowed one to fully take in the sights of Alabasta. Travelling across the arid desert on a camel-drawn carriage, you could feel the pulse of the kingdom''s condition and its grandeur mixed with the unmistakable signs of hardship. The path wound through villages and open plains, revealing small clusters of homes and struggling farmlands. The once-vibrant rivers that sustained these communities had long since dried up, leaving behind barren, cracked soil. What they encountered along the way resembled the state of the Tru Kingdom just two years prior a Kingdom weakened by famine, drought, and internal strife. The people here were in similar dire circumstances, their faces etched with fatigue and their bodies marked by poverty. Vivi''s heart ached as she saw children playing with scraps, their clothes mere rags, while the adults toiled under the scorching sun for meagre returns. "I heard your Kingdom is planning to join the World Government?" Vivi asked, breaking the silence. Her question floated on the desert wind as the caravan moved steadily through the barren landscape. She looked over at Anos, who sat calmly beside her, his face impassive as usual. Vivi often found it hard to read him, as his stoic demeanour rarely wavered, even in conversations like these. "Yes," Anos replied simply, his voice calm yet firm, offering no further elaboration. He was a man of few words, preferring action over long-winded explanations. "Why do so many Kingdoms want to join the World Government?" Vivi pressed, curiosity overcoming her restraint. "They have to pay such high Heavenly Tribute fees every year. I don''t understand what the benefit is." There was a slight edge to her voice, as she had often seen how the poor suffered while the rich became wealthier in such arrangements. Alabasta, under her father''s reign, had resisted joining the World Government''s tribute system, seeing it as an unnecessary burden on its people. Anos smiled faintly at her question. He had anticipated this topic, especially given Vivi''s strong sense of duty toward her people. "If I remember correctly, Alabasta does not have to pay the Heavenly Tribute, right?" He remarked, raising an eyebrow slightly. His eyes, though sharp and cold, held a glimmer of understanding. He knew the delicate balance Vivi was trying to strike between loyalty to her Kingdom and her curiosity about global politics. "Yes, but even so," Vivi began, her brows knitting together, "it seems like a massive burden on the Kingdom that do join. Why would anyone willingly subject themselves to such fees?" She was genuinely puzzled. As a princess, she had been privy to the workings of governance, but the full extent of the World Government''s dealings often eluded her. "Managing a Kingdom isn''t as simple as it seems," Anos replied, his tone growing more serious. "Joining the World Government isn''t always a choice people make willingly. Sometimes, leaders have no other option. Their circumstances force their hand." He glanced out at the desert stretching endlessly in front of them as if the arid land symbolized the harsh reality of governance. Vivi listened carefully, sensing there was more to his explanation. She admired the way Anos carried himself, a king who understood the weight of responsibility. His calm and collected nature was a reflection of someone who had seen the burdens of leadership firsthand. She had often wondered how Tru kingdom would maintain their sovereignty after they joined the World Government, but her father had always been adamant about maintaining their independence. Unauthorized use of content: if you find this story on Amazon, report the violation. Anos continued, "However if a kingdom is developing economically and politically, joining the World Government could offer more advantages than disadvantages. That''s the case for our kingdom." His gaze shifted back to Vivi, who was still deep in thought. "Tru Kingdom is still in its early stages of development. By joining the World Government, we''ve been able to boost our economy in ways we couldn''t have imagined. Access to trade routes, protection, and diplomatic ties these things make a difference." "Is that really how it works?" Vivi asked, her voice softer now, less sceptical. She was beginning to understand the logic, but part of her still resisted the idea. Anos nodded thoughtfully, letting the silence between them linger before responding. "Yes. While we do have to pay the Heavenly Tribute each year, which is no small expense, we also gain some significant benefits. For one, we receive protection from the Marines." "This means we don''t need to worry about security as much while sailing or conducting trade. Most pirates wouldn''t dare attack a ship flying the World Government flag." His words made sense, but Vivi wasn''t fully convinced yet. "And that''s worth paying the tribute?" she asked, glancing at him. Anos allowed himself a brief chuckle. "It depends on the Kingdom''s situation. For us, it is. For others, it may not be. But there''s another, even more important benefit our goods now have unrestricted access to the Grand Line." "They can easily pass through the Red Line without issue. Trade and commerce are the lifeblood of any Kingdom, and having such a powerful network opens up countless opportunities." Vivi''s eyes widened slightly as she considered the implications. "So, by joining, you can bypass a lot of the dangers on the Grand Line and the Red Line. That''s... quite profound." She hadn''t fully realized the extent of the advantages such political alliances could bring. In her mind, she had always associated the World Government with greed and control, but perhaps there was more to it than that. In truth, Vivi still didn''t fully grasp the weight of Anos''s words. She had never been involved in such high-level politics, and so much of this world remained a mystery to her. But she was learning, slowly but surely. The more she saw, the more she understood just how complicated ruling a kingdom could be. --- Meanwhile, in the rapeseed fields near Nanohana, Daiki had issued orders to the Royal Guards to disperse and begin searching for their missing navigator, Barlow. The task was urgent they had only one hour to locate him. Daiki knew it was a tight deadline, but he also knew his men were capable of quick and efficient work. The rapeseed fields stretched far, but not so far that they couldn''t be covered in the allotted time. The guards, all seasoned professionals, knew exactly where to start searching. They followed the likely routes Barlow would have taken, combing through each area systematically. Barlow, a man of small stature, was easily recognizable. His short frame and distinctive features made him stand out. It wouldn''t take long to find someone who had seen him, and once they had a lead, the rest of the search would fall into place. But time was of the essence. Little did the Royal Guards know, Barlow was already in grave danger. --- Inside a dilapidated, abandoned house on the outskirts of the city, Barlow sat slumped against a post. His face, once round and cheerful, was now swollen and bruised from a night of beatings. He had been captured by a group of pirates; their motivation was clearly the ransom. "Have you decided yet?" one of the pirates asked, his voice low and menacing. "Are you going to contact your crewmates and have them bring 10 million Beris? It''ll be good for both of us if you do." Barlow, despite his battered appearance, managed a weak smile. His faith in his king and crewmates remained unshaken. He knew Anos would come for him. "Captain," another pirate, a scrawny man with a nervous energy, piped up. "Why don''t we just rob their ship? Why bother with this ransom business?" Their leader, a one-eyed pirate with a cruel sneer, shook his head. "You idiot. If we rob their ship and Alabasta''s army gets involved, we won''t stand a chance. This way, we get the money without the risk." The conversation continued, with the pirates dreaming of how they''d spend their ill-gotten gains. But none of them realized the peril they were in. Anos was already on their trail. Barlow, though beaten, remained defiant. He knew his king''s strength, and he wasn''t worried. "If you want me to contact my crew, at least give me a Den Den Mushi," he muttered, leaning heavily against the post. After hearing this, the one-eyed captain looked at the others with curiosity and asked with a hint of frustration, "Didn''t you give him the Den Den Mushi?" "Captain, but he never asked us for it before," the man wearing a beret responded directly. "You idiots! You''ve been at this for so long, and this is the result? If this guy hadn''t spoken up, when would we have gotten the money?" the one-eyed captain shouted angrily. The group of pirates below noticed their captain''s anger and quickly began searching for Den Den Mushi. Eventually, they found a Den Den Mushi with a crown and placed it in front of Barlow. "Porlu Porro..., Porlu Porlu..." As the Den Den Mushi started ringing, it croaked after a moment, and a loud voice came from the other side, "Barlow, where are you, bastard?" Barlow recognized the voice and smiled through his swollen face, but the pirate next to him punched him and growled, "I told you to speak!" "Barlow, are you in trouble?" Daiki''s voice came through the Den Den Mushi again, but he didn''t know that the moment the device was activated, Daiki had already sensed Barlow''s location using his Haki. "The so-called Barlow you''re asking for is in our hands. Bring 10 million Beris to the Crimea Tavern, or your companion will die here." The one-eyed captain grabbed the Den Den Mushi and shouted this directly to Daiki "Idiots!" --- 58. Rescuing Barlow --- This kind of threat was meaningless to Daiki, yet even he knew the game that needed to be played. When facing the Den Den Mushi, he deliberately showed a flicker of concern on his face, a calculated expression that made the pirate on the other end believe he had the upper hand. In reality, Daiki was already two steps ahead. His mind, always sharp, had already initiated the plan. His hand subtly gestured, signalling the King''s Guard members into action. They moved as one cohesive unit, with no wasted movements and no unnecessary noise. These were no ordinary soldiers they were elite warriors, trained to respond swiftly and quietly, disappearing without so much as a whisper. The guards, dressed in the distinctive dark uniforms of the Tru Kingdom, vanished into the shadows of the narrow alleys. They avoided the eyes of curious onlookers, blending seamlessly into the surroundings as if they were phantoms. In moments, they were gone, moving quickly in the direction indicated by Daiki, who, despite his outward calm, was fully alert to every detail of the unfolding situation. "Don''t harm our comrades," Daiki spoke into the receiver of the Den Den Mushi, his voice steady. "We are preparing the 10 million Beris now, but we must guarantee their safety. I need Barlow to speak now," he added, the urgency creeping into his voice at just the right moment. There was a pause on the other end, static crackling faintly, before the one-eyed pirate captain responded. "No problem. As long as you prepare the Beris, your comrades will be safe. We can even guarantee that," the pirate said, his voice smug and assured. He believed he had all the cards in his hand. Daiki''s lips curled slightly. If only he knew. While the pirate captain continued to boast about their so-called guarantees, Daiki remained focused on the task at hand. His eyes darted between his surroundings, ensuring the safety of his group. He was running at the front, his agile form cutting through the narrow streets of the coastal town. The Royal Guards followed in perfect synchronization, their heavy boots somehow silent on the cobblestone roads. With his right hand, Daiki issued commands with quick, decisive gestures that sent his men exactly where they needed to be. Daiki''s left hand clutched the Den Den Mushi, still communicating with the pirate crew, playing along with their bluff. Through the uneven streets of Nanohana, Daiki led his men towards the pirates''s hideout, his mind calculating every step. The air was thick with the desert heat of Alabasta, a faint breeze kicking up grains of sand from the surrounding dunes. The buildings here, with their sun-bleached walls, seemed to sag under the weight of the relentless heat. The people of Alabasta moved lethargically through the streets, their heads low, focused on their day-to-day survival, unaware of the game of life and death being played in their midst. Finally, Daiki arrived at a dilapidated house on the outskirts of the town. The structure was little more than a collection of rotting wooden planks and crumbling stone, barely standing, and surrounded by the arid, lifeless landscape. He halted in front of the house, his breath steady despite the run, and spoke into the Den Den Mushi with a smile. "The Beris are ready. They''re right outside your door. Just come out and get it." If you encounter this story on Amazon, note that it''s taken without permission from the author. Report it. Inside, the one-eyed pirate captain grew suspicious. His voice crackled through the Den Den Mushi, laced with doubt. "Do you think we''re afraid of harming your comrades? Are you trying to trick me?" Daiki''s smile didn''t falter. "If you''re so confident, why don''t you open the door and take a look for yourself?" Another pause, longer this time. From the shadowed interior of the house, one of the pirates, a thin man with sunken cheeks and trembling hands, hesitantly approached the door. His heart raced as he reached for the rusted doorknob. The entire house seemed to groan under his weight as he turned the handle and pulled the door open. The sight that met his eyes left him speechless. His knees buckled, and his voice caught in his throat as he stared at Daiki and the Royal Guards standing just outside. "C-Captain..." he stammered, his voice barely a whisper. Behind him, another pirate, a burly man wearing a tattered beret, shoved him aside impatiently. "What''s wrong with you?" the man demanded, stepping into the doorway. But when his eyes fell upon the same scene, his face drained of colour. His reaction was no different from the thin man''s. They hadn''t expected this. Daiki stepped forward, his expression now devoid of the playful smile he had worn just moments before. His eyes were cold, calculating, and filled with the promise of violence. He raised the Den Den Mushi to his lips once more, his voice as sharp as a blade. "If you harm anyone from the Tru Kingdom, there''s only one outcome." Before the pirates could react, Daiki moved. His speed was blinding, a blur of motion as he closed the distance between himself and the man in the beret. The pirate had no time to register what was happening before he was sent flying through the air, crashing through the flimsy wooden walls of the house. The boards splintered and shattered, offering no resistance to Daiki''s raw power. Inside, chaos erupted. The remaining pirates, including their one-eyed captain, barely had time to reach for their weapons before Daiki was upon them. He moved like a shadow, slipping between their clumsy attacks with ease. The captain, once so confident, found himself backing away, his single eye wide with fear as Daiki appeared before him. Barlow, who had been beaten and tied up in the corner of the room, looked up at Daiki with a mix of relief and shame. His face was swollen, his clothes torn and dirty. He had once been a captain, a man of respect and authority, but now he was nothing more than a bruised mess. Daiki''s gaze hardened as he looked at Barlow. "You were once a captain, and now look at you. How did you end up like this?" "I didn''t want this..." Barlow muttered, his voice weak and filled with regret. He winced, his swollen face throbbing with pain. "I just wanted to go out for a drink... I didn''t even get through two glasses before they knocked me out and dragged me here." Daiki''s lips curled into a sneer. "And now we''re supposed to fix this mess? 10 million Beris did you think they would get away with that? In the Tru Kingdom, we''ve always been the ones robbing pirates, not the other way around." He turned his cold gaze to the one-eyed captain, whose back was now pressed against the far wall. Blood seeped from a cut on the captain''s forehead, trickling down his face, but his fear paralyzed him. Daiki''s presence was suffocating, his killing intent so palpable that it drained the room of any hope the pirates might have had. With a swift motion, Daiki dispatched the remaining pirates. Their cries of pain were brief, and the only sound that remained was the creaking of the broken house and the soft rustle of the wind outside. As Daiki and Barlow exited the building, they left behind a scene of devastation. Blood seeped from the broken wooden walls, staining the sand outside. "You''ll need to explain yourself to His Majesty when we return," Daiki said flatly as they walked. "As a navigator, how could you disappear at such a crucial moment? How did you ever become a pirate captain? Do you know how much worse it could have happened to your crewmates?" Barlow didn''t respond. His swollen face and the humiliation of his situation left him speechless. Instead, he simply apologized. "I''m sorry. I''ve caused you trouble this time." Daiki sighed. "Alright. As long as everyone''s safe, that''s what matters. Let''s head back quickly. His Majesty is already on his way to Alubarna. Don''t delay his plans." "Yes, Daiki-sama," Barlow replied, though he had to be supported as they walked. His injuries were severe, and it would be weeks before he fully recovered. The pirates had been unlucky to cross paths with the Tru Kingdom. Not only had they failed to get any ransom, but their ship had already been sunk in Nanohana port. Their plan had unravelled spectacularly. With the threat eliminated, Daiki, Barlow, and other crewmates with the Royal Guards set off for Alubarna. The heat of the Alabasta desert bore down on them as they walked, their pace steady despite the harsh conditions. Nearly four hours later, after covering a hundred miles on foot, they finally saw the towering walls of Alubarna in the distance, gleaming in the midday sun. The city was much livelier than the surrounding desert towns. Its walls stood at least a hundred meters high, casting long shadows over the bustling streets below. As Daiki''s party entered the city, they immediately drew the attention of the locals. People turned to stare at the white carriage and the heavily armed guards, whispering amongst themselves. Such processions were usually reserved for royalty or high-ranking officials. But Daiki''s focus was elsewhere. His eyes scanned the city, noting its poverty. Even here, in the royal capital, the signs of hardship were evident. ''If the condition of the royal city is already like this, how much worse it must be in the more remote areas, '' Daiki thought while looking at the royal capital. ---- 59. Crocodile --- Alabasta is considered the largest Kingdom in the first half of the Grand Line. Its rich history spans thousands of years, and throughout this time, it has transformed into a Kingdom of great cultural significance. Its vast deserts and vibrant cities tell tales of a kingdom that has thrived despite its harsh environment. However, recent political unrest has cast a shadow over its glory. The once-revered King Cobra now faces pressure from all sides, and rumours swirl that his power may be slipping through his fingers. Even with his deep ties to the people and the legacy he has upheld, cracks are forming in the foundation of his rule. Yet, such things happen there are always those with ill intentions among the people. ---- In Alabasta''s bustling capital, where merchants barter and citizens gossip, the tension lies just beneath the surface. But for most, life carries on as usual, unaware of the deeper plots unfolding behind closed doors. "President, did you call for me?" On the top floor of a tall, inconspicuous building near the main square, a man with deep, horizontal scars across his face stood by the window. From his vantage point, he could see the lively streets below, where crowds moved about, seemingly oblivious to the darker machinations at play. Among the crowd, he spotted Anos, the king of the Tru Kingdom, along with his convoy making their way through the city. His piercing eyes followed their every move, his mind already working through the possibilities that their presence might present. At that moment, a dark-skinned woman with sleek, straight bangs entered the room. Her calm demeanour betrayed no hint of surprise as she approached the man seated before her, Crocodile, a former pirate captain and now the head of Baroque Works. "Robin, did you receive the notice from the World Government yesterday?" Crocodile asked, not turning from the window. Robin, intelligent and composed as ever, nodded as she handed a document to him. "Yes, President. It arrived last night. It appears the World Government is pushing forward with their plans for the upcoming World Conference. Pirates and rulers alike are already manoeuvring behind the scenes." If Anos were to lay eyes on Crocodile, he would instantly recognize the danger. Crocodile was not only a former pirate with a notorious reputation, but he was also one of the sharpest minds Anos would encounter in Alabasta. Crocodile''s cunning far surpassed his power granted by the Sand-Sand Fruit, a devil fruit that allowed him to manipulate sand at will. Though formidable in combat, it was Crocodile''s strategic mind that made him a force to be reckoned with. "President, are you referring to the matter of the Shichibukai at this World Conference?" Robin inquired, her tone measured. "Yes, exactly. The news broke yesterday, and it seems many factions are already beginning to take action. Pirates are especially eager. What do you think our approach should be?" Crocodile said, finally turning to face her, the sharpness in his eyes as focused as ever. Robin''s eyes flickered briefly to the document she still held. "This development presents both advantages and disadvantages for us." "If we accept the World Government''s invitation and align ourselves with them, we will inevitably be tied to their objectives." If you encounter this narrative on Amazon, note that it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it. "But the benefits are clear no matter what we do on the seas, neither the World Government nor the Marines will interfere with our plans." Crocodile leaned back in his chair, taking a long drag from his cigar, the smoke curling lazily toward the ceiling. "Becoming one of the Shichibukai is not a decision to take lightly. We''ll need to make a significant move, something that will catch their attention." "We can''t afford to waste time, but we do have four months until the World Conference. That''s more than enough time to execute our plans." Robin looked thoughtful. "And what exactly are you planning, President?" Crocodile''s gaze hardened. "The main reason I called you here is to confirm one thing. Are you certain the ancient weapon Pluton is hidden here in Alabasta?" "We can''t proceed without that assurance. If we fail, any attempt to join the Shichibukai will be for nothing." Robin paused, her brow furrowing slightly. "There''s no absolute certainty. But based on the information we''ve gathered so far, there''s a high probability Pluton is hidden somewhere in Alabasta. The precise location, however, is still unclear." "A high probability¡­" Crocodile muttered, his voice barely above a whisper. "I need more than that. I plan to do something big to capture the World Government''s attention. What''s your opinion of King Anos from the Tru Kingdom?" he asked, his tone sharp and calculated as his eyes followed the convoy below. "President, I''m not in a position to make judgments like that. However, I trust that you''ve already considered all the factors," Robin said, her words careful but respectful, a subtle smile playing on her lips. As the convoy passed beneath them, Anos, sensing something ominous, raised his head and locked eyes with Crocodile. For a brief moment, the two leaders exchanged a silent challenge, each recognizing the other''s power. The tension in the air was palpable, but as the convoy continued on its way, the moment passed, leaving Crocodile with a smirk on his face. "It seems this young king isn''t as simple as he appears," Crocodile murmured, his smile widening. The World Conference, a significant event held every four years, was fast approaching. This year''s conference will take place on July 1st, just under four months away. While most rulers would be preoccupied with the political manoeuvrings and alliances at the event, Anos, the young king of the Tru Kingdom, appeared unfazed by such matters for now, at least. Little did he know that the conference would be the birthplace of the Shichibukai system, a mechanism that would change the balance of power across the world. The convoy continued slowly toward the palace, its pace unhurried but purposeful. Anos, while aware of Crocodile''s presence, had no desire to confront him just yet. His primary concern was securing his kingdom''s future, and any threats lurking in Alabasta could jeopardize that. For now, he remained focused on the task at hand. Anos had heard whispers about the Poneglyphs, the ancient stones that held the secrets of the world. He knew that one of these stones might hold the key to untold power, but its exact location in Alabasta remained a mystery. His best chance at uncovering the truth would likely involve a direct conversation with King Cobra, Alabasta''s ruler, a man with secrets of his own. He wanted to confirm certain things about Pluto. It should be in Wano Country, but it''s located right in his kingdom or is this world changed after his reincarnation? If Poneglyphs pointed out the location of the Pluto towards his kingdom, his kingdom would be the next ohara. ---- Before they reached the palace, preparations for a grand welcoming ceremony were already underway. The royal family and ministers of Alabasta had gathered outside the palace gates, eager to greet their foreign guests. The convoy''s arrival was a moment of great significance, and both sides had their agendas. For Alabasta, the primary goal was to glean insights from the economic prosperity of the Tru Kingdom, a rising power in the South Blue. The kingdom''s rapid growth had not gone unnoticed, and many in Alabasta hoped to learn the secrets of their success. As the palace came into view, Princess Vivi, ever gracious, turned to Anos with a smile. "King Anos, we are approaching the royal palace of Alabasta. How does it compare to your own?" Anos, thoughtful as ever, considered her question for a moment before offering a smile of his own. But it was Suzu, his trusted companion, who answered first. "Our Tru Palace may not be as grand or luxurious, but our king prefers it that way. It''s remained unchanged for generations, a symbol of our kingdom''s enduring strength." Curious, Vivi pressed further. "But your kingdom is so wealthy now why not construct something more fitting of your status?" Anos chuckled softly before answering. "A kingdom''s wealth should be reflected in the prosperity of its people, not in the opulence of its rulers." "Until our people are fully thriving, there''s no need to rush into building grand palaces. The place we call home is more than sufficient." The Alabasta palace, though not overly extravagant, stood on a high plateau, its green gardens and waterfalls a stark contrast to the desert that surrounded it. The cascading water was a rare sight in a Kingdom plagued by drought, a testament to King Cobra''s careful stewardship of the land''s scarce resources. "Your Majesty, we''ve arrived at the palace," Haruya announced, halting the carriage at the palace gates. The significance was clear Anos would now need to walk the remaining distance to the palace hall, a gesture that honoured the traditions of the Alabasta royal family. With a calm smile, Anos stepped down from the carriage. After several hours of travel, the fresh air and the sight of the grand palace ahead filled him with a renewed sense of purpose. He knew that the days ahead would be filled with challenges and opportunities, and he was ready for the challenges ahead. --- 60. Meeting King Cobra --- The ministers of Alabasta gathered outside to welcome Anos, waiting patiently as his carriage came to a halt near the grand palace gates. Alabasta''s warmth hung thick in the air, the afternoon sun casting long shadows across the sandstone structures. As soon as Anos stepped off the carriage, he was greeted by the vibrant hues of Alabasta''s royal banners fluttering above and the sight of a portly man in his thirties approaching him with brisk, energetic steps. The man, round-faced and rosy-cheeked, wore a beaming smile as he moved forward. "Baphotus, the Left Minister of Alabasta, on behalf of His Majesty King Cobra, welcomes His Majesty, the King of the Tru Kingdom!" he announced with a flourish, bowing deeply in a gesture of both respect and warmth. Anos, looking no more than sixteen or seventeen, acknowledged Baphotus''s greeting with a nod. His cool gaze, which hinted at wisdom beyond his years, swept across the palace grounds, taking in every detail with a king''s intuition. Baphotus, ever observant, kept his respectful stance, but his mind buzzed with curiosity. Anos, for one so young, exuded a presence that demanded attention. Alabasta was accustomed to visitors and royalty, but this king from the Tru Kingdom, seemingly unfazed by grandeur or ceremony, was something different. "Uncle Baphotus, Vivi''s here too!" came a familiar, lively voice. Baphotus glanced up, noticing Princess Vivi standing in the carriage, a slight pout on her lips. She looked a little put out, clearly not fond of being overshadowed, even for a moment. Her sapphire hair and bright eyes reflected the same energy and spirit as her homeland. There was an innocence in her youth, yet a burgeoning determination that echoed her father''s. "Princess Vivi, you''re back as well!" Baphotus replied, his smile broadening with genuine fondness. "Please, let''s hurry inside. His Majesty has been greatly concerned about you." With that, he turned his respectful gaze back to Anos. "Your Majesty, King Cobra eagerly awaits you within. Please, this way." "Thank you for your efforts, Minister Baphotus." Anos inclined his head slightly, but his mind was elsewhere. He was already analyzing the palace''s layout, assessing exits, noting guards, and registering subtle details that might escape the ordinary visitor. Each stone seemed to tell a story, whispering fragments of Alabasta''s illustrious history. At that moment, Daiki and the Royal Guards approached swiftly from behind. The sound of their synchronized steps echoed against the ancient stone, a testament to their disciplined training. The Tru Kingdom''s guardsmen, dressed in dark, finely woven uniforms that bore the insignia of their homeland, exuded a solemn energy. Their presence was quiet yet powerful, their watchful gazes alert. "Your Majesty, forgive our delay," Daiki said, bowing his head respectfully. Despite their quick journey, their uniforms remained immaculate, reflecting the pride they held for their kingdom. Anos turned to Daiki, his expression softening just slightly. "No need for apologies. I''m glad you''re here safely. How are Barlow & others?" "They are recovering well, Your Majesty. Barlow should be back to full strength soon," Daiki replied, relief evident in his voice. If you spot this tale on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation. "Good. Now that you''re here, let''s proceed together." With that, Anos gestured forward, signalling his intent to move into the palace. The Royal Guards formed a protective perimeter around him, a sight that drew murmurs of curiosity and admiration from onlookers near the entrance. Baphotus watched the entourage with interest. It wasn''t every day that the Alabastan court witnessed such a regimented, foreign escort. His gaze lingered, trying to understand this unusual group. Sensing Baphotus''s curiosity, Igaram leaned in slightly and murmured, "Minister Baphotus, these men are the Royal Guards of the Tru Kingdom." "Ah, I see," Baphotus replied, smiling politely. His curiosity remained, but he knew well enough to respect the dignity of a foreign king. They entered the palace, where the temperature shifted from the sun''s searing heat to a cool, shaded tranquillity. Alabasta''s royal palace held the weight of ages. The stone floors, worn and cracked in places, seemed to whisper tales of past dynasties, triumphs, defeats, and an unbroken line of rulers. Alabasta''s legacy was written into every slab, and for Anos, it was like stepping into a living archive. It reminded him of certain ancient places from his previous life like Egypt, places that bore similar signs of time and history. As they walked further into the palace, Anos''s thoughts momentarily drifted. While his expression remained unchanged, he couldn''t help but be impressed by the subtle grandeur of Alabasta''s history. A sense of respect bloomed within him, a silent acknowledgement of a kingdom that had stood the test of time. They continued onward, eventually entering a vast, echoing hall where King Cobra stood waiting. Cobra''s figure was unmistakable, his bearing one of quiet strength. From a distance, Anos recognized the same features he''d heard of a tall, dignified man whose every move spoke of a ruler''s burdens. At the sight of her father, Vivi couldn''t contain herself any longer. She broke away from the group and ran to him, her voice echoing through the hall. "Dad!" Anos watched her with a soft smile. Despite his composed demeanour, he found the bond between father and daughter unexpectedly touching. At that moment, the palace''s solemn atmosphere felt a bit warmer. Noticing this, Suzu leaned close to Anos and whispered, a playful glint in her eye, "Your Majesty, do you perhaps fancy the young princess?" Anos gave her a quick side glance, the barest hint of a smirk on his face. "What nonsense are you spouting? She''s a child. Even if someone falls for you, that doesn''t mean you should feel obligated to reciprocate." Suzu''s face turned bright red, her cheeks flushing with embarrassment. The teasing remark had backfired, and she was visibly flustered, her composure slipping. Even Daiki, who walked nearby, couldn''t help but chuckle softly. "Haha, Suzu! His Majesty is quite the charmer. If someone likes you, you should seize the opportunity!" Daiki murmured, giving her a friendly nudge. The playful banter eased the group''s nerves as they approached the towering figure of King Cobra. It was unusual for the Royal Guards, accustomed to the Tru Kingdom''s formality, to feel so relaxed within another kingdom''s walls. Yet, they quickly adjusted, resuming a dignified silence as they neared Cobra. "Vivi, why must you always wander off? Do you realize how much I worry?" Cobra''s voice, a mixture of concern and irritation, resounded even before Anos and his guard reached them. He spoke with the unmistakable tone of a father one who had spent sleepless nights worrying, who would trade the world''s riches to ensure his child''s safety. His scolding made clear just how much he cared. "Dad, I''m fine," Vivi replied softly, casting a glance around at the gathering. "Besides, you don''t need to scold me in front of everyone. Can''t you give me a little dignity?" Anos, having drawn close enough to hear their conversation, let out a small laugh. "Now you''re concerned about dignity, Princess Vivi?" She shot him a mildly exasperated look, her cheeks pink with embarrassment, but said nothing. "King Anos of the Tru Kingdom," Cobra said formally, his gaze shifting from his daughter to the young monarch before him. The air between them grew charged with formality, two sovereigns meeting under the eyes of their people. Anos responded with a respectful nod. Cobra''s serious expression softened, transforming into a warm, welcoming smile. "King Anos, I am Nefertari Cobra, King of Alabasta. Welcome to our kingdom, and thank you for caring for Vivi these past few days." He extended his hand in a gesture of goodwill. Anos reciprocated, and their hands met in a firm handshake that spoke of mutual respect. It was a quiet but momentous occasion, one that would undoubtedly find its place in the annals of Alabasta''s history. "I have long heard of Alabasta''s King Cobra. It is a true honour to be received by you today," Anos said with genuine respect. "Perhaps I should be the one saying that, King Anos. Your Tru Kingdom has filled the headlines lately, and from what I''ve seen, it''s well deserved," Cobra replied, his voice carrying a hint of admiration mixed with curiosity. For a brief moment, they exchanged a glance that went beyond words. Beneath the cordialities, each was silently evaluating the other, aware that their kingdoms were at the dawn of what might become a historic alliance. In that grand hall, under the watchful eyes of guards, ministers, and attendants, the two kings, one seasoned and the other on the cusp of his reign stood side by side. There was no fanfare or grand proclamation, yet everyone present sensed the significance of this encounter. This moment, though unwitnessed by the scribes, would echo through time, a chapter in the story of Alabasta and Tru''s future, forged not by pomp and grandeur but by quiet respect and shared aspirations. --- 61. Alliance --- Cobra:..... Anos:... The lack of in-depth communication between the two Kings only highlighted the novelty of their meeting, a reminder that they were not yet familiar with each other. It was a moment thick with unspoken apprehensions and cautious optimism. "Dad, could you stop standing here? There are plenty of seats in the palace hall why can''t we sit down and talk?" Vivi''s voice broke the stillness. She stood by her father, her impatience unmistakable. King Cobra, ruler of Alabasta and father to the willful princess, turned to look at her with mild surprise. Though the king was accustomed to Vivi''s frankness, her tone today had a sharper edge, reflecting her impatience with formalities. But her comment served as a needed cue. "Please, come in, King Anos," Cobra said with an inviting gesture. "After you, King Cobra," Anos replied with equal politeness, mirroring Cobra''s courtesy. The two kings exchanged a final nod before turning to walk side by side into the main hall. The walls of Alabasta''s royal palace were not adorned with the luxuries one might expect of a royal estate. Instead, the decor was restrained, carrying a dignified simplicity that still managed to convey the history and strength of the Kingdom. The architecture was solemn, almost austere, but its grandeur lay in its very restraint. The polished marble, the towering columns, and the intricate, hand-carved woodemouldingsgs lent the hall a sense of deep-rooted majesty. Anos took in the surroundings with a subtle nod, appreciating the strength in simplicity. Although he was used to the flourishing decorations in his own kingdom''s palace, he could sense that Alabasta''s restrained beauty held in weight and reverence. After the two kings were seated, Suzu and Daiki took their places behind Anos, their stance vigilant and deferential. They were prepared to support their king however he needed, silently ensuring his comfort and security. Meanwhile, palace servants glided into the hall, bringing trays of fresh fruit and carefully arranged platters of light snacks. The scent of exotic Alabastan herbs wafted through the air, mixing with the fresh, faintly salty breeze that slipped in through the open windows. "The Kingdom of Alabasta has stood for thousands of years," Anos began, his voice calm yet imbued with a sense of reverence. "It is one of the oldest Kingdoms in the world. I never imagined I''d have the opportunity of visiting as a guest." Cobra nodded, acknowledging Anos''s words. "King Anos, you''re too kind. Alabasta has an ancient history, but as you''ve seen, our Kingdom is no longer what it once was." He sighed, a hint of sorrow evident in his gaze as he looked out over the palace grounds. "Under my rule, restoring Alabasta to its former glory feels like a daunting task, as though it''s beyond my reach." "King Cobra, I must respectfully disagree," Anos replied, leaning forward with a thoughtful expression. "The Kingdom of Tru faced similar hardships, but we found that change was essential. Alabasta''s current state is leagues better than ours was before." Support creative writers by reading their stories on Royal Road, not stolen versions. King Cobra listened, visibly interested. There was a strength in Anos''s tone that resonated with him, and he couldn''t help but wonder if Anos''s resilience might be the key to understanding Alabasta''n''s struggles. "You must have seen for yourself," Anos continued. "Compared to Alabasta today, Tru has undergone significant changes in recent years. We''ve managed to become one of the most prosperous nations across the Four Seas, let alone the Grand Line." "Your recent gatherings and policies have inspired us, yet I realize our circumstances differ. We tried to model some of Tru''s reforms here, but adapting them to our specific needs has proven¡­ challenging." Cobra''s gaze drifted as he considered Anos''s words. He felt both admiration and the weight of responsibility pressing down on him. "It''s true," he said finally, nodding in agreement. "Seeing Tru''s progress has inspired us. But the more we try to implement similar policies, the more complex the adjustments become. Sometimes, it''s like trying to fit a square peg into a round hole." Their conversation was interrupted by Vivi''s sudden outburst. "Dad, this isn''t the time for this! It''s already noon can we eat first?" Her tone was insistent, and her words broke through the serious tone with an unexpected, almost childlike urgency. Cobra turned to his daughter, clearly exasperated but patient. He gave her a look that was both stern and indulgent. "Vivi, I''m in the middle of a conversation with King Anos. Lunch will be served shortly," he said gently, trying to maintain his composure. Turning back to Anos, he added, "My apologies, King Anos. Vivi is my only child, and perhaps I''ve allowed her a bit too much freedom. I hope you don''t mind her forwardness." "It''s no trouble at all," Anos replied, a hint of amusement flashing in his eyes. He picked up his water glass, taking a thoughtful sip. Just then, Vivi raised her voice again, this time with a declaration that shocked the entire hall. "I''ll marry King Anos in the future! He won''t mind my little quirks!" "Pfffffft!¡­ cough cough¡­ gasp¡­ cough cough!" The timing was less than ideal. Anos choked on his drink, the water barely reaching his stomach before he nearly spat it out. Even Cobra appeared momentarily speechless, his expression caught between disbelief and mortification. Vivi''s words hung in the air, echoing around the hall. Those present exchanged nervous glances, unsure of how to react. It was one thing for the young princess to be outspoken, but this was a declaration with significant implications. "Princess Vivi, this isn''t the time or place for such talk," Suzu whispered, leaning in close. "People might take it seriously, and this isn''t an appropriate setting for jokes." Vivi shook her head. "I''m not joking," she insisted, her voice steady, almost solemn. "I thought about it all night, and again today. King Anos has the vision and strength to change Alabasta''s future. For the sake of this Kingdom, marrying him wouldn''t be a sacrifice." "Vivi¡­" Cobra''s expression shifted, his usual patience replaced by a stern, fatherly authority. His voice grew firm, cutting through the stunned silence that had settled over the room. Taking a deep breath, he continued, "Kingdom''s affairs are discussed between leaders, not decided on a whim. Diplomacy and alliances are far more complex than you understand, and as kinI have to to handle them. You must trust me to act in Alabasta''s best interest." Anos observed the father-daughter exchange with silent curiosity, taking note of Vivi''s conviction and Cobra''s protective resolve. Despite the abruptness of Vivi''s declaration, he found her passion intriguing, if somewhat na?ve. The atmosphere in the hall became tense, and those present shifted uncomfortably. The Alabastan ministers, in particular, seemed ill at ease, their expressions a mix of shock and concern. This was no ordinary family disagreement; it was unfolding in front of foreign dignitaries, during what should have been a formal diplomatic meeting. "I apologize, King Anos, for Vivi''s impulsiveness," Cobra said, his voice low with embarrassment. Anos shook his head, offering a reassuring smile. "Think nothing of it," he replied his tone calm yet measured. Turning to Vivi, he allowed his expression to grow serious. "Princess Vivi, do you understand what''s involved in establishing diplomatic relations between two nations?" Vivi blinked, caught off-guard by the directness of his question. Anos continued, his voice steady and authoritative. "When two Kingdoms, it spans economic, political, financial, and even military domains. This isn''t a simple matter of a single action or decision. An alliance must benefit both Kingdoms, securing prosperity and stability." Cobra nodded in agreement. "King Anos speaks the truth, Vivi. Right now, we represent not ourselves, but our respective Kingdom," he affirmed, his voice resonant with conviction. Behind him, Alabasta''s ministers nodded solemnly. They had perhaps underestimated the scope of Anos''s intentions. While they''d anticipated economic discussions, they were now faced with the realization that an alliance with Tru could affect all facets of their kingdom. After a moment of reflection, Anos offered a gentle smile. "King Cobra, it is indeed noon. Let''s enjoy lunch, and afterwards, we can continue our discussions in greater depth." The suggestion was met with relieved nods. The tension in the hall lessened, and a new anticipation settled over the gathering as they prepared for the next phase of their meeting. --- 62. Joining World Government? --- It was already noon, and despite the royal court''s best efforts to maintain a schedule, the meal had not yet begun. The atmosphere in the palace of Alabasta was filled with tense anticipation, and the grand hall, usually bustling with attendants and nobles seemed stiflingly quiet. Cobra glanced at the high windows, where the midday sun filtered through, casting light and shadows over the table that stretched out before them. He took a slow breath, letting a composed smile settle on his face. After all, this was supposed to be a moment of unity, a gathering that might help mend recent tensions. Inwardly, however, he couldn''t ignore the lingering awkwardness from moments earlier, a tension that had been bubbling beneath the surface. Anos, who had travelled from the distant Tru Kingdom, had made it clear that the meal should precede any further discussions. "We should eat first, then discuss matters of state in detail afterwards," he had stated firmly. Cobra respected Anos''s straightforwardness and had agreed, recognizing the wisdom in maintaining focus on the present. No one seemed to heed what Princess Vivi had said earlier. Her words earnestly, hopeful, had fallen on deaf ears. Even Cobra himself acted as though he hadn''t heard his daughter, treating her comments as little more than youthful enthusiasm. To the court, Vivi''s words were just that unformed and unheeded, far from the sharp pragmatism expected in royal discourse. The thoughts of those involved didn''t matter much to the onlookers. In the grand scheme of the political matters at hand, individual perspectives held little sway. Together, the guests rose, their silken robes and ornate attire whispering against the tiled floor, as they prepared to move to another hall. They followed Cobra, their steps echoing along the marbled corridors, passing tapestries that depicted the long and storied history of Alabasta. After turning several corners, they reached a dining hall. While not excessively large, it held an air of intimacy balanced by royal opulence. The room could comfortably accommodate a hundred people, and at its centre stood a massive table spanning over ten meters laden with delicacies. Cobra observed with appreciation the array of dishes prepared by Alabasta''s finest chefs. Plates of fruits from distant lands sat alongside roasted meats, fresh seafood, and intricate desserts each dish meticulously arranged to honour their esteemed guests. Alabasta had its culinary traditions, but today, they had crafted a spread that reflected a blend of styles, paying homage to Tru''s preferences while highlighting the richness of Alabasta''s resources. Anos and Cobra took their places at opposite ends of the table, symbolizing the shared respect between the two sovereigns while maintaining the formality of distance. The other guests found their seats with less ceremony, filling the sides of the grand table. In truth, such a feast was often a formality. Many of those present rarely indulged in the luxurious foods laid before them; their appetites were often restrained by the weight of duty and decorum. The royal court, after all, had its codes of conduct, and part of that code was discretion in all things even dining. This lavish spread was prepared less for consumption and more for display, a manifestation of Alabasta''s generosity and prosperity. Yet despite the abundance, no one truly ate freely. Even when the best dishes in the land were within reach, restraint prevailed. This novel is published on a different platform. Support the original author by finding the official source. Each motion, each bite, was deliberate, almost ceremonial. For Anos, this environment felt familiar, as his court followed similar practices. However, Cobra couldn''t ignore the peculiar contrast between himself and Anos. Anos, with his refined and almost delicate features, seemed to embody an elegance that Cobra, with his rugged appearance and straightforward demeanour, felt he lacked. As the meal proceeded, the silence remained unbroken. Conversation was absent, not out of discomfort, but out of adherence to the etiquette ingrained in them. There were no casual toasts, no remarks exchanged across the table only the steady, muted sounds of cutlery against fine china. Half an hour passed, and as the last of the dishes was cleared, Cobra leaned forward. "King Anos," he said, his voice carrying a polite enthusiasm, "it''s a rare occasion for you to visit Alabasta. Would you allow me to give you a tour of our palace?" Anos responded with a gentle smile. "You''re very gracious, King Cobra. Since you''ve extended the invitation, it would be a privilege to accept." There was an underlying excitement in his voice, though he carefully masked it with royal decorum. The invitation to tour the palace was precisely the opportunity he had hoped for. His curiosity lay beyond mere admiration for architecture he sought knowledge, the kind hidden in centuries-old secrets. Anos vaguely remembered from past accounts that Alabasta housed a Poneglyph, but he could not recall its precise location within the palace walls. Accepting Cobra''s offer meant he might finally gain access to the elusive artefact, a piece of history that held more than mere words. The ancient stone''s message, if deciphered, could hold profound insights into the world''s mysteries. As they rose to leave the hall, Anos cast a meaningful glance at Daiki, who accompanied him from Tru. With no need for words, Daiki understood his king''s intentions. Their shared experiences in the courts of Tru had taught Daiki to read Anos''s unspoken signals, and he was keenly aware of his role. The Alabasta royal entourage consisted of around ten people, from Cobra himself to his ministers and closest advisors. By contrast, Anos''s entourage was smaller, consisting of Daiki and Suzu, who had accompanied him from Tru. Suzu, with her sharp eyes and keen instincts, observed the palace surroundings with unwavering focus. The palace of Alabasta was a marvel, even for a ruler like Anos, accustomed to the grandeur of his kingdom. Its architecture exuded an exotic beauty a mixture of traditional Alabasta motifs and symbols of power that spoke to the nation''s strength and resilience. As they left the dining hall, Cobra and Anos walked side by side. Their entourage followed at a respectful distance, maintaining a ten-meter gap to allow the kings their privacy. This distance was both an unspoken rule and a strategic choice, granting Cobra and Anos a semblance of solitude to converse freely. Anos seized the opportunity, his voice calm yet probing. "King Cobra, I''m curious what are your thoughts on joining the World Government?" Cobra turned, his eyes thoughtful. "The World Government of today has drifted far from what it once was," he replied. "For many Kingdoms, joining it has been more curse than blessing." The truth in Cobra''s words resonated with Anos, who had wrestled with similar doubts. He hoped that speaking with Cobra might grant him insights into the intricacies of joining the World Government, beyond the official statements and diplomatic promises. Cobra''s voice took on a grave tone. "The World Government now consists of 175 member Kingdoms, yet the world itself has close to 300. That doesn''t include those along the Grand Line. Altogether, there are over 500 Kingdom or countries, and the majority have chosen not to join." Anos''s gaze did not falter, though he listened intently. As Cobra continued, he outlined the financial toll membership required: the exorbitant Heavenly Tribute, an amount so burdensome it often bankrupted lesser nations. "For poorer Kingdoms, the tribute alone can plunge them into ruin. They''re forced to commit their resources, even their people, to paying that cost," Cobra concluded. Anos remained silent, weighing the implications. Joining the World Government could secure Tru''s standing among kingdoms, offering protection and the appearance of legitimacy. Yet, Anos knew there was always a hidden price, something the government wouldn''t reveal until it was too late. "The Heavenly Tribute," Anos mused, "is a burden few can bear." Cobra nodded, understanding his guest''s hesitation. "Though I am grateful Alabasta does not pay it, our history has paid other costs. Hundreds of years ago, my ancestors chose not to join the Celestial Dragons, even when offered the privilege. To this day, I don''t know what secret or legacy they safeguarded." "Really, Alabasta does not pay Heavenly Tribute?" Anos spoke carefully, his interest piqued. Why would Alabasta''s rulers reject such an offer? The answer, it seemed, was lost to history, locked in the memories of long-dead kings. The mysteries surrounding Alabasta were not fully addressed in historical records, and even the legends left gaps. Anos suspected that this journey would only reveal more unanswered questions. The Poneglyph might provide some clues, but he knew the path to understanding Alabasta''s secret would require patience and persistence. For now, Anos kept his thoughts to himself, though his mind raced with speculation. With a polite smile, he replied, "Thank you, King Cobra, for your honesty. It has given me much to consider." Cobra nodded, sensing that his words had left an impact. Together, they continued through the palace corridors, each man absorbed in his thoughts. As the grand halls of Alabasta loomed around them, both rulers recognized that the world they navigated was far more complex than it appeared. The true essence of power lay not just in rule or wealth, but in the understanding of one''s legacy. For Anos, the journey had only just begun. --- 63. Poneglyphs --- Since the Tru Kingdom sought to expand, many of its ambitions inevitably brought it into the orbit of the World Government. Without aligning itself with that immense power, achieving its goals, especially with expansion in the South Blue, would be challenging. The Tru Kingdom understood this well and had begun considering how to approach the World Government to cement its plans. King Anos of Tru, standing beside King Cobra of Alabasta, cast his gaze over the arid, sun-scorched horizon. "King Cobra," he said thoughtfully, breaking the silence, "what do you find most unsatisfactory about Alabasta?" Cobra was momentarily taken aback by the bluntness of the question. The subject was sensitive, almost taboo, for a land proud of its resilience, a kingdom forged under the harshest of conditions. But Alabasta had recently been showing an openness to change, owing in no small part to Tru Kingdom''s steady rise under Anos''s rule. If not for this emerging influence, Cobra likely wouldn''t have entertained Anos''s probing question with as much tolerance. "As a whole," Cobra began, after gathering his thoughts, "Alabasta has no reason for dissatisfaction. Our people are unified, and their beliefs are aligned. But¡­" His voice faltered slightly, reflecting the heaviness of the truth he had long carried. "I want to do more for them. The climate here worsens year after year, and the once fertile oases have mostly turned to desert. Providing for my people has become harder." "So, I ask you, King Anos, if you have any counsel on how we might improve our circumstances." The sincerity in Cobra''s voice spoke of a ruler who truly bore his kingdom''s burdens, and it struck a chord with Anos. He had seen other rulers more preoccupied with wealth and influence than the well-being of their people. There was a king who was not only aware of his people''s struggles but also searching for solutions. "I may not be intimately familiar with Alabasta''s internal affairs," Anos replied, looking thoughtfully around, "but from my journey here, I''ve seen that Alabasta''s people are resilient, honest, and resourceful. They only need the right opportunities." He paused, considering how best to phrase his offer without overstepping. "If you''re open to it, once I return to Tru Kingdom, we could initiate an economic partnership." Cobra raised an eyebrow in interest, nodding for Anos to continue. "Our Tru Kingdom could establish large enterprises within Alabasta," Anos explained. "This would create jobs, stimulating the local economy and offering your people a chance to improve their lives." "However, for this to succeed, Alabasta would need to take responsibility for maintaining security and coordination. How does this sound to you, King Cobra?" Anos had anticipated Cobra''s initial reluctance. While Cobra was a wise ruler, he was cautious by nature, and he knew his limits. Reading on this site? This novel is published elsewhere. Support the author by seeking out the original. Although he would not admit it openly, Cobra likely understood that his kingdom wasn''t impervious to outside influences or threats. The offer was precisely calculated. Anos wanted to make Cobra see the advantages without appearing overly eager. Tru Kingdom''s plans, after all, were not confined to Alabasta alone. While the current focus lay on developing the Four Blues, the Grand Line''s untapped markets beckoned with far greater prospects. Alabasta, located strategically within the Grand Line and exempt from the "Heavenly Tribute," wielded significant authority within the World Government. This made it an ideal base from which to expand Tru Kingdom''s influence across the Grand Line. King Cobra pondered the offer. "I admit, King Anos, I''m curious about your plans. How would this economic cooperation unfold, exactly?" "Why don''t we find a suitable place to sit and discuss it thoroughly?" Anos suggested, his tone amicable. "If you''d like, you could invite any of your advisors or ministers who might need to be involved in such decisions." "Very well," Cobra agreed, signalling his interest. Though his words conveyed agreement, Cobra''s expression remained reserved. The thought of working alongside a younger ruler intrigued him. Yet, subconsciously, Cobra couldn''t shake the feeling that Anos was the more seasoned king between them. "Daiki, come over here!" Anos called to his aide, Daiki, who stood ten meters away. As Daiki approached, Anos turned to Cobra with an apologetic smile. "Excuse me, King Cobra. I need a brief moment. I''ll return shortly so we can continue." "No problem," Cobra replied politely, though he began to feel satisfaction bubbling beneath his calm exterior. This meeting, initially intended only as a diplomatic formality, had turned into something potentially transformative for Alabasta. Anos''s proactive approach toward collaboration aligned perfectly with Cobra''s ambitions. The possibility of economic growth, of bringing relief to his people, pleased him more than he showed. Still, he wasn''t aware of Anos''s full intentions. As Cobra watched him leave, Anos performed a quick, discreet movement. With Daiki at his side, he disappeared from the terrace, reappearing instantly in a shadowed, secluded corner of Alabasta''s royal grounds a cemetery hidden within the palace walls. The two found themselves amidst an array of tombstones, silent reminders of those who had come before. Despite the eerie atmosphere, Anos''s face was resolute. "Daiki," Anos said in a lowered tone, "we''re here for a particular item hidden beneath one of these graves. I don''t know the exact location, but you''ll need to find it without drawing any attention. It''s a small, box-shaped artefact, and it may be inscribed with an ancient text." Daiki nodded, his gaze sharpening as he surveyed the cemetery. He knew the gravity of the task. Although he trusted Anos''s judgment, he had reservations about acting within the palace grounds of a foreign kingdom. "Once you''ve located it," Anos continued, "make an impression of the text do not destroy it. I just remembered that historical texts are resilient and nearly impossible to break." The mention of ancient inscriptions caused Daiki''s eyes to widen slightly. He was aware of Alabasta''s long history and the ancient mysteries that lay buried beneath its sands, but he hadn''t realized how close they might be to one of those secrets. "Understood, Your Majesty. I''ll proceed with caution," Daiki replied, his voice filled with a newfound seriousness. Anos knew well enough that Alabasta''s power was not to be underestimated. The kingdom''s strength extended beyond the physical; it held secrets and mysteries that even the World Government eyed with a measure of respect. Navigating such a place was no simple matter, and although he could perceive certain energies around the palace, he was cautious of potential traps and barriers hidden within. "I''ll have to leave the rest to you," Anos said, his voice softer, almost as if he were speaking to himself. "Once you''ve completed the task, find me." After giving one last, careful glance around, Anos transported them both out of the cemetery. He knew that no one would expect Alabasta''s king to hide something as valuable as a historical text within a graveyard. This hidden text contained crucial information and knowledge that could reshape the power dynamics of the Grand Line. If Anos''s hunch was correct, this particular artefact might reveal the location of the ancient weapon, Pluton. The implications were profound. Alabasta''s deserts held many secrets, and this single fragment of knowledge was enough to shift the tides. Returning to the palace, Daiki maintained an unwavering focus. He committed every detail to memory, carefully planning how he would execute the search. Alabasta''s royal grounds were vast, but with Anos''s spatial abilities, pinpointing the cemetery again wouldn''t be difficult. However, Anos had specifically instructed him to avoid acting under cover of night, a perplexing restriction that left Daiki puzzled. Yet Daiki trusted his king''s foresight implicitly. If Anos advised against a nighttime operation, there must have been a significant reason. As he walked, Daiki began devising strategies, considering every possible angle. The Royal Guards had over 20 elite members with him. If each was assigned a section of the cemetery, they could complete a thorough search within half an hour. But he also knew that speed wasn''t the only concern; the task required precision and utmost secrecy. In his mind, Daiki weighed the logistics, visualizing the team''s movements within the confined space. He would need to coordinate them efficiently, using every available resource without raising suspicion. Every detail had to be perfect. He glanced briefly toward Anos, who seemed lost in thought as he observed the palace surroundings. No words were exchanged between them, but the unspoken understanding was clear: they were on the brink of a discovery that could alter the very fabric of power within the Grand Line. As Daiki continued to review his plan, the realization settled over him. This mission was not simply about finding an artefact it was about positioning the Tru Kingdom in the heart of the Grand Line''s hidden machinations. If successful, they could carve out a new era of influence, one that would extend beyond the Four Blues and into the vast unknown of the Grand Line. Daiki took a deep breath. The weight of responsibility felt heavy, yet he was ready. The path ahead was lined with challenges, but with Anos''s guidance, he was confident they would not only reach their goal but reshape the world in the process. --- 64. Aiding Alabasta --- Anos made his return to the palace and, after a momentary pause, greeted King Cobra with a respectful nod. Their exchange was warm, and they quickly engaged in a thoughtful conversation, speaking as friends as much as kings. Were it not for Princess Vivi''s young age, Cobra might have considered forging a marriage alliance with Anos, who had an air of maturity and intelligence beyond his years. Ignoring the background chatter in the palace, Anos accompanied Cobra into the grand hall. Golden and emerald tapestries adorned the high stone walls, telling stories of Alabasta''s rich history and victories past. As they moved through the ornate doors, a gathering of Alabasta''s ministers, dressed in fine robes with intricate patterns of Alabasta''s crest, awaited them, eager to hear the details of this important conversation. Initially, this journey was meant for a single purpose to officially join the World Government in Mariejois. But their trip had taken an unexpected turn, burdened by the political complexities and hidden agendas that often swirled through the Grand Line. King Cobra, however, was no stranger to such challenges. His instincts were as sharp as ever, capable of discerning the smallest hints of deception or opportunity. Once everyone had settled, Cobra and Anos faced each other. The air was heavy with the significance of the moment; two kings with differing priorities and values were brought together in pursuit of something mutually beneficial. Though this initial meeting would yield only a preliminary understanding, it was clear to all present that it could set the foundation for a lasting alliance between the Tru Kingdom and Alabasta. Alabasta''s left minister broke the silence. "Your Majesty, King Tru," he began, his tone respectful and measured. "King Cobra mentioned your interest in establishing economic and commercial cooperation with Alabasta. Might you elaborate on the specifics?" Suzu, Anos''s trusted scribe and aide, retrieved her leather-bound notebook, a delicate quill in hand, poised to record the king''s words with accuracy and care. Across the table, Alabasta''s ministers prepared a video transponder snail to capture every word and expression, a rare privilege reserved for only the most significant diplomatic meetings. After ensuring everything was in place, Anos adjusted his posture, signalling the gravity of his intentions. "King Cobra," he began in a steady voice, "as we discussed earlier, our focus will remain strictly on economic exchanges." "The partnership between the Tru Kingdom and Alabasta will involve only commerce, leaving aside military, political, or public sectors. This alliance is built solely upon economic development, aiming for mutual prosperity." Cobra nodded in agreement, his eyes keen and thoughtful. The stakes were clear: Alabasta needed resources and employment opportunities to alleviate the hardships endured by its people, especially after recent years of turmoil. Just as Anos was about to continue, Vivi, sitting at her father''s side, stirred and began to speak. However, Cobra, sensing her impulse, gently covered her mouth and cast her a disapproving look. His tone, though firm, carried the warmth of a protective father. "Vivi now is not the time for idle chatter. Either remain quiet or please excuse yourself," he whispered, his words softened by a gentle smile. Suzu, standing nearby, couldn''t help but smile at the exchange, though her words carried a mild admonishment. "Forgive me, Princess Vivi, but such matters require great concentration. Perhaps, in time, you will have your negotiations to lead." Did you know this story is from Royal Road? Read the official version for free and support the author. Though blunt, Suzu''s words resonated with the ministers present, who understood the delicate nature of the occasion. Vivi''s presence was already an exception, given her young age, and the unexpected interruption could have jeopardized the decorum of the moment. Yet, it also served as a reminder of her enthusiasm and the young royal''s growing interest in her kingdom''s future. With an apologetic glance, Cobra turned back to Anos, his demeanour apologetic. "My sincerest apologies, King Anos. Please continue." Anos offered a reassuring smile, gracefully setting aside the minor interruption. "Not a problem, King Cobra," he replied. "Regarding our shared economic interests, we propose establishing industries within Alabasta." "These would include perfumes, handicrafts, textiles, and various products crafted in the Tru Kingdom. Our goal is to support employment and improve living standards for at least 50% of Alabasta''s citizens within five years." "To support this, we are prepared to contribute our expertise in infrastructure, environmental improvements, seawater desalination, and other vital projects." "These advancements will address Alabasta''s basic needs and support the stability of its people." The ministers listened intently, glancing at each other as Anos spoke. The Tru Kingdom''s proposal was more extensive than anticipated and seemed to offer solutions to many of Alabasta''s pressing issues. Suzu diligently transcribed every word, and on the Alabasta side, the video transponder snail whirred softly, capturing the entirety of the conversation. "Naturally, we would ask that Alabasta aid Tru by setting up secure trade routes along the Grand Line and into the New World," Anos continued. "Our enterprises will operate within Alabasta''s legal frameworks, paying taxes and respecting your regulations." "Infrastructure costs can be negotiated through tax deductions or direct payment, and further details can be managed by our appointed representatives." Anos''s proposal was carefully thought out, and he delivered it with conviction. Nearby, Suzu kept writing with swift strokes, while Daiki, the captain of the royal guard, stood silently behind. Though Daiki was well-versed in combat and security, his frequent presence on Anos''s side had allowed him to witness and gain a modest understanding of diplomatic exchanges. He was taken aback by the ambition in Anos''s words. Tru''s reputation was growing in the world of commerce, yet they lacked a foothold on the Grand Line a disadvantage that severely hampered trade potential. From the beginning, joining the World Government had been a strategic move. Access to the Grand Line was essential, and with a partnership like this, Tru could drastically reduce its transportation costs while safeguarding its people and assets. The proposal offered mutual benefits, yet it was clear that Alabasta, grappling with a scarcity of resources, stood to gain even more. In the back of the hall, Alabasta''s ministers exchanged thoughtful glances. They observed the young ruler before them with a mixture of admiration and disbelief. It was rare to see someone so young exercise diplomacy with such finesse. Many of the ministers, with lifetimes of experience, had never imagined offering terms that could benefit another kingdom without extracting substantial returns. For Alabasta, this alliance could provide the resources to overcome the shortages and financial struggles that had plagued the kingdom. The Tru Kingdom''s interests, though substantial, were focused on trade and economic development, steering clear of any political influence over Alabasta''s internal affairs. After a few moments of silent deliberation, Alabasta''s ministers excused themselves and moved to a private corner to discuss the proposal. Cobra, meanwhile, sat deep in thought, his gaze fixed upon the young king before him. He recognized the boldness in Anos''s offer, as well as the potential risks. Alabasta was in need, and this alliance could offer stability, but he understood that no partnership was ever truly without strings. "King Anos," Cobra finally said, breaking the contemplative silence, "what you''ve proposed could greatly benefit our people. Today, since we''ve agreed upon the foundation of this alliance, I believe our representatives should discuss the finer details. Alabasta will gladly welcome Tru''s emissaries to finalize these terms." As he finished, Cobra''s voice held a subtle resolve, underscoring the commitment he was making. He saw the potential benefits but remained wary, understanding that the Tru Kingdom''s interest wasn''t purely charitable. Anos had entered this agreement with clear intentions by expanding Tru''s economic reach across the Grand Line, he could achieve influence on an unprecedented scale. Anos nodded, acknowledging the king''s wisdom. He knew the risks Cobra weighed and respected his discernment. Both rulers understood that trust would grow in time, not through words alone but through actions that honoured their commitments. This partnership represented more than economic growth; it was a gesture toward a more interconnected future, one where each kingdom''s strengths would support the other''s needs. By pooling their resources, Alabasta could improve its infrastructure, while Tru could expand its trade influence, bridging the gap between two distant realms on the Grand Line. With a sense of newfound unity, Anos and Cobra rose from their seats and clasped hands a symbolic gesture that sealed the alliance between Tru and Alabasta, witnessed by all present. This partnership would mark a new chapter in the history of both kingdoms, one that would be recounted in tales and legends across the seas, from Alabasta''s golden deserts to the verdant lands of Tru. --- 65. Robin --- The Kingdom of Tru was known for producing a unique variety of goods, renowned across the Four Seas for their quality and utility. These products ranged from staple foods to luxurious items, crafted meticulously by artisans who had honed their skills over generations. Yet despite their popularity, only a select few could afford them in the Grand Line, as transportation and logistical costs to reach those turbulent waters were substantial. In a grand hall adorned with opulent tapestries and warm, ambient light, King Cobra and his advisors sat in solemn discussion with Anos. Anos, a young ruler with a commanding yet calm presence, stood at the helm of Tru''s rapid rise to prominence. Dressed in regal attire that reflected both his authority and his humility, he exuded a charisma that was hard to ignore. His words were measured, each one holding weight, and his smile carried a reassurance that his nation''s strength lay not only in its wealth but in its wisdom and adaptability. "What King Cobra is suggesting," Anos began in a tone that was both respectful and diplomatic, "is that we''re only reaching a preliminary consensus on issues that could be addressed in the early stages of our collaboration." "The remaining complexities, those elements that require deeper understanding, can be left to our teams to deliberate and refine." "Um¡­ may I say something?" Princess Vivi''s soft voice broke the formal atmosphere as she looked around, hesitating slightly before making her request. Though she bore the title of princess, she was not accustomed to such high-stakes negotiations. Her tender heart and youthful curiosity often clashed with the heavy responsibilities that came with her role. As her eyes darted to each face in the room, she seemed to search for a sign of approval. "What is it, Vivi?" Cobra asked, his tone gentle yet inquisitive, as if encouraging her to share her thoughts. Vivi''s brow furrowed slightly as she gathered her words. "I wanted to ask King Anos¡­ the matters you mentioned seem to primarily benefit the people of Tru. But is there anything in it for Alabasta as a whole?" Her question, though well-intentioned, reflected a certain naivety. She hadn''t yet learned the intricate dance of politics, where alliances were rarely black-and-white, and where mutual benefit was often nuanced. Yet there was a sincerity in her voice that could not be denied. Anos met her gaze with a gentle smile, his expression softening as he saw her earnestness. "Perhaps you don''t fully understand yet. These agreements will make more sense once you''re directly involved in matters of state. In time, you''ll see how even seemingly one-sided arrangements can have mutual benefits." "Vivi," Cobra interjected, his voice becoming solemn. "What King Anos is proposing will indeed bring tremendous benefits to Alabasta. You''re overlooking a crucial element our Kingdom isn''t defined solely by its lands or even by our royal family." "The true foundation of Alabasta is its people. As long as their lives improve, our entire Kingdom will be strengthened. This collaboration will bring about a positive transformation for them." Vivi''s cheeks flushed, but her curiosity wasn''t quelled. "I see¡­ but I didn''t hear anything about profit-sharing after the sale of these goods. Wouldn''t Alabasta have a say in that too?" The room fell silent, her innocent question cutting through the tension. Cobra''s face tightened, and he cast a stern look toward his daughter. "Vivi," he reprimanded, his tone serious and fatherly. Unauthorized duplication: this narrative has been taken without consent. Report sightings. Anos''s expression changed, his previous smile fading as his gaze grew cold. The air seemed to thicken, and Cobra quickly rose, a shadow of worry crossing his face. "I apologize, King Anos," Cobra said, his voice filled with humility. "Vivi is still young and hasn''t yet grasped the subtleties of such discussions. I hope you''ll excuse her." "King Cobra, please understand that if the Kingdom of Tru chooses to extend this cooperation, any Kingdom on the Grand Line would eagerly accept," Suzu, one of Anos''s most trusted advisors, spoke up in a firm tone. Her eyes held a spark of loyalty and protective instinct toward her king, and she didn''t hesitate to defend Tru''s values. The room settled back into a delicate balance, with the Alabasta officials keenly aware of the consequences of disrespecting such an esteemed guest. Cobra inclined his head, his voice respectful. "Understood. I apologize again." Satisfied, Anos allowed his features to relax slightly. "Now that the preliminary matters are agreed upon, we can leave the remaining details to others. I think I''ll retire for a while. I look forward to this partnership''s fruitful beginnings," he concluded, rising gracefully from his seat. Cobra nodded, his posture formal. "Very well. Igaram, please escort King Anos to his quarters," he called out to a guard stationed at the door. Anos acknowledged Cobra with a polite nod before exiting. His movements were elegant, each step deliberate and dignified. The air seemed to lighten as he departed, but tension lingered in the room. Once he was out of sight, Cobra sighed and cast a weary look at his daughter. Vivi looked back, her face a mix of remorse and defiance. She couldn''t help feeling that she had voiced a legitimate concern, and her eyes seemed to plead for understanding. "Father, I didn''t mean to say anything wrong. I just¡­ I wanted to understand." Cobra''s gaze softened, his voice taking on a gentler tone. "Vivi, the affairs of state are far more complex than they appear. You''re still young. In a few years, you''ll have the insight to see the broader picture." Just then, Minister Zuo stepped forward, bowing slightly before addressing Cobra. "Your Majesty, we have carefully reviewed King Anos''s proposal, and it is entirely feasible. If everything is implemented as planned, we can expect significant improvements in Alabasta''s economic state within five years." Cobra nodded, his mind already calculating the potential outcomes. "Good. Let''s proceed with further discussions. When representatives from Tru arrive for follow-up meetings, select a team of negotiators who can handle these tasks effectively." At this, Vivi leaned forward again, her curiosity still burning. "Father, does this mean that Alabasta isn''t capable of accomplishing what King Anos proposed? Why must we rely on Tru?" "If our Kingdom had the resources and capabilities to achieve these advancements, we would have done so long ago," Cobra explained patiently. "It''s precisely because we lack certain resources that we seek partnerships like this one." "Oh¡­ I understand now," Vivi murmured, her mind digesting this newfound perspective. Cobra''s face softened further, and he offered her a warm, reassuring look. "Remember, Vivi, though you''re young, every word you say and every action you take reflects on Alabasta." "One day, you will sit in my place and guide this Kingdom. In the future, be mindful. Your words could affect our Kingdom''s fate and even lead to conflict. I hope you understand the gravity of this." Vivi looked down, her expression a mixture of realization and worry. "They wouldn''t react that strongly, would they?" she asked quietly. Minister Zuo, observing her innocence, spoke gently. "Princess Vivi, it seems you have yet to learn about Tru''s situation. King Anos has been in power for only two years, yet he has already transformed his entire kingdom." "Half a year ago, the Roya Kingdom even came under Tru''s territory. These accomplishments are not mere shows of strength; they''re symbols of Tru''s newfound influence." "Minister Zuo is right," Cobra added, looking at his daughter with admiration tempered by caution. "Do not underestimate King Anos. He may be young, but he has shown remarkable strength and wisdom. It''s clear that he''s an exceptional leader." Vivi''s curiosity was piqued further. "I wonder if I''ll ever get to visit Tru someday. I''d like to see what makes him so extraordinary," she mused aloud, a slight smile playing on her lips. "Minister Zuo," Cobra turned back to the minister, his tone decisive. "Begin preparations for the partnership with Tru. It''s likely that Tru''s Minister of Commerce, Losta, will visit. Gather pertinent information to ensure a smooth collaboration." "Understood, Your Majesty," Minister Zuo replied, his voice resolute. Alabasta, a vast kingdom situated in a critical location on the Grand Line, was indeed an ideal partner for Tru, though it was certainly not the only option. Many Kingdoms on the Grand Line would be willing to forge alliances with the Kingdom of Tru, especially given the rapid development of its resources and influence. Back in his quarters, Anos did not immediately rest. Instead, he stood by the window, allowing his Observation Haki to expand over Alabasta''s capital. With his keen perception, he could sense the pulse of the city, each heartbeat echoing within his range. However, one presence concerned him above all: Crocodile, the Warlord, had also made his way to Alabasta. From what Anos could discern, it was highly probable that Nico Robin, the archaeologist who could read the ancient Poneglyphs, had aligned herself with him. Anos frowned, his thoughts lingering on the ancient text hidden in the Alabasta palace. Though he held little regard for Crocodile''s ambitions, he was mindful of the knowledge Robin possessed a power that could shift the balance of history itself. Whatever lay within Alabasta''s Poneglyph, it was something that Anos intended to see secured in due time. --- 66. Four Emperors --- Sitting in the room, Anos pondered his next move. His immediate priority was to locate the Poneglyph as quickly as possible. Although he had confirmed the essentials, the specifics of his follow-up plan remained unclear. While he was lost in thought, Suzu suddenly opened the door and entered, holding a thick stack of newspapers. "Your Majesty, here is today''s newspaper," she said. "I believe you''ll find it rather interesting." "What makes you think that...?" Anos began to ask, but his eyes fell on the front page before he could finish. The headline read: "New World''s Power Structure Deciphered ¨C The Era of the Four Emperors Has Officially Begun!" Anos smirked, intrigued. This development was indeed timely. He wondered about the current state of the New World. Curiosity stirred within him. The first thought that crossed his mind was the inevitable clashes between the emperors. But given their immense strength, a full-scale battle might not even be necessary. "Suzu, close the door. I want to take a closer look at this news," Anos said with a grin. "Oh!" Suzu quickly turned, closing the door before taking a seat beside him. She hadn''t read the details yet, but news like this rarely made the front page. Anos examined the photos on the front page. Below each figure was a name and a bounty. The first was Whitebeard, instantly recognizable. He was already considered the undisputed emperor of the seas, his status unshakable. Following him was Big Mom, whose fearsome reputation was unmistakable. Then there were Kaido and Shanks, the other two Yonko ¨C the Four Emperors whose presence defined the New World''s power dynamics. Seeing all four figures featured on the front page highlighted the significance of this development in the pirate world. With the emergence of the Four Emperors, Anos could already envision the excitement brewing across the New World. The tale has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the violation. He wondered how many pirates would soon flood into these treacherous waters. "Your Majesty, who are these four people?" Suzu asked. "Half a year ago, a shipment of ours was plundered. This guy here," Anos said, pointing to Shanks''s image, "was responsible." "So they''re really powerful? But what exactly are the Four Emperors?" Suzu asked again. "The New World is vast, far larger than we could imagine. Amidst its chaos, several groups dominate the territory. Not even the Marines dare intervene. What do you think?" Anos replied. "So powerful? Does that mean our goods are beyond recovery?" Anos sighed. Now wasn''t the time to focus on that. The Red-Haired Pirates had joined the ranks of the Four Emperors, which spoke to their strength. Lost goods were the least of his concerns now. Anos examined the newspaper further, contemplating the surprising shift in the New World. He hadn''t expected such a significant change to arise at this time. But there were more questions. The Yonko''s rise must have been a long time in the making. Why was it only being reported now? It was major news, though it had little immediate impact on them. As things stood, these events were beyond their reach for the time being. What Anos could foresee was the potential introduction of the Shichibukai system. Reflecting on the current year, he noted it was the time of the Reverie. Anos shrugged off these issues; he hadn''t given them much thought before. After all, whether it was the New World or the Grand Line, the Tru Kingdom was still out of reach of these distant powers. "Your Majesty, is something bothering you?" Suzu''s question pulled Anos from his thoughts. "Nothing, just contemplating a few things." He lowered his gaze, scanning the newspaper again. A sly grin appeared as he murmured, "It seems the New World isn''t the only place about to change; the Grand Line might soon follow! For the growth of our Kingdom of Tru, the coming years will be golden." "Why do you say that, Your Majesty?" "In both the New World and the Grand Line, the World Government will be stretched thin, and even the Marines will be too preoccupied to manage global affairs." "We must accelerate our plans and expand our influence. Inform Losta to intensify her efforts and prepare everything. The era that belongs to our Tru Kingdom is about to dawn." Anos suddenly stood up, excitement evident in his eyes. "Understood, Your Majesty. But what should I tell Losta exactly?" Suzu asked. "Just tell her: ''The time has come!''" Anos replied quietly. The New World had been divided among the Four Emperors. Both the Marines and the World Government must be feeling the strain. Much of their military might would be stationed in the New World, and the remaining forces on the Grand Line were likely occupied with other matters. Anos grew more eager with each thought. He yearned to stir things up in the New World himself, though he knew the importance of caution. Where others saw disorder, he saw an opportunity. After a moment of excitement, he composed himself and settled down to read the rest of the paper. While he understood the general shape of things to come, he knew little of how these four pirates had ascended to become emperors. But the paper made one thing clear: these four individuals were formidable indeed. Given Anos''s current strength, he knew that facing these four would be a daunting task. Even if he mustered all his might, he doubted he could take on any one of them alone, let alone all four together. Tru Kingdom couldn''t afford to be at war with world powers if they wanted to develop at a rapid pace. --- 67. Fourth Phase --- After all, combat experience is invaluable and cannot simply be gained overnight. For those who truly live by the sword, each battle brings new insights and instincts that cannot be easily matched. Yet for Anos, this type of mastery remains out of reach, at least for now. He''s not reckless enough to venture into the New World to provoke such powerful figures, the time for that will come, but not today. Settling into his chair, Anos leafed through a thick stack of newspapers, each headline recounting events from the far reaches of the Grand Line. Nearly half an hour passed in silence as he absorbed each detail, flipping from one story to the next. When he finally set the papers down, a sigh escaped, and he leaned back into the sofa, eyes distant as he pondered his next steps. "Everything happening in the New World is still too far beyond me," he thought, feeling the weight of reality settle upon him. He was ambitious, certainly, but even the most determined ruler must know his limits. For now, the New World would remain a distant dream a place to reach for only after he''d secured his position here, within the Four Seas. "To gain a foothold in this world, that is my first step," he murmured, almost as if reminding himself. He couldn''t afford any missteps. The Tru Kingdom was his current domain, his stage, and the foundation upon which he would build his ambitions. Only once it was secure could he look beyond it. Just as he was deep in thought, Suzu entered the room, her brow furrowed slightly as if uncertain about the message she bore. "Your Majesty," she began, her voice respectful, "Losta''s reply has arrived. She asks if we should start preparing for the fourth phase." Suzu''s hesitation was understandable. As someone not typically involved in the Kingdom''s political dealings, she lacked insight into the complexities surrounding such decisions. The "fourth phase," after all, was more than just a plan; it was a strategy of considerable risk and ambition. Anos paused, considering her question. "The fourth phase¡­," he mused, his gaze turning steely. This was the plan to initiate large-scale exploration and extraction of mineral resources in foreign territories. While promising immense rewards, the endeavour would demand substantial manpower and resources. More dauntingly, meddling in other Kingdoms'' affairs could ignite tensions or even spark full-blown wars. He glanced at Suzu, her expression one of slight apprehension as she awaited his answer. She wasn''t accustomed to the weight of these decisions, and she did not need to be. But Anos knew all too well the risks they faced. "Reply to Losta," he finally instructed, his voice firm. "Tell her to proceed, but caution her to start with the entire South Blue region. We cannot afford to move recklessly." "Yes, Your Majesty," Suzu replied, her tone reflecting her respect and understanding. With a small bow, she left to relay his message. For a moment, Anos remained seated, alone in the dimly lit room. He picked up the newspaper once more, his eyes lingering on an image of the Four Emperors those figures of immense power who ruled over vast territories within the New World. These were men and women who wielded influence on a scale he could only dream of, and yet they served as both his inspiration and his ultimate challenge. The tale has been illicitly lifted; should you spot it on Amazon, report the violation. The road to the New World was long, and this was only the beginning. The next day dawned crisp and clear, the early morning sunlight filtering through the windows as Anos readied himself for the day. He was just stepping out of his quarters when he noticed a figure standing by the entrance, his silhouette cast in the soft morning light. "King Cobra?" Anos called, his voice tinged with surprise. Cobra was an early riser, certainly, but to find him waiting at this hour was unexpected. Cobra turned, a warm smile breaking across his face. "Ah, King Anos! I''m here to see you, naturally!" he replied, his voice carrying the lightheartedness that often accompanied their interactions. "Your Majesty, King Cobra has been waiting for nearly half an hour," Suzu chimed in with a small smile. Anos looked between the two, a bit taken aback. While he hadn''t risen especially early, he also hadn''t expected a guest this soon. "King Cobra, why didn''t you send word? I could have met you earlier." Cobra waved the comment aside with a chuckle. "No need for formalities between friends, Anos. But tell me did you read yesterday''s newspaper?" Anos nodded, his expression serious. "Yes, I did. The news was¡­ surprising, to say the least. But given the state of the New World, it''s not entirely unexpected. The events there won''t affect the first half of the Grand Line for some time, let alone the Four Seas where we are now." "True," Cobra conceded, nodding thoughtfully. "But there may still be repercussions, even here. The tides of power are shifting, and those shifts often have wider effects than we first anticipate." He paused, looking at Anos with a gleam of curiosity. "Shall we discuss this over breakfast?" Anos''s curiosity was piqued. "Certainly," he agreed, eager to hear Cobra''s perspective on these developments. Despite Cobra''s somewhat informal approach to ruling, his years as king had made him attuned to the subtleties of political change, and Anos knew he had much to learn from his elder peer. The breakfast spread was modest, with a simple assortment of fresh bread, fruit, and cured meats, creating an atmosphere reminiscent of a family meal rather than a formal gathering. It was a refreshing change, and as they sat down together, the conversation flowed with ease. At the table sat three people: Cobra, Anos, and Vivi, who observed the two men with quiet interest. As they began eating, Cobra looked up and, with a serious expression, addressed Anos. "What do you make of what''s happening in the New World?" Anos pondered his answer, then replied, "What is there to say? These events, no matter how significant, are far removed from our lives here in the Four Seas." "For the Tru Kingdom, the impact will likely be minimal, at least for the foreseeable future. Even if the Marines shift their focus and resources to the New World, the pirates left behind in the Four Seas won''t pose an overwhelming threat." "The real concern, if any, is the possible influx of new pirates driven by ambition or desperation. If unchecked, this could create a surge in piracy across the world." Cobra nodded slowly. "You''re right. But the world itself is at a turning point. Just recently, I received news of an upcoming World Government assembly scheduled for July 1." "One of the topics on the agenda is a proposal to use pirates to control other pirates." Anos raised an eyebrow, intrigued. "Using pirates to police pirates? That sounds¡­ ambitious. Is this part of their strategy for the Shichibukai/Warlords?" "Yes," Cobra replied, his tone serious. "It appears to be. While we lack specific details, the implications are troubling. Granting pirates official status and authority is a risky move one that could easily spiral out of control." Anos leaned back, his expression contemplative. "This idea is absurd on its face. Pirates thrive in chaos; to expect them to bring order is almost laughable." "Instead, the Shichibukai/Warlords system would only empower a few select pirates, giving them status, resources, and legitimacy. Such sanctioned looting could devastate countless Kingdoms and civilians." Cobra looked at him intently, his gaze unwavering. "Exactly. But the decision-makers in the World Government appear committed to this course. With only three months until the assembly, it''s unlikely that they''ll change their minds, no matter the opposition." Anos nodded, understanding the gravity of the situation. "So, if this system is inevitable, we must prepare ourselves. Once the Shichibukai is established, the first to suffer will be those in the initial half of the Grand Line." "The New World, already dominated by the Four Emperors and powerful pirate crews, has little room left for new contenders. These Shichibukai, however, will likely set their sights on the Grand Line''s first half as their proving ground." He spoke with conviction, fully aware of the turbulent times that lay ahead. Cobra sighed, a hint of weariness in his voice. "It''s a dangerous game, one that could destabilize everything we''ve worked for. But until the World Government assembly, all we can do is prepare and hope for the best." The conversation shifted to lighter topics as they finished breakfast, but the underlying tension remained. The world was changing, and both kings knew they had to be ready for whatever lay ahead. For Anos, it was just the beginning, a small step in a journey that would lead him from the Tru Kingdom to the very heart of the Grand Line. When they finally parted ways, Anos felt a renewed sense of determination. He glanced toward the horizon, a slight smile on his lips as he considered the path ahead. One day, he would reach the New World, and when he did, he would be ready to face whatever awaited him there. --- 68. Crocodile & Nico Robin --- "Aren''t they just pirates? What''s so frightening about him? Alabasta has 600,000 troops. Why should we worry about pirates?" Vivi remarked dismissively, glancing at the others. "The strength of a pirate can sometimes be beyond your imagination especially the Four Emperors in the New World." "Any one of them could destroy a Kingdom single-handedly. In the face of such power, sheer numbers mean nothing when the army''s quality is poor," Anos replied without lifting his gaze. Setting down his chopsticks and wiping his mouth with a napkin, he continued, "Take Whitebeard, for instance. With the power of the Tremor-Tremor Fruit, he can reshape landscapes with a single punch." "Hundreds of thousands of soldiers would be like ants before him. As for the Shichibukai, while they may not be as powerful, they possess undeniable strength." "Do you understand just how strong the peak of power in this world can be?" Anos asked, looking at Vivi. She shook her head. Having never left Alabasta, she couldn''t fathom the strength he spoke of. Her curiosity was piqued, and even Cobra, who was quietly listening, set down his chopsticks, picked up a napkin, and regarded Anos thoughtfully. "Currently, only a handful of individuals possess overwhelming power, most through Devil Fruits. Some of these fruits grant the ability to devastate a nation instantly like Whitebeard''s." "He is hailed as the strongest man in the world, and even the Pirate King, Roger, avoided confrontation with him, they were evenly matched at best."Unauthorized duplication: this narrative has been taken without consent. Report sightings. "However, a Kingdom''s first duty is to safeguard its people. Can you confidently say Alabasta does that?" Anos concluded, changing his tone and smiling at them both. "Whitebeard is truly that powerful?" Vivi asked, her eyes wide with wonder. "So he can do anything he wants?" "I haven''t been to the New World myself, so I can''t say for certain," Anos replied. "But if Whitebeard decided to act, he would likely succeed." Anos knew more than he let on, but he saw no need to reveal everything. Meanwhile, elsewhere, Daiki and a companion quietly searched the palace cemetery, scanning each grave carefully. Daiki walked alone among the tombstones, inspecting the ground. Thanks to the Silver Moon Wolf Devil Fruit, his sense of smell and hearing were far beyond human limits, allowing him to detect details below ground simply by tapping his feet. After searching for over half an hour, he noted with relief that few guards patrolled the area, meaning he could work undisturbed. "Captain Daiki, someone''s coming!" one of the guards whispered. Daiki instantly grew serious and quickly concealed himself among the graves. His companions followed, ready to see who would come to the cemetery at such an hour. A moment later, two figures appeared, a man and a woman, moving quietly and carefully through the cemetery. Their attire didn''t match the palace guards, and they looked like outsiders. Daiki, hiding in the shadows, recognized the man it was none other than Crocodile, with an 81-million-Beris bounty. The woman could only be Nico Robin, his accomplice. Daiki and his team observed every move. It was clear that the pair had been here before, judging by their familiarity with the place. Recalling Anos''s words, Daiki''s expression turned icy, and a flicker of menace appeared in his gaze. He doubted they had come to pay respects; if their goal aligned with his, he wouldn''t let them leave alive. Crocodile led Robin to a particular tombstone, looked around, and then pressed a section of it, revealing a hidden passage. As the two descended, Daiki slipped in behind them before the door could close, while his companions remained outside, keeping a watchful eye. "Who''s there...?" Crocodile halted as soon as he entered the underground passage, sensing something nearby. His gaze turned icy and suspicious. "Boss, what''s wrong?" Robin asked, noticing his serious expression. "Did you notice anything strange just now?" Crocodile whispered. "Boss, don''t scare me. This is the royal cemetery of Alabasta''s kings, after all. Now you''re making it sound even spookier," Robin replied with a faint smile. --- 69. Scaring Crocodile --- Daiki didn''t take Crocodile''s words to heart. Anos had briefed him on the importance of keeping certain truths buried, especially in a place like this the underground palace. One of the Alabasta Kingdom''s most secure and secluded locations. Very few knew of its existence, let alone its secrets. Crocodile, perhaps feeling it was only his imagination, dismissed his earlier suspicion and said. "It''s fine. Let''s move on!" He continued forward, though the nagging feeling of being watched lingered at the back of his mind. Daiki had already reached the heart of the underground palace by then. This structure was massive, built as a hidden sanctuary from ages past. The ceiling stretched high above him, supported by pillars adorned with ancient carvings depictions of past rulers, battles, and symbols of forgotten power. The air was thick with age, carrying a heavy silence that seemed to amplify even the smallest sound. In the grand hall, Daiki found exactly what Anos, had sent him to secure. Before him stood an enormous square Poneglyph, towering five meters high, its dark stone surface etched with a mysterious, ancient text. Though dust coated its surface, the carvings themselves were pristine, unaffected by centuries. Each character was carved with precision, standing boldly in defiance of erosion and decay. The Poneglyph held a powerful aura, its presence heavy and compelling, as if calling to those who approached with secrets from a forgotten era. Daiki felt a shiver run through him, knowing the history embedded in this stone and the devastation it could bring if that knowledge fell into the wrong hands. His thoughts were interrupted as footsteps echoed through the hall. He quickly moved to a shadowed corner, concealing himself behind a pillar, and waited to see who had followed him down here. Soon enough, Crocodile entered, leading Nico Robin directly toward the Poneglyph. The intense look in Crocodile''s eyes spoke of his desperation and his obsession with power and knowledge. Daiki observed them, a calculating gleam in his eyes. He knew that both Crocodile and Robin had their motives for seeking this ancient knowledge, but he wanted to understand exactly what they planned to do with it. Crocodile walked up to the Poneglyph, his heart racing as he finally laid eyes on it. His fingers twitched slightly, betraying his excitement. In this moment, Crocodile was not a calm, calculating warlord, he was a man obsessed, standing on the brink of the power he had long desired. "Robin," he demanded, almost breathless, "can you read it? What does it say?" Robin studied the inscriptions carefully, her fingers lightly tracing the ancient text as though she could feel its history beneath her fingertips. She wore a calm smile, but Daiki noted the hint of awe in her eyes. "I can''t translate every word," she replied, her voice steady but soft, "but most of it is clear. It mainly describes the location of an ancient weapon known as the Pluton. However, there are phrases I haven''t fully deciphered. To be thorough, I''ll need more time." Robin''s fascination was evident. She seemed drawn to the Poneglyph, mesmerized by the weight of its history. This narrative has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road. If you see it on Amazon, please report it. As she ran her hands over the stone, Daiki saw that she was savouring the experience of touching a piece of a bygone era. To her, this was more than just a tool of power it was a link to a forgotten past. Hearing her words, Daiki felt a surge of alarm and excitement. The Poneglyph speaks of Pluton¡­ His mind raced as he considered the implications. If Pluton were to be unleashed, the balance of power in the world could shift drastically. The Tru Kingdom would face unimaginable peril if Crocodile, or anyone else, managed to unearth this weapon. His body tensed, his eyes narrowing as he continued to watch them from his hiding place. These two don''t know what they''re playing with, he thought, feeling his fists clench involuntarily. Daiki''s usually calm demeanour began to falter, the gravity of the situation stirring a quiet fury within him. If the existence of Pluton became public knowledge, it would spell disaster for the world, and especially for his homeland, the Tru Kingdom. Suddenly, a sound escaped him a small, barely audible shift of his weight on the stone floor. Crocodile''s senses, honed from years of survival, picked up on the faint noise. He spun around, glaring in Daiki''s direction with a sharp, accusatory look. "Who''s there?" Crocodile barked, his voice echoing through the hall. "If you''re bold enough to hide, come out and face me!" Daiki, realizing he''d been discovered, abandoned his cover. With a cold, red-eyed glare, he stepped out from the shadows, the dim light casting an ominous glow over his features. His gaze was locked onto Crocodile, filled with contempt and an unsettling calm. As Daiki appeared, Crocodile''s face twisted in shock and confusion. He hadn''t expected anyone else to be in such a secluded place, let alone someone radiating such an intense presence. He scrutinized Daiki, his curiosity tinged with unease as he noticed the cold, calculating look in his red eyes. "Who are you, and why are you here?" Crocodile demanded, masking his surprise with an air of authority. Daiki smirked, his voice laced with sarcasm. "Before you question me, shouldn''t you explain your intentions here? I''m surprised that someone like you, Crocodile, would be so careless." His gaze shifted to Robin, acknowledging her briefly. "And you, young lady you can read the Poneglyph? Impressive." Robin met his gaze, but Daiki could see the wariness in her eyes. He knew she wasn''t someone who would be easily intimidated, but even she couldn''t hide her surprise. "You refuse to give your name?" Crocodile sneered, his patience thinning. He clenched his fists, preparing to use his Devil Fruit power. "Then allow me to¡ª" In a heartbeat, Daiki vanished, reappearing instantly before Crocodile and driving a powerful Haki-infused punch into his stomach. The blow sent Crocodile flying back, crashing into the stone wall with a thunderous impact. The force of the collision left a deep, human-shaped indentation in the wall, and Crocodile slumped, momentarily stunned. The sheer strength of Daiki''s attack was evident. Despite Crocodile''s Logia powers, which usually allowed him to evade physical harm, the Haki-infused strike bypassed his sand body and landed solidly. Daiki stood over him, his eyes cold and disdainful. "Did you really think that having a Logia-type Devil Fruit made you invincible in the first half of the Grand Line?" His voice was dripping with contempt. "You''re nothing but an open book. Anyone who knows your abilities could exploit your weaknesses easily." Robin, still watching, was paralyzed with shock. She had seen Haki before, but witnessing it in action against someone like Crocodile left her unnerved. Daiki''s presence radiated authority and danger, a combination that left her feeling vulnerable. Meanwhile, Crocodile groaned, wiping a thin trickle of blood from the corner of his mouth as he forced himself to stand. He''d never expected to encounter someone so powerful here, someone capable of striking through his defences with such ease. In the early parts of the Grand Line, Logia''s powers could indeed make one feel invincible, but Crocodile had underestimated his opponent. In the Tru Kingdom, even the members of the Royal Guards could rival him, and Daiki, as the captain, was leagues above the average guard in strength. "Who¡­ are you?" Crocodile repeated, his voice laced with defiance and frustration. Daiki''s gaze hardened, his tone deadly. "You don''t need to know who I am. Just understand this if you pursue Pluton, you''ll bring destruction to yourself and everyone around you." His words were cold and precise. Daiki had known the devastation Pluton could bring, and he understood why Anos had entrusted him with protecting the Poneglyph. If Crocodile succeeded in his quest, it would end in endangering Tru Kingdom. Crocodile''s pride flared at being lectured, but his instincts screamed at him to escape. Just as Daiki anticipated him to retaliate, Crocodile instead unleashed a sudden Sand Blade, a last-ditch effort to create distance before he turned and sprinted toward the exit. He didn''t hesitate. Abandoning Robin, Crocodile fled, racing up the stairs with all his speed. Above ground, he could attempt to regroup, or so he hoped. There, he might find a chance to escape from the palace and devise a new plan. Daiki made no move to chase him. His priority wasn''t Crocodile it was the Poneglyph and the information it held. Besides, Robin, the only person there capable of interpreting the ancient text, had been left alone, paralyzed by fear. Her expression was one of pure terror, realizing the implications of what she''d witnessed. She had thought herself knowledgeable and experienced, but Daiki''s strength and his ominous warning left her shaken to the core. --- If you want to support me & read advanced chapters ahead on P@treon. p@treon/Iamxeno Thank you for reading! 70. Kidnapping Robin -1 --- Daiki steadied himself, allowing his turbulent emotions to subside, while his eyes returned to their usual colour from the intense blood-red that had earlier consumed them. As he composed himself, a mocking smirk crossed his face. He knew Crocodile had already fled, but there was no satisfaction to be had from chasing him down. For now, his interest was in another matter. His gaze shifted to Robin, who was still seated on the ground, visibly shaken. The young woman seemed frozen in place, her breathing unsteady, as if she were trying to process the surreal chaos that had just transpired. Slowly, Daiki walked toward her, his steps measured and deliberate, each one amplifying the sense of foreboding that seemed to fill the air. When he finally stood before her, Daiki spoke with a chilling calm, "Can you read the Poneglyphs?" His voice, sharp and unyielding, sliced through the silence, jolting Robin from her daze. She blinked, disoriented, her mind scrambling to catch up with the question. Though she could hardly process the gravity of her situation, she managed a slight nod, acknowledging her ability. Still, her heart pounded with apprehension. She wasn''t sure what he intended, but she knew resistance was not an option. "Read what''s inscribed," Daiki commanded, his tone leaving no room for defiance. Robin hesitated, her gaze shifting to the ancient stone, as she struggled to find her voice. "I... I can''t decipher... all of it," she stammered, her words barely audible. Daiki''s eyes narrowed, studying her closely. "Just tell me where it mentions the ancient weapon Pluton. That''s all I need," he replied with an almost eerie calm. Swallowing her fear, Robin took a shaky breath and finally responded, "The South Blue¡­ an island shaped like a wine jar." She wasn''t certain what this man wanted with the information or if he shared Crocodile''s ambitions. All she knew was that revealing the truth was her only hope of survival. Daiki''s expression shifted as he processed her words. Baterilla Island¡­ The name lingered in his mind, and for a moment, a glimmer of recognition crossed his face. He knew the island she spoke of, and the realization sent a chill down his spine. It was a place he hadn''t expected to be drawn to in this way. A heavy silence settled between them, broken only by the soft rustling of the ancient chamber. Then, without warning, Daiki raised his hand and struck her shoulder, rendering her unconscious in an instant. His expression was devoid of sympathy. Survival in this world demanded a level of ruthlessness, and he wasn''t about to make exceptions. Daiki glanced down at the unconscious woman and then pulled a sheet of paper from his coat. With practised ease, he made a rubbing of the Poneglyph''s inscriptions, careful to capture every detail. This information would be vital, and he couldn''t afford to overlook a single line. Once he finished, Daiki examined the stone, considering his next move. Perhaps I should destroy it, he mused, eyeing the towering relic. Summoning his Devil Fruit ability, he struck at the stone with full force, but to his astonishment, his claws left not even a scratch. Enjoying the story? Show your support by reading it on the official site. The Poneglyph''s hardness defied his powers, an indestructible testament to a lost era. After a moment''s contemplation, Daiki dismissed the thought of destruction. There was no point in lingering. With the Poneglyph''s secrets recorded, he turned his attention back to Robin, lying still on the floor. Without hesitation, he scooped her up, her unconscious form limp in his arms. As he ascended from the underground palace, the dim light of the outside world gradually enveloped them. Emerging onto the grassy surface above, Daiki scanned his surroundings. The crocodile was nowhere in sight, and he wasn''t surprised. That man was no fool; he would have fled the moment he realized he was outmatched. Daiki simply gestured to the Royal Guards members nearby, signalling them to withdraw. They obeyed instantly, vanishing from view as swiftly as they had appeared. Meanwhile, outside the palace walls, Crocodile was sprinting through the shadows, clutching his stomach in pain. His mind raced, both seething with anger and brimming with frustration. He had lost Robin, failed to secure the Poneglyph''s secrets, and encountered an opponent far stronger than he''d anticipated. Yet, despite his rage, he understood the need for caution. Vengeance would have to wait. As he reached the outskirts, he cast one last glance back toward the palace, bitterness etched on his face, before slipping away into the desert. --- Inside the palace, Anos and Cobra sat across from each other, their conversation far removed from the weighty matters of the kingdom. Their dialogue had turned light, even playful, a rare moment of levity in times like these. They shared anecdotes, exchanging light-hearted banter that seemed to bridge the gap between them, drawing them closer despite the trials that lay ahead. Daiki, meanwhile, had returned to the Abili, Robin still unconscious in his arms. He carried her to one of the ship''s rooms, unceremoniously depositing her inside. The crew looked on, some with curiosity, others with wariness, but none dared question him. With a curt command, Daiki ordered a restraining collar to be placed around her neck, ensuring her Devil Fruit abilities would remain dormant. Turning to the guards stationed nearby, Daiki spoke with quiet authority. "Stay here. If she asks for food or water, give it to her. But ensure that she doesn''t leave this room not even for a bathroom break. One of you will be with her at all times. If she escapes¡­ you''ll have no place on this ship anymore." The Royal Guards members exchanged glances, understanding the gravity of his words. Each of them was capable of restraining Robin on their own, let alone as a group. Any one of them could overpower her with ease, and with the added reinforcement of fifty other guards and operators aboard the ship, Robin stood no chance. Her Devil Fruit abilities were useless under the effects of the collar, leaving her entirely at their mercy. "Jasmine, you''re responsible for taking care of her needs," Daiki said, his gaze shifting to a young girl standing on the deck. "Me?" Jasmine stammered, momentarily caught off guard. She had been assigned to the ship by Suzu, usually tasked with minor duties. This was unfamiliar territory. "You only need to assist her when these men cannot," Daiki explained, his tone dismissive but firm. "Yes, Master Daiki¡­" Jasmine replied, lowering her gaze respectfully. As Daiki turned and left, Jasmine looked at the guards, who merely shrugged, indicating their lack of interest in the details. Each of them had witnessed enough to know not to question his orders. Inside the dimly lit room, Robin began to stir. Her mind was a haze of confusion and fear as the fog of unconsciousness lifted. She was painfully aware of her situation and the sheer power of the man who had captured her. Daiki¡­ The name, along with his imposing demeanour, echoed in her mind. Despite her desperate circumstances, Robin was no stranger to survival. She''d faced countless threats throughout her life, most of them coming in the form of ruthless pirates and bounty hunters. But this time was different. She wasn''t dealing with mere outlaws, these were elite guards of a kingdom. Their strength and precision were overwhelming, and she realized that escape would be nearly impossible. Robin was around the same age as Anos, perhaps a year older, though her life had left its marks. Her skin was tanned from years of hardship, her features delicate yet hardened by experience. She sat alone in the corner, the weight of captivity bearing down on her as she considered her next move. Her thoughts were interrupted by a soft knock, and the door creaked open to reveal Jasmine, carrying a plate of food. The young girl entered the room, her expression calm yet cautious. Setting the plate down, Jasmine met Robin''s gaze. "What are you thinking? Don''t worry, come over and eat something," she said, her tone unexpectedly gentle. Robin hesitated, studying the girl. There was no malice in Jasmine''s demeanour, just a sense of dutiful obligation. Seizing the opportunity, Robin spoke up, her voice barely above a whisper. "Will you let me go?" Jasmine''s expression softened, though her answer was implicit in her silence. After a moment, she offered a faint, sympathetic smile. "Eat while you can. You''ll need your strength." Robin nodded slowly, understanding the unspoken truth. She approached the plate, her mind racing. This time, the stakes were higher than ever before. And though hope seemed elusive, she knew she would need every ounce of her will to survive. --- If you want to support me & read advanced chapters ahead on P@treon. p@treon/Iamxeno Thank you for reading! 71. Kidnapping Robin -2 --- Robin put on a pitiful expression, her eyes widening with an almost pleading look. Jasmine simply responded with a sweet, calm smile, her voice as smooth as honey. "I''m afraid that''s not possible," she replied gently, her words carrying an unyielding finality. "Besides, I don''t have the authority to release you. Master Daiki has already given specific instructions regarding your capture. But don''t worry they''re all good people here and won''t harm you." Despite the comforting words, Robin couldn''t shake her uncertainty. The recent turn of events had been more disorienting than usual. Her mind, sharp and instinctual, had always guided her out of trouble. But today, things felt different; the steady control she''d relied on was slipping. "Then, could you at least tell me why I''ve been captured?" Robin asked, trying to glean some useful information from Jasmine. Her voice was calm, but the question bore a quiet urgency. She knew her situation was precarious, yet she felt strangely compelled to understand the motives behind her captors'' actions. Jasmine paused for a moment, casting her eyes downward thoughtfully. "I''m not exactly sure," she admitted, her tone more reserved. "But I can tell you this much our King is a kind man. Even if you''re a pirate, he''s not one to hurt others lightly." "You see, even our navigator was once a pirate. And look at him now," she added with a smile, trying to dispel Robin''s worries. "Everything''s fine. No one''s harmed him." The words brought Robin little comfort, yet they intrigued her. She had often heard tales of rulers who despised pirates or sought them out solely for profit. However, the suggestion that a former pirate could work for this kingdom made her wonder about the King''s character. Could he be as benevolent as Jasmine claimed? Her thoughts drifted, and she began to dissect every detail, searching for clues to her captors'' true nature. In the depths of her thoughts, Robin barely registered Jasmine''s voice urging her softly, "Eat something before it gets cold. You must be hungry." The smell of the food on the table teased her senses, reminding her just how long it had been since her last meal. However, her focus lingered on her surroundings, examining every corner, every creak in the walls, as though committing the room''s layout to memory would offer some escape. She had always been an excellent observer, and if she couldn''t act yet, she could at least plan. Her cautious glances didn''t escape Jasmine''s notice, who watched her with a knowing but unbothered look. The restraint collar around her neck was another silent reminder of her vulnerability. She recognized its purpose immediately as an efficient tool for suppressing Devil Fruit powers without the physical paralysis caused by seastone. She could still move and live normally, but her abilities were sealed, reducing her to an ordinary human, at least in the eyes of her captors. Still, her mind was her strongest weapon, and that, they could not restrain. As Jasmine arranged the plates, she offered Robin a final gentle smile before stepping out, leaving her alone once again. The silence that followed was thick, pressing down on her as she huddled into a corner, pulling her knees close to her chest. A subtle shiver ran through her, a reaction more to the unyielding uncertainty than the coolness of the room. Royal Road is the home of this novel. Visit there to read the original and support the author. It was as if the walls themselves bore witness to her isolation. In this small, dimly lit chamber on the ship, Robin knew, perhaps with a fatalistic certainty, that her situation was grave. Her eyes drifted to the door, solid and unyielding, and her mind flooded with memories of countless close calls, battles, and narrow escapes. Yet here, confined to these four walls, she felt her once-formidable defences beginning to falter. She took a steadying breath, but the weight of her situation proved unrelenting. Tears stung at her eyes, escaping despite her attempts to hold them back. For the first time in a long while, she let herself be vulnerable, the weight of her fears pressing down with each silent tear. Outside, Jasmine rejoined the guards posted by the door, casting them a wordless glance that held no trace of sympathy. It was merely duty a job that had to be done, no matter the cost. The morning passed slowly, the ship''s quietness almost haunting in the stillness of the open sea. Meanwhile, elsewhere on the ship, Anos was engaged in a lengthy discussion with Cobra. They spoke casually, mostly about family matters and shared memories, keeping politics and national affairs far from their conversation. Cobra seemed comforted by the casual nature of the discussion, but a subtle tension underlined Anos''s demeanour. Though he feigned relaxation, he knew the importance of his role and the weight of the secrets he harbored. After midday, Anos returned alone to his quarters, seeking a brief moment of solitude. As he settled into his chair, he closed his eyes, sensing Daiki''s presence behind the door even before the knock sounded. A knowing smile flickered across his face. "Come in," he called softly. Daiki, standing just outside, didn''t knock but waited respectfully, sensing that Anos had acknowledged his presence. Once certain, Daiki entered, carrying an air of calm. Upon seeing Anos, he bowed low. "Your Majesty, the item has been located." "Ah, very good," Anos replied, his eyes glinting with interest. "Have you managed to make any rubbings?" Without a word, Daiki produced several sheets of paper, each marked with precise, dense symbols. Due to the historical text''s sheer size, it had been transcribed in segments. Anos reached for the sheets, taking a moment to appreciate the effort and precision involved. These were no ordinary documents; they held the secrets of an ancient world, whispered through time in symbols few could decipher. "System," he called mentally, "scan and translate." Almost instantly, a system prompt echoed in his mind. [ Ding... Scan complete. Translation requires 10 million Beris. Confirm payment? ] Anos felt a surge of irritation. "It''s relatively cheaper than I thought it would be", he muttered before reluctantly consenting. "Fine. Pay." [ Payment successful. Translation complete ] the system replied. With a focused gaze, Anos scanned the translated text, quickly recognizing references to the legendary ancient weapon, Pluton. His fingers traced the delicate lines as the details began to unfold before him: the weapon''s origin, its construction, and, most importantly, its location. As Anos absorbed the weighty information, his fists clenched. The power promised by Pluton was both a thrilling and terrifying notion, something no one should wield without extreme caution. Breaking his concentration, Daiki spoke, his voice low and steady. "Your Majesty, we encountered unexpected resistance. A crocodile known as the ''sand crocodile'' showed up in the underground palace." "We managed to drive him away, but he put up a fierce struggle. Most of his forces escaped, though we managed to capture one woman. From what I understand, she might be able to decipher the text." A dark gleam sparked in Anos''s eyes. "Oh? And where is she now?" he asked, intrigued. "She''s aboard the ship, under careful watch," Daiki answered, his tone respectful yet firm. Anos''s smile returned, one of satisfaction. "Excellent work, Daiki. You''ve done well." His expression shifted slightly as Daiki continued. "Your Majesty, we were unable to destroy the historical text. It''s remarkably durable, more so than anything we''ve encountered. Even with all my strength, I couldn''t leave a scratch on it." Anos only nodded, unfazed by the news. "Naturally. If it could be destroyed, it would have been erased from history eight centuries ago. Its resilience is exactly why it endures." After a pause, Daiki ventured a question, his voice hesitant. "Your Majesty, what do we do with it now?" Anos took a breath, his gaze returning to the rubbings. "This text only one person in the world can interpret it now, and she''s in our custody. We''ll visit her soon. For now, your mission is complete. Take some rest; the rest can wait." Just as he finished speaking, Anos sensed movement outside. "It seems we have company," he said with a calm smile. "Head back. I''ll inspect the ship once this matter is handled." Daiki nodded and left swiftly, disappearing through a side passage as the main door swung open. In strode Vivi, her expression curious and slightly unsettled. "I could have sworn I heard voices in here just now. Where is everyone?" she asked, scanning the room with wide eyes. Anos met her gaze calmly. "Why are you here?" "This is my home, isn''t it? Why wouldn''t I be here?" Vivi replied defiantly, seating herself on the sofa. "Get up," Anos commanded sharply. His usually composed tone carried a note of irritation. Vivi blinked, clearly taken aback. She had unknowingly sat on one of the rubbings he''d left on the cushion. For a brief moment, Anos''s stern demeanour softened, revealing his exasperation at the young girl''s innocent brazenness. However, Vivi was unfazed. She rose, glancing curiously at the rubbings he''d been studying. Before she could reach for them, Anos gripped the papers, and with a fierce look, he squeezed until they crumbled into powder. ---- If you want to support me & read advanced chapters ahead on P@treon. p@treon/Iamxeno Thank you for reading! 72. Anger Rate for more chapters!??? --- Vivi felt a shiver course through her body. She had encountered many situations in her life as a princess of Alabasta, but this time was different. This time, she was truly frightened. "Although this is Alabasta''s palace, and it''s within your rights to claim authority here, remember: the moment I moved in, I was granted temporary command over this space." Anos''s voice cut through the air like a blade, cold and merciless. He took a step forward, his regal presence growing ever more formidable. "With such brazen behaviour, is it possible Alabasta wishes for the Tru Kingdom to declare war against you?" Vivi''s heart pounded against her chest. The chill in his words made her realize that she may have crossed a line she wasn''t even aware of. As the reality of the situation set in, she felt utterly small. The man standing before her was not just a foreign guest; he was Anos, the king of Tru Kingdom, and he was furious. Her hands trembled as she tried to muster a response. Anos''s dark, piercing eyes were fixed on her, his expression radiating something she could only describe as contempt. "Why... why are you being so harsh?" Vivi stammered, tears welling up in her eyes. Her voice, which usually held the confidence of a royal, now wavered with helplessness. But Anos''s demeanour remained as unyielding as ever. There was no sympathy, no flicker of warmth in his gaze. She was used to respect and gentleness from those around her, but this man, this king, had none to spare for her mistakes. Just then, a calm, respectful voice emerged from behind her, breaking the icy silence. "Forgive her, Your Majesty King Tru. Princess Vivi is still young and may not fully understand matters of protocol. I hope you can find it in yourself to pardon her." Vivi turned, surprised, and saw a figure emerge from the shadows. He was a man in his forties or fifties, with greying hair and an air of quiet strength. This was Chaka, the Alabasta army commander and a trusted aide of her father. His expression was calm but resolute, a stark contrast to Vivi''s shaken demeanour. Anos''s cold gaze shifted from Vivi to Chaka, assessing him with the same penetrating stare that had unnerved the princess. Chaka met Anos''s gaze with a steady, respectful posture, his head slightly lowered as a sign of deference. Although he maintained his composure, the tension in the air was palpable, and even Chaka seemed to tread carefully in the presence of Anos. "I, Anos, King of Tru Kingdom, have my principles," he replied, his voice carrying an unmistakable edge. "I hope Alabasta won''t let me down again in the future." Anos''s words were more than a mere reprimand; they were a warning. Chaka understood this and nodded gravely, taking full responsibility for the lapse in the respect shown by the young princess. He did not speak further, recognizing that even one wrong word could potentially sour the diplomatic relations between their two Kingdoms. The silence stretched as Anos maintained his unyielding gaze, not sparing Vivi a final glance. He made it abundantly clear that he wanted no repeats of this incident, not from Vivi, nor anyone else in Alabasta.This story originates from Royal Road. Ensure the author gets the support they deserve by reading it there. As Chaka escorted her out of Anos''s chambers, Vivi felt a surge of emotions fear, embarrassment, and frustration all swirling within her. She had not intended to insult or anger Anos, but somehow, in her naivety, she had done precisely that. The moment they were out of earshot, Chaka turned to her, his expression shifting from respectful diplomacy to fatherly disappointment. "Princess Vivi, your actions today were careless and dangerous," he said, his tone calm but firm. "I hope you''ll remember this lesson. Your words and deeds represent Alabasta, and this time, you could have easily pushed our kingdom to the brink of conflict." The weight of his words settled on her like a lead blanket. She opened her mouth to respond but found she had nothing to say. Chaka''s face softened slightly, though his eyes retained their sharpness as he continued to study her. "Uncle Chaka, why was he so harsh with me?" she asked at last, her voice a whisper as tears threatened to spill over again. "Why would he act like that?" Chaka''s eyes hardened, and he answered with an intensity Vivi rarely saw in him. "Because, Princess, he has the power to do so, and he is a King, not your Childhood friend " The words struck her with a truth she had never fully comprehended. She had grown up in a palace, sheltered from the harsh realities of diplomacy and power struggles. But today, she was beginning to understand the immense responsibilities her title carried and the limitations that came with it. "What kind of power?" she asked, blinking back her tears as curiosity replaced some of her fear. "That is not for you to concern yourself with," Chaka replied. "For now, you should return to your quarters and reflect on your actions. I trust this incident has taught you the importance of humility and respect, especially toward those with authority." Without waiting for her response, Chaka turned and walked down the corridor, disappearing. For a moment, Vivi felt the weight of isolation pressing down on her, realizing that her actions had been careless, born of a sheltered upbringing that had ill-prepared her for the world of politics and international relations. Chaka reappeared outside Cobra''s chamber, his mind racing with thoughts. He paused, knocked on the door, and waited as Cobra''s familiar voice called from inside. "Who is it?" The door opened slightly, and upon seeing Chaka, Cobra''s face broke into a warm smile. "Chaka! What brings you here today?" he asked, genuinely surprised. Chaka entered the room, bowing his head respectfully. "I simply felt like visiting. I happened to stop by and thought I should catch up with you." Cobra gestured for him to sit, his curiosity piqued by the sudden visit. "It''s been some time. Where have you been lately?" "I spent some time in Rainbase, observing the area," Chaka replied. "Upon my return, I heard that King Anos of Tru had come to visit Alabasta. Out of curiosity, I decided to see him, but in doing so, I happened upon Princess Vivi." At this, Cobra''s expression darkened. He could sense the weight behind Chaka''s words. "Did you notice anything wrong?" Chaka nodded, his expression serious. "Yes, I did. It seems Princess Vivi needs a lesson in humility. If I hadn''t arrived, things could have escalated." Hearing that his daughter was involved, Cobra''s face fell, and he leaned forward, concern clouding his features. He knew his daughter well; she was kind and spirited, but at times, her youthful enthusiasm led her astray. "What happened?" he asked, his voice tinged with worry. Chaka took a deep breath, gathering his thoughts. "She entered King Anos''s chambers without permission, speaking without consideration. This angered him deeply. He made it clear that should this happen again, Tru Kingdom would consider it a declaration of war." Cobra listened in silence, absorbing the implications. He knew that the political landscape was fraught with delicate balance. One wrong move and even the strongest alliances could crumble. Chaka continued, his voice steady. "As Alabasta''s army commander, I must advise we handle these interactions with the utmost care. King Anos is not a man to take lightly. His reaction today was a clear display of his strength and position. Our princess must learn to navigate these matters more cautiously." The king nodded slowly, his face etched with worry and contemplation. He understood all too well the importance of diplomatic tact and restraint. Alabasta''s stability depended on it, and he couldn''t afford to have his daughter jeopardize their peace. Cobra sighed, his gaze softening as he thought of Vivi. "I''ll speak with her. She has much to learn, and as her father, I must guide her through this journey." Chaka''s expression softened too. Despite his stern words, he held genuine affection for the young princess. "She''s young, but she''ll learn. Today was a valuable lesson." Cobra nodded, appreciating Chaka''s wisdom. "Thank you for stepping in. Your presence likely prevented a far greater issue." After a moment''s silence, Cobra changed the topic, eager to reconnect with his old friend. For now, he set aside his concerns about Vivi, knowing he would address them later. But in the back of his mind, the events of the day lingered, a reminder of the complexities that lay ahead for both Alabasta and its princess. --- If you want to support me & read advanced chapters ahead on P@treon. p@treon/Iamxeno Thank you for reading! 73. Nothing Now you can access Illustrations on my Patreon made by me with chapters. Rate for more chapters!??? --- After all, Vivi is the princess of Alabasta. No matter what, it wasn''t her place to interfere in matters that weren''t hers to handle. She was beloved by the people, yes, but duty and rank often placed constraints even on the most earnest of intentions. No one expected her to change the tides of fate herself. Cobra sighed, his brow furrowing as he reflected. He sat in his office, the midday sunlight casting long shadows across the room, giving him a weary look. He took a deep breath, letting it out slowly, then spoke in a tone that held both fondness and frustration. "I suppose I haven''t disciplined her enough over the years. Vivi''s spirit, her independent thinking I always thought it a strength." "But now... I wonder if I''ve let her become too bold. I can''t imagine how else she developed such a strong will." Chaka, seated across from him, gave a small, knowing smile. He had known Vivi since she was a child. In her, he saw the same spark, the same relentless determination that had defined Cobra''s youth. But his smile quickly faded as his thoughts turned serious. His gaze fixed intently on Cobra, and his voice took on a weighty tone. "what do you think of King Anos?" Chaka said. Cobra blinked, somewhat taken aback. "King Anos?" he repeated, collecting his thoughts. "Well... he''s brilliant, I''ll give him that. And incredibly capable. He managed to lift his Kingdom out of poverty and into prosperity in what, two or three years?" "A remarkable achievement. He''s an exceptional young leader there''s no doubt about it." He paused, noticing Chaka''s penetrating gaze. "Why do you ask?" Chaka''s expression grew more serious, almost as if he were probing for a truth Cobra might not yet see. "I''m not asking about his governance," he replied, his tone sharpening. "I''m asking about the man himself. Outside of his role as king, what do you think of him?" Cobra tilted his head, intrigued but slightly cautious. "Outside of his role? We haven''t had much personal interaction beyond official matters," he admitted. "But from what I can tell, he''s a remarkable conversationalist. Polite and respectful. He manages his duties with a maturity and poise rare for his age. Even I wasn''t so refined when I was his age, and I''d already assumed the throne." Chaka gave a slight nod but seemed unsatisfied. "So it seems," he said, his words laced with a hint of something almost ominous. "But it''s not about age or refinement. You''ve underestimated him, Don''t just say you couldn''t match his level at his age. Even now, I doubt you could reach it." "What... what do you mean?" Cobra asked, now fully focused, a thread of confusion winding through his voice. He''d rarely seen Chaka this intense. With a sigh, Chaka leaned forward, lowering his voice as if to share a closely guarded secret. "I''m not talking about his governance or his manners. What I''m saying is... this king has hidden strengths, strengths that go beyond what we can comprehend." "He may even be stronger than I am, and possibly... his entire Kingdom might be powerful beyond what we could ever imagine." Chaka let his words sink in, and the silence that followed was thick with unspoken fears. The author''s tale has been misappropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon. He continued, voice soft yet firm, "I happened to witness something unusual. King Anos was supposed to meet with his royal guard''s captain. While I didn''t expect anything strange, what I saw changed my view entirely." Cobra leaned in, captivated. Chaka''s tone hinted at something far beyond mere curiosity. "What did you see?" "There was a presence in that room," Chaka began speaking, his voice barely above a whisper. "The captain of the Royal guards was there, but his movements... he was so skilled that he could have left without anyone noticing. And that''s just the guard." "King Anos himself... his power was something else entirely. I could feel it, just faintly, but it was enough to tell me he''s far stronger than he lets on." Cobra''s mind raced, struggling to grasp the implications of Chaka''s words. His old friend, who had fought alongside him and seen countless battles, was rarely shaken. For him to speak of another''s strength in such reverent tones it was unsettling. "What do you think he''s hiding?" Cobra asked, his voice barely audible, his gaze distant. "That''s something you''ll have to find out for yourself," Chaka replied, leaning back in his chair with a heavy sigh. "I can''t go digging into matters like these without drawing attention. But whatever it is, be careful. There''s more to this king than meets the eye." A pause lingered between them, filled only by the distant sounds of the palace. Finally, Cobra broke the silence, his voice tinged with resignation. "Chaka, even if Anos has his agenda, we still need this alliance. What he''s offering could change the future of Alabasta." Cobra''s tone carried a weight of responsibility. Even if he harboured doubts, his duty as king demanded that he place the well-being of Alabasta above personal concerns. Whatever Anos''s motives, the benefits of this partnership were undeniable. For days now, the princes and ministers of Alabasta had reviewed the potential impacts, and each one had come to the same conclusion: cooperating with the Kingdom of Tru was in Alabasta''s best interests. Chaka, though uninvolved in the intricacies of these negotiations, was no stranger to the contents. He had a good sense of the stakes involved. "King Anos is a complex individual," Chaka said, choosing his words carefully. "But regardless of his power, there''s no denying his character. Compared to many rulers I''ve encountered, he has shown considerable restraint. Were it any other king dealing with Vivi''s... forwardness, they might have responded far less graciously." He gave Cobra a knowing look, his voice softening with an almost fatherly warmth. "Anos is doing his best to keep things civil." Cobra managed a faint smile. "Perhaps you''re right. I''ll go and apologize in person later. I can''t afford to let a misunderstanding grow between us." With a sigh, Cobra shifted his gaze back to Chaka. "So, you''ll be staying in Alabasta a while longer?" Chaka''s eyes darkened, his expression turning thoughtful. "For now. With the New World divided among the Four Emperors, the first half of the Grand Line may not be as calm as it seems. It''s wise to prepare." "Yes, we''ve anticipated this," Cobra replied, though his voice was weary. "But even knowing it''s coming... what can we do?" Chaka gazed at his old friend, sympathy softening his features. He knew how heavy the weight of leadership could be. --- Meanwhile, as Cobra and Chaka conversed in the palace, Anos had already moved far away. Utilizing his unique ability, he''d departed without anyone''s notice, vanishing in an instant with a subtle shift of the air. Although he''d left, his departure hadn''t been broadcast. Two members of the Royal Guard remained stationed outside the chamber, preventing anyone from entering. Anos preferred to keep his movements discreet, ensuring no one could easily trace his actions or intentions. Down at the Alubarna port, the Tempest floated peacefully, its dark silhouette cutting an imposing figure against the water. Unlike the busier sections of the port, only a few ships were docked alongside the Tempest. It was a modest port, big enough to hold only five or six ships, with limited activity that suited Anos''s purposes well. As Anos stepped aboard, the crew was in various states of relaxation and activity, attending to their duties or taking a moment''s respite. No one expected their king to return so suddenly, and his presence on the gangway instantly commanded attention. "Your Majesty," the guards stationed near the entrance greeted him with deep bows. "Daiki hasn''t returned yet, has he?" Anos asked, his voice carrying a hint of amusement. One of the guards, looking slightly surprised, answered, "Not yet, Your Majesty. Captain Daiki & others are still away. Would you like us to contact them?" "No need," Anos replied, his gaze scanning the ship. "Where''s the woman he brought back?" The guard hesitated briefly before answering, "The woman Captain Daiki brought back is in the room ahead." The Tempest was a two-story ship, and with the guard''s guidance, Anos swiftly found his way to the designated quarters. Upon reaching the room, he paused momentarily, sensing the energy within. A small smile crossed his face, and he continued forward with calm confidence. He hadn''t expected to be caught up in this situation, but perhaps it would bring an unexpected turn to the alliance with Alabasta. And with that, he knocked gently before stepping inside, already sensing the complexities that lay ahead. --- If you want to support me & read advanced chapters ahead on P@treon. p@treon/Iamxeno Thank you for reading! 74. Meeting Nico Robin Thank you, " Cle ", for becoming an Elite member on P@treon; shoutout out to you. Enjoy! --- Looking toward the dimly lit room, Anos''s gaze softened. A slight smile tugged at the corner of his mouth as he walked towards the door, making no effort to engage with the guard who stood silently at his side. Anos, a figure as enigmatic as he was powerful, had grown accustomed to the reverent silence of those around him. Power commanded quiet respect. The two guards exchanged glances as he passed, their expressions relaxed yet alert. They held their positions, their eyes trained outward, surveying every shadow and subtle movement within the hall. In the Tru Kingdom, vigilance was a necessity; the walls here, both literal and metaphorical, held secrets, and each guard understood the weight of the lives they protected. Arriving at the door, Anos paused momentarily as if gathering his thoughts before raising his hand to knock with a courteous firmness. He waited, feeling the steady passage of time, allowing a respectful silence to fall. When no response came, he gently pushed the door open. Inside, the room was stark, nearly bare. Only the essentials adorned the space a narrow bed tucked into a corner and a small table near the door. An untouched lunch box sat upon it, indicating that the meal had gone ignored for hours. Shadows cast by the lone candle flickered on the walls, emphasizing the isolation within these walls. In one corner, Robin crouched, folded tightly into herself as if hoping that the confined space might offer her some semblance of safety. She remained motionless, her gaze unfocused yet vigilant, searching for something she''d long since lost. The room, devoid of luxury, felt as empty as the desolate memories she harboured. Silence became her armour. Anos entered the room, his movements quiet and measured, the soft tread of his boots against the floor barely audible. His presence seemed to fill the space, though he allowed the door to remain ajar, leaving her a symbolic avenue of escape a gesture meant to ease her, if only slightly. Without preamble, he began. "Nico Robin," he said, his voice calm and even, "born in Ohara, in the West Blue. Known widely as the ''Devil''s Child.'' You were wanted by the Marines from the age of eight and now carry a bounty of 83 million Beris. You are the last known person who can read the true historical texts." At his words, Robin''s composure wavered. She had believed herself an enigma here, a ghost with a past unknown to these foreign halls. Yet this man, this king, seemed to have dissected her life and laid bare every chapter she sought to keep hidden. Her heart pounded with a growing dread, the words heavy in the air. "Don''t wonder how I know this," he continued, his tone unchanging. "I am not here because of your bounty, nor am I here for any personal vendetta. Your presence is a consequence of the knowledge you possess." As he spoke, he moved closer, stopping at a respectful distance before easing himself into a chair beside her. He studied her in silence, his eyes unwavering, seeming to calculate every reaction, every flicker of emotion that crossed her face. She felt the weight of his gaze, a scrutiny that extended beyond the surface. Robin''s breath hitched, and though her instincts screamed at her to remain composed, she could not suppress the fear that trembled in her voice. If you stumble upon this narrative on Amazon, it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it. "What do you want from me?" she asked, her voice barely above a whisper. Anos''s expression remained inscrutable. "You must have deciphered the Poneglyph in Alabasta''s royal tomb, yes?" Robin''s heart stilled. The word "Poneglyph" resonated like an echo from her past. She swallowed, feeling her body tense involuntarily. "Is that¡­why you''ve captured me?" "Perhaps," Anos replied, his voice soft yet unmistakably direct. "But my purpose is singular I cannot allow what''s recorded to spread. I''ve known the location of the ancient weapon, Pluton, for years. But ask yourself, what would I gain from that knowledge? Why do you think I came to Alabasta?" She searched his gaze, feeling the weight of his words, the depth of an intent that transcended mere curiosity. Her silence encouraged him to continue. "My initial intent was to destroy the Poneglyph," he admitted, a hint of frustration in his tone. "But it''s far tougher than I anticipated, far more resilient than any material I''ve encountered." "So, if I cannot destroy the Poneglyph, perhaps eliminating the one who understands it will suffice. Don''t you agree, Robin?" The calm deliberation with which he spoke struck Robin like a blow. His gaze bore into her, as though he was reading the very thoughts she tried to conceal. Unlike pirates who sought her for fame or fortune, Anos''s intentions seemed much darker, his focus solely on silencing the knowledge she held within. At this grim realization, a sob escaped her a sound she could no longer contain. It was not the bounty on her head or the price others placed on her life that haunted her; it was this understanding that her very knowledge was deemed dangerous, that her existence threatened powers greater than herself. "Who are you?" she finally managed her voice a mixture of fear and anger. She assessed his attire, noting its regal bearing, and pieced together fragments of what she''d overheard from the guards. Only one other person, a woman named Jasmine, had entered this room in recent memory, and even then, the intervals were sparse. "I am the king of the Tru Kingdom," Anos replied, his tone softening slightly. "And the place referenced in the Poneglyph lies within my Reach" For a moment, Robin saw a glimmer of something almost gentle in his expression, a brief warmth that dissolved as quickly as it appeared. Yet even in his kindness, there was an underlying threat, a power that permeated his every word. "Why?" she demanded, anger mingling with despair. "I''ve done nothing wrong, and yet people hunt me down, seeking my life. What crime did I commit to deserve this fate?" Anos''s expression grew serious, a faint shadow crossing his face. "Sometimes, it''s not about wrongdoing, Robin. Sometimes, merely knowing certain things makes you a threat." "Ohara''s fate should make that clear. Many in this world do not wish for ancient truths to resurface. Yet you persist, even knowing the risk, in studying the Poneglyphs." "Tell me, what do you believe this knowledge will accomplish? Uncovering the Void Century''s secrets will not alter the present." He paused, studying her reaction, allowing his words to sink in. "In this world, power defines everything. Only when you''re strong, so strong that you fear no one, can you act with true freedom." "Until then, weakness is a burden. The Tru Kingdom understands this. And it''s why I am determined to erase any trace of the Poneglyph." Anos''s voice grew colder, a deep resolve within his words. "If word of Pluton''s existence were to reach the Marines, the World Government, or even pirates, can you imagine the devastation that would befall the world?" "Ohara served as a lesson, I will not allow my kingdom to suffer a similar fate, Even if it meant sacrificing others in Exchange" As his words filled the room, Robin felt a chill settle in her bones. The guards outside, oblivious to the storm brewing within, stood at attention. Anos had created a sound barrier, ensuring his conversation with Robin would remain theirs alone. "How do you know about Ohara?" Robin asked, her voice trembling with confusion. "The Marines should have erased¡ª" "Erased all knowledge?" Anos interrupted, a wry smile curving his lips. "You give them too much credit. Information is a weapon, Robin, and I hold it well. I know more than you could imagine¡­even about how you escaped that island." He leaned forward, his gaze darkening. "The events of Ohara were not isolated. That same year, my kingdom endured its tragedy on Baterilla Island. For the sake of a pirate king''s legacy, over 2,500 pregnant women were slain." "Innocents who paid with their lives because we lacked the strength to protect them because we held no standing in a world that disregards weakness & my father died in a massive guilt for not being able to protect his Kingdom" Robin''s mind struggled to process the enormity of his words. She had always believed her past, her suffering, to be singular in its brutality. Yet here was this king, speaking of similar horrors, of darkness that mirrored her own, of cruelty that resonated deeply within her. "What you know is limited," he continued, his voice unwavering. "There is a deeper darkness, a corruption within this world that runs far deeper than any ancient text." Anos''s words held a strange, cold comfort a reassurance that her isolation, her persecution, was not unique, that others, too, had faced the violence of power unchecked. But even as he spoke, she sensed the anger within him, a barely contained fury that simmered beneath his calm exterior. Robin felt a strange resolve hardening within her. She might have been deemed dangerous for her knowledge, but she would not let fear consume her. Not now. She lifted her head, meeting his gaze with newfound defiance. ---- If you want to support me & read advanced chapters ahead on P@treon. p@treon/Iamxeno Thank you for reading! 75. Conquers Haki Thank you, " Ninjamuraikatana ", for becoming a Premium member on P@treon; shoutout out to you. Enjoy! --- Anos clenched his fists quietly, his thoughts whirling. The weight of responsibility, the depth of loss, and the powerlessness he''d felt for so long boiled under his calm exterior. He had no outlet for these emotions, no visible enemy to fight. The anguish lay heavy in his heart, churning into a dark resolve. It was a pain that simmered in silence, only visible in the tightness of his knuckles and the subtle tension in his gaze. He held it close, like an ember he could not let die. Robin sat across from him, her eyes following his clenched fists, and a faint frown crossed her face. She knew that In many ways, Anos''s pain mirrored her own. She had seen her home of Ohara destroyed, the ancient scholars and precious knowledge reduced to ashes, just as Baterilla Island had been. Those memories were etched deeply into her mind, an endless reminder of what she had lost. Here, in the quiet of the room, she found a kindred spirit, someone else scarred by the dark side of this world. Curiously, Robin noticed that the fear she had initially felt toward Anos was fading. She had been wary, expecting hostility from a ruler. Yet, looking at the man before her, she felt an unusual calm. Perhaps it was his quiet strength, or perhaps it was that he, too, bore a burden few could understand. She moved slowly to the edge of the bed, her voice soft but filled with the weight of her past. "Your kingdom may have suffered, but it still stands," she murmured, watching his expression carefully. "You''ve rebuilt it, made it stronger than before. But Ohara¡­ it''s gone, erased from history. Who remembers it now?" Robin''s voice trembled slightly. The grief of her lost homeland washed over her, pulling her back into memories of the blazing inferno that had swallowed Ohara, leaving only charred ruins and a painful silence. Anos''s gaze sharpened, his resolve hardening further. His answer came with an intensity that echoed through the room. "This is why I pursue power. When I gain enough strength, I will rewrite this world''s laws. No longer will the wealthy dominate the weak, nor the powerful oppress the helpless." "I won''t let the strong destroy lives for their gain & If you think that I am some type of hero then no, I am just fulfilling a promise" As he spoke, a wave of Conqueror''s Haki rippled through the air, palpable and fierce. His presence grew heavier, filling the room like a storm on the verge of breaking. Outside, the ship shuddered slightly. Crew members stumbled, disoriented by the sudden, oppressive force. Some fell unconscious, overcome by the sheer weight of Anos''s will. Only his loyal guards managed to hold their ground, fighting to stay upright. The force of his Haki was so intense that it seemed to warp the space around him, reaching beyond the confines of the room. This content has been misappropriated from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere. On the deck, Daiki had just returned from his patrol when he felt the powerful aura from a distance. It struck him like a thunderclap, stopping him in his tracks. His eyes widened as he realized the magnitude of what was happening. "So this is¡­ His Majesty''s Conqueror''s Haki," Daiki whispered, caught between awe and disbelief. Though he had known his king was powerful, this display was beyond anything he had imagined. Regaining his composure, Daiki turned to the guards around him and barked orders. "Seal off the area! No one should approach!" The guards didn''t need further instruction. Understanding the gravity of the situation, they immediately spread out, securing not only the ship but the surrounding perimeter. Daiki remained outside the room, standing watch, his thoughts a whirlwind. If word of this got out, it would undoubtedly reach the ears of the World Government and the Marines. They would never allow such a formidable force to rise uncontested. As subordinates, it was their duty to shield him, to guard him at all costs even with their lives. Inside the room, Robin and Anos shared a moment of unspoken understanding. In each other''s eyes, they saw a fierce anger, a longing for justice against the world that had wronged them. The air between them was thick with the weight of their unspoken pain. "Would you kill me?" Robin''s voice broke the silence, filled with a vulnerability she rarely allowed herself to show. It was a question that had lingered in her mind, gnawing at her. Anos''s hatred for the Marines was clear, and she wondered if, despite their shared pain, he might one day see her as an enemy. Anos met her gaze with steady determination. "Don''t wander aimlessly anymore. My guards will escort you to the Tru Kingdom. Stay there, live well, and don''t think about leaving. For the safety of my people, I will do what''s necessary yes, even kill you." Closing his eyes, Anos released a heavy sigh, his voice soft but unwavering. He didn''t want to harm her, but he would not jeopardize the security of his kingdom, not for anyone. Robin exhaled slowly, the tension easing from her shoulders. For the first time in a long while, she felt a sense of safety, however fragile. The fear that had haunted her, the shadow of a constantly uncertain future, faded slightly. Though she''d never seen the Tru Kingdom, she''d read of its transformation under Anos''s rule. Perhaps there, she might finally find a place to belong. After a moment of silence, she gave a small, tentative smile. "Alright." "When you arrive in the Tru Kingdom, continue developing your Devil Fruit abilities," Anos suggested. "Learn to wield your power without restraint." "You''re more than capable. You mastered Ohara''s knowledge by eight. If you ever grow restless, you could even contribute to the kingdom''s education system." Robin nodded, understanding the unspoken trust he was placing in her. She had been a prodigy in Ohara, a place revered as a sanctuary of knowledge within the world of pirates. "Aren''t you worried a pirate like me might corrupt your people?" she asked a hint of mischief in her tone. Anos''s gaze was steady. "It''s not pirates who threaten this world. Rest well, and don''t overthink. While you''re here, avoid drawing attention." There was a pause before Robin spoke again. "May I ask you something?" "Go ahead." "I want to return to Ohara. Is that possible?" "Why?" "There are secrets left buried there. I want to retrieve them. I became a pirate to search for knowledge, but maybe that path isn''t necessary anymore." Anos''s expression softened, though he gave no clear answer. Robin sensed his hesitation but felt an odd sense of ease. Her wariness had dissolved in his presence, replaced by a strange, tentative trust. She wasn''t sure if it was his calm demeanour or the sense of shared purpose that had led her to this feeling. "We''ll see," he replied. "Right now, we''re headed to Mariejois for the World Government''s annual meeting. After that, I have my plans. Once things settle, I''ll see about sending someone with you to Ohara." Anos understood the gravity of her request. Though Ohara had been destroyed over a decade ago, it was still a place of interest for both Marines and pirates. They searched it constantly, scouring the island for any remnants of its hidden knowledge. Despite years of exploration, they had yet to uncover anything of value. He believed in Robin''s words. If Ohara''s legacy lived on, it was through its knowledge and wisdom. The Tru Kingdom needed more than just strength it needed a cultural revival. His kingdom had suffered years of deprivation, but he saw the dawn of a brighter future ahead. Knowledge, he understood, was the foundation on which true power could be built. As Robin pondered this, a sense of hope bloomed within her. Ohara''s memory, though faint, was not entirely lost. In the Tru Kingdom, perhaps she could preserve it, keep its spirit alive. For Anos, the path forward was long, but the possibility of a brighter dawn, a world rebuilt on justice and understanding, made every sacrifice worth it. --- If you want to support me & read advanced chapters ahead on P@treon. p@treon/Iamxeno Thank you for reading! 76. Planning to Visit Ohara --- The entire ship was on alert outside, but inside, the atmosphere had relaxed considerably. At least Robin wasn''t as cautious and fearful as she had been initially, though she still felt a hint of unease. The crew members outside exchanged glances, their expressions a mixture of vigilance and curiosity, but they knew better than to intrude on the moment unfolding within. Robin sat on the edge of the bed, facing Anos. Despite his status as a king and the fact that they were about the same age, she had developed a good impression of him during their brief time together. His demeanour was calm and composed, radiating a sense of authority that was both intimidating and comforting. "What kind of place is the Tru Kingdom?" Robin asked suddenly, a hint of anxiety creeping into her voice. The thought of venturing into another Kingdom stirred old fears within her fears of being discovered, of being hunted once more. Anos smiled a warm expression that eased her apprehension somewhat. "The Tru Kingdom is ordinary. No matter how I describe it, it won''t capture the full reality." "Besides, the kingdom is undergoing constant changes. I can''t say exactly how far it''s progressed. You''ll be able to see it with your own eyes when you arrive." "Aren''t you worried I might draw the attention of the World Government or the Marine if I go there?" Robin questioned, her brow furrowing slightly. Her past experiences had taught her that danger lurked around every corner, and she wasn''t keen on putting anyone else at risk. Anos responded nonchalantly, "What harm is there in being discovered? Your Knowledge will do more harm if I let you Roam free in the world" His casual tone surprised her. It was as if he was inviting the danger rather than shying away from it. "I''m an ominous person. It seems like I''m always found, no matter where I go¡­" Robin''s voice faltered. She began to share her past, letting down her guard around Anos. This was perhaps the most relaxed and secure she had felt in the ten years since she began her life on the run. As she spoke, the memories flooded back to dark times when trust was a luxury she couldn''t afford. The memories of betrayal, loss, and constant flight echoed in her mind, each one more painful than the last. Robin''s current appearance lacked any sign of refinement; her clothes and hairstyle were plain and weathered from her travels. Her skin had tanned during her time in Alabasta, leaving her looking a bit worn and weary. Anos listened patiently, his eyes never leaving hers as she recounted her past. Each painful memory resurfaced, and Robin shed tears, her sorrow stemming from a mix of unwillingness to live in the past and the helpless, lonely feeling of being perpetually on the run. Her heart ached as she recalled the friends she had lost, the people she had been forced to leave behind. "I thought I could find a home¡­ but every time I got close, something would tear it away from me," she confessed, her voice breaking. Watching her, Anos remained expressionless, offering her the space to speak without interruption. After Robin spoke for nearly ten minutes, he finally interjected gently, "The past is behind you. There''s no need to cling to it. The future is a new chapter." His words were a balm to her soul, providing a flicker of hope amidst the shadows of her memories.Unauthorized use of content: if you find this story on Amazon, report the violation. With that, Anos waved his hand, and the space barrier around the room vanished instantly, a soft shimmer fading into the air. Despite the barrier''s removal, Robin, still seated on the bed, sensed no unusual change. However, as it dissipated, Daiki, who stood outside the door, sensed everything happening inside at once. He was aware of Anos''s methods, so he remained calm, merely glancing briefly in their direction before resuming his post, hands clasped behind his back, the picture of loyalty and vigilance. "Daiki, come in!" Anos called, his voice breaking the silence. "Your Majesty¡­" Daiki addressed him respectfully from the doorway, his demeanour professional and composed. "Find five members of the Royal Guards and arrange for Robin to be escorted to the Tru Kingdom," Anos instructed his tone firm yet considerate. Daiki hesitated momentarily, glancing at Robin, who was still seated on the bed, looking at him with a mix of curiosity and uncertainty. He quickly recovered and replied, "Yes, Your Majesty." "The other thing is to make preparations for our departure from Alabasta tomorrow morning," Anos added, his eyes narrowing slightly as he contemplated the logistics involved. "Should we notify others from the kingdom to dock in Alabasta?" Daiki asked, his brow furrowed in thought. "No, not yet. The Tru Kingdom is not in a hurry. We''ll wait until we return from Mariejois to make further arrangements," Anos decided, his expression thoughtful. "Understood, Your Majesty. I''ll see to it immediately," Daiki said, nodding respectfully before exiting the room. They had initially planned to stay in Alabasta a while longer, but with matters now resolved, there was no need. The climate was uncomfortably hot, and Anos found it challenging to settle in this place. It was a stark contrast to the cool, serene atmosphere of Tru Kingdom. "Stay here and don''t wander around. Wait for the Royal Guards to escort you to Tru," Anos instructed Robin, his gaze steady. "I understand," she replied, her voice barely above a whisper. With her reply, Anos vanished from his seat in an instant, as though he had never been there. Robin was briefly stunned, her heart racing at the suddenness of his disappearance. She turned to look at Daiki, who had escorted her. He seemed unsurprised as if this was routine for him. "Is he a Devil Fruit user?" she wondered aloud, her curiosity piqued. "Don''t ask what you shouldn''t. I don''t know what His Majesty told you, but while the Tru Kingdom is open, certain boundaries cannot be crossed. Betrayal is something we despise," Daiki warned her coldly, his gaze unwavering. Robin nodded, understanding the stern tone. She simply wanted a place to call home, without any ulterior motives. "I just want a place to live. I have no other intentions," she stated firmly, hoping to convey her sincerity. "I hope that''s true. Stay here until your escort arrives to take you to the Tru Kingdom," Daiki said, turning to leave with a neutral expression. Robin didn''t mind his attitude. Compared to the treatment she''d endured in the past, Daiki''s approach was almost welcoming. Reflecting on her hardships, she allowed herself a rare, gentle smile, a flicker of warmth breaking through her long-held defences. Meanwhile, Anos returned to the Alabasta Palace, his mind racing with thoughts of the future. He collected himself as he settled onto the sofa, picking up the newspaper that had been lying on the coffee table. He gazed at the photo of the Four Emperors printed on it, their faces a reminder of the power struggles and dangers that lay ahead. With a sigh, he placed the newspaper back on the table and began to tap it rhythmically with his fingers, lost in thought. He had much to consider before their journey to Mariejois. The stakes were higher than ever, and he needed to be prepared for whatever awaited them. Lost in contemplation, he was soon interrupted by a gentle knock on the door. "What is it?" he called from inside, trying to mask his preoccupation with authority. The guard outside didn''t open the door but reported, "Your Majesty, King Cobra of Alabasta has sent for you." "I see. I''ll be there shortly," Anos replied, rising to adjust his attire. He smoothed down his coat, ensuring he presented himself well before meeting with Cobra. Even if Cobra hadn''t summoned him, Anos intended to meet him before leaving. Business came first, and he was not one to ignore the importance of alliances. He needed to confirm whether Cobra had an Eternal Pose leading to Mariejois; without it, there was no telling how long it might take to reach that place. He could purchase it from the system, but it was too expensive for him to buy. As he made his way through the palace corridors, Anos took note of the various guards stationed at their posts, their expressions serious and focused. It was clear that Alabasta was still on high alert, especially after the recent upheavals. The air was thick with tension, a reminder that danger was never far away. ---- If you want to support me & read advanced chapters ahead on P@treon. p@treon/Iamxeno Thank you for reading! 77. Apology --- Anos walked in measured steps, observing the intricate details of Alabasta''s grand palace. He appreciated the artistry of the structure the tall, imposing walls etched with ancient carvings, the statues of warriors guarding each corner, and the ornate tapestries detailing Alabasta''s rich history. Though Anos had only been here for two days, he was already familiar with the palace''s layout. This was his second visit, but as a ruler representing the Tru Kingdom, it was only proper to observe the customs and protocols of his host. Every word and action he took here reflected his kingdom. Even knowing the way to the hall, it was essential for Alabasta''s servants to escort him, a gesture both respectful and practical in such formal matters. As they approached the grand doors leading to the hall, the servant paused and turned to him. "Your Majesty, King Tru, His Majesty is waiting inside. Please proceed." Without a second glance at the servant, Anos straightened his posture and stepped forward, his footsteps echoing softly against the polished marble floors. The grand hall of Alabasta was as magnificent as ever, with towering columns reaching up to a vaulted ceiling decorated in intricate mosaics. Rays of sunlight filtered through the stained glass windows, casting colourful patterns on the floor. Inside, Cobra noticed Anos immediately and rose from his throne with a warm, welcoming smile. Beside him was Chaka, the commander of the Alabasta army, standing tall and disciplined. Princess Vivi, young and full of spirit, sat on the throne beside her father, her demeanour calm but her gaze piercing, observing Anos with a mix of curiosity and defiance. "King Anos, you''re here. I trust we didn''t interrupt your rest?" Cobra greeted him, his voice warm but laced with a hint of formality. Anos offered a courteous smile and inclined his head. "Not at all, King Cobra. I was considering seeking you out myself." Cobra''s eyes lit with curiosity. "Oh? And what might that be about?" Anos allowed a brief pause, then replied, "Just a minor matter, nothing pressing. But I must admit, I''m intrigued as to why you called me here so suddenly." Cobra chuckled slightly, a bit of unease crossing his face. "Please, King Anos, make yourself comfortable. There is something I wish to address." Gesturing toward the ornate seating area, Cobra took his seat, and Anos followed suit, taking a chair opposite Chaka. The room fell into a respectful silence as each individual settled. Cobra''s usual easy smile faded, replaced by a look of discomfort, as if wrestling with the words he was about to speak. Facing Anos, he took a deep breath before bowing his head slightly.Stolen story; please report. "King Anos," he began, "I owe you an apology on behalf of my daughter. Princess Vivi was somewhat... impulsive earlier today, and I hope you can overlook her youthful recklessness." Cobra''s words were sincere, and Anos was taken aback by the humility of Alabasta''s ruler. Quickly standing up, he extended a hand, urging Cobra to rise. "Please, King Cobra, don''t bow to me. There is no need for such formality. I assure you, I''ve already forgotten about the incident." Out of the corner of his eye, Anos noticed Vivi stiffen, her lips pressing together in a tight line. It was clear the young princess had yet to forgive or forget their earlier interaction. Instead, she looked away defiantly, her gaze fixed somewhere distant, avoiding Anos''s presence altogether. Cobra continued, determined to ensure the matter was settled. "King Anos, truly, there is no excuse for her behaviour, and I give you my word it won''t happen again." Anos offered a smile, hiding his true thoughts. If he were honest, he''d have advised Cobra to instil some discipline in his daughter. However, he knew better than to voice such an opinion directly. "You''re too kind, King Cobra. Princess Vivi has spirit and character qualities that will serve her well in the future. She only needs guidance to hone her approach." Cobra''s tense expression softened, a hint of relief visible. "Thank you, King Anos. I will ensure she receives the guidance she needs. The reason I invited you here today was to apologize in person and to reaffirm our goodwill toward the Tru Kingdom." Anos inclined his head, appreciating the gesture. "Rest assured, King Cobra. I don''t hold grudges over trivial matters." Chaka, who had been quietly observing the exchange, now stepped forward with a warm smile. "King Anos, I assure you, Alabasta values our alliance with Tru. The incident today was a minor misunderstanding, and we hope it won''t affect the friendship and cooperation between our nations." Anos nodded, regarding Chaka thoughtfully. There was something curious about the man. Despite having entered the hall with heightened senses, Anos hadn''t detected Chaka''s presence until the moment he spoke. This man, it seemed, possessed a formidable presence concealed behind a humble facade. "I don''t believe we''ve been introduced formally," Anos remarked, turning to Cobra. "I''ve met him briefly, but I don''t believe I caught his name." "Ah, forgive me!" Cobra said, visibly flustered. "This is Chaka, the commander of Alabasta''s army and one of our Kingdom''s most esteemed warriors." "The commander, is it?" Anos replied, a note of admiration in his voice. "I regret not recognizing you earlier, Commander Chaka. I hope I didn''t offend." Chaka shook his head, his expression mild. "Not at all, King Anos. It was my oversight for not introducing myself properly. I hope there are no hard feelings." Anos chuckled softly. "None whatsoever." Cobra clapped his hands together, eager to shift the tone of their conversation. "Please, let''s all be seated. Now that we''ve cleared the air, we can discuss other matters. King Anos, you mentioned earlier that you wished to speak with me. What can I assist you with?" Once everyone was seated comfortably, Anos took a moment, collecting his thoughts. "King Cobra, I came to inform you of my impending departure. I plan to set out tomorrow morning. The responsibilities of the Tru Kingdom require my attention, and the sooner I reach Mariejois, the sooner I can resolve the necessary matters and return to oversee our affairs." Cobra looked momentarily taken aback. "You plan to leave so soon, King Anos? I was hoping we might have the chance to journey to Mariejois together in a month or two, in time for the Reverie." Anos gave a thoughtful nod. "Were circumstances different, I''d welcome the opportunity. But with no one to preside over Tru in my absence, I must return swiftly. Perhaps, after stabilizing matters at home, I''ll have the liberty to attend the Reverie." Cobra exhaled, his expression one of understanding mixed with disappointment. "A ruler''s duty to his kingdom must come first. I respect your decision, King Anos. When matters in Tru Kingdom are resolved, I hope you''ll consider visiting Alabasta again under more relaxed circumstances." Anos smiled, inclining his head. "It would be my honour. Tru Kingdom has always held Alabasta in high regard. Our alliance means a great deal, and I look forward to deepening our cooperation." --- If you want to support me & read advanced chapters ahead on P@treon. p@treon/Iamxeno Thank you for reading! 78. Celestial Dragons --- Anos was already refusing in words and actions. It had been some time, and he had no interest in attending any World Government meeting. This matter did not affect him at all. After reading the newspapers over the past few days, Anos had already guessed the content of the upcoming World Government meeting. It was just a bit of talk, nothing worthy of further study or discussion. Cobra knew that he probably wouldn''t be able to stop Anos from going to Mariejois this time. Besides, he didn''t even think about stopping him. "King Anos, do you not plan to attend the World Government Conference? At least you could meet the kings of all the Kingdoms under the World Government, which would facilitate the economic and trade development you often talk about," Cobra said. "There''s no need for that now. The development of the Tru Kingdom is progressing relatively quickly. We don''t need to communicate with them for the time being." "Perhaps we can have a proper discussion with them by the time of the next World Government Conference in four years," Anos replied. "Well, although I don''t know what you think, let''s have a grand banquet tonight. It can be seen as a practice for you. We look forward to the friendly cooperation between our two countries," Cobra said with a smile. "Regarding this, when I return to my Kingdom, I will naturally arrange this matter as soon as possible to promote economic and trade exchanges between our two nations," Anos said, returning the smile. Cobra seemed to have realized that Anos was about to leave. He didn''t hold back too much. He simply took a box from a table beside the throne, stood up, and walked over to Anos, handing it to him. "This is the Eternal Pose leading to Mariejois. After a good banquet tonight, I don''t know when we will meet again," Cobra said with some reluctance. "As long as there is fate, we will meet sooner or later. There''s no need to worry about this. In the future, exchanges between our two nations will become closer, and we will have many opportunities to meet," Anos said, taking the box with a smile. He wouldn''t refuse such a valuable item, a Compass, to Mariejois. This was something that couldn''t be bought on the market, and it was quite precious. Although it was true that reaching Mariejois could be done by simply following the Grand Line with any pointer, this Eternal pose would save them an unknown amount of distance. If they followed the usual route, it might take over half a year to get there, but now it could be done in at least half a month. --- The Next Day. Setting off early in the morning, Cobra got up early and personally escorted Anos to the palace gates. As they departed, many people came out to watch in Alubarna, the royal city. Most people already knew that the Kingdom of Tru would cooperate with their own Kingdom in the future, though they didn''t know the specifics of that cooperation. However, some of them, who often read newspapers, knew about the Kingdom in the South Blue. "King Cobra, just send me off here. I''ll walk the rest of the way alone!" Anos said, standing at the entrance of the palace, smiling at Cobra and the others who had come to see him off. Today, Anos looked completely different, dressed in a sharp white suit and bow tie. If they didn''t know he was a king, many would think he was just a well-mannered gentleman. Many followed Cobra to see him off, including several princes and ministers, which also demonstrated Cobra''s emphasis on the cooperation between their two nations. "King Anos, I won''t say too much. Have a safe journey. If you pass through Alabasta when you come back, we can have a good chat then," Cobra said, smiling. "Don''t worry, King Cobra. I will do that," Anos replied, saluting Cobra in a very gentlemanly manner before turning and walking toward the white carriage that had been prepared. Having spent four days in this Kingdom, Anos felt it had been a fruitful experience. This communication with Alabasta would undoubtedly ensure a steady flow of resources for the Kingdom of Tru in the future, though that was not very evident at the moment.Stolen from Royal Road, this story should be reported if encountered on Amazon. "Daiki, has Robin been sent off?" Anos asked while lying on a rocking chair on the deck of the sailing ship. "She''s already gone, but I don''t understand why you wanted to keep that woman. Even her existence should be a danger to our Kingdom!" Daiki replied, a bit confused. "That woman will be of great use in the future, and her knowledge is invaluable. She became Oharan''s archaeologist when she was just eight years old, an absolute genius. For our Kingdom, we won''t only be developing forces; we will also need knowledge. Do you understand?" Anos said calmly. "Ohara? Isn''t that the once-famous place of learning in the West Blue?" Suzu chimed in curiously. "How do you know?" Anos asked, surprised, as someone of Suzu''s age probably shouldn''t know much about it. "I lived in the West Blue for several years, so I''ve heard of it, but I never visited. Later, I heard that a natural disaster occurred there, and no one survived!" Suzu continued, a regretful look crossing her face. Anos and the other two exchanged glances, taken aback by Suzu''s naive view. "It was indeed that place, but Ohara didn''t encounter a natural disaster; it was a man-made disaster. The Marine''s Buster Call turned the entire island into a graveyard, and Nico Robin was the only one who survived," Anos explained. "Devil Child!!" Suzu exclaimed in surprise. "Is it necessary to be so surprised by that name?" Daiki said, looking at Suzu helplessly. "What do you know? When I was eight, she was already wanted with a bounty of 83 million Beris. She is the youngest person in history to have such a high bounty!" Suzu said, brimming with excitement. "So what? The bounty amount doesn''t tell the whole story," Daiki remarked. "Daiki, don''t deny it. The bounty amount can determine a lot in many cases. Nico Robin''s knowledge, especially her expertise in historical texts, is enough to make the World Government and the Marine nervous," Anos added. "Your Majesty, if I understand correctly, the woman I brought last time was Nico Robin, the ''Devil Child''?" Daiki realized, having never worried about a pirate before, but after hearing it from his king, he now felt that she was quite extraordinary. Suzu looked at Anos expectantly, both of them filled with curiosity. "You are correct; the woman is Robin. The ''Devil Child'' has had a bounty of 83 million Beris since she was eight years old. But so what? I never care about those things. Instead of worrying about that, we should think about how to deal with the Celestial Dragons once we reach Mariejois," Anos said, reclining on the chair, swaying leisurely. "Celestial Dragons are indeed a significant issue," Suzu agreed, resting her chin on her hand. They all clearly understand the power and influence of Mariejois. After all, who in this world hasn''t heard of the Celestial Dragons? "Suzu, have you sent all the information to those Celestial Dragons who asked us to investigate?" Anos asked calmly. "There''s no specific information on the others yet. So far, we only have intel on a woman named Verbona, who was previously investigated. The rest haven''t been looked into yet. Besides, isn''t she our main focus this time?" Suzu replied. "How useful can she be? Forget it; let''s wait until Mariejois provides us with further details," Anos said dismissively. He wasn''t concerned about whether the goods he brought on the ship would be handed over or not. They were just tokens of formality. In Mariejois, who knows which Celestial Dragon has the final say? There are almost a thousand of them, and Anos has no intention of bowing to so many people. It''s a place that only serves to damage one''s pride. But sooner or later, he''d have to face this if he went to Mariejois. The Celestial Dragons reside there, and dealing with them means he may need to meet with countless individuals if he wants to avoid conflict. With the Eternal Pose in hand, the journey to Mariejois was much quicker than expected, with no worries about getting off course. The Eternal Pose would guide them in a straight line, taking the rest out of their control. "Your Majesty, may I go to the Sabaody Archipelago nearby? I heard it''s the most prosperous place in the entire Grand Line!" Suzu asked expectantly. "Nothing worth seeing there. If you encounter a Celestial Dragon, you''d have to kneel wherever you go. It''s incredibly frustrating," Anos replied, yawning. "Then let Daiki accompany me. You''ll be heading to Mariejois, but we won''t be allowed in. Instead of waiting outside, it''d be better to visit Sabaody," Suzu suggested. "Suzu, if you want to go, go ahead, but don''t drag me into it!" Daiki, seated beside her, immediately objected. He had no interest in visiting Sabaody with her; Daiki wasn''t that curious. "Why are you so defensive? Coming with me is a privilege. Aren''t you curious about what Sabaody is like? It''s said to be the most prosperous place," Suzu insisted. "It may be prosperous, but it''s also one of the most chaotic places in the Grand Line. Sabaody is home to some of the darkest and dirtiest parts of the world," Anos explained. "If we had more time, I''d like to visit Fish-Man Island and see what the beautiful mermaids look like." Anos reclined in his chair, closing his eyes, imagining the allure of Fish-Man Island likely a thought every man would entertain. "Your Majesty, where exactly is Fish-Man Island? I''ve heard of it, but no one who goes there seems to return, let alone speak about it," Daiki asked. "Fish-Man Island is below Sabaody. You coat the ship at Sabaody, then dive 10,000 meters underwater. With a skilled navigator, reaching Fish-Man Island under the sea is nearly assured," Anos explained. "For pirates, Fish-Man Island is the gateway to the New World." "Fish-Man Island! I''m excited to see it, too," Suzu added. "So, if Fish-Man Island exists 10,000 meters underwater, does that mean the legendary Sky Island, high above the sky, also exists?" Daiki asked suddenly. "Exactly. After we''re done in Mariejois, Sky Island will be a must-visit on our way back. No matter what, our next key destination will be Sky Island," Anos said, his eyes snapping open as he sat up, looking at Daiki with a determined expression. "Your Majesty, what exactly do you mean?" Daiki asked. "Daiki, you mentioned the Tru Kingdom lacks space for a proper training base. For the Tru Kingdom''s security, I''ve considered the safest, most secluded place: Sky Island. After our return, we''ll go there to explore," Anos replied, lying back down in his chair. It was a bit early to discuss this, but Anos had already planned it out in his mind. On their journey, with not much else to do, Anos decided to brief Daiki about this idea, ensuring he''d be prepared. The gentle sea breeze brushed against his face as they sat on the deck, enjoying the endless horizon and the blazing sun overhead. Besides the occasional seagull, there wasn''t much scenery on the open sea. Chatting on the deck became the best way to pass the time. --- If you want to support me & read advanced chapters ahead on P@treon. p@treon/Iamxeno Thank you for reading! 79. Attack on Kaido --- Daiki sat alone, lost in thought. He had limited knowledge about these things places like Fish-Man Island and Sky Island were mere legends to him. Suzu sat nearby, unsure of His Majesty, King Anos''s intentions, but she ventured to ask, "Your Majesty, if we go to Sky Island as you suggested, wouldn''t we be making ourselves an easy target?" "Sky Island has always been considered a legend, mostly because no one has reached it in ages. Currently, there are only two ways to get there. The first is through an area below Sky Island called Jaya Island, where an upward current can carry us directly." "The second way is to enter Sky Island through Hot Air Balloons or Modified Ships. However, that route is unpredictable; it''s hard to know when or if we''d ever reach it." "So, the most convenient and quickest way is to head straight to Jaya and use the island''s position above the sea current," Anos explained, closing his eyes as he spoke. After some contemplation, Daiki asked with curiosity, "Your Majesty, how do you know so much about the Grand Line and even the New World?" "That''s right, Your Majesty!" Suzu echoed, her voice tinged with doubt. Now it was Anos''s turn to feel a bit awkward. Like his two companions, he had rarely left the Tru Kingdom, and whenever he did, one or both of them would accompany him. Anos leaned back, closed his eyes, and smiled slightly, attempting to brush off the awkwardness. After a moment, he added, "If I wish, I can traverse the entire sea with my eyes closed. So understanding it isn''t too difficult." Suzu still looked puzzled, but Daiki sensed something more. He knew His Majesty possessed a Devil Fruit with spatial abilities, which made such knowledge and reach seem plausible. "Do you understand His Majesty''s words?" Suzu asked Daiki, her expression blank. "Yes, I understand. Maybe someday you will, too," Daiki replied, though he chose not to elaborate, admiration gleaming in his eyes. Anos knew he could only explain it this way. He couldn''t very well reveal that he possessed an ability akin to the Eye of God, granting him insights into the entire pirate world, could he? His explanation was just believable enough to satisfy their questions. Devil Fruits with space-based abilities hold nearly limitless potential, but Anos had yet to reach the highest stage of development for his powers. The stronger Devil Fruits become, the greater the challenge to awaken their powers, often beyond ordinary imagination. In the world of pirates, even Logia-type Devil Fruits can achieve a second stage of awakening. However, despite the long history of his particular Devil Fruit, no one seemed to have attained its awakened power. The Paramecia-type space Devil Fruit ranks at the top of its class. But for Anos, fully awakening its power remained a distant goal. "Daiki, I feel like you two are hiding something from me," Suzu leaned in close, almost touching his face as she whispered. "What are you thinking? Why would we hide anything from you? Don''t overthink it just rest," Daiki said, smoothly changing the subject. "You two, stop whispering and tell me how far are we from our destination now?" Anos asked, feeling a bit bored. "Hard to say. No small islands or landmarks nearby. It was estimated to be a two-week journey, and it''s only been four or five days. We''re likely about halfway there," Suzu replied. "There''s one ahead¡­" Anos began, preparing to mention a small island nearby, but he suddenly sensed something dangerous there far beyond what they could have anticipated. He sprang to his feet, gripping the railing and gazing ahead, though the small island wasn''t yet visible.Ensure your favorite authors get the support they deserve. Read this novel on Royal Road. "Suzu, tell Barlow to adjust course to the right and avoid the area ahead," Anos commanded abruptly. Suzu hesitated for a moment but quickly rose to follow his orders. Daiki also rushed to the railing, trying to sense ahead using Observation Haki, but his ability wasn''t as refined as Anos''s, and he couldn''t detect anything unusual about the island. "Your Majesty, what''s going on?" Daiki asked, concern evident in his tone. "Kaido¡­" Anos muttered, surprised, "What''s he doing in the first half of the Grand Line?" "Kaido?" Daiki echoed. Noting the tension in Anos''s expression, Daiki immediately became alert. "We''ve been noticed, Daiki. Tell Barlow to steer west. Don''t wait for me," Anos ordered, frowning. "Your Majesty, are you sure? If you''re going alone¡­" "If I decide to leave, no one in this world can stop me. Just follow the order. Your main task now is to ensure the safety of this ship." Anos interrupted, a slight smile playing on his lips. Anos''s confidence wasn''t unfounded. With his Devil Fruit''s spatial powers, as long as he didn''t expose himself, no one could capture him. "Understood, Your Majesty. I''ll ensure everyone''s safety onboard," Daiki replied earnestly. "I hope it''s as you said!" Anos smiled. Just as he finished speaking, a massive stone hurtled toward Abby. The rock was nearly as large as the entire ship. Standing on the bow with unwavering calm, Anos waved his hand casually. A blue light shield appeared in front of him, intercepting the stone. Upon impact, the stone vanished only to reappear about 500 meters away from the ship, crashing heavily into the sea. The rest of the crew, bewildered, could only follow Anos''s orders, steering the Tempest off the course toward Mariejois as directed. After handling the boulder, Anos vanished from the ship and reappeared on the island, confirming his suspicions. Before him stood an immense figure, as he had anticipated. Towering over him was a burly, black-haired man with long, dragon-like horns, a beard reminiscent of a dragon''s, and a dragon-scale tattoo on his left arm. Bare-chested, Kaido exuded an overwhelming sense of power. "Uuhahahaha... I never expected an insect to show up here!" Kaido''s gruff voice rumbled as his intimidating aura pressed down on Anos. "Mr. Kaido, I mean no disrespect. We were just passing by" Anos offered a polite bow, enduring Kaido''s oppressive presence. The island was not especially large, and Kaido stood alone, suggesting he was either waiting for something or protecting a hidden secret. Anos couldn''t fathom encountering one of the Four Emperors of the New World here. As he observed Kaido, he noticed fresh scars and clear evidence of recent, severe injuries. "Boy, having the guts to stand before me, Kaido, earns you my respect, but it doesn''t grant you a reprieve from death. I didn''t plan on anyone discovering this place, so... the only way to keep it hidden is to ensure you never leave." Kaido''s intense gaze bore into Anos as he delivered this chilling proclamation, his voice filled with menace. With a powerful punch, Kaido obliterated the hill where Anos had been standing. Though Anos managed to dodge swiftly, he realized Kaido''s immense strength was nothing to take lightly. Facing such a formidable foe, even Anos found himself troubled. While he possessed spatial abilities and had honed his combat skills, Kaido''s might far exceeded his own. Seizing the opportunity, Anos used his spatial ability to teleport and launch a punch at Kaido. Kaido effortlessly blocked, and their Haki clashed Kaido''s emanating black and Anos''s a distinctive blue. The impact generated a shockwave that rippled across the island, sending seawater surging outward. Kaido''s eyes briefly flashed with surprise, recognizing Anos''s rare Haki strength. "Boy, I didn''t expect you to be this strong. I''m surprised to see someone like you in the first half of the Grand Line!" Kaido''s sinister smile widened, making his expression even more menacing. "Mr. Kaido, I apologize if I intruded. I didn''t realize you were here. To make amends, we''re willing to offer a thousand barrels of fine wine." Anos continued respectfully, fists clenched yet maintaining composure. He needed to buy time to allow the Abby''s crew to escape to safety, knowing he couldn''t match Kaido''s strength. After exchanging blows, Kaido suddenly erupted into a violent cough, showing signs of serious injury. It was unclear who had managed to harm him so gravely. Seeing Kaido''s condition, Anos remained cautious, well aware of the Four Emperor''s legendary strength. Even with Kaido weakened, Anos doubted he could deal significant damage. "Boy, do you think I believe your flattery? But I like your nerve, but I didn''t expect a kid like you would even know me," Kaido sneered, eyes sharp as he studied Anos, his intent clear. As Kaido spoke, a figure suddenly lunged at him from the side. Multiple powerful blows struck Kaido''s back, gouging into the ground with immense force. Kaido didn''t flinch, standing as though the attacks hadn''t affected him at all. "Daiki, fall back!" Anos shouted anxiously. The attacker, now visible, was a wolf-human hybrid with a blue mane, blood-red eyes, and long, sharp claws. He emanated a faint blue aura and stood ready to face Kaido. "Mr. Kaido, I apologize. This is my subordinate, Daiki. Please excuse his rashness." Anos hadn''t expected Daiki''s arrival. "Uuhahahaha, the Zoan-type Mythical Wolf Fruit ¨C Silver Moon Wolf model! Impressive. I didn''t expect someone of your calibre to be here on the Grand Line. You two, join me from now on!" Kaido said, grinning at the duo. Anos took a deep breath as Daiki joined him. "Why are you here? I told you to get them to safety," he said in a cold tone. "Barlow has already evacuated them. I was concerned about Your Majesty''s safety, so I came here," Daiki replied, eyeing Kaido with vigilance. --- If you want to support me & read advanced chapters ahead on P@treon. p@treon/Iamxeno Thank you for reading! 80. Kaidos Invitation --- Kaido''s immense height cast a daunting shadow, his presence radiating a weight that settled like a thick fog. Even injured, Kaido''s form was imposing, as if the power he wielded was too vast to be contained within one body. His every movement seemed to cause a ripple in the air, suffocating those around him under an invisible but tangible force. Anos couldn''t help but feel a tightness in his chest as if the oxygen had thinned under the weight of Kaido''s aura. For a moment, he considered retreat. Facing someone with Kaido''s sheer power and resilience was a gamble he wasn''t entirely willing to take. But this was not the time for fear. Beside him, Daiki had taken a cautious step back, his face set in grim determination, though his eyes betrayed a flicker of hesitation. Sensing his companion''s unease, Anos leaned in and whispered, "Let''s act according to the situation." Daiki nodded, his fingers twitching instinctively toward his weapon. The question of why he''d come so suddenly, without warning, lingered in Anos''s mind, but he set it aside for now. They could settle those matters later assuming they made it out alive. Anos straightened, adopting an air of composure as he turned back to Kaido. With a respectful yet guarded tone, he said, "Mr. Kaido, we don''t have much fondness for the New World. We''d rather stay in our quiet corner." Anos''s gaze remained steady, refusing to waver under Kaido''s cold eyes. "But we''re honoured by your invitation." For a moment, Kaido seemed to consider Anos''s words. The silence was thick, each second stretching as if the entire world held its breath. Finally, Kaido''s lips twisted into a humourless smile, his voice chilling as he replied, "So, you''re refusing my invitation?" Anos felt the shift in Kaido''s energy as his aura flared, sharp and suffocating. He held his ground, but Daiki flinched, instinctively pressing back as though to escape the weight of Kaido''s presence. Anos, however, remained composed, keenly observing Kaido''s body. He noted the fresh scars that marred the Yonko''s skin, rapidly healing even as he watched, an awe-inspiring display of vitality and resilience. It was clear if they lingered much longer, there would be no escape. Anos met Kaido''s gaze, voice calm and resolute. "If we are declining, may I ask what Mr. Kaido intends to do?" There was a subtle shift in Anos''s energy as he spoke, a subtle yet undeniable sense of authority that clashed with Kaido''s oppressive aura. The Conqueror''s Haki of both men collided, creating an invisible storm between them. Waves of raw power lashed out, the island itself seeming to tremble under the strain. The air crackled with energy, and a distant rumbling sound echoed as the seawater at the island''s edge was forced back by the sheer force of their clashing wills. Kaido''s laughter was a low rumble, dangerous and mocking. "What if I say... join or die?" Anos''s eyes narrowed, his stance shifting subtly as he readied himself. "If we weren''t cornered like this, then we would gladly risk our lives to test your strength Kaido" He felt the adrenaline coursing through him, sharpening his senses as he held his ground, refusing to yield even a step. Stolen from its original source, this story is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings. Kaido''s eyes glinted with a mixture of amusement and irritation, and Anos sensed that he was testing them, gauging how far they were willing to go. In response, the demon sword Muramasa appeared beside Anos, hovering as if drawn by the rising tension. A dark red aura seeped from the blade, pulsing in sync with Anos''s heartbeat. It was as though Muramasa sensed the danger surrounding its master, and its presence only intensified the tension. Anos glanced at the blade, feeling a strange comfort in its presence. He understood why Kaido was injured like this he must have broken free from Impel Down recently, barely escaping with his life. It was an incredible feat, yet Anos couldn''t imagine who could have inflicted such damage upon the Yonko. Kaido''s taunt pulled him back to the present. "You dare challenge me?" Kaido sneered, his right hand rising, massive and calloused, ready to strike. "Then I''ll indulge you just this once!" "HRAAAAH!!!!!!" Despite his size, Kaido moved with an eerie speed, the ground shaking beneath his heavy footsteps. His massive figure was imposing enough, but the true terror lay in the force behind each movement. Thankfully, Kaido was unarmed though, perhaps, the lack of a weapon made him even more dangerous, as he would be relying purely on his brutal strength. Anos noted that, even as a Devil Fruit user, Kaido hadn''t shifted into his true form. He must have calculated the risks, knowing that transforming would risk drawing the Marines'' attention. While Kaido couldn''t be killed easily, the endless pursuit that would follow wasn''t something even he would want to face. "Daiki, retreat to the air..." Anos shouted, his voice cutting through the mounting tension. The younger man nodded, leaping upward with swift agility, creating a safe distance as Anos prepared to confront Kaido directly. Grasping Muramasa''s hilt, Anos focused, feeling the aura within him shift. His eyes began to glow with a blood-red intensity, his energy taking on a more lethal form. "Flying Sword Style - Nine-Headed Dragon Flash..." It was his strongest technique, and he knew he could hold nothing back against an opponent like Kaido. The thought crossed his mind he wasn''t entirely sure if this would be enough to bring Kaido down, but it was a gamble he had to take. Anos moved so quickly that his form seemed frozen in place, a mere afterimage lingering as he unleashed his attack. The Nine-Headed Dragon Flash was a technique of blinding speed, but its true power lay in the buildup of energy, which exploded in a sequence of devastating strikes. Kaido, sensing the danger, activated his Armament Haki, his skin darkening as he braced himself. He also relied on Observation Haki to anticipate Anos''s movements, though even that was barely enough to keep up with the barrage. "One cut..." A flash of silver and a diagonal slash appeared on Kaido''s waist. Though protected by his Armament Haki, the blade cut deep enough to draw blood, a feat rarely achieved against Kaido''s impervious skin. It may have been a mere scratch to someone of Kaido''s size, but it was enough to stir anger in the Yonko''s eyes. "Two cuts... nine cuts..." The island trembled as Anos''s relentless assault continued, each cut filling Kaido''s frame with new wounds. For the Yonko, it wasn''t a matter of survival; the attacks weren''t enough to kill him. But the sheer force and precision were enough to make Kaido reconsider. Anos, however, hadn''t been aiming solely at Kaido. His true target was the ground beneath them. As the final cut struck, the island began to tremble, fissures splitting the earth as the very land itself started to crumble. As the island collapsed, Kaido braced himself, glaring at Anos with a mixture of fury and grudging respect. He hadn''t expected to meet someone willing to take him on so boldly, nor did he foresee the cunning behind Anos''s tactics. From above, Daiki''s voice rang out. "Your Majesty...!" "Boy, I''ll remember you!" Kaido''s voice echoed, promising retribution even as the ground gave way beneath him. With one last surge of energy, Anos propelled himself into the air, narrowly escaping the collapsing island. He joined Daiki, who watched with a mixture of awe and concern. "Are you alright, Your Majesty?" Daiki asked, worry evident in his voice. Anos exhaled, his expression softening slightly. "I''m fine. But that... was close." He gazed back at the island, now reduced to rubble. His gamble had paid off, though barely. They had escaped Kaido''s wrath this time, but he knew that if his attacks had landed directly on Kaido, the damage might have been more significant. In the end, though, they had survived and that was enough. Daiki, attempting to lighten the mood, grinned. "So that''s Yonko Kaido of the New World? Looks like he''ll be sinking to the bottom of the sea!" Anos shot him a weary glance. "Don''t be naive. Kaido''s Devil Fruit ability places him among the strongest. He''s a Mythical Zoan, the Azure Dragon of the Fish-Fish Fruit. Even submerged, he has a way to survive." The reality weighed on them. Kaido would recover and rise again, and next time, he would likely come with reinforcements. Anos sighed, realizing that their confrontation with Kaido was only the beginning. They had made it out alive, but this encounter would undoubtedly ripple through the New World. "Daiki, stay vigilant. From now on, we''re marked by Kaido himself. It won''t be long before he seeks us out again," Anos warned, the tension in his voice unmistakable. They shared a final glance at the wreckage below. ---- If you want to support me & read advanced chapters ahead on P@treon. p@treon/Iamxeno Thank you for reading! 81. Arrival in Mary Geoise --- "Your Majesty, when we return home, I swear I''ll double my efforts in training. From now on, I''ll protect you with my life," Daiki said with fierce determination, his voice steady but his eyes blazing with resolve. Anos looked at his loyal subject with a gentle but firm expression. "Don''t burden yourself, Daiki. You''ve done enough. For now, let''s focus on getting back. The sooner, the better. I''m not even sure if the other party saw our flag. If they did... well, it''s not something we can easily erase." Daiki nodded solemnly, but Anos could see the tension still hanging over him. It wasn''t every day they encountered such a terrifying presence, one that had left them both feeling like ants in the shadow of a mountain. And for Daiki, a man who prided himself on his strength, it had been a humbling experience. They both stood silently in the air, using Geppo to stay aloft. Below them, the ocean, which had been a churning maelstrom moments before, was now beginning to calm. The two warriors gazed down at the tranquil surface, lost in thought. Who could have predicted such an encounter on a peaceful journey? It felt unreal. They had set out expecting smooth sailing, as it had always been for the Tru Kingdom. But now, they realized the world was far more complex and dangerous than they had imagined. As Daiki glanced at his king, he thought about the uncertain future ahead. They had narrowly escaped this time, but what if they crossed paths with that fearsome figure again? Would they be as lucky? At that moment, somewhere beneath the waves, Kaido was floating in a state of eerie calm. Though he couldn''t move due to the side effects of his Devil Fruit, he could still breathe underwater thanks to his Fish-Fish Fruit abilities. He was aware, fully conscious, but unable to act yet he was far from defeated. This was Kaido, the creature known as the "Strongest Creature" a title that had been thoroughly earned. Anos and Daiki, feeling the urgency of the situation, resumed their Geppo and quickly made their way back to their ship, the Tempest. Their crew had been anxiously watching from a distance, waiting for a sign of their return. They had sailed a considerable distance for safety, slowing only once they felt secure. Time seemed to stretch as they travelled. It wasn''t until someone on deck finally spotted their figures approaching that a shout of relief pierced the air. Excited cries filled the ship as the others spotted them, all shouting their joy at once. The entire crew had witnessed the island where Kaido had landed, and they had all seen it sink into the ocean like a stone. Even from their safe distance, they had heard the rumbling as a massive chunk of land disappeared beneath the waves. The power displayed had left everyone shaken to their core. When Anos and Daiki landed back on the deck, the atmosphere was thick with both relief and lingering dread. Anos moved as if unaffected, his expression calm and collected. Find this and other great novels on the author''s preferred platform. Support original creators! Daiki, on the other hand, was breathing heavily, his face slightly flushed from both exertion and lingering adrenaline. "Your Majesty, are you alright?" Suzu, the ship''s navigator, asked with tear-filled eyes. She had kept herself composed up until now, but the sight of her king returning safely broke through her defences. Anos gave her a reassuring smile. "All is well, Suzu. We''re both fine. No need to worry," he replied, his tone calm and steady. As his gaze swept over the ship, however, he noticed something odd. The national flag of Tru Kingdom was missing from the mast. A small detail, but one that filled him with sudden dread. "Where''s the flag??" he asked sharply, his voice laced with a rare hint of alarm. Daiki, following his king''s gaze, echoed the question. "Yes, where''s the flag? It should be up there!" he added, his voice tense. "My apologies, Your Majesty," said Barlow, one of the ship''s officers, stepping forward. "We encountered a fierce storm two days ago and took it down to prevent it from being torn. It seems it wasn''t put back up afterwards. I''ll see to it immediately!" Anos let out a sudden laugh, the tension melting from his features. "Haha... Daiki, this might be a blessing in disguise! If the flag wasn''t up, that guy wouldn''t know which kingdom we''re from!" Daiki''s eyes lit up as he grasped the implication. At least, for now, they were safe from any immediate retaliation. Without a flag to identify them, Kaido had no way of tracing them back to Tru Kingdom at least, not without considerable effort. A wide grin spread across Daiki''s face, and he strode over to Barlow, clapping him on the shoulder. "Barlow, you''ve done a great thing without even realizing it! Don''t worry about raising the flag just yet. Let''s focus on getting back safely. Follow the Eternal Pose toward Mary Geoise," he instructed, his tone lighter than before. The rest of the crew was still bewildered by the exchange, but they didn''t question it. Their respect for Anos and Daiki ran deep, and if their leaders weren''t sharing details, it was likely for their good. The encounter with Kaido had ended as well as it could have. Even though more than two hours had passed, Anos still felt a slight sense of unease. The experience had left a mark on him, something that he couldn''t shake easily. Lying back in a deck chair, he closed his eyes, letting the sun''s warmth wash over him. Yet, beneath the calm facade, his mind was racing. He had seen true power today, and it was a harsh reminder that even the strongest could be outmatched. He knew he would need to prepare, to ensure that his kingdom would not be left vulnerable again. As the days passed, their ship gradually made its way toward Mary Geoise. Ten days later, the grand city loomed into view, perched atop the imposing Red Line. Even from miles away, its grandeur was apparent, an intimidating sight for anyone approaching it. Mary Geoise represented everything that the world revered and hated. It was the seat of power for the World Government, the home of the Celestial Dragons, and a place that inspired both awe and resentment across the seas. To the common folk, it was an untouchable fortress, a den of corruption, and yet, none dared to openly oppose it. The waters near Mary Geoise were eerily calm, almost as if they were in a perpetual state of peace. There was no wind, no movement an unnatural calm that hinted at the influence of the powers residing there. As they drew closer, the tension among the crew heightened. Anos could feel it too; the closer they got, the more apparent the stillness became. Guard towers and sentries were scattered around, some in plain sight and others hidden, their presence a silent warning to any who might think of causing trouble. "Listen carefully, everyone," Anos announced, his voice cutting through the silence on deck. "We''re here on official business. We cannot afford to make any trouble, no matter what happens. Is that clear?" The crew nodded, their faces solemn. They knew the importance of staying in line. In a place like Mary Geoise, a single misstep could lead to severe consequences, and none of them wanted to find out just how unforgiving the World Government could be. As they approached the port, guards immediately moved to intercept them, their expressions hard and unreadable. A massive plank was lowered from the ship, connecting it to the port below, and Anos disembarked with Daiki and Suzu at his side. "Who are you?" a Marine barked as they stepped onto the platform. "We are from the Tru Kingdom in the South Blue," Daiki replied, keeping his voice steady. "We''ve been invited to join the World Government." He held up the invitation, a formal letter from the CP agents they had encountered days before. It was their golden ticket, their way of gaining access without hassle. The Marine took the invitation, scanning it carefully before nodding. "Very well. Who among you is the king? And how many of you will be proceeding? All weapons must be left here," he said, his tone brooking no argument. Daiki felt a flash of irritation at the Marine''s tone, but he held his tongue. They were here on official business, and it would do no good to stir up trouble. He turned to Anos and said, "This is our king. Is there anything further required?" The Marine looked over Anos carefully, as if assessing his worthiness. Finally, he nodded. "Proceed, but remember no disruptions are tolerated here." --- If you want to support me & read advanced chapters ahead on P@treon. p@treon/Iamxeno Thank you for reading! 82. Meeting Aokiji Again --- After Daiki finished speaking, Anos raised his hand in a small, deliberate gesture, immediately signalling Daiki to stop. There was no need for further discussion on the matter, and the subtle movement conveyed Anos''s authority without a word. Anos turned his gaze towards the stern-looking marine standing before them. The marine''s expression was guarded, showing no intention of warmth or welcome, yet Anos offered a slight, diplomatic smile. "It''s my first time visiting Mariejois," he began smoothly. "I''m not familiar with many of the customs here, so if I happen to make any missteps, I ask for your understanding." The marine seemed momentarily taken aback. It wasn''t every day that a visiting king showed such humility, and Anos''s polite tone earned him a hint of favour. Even if the marine''s demeanour remained somewhat condescending. His posture softened ever so slightly, and he nodded in acknowledgement. "Just remember," the marine said with a thin smile, "once you go up, you''ll be in the presence of many Celestial Dragons. Every time you see one, you must kneel and salute. A word of advice if you, an outsider, act recklessly around them, it could cost you your life." "Thank you for the warning," Anos replied, bowing his head respectfully, his expression unchanging. Despite the patronizing tone, he knew it was better to remain cordial than to risk unnecessary conflict. The marine gave a curt nod. "Hurry along, then." With that, he turned on his heel and started walking off, flanked by two others who followed him into another corridor. Daiki watched them leave, his brow furrowed. His confusion evident, he looked at Anos and asked in a low voice, "Your Majesty, why are you so respectful towards these marines? They guard this place with such arrogance, and yet you..." Anos looked ahead, beginning his ascent up the massive staircase leading to the heart of Mariejois. "It''s just a few words, Daiki. A bit of humility costs us nothing." "We''re simply going through the motions," he replied calmly. "Right now, the most important thing is to get through this process without causing any trouble." The steps stretched endlessly before them, each one a testament to the wealth and power that Mariejois represented. White marble gleamed underfoot, polished to a mirror shine that reflected their silhouettes as they ascended. "The unfortunate reality is that, if our Kingdom isn''t strong enough, we''re forced to play by their rules," Anos continued. "But, if one day, we have the strength to stand on equal ground, this place won''t hold any power over us." Daiki fell silent, absorbing his king''s words. They echoed a simple truth a painful reality for any nation under the World Government''s influence. "Understood, Your Majesty," he finally said, following Anos up the steps with a new determination. The steps were colossal, each one a daunting rise that made their path seem almost vertical. It felt as though they were climbing into the sky itself. As they continued, the landscape below grew smaller, until the ships in the port and the people milling around looked like tiny, insignificant dots. They were only halfway up, and already, the journey was exhausting. For the other kings who had to make this trek, it was an act of submission a necessary step for any kingdom that wished to be part of the World Government. But it was humiliating nonetheless, a reminder of the power held over them by those in the Holy Land.The narrative has been illicitly obtained; should you discover it on Amazon, report the violation. Suzu, who was not as strong as Anos or Daiki, began to lag behind. Her breaths came in short gasps, her face flushed from the exertion. Daiki noticed her struggle and quickly moved to support her, offering his arm so she could lean on him as they continued their ascent. "Thank you," she whispered gratefully, trying to keep pace despite her fatigue. She refused to show weakness, yet her limits were evident. Finally, after nearly half an hour of climbing, they reached the top of the steps. Anos and Daiki took a moment to catch their breaths, looking out over the sprawling view below. From here, they could see all of Mariejois spread out in opulent splendour. The grand architecture, the gleaming white structures, all built with unimaginable wealth the scale of luxury was staggering. Suzu, meanwhile, leaned heavily on Daiki, her breaths shallow as she tried to steady herself. If Daiki hadn''t helped her, she would have likely collapsed halfway up. In front of them stretched a vast plaza, paved with flawless white jade that seemed to glow in the midday sun. Connecting to it were the massive white buildings that housed the Celestial Dragons, their residences looming like palaces of ancient gods. Anos surveyed the scene with a critical eye, noting the heavy silence that lay over the plaza. Despite the wealth and beauty, there was an unsettling emptiness here. "So this is the seat of power for the Celestial Dragons," he murmured. "Half the world''s wealth collected here over centuries¡­ it''s no wonder these buildings look as grand as they do." "Beautiful on the outside, but rotten on the inside," Daiki muttered darkly. "This place holds no appeal for anyone who values honour." Anos glanced at him, his expression thoughtful. "Daiki, control your emotions," he warned. "No matter how much you may dislike this place, keep it to yourself. Any show of defiance here could lead to serious consequences." "Understood, Your Majesty," Daiki replied, visibly restraining his anger. "Now," Anos said, turning his gaze back to the buildings before them, "let''s see what these so-called rulers of the world are really like." They moved forward across the plaza, their footsteps echoing against the silent, gleaming jade. The weather was hot, and only a few people walked around the square. Guards in pristine white uniforms patrolled the perimeter, their eyes sharp as they watched for any sign of trouble. As they approached a towering building, six or seven stories high, they finally saw more activity. Marines and other officials moved in and out of the grand entrance, some wearing different uniforms that indicated varying ranks and roles within the World Government. Anos spotted a marine nearby and approached him. "Excuse me, could you direct us to the World Government Office?" The marine barely looked at them. "I don''t know. Find it yourself," he replied curtly, his tone dismissive. The blatant rudeness was almost too much for Daiki, who clenched his fists at his sides, his knuckles turning white. But Anos held up a hand, a quiet signal that he should let it go. There was no point in engaging with disrespectful guards when they had a mission to complete. Instead, Anos calmly activated his Observation Haki. Instantly, the entire scene of Mariejois unfolded in his mind like a detailed map. He could sense the presence of every individual around them, each movement, each shift of weight. It was as if the entire city was laid bare before him. "Your Majesty¡­" Daiki began, his tone uncertain. "It''s fine," Anos reassured him. "Let''s head this way." He gestured toward a passage to their left. "It appears we''ve run into an old acquaintance. What a surprise." Daiki and Suzu exchanged glances but said nothing, following Anos as he led them through the grand hallways of Mariejois. Their surroundings grew more opulent with each step, marble and gold adorning every corner, though the abundance of wealth did little to mask the underlying sense of decay. Finally, they reached a pair of enormous doors, intricately carved with mahogany and accented with golden filigree. Anos raised his hand and knocked twice. After a moment, a voice from within called out, and Anos opened the doors. Inside, a gathering of individuals sat in rows, as if in the middle of a council meeting. They all looked up as the three entered, their faces a mix of surprise and suspicion. A man closest to the door, draped in the familiar white robe of justice, fixed them with a stern gaze. "Who are you?" Anos smiled, recognizing the figure seated before them. "Ah, Vice-Admiral Aokiji or should I say, Admiral now. It''s been some time, hasn''t it? Surely you haven''t forgotten me?" Aokiji, with his usual air of indifference, lifted his gaze to meet Anos''s. He still had that same lazy, half-awake look, his legs crossed in an unbothered stance that contrasted with the tension in the room. His gaze settled on Anos, and a faint spark of recognition flickered in his eyes. "So, we meet again," Anos said, stepping forward with the poise of a king. "I came here to see what those who claim to stand above the rest of the world are truly like." The room fell into a tense silence as Aokiji continued to watch him, his expression unreadable. The rest of the council members exchanged glances, unsure of what to make of the unexpected encounter. For Anos, the scene was almost surreal a room full of the so-called rulers, all held in a moment of suspense. In the back of his mind, he knew that every word, every move here would be scrutinized, but he didn''t care. This was his moment, and he intended to make the most of it. --- If you want to support me & read advanced chapters ahead on P@treon. p@treon/Iamxeno Thank you for reading! 83. Saint Charlos --- "Oops, I didn''t expect King Anos of Tru Kingdom to be here as well," Aokiji remarked, his voice carrying a lazy drawl as he sat back in his chair. His demeanour was nonchalant as if nothing could faze him, yet his gaze sharpened as he acknowledged the king''s presence. "The World Government meeting isn''t for another two months. It seems you''re here a little early." King Anos, a figure whose mere presence commanded respect, arched an eyebrow, offering a slight smirk in response. The room was filled with high-ranking officers and officials, each bearing the insignia of the World Government, yet Anos seemed unfazed by the importance of this gathering. It was as if he had come here for a reason beyond the official protocols. "Is he the king of Tru Kingdom in the South Blue?" murmured a Marine officer seated near Aokiji, casting a sceptical glance at Anos. Though Tru Kingdom was a respected member of the South Blue, its power was far overshadowed by the influence of the World Government, which made Anos''s presence here both surprising and slightly unnerving to those unfamiliar with his confident demeanour. "We''re conducting a meeting here. I wonder what brings King Anos to this gathering," another Marine chimed in, his voice carrying a cold edge. This officer, the first to address Anos, held a stern expression that conveyed both caution and mistrust. Anos met his gaze calmly, unflinching. "Don''t speak to me in that tone," he replied, his words laced with a hint of mockery. "We''re here because the World Government extended an invitation to the Tru Kingdom to consider joining as a member nation." "And given how the future unfolds, we may even be offering financial support to the Marines." A hushed silence filled the room as his words lingered in the air. Several Marines shifted in their seats, exchanging uneasy glances. The idea of a new kingdom joining the World Government always stirred mixed reactions, especially when it involved potential shifts in financial backing or alliances. Yet, Anos seemed entirely at ease, almost as if he anticipated such a response. There were at least a dozen figures in the room, all familiar with each other''s faces, yet the presence of an outsider, particularly a king, seemed to alter the usual atmosphere of their meetings. It wasn''t difficult to guess that this gathering involved preparations for the upcoming World Government Conference, a highly anticipated event that was still two months away. For Anos, however, this opportunity felt like fate''s subtle hand guiding him to this particular place and time. Who would have thought that these Marine officers, who normally received little respect outside their jurisdiction, would soon be heading to Mariejois, the seat of power for the World Government, for a meeting of such magnitude? "If you''re joining the World Government, then go ahead and join," one Marine officer interjected, his voice dripping with disdain. "Why show up here?" "Boring," Anos replied, shrugging off the hostility. "I''m not here to please you. Perhaps I happened upon this meeting by pure chance, or perhaps I wanted to see the Marines in action." The Marine scoffed, narrowing his eyes as he studied the king, but chose not to press further. If you find this story on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the infringement. Anos''s provocations had struck a nerve, yet the man could do little but simmer in silence. "Oh boy, another headache," Aokiji muttered, stretching as if burdened by an invisible weight. "You all continue here; I''ll take him where he needs to go." With a heavy sigh, he rose from his seat, offering a resigned look to the others. His laid-back attitude seemed at odds with the tension in the room, yet his rank as an admiral granted him the authority to act as he pleased. Seeing Aokiji, a Marine admiral, willing to guide him, Anos simply smiled, choosing to remain silent as he followed. The Marines seemed to watch him with a mixture of suspicion and curiosity, yet no one dared question the admiral''s decision. As they exited the room, Suzu, Anos''s close aide, remained close behind, carefully closing the door. She was one of the few he trusted implicitly, a skilled advisor and tactician in her own right, though she preferred to keep a low profile. "Don''t you need to attend the meeting, Admiral Aokiji?" Anos asked, breaking the silence with a slight smirk. Aokiji gave a dismissive wave. "There''s nothing worth discussing. Just the same topics I''ve grown tired of hearing alliances, conflicts, trade routes. It''s a never-ending cycle." Anos nodded thoughtfully. "Congratulations on your promotion, by the way. I hope you''ll remember this alliance and lend Tru Kingdom your support if the need arises in the future." Aokiji sighed, his expression shifting from nonchalance to mild exasperation. "I''ll be grateful if you don''t cause me any more trouble. After the last incident, you don''t know how much scolding I got when I returned." The "incident" he referred to was the recent manoeuvre in which Tru Kingdom had cleverly leveraged Aokiji''s influence to enter the Roya Kingdom''s capital. The move had allowed Tru Kingdom to block potential threats from neighbouring nations, though it had caused a stir within the World Government. Aokiji, however, had taken the brunt of the criticism. "I''m truly sorry about last time," Anos said, though his smile betrayed no regret. "But Tru Kingdom is still small and vulnerable. We had to borrow your name, Admiral Aokiji. This time, I''ve brought some tokens of goodwill for you." Aokiji waved him off. "I don''t need any tokens. Just finish your business here and return to Tru. And try not to cause any trouble in Mariejois." "Understood," Anos replied with a casual nod, his demeanour calm and composed. The presence of someone familiar by his side made things significantly easier for Anos, saving him the hassle of navigating the labyrinthine corridors of the World Government''s facilities. Yet, as they continued walking, they encountered an unexpected figure. A man wearing an oxygen mask, whose mere presence exuded authority, appeared from around the corner. His gait was slow and deliberate, each step radiating a sense of entitlement that only one of his status could possess. This was Saint Charlos, one of the Celestial Dragons, and his arrival sent a ripple of tension through the hallway. Fortunate to have Aokiji as his guide, Anos kept his composure. As Charlos''s eyes swept over them, he addressed Aokiji with an air of superiority. "Admiral Aokiji, who''s that behind you?" Aokiji, unfazed, replied with his usual indifference. "Saint Charlos, why trouble yourself with minor details?" The Celestial Dragon ignored the slight, his gaze shifting to Suzu with a lascivious gleam. "I like that woman. She should come with me." Anos''s calm expression wavered for a fraction of a second, but Aokiji stepped in before he could respond. "That won''t be possible, Saint Charlos. Tru Kingdom is here to join the World Government," Aokiji stated, his tone firm but devoid of reverence. Charlos''s eyes narrowed as he scrutinized Anos with an air of disdain. "What kingdom?" Anos maintained his composure, bowing slightly as he replied, "Saint Charlos, we''re from Tru Kingdom in the South Blue. It''s an honour to meet you." Charlos smirked. "How much will it cost me to buy that woman? Women from your kingdom are quite a prize. She''d be lucky to become my fifty-seventh wife." A flicker of irritation passed over Aokiji''s face. "Saint Charlos, you''re aware that clear orders are preventing Celestial Dragons from acting against citizens of member nations." "Hmph," Charlos scoffed. "As if there''s ever been a woman I couldn''t have." With a final sneer, he turned on his heel and strode away, his guards trailing behind him. Yet, as he departed, a faint blue light emanated from Anos''s fingers, subtle and barely noticeable, attaching itself to Charlos''s back. The light vanished in an instant, leaving no trace. Anos turned to Aokiji, his expression neutral. "Are all Celestial Dragons like that?" "More or less," Aokiji replied with a sigh, his tone resigned. Anos managed a wry smile. "Best to conclude matters here quickly and return to Tru." Aokiji nodded. "Everyone''s already here, and the World Government meeting will take place in two months. Since you''ve chosen to join, will the Tru Kingdom be attending?" Aokiji had long suspected that Tru Kingdom would join the World Government, understanding well that Tru''s power extended beyond appearances. For Anos, this was just the beginning, a chance to solidify Tru Kingdom''s place on the world stage. --- If you want to support me & read advanced chapters ahead on P@treon. p@treon/Iamxeno Thank you for reading! 84. Change of Heart ---- When Anos appeared, Aokiji didn''t seem surprised. Even though Anos had no intention of joining the World Government, Aokiji knew that the World Government would find a way to pressure him into it. After serving in the Marines for so long, Aokiji understood the World Government''s methods well. The procedures for joining the World Government weren''t as complex as one might expect; they were surprisingly straightforward. Under Aokiji''s guidance, they took only a couple of detours before reaching the agreement site, a space of barely three square meters. It looked more like a hotel front desk than an official government office. Not only was it low-grade, but it also seemed to show the World Government''s contempt for the kingdoms joining their ranks. "Alright, here we are. Just sign the agreement right here," Aokiji said with a lazy smile. Anos glanced around, his smile fading as his expression darkened. A wave of anger rose within him. "Admiral Aokiji, are you telling me such an important matter as joining the World Government can be settled here?" Anos asked in a low voice. "What more do you expect? This is the standard procedure," Aokiji replied indifferently. Anos sneered, then approached a nearby staff member who looked half-asleep. With small eyes and a distant gaze, the staffer finally noticed Anos and asked casually, "Which kingdom do you represent? What''s your title?" "Tru Kingdom, South Blue. I am the king," Anos replied. "Just sign here, and you''re all set," the woman said, barely looking up as she handed him a crumpled sheet of paper. The paper looked as though it had seen better days, with faded ink and uneven colour. Some of the writing was smudged, making parts of the agreement unreadable. A case of literary theft: this tale is not rightfully on Amazon; if you see it, report the violation. "Are all the other Kingdoms handled this way?" Anos asked Aokiji, turning his head. "I wouldn''t know; this is my first time seeing it myself," Aokiji shrugged. Anos took a deep breath, trying to suppress his anger, though his frustration was evident. To be treated so casually and expected to pay exorbitant tribute, only to be met with this level of disrespect was galling. "So, this is the World Government? How disappointing," Anos muttered. He glanced at the squinting staffer, then turned to Daiki. "Let''s go." "Your Majesty, what about the agreement?" Suzu called out, uncertain. They had come all this way intending to join, and leaving now would waste all their efforts. "It seems the World Government has no place for us. Why should we humble ourselves any further?" Daiki agreed with a sneer. Aokiji merely watched with a helpless expression as the situation unfolded. "You might want to reconsider. While the World Government won''t force you, they will likely send someone later to encourage your allegiance. Why let anger cloud your judgment?" Aokiji cautioned. Anos turned to him, his gaze icy. "If this were handled differently, I might feel differently. As a Marine Admiral, I trust you understand." With that, Anos stormed out. Any optimism he once had for joining the World Government vanished. Initially, he''d believed that joining could benefit Tru''s trade and economy, but now he felt no goodwill toward them. In this world, there were many ways to grow a kingdom''s economy without aligning with the World Government. Aokiji didn''t stop him. After all, this wasn''t his business. Once they reached the white jade plaza, Anos looked back at the imposing World Government headquarters, resentment evident in his eyes. "Your Majesty, what''s our next step?" Daiki asked. "What do you think of this place?" Anos replied with a slight smile. "I don''t think much of it." "But leaving like this¡­ is it okay?" Suzu asked cautiously. "There''s no need for us to make ourselves a target. We have Alabasta as a potential ally, after all," Anos remarked with a smirk. "But, Your Majesty, what if the World Government''s CP units pursue us?" Daiki asked, concerned. He remembered the strength of the CP agents and wondered who might come next. Anos had made up his mind. "We''ll deal with that if it happens. Whether we join the World Government or not won''t change much for us." "Their attitude today, however, has made me rethink everything. Once on board, inform Barlow to set sail immediately. I''ll show you all something even more thrilling tonight." Daiki followed his king without question, though he was slightly puzzled. As they descended the long steps and boarded the ship, the rest of the crew eagerly awaited the outcome. But the only order from Anos was, "Set sail." The details of what transpired remained unknown to the crew, but as Anos cast one last glance at Mariejois atop the Red Line, a slight smile hinted at new plans forming in his mind. This departure marked a complete break with the World Government. Nearly all previous strategies were disrupted, but this shift would only lead Tru Kingdom toward a new path, without affecting their broader goals. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 85. Killing Celestial Dragon --- This time, the Tempest did not return along the original route but set off in a different direction from the Grand Line. This was something they had planned earlier. Eventually, they would head directly toward the area where Sky Island was located, which was their most critical strategic objective. At night, the sea was nearly invisible, and the ship could only rely on its sails to continue moving forward independently. "Your Majesty, were you looking for me?" Daiki gently opened the door and entered. After closing it behind him, he looked at Anos and asked. "Did you make sure no one noticed?" Anos inquired. "Rest assured, Your Majesty. No one has been disturbed!" Daiki replied seriously. "I''m going to take you somewhere soon. There might be some danger involved. I want to know if you''re willing," Anos said, his gaze steady. Hearing this, Daiki immediately responded without hesitation, "Your Majesty, even if you command me to face death, I would not flinch." "It''s not that drastic. However, today, I want to teach Celestial Dragons a lesson, and I want to make things right," Anos said with a calm smile. He didn''t want anyone to discover his ability just yet. The only one in the world who knew about his spatial powers in detail was Daiki. Even during his encounter with Kaido on that remote island, when he was in grave danger, Anos had refrained from revealing his ability. As for anyone else who might have known, they were long gone. Although Daiki didn''t fully understand what his king was planning, seeing his determined expression filled him with anticipation. Anos raised his right hand, where blue light began to coalesce, forming a blue vortex that appeared in front of him. The vortex spiralled endlessly, hinting at unknown destinations on the other side. "Come with me. Let''s jump through together." Without hesitation, Anos stepped into the vortex, and Daiki followed him. As the two entered, the vortex slowly closed, leaving the room in silence once more. They had vanished without a trace.The narrative has been taken without authorization; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident. Anos had refined his spatial abilities significantly, and this long-distance jump was just one facet of his powers. He had positioned the exit point near the Celestial Dragon Bokuroy earlier, waiting for nightfall to return to Mariejois. While in Mariejois, Anos had already scanned most of the area using Observation Haki. He hadn''t detected any particularly strong presence, which reassured him about bringing Daiki along for the mission. Their spatial journey ended as they reappeared in a dimly lit bedroom. The Celestial Dragon Carlos, who had treated them with contempt earlier in the day, lay fast asleep on his bed. Daiki hesitated, fearing he might make a noise that would wake their target, but Anos showed no such concern. These Celestial Dragons even wore glass helmets while they slept, a sight that stirred disgust in anyone observing. Approaching Carlos''s bed, Anos activated his spatial powers, encasing Carlos''s head. The Celestial Dragon began to Struggle, but he was unable to resist his fate. Anos waited until Carlos suffocated, feeling no remorse but rather a sense of relief. Standing nearby, Daiki was shocked by his king''s method and was somewhat intimidated. After all, they had just assassinated a Celestial Dragon. If things went wrong, the consequences could be beyond imagination. "A worthless piece of trash," Anos remarked, looking at the lifeless Carlos with a scornful smile. "Your Majesty, you killed a Celestial Dragon!" Daiki was still reeling from the shock. The Celestial Dragons were revered as untouchable, a notion ingrained deeply in everyone''s minds. But seeing this, Daiki couldn''t help but feel both satisfaction and fear of the repercussions. "What''s there to fear? No one will know it was us. We''ve come a long way over the past month, and our journey can''t go to waste," Anos replied. Though Daiki initially assumed Anos had only come here to kill Carlos, it was clear there was more to the plan. Without further explanation, Anos grabbed Daiki''s shoulder, and they re-entered the spatial jump. They reappeared in a large warehouse moments later. The sight before them left both speechless. "Is this¡­?" Anos quickly created a light-blue barrier, enveloping the room. He wanted to ensure that they wouldn''t accidentally alert any guards. "Stop being so shocked. This is that guy''s treasure trove. Just look at all this wealth," Anos said nonchalantly. "Your Majesty, I''ve never seen such a massive amount of gold, silver, and jewels in my life. This stash must be worth at least hundreds of billions of Beris!" Daiki exclaimed excitedly. "So, what do you think? Shall we take it all back? Otherwise, this journey would be in vain," Anos said with a smirk. "Definitely! But how are we supposed to transport all this?" Daiki asked curiously, his excitement palpable. Anos raised an eyebrow with an amused expression. "Did you forget about my abilities?" The warehouse spanned thousands of square meters and towered at least ten meters high, filled with an overwhelming array of gold, silver, jewels, and various treasures. Near the front stood a crown, while other rare items were packed into boxes and piled randomly. And this was just one Celestial Dragon''s wealth. With thousands of Celestial Dragons in Mariejois, their total assets were unimaginable. "Why are you just standing there? We''ll examine this haul back on our ship," Anos said. Truthfully, he hadn''t needed to bring Daiki along but probably wanted someone to share in the exhilaration. Hearing Anos''s command, Daiki stepped back obediently. Anos then waved his hand, causing the entire spatial barrier to contract, enveloping every treasure in the room. Within moments, the entire hoard, down to the last coin, had vanished. Even the dust was swept clean. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 86. Slave ---- In the enormous warehouse, a room filled with gold, silver, and jewels had been emptied in an instant. And during the entire process, there wasn''t a single sound. "Your Majesty, if we keep doing this and plunder all of Mariejois, wouldn''t we be set for life?" Daiki asked eagerly. "What are you thinking? It''s not as simple as it seems. Not only are the Admirals stationed here, but Mariejois itself holds a powerful presence. We''re lucky we could pull this off; let''s head back now," Anos replied calmly. With such an easy way to acquire wealth, others with similar spatial abilities wouldn''t hesitate to take advantage. However, Anos wasn''t interested in going that far. Completing this task was enough for him. Although Daiki''s greed flared up, he knew better. Getting this money was one thing, but having the power to use it in the future was another. This was his moment to prove his worth. "Your Majesty, on the way here, I noticed something interesting in Carlos''s chamber!" Daiki said. "Then why didn''t you mention it earlier?" Anos asked. "I was about to, but you immediately started moving, and before I knew it, you had already dragged me over here," Daiki replied, feeling a bit wronged. "Did you see anything worthwhile?" Anos asked, smiling. Since they weren''t in a hurry to leave, they had a moment to investigate. This tale has been unlawfully obtained from Royal Road. If you discover it on Amazon, kindly report it. After all, it was late at night, and even if they needed to flee, it would take only seconds. The main reason Anos hesitated to seize more property was to avoid attracting attention. He knew how many strong individuals resided in Mariejois, including the top members of CP0. He didn''t want to overreach. "Your Majesty, I didn''t get a good look," Daiki admitted, smiling. But before he could say more, Anos placed his hand on Daiki''s shoulder, instantly transporting them to Bokuroy''s room. The room had been dark when they first arrived. After disposing of their target, they have a chance to explore further. But now, they could see that the Celestial Dragons'' quarters were far from ordinary! "Daiki, gather anything you find, and we''ll bundle it up to take along," Anos whispered, careful not to alert anyone nearby. He had no idea how many guards stood outside or how strong they might be. They couldn''t afford to risk detection. Daiki gave a silent nod and began searching the room. "Take me with you..." As they were preparing to move, a voice echoed in Anos''s mind. He froze, his guard up, scanning his surroundings. In the dim light, Daiki noticed his king''s reaction and also became alert. "I''m at the door. Take me with you, and I''ll serve you loyally..." The voice reappeared, and Anos frowned. Someone had sensed their presence. But from the tone, it seemed more like a plea than a threat. "Carlos is dead. If you want to leave with us, quietly open the door and step in," Anos murmured, knowing the speaker could likely detect their slightest movements. Sure enough, the door slowly creaked open, and a frail man shackled in chains crawled in. Seeing the intruder, Daiki prepared to strike, but Anos quickly stepped between them to stop him. "Did you find Carlos''s keys?" Anos asked Daiki. "Don''t bother. They threw away the key long ago," the man said in a hoarse voice. Iron chains bound his body, and a collar around his neck glowed with faint blue lights. His wrists were restrained by seastone shackles. A slave. Only a slave would look like this in Mariejois. "How did you end up like this, and how did you find us?" Anos asked, eyeing him warily. He was prepared to silence the man if necessary. "I''m Abona, former deputy captain of the Sunshine Pirates. I was captured and sold here two years ago," the man whispered. "Now, you have two choices. One, you''ve seen us, and you know what fate awaits you. Or two, as you said, you can pledge loyalty, and I''ll take you out," Anos replied, aware of the risks they faced now that they''d been detected. Without hesitation, Abona bowed his head, his voice filled with emotion. "I swear my loyalty to you, master. Please take me from this hell on earth." Anos smiled slightly as Daiki continued packing everything he found in the room. He placed all the items from the shelves, useful or not, into a pile. Anos then crouched down, reaching for the collar around Verbona''s neck. With a quick snap, the collar broke, though the blue lights still flickered. This device controlled them, but the chains were trivial to handle. Finally feeling a hint of freedom, Abona was overcome with emotion, his mouth open in a silent cheer, but he restrained himself. He knew they couldn''t risk making any noise now. ---- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 87. Introduction --- As the chains on his body began to fall to the ground, even when he stood up, he looked unkempt. In the night, it was impossible to make out his face. "Is it done?" Anos turned his head and asked in a low voice to Daiki. "It''s done, Your Majesty." The once-empty space in the room was now filled with various small boxes and exquisite furnishings. At this moment, they had no intention of measuring the value of these items. Time wasn''t abundant for them. "Abona, we''ll head back soon. As for the Seastone handcuffs on your wrists, we can''t remove them just yet, or the noise would draw too much attention." Anos said in a low voice. "What Master says is true; Abona understands!" There was nothing Abona could be dissatisfied with now. Since the collar was removed, he felt as if he had been reborn. His master''s words moved him deeply. Anos waved his hand, and the collected items on the ground vanished instantly. Being new, Abona wasn''t surprised; he took it as a matter of course. "We don''t have much time let''s move!" Anos said to them, waving his hand as a blue vortex appeared in front of him. Before Abona left, he glanced at Carlos, lying lifeless on the bed. Anger filled his eyes; he wanted to cut the body into pieces but chose not to.This novel is published on a different platform. Support the original author by finding the official source. Daiki was the first to jump into the vortex, followed shortly by Abona. Anos left a parting "gift" in the room before stepping through. Their ship had been sailing outside Mariejois''s reach for a day now, heading away from its original course. If not for the signal in the room, Anos might''ve had no choice but to use his spatial powers to jump them here. The three of them reappeared in their cabin on the ship, a moment of true freedom. In mere seconds, they''d jumped hundreds of kilometres, and no one would think to look in their direction regarding Mariejois. The ship had departed in the morning, far enough that no one from the Tru Kingdom would think about it being connected to events at Mariejois, kilometres away. Back in the cabin, Anos finally got a good look at Abona in the light. Abona was a man around thirty, looking thin to the point of gauntness. Without clothing to add bulk, he appeared to be all skin and bones. His face was dirty, his hair hung unkempt over his shoulders, covering much of his face, and his grey clothes looked worn beyond recognition. Despite wearing Seastone handcuffs, Abona didn''t seem like a Devil Fruit user at all; Haki-enforced Seastone would typically make such users collapse, let alone communicate. "Your Majesty, isn''t it risky for us to take this person along?" Daiki asked. "Don''t worry," Anos replied, casting a calm look at Abona, who remained in his shabby state. He made no move to remove the Seastone cuffs on Abona''s hands. "Now you can properly introduce yourself. We''re at least hundreds of kilometres away from Mariejois, entirely out of their control. If what you say is true, then from now on, you are free to live in this world again," Anos said coolly. He sat back in his chair, awaiting Abona''s response. Daiki, still cautious, observed Abona. Though Abona was once a slave in Mariejois, he might possess a hidden identity. Abona understood the need to explain himself. He felt grateful toward the young master who had freed him from Mariejois''s brutal life, a life that had worn down almost all his resilience. Freedom had once felt like an impossible dream. Abona knelt on the floor to show respect, but Anos stopped him, turning to Daiki. "This man was once a hero; give him a chair. I don''t want him to carry this habit forward." Daiki silently grabbed a chair and placed it behind Abona, who looked momentarily shocked. Kneeling was something he''d grown accustomed to an action he did almost every day. Aside from sleeping, his face had always been to the ground. "Sit. We don''t have many rules here, but I expect honesty. Taking you from Mariejois wasn''t a simple decision, so be truthful." Daiki added sternly. "My name is Abona. I was born on the Grand Line, sailing since childhood. I was a pirate from birth, setting out on my own at fourteen." "Back then, the seas weren''t as chaotic. We sought only freedom and adventure." "Twelve years ago, for aiding Roger''s escape, the Marines placed a bounty on me 170 million Beris." "My captain was later killed by Fleet Admiral Zephyr in an encounter. Four years ago, our crew was captured by the Marines. During transport, we encountered the Celestial Dragon Carlos. That encounter led to what you see now." "Over time, my comrades perished one by one. I am the only survivor. If not for meeting you, Master, I would''ve barely lasted another two months." --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 88. Past --- Abona''s face twisted in anger, veins bulging as he clenched his jaw. Though weakened now, his imposing aura would have been unimaginable to the two of them under normal circumstances. Seastone handcuffs not only suppress Devil Fruit''s powers but are also harder than any material. "You don''t need to call me ''master'' anymore. I''m not interested in such titles, nor am I one of those despicable Celestial Dragons. I am the king of the Tru Kingdom in the South Blue. From now on, address me as they do." Anos said calmly. "As you command, Your Majesty," Abona replied, bowing respectfully. "Now, let''s discuss your abilities. You managed to monitor us from outside Mariejois and can communicate through directional sound. How is that possible?" Anos asked, intrigued. He sensed that Abona was not a Devil Fruit user yet displayed powers that mimicked them. "Your Majesty, my strength is between that of a Vice Admiral and an Admiral. I don''t possess a Devil Fruit, but with Haki cultivation at a certain level, such abilities are achievable," Abona replied. His strength could rival top officers, but despite this, he had been enslaved by the Celestial Dragons. However, Anos detected some contradictions in his story and asked directly, "If you have such strength and are not a Devil Fruit user, why did you allow yourself to be captured and kept in Mariejois?" Abona pointed to the collar around his neck. "This is an explosive collar. Even Haki can''t neutralize it. If I cross a certain boundary, it detonates. I resisted at first; my scars prove it. But they threatened the lives of my companions. Eventually, I had no choice but to comply, though one by one, I watched those companions disappear." "Alright. Let''s get rid of the Seastone handcuffs on your hands first. As for the rest, I need to rest today. When I return to the Tru Kingdom, I''ll deal with my health and prepare for plans. There will be plenty of time for revenge later." At this point, Anos no longer wanted to discuss anything further. The demon sword Muramasa appeared instantly in his hand, and with a swift motion, he sliced through the Seastone handcuffs on Abona''s wrists, which fell to the ground.This tale has been unlawfully lifted without the author''s consent. Report any appearances on Amazon. Even after being freed from the handcuffs, Abona remained as focused as ever. The desire for vengeance had entirely consumed his heart. "Take him to a room to rest. We''ll continue our discussion tomorrow," Anos commanded Daiki. "Understood, Your Majesty!" Daiki responded promptly. Though he remained cautious of Abona, he wouldn''t mistreat anyone Anos trusted. "Let''s go. Rest well tonight, and tomorrow we''ll celebrate your newfound freedom!" Daiki said to Abona with a smile. "Thank you for your efforts," Abona replied. No one else on the ship noticed anything unusual. Whether they were asleep or on watch, none of them saw anything strange, not even when the Seastone handcuffs fell from Abona''s wrists, attracting a momentary glance from those nearby. They didn''t realize there was an additional person on board. --- The night passed quietly, and the next morning, the first signs of trouble didn''t appear on board but in Mariejois. Following a scream, it was discovered that a Celestial Dragon had died in their chamber. To keep it quiet, all of the slaves were sacrificed, effectively suppressing the incident. Meanwhile, no one was aware that the treasure vault of Carlos, the Celestial Dragon, had been emptied. By morning, Tru Kingdom''s ship had already departed from the area. Abona slept until noon, enjoying his first peaceful rest in years without any disturbances. He awoke only when Daiki came to invite him to celebrate his new life. But when Abona joined the others, everyone was surprised. None of them, not even the guards, realized an extra person had joined the ship. "Daiki, make sure Abona takes a proper bath and changes into fresh clothes. Why does he still look like he did yesterday?" Upon seeing Abona''s unkempt appearance, Anos frowned. "Apologies, Your Majesty. I''ll take care of it right away," Daiki replied hastily. In the rush last night, he hadn''t considered Abona''s state. As Daiki led Abona away, the crew members chatted among themselves, speculating on the new guest''s sudden arrival. Onboard, there were several kitchens, essential to feed such a large group. Anos waited patiently at a dining table laden with food and drink, ready for Abona''s return. "My apologies for getting you reprimanded," Abona said to Daiki, feeling guilty. "It''s alright. His Majesty was correct to point it out," Daiki replied with a shrug. "Next time, though, avoid discussing His Majesty''s strength with others." "Understood," Abona responded calmly. "There''s a shower room up ahead. Since you''re not a Devil Fruit user, you could always jump in the sea if you need more space," Daiki joked with a hint of envy. "Being a landlubber has its drawbacks. Sometimes I envy you." "You''re a Devil Fruit user too?" Abona asked, genuinely surprised, having sensed nothing unusual from Daiki during their interaction. "Best not to worry about it. Go take a shower. I''ll leave clothes for you outside the door, and once you''re ready, head straight to the dining room." With that, Daiki set off to gather fresh clothes. High-quality attire was plentiful on the ship, suitable for both men and women. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 89. Arrival of Kizaru --- When he was in Mariejois, he had planned to find someone to give it to if he met someone he could chat with. However, he didn''t expect that they would start leaving Mariejois almost as soon as they arrived. This was something no one anticipated, but Mariejois''s attitude completely crushed their motivation to join the World Government. At least their gains this time were considerable. Although they took some risks, the rewards were well worth it. It''s estimated that if Carlos''s gold, silver, and jewellery were unloaded, the ship might not have enough space to hold them all. Anos put everything into his own storage space, and no one but Daiki was even aware of it. About half an hour later, Abona came out of the shower. When he reappeared in the dining area, wearing the clothes Daiki had provided, everyone looked at him in surprise. Even Anos, sitting at the head of the table, had to admit that attire can make a difference. Abona left his hair loose, combing it back over his shoulders. Although his face was still a bit gaunt, he exuded the powerful charm of a mature man. Dressed in a handsome suit, he looked nothing like the slave rescued from beneath the Red Line. Those who had just met him could hardly believe he was the same person. "Your Majesty," Abona greeted Anos respectfully as he walked into the dining area. "Sit down. Today, we celebrate your new life and welcome you to our family in the Tru Kingdom. From now on, leave behind your past identity and let go of any old grudges or burdens."You could be reading stolen content. Head to the original site for the genuine story. "Yes, Your Majesty," Abona replied. "Hello, my name is Suzu. I''m the King''s secretary, and I look forward to working together," Suzu said, standing and smiling at Abona. "My name is Barlow, navigator. We''ll be shipmates from now on, so relax," Barlow said, with a friendly grin. One by one, the others introduced themselves warmly to Abona. Though they knew nothing about Abona''s past, they didn''t dwell on it; he was now one of them, and his history didn''t matter. The camaraderie touched Abona. It reminded him of past banquets with friends, sitting around a table piled with food, without worries or ambitions, just wanting to sail the seas together. But now, only he remained to carry on. With a grateful heart, he bowed and introduced himself, "My name is Abona, and I am a swordsman. Thank you for the warm welcome." "Abona, you''re a swordsman?" Suzu asked, surprised. "Yes, why?" "His Majesty is also a swordsman. How coincidental!" Suzu said, smiling. "Come, sit! The food will get cold," Anos said, motioning to the table. Though hungry, Abona tried to maintain his composure. But as Daiki urged him, he finally relaxed and started eating, showing an appetite that surprised everyone. His appetite was impressive, finishing almost all the food on the table. His belly swelled as if he''d eaten for days. Then, as everyone watched, he took a deep breath, and his bulging stomach visibly deflated. "Is this...?" Daiki asked, surprised. "What''s so surprising? That''s one of the Marine''s Six Powers techniques. Train harder, and you''ll master it, too," Anos said with a smirk. "Your Majesty, how do you know the Six Powers?" Abona asked, astonished. "You''ll learn more soon," Daiki replied with a smile. "Come, Abona, let''s talk on the deck," Anos called out. Once on the deck, Anos asked directly, "So, you''re a swordsman?" "Yes, Your Majesty." "Interesting," Anos mused. "I heard you''re also a swordsman. May I see your skills?" Abona requested. Anos, who had initially just wanted to talk, decided to indulge him. Life on the sea could be tedious, so sparring would be a good way to pass the time. Just as he was about to stand up, Abona suddenly grew tense. "Your Majesty, someone is approaching fast!" Anos activated his Haki, sensing an incoming presence. But before he could react further, a figure appeared on the ship''s bow. In a flash of golden light, a man in his forties stood on the deck, wearing a yellow-striped suit and a red tie. Despite his elegant appearance, his smug expression was unmistakable. "Why, hello! I wonder what brings Admiral Kizaru to the Tempest," Anos greeted with only mild surprise. Though the arrival of the Marine Headquarters Admiral Kizaru was unexpected, in these circumstances, it wasn''t completely out of the question. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 90. Stolen Treasure --- The entire deck of the Tempest was filled with an atmosphere of tension in an instant. Daiki stood still, his entire body already prepared for an attack. Fortunately, Anos, who was beside him, patted his shoulder and shook his head slightly to hold him back. "Ouch, what a scary group of people!~" Kizaru looked at Anos without expression, his attention turning to the others on the deck. ''Is he high or something?''Daiki thought prepared to attack at any movement. The ship continued to sail, and Kizaru had no intention of stepping down from the bow. "Admiral Kizaru, could it be you had somewhere to go and got tired before deciding to land on our ship?" Anos reclined casually, shaking his body on a chair and looking at the admiral with amusement. "King of the Tru Kingdom, there''s been an incident on Mariejois. Certain items have gone missing. I wonder if I might board your ship for a look around?" Kizaru finally smiled, though his words carried a thinly veiled threat. Even with Anos standing before him, some might fail to recognize him. He had altered his appearance and showed no sign of fear, even facing a Marine admiral. For everyone else, however, the mood was more relaxed and comfortable. Anos was lounging in his chair, clearly unfazed, while others seemed unaware of the situation. Though Daiki had appeared on the ship unexpectedly the previous day, no one found it suspicious after all, the King himself knew him well. As Kizaru approached, Anos remained indifferent, though he looked quite lazy. Only Suzu stepped forward, greeting Kizaru with a friendly smile. "Mr. Kizaru, why not come down and have a drink?" "~What a troublesome group~," Kizaru muttered, feigning reluctance but accepting Suzu''s invitation.Taken from Royal Road, this narrative should be reported if found on Amazon. "Admiral Kizaru, might I ask what exactly was taken from Mariejois? Is it worth travelling this far to chase us down?" Anos inquired, still reclining. "Well~, just some small things. You all happened to depart recently, so they sent me to have a look. Just a formality. I''m sure the King of Tru won''t mind." Kizaru sat down, smiling faintly. Suzu served him a drink before stepping aside to listen to their conversation. "Of course, I don''t mind. After all, I''ve had the honour of meeting two out of the three admirals of the Marines. Should I consider myself lucky?" "You don''t seem to feel honoured!" Kizaru said, noting Anos''s relaxed demeanour. "By the way, King of Tru, I heard you went to Mariejois, but in the end, you didn''t join the World Government?" Kizaru added. "Are you suggesting you''re unaware of why I refused? Admiral Aokiji was with me then, and he knows exactly what transpired," Anos replied. "So why the sudden departure?" Anos straightened and looked at Kizaru calmly. "Admiral Kizaru, don''t throw around baseless accusations. We left Mariejois at our own pace. After being treated poorly by the World Government, would you have us linger, paying homage to the Celestial Dragons grovelling with every step?" Anos''s words not only revealed his stance but also mocked Kizaru. "Are young people today always so bold? Don''t they offer any respect when they speak?" Kizaru sighed, feigning exasperation. "Admiral, we adhere to a principle of peace. We''d rather not stir up unnecessary trouble. You''re well aware of the situation in Mariejois." "After being insulted there, His Majesty chose not to join the World Government, and so we set sail." "We left Mariejois early yesterday, unaware of anything going missing. So, tell me when exactly did this theft occur?" Daiki stepped forward, frowning as he questioned Kizaru, who momentarily found himself at a loss. The stolen items had disappeared late at night, meaning they were well beyond Mariejois by then, hundreds of kilometres away, making it impossible for them to be involved. "And who might this be?" Kizaru redirected, looking at Anos. "That''s Groot, our royal swordsman of the Tru Kingdom. Is he of interest to you, Admiral?" Anos asked. "I am Groot. Anything you need to know, Admiral Kizaru?" Daiki replied, following Anos''s lead. "Nothing at all. I''m simply here to take a look around. No other motives. I''m sure the King doesn''t mind." Kizaru''s smile returned, knowing well what was missing from Mariejois. If they had the stolen items, it would be blatantly obvious; there was no way they''d fit within the ship''s confines without raising suspicion. Before setting out, Admiral Aokiji had cautioned Kizaru that the Tru Kingdom''s people were far from ordinary. Yet, without solid evidence, taking action against a sovereign nation would devastate the Marine and World Government''s reputation. Kizaru, fully aware of these consequences, aimed to keep matters diplomatic, refraining from escalating the situation without cause. Seeing Kizaru''s resigned look, Anos added, "Since you''re here, please take a proper rest. It''s a pity we''ve already eaten, or we''d invite you to lunch." He wore a look of mock disappointment, letting out a small ''tsk'' as he spoke. ---- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 91. Nothing ---- Kizaru was likely in a mood, wishing that everyone aboard the Tempest were pirates, so he could attack without restraint. Anos didn''t treat him like a Marine admiral at all, his constant ridicule and sarcasm only added to Kizaru''s already sour mood. Here he was, known for his speed, sent to investigate matters with the Tru Kingdom fleet, only to find that his efforts were in vain. Yet, facing Anos, Kizaru could only maintain his lazy demeanour. "King Tru, you''re too polite. Surely, we''ll get a chance soon enough to catch up. After all, I travelled all this way to greet you; we barely had a chance to chat last time, right?" Anos laughed outright. The last time they''d met was just yesterday morning at a gathering hardly enough time had passed for them to have missed each other. "Admiral, perhaps you''d like to inspect the ship? Otherwise, we may never shake off suspicion ourselves," Anos said with a wry smile. This was the advantage of holding back one''s strength. Not only did it keep his true capabilities a mystery within his ranks, but outsiders were also none the wiser. While there were now a few more people aware of his strength, Anos trusted they wouldn''t reveal anything. Kizaru, however, felt a bit trapped. Facing the ruler of a kingdom, he knew Anos wasn''t intimidated by his Marine rank. Even if Anos showed him no respect, Kizaru had little choice but to accept it. "How awkward¡­" Kizaru muttered to himself, feeling both helpless and exasperated. He didn''t have much interest in investigating further, but leaving without any action would only raise questions back at headquarters. Since he was here, he had to do something. Anos''s nonchalant attitude left Kizaru no option but to feign helplessness. Tempest wasn''t particularly large, and with his Observation Haki, Kizaru had already swept the entire vessel. Although it held plenty of gold and silver, it was nothing compared to the wealth stolen from Mariejois.The narrative has been illicitly obtained; should you discover it on Amazon, report the violation. "Admiral, if you''re not investigating, then it might not be convenient to keep you much longer." "You have many duties, and we wouldn''t want to delay you from tracking down the true culprit behind Mariejois''s incident." "We, too, hope you can catch the offender soon so we can finally be cleared of suspicion," Anos said with a casual smile. "That''s right; it''s a complicated situation. Sometimes, I envy you, Your Majesty. To rule a kingdom so young and live so comfortably I wonder when our paths will cross again," Kizaru said with a grin. "Don''t worry. There will certainly be another opportunity. I can promise you that!" Anos replied with a smirk. "Then, until next time." Kizaru stood, his body transforming into light, streaking away in another direction. As he departed, the hull of the ship shuddered slightly. Most people wouldn''t notice something so minor; at sea, a small wave could easily explain a ship''s shake. But if only it were that simple. "The Pika Pika no Mi is impressive, with unmatched speed, and it looks so cool!" Anos mused, reclining leisurely as he watched Kizaru''s light fade away. "Your Majesty, I didn''t expect anyone would catch up after we were so far ahead!" Daiki added. "A Marine Admiral? Has he risen that high now? Hard to believe! If memory serves, this guy was once a disciple of Admiral Zephyr, and now he''s equal to his former mentor!" Abona remarked thoughtfully. "You''re right he''s Black Arm Zephyr''s former student. However, you''re mistaken about one thing. Zephyr left the Marines, and Kizaru only recently took on his admiral position," Anos clarified. "It sounds like the Marines have seen quite a shake-up over the last couple of years," Abona observed. "Since you''ve been in the New World so long, Abona, you must know it well. How about sharing some insights?" Daiki asked eagerly. "I want to hear too!" Losta chimed in, curiosity lighting up her face. "Your Majesty, it looks like the admiral may have damaged the hull before leaving. We need to find a place for repairs soon," Barlow interjected, approaching in a rush. "Is there a problem with the main keel?" Anos asked, and everyone turned his way. This was no minor issue, especially on the open sea. If the keel were damaged, their ship might sink before they could reach shore. "Your Majesty, how did you know the main keel is compromised?" Barlow asked, surprised. "No need for explanations. That admiral likely sabotaged it on his way out. It seems he didn''t enjoy our conversation," Anos replied, remaining composed. "But the main keel is damaged. That means the ship is essentially out of commission. So what''s our plan?" Barlow asked. "We''ll press on for now. If we encounter a pirate ship along the way, perhaps we''ll secure ourselves a replacement," Anos replied calmly. Though inwardly angered, Anos knew he could do little. Facing a Marine admiral head-on was not a risk they could afford yet. But he hadn''t anticipated Kizaru would stoop to such petty measures. On this vast sea, a damaged main keel was no small issue. With ships of wooden construction like theirs, the main keel acted as a central support beam, forming the structure''s backbone. Other parts could be fixed, but the keel was irreplaceable. With the full crew onboard, everyone was now grasping the severity of the situation. Yet, while others began to panic, His Majesty the King remained unshaken, still reclining calmly on his chair, unfazed by the turmoil around him. ---- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 92. Hancock Fortunately, Kizaru didn''t cause much trouble before leaving. Although the main keel of the ship was damaged, they could still reach their destination assuming they didn''t encounter any strong winds or rough seas along the way. This only adds a bit of risk to the journey. When the time comes, they might have to consider other options. Although they lost one ship, all suspicion surrounding their actions at Mariejois was completely cleared. An Admiral from Marine Headquarters had personally investigated the matter, and naturally, no one else would consider it further, leaving them out of the spotlight. "Just do what you need to do. Don''t waste time here. Daiki, hurry up and find a place where we can repair or buy a new ship." Anos spoke with his usual indifferent expression. Now that he had so much gold and silver treasure in his possession, he placed little value on the cost of a single ship. "Your Majesty¡­" "Oh, by the way, Abona, since the ship is in this condition, I can''t demonstrate my sword skills for now. I''ll save it for another time," Anos said casually while reclining on a deck chair. "Your Majesty, that''s not what I meant¡ªa ship is approaching us!" Abona said urgently. Anos looked in the direction Abona indicated but saw nothing. He began to wonder just how far Abona''s Observation Haki could sense. Additionally, this person was also a swordsman. If Abona had been a sniper, this ability would have been even more valuable. The ship''s hull creaked with every wave, giving the sense that it could sink to the depths at any moment. But no one aboard seemed particularly concerned. With the hull damaged, it was only natural to change course and head elsewhere. However, about ten kilometres away, a vessel pulled by two massive creatures was slowly approaching them.This tale has been unlawfully obtained from Royal Road. If you discover it on Amazon, kindly report it. This ship''s sails seemed to serve little purpose, as it was primarily towed by the two enormous creatures. Its hull was painted red, giving it a delicate, striking appearance from afar. The ship''s sail bore the emblem of nine snake heads and a large symbol of "Éß" (Snake) was written on the jib. "Sister Hancock, are we going to accept the Marines'' invitation to become a Shichibukai?" On the large ship being pulled by two snake-like creatures, a woman with long green hair and an unusually large head knelt, looking up at an enchanting woman seated on the deck. Boa Hancock, celebrated as the most beautiful woman in the pirate world, lived up to her reputation. Even seated, her noble bearing was unmistakable. With her flawless figure, flowing black hair, and exquisite features, she exuded a regal aura. Her "throne" was not a chair but a massive snake coiled beneath her. Everyone on board was a woman, or at least, there appeared to be no men. As the Pirate Empress and ruler of Amazon Lily, Boa Hancock''s expression remained calm. "Granny Nyon said that joining the Shichibukai would benefit our nation. Whatever we do in the future will be legally sanctioned, and the Marines and World Government won''t bother us during this time." "What''s even more frustrating is that if either the Marines or World Government is in trouble, all Shichibukai members are required to help!" "Sister, wouldn''t that mean giving up our freedom?" Sonia asked. "More or less," Hancock replied, sounding somewhat resigned. Still, if forced to choose, she would likely prefer this path. As an Empress, she felt a duty to protect her people. "But there''s nothing we can do about it, Sonia. I don''t like it either, but Granny Nyon has a point. I just hope this isn''t a Marine trap." The speaker, this time, was a plump woman with an expression mirroring Sonia''s earlier concern, a snake-like tongue flicking from her mouth. Her hair was orange and her head was of normal size, though her build was considerably larger. The crew listened attentively to Marigold''s words, with the women on deck turning to observe their queen. Boa Hancock''s caution showed a level of prudence they all respected. "Gold, don''t pay too much mind to Granny Nyon''s words. That old lady just wants to push everything onto me. I don''t know what''s going through her mind," Hancock said dismissively. "But didn''t you accept her advice, Sister?" Sonia teased with a smile. "Silence! This is simply what I choose to do!" Hancock struck a proud posture, lifting her chin with a haughty gaze. Just then, the lookout called out from above, "Stay on guard! There''s an unknown ship heading quickly towards us!" At her words, the women on deck quickly gathered, focusing on the approaching vessel. Sonia pushed through the crowd and, upon spotting the approaching ship, turned to Hancock, who sat atop her large snake and called, "Sister, it seems like a merchant ship is passing by. Shall we take action?" Hancock rose from her seat, followed by Groud, and stood on the deck, surveying the vessel. The ship, now visible as the Tempest, looked like an easy target a fat prize ready for the taking and the key to funding their mission on the seas. "Prepare to capture that ship. Our mission at sea begins now!" Hancock commanded. They cared little for the identity of those aboard. So long as it wasn''t a Marine or World Government vessel, it was fair game. The women of Amazon Lily, no less eager than men for a fight, braced themselves, excited for the raid to come. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 93. Loyalty --- Almost all the women aboard had either bows and arrows on their backs or spears in hand. In this pirate world moving toward modernization, their weapons may appear primitive, but their true power would only be known once put to the test. As the two ships drew closer, the crew aboard the Tempest showed no signs of worry. Many had gathered on the deck, ready to seize the other ship when the time came. There were about 80 people on Anos''s ship, including 20 members of the Royal Guards. Each of them was highly skilled, with the power to use Haki. Only those with such ability could serve directly under Anos; otherwise, they''d be of no use. Anos lay back on a deck chair, observing the ship ahead. He had already sensed its presence and was surprised it wasn''t every day he encountered the Kuja Pirates in such an inhospitable place. "Your Majesty, as this is the first battle, may I request to take action?" Abona asked respectfully, standing beside Anos''s chair. Before Anos could respond, Daiki interjected with a touch of displeasure, "Abona, you just joined the kingdom. Some roles aren''t up for competition. As captain of the Royal Guards, tasks like these fall under my responsibility." "Captain Daiki, just this once. His Majesty saved me I have to prove my worth!" Abona replied, resolute. "Enough, both of you," Anos interrupted, his tone relaxed. "How about staying still and watching quietly? On that ship sails the most beautiful woman on the Grand Line. I''ll handle this myself." Daiki raised an eyebrow. "Your Majesty, how do you know she''s beautiful? I haven''t heard anything like that before!"The narrative has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the infringement. "Quit asking so many questions," Anos replied calmly. "Just stay back, and protect yourselves. These women aren''t as simple as you might think." "Do you know this person, Your Majesty?" Abona asked, curious. "Know her? Hardly. But listen up: do not provoke them. We may need to rely on their ship to get us somewhere safe." Anos reclined back on his chair, hands tapping lightly on the armrests as he spoke in a measured tone. His crew exchanged glances, wondering if their King was this captivated by beauty. "Your Majesty, the ship ahead belongs to the Kuja Pirates the only Grand Line crew ruled by women. And¡­ they despise men," Suzu explained, holding a notebook and adjusting her glasses. Anos smiled slightly. "That news is a bit late, Suzu. I''ve known from the start. That ship belongs to Boa Hancock, Captain of the Kuja Pirates and Empress of Amazon Lily." "She''s got all three types of Haki Conquerors, Armament, and Observation, and she wields the power of a Devil Fruit that turns people to stone." His words left his crew speechless. How did their King know so much? They spent most of their time together, yet somehow, he had knowledge that left them all baffled. "All right, everyone, prepare to meet the saviour who might just help us get to where we need to go," Anos said, grinning. Rising from his chair, he strolled to the guardrail, watching the approaching ship with keen interest. Meanwhile, aboard the Kuja Pirates'' ship, the crew was puzzled. Why were these strangers coming straight toward them, showing no hesitation? "Sister Hancock, shall we open fire?" Marigold asked, ready for combat. "Hold off for now," Hancock replied. She had a feeling they weren''t approaching with hostile intent. Something about the other ship seemed¡­ different. The two ships were now only about a mile apart. Those with keen eyesight could just make out the figures aboard each ship. On the Tempest, Anos''s crew had received their orders. Instead of preparing for battle, they leaned against the rails, curiously watching the all-female crew on the Kuja ship. "Abona, as a swordsman newly joined to our side, you haven''t yet received a proper welcome gift. Take this," Anos said, tossing a long, gleaming blade to him. This was no ordinary sword; it was one of the Supreme Grade swords in the One Piece world. The sword had been a significant purchase, costing over 200 million Beris, but Anos was a wealthy king. With his fortune in gold and jewels, he could afford to arm his new allies well. It wasn''t just to show Anos knew that loyalty required tangible rewards. He wanted Abona well-prepared for whatever might come next. After some time together, he slowly started to trust Abona, but time will tell if he will live or die. ---- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 94. Most beautiful woman --- After catching the Sword thrown at him, Abona looked at it, bewildered. He hadn''t even fully processed what had just happened. Where did His Majesty King Anos get this weapon, and why had he handed it to him? "Your Majesty, this...," Abona began, hesitant. Anos merely replied, "This is Dawn, a Supreme Grade sword. It''s fitting for a swordsman of your standing. I may not know the full extent of your skill with the blade, but if you can''t reach the heights of a great swordsman, such a weapon would be a shame to carry." "The Supreme Grade...!" Abona''s eyes widened in shock. As a swordsman, he understood the gravity of what he now held. The realization of the sword''s significance left him speechless. Finally, regaining his composure, Abona knelt on the deck, bowing low. "Your Majesty, I will not fail in the mission you''ve given me!" Daiki who stood by, gave a slight, approving smile, while King Anos simply nodded, motioning for Abona to rise. "Stand up. Don''t take this too seriously," Anos said, his tone more relaxed. "Your Majesty has not only saved my life but has also entrusted me with such a treasure. Everything I''ve done, I would do a thousand times over," Abona declared, his voice full of conviction. "Alright, stand up. Let''s not give the impression that we''re under too much pressure," Anos replied, his attention already shifting to the approaching vessel of the Kuja Pirates. He focused intently, barely acknowledging Abona''s continued pledge of loyalty. As the two ships drew closer, each crew member could make out the other''s faces, yet neither side fired. It was evident that Boa Hancock''s crew had no intention of outright hostility at least, not yet.This text was taken from Royal Road. Help the author by reading the original version there. The men aboard Anos'' ship, however, had a very different reaction. Upon noticing the all-female crew of the Kuja Pirates, they were visibly eager, some nearly abandoning their posts to admire the famed beauties of Amazon Lily. "Oh, so those two giant snakes are pulling their ship!" Suzu observed, fascinated by the Kuja Pirates'' unique vessel. "Quite the sight," Daiki remarked, nodding in agreement. "Your Majesty," Abona interjected, "would you like me to go over and assess their intentions first?" "We''ll approach them openly. No need for rash action," Anos said with a steady tone. Although the ship had taken some damage during its recent skirmish with Admiral Kizaru, it was still seaworthy. Anos seemed unworried, focused instead on the Kuja Pirates. Meanwhile, the Kuja Pirates observed the approaching ship with equal curiosity. The flag flying on Anos'' vessel was unfamiliar to them, though the women showed little concern. As long as the ship didn''t belong to the Marines or the World Government, it was no threat in their eyes. "Sister, they don''t seem scared at all," said Marigold, one of the Kuja warriors, noticing the open, almost appreciative looks directed toward them from Anos'' men. The two ships were now close enough for voices to carry across the water, and the Kuja could hear their counterparts'' reactions. On the Kuja ship, Hancock narrowed her eyes, sensing that something was unusual. Typically, any vessel, whether a merchant ship or from a foreign kingdom, would either flee or show signs of fear upon sighting pirates. Yet, these men showed none of the typical signs of distress. "Snake Princess, they''re within our attack range. Shall we engage?" one of the Kuja warriors called out to Boa Hancock. As she weighed her options, the ships drew even closer. On the deck of his vessel, Anos glanced at Daiki and Abona. "Let''s go. Remember, don''t initiate anything rash," he instructed. "Understood, Your Majesty," they both replied and followed him as they leapt onto the Kuja Pirates'' ship. When they landed, Hancock''s intuition was confirmed these men were indeed formidable. She recognized this with a guarded expression as she observed King Anos and his two companions, who radiated an imposing aura. Stepping forward, Anos addressed her directly. "Are you Boa Hancock?" he asked, his gaze unwavering. Hancock, the famed Snake Princess and Warlord of the Sea held her head high, her voice carrying a regal air. "Did you come here specifically for me? What is it you want?" she demanded, looking down at him with her characteristic pride and defiance. The Kuja Pirates, now fully on alert, braced themselves, awaiting Hancock''s word. The atmosphere was tense, with the slightest movement potentially sparking a confrontation. Hancock''s eyes narrowed as she sized up Anos, realizing that her initial assessment was correct this man and his companions were more than they appeared. ---- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 95. Capturing the ship. --- "She is indeed beautiful, with exquisite features and a flawless figure. She''s the most stunning woman in the pirate world." Anos smiled as he looked at Hancock standing before him. "How dare you tease my sister!" "If I were you, I''d accept the reality of the situation. With your current strength, either of the two people behind me could obliterate your entire ship. But I''m not interested in that, and neither are you. So, let''s make things simple." "Let me borrow your ship. Our ship is damaged and might not make it to the nearest land. We have nearly eighty crew members, and we''ll board your ship until we find a place to dock." Sonia''s angry voice reached Anos, who responded directly. Hancock, understanding the situation, realized the truth of Anos''s words. It was clear that the strength of just one of his companions could easily destroy their ship. "How do you know me? Who are you?" Hancock demanded. "Anos, King of the Tru Kingdom in the South Blue. We''re commandeering your ship now. Cooperate, and you won''t be harmed." "I''m a pirate and won''t surrender so easily even if it means my life." Hancock''s expression turned cold as she faced Anos, shouting, "Slave Arrow!" Using her Devil Fruit ability, Hancock raised her left hand to her mouth and formed a large red heart shape. With a pull, it transformed into a wave of pink arrows. This time, however, her target wasn''t Anos but the entire crew on the Abby. "Watch out¡­!" Daiki shouted, but it was too late. In a flash, everyone on the Abby turned into stone statues, their expressions frozen as if they hadn''t even had time to react.If you discover this tale on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the violation. "Do you think I am a simp?" Anos bellowed, unleashing a wave of Conqueror''s Haki that swept over the entire area. In an instant, everyone aboard the Nine Snake''s ship collapsed, unconscious, except for Hancock and her two sisters, Sandersonia and Marigold. Yet, even they struggled. Both Sandersonia and Marigold gripped their weapons, steadying themselves to avoid collapsing under the force of his Haki. "Conqueror''s Haki!" Hancock''s face was filled with shock as beads of sweat formed. Though she resisted, the sheer intensity of Anos''s Haki stunned her. "Indeed, a true Conqueror''s Haki," Abona muttered with a smirk from behind Anos. "Hancock, reverse the petrification immediately, or I''ll make your entire Amazon Lily pay for this." Anos''s tone was cold, knowing that if the petrification was lifted soon, his crew would remain unharmed. However, the longer it lasted, the greater the risk. "Let everyone on this ship go, and I''ll undo the petrification," Hancock replied, her voice wavering. She realized the mistake she''d made. She had hoped to use her powers as leverage against Anos. But it was clear she''d underestimated him. His strength was far beyond what she''d imagined. "I didn''t come here to make trouble. I simply needed a place to dock. I''ll overlook your behaviour this time, and once we reach land, I''ll compensate you with 100 million Beris." "Very well," Hancock responded, though reluctantly. Just as she prepared to reverse the petrification, Sandersonia, standing behind her, shouted, "Sister¡­!" "Young lady, I''d advise against foolish actions. At His Majesty''s command, I won''t hesitate to reunite you with your crew in another place." Before Sonia could speak, Abona appeared beside her, his blade resting near her shoulder, emanating a fierce aura that left her momentarily frozen. "Stop¡­" Hancock quickly pushed Sandersonia aside, casting a worried look at Anos. "Abona, Daiki, return to the ship. I''d like a word with our guests," Anos said with a slight smirk. "As you wish, Your Majesty," Daiki replied, showing no concern for Anos''s safety. Daiki was well aware of Anos''s capabilities. He had witnessed Anos''s Devil Fruit powers firsthand abilities that made Anos nearly invulnerable. The two left, jumping back to the Abby, leaving Anos seated on the deck of the Nine Snakes'' ship. "Can we start unbinding them now?" Anos asked, his smile unwavering. Hancock, casting a glance at her sisters, reluctantly repeated her move, firing the same arrows that unpetrified the crew on the Tempest. Each returned to life as though no time had passed, resuming their previous movements. "Now that they''re freed, what exactly do you want?" Hancock asked, licking her dry lips, a trace of fear visible. This was the consequence of her current lack of strength. As Empress, she was far from the powerful figure she''d become later. It was disheartening. She had initially believed that this encounter might end in her favour, but upon seeing Anos''s strength firsthand, she questioned how someone like him had evaded Marine scrutiny for so long. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 96. Healing the scars --- Perhaps it''s simply too early in the current timeline, as many pirates aren''t as powerful as expected. Hancock''s strength was far below what he had imagined. But after hearing her words, Anos straightened his clothes, smiling as he replied, "I don''t have any major demands; I just want to borrow a Ship. So there''s no need to be too hostile." "I know your story. We''re not interested in that, and we certainly won''t share it. As long as today passes peacefully, let''s pretend nothing happened. How does that sound?" "Do you think I have any other choice now?" Hancock responded, clearly displeased, but helpless nonetheless. "Then, I''ll be troubling you. Oh, by the way, I forgot to mention I know a way to remove that mark on your back. Interested?" Anos added, turning to Hancock with a smile. However, the three sisters were too shocked to respond. Hearing Anos''s words made their faces turn pale, and their eyes lost focus. They didn''t need to think hard to feel their deepest fears exposed. "Hey, hey, relax! I only mention this as a way of repaying your help. Or, if you''d rather, maybe someday you could consider being my queen?" Anos teased, grinning. After speaking, he entered his system space, spending nearly 200 million Beris to buy three bottles of something that could heal their scars. Anos knew that the biggest fear for the three sisters was others seeing the Celestial Dragon''s hoof marks on their backs a permanent mark of slavery. Even his companion, Suzu, had such a mark, though she didn''t seem to mind it. "How do you know so much? Who are you?" Hancock asked, her voice trembling. After Anos boarded, Hancock had already sensed that this man, around her age, knew too much about her and her sisters. They had never told anyone about their past, so where did this stranger learn it?Unauthorized use: this story is on Amazon without permission from the author. Report any sightings. This knowledge made her feel a chill of horror, as she desperately wanted to keep their Celestial Dragon past the most painful chapter of their lives. "Well, what difference does it make if I know? I just came back from Mariejois and took something from a Celestial Dragon. Your names were recorded on it, but I burned it. Also... I killed that Celestial Dragon." "Abona was his slave, but I took him away. Now, He follows me of his own will. Does that answer satisfy you?" Anos weaved a blend of truth and lies, creating a story that fit his intentions. "You killed a Celestial Dragon?" Hancock asked in shock. The two sisters beside her looked equally stunned, unable to believe what they were hearing. "Why do you think our ship was damaged? Less than half an hour ago, Marine Admiral Kizaru came here to investigate. Failing to find anything, he damaged our hull in secret, leaving us in this state," Anos explained with a slight smile. "I heard they called you ''Your Majesty.'' Are you the king of the Tru Kingdom in the South Blue?" asked a curious Marigold, looking at Anos. Anos remained seated, gazing calmly at the three sisters before him. Around them, no one else on the ship had regained consciousness. Meanwhile, the people on the Tempest were all staring in this direction. "Let everyone board your ship! Yours won''t hold up much longer," Hancock said to Anos, not responding to Groud. She regained her usual haughty demeanour, though her tone now carried a certain gentleness and composure. After speaking, she turned and walked towards the large snake, subdued by her Conqueror''s Haki. She wanted to check on its condition. Her two sisters exchanged surprised, curious glances. Since when had Has Hancock spoken so gently to a man? And even agreed so casually to his request? Anos chuckled. From the moment he first saw her after boarding, he had been drawn to her. Hancock, despite her pride, represented a goddess in the hearts of many men. Though her personality had rough edges, understanding her painful past made her current demeanour easier to empathize with. "Which is the nearest island from here?" Anos asked, looking at Gold and Sonia with a smile. "You''re asking about that? The nearest island should be our home, Amazon Lily. It''ll take about three days from here. There''s another island closer, but it''s uninhabited no people, no ships." "After that, the next inhabited island is far; it would take at least seven days to reach," Sonia answered quickly. Anos pondered. Just moments ago, the two sides had been at odds, yet now they felt like old acquaintances. His crew lay unconscious, yet here he was, conversing with ease. Gold also looked at him with admiration, not bothered at all by the earlier confrontation. "This sounds like a bit of a headache to solve," Anos sighed. While he was talking, Daiki had already begun loading supplies onto their ship. It was a good opportunity to share some of the women''s clothing they''d brought items now repurposed as gifts for the women of Amazon Lily. In addition to clothes, they loaded other provisions, including daily food, though there was little in the way of gold, silver, or jewellery. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 97. Nothing --- Now, none of the pirates were treated politely, each one seemed to have returned to their ship. Hancock observed this quietly but said nothing. Although she detested these men, she couldn''t act on it. Meanwhile, her two sisters, Sandersonia and Marigold, were engaging in a pleasant conversation with Anos, showing no hostility whatsoever. However, most of the Kuja Pirates remained on the ground. Only three members were able to engage in conversation. Hancock stood on the deck, her giant snake mount lying peacefully nearby. She watched as the crew on the Tempest moved toward her ship one by one, showing obvious disdain. But there was little she could do. Onboard, Daiki was still cautious of Hancock, while the others busily transported supplies. Although the Tempest wouldn''t sink immediately, the crew treated it as if it was about to. They began moving their belongings one by one to the Kuja Pirates'' ship. After the last person boarded, Daiki took inventory, then approached Anos, who was still chatting with Sandersonia and Marigold, and reported, "Your Majesty, everything is ready, and the crew is accounted for." "Good, then let''s set sail!" Anos replied with a smile. At that moment, the fainted Kuja Pirates began waking up one by one. Though still unsteady, they immediately went on guard, gripping their weapons, ready to defend themselves. If Hancock hadn''t still been on deck, the tension between the two sides might have escalated. "Why are you giving orders on my ship? We''re on the Kuja Pirates'' ship, so please don''t presume to command here!" Hancock strode up to Anos, having overheard him instructing Daiki, and angrily spoke up. "Why make such a fuss? For now, we''re sharing the same vessel. Your ship has ample space, and once we reach our next stop, both parties can go their separate ways," Anos replied with a slight smile.This story originates from a different website. Ensure the author gets the support they deserve by reading it there. Hancock hesitated, wanting to say more, but ultimately kept silent. "Sister, King Anos means no harm. Besides, they''ve promised to compensate us once they reach their destination. I think this arrangement is fair," Sandersonia added. "Sandersonia, what did he offer you in return? Don''t forget we''re all in this together!" Hancock countered. "There''s no need for such distinctions. If your Amazon Lily could provide us with a ship, we''d manage on our own. Under these circumstances, our options are limited," Anos replied calmly. "There''s an island just two miles from here. We''ll drop you off there, and you can handle things on your own," Hancock stated coldly. Daiki glared back at her and said icily, "Do you think this is a negotiation? Please don''t presume to be on equal footing. Speak to our King with respect, or I won''t hesitate to claim this ship for the Tru Kingdom!" "Daiki, these are all women here. Don''t be so harsh. We''ll be sharing this space for a while, and who knows, I might even make an alliance with Hancock for our Tru Kingdom!" Anos added though it was clear he was humorously teasing Daiki. Despite the words sounding like a reprimand, his tone was relaxed, and his demeanour cheerful. Anos then directed, "Have Barlow navigate towards the nearest island, ideally one with a ship nearby. If that doesn''t work, we''ll head to Water 7." "No, we don''t have time for detours. Water 7 is too far. Don''t push it," Hancock snapped coldly. "That''s right, King Anos. It''ll take at least half a month to reach Water 7 from here, and our people back in Amazon Lily are awaiting our return. Delaying too long could worry them," Marigold added. "Then how about we head to your Kingdom?" Anos replied with a thoughtful grin. "But men aren''t allowed near Amazon Lily. If we brought you, my sister would be furious," Marigold replied. "Your Majesty, why bother with pleasantries? If it comes to it, we can simply force our way through," Daiki suggested. All the Kuja Pirates who were now awake glared in anger, especially upon hearing that Anos wanted to visit their Kingdom. Their hostility was directed toward Hancock. "Are they being a bit too noisy? Should I make them sleep again?" Anos suggested to Hancock with a grin. Caught between her loyal crew and the unshakable Anos, Hancock clenched her fists, frustrated yet restrained. "Daiki, have Barlow steer toward the nearest island. If any ships appear, we''ll dock nearby. Let''s not escalate things too much," Anos instructed. "As you wish, Your Majesty." "And remind everyone of the boundaries. They''re guests on the Kuja Pirates'' ship, so let''s respect the customs here," Anos added. Daiki nodded, following the orders. "Happy now?" Anos asked Hancock with a sigh. For the first time, Hancock seemed uncertain, showing no resistance. She understood the strength of Anos'' crew and reluctantly accepted the situation for the sake of her people. "Do you have something that could erase the scars on our backs?" Hancock asked cautiously, her voice soft, almost as if fearing anyone else might hear. A shy look crossed her face as she awaited his response. Asking this showed a rare vulnerability, as it was a topic she usually avoided at all costs. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 98. Suzu the matchmaker --- Hancock no longer cared about how Anos knew the secrets about them, but the mysteries surrounding him had troubled them for years. Despite feeling a bit embarrassed, they had no choice but to ask. Sonia and Marigold, the two sisters standing beside Hancock, stared at Anos expectantly, occasionally licking their lips, eagerly awaiting a definite answer. "It''s not yet time to discuss this," Anos replied with a smile. "But since I''ve mentioned it, rest assured it''s true. You don''t need to doubt it." "Understood," Sonia responded. After listening to Anos''s words, Sonia glanced around and asked softly, "King Anos, this matter is crucial to us. I just want to confirm can you truly accomplish it?" "Don''t worry; I''ll make sure you have what you need when we dock," Anos assured with another smile. Grins spread across the faces of her two sisters. The gravity of this issue had long surpassed anything money could solve. As the Kuja Pirate Ship sailed away, the Tempest was now utterly deserted. All valuables had been removed, leaving only an empty vessel on the brink of sinking. But just before the Kuja Pirates set off, a sword shot into the sky, piercing through the Tempest from bow to stern, splitting it cleanly in two. Under everyone''s watchful eyes, the ship slowly sank into the water, leaving no trace behind. "Wow, Abona, that was incredible!" Daiki exclaimed, clapping Abona on the shoulders in awe. Though they already suspected Abona''s strength was exceptional, witnessing it firsthand left them truly convinced. Even the warriors of the Kuja Pirate Ship were astounded. With one swing, Abona had split an entire ship in half a level of power beyond their reach.The narrative has been illicitly obtained; should you discover it on Amazon, report the violation. "Abona, with the precision of Observation Haki, your swordsmanship has reached its peak!" Anos praised. "Your Majesty," Abona replied respectfully, "Captain Daiki once mentioned that you defeated an out-of-control Logia Devil Fruit user with a single slash and even destroyed a small island. I couldn''t achieve that yet." Anos glanced at Daiki, who now looked down sheepishly. "You really can''t keep anything to yourself, can you?" he remarked, shaking his head. However, Anos wasn''t concerned. They were partners now, and sharing information was only natural. Hancock and her crew on the opposite side of the deck observed the men closely. Despite the size of the Kuja Pirate Ship, their voices travelled easily, allowing the women to overhear the conversation. "Sister, they''re really strong!" Marigold murmured, still awed by Abona''s display of power. Hancock had also watched the scene unfold, and, in hindsight, felt grateful for her recent decision not to oppose them. It was likely the wisest choice she''d made. "What do you think of King Anos''s strength, Sister Hancock?" Sonia asked. "These matters aren''t your concern," Hancock replied curtly. "Focus on your duties." The previously quiet ship had become lively with the arrival of the men and women from the Tru Kingdom and Amazon Lily. Although there had been a bit of hostility initially, after a short time, the two sides began to mingle, laughing and chatting in the cabin and on deck. The Royal guards from Tru were enjoying conversations with Kuja warriors, each sharing stories about their homeland and pirate life. It was a sight Anos was pleased to see. Meanwhile, Hancock looked resigned as she kept Sonia and Marigold by her side. The ship now held over a hundred Kuja Pirates, along with seventy or eighty from the Tempest, creating a bustling crowd of one or two hundred people. As evening approached, Anos lay back on a deck chair and casually instructed Suzu beside him, "Order everyone from the Tru Kingdom to sleep on deck tonight and not disturb the Kuja women." Though he said it quietly, Hancock, passing by, overheard him. Suzu chuckled, sensing Anos might have taken a liking to the Pirate Empress. Hancock was in her late teens, radiating youthful charm, and Suzu didn''t disapprove. If Anos had listened to Suzu''s thoughts he would have thought, "Are you my mom or something, always eager for my marriage" "Your Majesty, shall I wait until after dinner? The crews are preparing for a feast." "Handle it as you see fit," Anos replied. With so many people aboard, much of the ship''s security had been delegated to Tru Kingdom guards. Daiki kept watch from the mast''s lookout post, observing their surroundings. Abona, meanwhile, enjoyed the peace atop the ship, listening to the ocean a long-lost call. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 99. Lively atmosphere --- The night was pitch black, with the vast sea stretching endlessly under a shroud of darkness. It was nearly impossible to see even a hand held up in front of one''s face, much less the direction to sail. But tonight, the pirate ship was alive with celebration. Nearly two hundred people were gathered on deck, crowded together despite the limited space. The deck seemed almost too small for so many, yet no one seemed to mind. Everyone was too caught up in the moment to worry about cramped quarters. Anos and Boa Hancock sat near the front, with others seated around them. Each held a jar of wine or a hunk of meat, indulging in the freedom they had fought so hard to enjoy. The supplies on board were plentiful, especially with the provisions from the Tempest ship. Although the Kuja Pirates weren''t excessively wealthy, tonight''s feast had pulled from a large share of their reserves to make this first banquet a memorable one. Most of the women wore elegant clothing taken from the Tempest, giving them an air of refinement. Even Boa''s sisters, Marigold and Sandersonia, sported their intricate outfits. The deck was filled with laughter and cheer, and in this moment, no one cared about distinctions between men and women. As the drinks flowed, arms entwined in camaraderie, until the crowd became one mass of joyful celebration. For the men from the Tru Kingdom, this night was perhaps the most fun they''d had since they first set out to sea. To be surrounded by so many women, who they''d expected to despise, was a rare treat. But for the women of Amazon Lily, who had once harboured only hatred for men, tonight was a revelation: they found men to be surprisingly enjoyable company. Many of the women, even as they feasted, took notes, carefully recording scenes of their interactions with the men. Anos didn''t drink much; he watched the festivities quietly. Abona kept his distance, but even Daiki and the captain of the Royal guards had been pulled into the crowd by Suzu and were joining in the drinking.If you spot this story on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation. "It''s rare to see such a happy scene. I think you feel the same way, right?" Anos asked Hancock, smiling as he took in the sight. A brilliant light shone down on the deck, making it as bright as day and dispelling any hint of darkness. Hancock looked at Anos, who was close to her in age. Perhaps it was the wine, or perhaps something else, but her cheeks turned a sudden shade of crimson. "Would you tell me more about your kingdom?" Hancock asked shyly. The two had been together for a day now, and conversation had naturally turned toward the matters that brought them here. Hancock hadn''t stopped her crew from mingling with the men from Tru Kingdom. Though she''d been upset initially, she couldn''t prevent what was now inevitable. The people from Tru Kingdom were enthusiastic and free-spirited, yet they respected boundaries. Anos noticed Hancock''s gaze and smiled. After a moment, he said, "If you''re interested, you could visit someday. Your ship can cross the Calm Belt, so reaching the Tru Kingdom in the South Blue wouldn''t take long. Who knows?" "Maybe you could leave behind the life of a pirate and create a peaceful kingdom of your own. At least then, you wouldn''t have to worry about your next meal." "Amazon Lily is a warrior''s nation," Hancock replied, smiling. "Our Kingdom''s small, with limited resources, and we''ve always relied on piracy to sustain ourselves. I don''t think your way would suit us." But as she smiled, Anos couldn''t help but admire her beauty. The sea around them glistened under the lights from the ship, and the gentle breeze played on everyone''s hearts. Anos understood Amazon Lily''s limitations. With only a few thousand people, their way of life was deeply rooted in tradition. They had always relied on piracy as a means of survival, not just a means of making a living. "Why did you pass through this area on your way back to the Tru Kingdom?" Hancock asked, breaking his thoughts. "I wanted to visit somewhere specific, which led me through this area. Otherwise, how else could I have met you?" His words brought another flush to Hancock''s cheeks, and she was suddenly unsure of what to say. Thankfully, no one seemed to notice them. Most were singing and dancing by now, and many had already had their fill of drink. Only Abona, keeping watch atop the mast, stayed vigilant. In truth, there was little need for caution in the middle of the night. They were unlikely to encounter any danger in such a remote part of the sea. Abona, however, didn''t share in the revelry below. Four years of imprisonment had left him yearning for freedom, but this kind of atmosphere reminded him too much of a life he had left behind. No one forced him to join in. He sat alone on the mast, holding the sword Anos had given him, "Dawn." "Hancock, have you heard about the World Government''s plans for the Warlords of the Sea?" Anos asked, turning his attention to her. "Ah! Yes...yes," Hancock replied, caught off guard and visibly flustered. He smiled at her reaction. Anos could read her easily and had an inkling he might leave this voyage with more than he bargained for. "The Marines and the World Government are forming the Seven Warlords of the Sea. They''re likely to finalize it at this year''s Reverie. If you still wish to remain a pirate, joining them could be beneficial. It would allow you to accumulate some wealth in a short time." "But if the World Government or the Marines demand our help, we''d have to obey without question," Hancock countered. "Why worry?" Anos replied, casually taking a sip of wine. "When the Marines or the Government need the Warlords, it means their authority is slipping. Only a few people in the New World could cause that, and they''re not reckless enough to provoke the Marines or the Government without reason." He took another sip, confident that his journey had set something significant in motion. ----- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 100. Enies Lobby --- In front of him was a small cup, unlike others who drank from a large jar or bowl. Hancock, seated beside Anos, was lost in thought about what he had said. Granny Nyon, whom she recalled from the past, had spoken similar words to her. Sitting there, Hancock''s expression gradually calmed. Without turning her head, she stated firmly, "I despise those in the World Government. Just the thought of working with them in the future disgusts me!" "And what about the people depending on you back home? How will you explain it to the citizens of your land?" Anos questioned. Hancock fell silent, deep in thought. Around them, others lay sprawled across the deck. Whether men or women, they had all succumbed to the wine and drifted into a slumber, with no intention of rising anytime soon. In the current warm weather, lying on the deck was pleasant. Even at sea, the night was slightly warm, and with the sea breeze brushing across, it was like a gentle, natural massage. "Go rest, it''s getting late," Anos reminded. "What about you?" "I''ll stay here. You should use the rooms," he replied. Hancock didn''t seem to fully understand what Anos was thinking, but eventually, she rose and made her way to her quarters. She carefully stepped around the bodies on the deck, making sure not to step on anyone. Those who lay near the edge leaned against the railings, and if not for them, they might have rolled right into the sea. Daiki, captain of the Royal Guards, was also slumped in a drunken stupor. Only a handful remained awake on the ship. Once Hancock left, Abona, who had been resting in the room atop the mast, appeared beside Anos, curiously saying, "Your Majesty, you seem interested in the Pirate Empress?" "You can see that?" Anos replied with an amused smile. --- The next morning, as dawn broke, most were still sprawled on the deck. Suddenly, a woman''s scream pierced the air, jolting everyone awake. A case of content theft: this narrative is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation. In a daze, they staggered to their feet, trying to make sense of the noise. The voice belonged to a woman rushing across the deck. She called out to Sonia, who had just barely managed to stand. "Lady Sonia, the Kuja ship is sailing towards our homeland!" Everyone had spent the night on the deck, with no one steering the ship. However, unlike regular vessels that rely solely on sails, this ship was led by two massive Sea Kings in front. When the wind died down, these creatures would pull the ship forward. No one had anticipated that, with no one at the helm, the Sea Kings would steer them straight toward Amazon Lily. Realizing this, Sonia snapped to attention. They were only days away from Amazon Lily, closer than she had expected. The commotion woke everyone who''d been lying down, and they scrambled to figure out what was happening. For the people from the Tru Kingdom, it seemed unremarkable, but for the crew of the Kuja Pirates, the realization stirred a sense of urgency. Amidst the uproar, Anos and Hancock emerged. They hadn''t shared quarters; Anos had slept in the room next to Hancock''s, the one originally used by Sonia and her sister, especially prepared for him. Upon arriving, Anos asked Daiki with a stern expression, "What happened?" Daiki, who had appeared nonchalant moments before, now looked visibly guilty. "Your Majesty, last night we didn''t check the course. When we awoke, we realized the ship had been moving toward Amazon Lily and was now nearing the Calm Belt." "Which island are we closest to now?" Anos inquired. "Your Majesty, we''re almost at the Calm Belt. The nearest island is the Marine''s Enies Lobby. It would take only a day to reach." Daiki glanced at the map in his hands. Amazon Lily lies in the Calm Belt on the edge of the Grand Line. Anos was not particularly eager to go there. However, with everyone aboard identified as pirates, any approach to Enies Lobby would surely provoke an attack. This situation presented a dilemma. Although Anos was the king of the Tru Kingdom, many on this ship wouldn''t recognize him by sight. Few had ever actually seen him in person. "Hancock, what do you make of this situation?" Anos asked, turning to her. After the night''s reflection, Hancock''s expression had shifted, and she regarded Anos with a hint of confusion. "It''s farther from Amazon Lily going this way, but cutting through the Calm Belt would take us to Amazon Lily much faster. Still, Enies Lobby is relatively close." "Otherwise, there''s no other island nearby, and any detour could take half a month to reach the nearest one," Hancock explained. "You''re right, Empress," Daiki added. "We''ve missed the closest uninhabited island. From here, we can either go directly to Amazon Lily through the Calm Belt or detour past Enies Lobby." Anos stood thoughtfully for a moment, then called out to Abona, who had been hidden from sight. "Abona, scan the area to see if there are any nearby merchant or pirate ships." In an instant, Abona appeared atop the highest mast and used his Haki to survey the surroundings. The Tru Kingdom sailors didn''t understand why their king wanted to avoid heading straight to Amazon Lily. Yet Hancock alone seemed to sense something deeper, her gaze filled with newfound respect for the man before her. In this desolate stretch of the sea, with not even a single gull in sight, let alone ships, they faced a quiet, uncertain path ahead. ---- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 101. Jaya Island --- No one expected that after just one night''s rest, their course would deviate so far. It was too unrealistic to consider turning back. They could only start searching for nearby ships as they continued forward. "Where do you want to go?" Hancock asked quietly. "Jaya Island!" Anos replied with a smile. "That would take about a month to sail round-trip!" Listening to Hancock talking to herself, Anos smiled slightly and suggested, "It might be better if you drop us off at a nearby location first. We''ve delayed you long enough, and we wouldn''t want to impact the economic welfare of your kingdom any further." "It''s no problem, King Anos. Our Kingdom has enough provisions to last at least another half-month, so there''s no immediate worry for us," Sonia added with a smile as she moved forward to speak with him. "Your Majesty, if it''s possible, we could even offer a payment to the Kuja Pirates to ferry us to our designated destination," Suzu proposed. "No¡­" Anos began. "This sounds like a good idea! We won''t ask for much, just 500 million Beris!" Before Anos could respond, Marigold clapped a hand on Suzu''s shoulder and announced. The others had no say in the matter and could only stand by, watching. "Sister, we promised we''d make it happen no matter what. If King Tru is willing to pay, we should be able to accept it, right?" Marigold asked Hancock. Yet, she seemed lost in thought, staring blankly and barely listening to them. Nevertheless, if Marigold and Sonia agreed to the arrangement, Hancock would have no objections. The other members of the Kuja Pirates also seemed generally satisfied and unconcerned about the deal. After spending a day and night with these men, the Kuja Pirates had let down their guard. Ensure your favorite authors get the support they deserve. Read this novel on the original website. Having never been around men before, they found themselves unexpectedly fond of these representatives from the Tru Kingdom. "Your Majesty, my team has scouted the area and found no ships within a 50-kilometer radius. Our options are to either head towards Enies Lobby, make our way to Amazon Lily, or take a detour to another location," Abona reported, leaping down from the upper deck and standing respectfully beside Anos. "Alright, I understand," Anos replied, feeling somewhat resigned. Unless they encountered merchant or other ships along the way, they had limited ways to disembark. He briefly considered acquiring a ship from the system''s inventory, though doing so abruptly would likely arouse suspicion. Finally snapping out of her daze, Hancock declared, "Everyone, set the course for Jaya Island! We''re heading out on the Grand Line to expand our experience!" Hancock''s sudden announcement left everyone stunned. The idea of a pirate crew ferrying a king such a long distance was unprecedented. Even Sonia and her sister looked at Hancock with surprise, their eyes wide with disbelief. They had proposed this earlier only in jest, but they hadn''t imagined Hancock would agree. The men from Tru Kingdom were equally shocked, wondering if they''d heard correctly. Anos sighed and looked at Hancock, feeling a bit helpless. Given that they''d only just met, her willingness to go so far was astonishing. "Are you truly willing to do this?" Anos asked, studying Hancock. Smiling like a young girl, Hancock softly touched her index fingers together, saying shyly, "There''s nothing urgent in our kingdom, and I just wanted to see what the Grand Line is like." Listening to Hancock, Anos could only say, "Let''s stop at Amazon Lily first; I have something for you." "Oh? What is it?" Hancock asked, surprised. "You''ll see when we get there," Anos replied calmly. The Kuja Pirates implicitly trusted Hancock''s orders. If she chose to sail to Amazon Lily or even take them ashore, no one would object. The ship pressed forward, the two sea kings pulling it along, clearly faster than when they relied solely on sails. After receiving confirmation, the crew began preparing for another banquet. Still recovering from the last night''s festivities, they dove into the celebrations once more, abandoning all restraint. It was hard to tell who was the pirate between the two groups; both were equally uninhibited, with no one minding much what the others did. Amid the revelry, Abona alone stood at the top, keeping a vigilant watch over the surroundings, his expression serious and focused, in contrast to the joyful atmosphere below. As the crew plotted their course, the Kuja Pirates quickly hoisted the sails before the banquet began, relying on the sea kings to drive the ship forward. With the sails down, the ship relied solely on the two immense sea kings for propulsion. Without the sails, their speed noticeably increased. Within half a day, they entered the Calm Belt. The stillness of this region was unlike anything they''d imagined; true to its name, there was no wind at all. A sailboat in the Calm Belt was nearly impossible to manoeuvre. But the Calm Belt held more than just the absence of wind. Looking out over the water, they could see strange changes rippling through the sea. ---- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 102. Seastone Thank you, " Edward Mainwood ", for becoming an Elite member on P@treon; shoutout out to you. Enjoy! --- Many people were already lying on the edge of the boat, peering down at the vast sea below. The colossal figures beneath them were so massive that some were as large as islands. Yet here, there seemed to be an endless number of these creatures. "It''s incredible! This is the Calm Belt! I''ve heard stories, but I never expected to see so many enormous creatures here," remarked a guard from the Tru Kingdom, standing at the rail in awe. "Didn''t you know? This is typical for the Calm Belt. It''s why most pirates enter the Grand Line through Reverse Mountain the presence of these monsters makes it nearly impossible to cross otherwise.'' "Some of these creatures are hundreds of meters long, even stretching over several kilometres. It''s beyond anything we can imagine," said a female member of the pirate crew with a knowing smile as she leaned over the edge beside the guard. "How could anyone live in a place like this? And how do you keep them from attacking you every time you sail out?" the guard asked, curiosity evident in his tone. He wasn''t the only one wondering; others nearby had pricked up their ears, eager to know the secret behind safely crossing the Calm Belt. Currently, aside from the Marines and the World Government, only the Kuja Pirates possess the means to navigate this treacherous area safely. Even the powerful Four Emperors, who dominate the Grand Line, are cautious here. The Grand Line and the Calm Belt places where survival is uncertain, and one misstep could mean death without a trace. While this conversation unfolded, Anos and Hancock sat nearby, appearing to chat casually with others but listening intently. When the pirate girl heard the guard''s question, she hesitated for a moment, then responded with a slight laugh, "That''s just the way we live! I''m not really sure of the details."Unlawfully taken from Royal Road, this story should be reported if seen on Amazon. "I see. Well, it''s still impressive. If we could safely cross the Calm Belt, it would cut the journey to the Grand Line by at least half," the guard replied, grinning. Others nearby continued to ask similar questions, driven by simple curiosity. Overhearing this, Anos, who was sitting on the deck sipping tea, exchanged glances with Boa Hancock, who sat beside him. "Wouldn''t you like to know how we survive in the Calm Belt?" Hancock asked with a smile. Anos, along with the three Kuja sisters, continued their conversation and snacks. At Hancock''s question, however, Anos merely smiled. "Hancock, it''s best not to share too much with others. The ability to navigate the Calm Belt is one of the Marine''s and World Government''s greatest assets. Imagine if other nations or pirates had access to this technology what would happen?" Anos said thoughtfully, taking another sip of tea. "But haven''t we been crossing it ourselves? And for the Marines, it''s not as though they can keep this knowledge hidden forever," Sonia replied, puzzled. "While the Marines have developed a way to cross the Calm Belt, they also have a significant limitation," Anos explained. "They can sail, yes, but they''re at a disadvantage in battle here. Despite their strength, they''re still vulnerable." Hearing this, Hancock pondered for a moment before asking, "Could this be why the Marines invited us to join the Shichibukai? Because of our ability to navigate the Calm Belt?" "Perhaps. With your current strength, joining the Shichibukai might be challenging, but the fact that you can sail and fight in the Calm Belt makes you invaluable to the World Government," Anos explained, considering his words carefully. "While the Kuja Pirates may not rival someone like Crocodile in raw strength, the Calm Belt advantage changes things." Anos suspected that one reason the World Government accepted various pirates into the Shichibukai was due to personal vendettas against the Four Emperors Crocodile, for instance, harboured a grudge against Whitebeard. In these turbulent times, the government sought stability, making Amazon Lily''s strength in the Calm Belt a strategic advantage. Even a Marine admiral could face peril here. The Calm Belt''s beasts are beyond ordinary comprehension, though few have seen them clearly. Yet, their presence looms, reminding all who sail of their power. "King Anos, how do you know so much about these things?" asked Marigold as she munched on some food. "There are only a few methods to cross the Calm Belt safely. The Marines use Sea-Prism Stone, which emits an aura similar to the sea, allowing ships to move undetected." "For you, Kuja, the solution has always been simpler. You tame Sea Kings, training them to ferry your ships safely," Anos answered with a calm smile. While others in the crew were oblivious, the three Kuja sisters knew exactly what he was talking about. The Kuja Pirates survived the Calm Belt by commanding these mighty Sea Kings, enabling them to navigate freely through the otherwise treacherous waters. For outsiders, this was a mystery. While many suspected that the Marines used Sea Prism Stone, the specifics remained unknown to most. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 103. Teaching Haki Thank you, " Allen Pellissery ", for becoming an Elite member on P@treon; shoutout out to you. Enjoy! --- All of this had already been foreseen by Anos, who could even explain his reasoning. This left those around him in awe. "King Anos, it feels as if you know everything. May I ask the purpose of your journey to jaya Island?" Sonia inquired. "That''s right. That place is quite distant from your South Blue. I''ve heard it''s a notorious haven for pirates on the Grand Line," Gold added. No matter how they speculated, they couldn''t comprehend why Anos would choose to visit such a city of sin. However, from his expression, Hancock sensed a deeper intention. Turning to her younger sisters, she said with a serious tone, "This concerns the national affairs of another Kingdom. You two should restrain your curiosity." "Yes, onee-sama!" her two peculiar-looking sisters replied, bowing their heads, barely daring to eat. Although Hancock didn''t reprimand them, they seemed to realize the gravity of the moment. "Why do you want to go to Amazon Lily first? It''s quite a detour from our destination," Hancock asked, now showing a hint of caution. Though she had developed a favorable impression of Anos over the past two days, the security of her nation weighed heavily on her mind. "You needn''t worry about that," Anos replied. "Since you''ve agreed to escort us to jaya Island, we will ensure that no unusual circumstances affect your land." "What do you mean by that?" Hancock asked, intrigued by his words. Anos didn''t reply immediately. Instead, he extended his hand before her, where a blue glow surrounded his palm. In a moment, a large gem materialized in his open hand. The sight left the three women momentarily speechless. Gold, visibly startled, exclaimed, "An ability user?"The narrative has been taken without permission. Report any sightings. "I have 500 million Beris here. You can send it back to support the people on your island, enough for them to sustain themselves for a while. This way, you won''t owe us anything later on," Anos said with a smile. "Are you really willing to pay us?" Sonia asked, astonished. "Do you think I''d need to deceive you?" Anos replied. After exchanging looks, the three women''s wary expressions softened, feeling reassured. During their voyage, as the group chatted, a sword suddenly pierced the air. Before anyone could react, Abona leaped out of the water, carrying a massive leg far larger than himself. "Sorry, everyone! I couldn''t resist taking a swim, but this creature wouldn''t stop bothering me, so I thought I''d bring it up for dinner!" Abona said with a grin, catching everyone by surprise. "You idiot! I was looking into the water when you nearly sliced me!" Suzu shouted at him. "Sorry, sorry! It was just an accident!" Abona chuckled. "That''s huge! Looks like we have an extra meal tonight!" "Lord Abona is so strong! He pulled that massive thing out of the sea so easily!" Compliments poured in, but Abona shrugged them off, casually tossing the colossal leg onto the deck, causing the ship to tilt slightly. The crew was stunned. Such a large creature, lifted effortlessly it showed how powerful Abona was. "Amazing!" Sonia remarked. To take down a Sea King in the Calm Belt, and underwater no less, left both sisters dumbfounded. "Haki! Could you teach us Haki techniques?" Hancock asked Anos, slightly embarrassed. "Yes, that would be incredible!" Sonia quickly added. "Don''t you already know Haki?" Anos asked, surprised. "Not fully," Gold explained. "On the island, we''ve only practiced Observation Haki. My sister once accidentally unleashed Conqueror''s Haki, but we have no proper training for Armament Haki." "Yes," Hancock continued, "so we''ve spent a long time on Observation Haki, but we lack the knowledge and experience to master Armament Haki. The previous king even went out searching for this training method, but he never succeeded." "Those aren''t exactly difficult techniques," Anos said with a slight smile. "Does that mean you''ll teach us?" Sonia asked, excited. "Since we have about ten days left on this journey, I don''t mind teaching you. I can even have my crew document their experiences with Haki training, which you can take back to your island. At the very least, it will strengthen your forces," Anos offered. Such techniques might be rare in the first half of the Grand Line, but in the New World, almost everyone encountered Haki, even if they couldn''t master it. Hearing Anos''s agreement, Hancock blushed, visibly moved, while her sisters beamed with excitement. The ability to wield Armament Haki would elevate their strength by a level or two, something they eagerly welcomed. Why hesitate? Anos saw no harm in sharing these training methods. In fact, this alliance could be beneficial. Perhaps, in the future, the men of the Tru Kingdom might even gain access to Amazon Lily. Although it was just a thought, Anos couldn''t deny his intrigue regarding the woman before him. Unlike a typical hero, he understood alliances had their own value, and this exchange held no risk to Tru Kingdom but could lead to a strong ally. ---- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 104. Silence! --- After hearing Anos''s answer, everyone was filled with excitement. Even Hancock, usually so composed, showed a sweet smile. Even if they gained nothing else from this journey, learning how to practice Armament Haki was already the greatest reward for them. The ship continued to sail swiftly in the Calm Belt. The two sea beasts propelling them moved much faster here than in other seas. The scenery around them changed quickly, and they encountered no attacks. Moving forward in the Calm Belt, there was no need for lookouts to check for safety. They could simply lie back and let the sea beasts carry them safely to Amazon Lily. This method could be useful on future voyages too. At least, it eliminated safety concerns and was faster. "By the way, why are you so willing to help us? Do you have an interest in my sister?" Sonia asked Anos with a smile. Hearing this, Marigold quickly turned her face toward him. Unlike Sonia''s lighthearted expression, her gaze was more intense. Hancock did not stop her sisters from asking questions. She looked away, but her large ears were listening intently to Anos''s response. Anos had no intention of hiding anything. With a calm smile, he said, "How about letting your sister become my queen one day?" "Really? I''d love to have a man like this confess to me!" Marigold exclaimed, her eyes welling up as she looked at Sonia. Hancock''s face flushed deeply, from her ears to her neck, which turned a bright crimson. She was almost overwhelmed. She didn''t know where to put her hands, and her heart was racing. It was the first time a man had confessed to her this way, and she felt no desire to reject him.If you spot this tale on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation. "The celebration is about to start! Our king is going to marry your empress and make her his queen we''re celebrating tonight!" Daiki, who had been on the sidelines, shouted gleefully. "Ohhhhhhhhh...!!!!!" The crew was quiet for a moment, and then erupted into joyous cheers. The two involved in the matter weren''t even as excited as the crew, who had already begun to celebrate. Although nothing was official, to them, it was already certain. Anos watched the lively crowd with a slight smile, but said nothing. Suzu approached Hancock, squatting down beside her on the deck. She looked at Hancock, who was so shy she didn''t know where to look, and kindly took her hand. "Are you willing to become our Queen of Tru, Lady Hancock?" "Q-Queen!" Hancock stammered nervously, unable to respond clearly. It had been easier when no one had directly asked her, but now Suzu was right in front of her, awaiting an answer. She glanced at her sisters, who were holding each other in joy, clearly wanting her to say yes. The entire crew was hiding behind barrels or railings, peeking out to hear Hancock''s response. Even Abona, perched atop the mast, used his Observation Haki to listen. Overwhelmed by everyone''s attention, Hancock bit her finger nervously, looking up slightly at Suzu. When she nodded subtly, cheers erupted once more. But as everyone on the ship rejoiced, the commotion attracted Sea Kings lurking below. Enormous heads began to surface, each creature towering over a hundred meters high. The excitement quickly turned to silence as the crew gazed at the colossal Sea Kings with wide eyes. Only Abona, Daiki, and the others positioned high above were immediately on guard. But just as Anos was enjoying the moment and envisioning a future together, these Sea Kings appeared, shattering his peaceful fantasy. He looked at them, clearly annoyed. "Silence!!" Anos commanded, his voice icy, releasing a wave of Conqueror''s Haki. This time, he controlled the power so the crew wouldn''t feel its force. Instantly, the Sea Kings began to submerge, their enormous bodies splashing water as they vanished. Even the ship was slightly rocked by the ripples. The two sea beasts pulling the ship, though unaffected by the Conqueror''s Haki, were startled by Anos''s aura. With renewed energy, they pulled the ship forward even faster. The crew, who had seen Conqueror''s Haki before, were nonetheless shocked by Anos''s display. The Snake Pirates had all fainted the first time he used it, and even the seasoned warriors of the Tru Kingdom had stood frozen. "What is that?" one of the King''s Guards asked in awe. "Conqueror''s Haki!" answered a woman from the Kuja Pirates, remembering the powerful aura she''d once witnessed. "Indeed, Conqueror''s Haki is an incredible force," Daiki said, shaking his head in admiration. This was only the second time Daiki had seen his majesty wield this ability, and he was in awe. The only other person he''d seen use it as effectively was Suzu, during an encounter over six months ago, though back then he hadn''t fully understood its significance. ---- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 105. Amazon Lily --- The display of power by Anos left everyone speechless. Not many were aware of just how strong Anos was, except for the Royal Guards. They had always known their king was remarkable, but they never imagined he possessed such immense strength. With a mere display of his will, countless Sea Kings were knocked unconscious. This scene shattered their understanding of power. "Sonia, take Hancock inside to rest," Anos said, still reclining comfortably. He spoke casually, even as Sonia stood nearby, her mouth open in shock. Upon hearing this, Sonia continued to stare wide-eyed at Anos in disbelief. However, she quickly replied, "Okay, understood!" While they were still processing what had happened, the ship sailed through the fallen Sea Kings. Everyone on board was stunned as if they were in a dream. For the first time, they grasped the true meaning of power. The Kuja Pirate''s ship, which had been preparing for a celebration, was now silent. None could believe what they had just witnessed, and they continued to mutter in awe, watching the massive Sea Kings that now floated atop the calm waters of the Calm Belt. They had never seen anything like this. With just a word, so many Sea Kings had fallen, completely upending their understanding. Eventually, the initial shock subsided, and everyone resumed preparations for the banquet. As night fell, Amazon Lily gradually came into view. Though not particularly large, it was a remarkable sight, marked by its iconic nine-headed serpent statue that towered over the island, visible even from a distance. Amazon Lily lay within the edge of the Calm Belt, a region both perilously dangerous and strangely safe. Love this novel? Read it on Royal Road to ensure the author gets credit. Few outsiders dared approach due to the Sea Kings that roamed the waters, yet those on the island relied solely on their ships for safe passage. Their people had always valued strength above all, and it was ingrained from birth. While they refused to yield to anyone weaker, they deeply respected those of great power, especially when that power belonged to an ally or friend. As the ship approached the harbour, the distant fires on Amazon Lily signalled a warm welcome for the Empress''s return, and crowds began gathering at the port. Meanwhile, Hancock, who had been unconscious, began to stir. She walked to the edge of the deck, her expression a mix of helplessness and newfound admiration as she looked at Anos. "Princess, are you awake?" called one of the Tru Kingdom''s members, stationed along the railing. Upon noticing her, he quickly turned and greeted her with a bow. Hancock blushed at this and averted her gaze, clearly flustered. "Daiki," Anos called out, turning to another member of his retinue. "Ensure that once we dock, no men from the Tru Kingdom disembark. You and Abona are responsible for enforcing this. No one, including yourselves, is exempt from this order." Anos''s command caught some by surprise, but those familiar with Amazon Lily quickly explained. As realization dawned on them, they understood the king''s respectful gesture. Hancock watched silently. She''d been wondering how to bring this up, yet Anos''s command had spared her the trouble. She felt both relief and gratitude. "How did you know about the rules of Amazon Lily?" she asked, touched by his thoughtfulness. Anos smiled. "Amazon Lily has its traditions for a reason. If we interfere, it could cause unnecessary conflict. It''s better to respect those customs." "He''s so considerate!" one of the women from the Kuja Pirates murmured, while others exchanged approving glances. They were charmed by the intelligent, powerful, and, most importantly, respectful king. "Thank you for understanding us so well," Hancock said shyly. "There''s no need to thank me. But," Anos added with a sigh, "do you mind if I rest on the shore? Being on the ship for so long is exhausting." Hancock stifled a laugh, covering her mouth with her hand. She knew the rules allowed exceptions for a single guest, but bringing a large group would indeed cause an uproar. As the ship finally docked, the two Sea Kings that had been towing it lowered their heads toward the shore, visibly fatigued. From the port, women waiting to welcome their Empress began to cheer, "Empress Hancock! Empress Hancock!" Although a small island nation, Amazon Lily had a fiercely loyal population. Hancock''s reputation here was high. Hancock resumed her usual proud demeanour as she disembarked, her head held high. Fortunately, the darkness cloaked much of the ship from view, sparing her potential embarrassment from the men of Tru Kingdom, who were now gathered at the edge of the deck, staring at the Amazon Lily''s women with eager, curious expressions. ---- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 106. Granny Nyon --- As the women of the Kuja Pirates began to disembark, a familiar face in the crowd walked down alongside them. Suzu was dressed differently from the rest, but she also followed them down. She was the only other woman from the ship who joined the group. Jasmine, who had accompanied them previously, had already returned with Robin to the Tru Kingdom. All the men leaning on the rail watched the departing figures with envy. Anos remained at the end, unhurried. After all, he knew he needed to communicate with others before moving forward. If we rush in without preparation, who knows what unexpected situations might arise? Just after the members of the Kuja Pirates got off the ship, the once-bustling port fell into silence. The townsfolk watched the ship curiously. For many, it was their first time seeing men up close. Though some might feel uncertain, most were simply intrigued by their presence. The conversation lasted about ten minutes before Sonia returned to the ship, smiling at Anos. "King Anos, my sister requests that you come down. She wants to personally guide you into Amazon Lily!" "Have you settled everything?" Anos asked, slightly concerned. "We''ve discussed it with everyone. Granny Nyon opposes it, but the others have no objections. Now that my sister is the empress, Granny Nyon''s opinion no longer holds sway," Sonia replied. "Very well." Anos smiled and then turned to Daiki, instructing him, "You are not allowed to leave the ship!" "Understood, Your Majesty! I''ll ensure everything here is secure," Daiki replied respectfully.The narrative has been taken without permission. Report any sightings. While the men were restricted from leaving, the women of Amazon Lily were free to board, creating an atmosphere destined to be lively and sleepless that night. As Anos followed Sonia''s lead, the women at the port automatically cleared a path for him, their eyes wide with curiosity, as if afraid he''d vanish in an instant. They weren''t just curious about him; however, many more awaited them on the ship. Once Anos, Hancock, and the others had left, the remaining women at the port immediately dashed toward the ship, eager to catch a glimpse of the men on board. The men reclining on the ship''s deck beamed with excitement, and their spirits reignited. "Let''s Party!" "Ohhhhhhhhh!!!!!!!'' The men shouted joyfully. With plenty of provisions, they could even fish for Sea Kings if necessary to keep the party going. Meanwhile, Abona, a powerful presence among the group, had no intention of leaving the ship, content to let the others enjoy themselves. The women eagerly clambered aboard, crowding the small Kuja Pirate ship in no time. Watching from the port was an elderly woman, likely in her fifties or sixties, angrily tapping her cane and scolding the excited women who had boarded the ship. However, her admonitions went unheeded. As she furiously struck the ground with her cane, a figure suddenly appeared before her. "You¡­you''re¡­Gloriosa¡­ the eldest sister?" The man before her was Abona. Though he usually avoided crowds, he''d spotted Granny Nyon scolding the woman and recognized her face immediately. Against the rules, he had leapt down from the ship to confirm his suspicions. Granny Nyon prepared to scold him, but when he called her by name, she froze. It was clear he was someone familiar. After studying Abona''s face, her eyes softened, and tears welled up. Trembling with disbelief, she murmured, "Are you that boy¡­ Abona?" "It''s me, Sister Gloriosa! It''s really me!" Abona''s lips trembled as tears filled his eyes. He hadn''t expected to meet someone familiar here. "Abona! Why are you here too?" Granny Nyon asked, tears streaming down her face as she threw aside her cane. Their reunion went unnoticed by the others on the ship, preoccupied as they were. "It''s little Abona¡­ little Abona¡­" Granny Nyon repeated, her lips quivering as she struggled to speak. With equally trembling hands, Abona responded tearfully, "It''s me! It''s really me!" Granny Nyon could hardly believe it. Memories she thought long-forgotten rushed back, each one clearer than ever with Abona''s sudden appearance. Overcome with emotion, Abona, a tall, powerful man, knelt before the woman barely 1.3 meters tall, crying into her arms. This moment laid bare his deepest emotions as if all his hardships had finally found meaning. Daiki, having watched everything unfold from the ship, initially intended to stop Abona. But as he observed the scene, he stayed silent, allowing him this reunion. As long as they remained within the port, it seemed there would be no issue. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 107. Past --- Daiki was somewhat taken aback, he wasn''t too surprised. Abona was much older than him and had spent years navigating the Grand Line. While Abona rarely shared details about his past, encountering familiar faces on the Grand Line or even in the New World was hardly unexpected. At the port, Abona and Granny Nyon hugged each other and wept. Only they could understand the story that bound them together. After sharing this emotional reunion, Granny Nyon gently pushed Abona back and, with curiosity in her voice, asked, "Why are you on the Kuja Pirates'' ship?" "Sister Gloriosa, it''s a long story. After Captain Tiger''s passing, I joined Brother Jinbei to rebuild the Sun Pirates. But five years ago, I was captured by the Marines and became a slave to the Celestial Dragons. It wasn''t until a few days ago, when King Anos of Tru Kingdom killed the Celestial Dragons, that I was freed," Abona said openly. To Granny Nyon, Abona even revealed that Anos had killed a Celestial Dragon a testament to how much he trusted her. "Killed the Celestial Dragons!!!" Granny Nyon''s face filled with shock. This was far more surprising than encountering Abona. In this world, the Celestial Dragons had always stood at the pinnacle of authority. Even Gol D. Roger, the Pirate King, had once taken a detour rather than confront them directly. In all her years, Granny Nyon had never heard of anyone killing a Celestial Dragon! "Is what you''re saying true?" Granny Nyon asked in disbelief. Abona nodded but then seemed to realize he might have spoken too freely. Such a serious revelation could cause unimaginable ripples.If you stumble upon this narrative on Amazon, it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it. "Abona, did you consider how you''d explain this to His Majesty?" While Abona was still grappling with how to reply, Daiki appeared in front of them, his expression grave, fists clenched, and his voice low. He was prepared to intervene, waiting for an answer. "Daiki, I¡­" Abona stood up, lost for words. He''d been carried away, unintentionally revealing something he wasn''t supposed to. Now that it was out, he felt a pang of fear. Granny Nyon also stood, observing the tense exchange between Abona and the newcomer. "Abona, who is this?" Granny Nyon asked calmly. "Sister Gloriosa, this is Daiki, captain of the Royal Guards of Tru Kingdom and my current companion!" Abona introduced with a smile. "Abona, don''t forget what you promised His Majesty, It''s only been a few days, and it seems you''ve already forgotten. Have you considered the gravity of this matter?" Daiki spoke sternly. "I''m sorry. It was indeed careless of me this time. I''ll personally clarify everything to His Majesty. But I trust Sister Gloriosa, and I hope you can trust her too," Abona explained. "Let''s go! We''ll address this matter directly with King Anos." Granny Nyon surveyed the scene, sensing the seriousness of Abona''s words. She knew this could strain their bond, something she wanted to avoid. Although Granny Nyon upheld Amazon Lily''s traditions more strictly than anyone, she was now willing to break her own rules by inviting two men into the women-only nation. For Abona, whom she had known for so long, she was willing to make an exception. Daiki didn''t protest. Even if Granny Nyon had refused, he would have found a way onto Amazon Lily. The news of a Celestial Dragon being killed was monumental. They made their way across the island, heading towards the palace where Boa Hancock resided. Although the island wasn''t vast, they needed to cross its width to reach their destination. For the three of them, it wasn''t long before they arrived. Today was an unprecedented event on Amazon Lily. The palace guards looked on in disbelief as Granny Nyon, known for her strict adherence to tradition, walked toward them with a man in tow. "Lady Gloriosa, what is this¡­?" one of the female guards stammered, her expression filled with astonishment. Their surprise was understandable. To them, Granny Nyon was the island''s strictest traditionalist. Seeing her escort a man to the palace was nothing short of shocking. "Open the gates. We need to speak with Snake Princess," Granny Nyon instructed, leaving no room for questions. "I''m sorry, Lady Gloriosa, but the Empress has ordered that no one may enter the palace at this time, including you!" the guard replied. ---- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 108. Anger --- Granny Nyon, usually so resolute, now looked at the guard with a calm yet firm expression. Though she was breaking the island''s rules, she still respected them deeply, especially now that Hancock had brought a man into the palace and even stationed guards at the entrance to prevent anyone from entering. She still didn''t know what was going on inside. Granny Nyon tapped her staff on the ground, speaking in a serious tone, "Open the door. I will explain everything to the Empress myself! As for her bringing a man into the palace, I won''t interfere. But we have other pressing matters to discuss." "I''m sorry, Gloriosa..." began the guard. Before she could finish, Granny Nyon slammed her staff down hard, sending out a shockwave that pushed the guards back, though they managed to stay on their feet. Respect and deference were clear in their eyes. After all, Granny Nyon was the former ruler of Amazon Lily. Although she had spent much of her time at sea, her strength was never in doubt. Daiki was taken aback by the power radiating from her. He had felt the intensity of Conqueror''s Haki once or twice before, but never quite like this. After pushing the guards aside, Granny Nyon spoke in a more controlled tone, "I''ll handle this matter myself. You need not worry!" With that, Granny Nyon led Daiki and Abona inside, pushing open the palace doors. Inside, the atmosphere was entirely different from the outside. There were no guards; typically, only Hancock and her two sisters had unrestricted access to the palace. But today was an exception. Because Anos was here. --- At that moment in the palace¡­ As soon as Anos arrived, Hancock had dismissed everyone, including her sisters. This story originates from a different website. Ensure the author gets the support they deserve by reading it there. Now, it was just the two of them in the vast hall. They hadn''t exchanged many words before Anos casually sat down, a blue light flickering in his hand. With a wave, the hall was suddenly filled with piles of gold and silver treasures. He had collected these from Mariejois, though this was merely a fraction of the bounty. But even this small portion left Hancock awestruck, for it far surpassed anything they had ever looted from pirates or merchant ships. "What are you doing?" she asked. "As I mentioned before coming here since you''re escorting us to Jaya Island, it''s only fair to offer some compensation," Anos said casually. "I''m not talking about the treasure. I''m asking about your ability¡­?" Hancock questioned, astonished. She didn''t recognize this Devil Fruit power. Anos simply smiled, conjuring a faint blue light once more. This time, three small, transparent bottles filled with a blue liquid materialized beside him. "This is a special ointment that can erase scars. Consider it my betrothal gift to you," he said, his tone shifting. Hancock froze, her cheeks and ears flushing red, caught completely off guard by the sudden declaration. For a moment, she was at a loss for words. Just then, the hall doors burst open, and even Hancock''s sisters, Marigold and Sandersonia, couldn''t prevent Granny Nyon from storming in. Hancock, snapped out of her daze, shot Granny Nyon an exasperated glare and yelled, "Old woman, can you respect the moment?" But this time, Granny Nyon wasn''t easily fazed by Hancock''s outburst. She batted Hancock''s hand away and straightened herself. Seeing her serious demeanour, Hancock knew Granny Nyon must have something urgent to discuss; otherwise, she would never barge into the palace like this. Indeed, behind Granny Nyon, Abona and Daiki entered as well, with Hancock''s sisters standing behind them, looking somewhat embarrassed. "Daiki, what''s going on?" Anos asked, sensing the gravity of the situation. While he could understand Abona''s presence, Daiki''s sudden appearance was unusual, as he would rarely disregard a command from Anos. Daiki glanced at the others, then bowed respectfully. "Your Majesty, Abona informed Gloriosa about the events at Mariejois." The words had barely left his mouth when Anos''s Conqueror''s Haki burst forth, filling the hall with intense pressure. Even those nearby struggled to withstand the immense aura. This was the power of Conqueror''s Haki not only a deterrent but an overwhelming force that could drive an opponent to submission. Abona, resisting the oppressive force, stepped forward and bowed his head, his voice filled with remorse. "I apologize, Your Majesty. I spoke carelessly without considering the gravity of the matter. However, I trust sister Gloriosa completely and ask that you do the same." "Abona, do you remember what I told you when I freed you from Mariejois?" Anos''s voice thundered, his Haki intensifying. The palace floor cracked under the pressure, and Marigold and Sandersonia, unable to withstand the force, fainted on the spot. --- Check out my new fanfiction, I just released it! For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 109. Trust --- The scene immediately fell silent, and no one dared to speak at that moment. Seeing Anos''s anger, Abona realized he had made a mistake and spoken out of turn. He took two steps forward, trembling under the pressure, and fell to his knees instantly. Daiki was also hunched over, barely daring to breathe. Hancock was equally terrified and at a loss for words. The sheer force of Anos''s presence left her utterly frozen. "King of Tru, I have heard of your reputation, but please believe in little Abona. He spoke without intent. And please, believe me; I will never set foot outside of Amazon Lily again in my life. I vow to keep this secret buried in my heart forever." Granny Nyon, unaffected by the overwhelming aura, spoke with respect. Her respect wasn''t for Anos''s royal status, but for the fact that he dared to accomplish what so many longed to but lacked the courage to do. Watching Granny Nyon''s demeanour, Anos sighed softly and withdrew his menacing aura. He understood that the Granny ly woman before him was a powerful figure from the past, someone whose strength was formidable enough to inspire dread. Yet, seeing her humility, he felt he could trust her word. "Stand up, Abona. Let this be the end of it, but remember, you only have this one chance!" While he had relaxed his stance and let go of his anger, Anos still issued his warning with a stern tone. "Yes, I understand!" Abona replied respectfully. "Elder Gloriosa, a legend from the previous era, what an honour!" Anos remarked, offering a courteous bow. His gesture surprised everyone, including Hancock. "You know of me?" Granny Nyon propped herself on her cane, eyeing the man before her with curiosity, yet she asked with a serious tone. "I''ve only heard tales of your name; I never expected to have the fortune of meeting you in person." Love what you''re reading? Discover and support the author on the platform they originally published on. With a respectful tone, Anos continued. His understanding of Gloriosa was that she had ties to one of the Marine''s strongest warriors. Otherwise, she would never have returned to Amazon Lily for the remainder of her life, remaining hidden because her true identity had long been the subject of speculation. Although he wasn''t entirely certain, Anos believed that Gloriosa, a formidable figure from the past, might be connected to Vice Admiral Garp of the Marines and might even be related to someone significant in the future. Anos''s interest in Granny Nyon had only deepened. "I never thought I, an old woman exiled to this forsaken island, would still be remembered by anyone, let alone someone as young as you!" Granny Nyon said with a chuckle. The tension from the earlier confrontation dissipated, and no one mentioned it again, allowing the atmosphere to settle back to calm. "Old woman, aren''t you always upholding the laws of Amazon Lily? How did you bring two men here today?" Hancock seized the chance to jab at Granny Nyon, seeing it as a rare opportunity. Men were forbidden on the island; it was an ancient rule. Even sons born to women of Amazon Lily were sent away, while daughters could remain. Granny Nyon, as the previous Empress of the kingdom, had always been strict in enforcing this rule. Today''s unexpected circumstances, however, were beyond her control, especially given the news of Anos''s act of slaying a Celestial Dragon. Such news made her disregard all rules without hesitation. The two sisters, Sandersonia and Marigold, were still lying on the ground, momentarily forgotten. All eyes were fixed on Anos, and Granny Nyon, in particular, grasped the weight of his actions in killing a Celestial Dragon. Hancock alone stood, uncertain of what had happened. She couldn''t fathom why Granny Nyon, who upheld the island''s rules so stringently, would suddenly break them. The tension In the air was palpable, and without a word, everyone understood the gravity of the situation. Granny Nyon ignored Hancock''s comment, her attention focused entirely on Anos, intrigued by the young man before her. "Elder Gloriosa, I trust you will keep Abona''s words to yourself. But, Abona, regardless of any past ties, let this be the last time such an incident occurs." Anos said calmly. With that, he placed his hand on Abona''s shoulder. Though it was a gentle pat, the ground beneath him began to crack as his hand made contact. Granny Nyon and the others could only watch in silence, speechless. Anos, having arrived in good spirits, felt his mood shift after less than half an hour. Without further words, he turned to Hancock and said, "Apply what''s on the table to your back. It will ease the pain, and the rest will heal overnight." With that, Anos walked out of the hall without a backward glance. Seeing this, Daiki hurriedly followed him. Five people remained, two lying on the ground. Abona looked remorseful, while Granny Nyon heaved a sigh. "What just happened?" Hancock asked in confusion, wondering how things had escalated so quickly. She was desperate for answers, but those around her were unwilling to provide them. Abona stood there quietly. Granny Nyon didn''t bother responding to Hancock. Instead, she approached Abona and whispered, "Abona, don''t dwell on it too much. It''s in the past now." "Sister Gloriosa, His Majesty trusts me deeply. Though we''ve only known each other briefly, his trust in me is profound. I feel I have truly disappointed him this time." Abona said with remorse. ---- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 110. Era before Check out my New Fanfiction also, I hope you like it.??? --- Granny Nyon examined the jewellery in her hands, yet even as she held it, she couldn''t stir up any interest. Meeting an old friend from her past was rare, but she hadn''t expected it to end this way. After Abona finished speaking, remorse etched across his face and his body visibly weary, he turned and started walking toward the outskirts of the palace hall. "Abona..." Granny Nyon called out, but seeing his lonely figure, she struggled to find comforting words. They could only watch Abona leave, unable to say anything to stop him. Once Abona was out of sight, Boa Hancock turned to Granny Nyon with a calm gaze and asked, "Granny Nyon, what happened?" "This is a very serious matter, more than you can imagine," Granny Nyon replied with a sigh. "But what could have happened to make King Anos so angry? The scene just now shook me!" Hancock said. "It''s not just you. Even in all my years, I''ve never seen someone at his age wield such mastery of Haki. It''s truly bewildering!" Granny Nyon replied, still in disbelief. "Have you known Abona for a long time?" As Hancock''s question lingered, Granny Nyon did not hesitate to answer. She found a step, sat down, and began to reminisce about how she first met Abona. Back then, Granny Nyon was much younger and still beautiful, having just left Amazon Lily for a few years. While sailing the Grand Line, her crew had found Abona, a small child, on a recently captured pirate ship. Abona was just two or three years old at the time, wide-eyed as he looked up at the adults surrounding him. His innocence softened Granny Nyon''s heart, and she took him in, carrying him back to her ship.This narrative has been purloined without the author''s approval. Report any appearances on Amazon. Over time, the crew taught Abona how to fight, and with him aboard, the ship''s atmosphere gradually changed. Although the crew included men as well as women, everyone held a deep respect for Granny Nyon and each other. "Sister Gloriosa, can I join the next battle?" a young Abona, around five or six years old, asked Granny Nyon earnestly. Hearing this, the crew sitting around on the deck burst into laughter, but Abona ignored them, his face serious. "Abona, you''re still young. When you grow up, you''ll fight with us. For now, focus on learning more skills. Only by mastering the basics will you find your path," Granny Nyon said with a warm smile, almost motherly. "I''m not a child anymore. I''ll become an even greater pirate than any of you. Don''t underestimate me!" little Abona declared confidently. "Yes, yes, I believe you will surpass us someday. But for now, do you know what you need to do?" Granny Nyon asked, still smiling. "I know I need to train hard so I won''t hold everyone back!" Abona''s voice rang out with determination. "Exactly. Only by becoming strong can you hold your own across the sea. One day, no one will dare to challenge you, and you''ll be able to protect us all," Granny Nyon said, chuckling. "Don''t worry, Sister Gloriosa, I''ll protect you and Uncle Guro in the future!" Abona replied, flashing a sunny smile before heading to the stern of the ship to train. After he left, those sitting on the deck exchanged concerned glances. "Gloriosa, it''s wonderful that Abona is so determined, but we''re heading to the New World soon. Our survival won''t be guaranteed there. Do we have to take him along?" Guro, a rugged man on the deck, asked with a sigh. "Can we abandon him, Guro? He''s still so young. How would he survive if we left him behind?" Granny Nyon replied, reluctant. "It''s not that we want to abandon him, but you know how dangerous the New World is. We have no good options right now. If worse comes to worst, should we consider leaving him with the Marines?" Guro suggested cautiously. "No, Abona must never join the Marines. That would destroy all his dreams for the future. We''ll take him with us for now and decide later," Granny Nyon firmly replied. No one wanted to send Abona away; they had raised him since he was two or three years old and treated him as one of their own. They''d faced countless hardships together, but the reality of their life at sea was harsh. "Set sail for the New World," Guro commanded reluctantly, standing up and calling to the crew. In this era, the legendary Pirate King Roger had yet to start his journey. No one knew where he might be, though rumours of his laughter had already begun to spread. Even now, however, the strength of those who ruled the seas was unimaginable. The Rocks Pirates dominated the New World, their leader turning the entire region upside down. Even the combined forces of the Marines and the World Government couldn''t gain the upper hand against him. And in this world, filled with powerful pirate crews, competition was fierce. Most pirates weren''t concerned with the title of Pirate King; they sought only the freedom to roam the seas. This was the current Age of Navigation, and even in the future Great Pirate Era, few would ever rival the strength of those who sailed these waters now. Yet, despite their power, they, too, had failed to conquer the whole sea. ---- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 111. Nothing --- In Granny Nyon''s memories, Abona had stayed with them until he was 15 years old. After that, Granny Nyon began to live quietly and alone, residing in seclusion on Amazon Lily, rarely leaving the island since then. Reflecting on these memories, she sighed with a touch of nostalgia. She never expected to see the little boy from her past again after so many years. It would be untrue to say she wasn''t surprised. It was because of this situation that Granny Nyon was willing to bend the rules of Amazon Lily and bring Abona into the palace. In the large hall, two individuals lay on the ground, cracks still visible on the floor. Silence filled the room, broken only by the sound of breathing. Hancock sat quietly, listening to Granny Nyon''s story about her past. This was a side of Granny Nyon''s life that Hancock had never heard before, and it sparked her curiosity. "I never thought I''d see my old friend again after so many years. I truly miss those days," Granny Nyon murmured, emotional. As her story concluded, Hancock sat silently, not interrupting a single word. "Granny Nyon, what did Abona say to you that made him so angry? It looked like his very limits were tested," Hancock asked, still puzzled. "Hancock, some matters are best left unknown. Concerning Abona, he has indeed done something regrettable," Granny Nyon sighed again. "What''s the big deal? Could it be that King Anos killed a Celestial Dragon?" Hancock asked with clear distaste. "What? How do you know that?" Granny Nyon suddenly stood up in shock, looking at Hancock with a grave expression. Her sudden reaction startled Hancock. This was not the Granny Nyon she usually saw on Amazon Lily.Reading on this site? This novel is published elsewhere. Support the author by seeking out the original. Although her status as the previous empress had lessened over time, Hancock still looked to her for guidance. "What''s wrong?" Hancock asked, surprised. She had only spoken on impulse and never expected Granny Nyon to react so strongly. "Who told you what you just said?" Granny Nyon asked intently. "King Anos himself told me, even joking about it. Was it not just a jest?" Hancock''s expression shifted as she considered the possibility. She hesitated to think that someone would have the nerve to kill a Celestial Dragon. For most in this world, such a feat would seem like pure fantasy if it were ever spoken of aloud. Yet standing here, faced with Granny Nyon''s stern gaze, Hancock could no longer dismiss it as mere banter. Realizing that everything King Anos had said was serious, Hancock felt her mind reel. The truth was jarring; she even sank to the ground in shock. Her mind flashed back to the pain and humiliation she had endured as a former slave of the Celestial Dragons. The scar on her back began to ache, a reminder of the torment etched into her very soul. At this moment, Hancock''s heart, already shaken, was being pulled in a new direction. Looking down at the pile of gold, jewels, and the three blue potions on the table, she recalled King Anos''s words: "These will be my gifts to you as my queen." A blush spread across Hancock''s face as she thought about his proposal. Noticing her expression, Granny Nyon approached, leaning on her cane with a resolute look. She struck her cane on the floor, bringing Hancock back to reality. "Hancock, you are the Empress of Amazon Lily. You must protect our island. Don''t let your emotions cloud your judgment," Granny Nyon advised firmly. But Hancock seemed unmoved. The events of the day had overwhelmed her. She gazed coldly at Granny Nyon, saying, "I am too beautiful. Whatever happens to Amazon Lily, I believe they will forgive me. But why is this old woman still here?" With those words, Hancock kicked Granny Nyon out of the palace hall. Granny Nyon did not resist. She knew that sometimes leaving gracefully was the best solution to avoid further conflict between them. As a former empress, she understood the burden that came with leadership and did not wish to hold back Hancock from pursuing her happiness. Granny Nyon was stunned by Anos''s power. In her time, even powerful figures like the captain of the Rocks Pirates struggled to reach the heights King Anos seemed to attain with ease. Though Amazon Lily was isolated in the Calm Belt, news from the outside world occasionally trickled in by mistake. Through newspapers, Granny Nyon had learned of King Anos''s extraordinary strength. Meanwhile, Sandersonia and Marigold lay unconscious on the ground, having been subdued by Anos''s powerful Conqueror, Haki. Hancock sat nearby, holding the blue potion bottles. Thoughts of her future as queen danced through her mind. At that moment, Hancock''s face was filled with a tender expression of love. Though she was young, her heart was fully captivated, perhaps too early for her age. "~Anos~" --- Check out my new fanfiction, I just released it! For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 112. Daikis Devil Fruit --- Anos, who left the palace hall of Amazon Lily, did not show any curiosity about this small island. He walked directly along the avenue in front of the palace and headed straight toward the pirate ship. He had no interest in breaking the rules of this place, as such actions were unnecessary for him. At this late hour, the entire Island was quite lively, with the main avenue bustling with people coming and going. As Anos passed by, countless eyes followed him. Some even wanted to approach him, but they refrained. After all, this man had been brought in by their Empress, and their behaviour remained courteous and reserved. "Your Majesty, are you heading to the pirate ship now?" Daiki, who had been quietly following behind, suddenly walked forward and asked. "No. Let''s just find a place to rest and chat. We''ll wait until tomorrow morning," Anos replied calmly. His expression showed no trace of anger, and it seemed he had already put aside his earlier encounter with Abona. However, not far behind them, Abona had been silently trailing after him. While Anos seemed to have moved on, Abona was still steeped in self-recrimination. "Daiki, how is your Devil Fruit training progressing?" Anos asked, abruptly changing the subject. He glanced at the large, round moon hanging in the sky. The sight reminded him of Daiki''s Devil Fruit the Silver Moon Wolf. Could its abilities be connected to the moon? "Ah? Your Majesty, I haven''t had much time to practice it yet. I planned to get familiar with it later, but I''ve already learned the basic combat skills," Daiki responded awkwardly. "Let''s head to a secluded spot. I want to see how your abilities react under moonlight. It might reveal something important for your future growth!" Anos said with interest. "Yes!" Daiki''s anticipation grew at Anos''s words.Royal Road is the home of this novel. Visit there to read the original and support the author. The two made their way to a remote coastal area, about two or three miles from the port. Here, the shoreline was calm, thanks to the windless zone. Though the waters hid immense sea creatures, neither of them cared at the moment. "Now, let me see the full potential of your Silver Moon Wolf!" Anos shouted eagerly. Daiki didn''t hesitate. Activating his Devil Fruit powers, he transformed into a werewolf almost instantly. At first, his wolf form retained black fur, save for a white ring around his neck. But under the moonlight, his fur began to turn silvery white, and his size gradually increased. "Your Majesty, I''ve discovered the Silver Moon Wolf''s true potential under moonlight!" Daiki exclaimed excitedly, his lupine eyes glowing as he examined his transformed body. "What is it?" Anos asked, observing intently. "Under the moonlight, the Silver Moon Wolf, a mythical Zoan-type of the Wolf-Wolf Fruit, gains an immortal body!" Daiki declared, his voice brimming with excitement. "Oh? That''s impressive..." Anos said, his expression betraying genuine surprise. Yet, without hesitation, he tested Daiki''s claim. In a flash, his demon sword, Muramasa, slashed Daiki''s shoulder. "Ah!!" Daiki yelped in shock, instinctively leaping back several meters. "Your Majesty, what are you doing?" But Anos only watched in fascination. The slash, infused with Haki, should have been devastating. Yet Daiki remained unharmed; even the wound vanished as if it had never existed. "It''s true! I didn''t expect the Silver Moon Wolf to have such extraordinary abilities," Anos mused, his tone tinged with approval. "Your Majesty, you gave me such a fright, but this power is incredible," Daiki said, marvelling at his resilience. The revelation left him ecstatic. Under moonlight, he was virtually untouchable. However, Anos remained analytical. "While your ability is remarkable, don''t get complacent. Without moonlight, your strength is likely far less formidable." "Understood, Your Majesty! I''ll make sure to master this power," Daiki said, though his excitement suggested he wasn''t entirely focused. Anos, noticing this, decided a lesson was in order. From his seat on a nearby rock, his eyes turned sky-blue, and with a simple hand gesture, he conjured a transparent cube that trapped Daiki, instantly squeezing him into the cube. "You see? Even with an immortal body, your abilities are useless if you''re restrained," Anos remarked with a wry smile. Daiki, bewildered by the sudden confinement, struggled in vain. "What is this?!" "This is a reminder. No matter how strong you think you are, underestimating others can lead to your downfall. Control your powers, and don''t waste such a gift," Anos said firmly. Humbled, Daiki nodded. "Yes, Your Majesty. I''ll work harder to improve." Satisfied, Anos released him from the cube. Though Daiki had been shaken, he couldn''t deny the wisdom in his king''s words. As the two resumed their conversation under the silvery moonlight, the future of their journey seemed even more promising. ---- Check out my new fanfiction, I just released it!??? For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 113. Queen... --- It was no surprise that he was in such a state. It was normal for him to expand momentarily when he suddenly gained such powerful abilities. After lightly reprimanding Daiki, Anos released the ability that had been restraining him. Once freed, Daiki quickly returned to his original form, the swelling sensation disappearing. With a cheerful grin, he ran to Anos'' side. "Come out!" Before Daiki could say anything, Anos spoke in a calm yet commanding tone. Daiki froze for a moment before cautiously scanning his surroundings. A figure emerged from the woods behind him. Recognizing the person as Abona, Daiki instantly relaxed, his earlier wariness dissipating. Seeing the regretful expression on the figure''s face, Daiki silently stepped aside. Abona approached Anos slowly and said apologetically, "Your Majesty, I understand my mistake!" "What happened in the past is in the past. Right now, our strength is insufficient. Sometimes we must be strict with ourselves." "We are partners now, and I hope you can forgive me for what I said earlier. My tone may have carried some frustration and urgency," Anos replied calmly, his voice devoid of blame, though tinged with faint embarrassment. Reflecting on the events in the palace, Anos realized his words and actions had bordered on harshness. After stepping back and reevaluating, he acknowledged that the matter was not as serious as it had seemed. Abona, however, felt even more remorseful after hearing Anos'' response. Lowering his head, the man, now in his thirties, displayed a sense of guilt, unlike anything he had shown with his previous captain. "Thank you for your understanding, Your Majesty. I will take this as a lesson," Abona said humbly. Anos stood, smiling warmly as he patted Abona''s shoulder, a silent indication that the issue was resolved.Support the author by searching for the original publication of this novel. The three of them talked late into the night, enjoying each other''s company. They were well aware of the dynamics of the Kuja Pirates ship. With so many men and women aboard, some unexpected incidents were bound to occur. Rather than return to the ship, they chose to remain ashore, creating a relaxed and comfortable space for those onboard. Sitting and chatting by the fire was a welcome reprieve. However, this peace lasted only until midnight. While they were still engrossed in conversation, a group of warriors from Amazon Lily arrived with urgency, torches lighting their way. Out of breath, one of the women towering at over 2 meters rushed forward. Her anxious tone broke the silence. "King Anos, Her Majesty Hancock is gravely ill and bedridden. Elder Nyon has instructed me to find you, as you may have a way to save her!" The atmosphere shifted instantly. Both Abona and Daiki looked worried. Daiki, especially, was puzzled. He hadn''t known that His Majesty possessed medical expertise. "Let''s go. I''ll check on her. You two return to the ship and prepare for our next journey," Anos instructed with a reassuring smile. Neither Abona nor Daiki objected, watching as Anos left with the Amazon Lily warriors, heading toward the palace. Upon reaching the palace gates, the guards stayed behind, leaving Anos to enter alone. The Boa sisters, Sandersonia and Marigold, were already awake. Sandersonia rushed to meet him, grabbing his arm and leading him inside quickly. "Sister! Your Majesty Anos is here!" she called out. Inside the room, Hancock lay on the bed, sweat dripping from her brow. Yet, upon hearing Anos'' arrival, she sat upright in a fluster, her usual regal demeanour replaced by shy confusion. As Anos approached her bedside, Hancock''s bashful expression only deepened, though she tried to compose herself. "K..i..g...Anos..." Hancock whispered, her voice trembling slightly. Without hesitation, Anos sat beside her, gesturing for the Boa sisters to leave. Understanding his unspoken command, the two sisters exited the room, closing the door behind them. "How are you feeling?" Anos asked gently, studying her closely. "It''s impro...ving... but why...are....you here?" Hancock replied, her shyness evident. Anos placed his hand lightly on her forehead, checking her condition. Hancock, who usually carried herself with utmost confidence, now resembled a docile girl, sitting quietly under his touch. "Hancock," Anos called softly. "Y-yes?" Hancock stammered, startled by his voice. "Marry me. Be my most beautiful bride. From now on, you''ll belong only to me a testament to our bond." "Huh????" Hancock''s eyes widened as her imagination took flight. She had already envisioned the details of their marriage, captivated by the man before her. In the quiet of the large room, with only the two of them present, the atmosphere grew increasingly intimate. Anos leaned closer and gently kissed her forehead, whispering, "Will you be my Queen from now on?" Though Anos had previously made his intentions clear, this moment carried a new depth. Their time together had only solidified his feelings. Hancock bit her lip, her heart racing. Without hesitation, she nodded and threw her arms around him, embracing her future with unwavering resolve. --- Check out my new fanfiction, I just released it! For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 114. Taking over Jaya island --- To be precise, these two individuals are still young, so it feels a bit early to talk about such matters. However, in this era, 17-year-olds are already considered an adult. Anos has already reached this age, while Hancock is just one year older than him. The two in the room did nothing out of the ordinary, yet Hancock''s so-called serious illness seemed to have vanished overnight. The Next Day Anos left gold, silver, and jewellery worth at least 500 million Beris on Amazon Lily. This sum was enough for the island''s inhabitants to live comfortably for a month or two without worry. Preparations soon began for their next destination. Hancock had not yet boarded the ship, but the port was already crowded with many women. They shouted enthusiastically; most were cheering for their queen, while a few seemed to be calling out to the man aboard. The scene needed no explanation. It was evident that something significant had transpired aboard the ship the previous day, leaving a deep impression on everyone. As the Kuja Pirates'' ship slowly set sail, everyone aboard was ready for the next leg of their journey, which also happened to be their ultimate goal on this voyage. Although the ship was still packed with the same crew, the upcoming voyage was far longer, making life aboard less convenient than anticipated. The crew was the same group that had initially embarked, and the ship, pulled by two mighty sea serpents, remained unchanged. However, this journey promised far greater challenges. The royal guards began teaching the Kuja warriors the basics of Armament Haki, fulfilling a promise made earlier. The people from the Tru Kingdom, now integrated with the Kuja tribe, had become like family to the Amazons. They were all regarded as allies. Most notably, the way everyone addressed Hancock had changed. From the moment Daiki first welcomed Hancock aboard, calling out, "Welcome aboard, Queen!" everyone else had begun addressing her as such. This narrative has been purloined without the author''s approval. Report any appearances on Amazon. While this surprised some of the Amazons, they quickly adapted, especially upon observing the two''s closeness. Their destination, Jaya Island, was still a long way off, and without an Eternal Pose, crossing such a vast stretch of the Grand Line posed a significant challenge. After half a month of perilous sailing, the silhouette of Jaya Island finally appeared on the horizon. It was a place no one on the ship had visited before its name was familiar, but its location seemed strangely obscure. "Your Majesty, we''ve arrived at Jaya Island!" Daiki approached Anos, who was chatting with Hancock and spoke respectfully. Over the past half-month, the crew had encountered numerous challenges while navigating the Grand Line. The danger was inevitable, no matter the route. Anos picked up a teacup, took a slow sip, and calmly ordered, "Within two hours, take control of the main areas on Jaya Island." The crew of the Kuja Pirates immediately understood the plan. As a pirate crew, their arrival signified lawlessness. In this chaotic, pirate-infested land, the only authority was strength. Jaya Island, known for its lawlessness, had been under pirate control for nearly a century. If Anos wanted to keep his actions discreet, force was the only option. Daiki, standing nearby, seemed uncertain about the command, but Hancock stood up and declared, "Kuja Pirates, follow me to Jaya Island! Within two hours, take over the entire island by force!" Her commanding presence radiated Conqueror''s Haki, inspiring the crew. A loud roar of affirmation erupted across the ship. "I didn''t misunderstand, right?" Hancock asked with a smile as she sat back down across from Anos. Anos chuckled softly. "You understood perfectly." Daiki, though a bit flustered, had no choice but to follow orders. Abona suddenly appeared, patting him on the shoulder with a grin. "Don''t overthink it just go!" The port of Jaya Island was teeming with pirate ships of various shapes and designs, each flying a different flag. The sheer number of pirates here was staggering. This was a place completely outside the jurisdiction of the Marines or the World Government. As long as things didn''t spiral out of control, the Marines rarely interfered. It was clear that the pirates and Marines had reached some sort of unspoken understanding. However, the mixed crowd made the area unpredictable. Prominent pirate groups often used Jaya as a base, which was one reason why neither the World Government nor the Marines dared to take decisive action. As the Kuja ship approached the port, its unique sea-serpent propulsion drew attention. Though the Kuja Pirates were not widely known in this part of the Grand Line, the sight of their ship intrigued the gathering crowd. At first, only a handful of pirates loitered at the port. By the time the ship docked, nearly 200 pirates had gathered, watching closely. Most of these pirates looked rough and unkempt, their expressions radiating hostility. Yet, among the chaotic crowd, one could never be certain who might be a hidden powerhouse. As the Kuja ship prepared to anchor, Anos turned to Hancock and said gently, "Once we''ve dropped you off, you can return to Amazon Lily. There''s no need for you to involve yourself in what comes next. Leave it to the others." Hancock hesitated briefly before asking, "Why Jaya Island? Why did you choose this place?" Anos smiled cryptically. "Perhaps you''ll understand someday." --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 115. Donquixote Family --- Hancock didn''t want to delve too much into what the man in front of her had done, but becoming the king of a Kingdom was no small feat. It was clear that Anos and his Subordinates had chosen this place for a reason it was vastly different from what she had imagined. Simple, yet strategic. But after hearing Anos'' instructions, Hancock could only hold her tongue. Still, she did not completely let go of her earlier concerns. Although Jaya Island isn''t particularly large, it does host a considerable number of pirates. If you count carefully, there are at least five thousand pirates scattered across the island. "Daiki, Abona, take the Royal Guards and gather all the pirates in one place within two hours. If anyone resists, deal with them on the spot!" Anos commanded, standing tall as their ship approached the port. His tone left no room for debate. "Yes, Your Majesty!" the two replied firmly. The crew, who had spent days at sea without incident, now had a chance to stretch their muscles. Excitement flickered in their eyes. The long journey had left them restless, and now they yearned for action. As the ship docked, the pirates loitering at the shore took notice. Their eyes widened at the sight of so many beauties aboard the vessel, and they whistled crudely in admiration. However, their revelry was short-lived. With a single graceful gesture from Hancock, the men turned to stone, their leering faces frozen in place. "Abona, let''s split up and tackle this from both sides," Daiki suggested with a grin as they disembarked. "No problem," Abona replied, patting Daiki on the shoulder. "Let''s make it interesting the first one to reach the central city buys the drinks!" "Deal!" Daiki laughed. For this group, the pirates on the island posed no real threat. While some claimed to be formidable, it was doubtful that any truly powerful figures were hiding among them. This wasn''t a place where great pirates gathered.Support the creativity of authors by visiting the original site for this novel and more. Jaya Island is small and unimpressive, with just one town Mock Town. In reality, it''s little more than a cluster of a few dozen businesses and a ragtag population of pirates and locals. With the strength of Abona and the Royal Guards, the task was almost trivial. Although Anos had given them two hours, they subdued the entire Mock Town within one. By then, the town was completely under their control. Anos and Hancock strolled through the streets, now eerily empty. Not a soul dared to wander; every pirate and civilian had been rounded up and confined. Even the merchants hadn''t escaped their grasp. Anos paid the prisoners no mind. He cast a glance at them before turning and heading in another direction. "Hancock, we''ll be leaving soon. This might be where we part ways," Anos said, a trace of reluctance in his voice. "Huh? Leaving already?" Hancock asked, puzzled. "Don''t overthink it," Anos replied. "Since you''re here, make the most of it. Loot the pirate ships. They''re bound to have treasured.'' "We''ll be staying for a while longer, but I have other matters to attend to and won''t be able to accompany you." "Understood," Hancock said simply. The residents of Jaya Island were left reeling. Without warning, this group stormed in, using overwhelming force to corral everyone into the centre of town. Those who resisted were swiftly and mercilessly dealt with. The pirates especially couldn''t comprehend why such a powerful group had descended on them. In the town square, a massive crowd stood huddled under the watchful eyes of a handful of warriors. Perched on rooftops or stationed strategically, the Royal Guards kept a close eye on every move the prisoners made. "Listen up!" Abona''s voice rang out from atop the highest building. "We''re not here to kill without cause, but if you resist, your lives are forfeit. Stay where you are, and you might walk away unscathed. Your lives are now in our hands choose wisely!" To emphasize his words, Abona swung his blade in a single, fluid motion. A massive crack tore through the ground, stretching hundreds of meters. The pirates, who had been restless and murmuring moments ago, fell silent, their faces pale. Among the crowd, a voice suddenly rang out. "I''m a member of the Donquixote Family! Do you dare go against Doflamingo?" "So much for loyalty," Abona scoffed. Without hesitation, He thrust his blade, silencing the man in an instant. His dismembered body fell to the ground, shocking the remaining pirates into submission. This display of cold efficiency left the pirates trembling. At this time in the Grand Line, Doflamingo was already a notorious figure, a major pirate in the New World and the king of Dressrosa. Though feared by many, his name carried little weight here. Anos and his crew couldn''t care less about the Donquixote Family or their threats. Their goal was simple: keep these pirates contained, ensuring no word of their plans escaped. Among the prisoners were likely spies, reporters, and opportunists, all hiding in plain sight. But here, they were all pirates. Their affiliations didn''t matter. In the eyes of Anos and his crew, they were just another obstacle to be crushed. --- I''ve just released my latest fanfiction be sure to check it out and let me know what you think! For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 116. Space Channel ---- This situation already serves as an excellent cover for their identities. The Marines and the World Government would never consider the Tru Kingdom as a factor. But now that the opportunity has arrived, the next steps must be taken. If you want to reach Sky Island, there aren''t many options available. However, Anos had his unique solution. Standing at the edge of Jaya Island, Anos raised his head, looking upward. Above the white clouds that stretched endlessly into the sky lay their inevitable destination. Hancock stood behind him, confused. Even after sailing together for more than half a month, she still couldn''t fully understand the man in front of her. She hadn''t known why he wanted to come to Jaya Island until now. Yet as soon as they arrived, he had begun to take control of everything on the island, all while walking towards the beach without a second thought. "Hancock, that''s where we''re headed next¡­" As Anos spoke, he stretched out his hand, pointing toward the sky. Though he pointed firmly, nothing but white clouds could be seen above. Hancock, still perplexed, asked, "Could you be talking about Sky Island?" "Yes, that''s our destination," Anos replied confidently. "But isn''t Sky Island just a legend? How could such a place exist?" Hancock asked, her scepticism evident. "Hancock, Sky Island does exist. This time, we need to go there. To be honest, Sky Island is incredibly important to me," Anos said, his tone steady. "From now on, you will be our Queen of the Tru Kingdom. There are things I no longer need to hide from you."The story has been illicitly taken; should you find it on Amazon, report the infringement. "My Devil Fruit ability is a Paramecia-type space ability. Once we reach Sky Island, I''ll construct a space channel connecting it to the Tru Kingdom. If you agree, I can even build a channel just for you. In the future, even if we''re no longer pirates, communication between the two places will remain seamless. We could meet each other in an instant." "What do you think of this idea?" Anos smiled warmly as he asked, his piercing gaze fixed on her. His eyes carried an intensity that even he found unfamiliar. Hancock blushed deeply, focusing only on his last words while ignoring everything else. For Hancock, whatever Anos said or did at that moment was perfect. If it was his wish, she would fulfil it without hesitation. Without a second thought, Hancock nodded. "Now that we''re here together, there''s no need to hide anything." After a brief moment of affection, she returned to her usual demeanour, asking, "But where exactly is Sky Island? None of us know how to get up there." "Don''t worry," Anos reassured her. "I''ve already figured out a way. However, you''ll need to stay behind and keep your identities hidden. Those pirates on the island will be left to you for now. Once everything is ready, I''ll return for you." Hancock nodded, though concern was evident in her expression. "Please be careful. Even though you''re strong, I can''t help but worry." By evening, everything was prepared. The Royal Guards and other key personnel, including Daiki, Abona, and Anos, had gathered at the beach. Those not travelling to Sky Island had already been evacuated or sent back to the Tru Kingdom. As the group assembled, Anos addressed them firmly. "If any of you have doubts or wish to stay behind, now is the time. No one will blame you for it." "Your Majesty," Daiki responded loudly, "we are your people. Even if it costs us our lives, we won''t waver!" Satisfied with their resolve, Anos smiled. "The next step is crucial for the future of the Tru Kingdom. I trust we''ll succeed together." With that, preparations for their journey to Sky Island, a fabled place ten thousand meters above the sea were complete. Yet the method to reach it remained a challenge. Even with Anos''s Devil Fruit abilities, such a feat required careful planning. Would they reach their destination, or would the risk of falling into the sea become their undoing? Anos looked at the group and declared with determination, "Let''s change the destiny of the Tru Kingdom together." The group, filled with a mixture of curiosity and determination, prepared themselves for the adventure ahead. The ascent to Sky Island would be their first step toward an unknown future. --- I''ve just released my latest fanfiction be sure to check it out and let me know what you think! For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 117. Heavens Gate --- After Anos finished speaking, he turned towards the sea. With everyone''s determination set, it was time to begin. As confusion lingered among the group, Anos suddenly produced a dozen bamboo-like devices. At first glance, they appeared ordinary, not to indicate their unique capabilities. These devices were something Anos acquired through his Devil Fruit ability, capable of enabling flight up to tens of thousands of meters. However, they were single-use items. If they failed to reach Sky Island, the consequences would be dire plummeting into the sea below. "Daiki, distribute these to everyone," Anos instructed calmly without turning back. Daiki, though puzzled, complied and handed the devices to the group, even giving one to Abona. Curiosity filled the air as Anos placed the bamboo device atop his head. As soon as he let go, it began spinning rapidly, lifting him a few meters off the ground. "Whoa!" Gasps of astonishment erupted as the group witnessed the seemingly magical device in action. Despite living in a world of Devil Fruits and Sea Kings, this simple invention left them in awe. "This device is single-use," Anos explained, hovering in mid-air. "It will take us to approximately 10,000 meters, but Sky Island is located at about 7,000 meters. Remember, no one must stray from the group under any circumstances!" The group acknowledged the instruction, albeit still mesmerized by the prospect of flight.Enjoying this book? Seek out the original to ensure the author gets credit. One by one, they placed the devices on their heads, joining Anos in the air. For many, the sensation of flying was a once-in-a-lifetime experience. Even Abona couldn''t help but feel as if he were dreaming. "This is incredible!" Abona exclaimed, his disbelief evident. "Focus!" Anos barked. "We''re heading for the White Sea, the layer of cloud-sea beneath Sky Island. Remember, the White Sea can nullify Devil Fruit users like the ocean below. Stick together, hold hands if necessary, and brace for the winds!" The group moved upward in unison, facing fierce winds as they ascended. To counter the turbulence, they linked hands, forming a chain to ensure no one was lost. "Abona, scout ahead and confirm if we''ve reached the White Sea!" Anos commanded, his voice cutting through the howling winds. Abona complied, pushing forward against the gale. However, as he ascended further, the air grew humid and suffocating, forcing him to retreat. "We''re close about 3,000 meters away," Abona reported, panting heavily. Anos nodded, reaching out to Daiki and Abona. With a flash of blue energy, a spatial barrier enveloped the group. Moments later, they reappeared in a completely different environment. The chaos of the winds vanished, replaced by calm skies and an otherworldly landscape. Before them stretched a surreal land of fluffy white clouds, giving the illusion of walking on air. "This is... Sky Island?" Abona whispered, his awe mirrored by the others. "Abona, never doubt His Majesty again," Daiki said with a grin. "When His Majesty speaks, he''s always right. Still, this place... it''s beyond what I imagined. I can''t help but feel excited!" The group shared expressions of wonder and disbelief. For many, the existence of Sky Island was a mere myth, but here it stood a land suspended in the heavens. "Everyone, stay alert!" Anos ordered. "The bamboo devices are about to lose power. Land on the white clouds ahead, regroup, and check our numbers." The group quickly manoeuvred towards a stable patch of clouds. Anos emphasized the importance of ensuring everyone''s safety, knowing that a single mishap could mean disaster. Once regrouped, they continued toward the island''s entrance. Before them stood the iconic Heaven''s Gate, carved from white clouds. Surprisingly, no toll-keepers or guards were present, leaving the gate eerily silent. "This is where it begins," Anos said firmly, his piercing gaze fixed on the horizon. For the Kingdom of Tru, their journey to Sky Island marked the start of a turning point. What awaited them on this legendary island would shape their future, but the challenges ahead were unknown, even to Anos himself. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 118. Gan Fall --- The current Sky Island appeared sparse and modest, lacking the grandeur one might expect. Even at the gate, no guards were stationed, as if the absence of visitors for a long time had led to a complete lapse in vigilance. A group of people sauntered in confidently, taking in their surroundings. However, one notable sight greeted them a colossal lobster stationed nearby. "Your Majesty, look at the size of that lobster! Can we eat it?" one soldier exclaimed with excitement. The lobster was indeed massive, towering two or three stories high and spanning hundreds of meters in length. Its sheer size gave everyone ideas of a feast that could last for days. However, this "Express Shrimp," as it was known, seemed to understand their intentions. The moment the soldier spoke, it bolted away, vanishing from sight. "That thing sure knows how to run!" Daiki remarked, watching the shrimp disappear. The group couldn''t help but share the same regretful thought such a meal would have been legendary. Even Anos, their king, shared their sentiments. "That shrimp could''ve saved us so much time if we''d ridden it," Anos commented, shaking his head in mild exasperation. "Well, it''s a shame it got away," Daiki replied with a chuckle, though his disappointment was more for the missed meal than the lost ride. As they proceeded, Anos addressed the group with caution. "Everyone, stay alert. The residents of Sky Island are not to be underestimated. They may appear unassuming, but they have their strengths, and carelessness might get someone hurt." The group nodded solemnly. Although they were confident in their abilities, they understood the wisdom of Anos'' words.This story originates from a different website. Ensure the author gets the support they deserve by reading it there. Sky Island, being a largely unexplored and mysterious place, could harbour surprises good or bad. Walking through the gates, they were greeted by a striking sight: a spiralling pathway of solidified white clouds winding upwards. In the centre flowed a river, connecting the White Sea below to the higher regions above. Though the sea looked different from the Blue Sea, its properties were the same it could incapacitate Devil Fruit users. Among the group were several Devil Fruit users, including Anos and Daiki. If anyone fell into the river, the fast current would spell doom. As they walked along the spiral path, climbing higher into the sky, the group remained cautiously optimistic. Though the journey had been uneventful so far, their vigilance didn''t waver. "Suzu, keep an eye on the surroundings. Daiki, stay on guard. The rest of you, move quickly," Anos ordered, his voice steady and authoritative. Suzu and Daiki immediately complied, with Suzu scanning for threats and Daiki ensuring their formation remained intact. The group advanced steadily, finding their footing on the soft but firm white clouds. Their peaceful march was soon interrupted when Suzu suddenly raised her fist in a signal to stop. Daiki didn''t wait for further clarification and immediately shouted, "Everyone, stay on alert!" Moments later, a man appeared, riding a white flying steed and clad in armour. He held a spear-like weapon, his posture radiating authority. Despite being alone, his presence demanded attention. "Who are you, and why have you come to my Sky Island?" the man demanded. His voice was firm, carrying the weight of a protector''s duty. Anos quickly recognized the man as Gan Fall, though he appeared younger here, with dark hair and a sharp gaze. Despite his impressive appearance, Anos could tell that Gan Fall''s strength was no match for anyone in his group. Stepping forward with a disarming smile, Anos responded, "We mean no harm. We are here searching for something and have no intention of causing trouble for Sky Island." Gan Fall''s expression remained cold. "What could people from the Blue Sea possibly want on Sky Island? Are you after treasure?" he asked suspiciously. Before Anos could answer, Daiki interjected with a stern tone. "We aren''t interested in your treasures, but we can ensure your cooperation if necessary. Don''t make us resort to force." "Daiki," Anos called out, his voice firm yet calm, signalling for him to stand down. Anos then turned back to Gan Fall with an air of diplomacy. "I am Anos, King of the Tru Kingdom in the South Blue. I simply wish to visit Sky Island as a guest. Surely that is not an unreasonable request?" Gan Fall''s eyes narrowed as he processed the statement. "A king, you say?" he muttered, though Daiki''s earlier words had already set him on edge. The group''s intentions were more complex than they were letting on. Gan Fall''s grip on his weapon tightened as his gaze sharpened, ready for a confrontation if things escalated. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 119. Young Enel -1 --- At this moment, Anos released a faint trace of his Conqueror''s Haki, not intending to directly suppress Gan Fall but merely allowing it to emanate slightly. Even with just that, the flying white horse Gan Fall was riding collapsed onto the white clouds instantly, causing Gan Fall himself to stumble and fall, unable to maintain his footing. It was then that Gan Fall finally realized the terrifying presence of the group in front of him. His vigilance and panic grew more pronounced. "What exactly do you intend to do?" Gan Fall sat up reluctantly, looking at Anos as he questioned him. But Anos had no intention of conversing further. He waved his hand, and the two guards behind him stepped forward, grabbed Gan Fall, and began dragging him forward. "Your Majesty, who is this old man?" Daiki asked curiously. "You and I came here together. How would I know if you don''t?" Anos replied, shaking his head in mild exasperation. Turning back to glance at Gan Fall, he continued, "This man is Gan Fall, the ''God'' of Skypiea!" "Gan Fall? So what about him?" Daiki muttered as he followed behind. Gan Fall, still unsure of the group''s intentions, found himself struggling to grasp their true objective. Their strength was undoubtedly beyond comprehension, but why they had come to Skypiea and why they were dragging him along was still a mystery to him. For now, he could only comply and hope to learn more by observing them. As the group entered deeper into Skypiea, the sight before them was breathtaking. Various buildings, predominantly crafted from white clouds, stood out. Despite the uniformity of colour and material, the structures exuded elegance and beauty. The strange modes of transportation on Skypiea also piqued their interest, but no one strayed to investigate. Instead, they remained focused on the path ahead.Taken from Royal Road, this narrative should be reported if found on Amazon. The presence of Anos and his group was impossible to miss. Their foreign attire and demeanour immediately set them apart, drawing curious glances from Skypiea''s inhabitants. The fact that they were dragging Gan Fall, Skypiea''s "God," added to the shock, though no one dared to intervene. "Stealing again, huh? I''ll teach you a lesson, you useless brat!" "Forget it,p Dealing with trash like him is a waste of effort. Let''s go before we dirty our hands!" Anos''s group hadn''t walked far down what appeared to be a street when they encountered a group of children bullying a boy who seemed around thirteen or fourteen years old. The children were hurling insults as they attacked him. The boy, lying on the ground, didn''t utter a single word throughout the ordeal. As the group of bullies noticed Anos''s presence, they glared at him and sneered, "What are you looking at? Outsiders again! You are always sticking your noses where they don''t belong. What are you doing on our island?" With that, the children left, leaving the beaten boy sitting silently on the ground, wiping blood from the corner of his mouth. He remained silent as if he were mute. Anos walked over, crouching down to get a better look at the boy. His clothes were ragged, his feet bare, and his appearance screamed poverty a beggar on Skypiea. "Daiki, bring some food over here!" Anos called out casually to Daiki, who immediately retrieved some provisions from the guards and handed them to him. The boy, who had been wiping blood from his mouth, glanced curiously at Anos, who now crouched before him. "This is something from the Blue Sea. Try it and see if you like it," Anos offered, holding out a piece of bread. "Don''t bother with me. They call me a Cursed child and say I bring bad luck to anyone who comes near me," the boy replied in a calm, emotionless tone. "What''s your name?" Anos asked again, refusing to give up. "Enel." The boy stood and began to leave, ignoring the bread offered by Anos. The moment he heard the name, Anos froze momentarily. He hadn''t expected the legendary Enel to be so young, appearing several years younger than himself. Before arriving on Skypiea, Anos had speculated about the existence of the Rumble-Rumble Fruit, wondering if it had already been consumed. But from the looks of it, Enel had yet to acquire it. Anos smiled faintly as he watched Enel walk away. "Let''s find a place to rest for now. We''ll discuss the details later," Anos said, standing up and gesturing for the group to move forward. "Your Majesty, how are we supposed to find a place to stay here?" Daiki asked, noting the unwelcoming atmosphere of the island. "Isn''t Gan Fall right here? If I recall correctly, there should be a shrine on Skypiea with ample space. We''ll rest there for now and take the opportunity to survey the island," Anos replied calmly. Then he turned to another member of his group. "Abona, use your Observation Haki to locate the shrine and lead everyone there!" "Understood, Your Majesty!" Abona, holding the Dawn Blade in his arms, nodded firmly. Gan Fall remained bewildered. These strangers didn''t seem to harbour overt hostility or desire, yet they navigated Skypiea with surprising familiarity, leaving him both alarmed and puzzled. Anos, however, paid him no mind. Without another word, he began walking in the direction Enel had gone, leaving his group to follow closely behind. The bright sun still shone over Skypiea, indicating several hours remained before nightfall. Anos continued down the street, observing the surroundings on both sides with a calculating gaze. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 120. Young Enel -2 --- The monetary unit currently used on Sky Island is the same as that used in the sea below, and Beris is widely accepted as the standard currency. As for the currency in the later period, it might have been reestablished after Enel declared himself a god. Walking down this long street, the rate of turning heads was remarkably high. Everyone stared curiously at this man from Blue Sea. However, the locals were also hospitable and showed no discrimination against foreigners. Even upon entering a store, shopkeepers would warmly welcome outsiders and thoughtfully introduce their products. Although Sky Islands rarely receive visitors for years at a time, one or two outsiders occasionally appear. Sometimes, even more, arrive, as the vast Sky Island region contains numerous islands connected. Altogether, there are said to be twenty or thirty Sky Islands. However, most of these islands are dominated by island clouds and lack solid land. Only a few places, like the Holy Land, are characterized by soil-based areas. Anos wandered alone across this place, observing the overall structure of Sky Island. As dusk approached, he finally spotted the figure of a young Enel. At that moment, Enel was lying alone on the white clouds. Fortunately, the weather on Sky Island is mild and spring-like year-round. The softness and insulation of the white clouds made them comfortable to sleep on, even if the nights grew colder. The area where Enel lay was on the outskirts of the Sky Island region, closer to the Holy Land, which was surrounded by mud forests. Upon spotting Enel, Anos turned and walked into a nearby restaurant. He ordered two meals before heading back outside. When he approached Enel, the boy seemed a little wary. However, as they had already met once and left a good impression, Enel did not resist Anos much.If you spot this tale on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation. "Little guy, what are you doing here? Judging by the look of you, you probably haven''t eaten yet. I happened to buy an extra portion. Let''s eat together!" Anos sat directly on the Milky Clouds beside him and handed the extra meal to Enel. Seeing Enel at this stage of his life, Anos finally understood why he would one day seek revenge on the people of Sky Island. A child who is disregarded and often bullied grows up harbouring an overwhelming desire for vengeance. ''Why do I feel like the uncle that parents tell their child to be wary of?'' Anos thought while offering food to Enel. After handing the meal to Enel, Anos quietly began eating his own without saying a word. Enel, seeing this, did not refuse Anos'' kindness. The two sat together. In terms of appearance and demeanour, they seemed worlds apart, yet they quietly shared this moment. After finishing his meal, Enel wiped his mouth with satisfaction. He turned to Anos, who was still eating elegantly, and said suddenly, "Thank you for the dinner. This is the best meal I''ve had in years the best meal of my life!" "You''re welcome," Anos replied with a smile. "My name is Anos. You can call me Big Brother Anos or Your Majesty, like everyone else! I''m the king of a kingdom in the Blue Sea, and I''m 17 years old. I should be older than you!" "My name is Enel. I''m 14 years old," Enel replied simply. Although Enel had introduced himself before, this marked the beginning of a formal friendship. But Enel then added, "Don''t get too close to me. Everyone who does ends up dead. They call me a disaster, and no one wants to play with me, let alone talk to me." Anos chuckled and said, "Why care about what others think? Do what you want to do. Life is long, and you should live it for yourself." For Enel, who had never known true companionship, Anos'' warmth was a revelation. "Can you tell me about Blue Sea?" Enel asked suddenly. "Of course!" Anos said with a smile. He lay back on the Milky Cloud, hands behind his head, and gazed at the starry sky. "The blue sea is vast an endless expanse of ocean. It''s full of things you won''t find on Sky Islands. The lands are massive, many times larger than your islands. There are countless powerful people, interesting individuals, and loyal companions, each with their unique character." "I live there, but sometimes I envy the peaceful and simple life of the Sky Islands. Of course, maybe it''s different for you. Everyone has their path to follow." Turning to Enel, Anos asked, "What''s your dream?" "I want to go to the moon," Enel replied after some thought. "It''s a place of wonder. I heard stories about it once, and it''s been my dream ever since. When I was younger, I tried building something to reach the moon, but while I was gone, someone knocked it over. That caused a disaster." "Everyone in my village disappeared overnight. I''ve been blamed for it ever since. That''s why no one wants to be near me they say I''m cursed." Anos nodded thoughtfully. "The past is behind us. What matters is having a dream and working toward it. That''s what makes life worthwhile." Through this conversation, Anos understood the tragic past that had shaped Enel''s vengeful nature. Even as a child, Enel was a creative genius. Later, his abilities would allow him to construct a flying golden ship, a testament to his brilliance. But if he could make him better than the original it would benefit both him & Skypiea. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 121. Take over Sky Island --- The two of them lay on the white clouds, chatting. Even though darkness was falling, it didn''t matter to them now. Unknowingly, they fell asleep happily on the soft white clouds. In Anos''s view, Enel''s life was rather pitiful. At only nine years old, he had developed powers capable of destroying an entire island. After that, he wandered to this place. For the past four or five years, he had made no friends. Everyone regarded him as a menace, treating him with disdain. This neglect eventually twisted the young boy''s mind. One has to admit, sometimes, that Enel''s abilities surpass everyone''s imagination. The original story did not delve into Enel''s backstory much. It only mentioned that he killed everyone on his home island as a child. Now, listening to his story, Enel indeed stands out as an extraordinary figure. When Anos approached Enel this time, he gained a preliminary understanding of him. He wasn''t as bad as initially imagined he was far better, even exceeding expectations. If this guy were under the control of the World Government, he would likely become one of their greatest assets, perhaps comparable to their top scientists. But now that Anos had discovered him, it was natural to use this opportunity to shape him into a talent that would benefit his kingdom. This was only the first day on Sky Island, yet it had already yielded an unexpectedly happy ending at least for Anos. Meanwhile, Daiki was leading Abona and their team of guards, accompanying Ganfall to the so-called Shrine. The shrine was constructed on a section of earth, floating in the sky. While it wasn''t particularly large, it was filled with priests. Ganfall remained compliant yet cautious. He still couldn''t fathom why these people had come to Sky Island. Along the way, he observed their every move.Unauthorized reproduction: this story has been taken without approval. Report sightings. At first, Ganfall thought they were treasure seekers. However, upon following them to the palace where they resided, his opinion changed. These people had no interest in treasure. Instead, they meticulously examined the surroundings and even planned specific layouts as they walked. Although surprised, Ganfall said nothing throughout the journey. When they entered the shrine, there were around forty or fifty people present. They wore white robes with small decorative wings on their backs, similar to typical attire on Sky Island. "Abona, sense the surroundings," Daiki ordered. Abona immediately activated his observation abilities while the other guards stood on alert. Their team followed strict combat protocols. When some members scouted, others maintained a defensive stance to counter any unexpected events. Upon hearing the command, Abona''s Haki spread out over a two-kilometre radius. After confirming the area was safe, he retracted his senses and said, "It''s relatively secure here. There are dozens of people in this area." Daiki nodded in acknowledgement and turned his attention to observing the priests. The priests, in turn, were equally curious about why Ganfall had brought this group of strangers here. "Gentlemen, I have brought you to the shrine as requested. I do not understand your purpose here on Sky Island, but I implore you not to harm anyone," Ganfall said tactfully. Although he was Sky Island''s strongest warrior, he understood that he stood no chance against these individuals. "I hear your name is Ganfall, correct?" Daiki said calmly. "Rest assured, we have no intention of harming anyone here." "Thank you, but may I ask what your purpose is on Sky Island?" Ganfall asked cautiously. "To take over the management of Sky Island," Abona said coldly, stepping forward. "So that''s it," Ganfall muttered. He wasn''t entirely surprised. As someone well-versed in world affairs, he could sense the intentions of these outsiders from their demeanour and Anos'' self-introduction. As a king, Anos wouldn''t journey to Sky Island without reason. He clearly had a purpose. Still, Ganfall had noticed something unique during their interactions when Anos gave food to Enel, it was an act of kindness that Ganfall couldn''t ignore. "Since you know our purpose, I hope you can cooperate," Daiki added. "We come in peace. Sky Island is vital to us, and we wish to avoid any unnecessary conflict." Before arriving, Anos had instructed his team to minimize disputes in Sky Island, as it would soon become part of the Tru Kingdom. For them, taking over Sky Island was imperative, and they were confident in their ability to do so. Even without the full Tru Kingdom army, the forces present were more than enough to dominate this relatively small island. Daiki maintained a composed demeanour, striving to appear non-threatening to the locals. However, if cooperation wasn''t forthcoming, he wouldn''t hesitate to use every resource at his disposal. In an age where pirates ran rampant, excessive kindness could often be interpreted as weakness and weakness was a luxury they couldn''t afford. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 122. Enels Excitement --- The priests in the original shrine looked at one another in confusion, completely unsure of the situation they found themselves in. However, from the conversations between the two groups, one could infer a great deal. They were not fools. Within moments, they understood that these people had come to compete for control of Sky Island. "My lord, who are these people?" Finally, a priest couldn''t suppress his curiosity and loudly questioned Gan Fall. "From now on, everyone will follow their orders. No one is to resist or act unnecessarily. I will explain everything to you in detail tomorrow." Gan Fall spoke calmly. His thoughts were not clouded by complex emotions. His sole aim was to stabilize his people before meeting Anos, to avoid any unnecessary conflict. Gan Fall was well aware of the strength of these outsiders and had no desire to see any harm come to his priests. "From now on, all shifts will proceed as usual. We will discuss everything in detail after His Majesty arrives tomorrow." Daiki promptly shouted orders to his people, paying no heed to the priests in the shrine. He trusted Gan Fall to handle matters regarding Sky Island and believed conflict could be avoided if the situation was managed properly. Gan Fall indeed acted as Daiki anticipated. He gathered all the priests, and though they weren''t privy to every detail of the discussions, it was clear that the outcome had been determined. The two groups remained peaceful and awaited the arrival of dawn.Unauthorized use of content: if you find this story on Amazon, report the violation. --- The Next Morning At the break of dawn, Anos, who had been sleeping on the soft, white clouds, stirred. The open-air environment was a refreshing change from the cramped quarters of a ship. After stretching, Anos noticed Enel was nowhere to be seen. He wasn''t particularly concerned. Just as he stood to look for Daiki and the others, Enel appeared, carrying an assortment of wild fruits. "Brother Anos, you''re awake!" Enel greeted him with a cheerful expression. It seemed that last night''s conversation had eased his heart. The young man now appeared brighter and more open. Despite this, Enel was still dressed in tattered clothes barefoot, shirtless, and wearing ragged trousers. His upper garments had been repurposed as a makeshift sack to carry the fruits he had gathered. "Where did you go?" Anos asked curiously. "Eat something first, Brother! I went to the Holy Land. There are many strange things there, and I found these delicious fruits. Try them!" Anos chuckled at Enel''s enthusiasm. He didn''t reject the young man''s gesture. Despite the shabby wrappings, the fruits were washed. Anos sat back down on the fluffy clouds and picked up what looked like a green apple, taking a bite. Though the fruit was more sour than sweet, the fresh taste was a rare treat on Sky Island. "You''ve probably grown up eating things like this, haven''t you?" Anos asked, noticing Enel''s thin frame. "Not always. I only eat this occasionally. There isn''t much to eat on this island, so I usually fish in the sea." Enel responded nonchalantly. "Well, now that you''ve recognized me as your elder brother, I''ll make sure you''re well-fed from now on!" Anos ruffled Enel''s messy hair with a warm smile. The sour apple, however, was hard for Anos to tolerate, and he quietly set it aside after a bite. Enel noticed. "Brother, why aren''t you eating?" "Don''t overthink it. I''m just not that hungry. Finish eating I''ll take you somewhere after." Enel perked up at the prospect of exploring. Encouraged, he devoured the apples, not even leaving the cores behind. Soon, only a few apples remained. He offered them to Anos, though his mouth was too full to articulate his thoughts clearly. Anos smiled, understanding the gesture. "You eat them. Don''t worry about me. Now that you''re done, let''s go!" Anos stood, still holding the half-eaten apple in his hand. On Sky Island, fruits were a rarity. The so-called Holy Land, where trees grew, was now considered sacred ground, inaccessible to ordinary people. For many, tasting fruit was a dream they would never realize. Enel, who had grown up in such deprivation, couldn''t hide his excitement as he followed his newfound brother. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 123. Upper Yard --- Enel stood up quickly as he spoke, wasting no time. Despite his worn-out coat, he continued to wear it, clutching the remaining fruits in his hands. Anos observed him with a slight smile and chose to say nothing. "Where are we going? I''m very familiar with Skypiea!" Enel eagerly began to explain. "There seems to be a place called the Shrine here. Do you know about it?" Anos turned his head, smiling as he asked. "Oh, the Shrine? Of course, I know it! I''ve been there several times, but the people there usually don''t let me stay long. I''ve sneaked in a few times, though it''s the biggest and most important place in all of Skypiea!" Enel said enthusiastically. "I didn''t expect you to be so familiar with this place. Alright, let''s go. I''ll take you there this time," Anos said, beginning to walk ahead. The Shrine wasn''t particularly far, but it would still take about an hour on foot. Skypiea wasn''t a vast place, but it had its share of distance. "Brother, why are we going to the Shrine? Nobody there is a good person or at least, I don''t think so." Enel continued to chatter as they walked. Anos found the boy to be quite the talker. Considering Enel''s sharp mind, it was natural for him to be expressive. Faced with loneliness and the cold stares of others, Enel had endured and clung to his circumstances. Even in the future, when he would rise to power as the self-proclaimed "God" of Skypiea, he never chose senseless violence. This revealed a kind-hearted nature beneath his rough exterior.Reading on Amazon or a pirate site? This novel is from Royal Road. Support the author by reading it there. All he needed now was the right guidance. With a lack of moral clarity and no sense of friendship, there was still a long path ahead for him. "Enel, have you ever thought about becoming strong?" As they walked, Anos turned to glance at Enel, who was trailing behind, seemingly lost in thought. "Strong?" Enel scratched his chin with his dirty hands, pondering deeply before responding blankly, "What''s the use of being strong?" "When you''re strong, you can protect the people you care about and achieve many of your goals. Even in the face of helplessness, your strength can safeguard what matters most to you," Anos said calmly. "Then I''ve decided I''ll become strong! And one day, I''ll find a way to help you, brother!" Enel declared with conviction. As they conversed, they reached the edge of a dense forest. Beyond it lay land, a rarity in Skypiea. This land, known as the Upper Yard, had risen from 10,000 meters below. Its presence, starkly different from the cloud-made terrain of Skypiea, had turned it into a forbidden area revered by the island''s people. The soil and massive trees were protected as a sacred anomaly. Standing on the forest''s edge, Anos marvelled at the massive trees growing in such an extraordinary place. "Brother Anos, follow me! I know a faster route. This place is full of traps set by the Shandians. If we''re not careful, we could get caught or worse!" Enel exclaimed, running ahead to guide the way. "Enel, slow down! I''ll take the lead," Anos called out, scanning their surroundings with interest. When Enel heard Anos''s voice, he hesitated, standing on the roots of a massive tree. In an instant, Anos appeared beside him, grabbed his shoulder, and the two vanished. Moments after they disappeared, two figures emerged from the forest. The newcomers were bare-chested with dark skin and strong physiques. Their braided hair and animal-skin clothing gave them a rugged, tribal appearance. If not for the contraptions on their feet, one might mistake them for savages. The devices on their feet resembled skates but allowed them to hover slightly above the ground, emitting a faint sound of rushing air. "Wiper, didn''t you say you saw two people here? Where are they now?" One of them, holding a mace-like weapon, questioned the other. "How would I know? I heard voices here just moments ago, but they vanished into thin air!" Wiper replied, clutching his spear. "We should leave. If we stay too long, the priests might show up," the first man said. "Braham, why do you always worry? Those priests are too busy to care about us right now. I checked the Shrine yesterday some visitors from the Blue Sea are staying there, so the priests likely won''t bother us today," Wiper replied confidently. Though their purpose remained unclear, it was evident from their demeanour that these two were not to be underestimated. The hovering devices on their feet alone provided a significant advantage. Meanwhile, Anos and Enel had reached the Shrine gates. Unlike other parts of Skypiea, the Shrine''s architecture utilized clouds processed into materials of remarkable hardness. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 124. Goro Goro no Mi --- The difference from before was that there were now two guards from the Tru Kingdom stationed outside the shrine, particularly at the gate. The moment Anos appeared, they immediately bowed and shouted, "Your Majesty!" "Is everyone inside?" Anos asked. "Yes, Your Majesty!" After hearing the response from one of the Royal Guards, Anos smiled slightly and began striding toward the entrance. However, Enel, who accompanied him, remained bewildered. Just moments ago, he had been on the outskirts, and now, he suddenly found himself at the shrine''s gate. Seeing the composed demeanour of his brother, Anos, Enel snapped out of his thoughts and hurried to follow. The guards at the door did not attempt to stop him. As they entered, the expansive courtyard revealed priests lounging in the sun, utterly relaxed, with no trace of tension or concern. They behaved as if they were in their own homes, indifferent to any potential threats. Meanwhile, personnel from the Tru Kingdom stood guard nearby, ensuring the priests'' safety. As Anos walked deeper into the courtyard, the Tru Kingdom guards stationed there saluted him respectfully, calling out, "Your Majesty!" It wasn''t until their voices rang out that the priests, previously basking in the sun, finally stirred. They stood up one by one, their curious gazes fixed on the young boy approaching. From one of the nearby buildings, Abona and Daiki emerged, followed by Gan Fall. This marked the formal meeting. As the two stepped forward, Anos asked, "Has anything happened?" "Your Majesty, nothing unusual. Gan Fall has been cooperative with us. In fact, he stayed awake all night, awaiting your arrival," Daiki reported, standing at the forefront.This tale has been unlawfully obtained from Royal Road. If you discover it on Amazon, kindly report it. Anos''s gaze shifted to Gan Fall, who appeared fatigued, his face showing signs of sleeplessness. "Let''s talk inside," Anos said calmly, glancing at the surrounding priests. Despite their earlier display of leisure, their expressions remained indifferent, as if the issue of control over Skypiea didn''t concern them. To them, it seemed unimportant who held power. Without addressing the priests further, Anos headed toward the shrine''s main hall. Behind him, Enel hesitated, unsure whether to enter or stay behind. The priests'' indifferent attitudes left him feeling uneasy. The shrine''s main hall was striking in its simplicity. Everything, from the walls to the furniture, was crafted from pure white clouds, giving it a solemn and pristine ambience. Unlike royal palaces below the clouds, there was no throne at the centre. Instead, a large statue dominated the room, holding a purple Devil Fruit in one hand. The fruit was the first thing anyone noticed upon entering, yet no one had dared touch it. As Anos entered, he paused, his gaze fixed on the statue''s hand. "Your Majesty, it seems you''ve noticed it too?" Abona said, stepping forward with a smile. "The Thunder-Thunder Fruit... One of the strongest Logia Devil Fruits. Are you interested?" Anos asked, smiling faintly at Abona. "Your Majesty, please don''t joke. I have no interest in such things," Abona quickly replied. "When I saw it yesterday, I thought I was mistaken. But upon closer inspection, it was unmistakable," Daiki added with a wry smile. "Leave it for now. It will serve its purpose in due time," Anos said, his tone calm yet confident. The Thunder-Thunder Fruit, if mastered, could create an immensely powerful individual capable of dominating the seas. Yet, to Anos, its value was insignificant. A person could only eat one Devil Fruit in their lifetime. No matter how powerful the fruit, it held no appeal for him personally. The shrine''s residents also refrained from touching the fruit. It wasn''t ignorance but their unwavering faith in their gods that kept them from claiming it. The statue itself, carved in the image of a female seraph, was strikingly lifelike. Without dwelling on the statue, Anos turned his attention to the rest of the hall. The space wasn''t large; it could comfortably accommodate forty or fifty people. A dozen cloud-made chairs lined the sides, blending seamlessly with the white d¨¦cor. Choosing not to sit, Anos addressed Gan Fall directly: "Have they explained why we''re here?" "They have, Your Majesty," Gan Fall replied. "But I don''t understand why people from the Blue Sea are so interested in controlling Skypiea." This question had plagued Gan Fall throughout the night. The sky island, suspended 10,000 meters above the Blue Sea, was perilous for anyone attempting to reach it. A fall from this height meant certain death, even for the strongest of warriors. The logistical challenges of travelling between Skypiea and the Blue Sea made its value seem questionable. Still, if the struggle for control meant peace for Skypiea''s people, Gan Fall felt compelled to seek clarity. Though aware his strength was no match for theirs, he still believed that as the former ruler, he deserved a reasonable explanation before relinquishing power. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 125. Mapping Skypiea --- Faced with Gan Fall''s question, Anos didn''t want to say much, but since he planned to take control of this place, the next arrangements had to be meticulously prepared. He looked at Gan Fall leisurely and said, "You can remain the ''God'' of this Skypiea in the future and establish an autonomous management system. In other words, the Tru Kingdom will introduce an optimized governance model here." "At the very least, Skypiea will no longer have to worry about food or other resources. The Tru Kingdom will oversee talent cultivation and resource education and ensure security." "I understand that conflicts have plagued this island for 400 years. To resolve this, we are willing to mediate and bring peace, so the people of Skypiea can live without worries. What do you think of these terms?" These terms were undeniably appealing to Gan Fall. Having served as the "God" of Skypiea for decades, he saw its people almost as his children. As for who would govern the island in the future, Gan Fall didn''t have strong attachments to the role. However, what truly excited him was Anos''s promise to resolve the 400-year-old dispute. From Gan Fall''s birth until now, Skypiea had never been truly peaceful. Frequent conflicts erupted between the Shandians and the Skypiea natives. This lingering historical scar remained unresolved, with no successful negotiations between the two sides. While the other promises were attractive, it was Anos''s attitude and approach that earned Gan Fall''s respect. Though Gan Fall lacked a deep understanding of the politics in the Blue Sea or the structure of foreign kingdoms, Anos''s authority as the king of a powerful nation, backed by his capable companions, spoke volumes. "King Anos, your terms are indeed desirable for Sky Island''s current state. However, how can you prove you can fulfil these promises?" Gan Fall asked.This tale has been pilfered from Royal Road. If found on Amazon, kindly file a report. Though he acknowledged Anos''s strength, doubts lingered about his ability to resolve centuries-old issues. Sky Island, despite its small size, covered a considerable area, including vast stretches of sea clouds like the White-White Sea. The animosity between the Shandians and the Sky Island inhabitants had persisted for hundreds of years. Could this suddenly change because of one man''s intervention? Anos didn''t waste time with unnecessary words. He replied firmly, "How we address these issues is our concern. What you need to do now is inform the Skypiea populace about our intentions. Share details about Tru Kingdom''s planned governance and future projects in the coming days. I trust you will cooperate with us moving forward." "I hope so," Gan Fall responded calmly. The clarity and decisiveness in Anos''s plans aligned with Sky Island''s needs. With no fertile land and reliance on the White-White Sea for survival, Sky Island''s future demanded innovation. If Anos could deliver on his promises, then the question of who ruled the island became secondary. Gan Fall''s composure and willingness to cooperate impressed Anos. Despite Skypiea not being a formal Kingdom or a nation, Gan Fall had the bearing of a true leader. To entrust his people''s future so readily spoke to his selflessness and strength of character. "Now that matters regarding Skypiea have been decided, let''s move to the specifics!" Anos turned to Daiki and instructed, "Lead a team to map the entire Skypiea within three days. Mark all significant topographical features and key areas. Pay particular attention to Shandora, the ancient city of gold from 800 years ago." "Identify all usable land, assess the size of cloud islands, and determine whether these cloud formations can be converted into training grounds using lithification techniques." Before Anos finished, Daiki''s eyes lit up with excitement. The thought of an ancient city made entirely of gold was dazzling. He could barely contain his curiosity. However, before Daiki''s fantasies could spiral, Anos flicked him on the forehead and said with mild annoyance, "Focus. Your ideas will have their time, but for now, handle the task at hand. Can I count on you?" Standing at attention, Daiki responded seriously, "Don''t worry, Your Majesty. I''ll complete everything within three days without fail!" Satisfied with Daiki''s resolve, Anos felt reassured. The groundwork for establishing a military base and a safe haven for his kingdom was essential. Turning back to Gan Fall, Anos said, "As the former ''God'' of Skypiea, your position will remain unchanged. If you''re willing, I''d like you to serve as an official in the Tru Kingdom, managing the people of Sky Island. Your priests can retain their duties, with minor refinements. What do you say?" Recognizing Gan Fall''s influence on Sky Island, Anos valued his leadership and interpersonal skills. Gan Fall, who had been considering this himself, smiled and replied, "Leave it to me. As long as it benefits the people of Sky Island, I, Gan Fall, will do whatever it takes!" --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 126. Census --- Seeing that Gan Fall agreed, Anos smiled confidently. Everything was progressing much smoother than anticipated. As long as Gan Fall could accept Tru Kingdom''s management of Skypiea, more than half of their plan''s success was already assured. "Since you have agreed, it means you are now one of us. As for formal titles, there''s no need for excessive discussion at this point," Anos stated calmly. "However, there are matters you must handle next." "First, I need a detailed census of all the current inhabitants of Skypiea. Provide me with the exact population, the nature of their occupations, and their living conditions." "Second, we must publicize that Tru Kingdom now holds full authority and management over Skypiea. The people need to recognize this new leadership in their hearts." "We must address their concerns, emphasize the benefits of our governance, and ensure their loyalty. Educate them about how this change will improve their lives," Anos continued, his tone steady but authoritative. This step was crucial for solidifying control over Skypiea. To manage foreign relations, domestic stability had to be secured first. Winning the trust of the locals would pave the way for efficient governance. Gan Fall pondered Anos''s words. This bloodless approach to establishing control was a novel concept for him. From start to finish, the people of Skypiea experienced no war or chaos, maintaining their peaceful way of life. In fact, their future prospects seemed brighter under this new rule. The people of Skypiea cared little about who ruled as long as their lives were unaffected or, better yet, improved. Anos''s strategy leveraged this mindset, ensuring a seamless transition of power. Aside from occasional conflicts with the Shandians, Skypiea had enjoyed long periods of peace. Gan Fall felt confident he could fulfil Anos''s two requests without much difficulty and readily agreed.If you come across this story on Amazon, it''s taken without permission from the author. Report it. Turning his attention to Abona, Anos spoke next. Abona''s strength made him the most suitable for the more challenging mission. "Abona, I''m giving you half a month to locate the Shandians. Your experience and knowledge of Skypiea will be invaluable for this task." "Avoid unnecessary conflict, but if situations escalate, do not hesitate to use force to deter resistance. Once you find their leaders, bring them to meet me so we can discuss their terms. Your main role is to negotiate and mediate." "Additionally, if you encounter any of the massive creatures inhabiting Skypiea, do not kill them. Instead, control them and notify me immediately," Anos instructed firmly. Abona nodded, fully understanding the gravity of his mission. Their observations during their short stay provided valuable insights into Skypiea''s demographics and power structures. Daiki, meanwhile, had been conversing with the island''s priests, gathering detailed information about Skypiea''s current state. With everyone''s tasks assigned, Anos addressed them once more. "You all have half a month. I expect results that will satisfy me." "I will not disappoint, Your Majesty," Daiki declared confidently. "Rest assured, Your Majesty, I will complete my assignment swiftly!" Abona added with determination. "Though I may be old, I am still capable of fulfilling His Majesty''s orders," Gan Fall said with a smile, fully embracing his new role. By the end of the day, everything had been resolved smoothly. Tru Kingdom had established control over Skypiea with no bloodshed or resistance a remarkable achievement. Gan Fall had spent the previous night learning about Tru Kingdom and its ruler, Anos, gaining a clearer understanding of their goals and methods. Now, each team set out to fulfil their respective missions. Daiki led a team to map the entirety of Skypiea, noting key landmarks and creating a detailed airspace map. While similar maps existed, they lacked the precision Anos demanded. Under new management, such updates were inevitable. For the people of Skypiea, Gan Fall''s reappearance with this announcement caused quite a stir. Within a day, news of the leadership change had spread across the island. Most locals reacted with surprise but displayed no resistance. They were curious about how the new ruler might impact their lives but felt little urgency to act. Gan Fall, alongside the island''s priests and enforcers, went door-to-door to gather data and inform the people of the changes. His efforts reassured the populace, many of whom were indifferent to the leadership shift. However, when the people learned of Anos''s promises for a better future, their faces lit with hope and anticipation. Skypiea''s population, excluding the Shandians, totalled approximately 8,000. Once the announcement was made, life on Skypiea returned to normal within two days. For the average person, nothing significant had changed only the name of their ruler. This seamless transition demonstrated Anos''s strategic brilliance and the potential for Tru Kingdom to establish a lasting legacy on Skypiea. -- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 127. Shandora --- Everything proceeded smoothly without any obstacles. For Skypiea, even with a change in rulers, the inhabitants remained largely unaffected. Life continued as it always had, and the island retained its peaceful charm. Daiki and his team began to survey the entirety of Skypiea, paying particular attention to the soil beneath their feet. He had brought ten people with him, while the rest had been assigned to Abona. Dealing with the Shandians didn''t require a large force. Abona could handle them alone if needed. It was unnecessary to deploy too many people. However, exploring an entire island was no simple task, as the team quickly realized. Even so, the group remained optimistic about their mission. "Captain Daiki, is it true what His Majesty said? That there''s a place here with a massive amount of gold where even the buildings are made of gold?" one of the younger guards asked eagerly, his curiosity breaking the monotony of their measurements. The others, overhearing the question, couldn''t hide their excitement. The thought of such a treasure fueled their enthusiasm, though each reacted differently to the possibility. Daiki grinned. Looking at his team, he said confidently, "His Majesty wouldn''t lie to us. It seems the place is called Shandora a legendary city from 800 years ago, built entirely of gold. Not just the buildings, but many other things too. If we find it, the gold could make the Tru Kingdom wealthier than ever!" "Really? Where exactly is this Shandora?" the same guard asked eagerly. "Well, how would I know?" Daiki replied with a chuckle. "That''s why we''re surveying the island. If we keep exploring, we''re bound to find it!" The excitement was infectious. Everyone, who moments ago had been dully trudging through measurements, suddenly felt energized, as if they''d been given a surge of adrenaline. This tale has been pilfered from Royal Road. If found on Amazon, kindly file a report. They began working tirelessly, determined to finish this area and move on to new, unexplored regions. "Captain, we can''t waste time! His Majesty only gave us three days, and we need to use them wisely. Let''s start preparing immediately!" one of the guards urged. With a total of 11 people, they believed the timeframe was adequate to cover the current area before moving on. While most of them lacked mastery of Observation Haki, a few could use it to sense their surroundings within a hundred meters, which significantly eased their task. The group worked relentlessly, even continuing after dark. The thought of discovering mountains of gold spurred them on, their imaginations running wild with visions of unimaginable wealth. --- On the other side of Skypiea, Abona''s approach was vastly different. His proficiency with Observation Haki far surpassed Daiki''s, allowing him to scan nearly the entire island effortlessly. While Daiki focused on exploration, Abona''s mission centred on locating the Shandians'' stronghold. Accompanied by five guards, Abona moved deliberately, showing no signs of urgency. After all, Anos had given him two weeks to complete his task, and Abona had no intention of rushing. "Lord Abona, if we face resistance, can we fight back?" one of the guards asked cautiously. "Indeed," another guard chimed in. "The priests warned us the Shandians are hostile and might attack without warning. But His Majesty instructed us to avoid unnecessary conflict." Abona, walking ahead, listened but did not immediately respond. Finally, he said calmly, "We''re here to negotiate, not cause trouble. However, if they prove stubborn and attack, you have my permission to defend yourselves. If we kill a few, His Majesty will likely understand." "That''s reassuring!" a guard said with a grin. Abona continued his measured pace, using Observation Haki to survey the terrain and locate the Shandians. Though their numbers were small, likely around 200, he remained cautious. Skypiea, with its unique environment and history, could harbour unexpected dangers. After two hours, they reached the outskirts of the Shandian territory. The area was impoverished, with rudimentary houses reminiscent of a bygone era. As they approached, several Shandians armed with weapons appeared and blocked their path. "Blue Sea dwellers? What is your purpose here?" asked a wary Shandian, Weibo, who appeared to be their leader. "I need to speak with your chief," Abona replied calmly. The outskirts of the Shandian territory were dense with towering trees and thick vines, making navigation difficult without Observation Haki. In the past, Skypiea''s priests and enforcers had struggled to locate this hidden settlement due to their lack of Haki. But for Abona, it was a trivial task. Despite the Shandians'' hostility, Abona radiated confidence. Unlike the others before him, this time they faced an entirely different opponent. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 128. Wyper --- Abona appeared, maintaining his earlier posture with his hands resting on Dawn, the Supreme Grade sword. From the moment he acquired it, he had never let it leave his side, even placing it within reach while bathing. This sight left Wyper and the Shandians, who had rushed out to confront him, unsure of how to react. Unlike the peaceful residents of Angel Island, the Shandians were not ones to engage in polite conversation. Their tribal appearance and fierce demeanour immediately made Abona seem like an intruder. Especially when they heard he sought their chieftain, Wyper''s eyes flashed with the resolve to fight. But to Abona, such intentions were meaningless. He remained still, calmly unsheathing his long blade and swinging it in one fluid motion. A powerful slash of energy surged forth, cutting through the surrounding trees with ease. Within seconds, every tree within a hundred-meter radius, regardless of size, had toppled to the ground. The sheer force of this display sent shockwaves through the group. Wyper, as their leader, quickly realized the vast difference in strength between his people and the visitor standing before him. It wasn''t just Abona who exuded dominance; the guards accompanying him were also eager to demonstrate their abilities. Though Anos had instructed them to avoid unnecessary conflict, he hadn''t forbidden them from making an impression. One of the guards stepped forward, channelling Armament Haki into his fist. With a single punch, he obliterated a one-meter-thick tree. Before the shattered trunk could hit the ground, the other guards attacked it with coordinated strikes, reducing it to splinters in mere moments. Seeing this, Wyper tightened his grip on his spear-like weapon, his hands trembling slightly. The power displayed by this group was unlike anything he had encountered. "We are here under orders from His Majesty, King Anos, to meet with your chieftain," Abona stated calmly.Unauthorized tale usage: if you spot this story on Amazon, report the violation. "I don''t know what business you have, but I can relay your message," Wyper replied, his tone firm. "The ruling power of all of Skypiea now lies with our King," Abona explained. "He seeks to mediate peace between your people and the residents of Angel Island. That is why I have come to meet your leader and discuss these matters directly." "Change of leadership?" Wyper and the other Shandians exchanged stunned glances. When had Skypiea''s ruler changed? But the undeniable strength displayed by Abona and his guards made it impossible to doubt their claim. The Shandians, who had struggled to match even the priests of Skypiea, could not hope to stand against this group. "How can we trust you?" Wyper asked cautiously. "Given our strength, do you have a choice?" Abona replied coldly. "If not for His Majesty''s orders, we would have simply cut through your forces. None of you would have survived. So, tell me do we really need to waste more words here?" Though blunt, Abona''s words carried undeniable truth. He didn''t wish to incite conflict, but if the Shandians refused to cooperate, he wouldn''t hesitate to act. Wyper let out a sigh, signalling to his companions. "Stand down and escort them to the chieftain." "But Wyper, we don''t even know who these people are!" protested a younger Shandian. "Do you think we have the power to stop them?" Wyper countered coldly, silencing the protester. With no further objections, Abona and his party were led to the heart of the Shandian settlement. The scene before them was, as expected, a community living among ancient ruins. Many of the buildings had partially collapsed, yet the Shandians continued to inhabit them. Despite its dilapidated state, the settlement had sustained the Shandians for generations. A stream ran through the centre, providing a vital water source, but it was clear that food and other resources were scarce. As they walked, Abona observed the curious stares of children and women. Their rugged appearances and worn clothing contrasted sharply with the finely dressed visitors. "You''ve lived here all this time. Why haven''t you considered leaving?" Abona asked Wyper. "This is Upper Yard, our ancestral land. Four hundred years ago, the people of Angel Island stole it from us," Wyper replied bitterly. "Ever since, we''ve been forced to survive in this cramped space. Every generation has vowed to reclaim what is rightfully ours." Abona smiled faintly at the passionate response but shook his head. While Upper Yard may have once belonged to the Shandians, the situation had changed. In time, it would be fully under the rule of the Tru Kingdom, a part of Anos''s expanding domain. As they approached the heart of the settlement, women and children greeted Wyper enthusiastically. "Brother Wyper!" "Wyper''s back!" It was clear that Wyper held a position of respect and authority within the community. If not for the presence of a higher-ranking chieftain, he likely would have been their leader. Strength was the ultimate measure of authority here, and Wyper''s ability to protect his people had earned their trust. Even so, Abona couldn''t help but notice the stark differences between their two groups. The Shandians were hardened by struggle, yet they seemed naive compared to the worldly and disciplined delegation from the Tru Kingdom. For now, Abona remained silent, following Wyper deeper into the settlement as the eyes of the Shandians stayed fixed on the unexpected visitors. -- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 129. Betrayal --- Some people remained vigilant from Abona, prepared to respond to any emergencies that might arise. Under the leadership of Wyper, they arrived at a house that stood out with its relatively better condition. The house was adorned with plants, giving it a green and lively appearance. However, the ground around it was damp and mossy, adding a sense of lingering moisture. "I don''t know how anyone could survive in a place like this, let alone choose to live here," Abona thought to himself. "No normal person would willingly endure such conditions!" "Chief, we have visitors!" Wyper stood at the door, shouting respectfully. It was at this moment that Abona realized this group of people referred to their leader as "Chief" rather than "clan leader." Abona and his small group stood quietly, waiting. Other Shandians began to gather around, most of them women and children. The remaining men had likely gone out in search of food. This crowd curiously observed the visitors, especially the children, who were fascinated by Abona''s clothing. Some murmured about "Blue Sea people" under their breath, a term they seemed accustomed to using for outsiders. At the door, even Wyper waited respectfully. After a short while, an elderly man, who appeared to be in his seventies, emerged from the dilapidated house. His frail body seemed to bear the toll of living in such a damp environment for decades. "Chief..." The moment the old man appeared, the gathered Shandians saluted and greeted him with reverence. "Little Wyper! Why have you called me out?" The old chief immediately noticed the presence of Abona and his companions but turned to question Wyper calmly. "Grandpa Chief, it''s not me who needs you. These Blue Sea people have come to see you!" Wyper explained, pointing toward Abona.Reading on Amazon or a pirate site? This novel is from Royal Road. Support the author by reading it there. The Shandians remained silent, watching as the chief assessed the visitors. After a brief pause, the old man slowly approached them, leaning heavily on his cane. His expression was cold and indifferent. When he was still several paces away, he spoke. "I wonder what business you Blue Sea people have with me?" "Blue Sea people? Don''t draw such rigid distinctions," Abona replied with a sneer. "Your ancestors were also from the Blue Sea. If you''re this rude, I''m not sure how you''ve managed to lead this tribe for so long." "You''re Courting death!" ( Oh...young master has shown himself for the first time ) A young Shandian, unable to contain his anger, lunged forward. However, Wyper quickly restrained him and pushed him to the ground. The crowd watched this scene in stunned silence, even the old chief seemed momentarily taken aback. Wyper and his companions had witnessed Abona''s strength firsthand. They understood that their people were no match for him. It was clear that Abona''s group could obliterate them if provoked, and the Shandians would stand no chance. The old chief, now aware of the situation, spoke in a calmer tone, "What is the purpose of your visit?" Before Abona could reply, Wyper interjected, "Grandpa Chief, these people are now the rulers of Skypiea. It seems that Gan Fall has stepped down as God. They''ve come to discuss with how the people of Angel Island and we Shandians can coexist peacefully." The chief''s composure broke at these words. He slammed his cane into the ground, his anger flaring. "What is there to discuss? That group has stolen our land for over four hundred years! We''ve fought to the death with them, and nothing will change that! Skypiea belongs to us Shandians. No one else has a right to it!" Abona chuckled at the chief''s outburst. Scanning the crowd, he estimated that most of the Shandian population about a hundred people were present. The rest could easily be located with his keen senses. Taking a step forward, Abona spoke calmly, "So, your stance is clear: you refuse to compromise or communicate with His Majesty, me?" Though his tone was indifferent, the aura of the five warriors accompanying him intensified, signalling their readiness for battle. The old chief opened his mouth to retort, but before he could utter a word, Wyper stepped forward hurriedly. "Grandpa Chief is willing to discuss terms with the King!" Wyper announced quickly. "But considering his age, he entrusts the matter to us for negotiation." The crowd murmured in confusion. Why was Wyper, usually so proud of their Shandian heritage, suddenly advocating for peace? One of Wyper''s companions, who had also witnessed Abona''s power, stepped forward. "Trust Wyper! He knows what''s best for us," he urged. However, a Shandian woman stood up defiantly. "Betrayal! For hundreds of years, we''ve never surrendered to those people on Angel Island. Why should we start now?" The majority of the Shandians remained silent, observing the unfolding drama. To them, the concept of true strength was vague, limited to the legendary feats of their ancestors or Gan Fall. Wyper, pale and visibly anxious, feared the consequences of failure. If negotiations broke down, Abona''s forces could annihilate them. He wracked his mind, desperately searching for a solution. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 130. New Chief --- The entire Shandia tribe had gathered to discuss the situation. Voices rose with differing opinions, yet most expressed the same hope: to finally live in a better environment, free from endless struggle. "At least we wouldn''t have to stay here any longer, enduring hunger and hardship," someone murmured. "Wiper! What do you think you''re doing?!" The old chief''s voice boomed with anger, silencing the gathering. Standing before him, Wiper appeared uneasy. His words moments earlier had stirred dissatisfaction among the Shandians, but for the old chief, they were utterly infuriating. The chief could scarcely believe it how could the one he had groomed to be his successor entertain such thoughts? What had changed his heart so drastically? For centuries, the Shandians had fought relentlessly to reclaim their homeland on Upper Yard, the land stolen from them by the Skypieans. No ruler, no force, could extinguish their determination! "Grandpa Chief, may we speak privately?" Wiper, struggling to maintain his composure, gestured toward the chief''s hut. His priority was to explain the reality of their dire situation without the prying eyes of others. "Very well," the old chief said after a pause, his voice still sharp. "But if you don''t provide a satisfactory answer, Wiper, this matter won''t end here!" Casting a glance toward Enel''s priests, who stood observing silently, the chief turned and entered the hut. His frustration was palpable. Wiper followed close behind, while the others remained outside, tense and watchful. The priests showed no sign of concern, standing calmly with an air of indifference. Meanwhile, the Shandians outside exchanged uneasy glances. None of them wished to provoke trouble, but if forced, they were prepared to defend their tribe at any cost.This story has been taken without authorization. Report any sightings. Inside the hut, the air was thick with tension. "Wiper, explain yourself! Why would you say such things?" the old chief demanded, his voice trembling with anger. "Grandpa Chief, have you considered their power? I''ve seen it with my own eyes they could wipe out our entire tribe without effort. What do we have to stand against them? Anos and his men made their intentions clear: they were willing to negotiate. This could be our chance to finally secure a future for our people." "Look at our tribe. How many still truly wish to live in constant warfare? For 400 years, our numbers have dwindled. " "If we don''t let go of this hatred now, we may not even survive to see the next generation!" "Before arriving here, Anos''s people warned us if we refused to negotiate, they wouldn''t hesitate to eliminate us. Even the Skypieans have surrendered Upper Yard to him. Do you think we stand a chance where they couldn''t?" Wiper spoke with respect but didn''t hold back his conviction. His words struck a nerve. Though the Shandians had dedicated centuries to reclaiming their sacred land, their dwindling numbers couldn''t be ignored. If they continued down this path, extinction seemed inevitable. The old chief''s anger slowly gave way to resignation. He let out a deep sigh, his shoulders slumping under the weight of years of failure and grief. Finally, he sank into a chair, staring out the window with a sorrowful expression. "You''re right, Wiper," the chief said after a long silence. "You will be the new chief of the Shandians. I am too old now. Lead our people wisely and ensure they have a future." "Grandpa Chief, I¡ª" "No more words. For centuries, we''ve fought the Skypieans for Upper Yard. Perhaps it''s time to end this struggle." The old chief''s voice was heavy with emotion. Decades of fighting for their homeland had yielded little more than bloodshed. Now, the Shandians faced the harsh reality of either making peace or disappearing entirely. "Grandpa Chief, I swear to do everything I can for our tribe!" Wiper bowed deeply, determination burning in his eyes. He wasn''t one to back down easily, but the circumstances left no room for pride. The fate of his people was now his burden to bear. Any misstep could bring about their destruction. With his resolve set, Wiper exited the hut. The moment he stepped outside, every eye turned to him. Wiper, bare-chested and covered in tribal markings, stood tall. Taking a deep breath, he raised his voice and declared, "From this day onward, I am the chief of the Shandians!" The murmuring crowd fell silent, stunned. Though many were shocked, it wasn''t entirely unexpected Wiper had long been the most likely successor to the old chief. For the Shandians, this decision marked the beginning of a new era. Whether it led to salvation or further hardship, only time would tell. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 131. The Surrender --- For the Shandians, who originally numbered only one or two hundred, leadership was always decided based on strength. As long as someone was strong enough, they could become the chief. Abona and his group continued to watch quietly. In no time, a new chief had been chosen. Abona wasn''t surprised he had little interest in the internal affairs of the Shandians. "Now that you''ve become the chief, will you choose to come with us next?" Abona asked in a calm voice. "I will," Wyper replied. "But I need to settle my people here first. After that, I''ll come to your place on my own." Abona smiled slightly and replied, "It''s in the current shrine." After speaking, Abona turned and began walking back in the direction he had come. As he walked, he added, "As a friendly reminder, His Majesty has only given half a month. If the Shandian chief does not come within that time, it will be considered a voluntary forfeiture. Any future disputes in the Skypiea region will not be resolved diplomatically we''ll handle them by force." Wyper clenched his fists as he watched Abona leave. Though he felt disgusted toward the "Blue Sea people" who had suddenly appeared and declared themselves rulers, there was little he could do. Their strength was undeniable, and their initial show of power had left the Shandians in shock. If they weren''t opponents, they weren''t opponents. It was as simple as that, and Wyper knew he had to recognize their position. The Shandian tribespeople, unaware of the full truth, expressed their anger openly. The Shandians had lived on Skypiea for centuries how could they tolerate such humiliation? Their warlike nature only fueled their frustration. Yet Abona, now far away, was indifferent to their resentment.Stolen from its rightful author, this tale is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings. --- Elsewhere on Skypiea "Captain Daiki, what kind of plant is this? It grows so tall!" Daiki stood before a massive vine, surrounded by his team. The enormous plant stretched far into the sky, disappearing beyond their view. At an altitude of 10,000 meters, the vine''s size was almost incomprehensible. "It''s incredible," Daiki remarked. "Make sure to mark it clearly on the map." The area around them was littered with ancient ruins, the remnants of an unknown civilization. Though the exact era was unclear, the structures had clearly existed for centuries. This was their third day on Skypiea, and they didn''t have much time left to complete their exploration. Driven by curiosity, ten guards began climbing the giant vine, eager to see how high it went and if it led to anything interesting. Daiki, meanwhile, focused on the ruins, holding a map of Skypiea in his hands. Though it wasn''t particularly detailed, it helped navigate the island''s terrain. Watching his team climb higher and higher, Daiki didn''t stop them. Their task was nearly complete, and a little curiosity wouldn''t hurt. "Captain Daiki, come up and take a look! The view here is amazing!" one of the guards called out from high above. He stood on one of the vine''s massive leaves, almost invisible from the ground. The vine''s leaves were so large and sturdy that they could easily support the weight of several people. Such a plant was a rare phenomenon in the world of pirates, and it piqued everyone''s curiosity. Daiki, however, remained focused on the ruins. While his guards were distracted, his mind lingered on what His Majesty the King had mentioned gold. The promise of treasure was always at the forefront of his thoughts. --- High Above the Clouds "Tabaru, guess what I see!" one of the guards shouted excitedly from the top of the vine. By now, they had climbed above the clouds, completely out of sight of their companions below. Standing atop the vine, the guard stared in awe at a massive golden clock hanging from one of the branches. The enormous relic was made entirely of gold, its weight and craftsmanship beyond comprehension. The other guards quickly climbed up to join him, all of them equally stunned by the sight. One even rubbed his eyes in disbelief. For them, this was the largest and most valuable piece of gold they had ever seen. The golden clock was nothing short of a miracle, a relic of the Shandian''s ancient city of Shandora. Though they had heard rumours of Skypiea''s gold before their journey, this was the first tangible proof they had encountered. Overwhelmed by the discovery, the guards refrained from touching the clock. Instead, they quickly descended the vine to report their find to Daiki. --- Back on the ground, Daiki was still exploring the ruins, kicking aside stones in search of anything valuable. As his guards returned, their excitement was evident, and Daiki prepared himself for what might be their most significant find yet. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 132. Enels Ambitions --- The people above jumped down swiftly while those below began observing their surroundings carefully. Daiki stayed among the ruins. He believed this place aligned with Anos''s descriptions, prompting him to study the area thoroughly. As the people from above reached the ground and hurried over to Daiki, they recounted their findings in detail. Hearing their words, Daiki finally smiled. --- At the shrine, Abona chose not to venture out. He remained there the entire day, staying inside without taking a single step outside. Accompanying him was Enel, a boy of thirteen or fourteen. Despite his youth, Enel displayed remarkable composure, even when interacting with the priests. This was the first time Enel understood how capable the man before him truly was. "Enel, what are you looking at?" Abona asked, noticing the boy staring at the angel statue in the main hall of the shrine. Enel''s gaze was fixed on the angel''s hand. Turning to Abona with curiosity, he asked, "Brother Abona, I''ve heard people say that the object in the angel''s hand grants incredible power but harbours a demon within. That''s why no one has used it. Is that true?" "They''re not entirely wrong," Abona replied with a slight smile. "That object can grant unmatched abilities but comes at a cost. For now, it''s best not to think about it. Focus on growing stronger over the next few years. When the time comes, you''ll gain power that few in this world can match. By then, no one will be able to restrict your freedom." Enel, now freshly groomed and dressed in a clean white coat, looked entirely different from his former self. Enjoying this book? Seek out the original to ensure the author gets credit. He appeared like a handsome young man, far removed from his previous image. While still adjusting to his new attire and lifestyle, he worked hard to accept it. "Can I really become stronger?" Enel asked hesitantly, lowering his head as memories of past bullying and guilt over his mistakes weighed on him. Abona stepped forward, gently ruffling the boy''s hair, and said with a friendly tone, "As long as you are determined, no one in this world can stop you. What matters most is how you see yourself and your future." "Don''t let your past define you. Believe in your potential, keep your pride, and the world will have nothing that can hold you back." Abona spoke sincerely, recognizing Enel''s extraordinary talent. He felt it would be a waste to let the boy''s potential go unrealized. One thing Abona had discovered was Enel''s innate ability to use Observation Haki, or as the boy called it, his "mantra." Despite his lack of formal training, Enel''s Observation Haki surpassed that of even seasoned warriors in the Royal Guards, allowing him to sense everything within a one-kilometre radius. Yet, the boy had no idea how to properly harness this ability. Had Enel been trained since childhood, he could have been one of the strongest individuals in the Royal Guards without needing any Devil Fruit powers. This untapped potential was why Abona took a special interest in the boy. Although Enel still carried guilt over past events, his time with Abona began to shift his perspective. He found solace in Abona''s kindness and guidance, as he was the first person who didn''t judge him for his mistakes and instead offered him genuine support. At this point, Enel bore no hatred towards the inhabitants of Skypiea, including those who had wronged him. Instead, he shouldered the burden of his people''s disappearance and sought redemption for his perceived failures. --- Elsewhere in the shrine''s courtyard, Abona reclined on a chair made of soft, fluffy clouds, finding it far more comfortable than any seat from the Blue Sea. Enel stood nearby, still unsure of how to fully adapt to this new life. Yet, with no need to worry about food or survival, he slowly began integrating into this peaceful lifestyle. During their time together, Abona shared knowledge of the world beyond Skypiea, explaining matters of navigation, science, and technology. These exchanges marked only the beginning of Enel''s transformation and growth under Abona''s mentorship. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 133. Reports --- A Few Days Later In the main hall of the shrine, a group of people gathered for a meeting. This was a simple yet significant gathering held on Skypiea. Anos sat at the head of the hall, with the angel statue behind him looking particularly striking. He glanced at everyone present. Apart from Daiki and Abona, the only other attendees were Gan Fall and his priests. In total, about ten people occupied the hall. Gan Fall now fully considered himself a member of the Tru Kingdom. He no longer pursued power or authority; his sole concern was improving the lives of the people of Skypiea. To him, nothing was more important. So far, none of the Shandia representatives had arrived. The silence in the hall reflected the anticipation of their arrival. Three empty seats were left unoccupied, reserved specifically for the Shandia delegation. "Your Majesty, the Shandians have arrived," announced a King''s Guardsman stationed at the door. Moments later, Wyper appeared at the entrance, accompanied by two others. This was their first visit to the shrine. For generations, the Shandians'' greatest dream had been to reclaim their ancestral land, which had been taken from them. As Wyper stepped into the hall, his gaze immediately fell on Anos, seated at the head of the table. He was visibly surprised by the young king''s appearance. Despite his youth, Anos exuded an air of authority, and the fact that he had powerful figures like Abona under his command was even more astonishing. "Since everyone is here, take your seats. The main purpose of today''s meeting is not only to discuss the future structure of Skypiea but, more importantly, to establish a path for peaceful coexistence between Angel Island and the Shandian people," Anos said calmly, addressing the attendees.Stolen from its rightful place, this narrative is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings. "This is His Majesty, King Anos of the Tru Kingdom. Beside him is Captain Daiki, commander of the Royal Guards, and Abona. You all know Gan Fall, of course," a priest seated at the edge of the group introduced the key figures. "I am Wyper, leader of the Shandians," Wyper said with a firm tone, introducing himself as he took his seat with a commanding presence. The two Shandians accompanying him followed suit. "Now that everyone is present, let''s first discuss some general matters. We will address the issue between Angel Island and the Shandians at the end," Anos declared. --- Daiki''s Report Daiki stood up first to deliver his report. "Your Majesty, the terrain of Skypiea has been fully mapped. The total area is approximately 150 square kilometres, of which 20 square kilometres consist of land. The remainder is composed of island clouds, primarily around Angel Island." "In addition, the White-White Sea connects nearly all the small sky islands. Thirteen islands have been identified so far, all formed from island clouds. Among them, Angel Island serves as the main hub, alongside Upper Yard, which ascended from the Blue Sea 400 years ago. Detailed mappings of both areas have been completed." Daiki concluded his report and took his seat. Abona then stood to present his findings. "Your Majesty, there are two significant matters to report. First, regarding the Shandian people, their tribal leader is now present. Second, we have completed the investigation of Skypiea''s large creatures as per your orders." "We encountered a massive python, approximately 600 meters long, referred to by the Skypieans as the Sky Island God. While it appears formidable, it does not exhibit aggressive tendencies and is mostly active around Upper Yard." "Well done, both of you," Anos said with a faint smile, acknowledging their efforts. --- Gan Fall''s Report Gan Fall stood next. Straightening his clothes, he began, "Your Majesty, the total population of Skypiea is approximately 8,672. This figure does not include the Shandians, the majority of whom reside on Angel Island." "As for the transition of governance, the people of Skypiea have not shown significant resistance. As long as their way of life remains undisturbed, they seem accepting of the changes. This should provide a stable foundation for Your Majesty to implement future plans." Gan Fall''s concise report reflected the overall sentiment of the Skypieans. Anos nodded thoughtfully, appreciating the steady groundwork laid for their integration. --- The Shandian Perspective Meanwhile, Wyper and his two companions listened intently to the discussions. The data they heard was surprising, especially the meticulous knowledge of Skypiea''s geography and population that the Tru Kingdom had gathered in just a few days. Wyper couldn''t help but wonder how Anos had obtained such detailed information so quickly. He doubted its authenticity at first, but Anos''s calm demeanour and the credibility of his subordinates convinced him otherwise. Despite lingering scepticism, Wyper recognized that this meeting could pave the way for a better future for both the Shandians and the people of Angel Island. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 134. Negotiations --- It could initially be seen as a simple report merely explaining the details of the previous mission. Wyper sat there quietly, watching without making any move. However, the two people behind him seemed increasingly restless. Since their arrival, they had been left waiting, which was starting to make them uneasy. After listening to everyone''s report, Anos tapped his fingers lightly on the armrest of his chair, his mind already deep in thought. Looking at Wyper seated across from him, Anos asked calmly, "Chief of the Shandians, what are your thoughts on the future planning of Skypiea?" "We only wish to return to the land that belongs to us. Upper Yard has always been the home of the Shandians. Beyond that, we are open to discussion!" Wyper remained silent, but a man in his thirties sitting behind him could not hold back and stood up, addressing Anos earnestly. "Raki..." Wyper turned around sharply, glaring at the man who had spoken out of turn. He had already planned his approach for this negotiation, and it frustrated him to see one of his people speaking impulsively. "Your Majesty, regarding the Shandians, our initial wish was indeed to reclaim Upper Yard. However, I imagine you already have your own plans, seeing as you summoned us for this negotiation." Wyper looked directly at Anos, his tone steady yet wary. "Upper Yard is off the table. Let me make that clear. However, since I called you here, you can rest assured that everything has been carefully considered." "As for the arrangements for the Shandians, you have two options: settle on Angel Island or be relocated to another small sky island. The Tru Kingdom will provide your tribe with jobs and financial support, and trade will also be established with Skypiea. The specifics, however, will depend on the preferences of the Shandians."The story has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the violation. Anos spoke calmly but with authority. "Wyper, how can we agree to live alongside those people on Angel Island? That is simply unacceptable!" Raki burst out again, her tone sharper and angrier than before. Everyone in the room, including Gan Fall and the priests, watched the exchange in silence, choosing not to intervene. "Raki, I am the chief!" Wyper finally lost his composure, his voice rising as he glared at Raki. He understood the dangers of this negotiation failure to reach an agreement could spell disaster for the Shandians. Anos, observing the interaction with interest, showed no sign of urgency. "Your Majesty, the Shandians are willing to comply with your arrangements, but we request an independent area of our own. We do not wish to move to a small sky island, and if possible, we would like a portion of Upper Yard just a small area." "No." Before Wyper could finish, Anos rejected the proposal outright. For the Tru Kingdom, Upper Yard held immense strategic importance, and there was no room for compromise on this matter. Wyper fell silent, while Raki looked defiant, her pride evident. "Gan Fall, you are most familiar with Skypiea''s situation. I am leaving the arrangements for the Shandians to you. Ensure that Angel Island and the Shandians coexist without conflict. You understand the history of their feud better than anyone else." "Also, I do not want any unforeseen complications in this matter." Anos''s tone grew colder as he spoke, his gaze fixed on Wyper. With a tribe of just over two hundred people, the Shandians were not a significant concern for Anos. However, if they proved uncooperative, further negotiations would be unnecessary. "Your Majesty, the hatred between the people of Angel Island and the Shandians has deep roots. If they refuse to move far from Upper Yard, we could relocate another small sky island closer to this area for their settlement." Gan Fall proposed the idea, hoping to avoid further complications. He could see that the Tru Kingdom''s interest in Upper Yard was non-negotiable. "Abona, how long would it take to relocate an island cloud from a small sky island?" Anos turned to Abona, not for his opinion but to assign him the task. "One day." Abona replied with conviction. "Then it''s decided. Chief Wyper, does this arrangement satisfy you?" Anos asked, his tone calm but firm. "It does. However, once we leave Upper Yard, my people will lack a steady food supply. How will that be addressed?" Wyper''s primary concern was the survival of his tribe. He was willing to compromise but needed assurances that his people would not be left to starve. "You need not worry about that. The Tru Kingdom will provide your tribe with sufficient food for the next six months. After that, your people will need to sustain themselves through labour and trade." "Do you accept these terms?" Anos asked, leaving no room for further negotiation. "Yes, on behalf of the Shandians, I accept." Wyper replied reluctantly, realizing this was the best outcome they could hope for. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/Iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 135. Warning --- No one expected that this trip to Skypiea would be resolved so smoothly. Everyone achieved the results they desired. For Skypiea, nothing was truly lost, and overall, the advantages far outweighed any disadvantages. Gan Fall understood, and Wyper understood as well, that the centuries-long conflict between the Shandians and Angel Island had now come to an end. It seemed as though no one had lost anything in this negotiation, and everyone had gained substantial benefits. For them, this was already a near-perfect resolution. Now that the matter of the Shandians and the residents of Angel Island was settled, the next focus naturally shifted to the Tru Kingdom''s plans for Skypiea. Anos was not concerned about his plans being discovered. From Skypiea to the Blue Sea, few people would have a clear understanding of the developments happening on the island. Anos picked up the survey map provided by Daiki. The map contained detailed information, especially about the land, with clear markings of the key areas. This map would serve as the foundation for the future establishing a training area capable of hosting tens of thousands of people. "Your Majesty, we have mapped out the area necessary for our future training ground. The forest can remain untouched; only the Shandora area needs development." As Anos studied the map, Daiki, anticipating his intentions, stood and began to explain. Shandora, once an ancient city, had sparse vegetation. Its barren nature made it the most time-efficient and labor-saving area to develop. "How many people can it accommodate?" Anos asked calmly. However, Wyper and Gan Fall, who were present, were growing increasingly uneasy. They didn''t fully understand the conversation between Anos and Daiki. But one thing was clear: the Tru Kingdom''s interest in Skypiea undoubtedly had a hidden purpose.Stolen content alert: this content belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences. Daiki thought for a moment before replying, "If we utilize a 10-kilometer radius around Shandora, it could accommodate up to 50,000 people." The space would be sufficient, with each 2-square-kilometer section capable of supporting 10,000 people for training. Moreover, Shandora''s location on the edge of Skypiea made it relatively concealed, ensuring privacy for their operations. Anos nodded thoughtfully. Fifty thousand people would be sufficient for the Tru Kingdom''s initial phase of expansion. Supporting such a vast endeavour required meticulous planning and foresight. The overall landmass of Skypiea was more than adequate. In fact, it could potentially accommodate even half a million people if necessary. While Wyper did not fully understand the plans, one thing was clear: the Tru Kingdom intended to use Skypiea as a massive training ground for their forces. Gan Fall, too, began to realize the true purpose behind the Tru Kingdom''s acquisition of Skypiea. Yet, since this arrangement brought no harm to the native residents of Skypiea, he saw no reason to object. Both Gan Fall and Wyper chose to remain silent, knowing that opposing Anos now would be futile. Control of Skypiea had already been secured. As the conversation continued, a Shandian named Raki, who had been silent until now, suddenly stood up angrily. "This is our land! Do you intend to move your entire kingdom to Skypiea?" Anos, who had been deep in thought, was instantly enraged by the outburst. Now that Skypiea was under his control, someone dared to oppose him openly. His eyes locked onto Raki, and in the next instant, his overwhelming Conqueror''s Haki (Haoshoku Haki) surged forth, targeting only her. Before anyone else could react, Raki collapsed to the ground, unconscious, unable to withstand the sheer force of his Haki. The room fell into stunned silence. Wyper, shocked and furious, watched as one of his own fell lifelessly to the floor without warning. Anos''s voice rang out coldly, his gaze fixed on Wyper. "Chief Wyper, let this be the first and last time such insolence occurs. If it happens again, I will personally intervene to manage the Shandians." Wyper, still reeling from what he had witnessed, could only nod in acknowledgement. The display of power left him with no choice. "I will ensure that none of my people acts out again," Wyper replied respectfully, suppressing his anger. Anos scanned the room, his tone was cold yet commanding. "We are now one family. I will give you what you want, but I expect no one to cross the Tru Kingdom''s bottom line." This statement served as both a warning and a reminder. Individuals like Raki were likely not the only ones harbouring resentment. A show of force was necessary to establish order. This warning was clearly effective. Both Gan Fall and the priests, who had remained silent, were visibly shaken. Although the Tru Kingdom''s initial interest was limited to Shandora, the use of power as a deterrent ensured no further resistance. Ultimately, the Tru Kingdom''s actions in Skypiea were peaceful yet firm, claiming the island without unnecessary harm while cementing their authority through strategic intimidation. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 136. Nothing --- This was the first time Anos had lost his temper since arriving in Skypiea, and his anger was still palpable. The entire hall fell silent for a long time; no one dared to speak or make a move. After everyone quieted down, Anos turned to Daiki and said, "Prioritize the planning of the site area. As for the specific facilities, including the buildings, they can all be cut and processed by the cloud materials of Angel Island. Everything must be completed within three months. Once all preparations are done, I will open the personnel channel in three months, and formal training will commence." "Understood, Your Majesty. I will complete the task within three months!" Daiki stood up and replied resolutely. Although three months was not an extended period, it was sufficient for their needs. A training ground spanning ten square kilometers was not an insurmountable challenge, especially for those with Devil Fruit abilities. It was troublesome but not impossible. "Your Majesty, if there is anything you need assistance with from us on Angel Island, please let us know," Gan Fall said earnestly. "There aren''t many requirements for now," Anos replied, "but make it clear to everyone: from this moment on, Upper Yard will become an absolute restricted area. No one is allowed to enter without permission." "Another matter concerns trade. After three months, materials will start being transported here regularly, and the trade system will gradually be established. For Angel Island, select an area to serve as a hub for buying and selling goods." Anos paused to consider, then continued, "The small group from Shandora will have little impact for now. If not for the risk of causing unrest on Angel Island, I wouldn''t hesitate to eliminate them outright." Wyper, the leader of the Shandians, understood this sentiment all too well. Here, he had no right to voice opinions or make choices; his only option was to follow orders. The uncertainty of his future weighed on him.This story has been unlawfully obtained without the author''s consent. Report any appearances on Amazon. "Your Majesty, everyone else has been assigned a task. What should I do?" Abona, who had been silently observing, finally stood and spoke. "There is indeed something for you," Anos responded. "Daiki has marked the location of Shandora. You and your team must gather and sort everything of value there. Take whatever is useful, but leave behind the Golden Bell it is sacred to the Shandians." Anos smirked. Taking advantage of the gold in Shandora was practical. Since no one else could use it, why not bring it back for their own purposes? "Thank you, Your Majesty, for your understanding. The Shandians will forever be grateful," Wyper said emotionally. The mention of leaving the Golden Bell behind had deeply moved him. They had searched for it for centuries, and now, Anos was willing to honor their beliefs by leaving it intact. "It doesn''t have to be this way," Anos said calmly. "If the Shandians are seeking a role, you will guard the gates of Skypiea from now on. While it''s rare for outsiders to reach this place, it''s still possible for some to slip through. Can you handle this responsibility?" Wyper responded immediately, "You can count on us, Your Majesty. The Shandians will never disappoint you!" "Your current strength is insufficient," Anos noted. "In the future, I will arrange for someone to train your warriors. Don''t underestimate the position of gatekeepers it''s more challenging than it seems." This mix of support and criticism was a calculated move on Anos''s part, demonstrating his mastery of leadership. While he had taken a life earlier, the Shandians understood the gravity of the situation careless words could lead to disaster. "Go back and coordinate with Gan Fall," Anos instructed. "There are two paths to Skypiea. If you encounter intruders beyond your ability to stop, simply report it. "Additionally, tomorrow we will lead the Shandians to assist Abona in recovering the Golden Bell. All other treasures will be sorted and managed by Abona." "Yes, Your Majesty!" Wyper replied respectfully. Anos then addressed the entire assembly. "Prepare for your respective tasks. From now on, the Shandians and the people of Angel Island must coexist peacefully. This is not just about survival but about building a future." "From this moment forward, all of you are my people, and I will treat everyone equally. However, in the Kingdom of Tru, betrayal is the gravest offense. Keep that in mind." Standing tall, Anos concluded the meeting, summarizing the decisions and plans for the months ahead. However, he had no intention of leaving Skypiea anytime soon there was still an essential task to complete: constructing a space teleportation array to connect Tru Kingdom with Skypiea. The array would require significant resources, but with Anos''s system abilities, it was merely a matter of expenditure. After the meeting, Gan Fall and Weibo departed, leaving the hall quiet once more. "Daiki," Anos called, "which location on the island do you think is best suited for the portal?" Having explored Skypiea extensively, Daiki would know the most strategic location. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 137. Admiral-level strength --- Skypiea is merely the first step in their military plan, and many steps remain. Although they have gained control of Skypiea, it will take at least a year, if not several, to fully establish control over its inhabitants. The role of the portal is crucial and cannot afford any errors, as it forms the backbone of the entire plan. Everyone understood this, and upon hearing Anos''s instructions, Daiki began to contemplate the next steps. On Skypiea, the location for the portal must prioritize both safety and secrecy. While the island''s future development is uncertain, it is clear that more people will arrive on Skypiea as time goes on, making the portal''s placement critical. "Your Majesty, what do you think of Shandora?" Daiki asked after some thought. Anos, still examining the map in his hand, looked at the area marked for Shandora. Situated near the edge of Skypiea, it was indeed a viable option. The portal could not be placed on Angel Island, and Upper Yard (formerly Apayado) offered privacy and safety, making it an ideal choice. "We''ll inspect it in the next two days. As an ancient city built with gold, Shandora may still hold secrets we''re unaware of. Select a suitable location on its outskirts for the portal and begin constructing accommodations for the people arriving in the future," Anos instructed calmly, setting the map aside. "Your Majesty, should the existence of the portal be kept secret from the inhabitants of Skypiea?" Daiki inquired.The tale has been taken without authorization; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident. "There''s no need for secrecy. Travelling from Skypiea to the Blue Sea is not as simple as it seems," Anos replied as he walked toward the door. Looking into the courtyard, where a young Enel was training, Anos turned to Daiki and said, "From now on, that boy will stay with you. Train him well. He might prove invaluable to us in the future." Daiki and Abona exchanged confused glances, looking at the thin, unkempt boy. They couldn''t understand why their king was so interested in him. "Your Majesty, why him?" "Do you know of anyone else who, at just nine years old, could wipe out an entire island''s population? Or anyone who could singlehandedly design a flying ship?" Anos questioned, his voice firm. The first feat had already occurred, and the second was still years away, yet Anos''s confidence in the boy was unwavering. Abona crossed his arms and added, "I''ve heard about him. Two days ago, the priests were discussing how this boy turned Birka into ruins. Not a single survivor remained." "Why didn''t I hear of this?" Daiki asked, puzzled. "Enel has been staying in the temple compound, away from Angel Island''s residents. His reputation as a harbinger of misfortune has isolated him, but he''s simply misunderstood," Abona explained. "He''s yours to train now, Daiki. In two years, I want him ready to navigate the seas," Anos declared. "Your Majesty! You''re asking for miracles!" Daiki protested, only half-joking. "Train yourself first. You''re only one step away from vice admiral-level strength, but I need you at admiral-level within five years. Much lies ahead, and you cannot afford complacency," Anos admonished. "Admiral-level strength?! Your Majesty! Do you know how rare that is?" Daiki said, exasperated. "There are two ways to achieve this," Anos replied. "First, strengthen your Haki. Refine your Armament Haki to the level where it can coat your weapons entirely. Without mastery of Haki, survival in this world is impossible." "Second, focus on your Devil Fruit. You''ve barely scratched the surface of its potential. Explore its powers diligently; you''ll find it far more versatile than you imagine." "From today, Skypiea''s management is your responsibility. Supplies will arrive monthly, and I will set up the portal soon. "Don''t disappoint me." Daiki nodded, understanding the weight of his king''s expectations. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 138. Expectation --- Anos spoke at length, and his ultimate purpose was to inform Daiki that his next task would indeed be an arduous one. Of course, Daiki himself understood. His expression, no longer as playful as before, had turned serious. "It seems His Majesty places high hopes on you," Abona remarked with a smile, standing to the side. "I know what I must do. Once the military base on Skypiea is established, my subordinates will train tirelessly day and night to ensure the Tru Kingdom''s troops are well-prepared," Daiki said with a resolute expression. "Then I''ll leave this task to you. Hurry and locate the portal. Once these arrangements are made, I''ll return to the Tru Palace. We can communicate about the follow-up matters later," Anos instructed before heading towards Enel, who was training in the courtyard. Daiki stood silently, lost in his thoughts. "You have a long road ahead, bearing such heavy responsibilities. It''s entirely possible you could become a general within five years," Abona said, his tone free of jest. Abona understood the current situation clearly. Daiki''s potential was immense, and even in the New World, individuals like him were rare among pirates. Daiki listened to Abona but merely smiled without responding. He understood everything; the only thing he lacked was time. He believed that when the time came, he would accomplish what His Majesty had envisioned. --- In the courtyard, Enel was undergoing basic training. Given his age, it was the perfect time to build his foundation. His current training focused on enhancing his abilities; other matters were secondary. Only after gaining sufficient combat experience and physical strength could he advance to the next phase. Across the Tru Kingdom, almost everyone preparing for training on Skypiea had completed their basic preparations. What remained was to begin large-scale drills.Stolen content warning: this tale belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences elsewhere. "Enel, how has your training been these past two days?" Anos asked with a smile as he entered the courtyard and saw Enel doing push-ups. Enel did not stop. He glanced up briefly and replied with a smile, "I''m a little tired, but I feel accomplished!" "You''re doing well. I believe you''ll surpass everyone before long," Anos said as he sat on a nearby stone bench, observing Enel with evident satisfaction. To Anos, Enel''s character was admirable. Despite the lingering misunderstandings held by the people of Angel Island, Enel harboured no resentment. "Enel, I''ll be leaving Skypiea in a few days. How about I have someone teach you combat skills for the future?" Anos suggested. Hearing this, Enel abruptly stopped, stood up, and asked in disbelief, "You''re leaving?" "I''ll be here for a few more days. There''s a large kingdom awaiting me below, so I can''t stay forever," Anos replied with a gentle smile. "Can I go with you?" Enel asked. "The seas are far too dangerous, and your current strength isn''t enough. Train hard, and in three years, I''ll personally take you to our kingdom," Anos reassured him. Enel fell into deep thought. At 13 or 14 years old, the thought of being left behind felt unsettling. At that moment, Daiki and Abona approached. Seeing Enel''s confusion, Daiki remarked, "Even I''m barely able to keep up with His Majesty right now. If you were to join us, His Majesty might have to protect you, risking injury in the process. Do you want to see that happen?" Hearing this, Enel quickly shook his head, his face full of uncertainty. "The Sky Island is critical to us," Anos said. "It will become the Tru Kingdom''s military stronghold and our greatest trump card. During this period, I hope you''ll stay and grow stronger. Once you do, we can fight side by side." Anos''s words carried a sincerity that left Enel momentarily speechless, his desire to leave Skypiea tempered by the weight of the responsibility before him. Daiki added, "You''ll train with me from now on. When you''re strong enough, you''ll be able to protect His Majesty. That would be the greatest honour." He continued, "Few people from Skypiea are allowed here in Apayado. By His Majesty''s decree, this area is a forbidden zone, even to the natives. But you''ve been granted the chance to remain here. Do you understand why?" Enel, his resolve hardening, replied, "Brother Anos, I''ve decided. From today, I''ll dedicate myself to becoming stronger. I''ll train tirelessly so I can protect you and never let anyone harm you." For Enel, Anos''s recognition meant everything. Since the destruction of Birka, Anos was the first to acknowledge him, giving him a reason to trust and follow. "Well said! I believe you''ll stand atop this world one day and achieve your dreams!" Anos said, patting Enel''s shoulder. "I will!" Enel exclaimed, flashing a bright smile before returning to his training. He resumed his exercises, determined to build a solid foundation. His immediate goal was to master the Rokushiki techniques, the first step towards unlocking Haki. For the first time, Enel felt an intense desire to grow stronger, to push past his limits. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 139. Sky Island God --- Everyone believes that as long as they have faith, stay determined, and use it as a source of motivation, Enel could potentially master Armament Haki in less than a year. Such persistence is rare, and Daiki couldn''t help but feel admiration for him. --- The scene shifts. Amidst the ruins, overgrown with weeds and trees, the remnants of a civilization thousands of years old still linger. This is Shandora, a legendary city of gold. Currently, at least 50 individuals, mostly Shandians, were combing through the ruins. Each of them, clad in their traditional attire, worked diligently, unwilling to overlook even a single stone or broken brick. They meticulously examined every possible spot in their search. This mission was under Abona''s leadership, yet Daiki had joined the group out of sheer curiosity. He was intrigued by the tales of gold within Shandora. While he had already witnessed the awe-inspiring Golden Bell, he had heard from Anos that entire buildings here were once constructed of gold. The rumours had captivated everyone, fueling their relentless search through the ruins with unyielding vigour. The remains of this city, dating back 800 years, spanned a vast area. Centuries of wind, rain, and upheaval had altered the land''s appearance drastically. Even with meticulous searching, no one knew what they might uncover next. Take the Golden Bell, for example it now stood thousands of meters above the ground, held aloft by the colossal vines that transported it to the sky. It wasn''t until the Tru Kingdom''s guards had scouted the area that they discovered this magnificent relic. "What exactly are they searching for?"Enjoying the story? Show your support by reading it on the official site. Next to Anos stood Enel, his curiosity piqued as he observed the ongoing excavation. "Gold. They''re looking for buildings made of gold," Anos replied calmly. "But isn''t most of it underground?" Enel remarked. "How would you know that?" Anos asked, intrigued. "I''ve been here before. I accidentally stumbled upon an underground palace. Everything down there was made of gold every column was massive. I''m not sure whether it''s all gold or not, but there was also a large square stone, about five meters tall, in the centre of the palace." "The main problem is the giant snake that resides there. Last time, I barely escaped being eaten." Enel shuddered slightly as he recounted his experience. His tone was serious, and Anos could tell he wasn''t lying. His words aligned with the legends surrounding Shandora. "Giant snake?" Anos mused to himself, recalling the lore. In the original history of Shandora, it was said that Noland''s crew discovered massive quantities of gold, including artefacts hidden within the ruins. This further corroborated Enel''s claims. "Do you remember where the entrance is?" Anos asked with a smile. Enel perked up immediately and pointed confidently toward a dense forest nearby. The area was lush and overgrown, seemingly untouched by human hands. "Let''s go. Take me there," Anos said. "But it''s hard to get to. I only found it last time because I fell in by accident," Enel replied hesitantly. "Don''t worry. Just show me the direction, and I''ll take care of the rest." With Anos''s assurance, Enel darted toward the forest, leading the way. While Shandora was famed for its wealth, it was impossible to imagine that every building had been made of gold. However, the possibility of a golden palace buried underground was not far-fetched. A palace constructed entirely of gold was a symbol of immense prosperity something even the World Nobles couldn''t replicate in the modern era. The mysteries surrounding this place deepened, but for now, these were secondary concerns to the Tru Kingdom''s plans. As the two ventured further into the forest, the dense vegetation obscured any traces of the ancient city. "Enel, if you knew about the underground palace, why didn''t you stay there? It seems like a perfect hiding spot," Anos asked curiously. "Brother Anos, did you forget about the giant snake I mentioned? It''s known as the ''Sky Island God.'' I was terrified of being eaten by that thing, so I never dared to return." Anos nodded, recalling the legend of the serpent. He had even tasked Abona with tracking down the creature earlier. It was likely that the snake considered the golden palace its territory, having resided there for centuries. As the duo continued their journey, they moved deeper into the forest. The surrounding foliage grew denser, with towering trees casting long shadows. "Enel, since you''ve seen the underground palace before, let''s work together to uncover it. After all, this place holds the key to the prosperity of the Tru Kingdom," Anos declared. "Brother Anos, I''ll guide you there. But please be careful. That snake is no ordinary creature," Enel warned. With Enel''s help, Anos felt certain that uncovering the secrets of Shandora would bring unparalleled benefits to the Tru Kingdom. The prospect of reclaiming its golden treasures was within reach, and Anos was determined to see it through. ---- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 140. Gold --- The gold on Skypiea has always been overlooked by the people of the world. Even now, no one in the greater world knows about the treasures hidden here. It is estimated that, apart from the Pirate King Roger, no one would believe that a golden city exists over 10,000 meters above the sea. Many are tirelessly searching for the ruins of the ancient city of Shandora, primarily to uncover the whereabouts of its gold. So far, apart from the golden bell that has been discovered, search efforts continue like a carpet sweep for the remaining treasures. Yet, little gold has been found. However, even the small amount recovered from these ruins has been enough to demonstrate the immense wealth and grandeur of that era. While others were still searching, Anos had already followed Enel to an area nearly a kilometre away. This place was far removed from Shandora and vastly different from the ancient city''s remnants. As they arrived, Enel pointed forward and said, "This is the spot. I fell from here the last time I was here, about two years ago. But now, it seems like the entrance to the cave is gone!" Looking at Enel, he didn''t seem to be lying. The area was covered in fallen leaves, leaving no obvious traces. They had reached the edge of Upper Yard, with a steep abyss below them. If an exit had appeared in such a place, falling would have been inevitable. "It''s definitely here!" Anos sighed as he activated his Observation Haki. The entire area, including the underground, instantly came into his perception. As expected, there was indeed a vast underground space. It would have been nearly impossible to notice without careful observation. "Let''s go. I''ll take you inside," Anos said with a smirk as he glanced at Enel.This tale has been pilfered from Royal Road. If found on Amazon, kindly file a report. He placed his hand on Enel''s shoulder. The cave entrance Enel had mentioned was still there but blocked by debris and covered in fallen leaves, making it virtually undetectable from the surface. Anos used his spatial abilities to bypass all obstacles. With a flash of white light, the two disappeared and reappeared moments later in front of a massive golden gate. The gate stood over ten feet tall. Its sheer size and weight were staggering, but a small gap had left it ajar. Although the gap seemed narrow compared to the size of the door, it was wide enough for two people to pass through. The golden gate was adorned with intricate patterns and ornate carvings, exuding an aura of magnificence. Despite being underground, the area was as bright as day, with light reflected from the golden surface of the door itself. Two massive golden lion statues stood guard before the gate, each estimated to weigh several tons. If such items were transported to the world below, they would easily make someone the richest person alive. The area near the gate was not vast approximately fifty square meters. Yet the floor was entirely paved with gold. Apart from a thin layer of dust accumulated over centuries, the gold remained pristine. Standing before the gate, Anos couldn''t help but marvel at the grandeur and wealth surrounding him. He stepped forward, placing his hand gently on one of the two-meter-tall golden lion statues. The craftsmanship was impeccable, making the statue appear lifelike. "System, analyze the value of the golden lion statue," Anos said mentally, entering his system space while still touching the statue. A voice responded: [ The golden lion statue is estimated to be worth 5.5 billion Beris ] Hearing this, Anos didn''t respond immediately. Instead, he exited the system space and continued admiring the massive statue. Just one statue was worth 5.5 billion Beris, and there were two here this didn''t even account for what lay beyond the gate. Such wealth could make him the richest man in the world. However, introducing so much gold into circulation could destabilize the world''s economy by rapidly devaluing the currency. "Brother Anos, are you alright?" Enel asked curiously, noticing Anos lost in thought. Snapping out of his reverie, Anos smiled and replied, "I''m fine. I''m just overwhelmed. I didn''t expect this much gold to be here it''s astonishing!" "Is that so? But there''s even more inside," Enel remarked casually. Enel didn''t understand the true value of the treasure before them. On Skypiea, gold was considered ordinary and held little value. Even when discovered, it was often ignored. But below, in the Blue Seas, gold was a treasure that could shape entire economies. "Enel, have you ever told anyone about this place?" Anos asked thoughtfully. "No," Enel replied. "There''s a giant snake guarding the area. After my last visit, I never returned, and no one treats me well up here. Why would I tell them about it?" "It seems you''ve been inside before. Let''s head in and explore," Anos said with a grin. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 141. Gold Conversion --- If all the gold in this place were converted into Beris and stored in the system space, Anos felt he could truly ascend to godhood in an instant, but first, he needed to update the system for the conversation from gold to Beris. In the future, not only in this pirate world but even in any other place, he could become a god-like existence. Selling such a massive amount of gold in the pirate world was impossible. A small quantity might be manageable, but moving such a colossal amount was unthinkable. The two of them hadn''t even entered yet, but the gold visible at the entrance was already enough to leave anyone speechless. Anos walked ahead, with Enel obediently following behind. After all, in his impression, there was a formidable presence inside, and his strength wasn''t sufficient to act recklessly. If he charged in blindly, he risked being devoured. Being swallowed whole wouldn''t be an ideal outcome. The door had a gap wide enough for two people to pass through, and the golden door itself was at least a meter thick. With such an extraordinary thickness, this single door alone would be worth tens of billions of Beris far beyond the value of most treasures in the world of pirates. For an ordinary person, even if such a golden gate were left unguarded, they''d have no means to take it away. Its sheer weight and value made it incomprehensibly unattainable. The thick golden door gleamed, exuding an air of immense value. Once they stepped inside, they found themselves in a dark underground palace. However, the reflective shine of the gold and silver treasures illuminated the space, making the entire hall faintly visible despite the lack of candles. Anos couldn''t help but feel a sense of disbelief as the vast treasure trove revealed itself. Such an incredible amount of gold was beyond imagination. "Brother Anos, be careful there might be a big guy in here!" Enel softly reminded from behind. Though parts of the massive hall were shrouded in shadows, Anos had already used his Observation Haki to scan the entire underground palace. If you come across this story on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen from Royal Road. Please report it. There were no signs of living creatures here, and the giant python, the guardian of Skypiea, was likely still outside. The underground palace was eerily silent, so much so that even the sound of their breathing echoed. Each footstep was crystal clear in the stillness. The golden palace was far more expansive than anyone could have imagined, stretching out beneath the ruins of Shandora. The entrance was located nearly a kilometre away from the ancient city itself. Though the palace was dim, the towering golden pillars, each tens of meters high and three meters thick were clearly visible. In the pirate world, anyone who could obtain even one of these pillars would become unimaginably wealthy. Not only was the palace constructed from solid gold, but it also contained numerous golden artefacts, including chairs, decorations, and other items. Every pillar bore unique carvings and designs. Standing at the entrance, Anos could already take in the magnificence of the scene. He slowly began to walk forward, carefully observing his surroundings. "It seems that this gold wasn''t crafted by human hands. The only power capable of achieving this must be the Gold-Gold Fruit!" Anos concluded after examining the area. After all, no kingdom, no matter how prosperous, could amass such an immense quantity of gold. The Gold-Gold Fruit couldn''t create gold out of anything but could draw and manipulate the gold buried deep within the earth, shaping it into the incredible forms now surrounding them. Even so, gold in the pirate world retained its high value, and the sheer quantity here was enough to propel Anos to unimaginable heights. He recalled thinking that the treasure he had seized from Mariejoa was enough to elevate him, but the underground golden palace had completely overturned his expectations. Not only would this treasure secure his future, but it would also ensure that the Tru Kingdom would never face financial concerns. "Brother, what are you observing?" Enel asked curiously, noticing Anos lost in thought. "Nothing much," Anos replied with a smile. "It just makes me wonder what this city must have looked like in its prime, hundreds of years ago." "Well, whatever it was, it''s all gone now. No records remain, and only this empty palace is left behind. It doesn''t mean much anymore," Enel said with a puzzled expression. "There''s still something left," Anos countered, striding deeper into the hall. Each of his steps echoed loudly in the vast space. Even the floor beneath them was made of solid gold. Yet, in the centre of the hall, something stood out. It was a massive Poneglyph a block of stone about 5 meters high and 5 meters wide etched with ancient text. Anos had sensed its presence the moment they entered. This particular Poneglyph had originally been located among the ruins of Shandora, but it seemed that after declaring himself a god, Enel had moved it here while clearing the golden palace. Behind the Poneglyph stood a grand staircase that ascended about 10 meters, at the top of which rested a golden throne. Flanking the throne were four golden statues, intricately carved. Everything in sight, except for the Poneglyph, was made of gold. The overwhelming wealth left no room for doubt everything here now belonged to Anos, including the priceless Poneglyph. "Brother Anos, what does it say?" Enel asked, pointing to the inscriptions on the Poneglyph. The writing was sharp and pristine, untouched by time. Compared to the Poneglyph in Alabasta, this one seemed almost new. "This is a Poneglyph," Anos explained calmly. "It records many secrets, but almost no one in the world today can read this ancient script." --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 142. System Update --- Anos understood very well what the content of the historical text was about, but he still didn''t care much about these things at the moment. The Poneglyph clearly had two more rows of text in the corners, written by none other than the Pirate King himself. However, this left Anos puzzled. Why didn''t the other party take the gold stored here after discovering it? But thinking it through, it made sense. In such a vast underground palace, grabbing just a few treasures to squander would have been enough. There was no need to go overboard. "System, interpret the contents of the Poneglyph!" Anos commanded the system in his mind. As his system balance dropped by over 10 million Beris, the Poneglyph in front of him began transforming, the ancient script translating into words he could comprehend. Surprisingly, it recorded the existence of an ancient weapon, similar to what was found in Alabasta. However, this one detailed an ancient weapon originating from Fishman Island. "Ancient Weapon Poseidon, the King of the Sea!" Even though Anos had known about it before, the detailed text amazed him. It clearly documented when and how this weapon could appear, leaving no ambiguity. The reason Anos spent 10 million Beris to decode the Poneglyph was precisely to uncover such secrets. But even now, the exact nature of Poseidon remained elusive to him. After fully understanding the content, Anos waved his hand, and the massive Poneglyph was immediately shrouded in a faint blue light. The next moment, it vanished before him and Enel. While Anos was not particularly interested in the Poneglyph itself, his focus was on the enormous underground golden palace. "System, evaluate the value of the entire Golden Palace!" Once again, Anos called upon the system. He was curious about the palace''s worth.The narrative has been taken without authorization; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident. If taken outside, finding a secure place to sell so much gold would have been a nightmare. [ The value of the entire underground Golden Palace is approximately 1,235.3 billion Beris ] [ Congratulations, host, for meeting the requirements for the system update; please wait for the completion...9% 23%.... 57%.... 69%.... 83%.... 99% ...100% Update complete! The Exchange Feature has been Unlocked] [ The value of the entire underground Golden Palace is approximately 1,235.3 billion Beris, Do you wish to exchange?] Hearing this staggering figure, Anos''s expression remained calm, though inwardly he was elated. "Exchange the entire underground Golden Palace. Convert the remaining structures into stone to support the ground," he instructed with a slight smirk. Enel, standing nearby, watched in astonishment. What followed stunned him even further. The grand underground palace began petrifying, starting from the gates and spreading to the throne. Even the intricate carvings remained unchanged but transformed into solid stone. Enel collapsed to the ground in fear. Meanwhile, Anos remained engrossed in his system interface, watching the recharge amount climb. The entire process took a minute. By the end, the once-golden palace had become a petrified shadow of its former self. The so-called "Land of Gold" was now gone, save for what remained in the belly of the island''s giant serpent. "Brother Anos, what just happened here?" Enel asked fearfully, his voice trembling. Anos, immersed in his system''s notifications, didn''t respond immediately. The sound of the mechanical system voice echoed in his mind. [ Congratulations, Host! You have successfully exchanged over one trillion Beris. You are now a VIP member of the Universal Mall System. Member rewards have been distributed; please check them in time! ] The announcement was music to his ears. With over a trillion Beris at his disposal, Anos could now act as he pleased in this world. He briefly considered becoming a pirate to control the seas, but he dismissed the idea life aboard a ship didn''t appeal to him. Finally coming back to his senses, Anos noticed Enel sitting on the ground. "Why are you sitting there?" he asked curiously. "Brother Anos, are you okay? I''ve been calling you, but you didn''t respond at all. I was scared to death!" Enel exclaimed, tears welling in his eyes. Anos knelt beside him with a faint smile. "I''m sorry to worry you. Everything''s fine now. Let''s leave." When they returned to Shandora, Abona and his group were still searching for gold. The Shandians, though diligent, had not found much. "Abona, stop the search and have everyone prepare to leave," Anos ordered. "Your Majesty, is something wrong?" Abona asked, puzzled. Though they had searched for hours, they had yet to find anything substantial. His Majesty''s sudden command was unexpected. "There''s no need to continue. What we need to do now is settle matters on Skypiea quickly and return to the Tru Kingdom. The gold here is unnecessary," Anos replied calmly. "Yes, Your Majesty!" Abona obeyed without hesitation. Although he didn''t fully understand the reasoning, he trusted the king''s judgment. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 143. Creating Space Tunnel --- It had been a week since they arrived in Skypiea. Including the days spent sailing on the sea, nearly two months had passed since they departed from the Tru Kingdom. Now that the Skypiea matter was resolved, the next step was to quickly establish the space portal. Once back in the Tru Kingdom, the other end of the portal could be activated, officially connecting the two locations and creating a direct route to the military base on the floating island. Two days later. "Daiki, are you sure this is the right location for the portal?" Anos asked curiously, looking around. The area was surrounded by lush trees, and just ahead lay the edge of Upper Yard, which was also the boundary of all of Skypiea. "Your Majesty, this location was chosen with great care," Daiki replied respectfully. "Considering the surrounding environment, this is the best possible spot. Not only is it well-hidden, but it also lies directly behind our military base. Anyone attempting to access it would have to pass through the entire base first." From a security perspective, this location is ideal." "What do you think, Abona?" Anos turned to Abona, who stood nearby holding Dawn, his weapon. "Your Majesty, I don''t know much about this," Abona admitted, "but based on Captain Daiki''s explanation, this does seem like a solid choice." Satisfied with their input, Anos looked ahead and thought for a moment before responding, "If both of you agree, then this is where we''ll set it up." Anos didn''t dwell on these logistical details, but he understood the critical importance of the space portal. Once the decision was made, he surveyed the terrain. His body began to glow faintly blue, and his eyes turned a striking shade of sky blue as he prepared to activate his Devil Fruit powers.If you stumble upon this narrative on Amazon, it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it. The surrounding trees and plants bent as if caught in a powerful gust of wind, bowing outward in all directions. Observing the phenomenon, both Abona and Daiki instinctively stepped back, wary of what might happen next. Anos fixed his gaze on the designated location, crossing his palms as two streams of radiant blue energy shot out. The beams converged about fifty meters in front of him, rapidly spinning to form a vortex. Within a minute, the swirling mass had grown into a massive portal. The vortex resembled the spatial distortions Anos often used for long-distance travel, with its dark centre and glowing blue edges. However, this portal was far larger and radiated an even stronger, more ominous presence. As the vortex stabilized, nearby plants and trees were uprooted and drawn into its swirling depths, vanishing completely. Abona and Daiki stood frozen, watching the extraordinary scene in awe. Though Skypiea sat 10,000 meters above sea level, dark clouds gathered overhead, lightning and thunder converging toward the vortex. Even the residents of Angel Island could see the unnatural storm forming over Upper Yard, though they had no idea what was happening. The vortex''s power began to wane at its edges, suggesting it would soon collapse unless reinforced. Anos acted quickly, maintaining the portal''s stability with his left hand while raising his right hand skyward. A black crack appeared 100 meters above, from which a massive black object descended. The ground shook violently as the colossal structure landed above the vortex. It was a massive door, 50 meters tall, jet-black, and inscribed with glowing runes. At its top floated a large, mysterious sphere, its material unknown but radiating an eerie calm. As the door settled, the dissipating spatial energy from the vortex began to condense, connecting seamlessly with the structure. The portal stabilized completely, its swirling energies now bound to the massive doorway. This remarkable object was something Anos had acquired through his system space at a staggering cost of over 20 billion Beris. However, for a king as wealthy as Anos, this expense was hardly significant. When the process concluded, all vegetation within a 50-meter radius had been obliterated, leaving only barren soil. Abona and Daiki stared in stunned silence, the spectacle having shattered their expectations of what was possible. Though they had long known their king''s Devil Fruit granted him spatial powers, witnessing the creation of a space portal was a completely different experience. This half-hour display of raw power and precision had given them a new appreciation for the wonders their king could achieve. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 144. Space Portals --- The space portal stood silently in place, emitting no sound. At its centre, a black vortex spun ominously, radiating an air of mystery. Observing it from a distance, the portal exuded an unsettling aura that could weigh heavily on anyone nearby. After Anos finished his preparations, the blue light enveloping him gradually faded, and his eyes returned to their natural state. The surrounding flora had been swept away, leaving behind a barren expanse of land. Though the construction of the military base had yet to commence, the space portal intended for personnel transport was an urgent priority. The responsibility for constructing the military base was handed over to the Tru Kingdom. Meanwhile, the people of Skypiea, including the Shandians, would continue with their own ways of life. From this day onward, Apayado was declared a restricted area, inaccessible to all. When all was settled, Anos stood quietly, admiring his work. Besides the space portal, there was nothing else left in the vicinity. Daiki, who had been observing from nearby, was momentarily stunned. He quickly approached Anos and asked curiously, "Your Majesty, is this the portal?" "Indeed," Anos replied. "This is designed for two-way transport. Once I return to the Tru Kingdom, I''ll build another portal there. For now, the planning and construction of the military base here will be your responsibility." "I want the base fully operational within three months, so ensure everything is prepared before the arrival of personnel from the Tru Kingdom." Anos had meticulously planned for this. Daiki, recalling prior discussions, nodded in understanding, as there were no unforeseen developments. "You mentioned that outsiders could potentially access Skypiea. Should we seal off the entire island?" Daiki asked.This story has been stolen from Royal Road. If you read it on Amazon, please report it Given the military base''s critical importance to the future of the Tru Kingdom, its secrecy was paramount. With their decision to remain independent from the World Government, they had to proceed cautiously, ensuring no leaks. After a moment of thought, Anos responded, "There''s no need to seal off Skypiea. Very few people from the Blue Sea can reach it. For those who attempt the dangerous journey through the Knock-Up Stream, you must ask yourselves do you have the strength to confront them? And as for those who bypass the stream entirely, you stand no chance against them either." "Your Majesty is right," said Abona. "Our focus should be on controlling access to Skypiea itself. From now on, Apayado must remain an absolute forbidden zone." "Maintain good relations with the Skypieans and Shandians, Daiki," Anos instructed. "You will oversee everything here. Skypiea has potential; if there are capable individuals, consider recruiting them into our army." "Understood, Your Majesty!" Daiki replied. "Station guards at the space portal. For now, it still functions as a random transporter, and we cannot predict where it might lead. Vigilance is key to preventing danger," Anos advised. "Understood," Daiki affirmed. Anos smiled faintly before turning his attention back to the portal. Its intricate design, though compact, carried immense value estimated at over 20 billion Beris. While this expense wasn''t a significant burden for Anos anymore, it underscored the portal''s importance. Having finalized matters on Skypiea, Anos prepared to return to the Tru Kingdom. The portal''s construction had been the primary objective of his visit. During his stay, he resolved governance issues in two days, brokered peace between the Skypieans and Shandians in three days, stabilized the island''s population within half a month, and established plans for a military base and a space portal all within a month. It was a remarkable pace. Despite this, most Skypieans had yet to see their new ruler in person. Life on Skypiea, though peaceful, was harsh, with a poor standard of living. "Arrange for a meeting in three days," Anos ordered. "We will address material distribution, personnel assignments, and other matters. After that, I''ll return to the Tru Kingdom. Daiki, you will take full charge of Skypiea''s administration." Having spent nearly 20 minutes inspecting the portal, Anos was confident everything was in place. With most of the critical tasks completed, only minor adjustments remained. The portal and military base would solidify the Tru Kingdom''s foothold on Skypiea. While Skypiea''s resources couldn''t be sold to outsiders, they would greatly benefit the kingdom''s development. Daiki nodded in agreement. For now, Anos needed to leave Skypiea. Once the space portal in the Tru Kingdom was operational, travelling between the two locations would become as simple as stepping through a doorway. There was little reason to worry. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 145. Meeting --- The portal established on Skypiea is now in operation. From now on, four members of the Royal Guards will take turns guarding it daily, keeping a close watch on the surrounding area day and night. For Skypiea, this level of caution might seem excessive. After all, outsiders cannot easily enter, and the inhabitants of Angel Island rarely come near this location. It remains a remote, sparsely populated area. Two days have passed since the incident, and Anos is already preparing to leave. He only needs to finalize a few remaining matters. For now, the situation on Skypiea has been resolved. At this moment, the shrine''s main hall was filled with people. Anos sat at the head of the room, surveying the attendees. Present were representatives from Angel Island and the Shandia people, along with several members of his group. The primary purpose of this gathering was to distribute resources. Since the Shandia tribe had abandoned their original homeland, their foundation for survival had been disrupted. To address this, material support was prioritized. "I have called you here today to discuss arrangements for the future," Anos began. "In the shrine''s backyard, supplies such as staple foods, meat, fruits, and other necessities have been stockpiled. The Shandia people can collect these based on their actual needs and won''t need to worry about food shortages." "From now on, the Tru Kingdom will send a large shipment of supplies here regularly. Additionally, within three months, we will establish a commercial economy on Angel Island or a nearby islet." "Daily necessities will be made available for purchase, ensuring better living conditions for all residents of Skypiea." "Does anyone have any concerns regarding these arrangements?" Anos stood and addressed the crowd, his gaze sweeping across the room. Wyper quickly stood up. His concern was evident. "Is what you said true? Can we simply collect the supplies, or is there some condition?" Wyper''s anxiety was understandable. The Shandia tribe''s food supplies had nearly run out after weeks of scarcity. Without immediate aid, his people would soon face starvation. Support the author by searching for the original publication of this novel. The two individuals accompanying him shared his apprehension. Gan Fall, the leader of Angel Island, smiled warmly. He understood that this distribution was part of Anos'' promise when he assumed leadership over Angel Island. Daiki, one of Anos'' trusted officers, stepped forward to clarify. "I will oversee the distribution of resources. Should you have any concerns, you may approach me directly." "Here are the distribution rules: The Shandia people will receive a six-month supply of food free of charge, including staples, meat, and fruits. Angel Island residents will receive three months'' worth of staple foods, fruits, and meat." "After this initial period, all residents will need to contribute labour to sustain these benefits. "Wyper, your Shandia tribe will also take responsibility for guarding Skypiea''s entrance. While visitors are rare, this measure ensures security." "Additionally, your tribe will be offered training opportunities to strengthen your defences. This is a direct request from His Majesty." The Shandia tribe expressed no objections. For them, guarding the entrance to Skypiea was a simple task. They understood that while access from the Blue Sea was possible, it was an infrequent occurrence perhaps once every decade or two. Wyper bowed respectfully. "Captain Daiki, the Shandia clan has no objections. We will guard Skypiea''s entrance with our lives and ensure no unauthorized individuals gain access." Anos turned to Gan Fall. "Gan Fall, as for Angel Island, your people may continue their way of life as usual. However, moving forward, sustenance will require bartering goods of equal value or contributing labour." For instance, Sky Island specialities such as Dial shells like Breath Dials or Impact Dials and other resources can be gathered and sent to the Tru Kingdom for trade. This will allow the people of Skypiea to improve their quality of life." Gan Fall nodded. "I understand, Your Majesty." Anos continued, "For further details, you may consult Daiki at any time. I will not remain on Skypiea much longer, and Daiki will handle the day-to-day responsibilities." "Moving forward, Skypiea will operate as an autonomous partner of the Tru Kingdom. While you are not bound by our directives, I hope mutual understanding will foster harmony." The attendees voiced no objections. Everyone knew that the king''s stay on Skypiea was temporary. They accepted the arrangements and chose not to question his broader intentions. The meeting was brief, focusing on resource distribution. The finer details would be adjusted gradually. Anos knew it was unrealistic to perfect everything in a single month. What mattered most was initiating progress. With its natural barriers, Skypiea enjoyed protection. Maintaining its current way of life would bring long-term benefits to the Tru Kingdom. In this community of 8,000 residents, peace was the priority. If conflict could be avoided, the arrangement would succeed. This meeting left everyone satisfied, especially regarding the promised supplies. Most eager were the three Shandia representatives, who had suffered the most from food scarcity. For them, the sight of the stocked provisions in the backyard was a welcome relief, validating the king''s promises. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 146. Nothing --- As soon as the meeting ended, everyone, led by Daiki, rushed to the backyard of the shrine. This area was an open space with no yard, but it was still quite large overall. At this moment, the entire place was filled with supplies of staple foods like rice and noodles, vegetables, meat, and even some fruits. Most of these items were things the residents of Skypiea had never seen before. Whether it was rice, vegetables, or fruits, everything was neatly packaged. These supplies had been prepared by Anos and brought here using his abilities. In terms of daily necessities, these supplies covered everything. The pile stood about ten meters high and spanned nearly 1,000 square meters. For the people of Skypiea, this amount was enough to sustain them for at least half a year. "Captain Daiki, are these supplies for us?" Wyper, visibly emotional, spoke with tears welling in his eyes. For such a rough man, this scene was beyond anything he could have imagined. These items, which they had never seen before, filled them with joy. Even the sight of rice alone was enough to astonish them. "These supplies are yours from now on," Daiki said, smiling as he addressed the crowd. "Remember, these are gifts from His Majesty. From today onward, the peace of Skypiea will rest in your hands." "Skypiea will serve as the military base of the Tru Kingdom, but the safety of Skypiea as a whole will depend on you." Hearing this, Gan Fall stepped forward and declared with a smile, "Captain Daiki, please rest assured. The safety of Skypiea will be my responsibility. I will ensure that His Majesty''s trust is not misplaced!"If you stumble upon this narrative on Amazon, it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it. At this moment, the gathered crowd was overwhelmed with gratitude. The resources before them were more than they had ever dreamed of. Skypiea had always struggled with insufficient resources; rice and other staples were virtually nonexistent. People lived by relying on what little the sky provided. Even the priests, usually composed and dignified, could not hide their excitement as they stared at the mountain of supplies. "Don''t be so excited yet," Daiki said, calming the crowd. "There is still much work to be done. His Majesty has ordered that these supplies be distributed evenly based on population." "Wyper, you will be responsible for your Shandia clan. Each person will receive a monthly ration of a 150-kilogram bag of rice, a basket of vegetables weighing about 30 kilograms, a basket of fruits, and 10 kilograms of meat. These rations will be distributed for the next six months." "As for Angel Island, the distribution will also follow these standards, but their rations will cover three months. Gan Fall, you will ensure fairness in the distribution." Daiki''s instructions were clear, and the crowd nodded in agreement. The supplies were more than enough to sustain everyone. For many families, these provisions exceeded their needs and could last much longer than planned. "Captain Daiki, rest assured," Gan Fall replied confidently. "We will distribute the supplies fairly. No one will receive more or less than their share." "Exactly! You can trust us, Captain Daiki!" Wyper said, grinning. Daiki nodded and continued, "These supplies also have special properties. As long as the packaging is not opened, the food will remain fresh indefinitely. So, don''t worry about spoilage." This explanation further amazed the crowd. The unique properties of the food, imbued with spatial abilities by Anos, ensured its longevity. "Well then, what are you waiting for? Begin transporting the supplies!" Daiki ordered. The Shandia warriors quickly got to work, each carrying at least 100 kilograms of supplies effortlessly. While only a few were permitted to enter Upper Yard, they would transport the goods back and forth as needed. The priests, numbering over twenty, also worked tirelessly to manage the distribution for the seven to eight thousand people on Angel Island. Though the task was arduous, they felt immense satisfaction knowing the difference these supplies would make. This gesture of generosity won over the hearts of everyone on Skypiea. His Majesty Anos, though unseen, became a revered figure among them. The people''s gratitude and loyalty toward him solidified the Tru Kingdom''s influence on the island. As the supplies were distributed, every individual, regardless of wealth or status, received their fair share. This moment marked a turning point for Skypiea, as the people began to trust and support the rule of Anos wholeheartedly. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 147. Leaving Skypiea --- The current Skypiea is in a joyful mood, with everyone putting aside their past prejudices. No representatives from the Tru Kingdom appeared this time, yet Skypiea unanimously praised their contributions. However, it is now time for Anos to leave Skypiea. He has spent exactly one month there, and the time has come to return to his homeland. The journey to Skypiea has concluded. This is not just a departure but marks the official beginning of everything for the Tru Kingdom. Upon returning, Anos will focus on developing the kingdom''s economic and military strategies. Over the next three to five years, he aims to accomplish initial objectives and lay the foundation for future growth. Outside the main hall of the shrine: "Brother Anos, must you leave now? Why not stay for a few more days?" Anos had already begun preparations for his departure. The shrine hall was packed with people. Gan Fall had brought his priests, while Wyper came with two members of the Shandia clan to bid farewell. Among them, the only one visibly emotional was Enel. Tears streamed down the young man''s face, and he stood at the entrance, disregarding his image. Looking at Anos, he asked with reluctance, "Do you have to leave now?" Enel had gained much recognition on Skypiea during the past month. The prejudice against his origins had vanished, and his treatment improved dramatically. Anos smiled, patting his shoulder. "Enel, it''s not like I''ll be gone forever. I''ll likely return in three months. Whether it''s here or the Tru Kingdom, you''ll see me again. Don''t worry about it."You might be reading a pirated copy. Look for the official release to support the author. "Is that true?" Enel asked, his voice hopeful. "Of course! But you need to work hard during this time. Aim to meet my expectations. The world is vast, and you have the potential to grow. Change yourself, and I believe you''ll achieve greatness." Anos''s words carried weight. Though younger than Anos, Enel had a sharp mind and an extraordinary capacity to learn. In just one month, he had fully grasped the basics of Observation Haki. Though his application of it was still developing, his progress was astonishing, surpassing even Daiki. Though he had yet to show promise in other areas, his determination inspired confidence that he would soon grow into a formidable figure. As everyone watched, Enel seemed to make a decision. Wiping his tears, he said firmly, "Don''t worry, Brother Anos. I''ll become someone you can rely on and support you in the future!" "I look forward to that day," Anos replied with a smile. Daiki then approached, his concern evident. "Your Majesty, shouldn''t you bring more people with you? Just you and Abona might¡ª" "What? Do you doubt His Majesty''s strength? Or mine?" Abona interrupted, looking offended. The others chuckled, agreeing silently. Abona''s strength far surpassed Daiki''s. Unless they encountered something extraordinary on the Grand Line, the two would face no threats. "That''s enough. We''ll meet again soon. Focus on improving Skypiea. Next time I return, I expect to see progress," Anos said, addressing everyone. "Rest assured, Your Majesty! I''ll manage Angel Island properly," Gan Fall replied. "We''ll safeguard Skypiea''s borders!" Wyper added with conviction. Anos smiled. "Good. Once the military base here is complete, I''ll bring some fine wine to celebrate with you." "We await your return, Your Majesty!" Gan Fall said with a grin, stroking his beard. He now wore simple clothing, a far cry from his once-armored appearance. It was clear he had embraced his role as Angel Island''s leader, while his flying horse remained his loyal companion. Everything seemed to be falling into place. In just a month, Anos had achieved more than anyone anticipated. Turning to Daiki, Anos said, "Ensure the communication equipment is operational on Angel Island. Use it to relay urgent updates. I leave Skypiea in your hands. Next time we meet, I expect you to be stronger." Daiki nodded with a sheepish smile, unsure how to respond to his king''s words. Abona, growing impatient, said, "Your Majesty, it''s time to leave!" "Very well. Take care, everyone!" Anos said. "Your Majesty, safe travels!" everyone chorused, bowing deeply. When they looked up, Anos and Abona had disappeared into the horizon. Though they harboured questions about their king''s true power, none dared voice them. They recalled the day he had subdued a Shandia warrior with just a glare, leaving his strength an enigma even to his closest followers. Anos himself believed his strength rivalled that of a Marine Admiral, though he had yet to truly test it in battle. For now, his focus lies on building a better future for the Tru Kingdom. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 148. Smart Yacht On Anos'' side. He grabbed Abona''s arm as they both began to freefall through the air. The howling wind and scattered white clouds blurred past their faces. Abona looked tense, his expression shifting between fear and disbelief. "Your Majesty! Could you be more reliable? If we fall like this, we''ll die for sure!" he shouted." Anos burst into laughter, clearly unfazed. "Haha! What''s there to worry about?" Freefalling from an altitude of 10,000 meters was no small feat. If there were land below, they might survive using their abilities, but with the vast sea beneath them, survival seemed uncertain especially since Abona wasn''t a strong swimmer. Abona sighed in frustration, realizing that shouting wasn''t going to change their situation. He could only grit his teeth and pray for a safe landing. Despite the peril, his grip remained firm on Muramasa, the long blade at his side. Even in a moment of crisis, he wouldn''t part with it. As the sea drew closer, they had about 50 seconds before impact. Anos kept a steady hold on Abona to ensure they didn''t separate mid-fall. With a sly smile, Anos suddenly entered his system space and gave an order. "System, purchase a smart yacht." [ System Response: Would you like to select a random model? ]This tale has been unlawfully lifted from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere. "Yes, random is fine!" Anos wasn''t concerned about the cost. With over a trillion Beris in his account, a yacht was merely a drop in the bucket. As they neared the water''s surface, Abona''s nerves reached their peak. Fortunately, they spotted a silver-white yacht below, floating on the vast sea. "Your Majesty, is that... a ship?!" Abona exclaimed, his voice filled with equal parts relief and confusion. "Yep, and it''s ours," Anos said with a smirk. Moments before they hit the water, Anos teleported them onto the yacht''s deck. They landed firmly at the edge of a luxurious swimming pool. Abona, still catching his breath, stared at the massive ship in disbelief. He had never seen such a vessel before not in the Tru Kingdom, nor anywhere else on the Grand Line. Even Anos appeared impressed as he took in the sight. The yacht was a masterpiece. About 120 meters long and 20 meters wide, it would''ve been considered a marvel even in his previous life. The deck featured an opulent swimming pool, while the interior boasted leather furniture and lavish decor. "This... this is incredible," Abona muttered, still in shock. "It''s ours now," Anos said casually, though internally, he was just as amazed. Checking the system, he saw the yacht''s price tag: over 30 billion Beris. While it was a hefty sum, it was insignificant compared to his immense wealth. As they explored the ship, a voice echoed from within. "Welcome, owner, to your private cruise ship. As the first-level user, you have the right to name this vessel." Hearing the voice, Anos felt a sense of nostalgia. The ship''s system spoke in a language he hadn''t heard in a long time. Meanwhile, Abona looked utterly bewildered, unable to understand a word. Anos smiled. "From now on, you''ll be called Infinity." [Name registered. The Infinity cruise ship is now operational. Please proceed to the control room to confirm your identity ] the voice responded. "Infinity?" Abona repeated, confused but intrigued. Anos chuckled. "Don''t worry about it, Abona. Just follow me we need to find the control room." Still puzzled, Abona trailed behind, wondering how his king could understand such strange words. Yet, his trust in Anos was unwavering. Whatever this ship was, it was unlike anything the Grand Line had ever seen. And so, their journey back to the Tru Kingdom began aboard the grand Infinity. ---- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 149. Celeste --- The Infinity Ship rested quietly on the sea, its massive frame motionless on the calm waters. Fortunately, the sea was serene, and nothing unusual occurred. Following the mechanical prompts onboard, Anos walked down the central passage toward the bow of the ship. The entire interior was of mechanical construction, and the ship was still in its initial activation state. As Anos moved forward, each door automatically sensed his presence and slid open. Walking along the extended corridor, he eventually reached the front of the ship. When the final door opened, an ultra-modern, futuristic control room came into view. This was the foremost section of the ship and its core command centre. There were no physical buttons here everything was displayed via holographic projections. At the helm stood a glowing blue orb, about 50 centimetres in diameter, suspended and slowly rotating above the rudder. Its gentle motion added to the surreal atmosphere of the space. All the text displayed throughout the hull was rendered in a high-tech aesthetic, reinforcing its advanced design. For Anos, this setup felt almost dreamlike. As he stepped inside, the ship''s system prompted him: "First sequencer, please place your right hand on the rudder suspension device to register your palm print." Anos gazed at the floating blue orb and, without hesitation, placed his right hand upon it. As his palm connected with the orb, its colour began to shift, transitioning from light blue to a deep red. "The first sequence login is successful. Infinity Ship is at your service. Would you like to activate holographic character projection?" the system asked. "Yes," Anos responded calmly. Moments later, beside him at the bow of the ship, a holographic figure began to materialize. Starting from its feet, the image built upward into the figure of a woman, glowing faintly in blue light. The projection resembled a young woman of about 20 years, dressed professionally, exuding a composed and competent demeanour.Find this and other great novels on the author''s preferred platform. Support original creators! "Greetings, First Sequencer. I am the Infinity Ship system. From this moment on, I am at your service. Wherever you are on the ship, simply give a command," the holographic figure announced. Though it lacked a physical form, its movements, voice, and expressions were lifelike. "From now on, address me as ''Your Majesty'' There''s no need for the title of First Sequencer," Anos instructed. "As you command, Your Majesty, Would you like to change my designation?" the system inquired. "Let''s call you Celeste. Now, set a course for the Tru Kingdom and explain the ship''s functions during the voyage," Anos replied. "Apologies, Your Majesty the King. The Infinity Ship cannot sail without a world map. Please upload one to proceed," Celeste responded. "A map?" Anos frowned, realizing he didn''t have one installed. Frustrated, he accessed his system inventory and confirmed he''d purchased a comprehensive map of the pirate world an electronic version costing nearly 100 million Beris. Though it stung to spend that much, he had no choice. The map appeared in the form of a memory card. Before Anos could study it, a compartment opened on the ship''s console, perfectly sized for the card. Anos inserted the memory card, and the mechanical sounds of processing filled the room. The red orb above the rudder shifted form, transforming into a holographic globe of the pirate world. A red dot marked their current location. With the map now operational, navigation became as simple as voicing a destination. "The world map has been uploaded. Your Majesty can now command the Infinity Ship to sail anywhere," Celeste reported. "Set course for the Tru Kingdom," Anos ordered. "Understood. Calculating route," Celeste replied. The orb spun, and a glowing trail extended from their current position to the Tru Kingdom. Seeing the map, a thought crossed Anos''s mind. If he commanded the ship to sail to Laugh Tale, the final island sought by pirates worldwide, he could reach it effortlessly. However, the New World was no place to venture recklessly, so he set the idea aside. "Route planning complete. Would you like to begin the voyage?" Celeste asked. "Set sail," Anos commanded. Occupied with the ship''s operations, Anos failed to notice Abona waiting outside. Locked out of the core command centre, Abona stood with his sword, gazing silently at the distant sea. With all systems active, the Infinity Ship slowly began to move. For a vessel of its size, accelerating from a standstill took longer than expected. Nonetheless, it was leagues ahead of traditional sail-driven ships. "The Infinity Ship is now sailing at 15 knots. Speed will reach 60 knots in three minutes. The journey to the Tru Kingdom is estimated to take five days and eight hours," Celeste reported. "Introduce the ship''s features," Anos instructed. "The Infinity Ship is a 124.6-meter-long cruise ship powered by advanced micro-nuclear technology. Its five-axis propulsion system allows it to carry up to 500 passengers." "The vessel is equipped with the most sophisticated intelligent systems, has autonomous offensive capabilities, offers absolute defence, and can travel invisibly¡­" --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 150. Gift Pack ---- Anos stood on the Infinity Ship''s deck with his hands behind his back, quietly listening to Celeste explain the ship''s advanced capabilities. The vessel, a marvel of technology, had cost tens of billions of Beris, and Celeste introduced its features in detail, including specifications that went far beyond Anos'' understanding. However, he could tell the ship was cutting-edge. What intrigued him most was its ability to move invisibly and its nuclear-powered propulsion, which was undeniably impressive. After Celeste''s explanation, Anos smiled faintly. "Understood," he said. As Celeste mentioned, the ship''s route to the Tru Kingdom passed directly through the Calm Belt. The journey would take just over five days. However, there was one glaring issue: the ship lacked food supplies. This inconvenience dampened Anos'' enthusiasm slightly, but with so many advanced features, he decided not to dwell on minor imperfections. The Infinity Ship advanced smoothly, its systems automatically detecting and adjusting to obstacles ahead. Unlike traditional sailing ships, the journey was remarkably stable, with almost no sensation of motion. It felt as if they were walking on solid ground, even in the cabin. Exploring the ship, Anos noted its design a three-level hull with nearly fifty rooms. Each detail, from the upper deck to the lower cabin, was meticulously crafted and exuded elegance. This tale has been pilfered from Royal Road. If found on Amazon, kindly file a report. Leaving the control room, he stepped onto the outer deck, where Abona stood, gazing out at the sea breeze. Anos approached and sat beside him. "What''s on your mind?" Anos asked, noticing Abona''s distant expression. "Nothing much," Abona replied calmly. "Just feels like I''ve lost my direction." "Lost your direction?" Anos echoed. "You haven''t set a goal for yourself yet. For instance, why not aim to become the world''s greatest swordsman or chase some other dream?" Abona shook his head. "I have no interest in meaningless titles. Why chase empty recognition?" Anos smiled, patting his shoulder. "Then find a reason don''t let your sword down. Let it guide your path." Rising, Anos walked to the edge of the deck, watching the sea rush by as the ship sped forward. Its velocity was incomparable to any sail-driven vessel. Abona remained seated, reflecting on Anos'' words. He glanced at the supreme-grade sword Dawn resting across his lap, a gift from Anos. For the first time, a flicker of emotion softened his otherwise impassive eyes. --- That evening, Anos was alone in his quarters. Lying on the bed, he leaned against the headboard and entered the system space in his mind. He hadn''t yet examined the membership gift package he''d earned after investing a fortune. Now, with a rare moment of leisure, he was eager to see what it contained. A red gift box hovered in the system space, radiating an aura of anticipation. Anos approached it, his curiosity piqued. "Open the membership gift package," he commanded. As the box opened, it dissolved into light, and a large blue screen appeared: "Congratulations! Membership gift package contents: Spiritual power level +3, Conqueror''s Haki upgraded by one level, Armament Haki upgraded by one level, Observation Haki upgraded by one level, and all other abilities enhanced by one level." Reading this, Anos'' breathing quickened. His heartbeat raced as he processed the upgrades. This improvement equated to a decade of rigorous training condensed into an instant. His strength had surged to new heights, and he couldn''t believe his eyes. "Integrate these abilities," Anos commanded without hesitation. The process was seamless, with no physical sensation accompanying the fusion. When it was complete, Anos exited the system space and began to test his newfound powers. His enhanced spiritual strength sharpened his senses, heightening his hearing and vision to extraordinary levels. Standing in the centre of his room, he focused on his Haki. With a single thought, Armament Haki enveloped his body, coating even his clothes in a sleek black sheen. It was a far cry from his previous abilities. The sheer strength he now possessed felt insurmountable, as if even the strongest opponents would struggle to scratch him. Clenching his fist, Anos marvelled at his transformation. The fusion of his immortal physique and enhanced Haki had elevated him to a level he could only describe as overwhelming. The power coursing through him felt limitless, and for the first time in a long while, he allowed himself to indulge in a sense of invincibility. ---- Don''t forget to check out "Pokemon: Legacy"??? For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 151. South Blue --- The aura of Armament Haki surged, and a fierce, oppressive energy filled the enclosed room, making its presence even more intense. "Your Majesty, the power you are releasing is approaching the limits of what this ship''s structure can handle. I recommend you restrain your energy!" As Anos continued to explore the depths of his abilities, Celeste, Infinity''s AI assistant, materialized in his room and addressed him respectfully. "Ah?" Anos questioned, raising an eyebrow. He wasn''t startled by Celeste''s sudden appearance but was instead puzzled by the intensity of the effect caused by his mere condensation of Armament Haki. It was a phenomenon he hadn''t fully grasped. "Your Majesty, as I mentioned before, the Infinity''s exterior is designed to withstand massive impacts, but its interior requires more caution. Please refrain from using your abilities in the cabin during our journey," Celeste explained in her usual polite yet firm tone. "Okay, I understand," Anos replied with a wry smile, his voice tinged with helplessness. Anos was protective of his newly acquired ship and didn''t want to risk damaging it unnecessarily. There would be plenty of opportunities to test his strength later, and there was no urgency to do so now. After finishing her explanation, Celeste''s projection disappeared, leaving Anos alone in the cabin. Bored, he flopped onto the bed, deciding to sleep. The Infinity sailed smoothly, its advanced systems ensuring safety. If danger approached, the ship could turn invisible, evading detection. The Infinity''s invisibility relied on projecting the surrounding seawater over its surface using advanced technology. To the naked eye, it became nearly undetectable. However, those with strong Observation of Haki could still sense its presence since the invisibility was only visual. Despite its limitations, the ship''s stealth was incredibly effective, significantly reducing danger during its voyage. It was an invaluable asset on the unpredictable seas.The author''s narrative has been misappropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon. --- A Few Days Later The Infinity had entered the Calm Belt, yet its speed remained unchanged. Even the Sea Kings avoided it, deterred by the ship''s unique ability to emit an aura resembling Seastone, effectively masking its presence from them. On the deck, Anos and Abona lay back in deck chairs, basking in the sun and enjoying the stillness of the Calm Belt. "Celeste, how long until we reach our destination?" Anos called out lazily. Without opening his eyes, Abona, lying beside him, seemed unbothered by the question. He had grown accustomed to the ship''s features over the past few days. In response, Celeste appeared beside them, her projection bright and cheerful. "Your Majesty, it will take approximately ten more hours to reach the Tru Kingdom. Please remain patient!" "Ten hours? That''s still so long?" Anos groaned. Without a proper chef onboard, he and Abona had been taking turns cooking, and the monotony of their meals was wearing on them. "Your Majesty, this speed is already extraordinary. If we had crossed through Reverse Mountain, it would have taken at least a month and a half to reach the South Blue," Abona pointed out, his eyes still closed. "Fair enough," Anos replied, his tone relaxed as Celeste stood by, waiting for further commands. "Play some music to pass the time," Anos requested. "Of course, Your Majesty. However, I must inform you that ten Marine warships have been detected 10 kilometres ahead. Shall I activate the stealth mode?" Celeste asked respectfully. At her words, Anos and Abona immediately sat up, activating their Observation Haki to confirm the situation. True to Celeste''s report, ten Marine warships were sailing in formation through the Calm Belt, heading toward the South Blue. From their size and structure, it was evident that the ships carried formidable forces. "Celeste, activate stealth mode and approach the Marine fleet. I want to know what they''re up to," Anos commanded. "Understood, Your Majesty," Celeste replied. A moment later, a white light shimmered across the Infinity, cloaking it in an invisible barrier. The ship seamlessly blended with its surroundings, leaving only faint ripples in the water as evidence of its presence. The Infinity closed the 10-kilometer gap without drawing attention. Through the ship''s advanced systems, Anos and Abona observed the Marine fleet. The Marines onboard appeared relaxed, many chatting idly without any sense of urgency or danger. Based on the fleet''s size 10 warships with around 500 soldiers per vessel it was clear they operated under the banner of a Buster Call, a high-level Marine operation. "So many Marines in the Calm Belt, so close to the South Blue... Something significant must be happening," Abona remarked, breaking the silence. "Hmm. What do you think their mission could be?" Anos asked, his tone thoughtful as he continued to study the fleet. "With this many warships, it''s not a routine patrol. They''re likely preparing for something big," Abona speculated. "Celeste, maintain a slow approach. I want to gather more information before making any moves," Anos instructed. "Yes, Your Majesty," Celeste replied as the Infinity continued its stealthy observation. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 152. Return --- The two stood silently on the edge of the deck, observing the ten slowly moving Marine warships. The distance between them was about 300 meters, well within the range of cannon fire. However, with the Infinity''s stealth capabilities, its presence remained undetected as long as no one employed Observation Haki. "Abona, what do you think this group of Marines is planning in the South Blue? It seems more complicated than we initially thought," Anos asked, resting his hands on the railing and eyeing the Marine fleet with a serious expression. "Although I don''t know much about the South Blue, a deployment of this magnitude from the Marines suggests that something significant has occurred," Abona replied calmly. Indeed, the Marines rarely launched operations on this scale outside the Grand Line, and their presence here was reminiscent of a Buster Call. With the South Blue typically seen as a quieter sea, the situation warranted further thought. "Celeste, let''s avoid them and continue our journey," Anos decided after a moment of contemplation. "Your Majesty, shall I infiltrate one of their ships to gather intelligence?" Abona offered. "There''s no need for that. Why waste time on something so insignificant?" Anos said with a confident smile. His tone wasn''t dismissive out of arrogance but rather grounded in his overwhelming strength, which rendered the Marines'' actions irrelevant to him. As the Infinity moved away, ripples formed on the water. On one of the Marine warships, a few officers noticed the unusual disturbance in the calm sea. They frowned, sensing that something was off, but without Observation Haki or advanced surveillance, they couldn''t detect the invisible vessel.This story has been unlawfully obtained without the author''s consent. Report any appearances on Amazon. Compared to the sluggish movement of the Marine warships, the Infinity seemed like a shooting star, quickly leaving them behind as it sped towards the Tru Kingdom. The presence of such a large Marine fleet in the South Blue was indeed perplexing. The South Blue, often overshadowed by the activity in the Grand Line, rarely saw such attention. For now, however, Anos dismissed the matter, focusing instead on his own plans. --- The Infinity soon left the Calm Belt behind and entered the rougher waters of the South Blue. Though the waves here were choppier, they were nothing compared to the tumultuous seas of the Grand Line. The one-meter-high swells posed no threat to the ship or its passengers. As dusk approached, the ship neared its destination. The sun dipped low on the horizon, casting a warm glow over the sea. Celeste, the ship''s intelligent assistant, appeared before Anos and Abona, her tone as respectful as ever. "Your Majesty, we are approximately one hour away from the Tru Kingdom. Do you have any specific instructions?" she asked. "So, we''re almost there," Anos muttered to himself before replying, "Dock at Naniwa Port as planned. Before that, establish a wireless connection and inform Losta of our arrival." With the ship nearing his homeland, Anos could no longer sit idle. Although it had only been three months since he left, he felt a sense of anticipation as the Infinity closed in on the kingdom he ruled. During his absence, Losta had been managing the kingdom. Entrusting her with the nation''s affairs allowed him to focus on broader plans for South Blue''s unification and the growth of the Tru Kingdom''s power and economy. --- As night fell, the lights of Naniwa Port glimmered brightly, casting a warm and welcoming glow. Losta, along with a delegation, awaited their king''s return at the harbour. The atmosphere was formal, with everyone dressed impeccably for the occasion. The Infinity approached the port with precision, halting less than a meter from the dock. The ship''s automated systems deployed a mechanical bridge, connecting the deck to the shore for easy disembarkation. "Welcome back, Your Majesty!" came the synchronized voices of hundreds gathered at the port. Anos stepped forward onto the bridge, his expression composed. Abona followed closely, curiously observing the people and surroundings, which seemed so unfamiliar to him. "Greetings, Your Majesty!" Losta said, stepping forward with a respectful bow. "On behalf of the Tru Kingdom, we welcome you home." Anos acknowledged her with a slight nod, his demeanour calm yet commanding. The people standing at the port bore smiles of relief and joy, though their king''s neutral expression suggested he was already deep in thought, planning the next steps for his kingdom''s future. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 153. Finances ---- Standing at the edge of the port, Anos looked at the crowd with a faint smile on his lips. Nanniwa Port had not changed much in the months he had been away. However, the significant increase in the number of ships docked there was a testament to Losta, the Minister of Commerce, and her successful management in recent months. "Rise, and assign someone to guard the Infinity. Everyone else, return to your posts. Losta, follow me back to the palace," Anos commanded. "Yes, Your Majesty!" Losta responded, bowing respectfully. The palace remained just as it had been before Anos left majestic and unaltered. Though the night had fallen, the illuminated corridors provided a warm and familiar atmosphere. By now, it was nearing 8 o''clock in the evening. Apart from the few who remained on duty, the palace was quiet. Anos and Losta sat across from each other in the grand hall, their focus on catching up on the changes and developments in the kingdom. As a maid brought in two cups of tea and quietly exited, the doors to the hall closed, plunging the palace into tranquil silence. "Let''s begin. Report everything that has transpired during my absence," Anos said, taking a sip from his teacup. "Your Majesty," Losta began, producing a thick portfolio, "I have compiled a detailed report on the last three months. I''ll summarize it now, and you can review the documents later at your convenience." She placed the portfolio on the table between them, straightened her posture, and began her report. "Since Your Majesty''s departure, the administrative reforms have been implemented across the Tru Kingdom. The industrial projects planned for key regions have been initiated, with factories now operational. Infrastructure development, particularly roads, is also underway."Taken from Royal Road, this narrative should be reported if found on Amazon. "Trade has flourished. Merchants from across the four seas have begun congregating at Nanniwa and Trova Ports. The Kingdom''s economy has seen rapid growth as a result, with most efforts focused on economic recovery and improving the people''s livelihoods." "To date, 86 new factories have been established, employing nearly five million citizens. By year-end, we project an additional 200 factories, creating jobs for an estimated ten million people." "Beyond domestic efforts, the kingdom has also initiated diplomatic outreach to neighbouring South Blue nations. Notably, Crimea, a world government affiliate, has shown promise due to its rich mineral resources and relatively sparse population, making it an ideal partner for our future ventures." Anos listened silently, his expression unreadable, as Losta continued her detailed summary. When she finished, she sat quietly, waiting for his response. The only sound in the room was the soft clink of Anos placing his teacup back onto the table. After a brief pause, he spoke. "These are all commendable achievements, Losta. But tell me, what challenges have arisen during these months?" Anos asked calmly. "Your Majesty," Losta replied, her tone slightly nervous, "the rapid pace of development has created a strain on the kingdom''s finances. The treasury has been significantly depleted due to large-scale investments in infrastructure and industry, as well as efforts to alleviate the poverty of our citizens." As the Minister of Commerce, Losta was well aware of the importance of financial stability. Yet, discussing a lack of funds in front of the king was no easy task. Still, Anos remained composed, leaning back in his chair and sipping his tea with a disinterested air, which only made Losta more uneasy. "Currently," Losta continued, "the kingdom''s monthly industrial revenue is approximately 25 billion Beris. However, with our current trajectory, we anticipate monthly income to surpass 130 billion Beris by March of next year." She spoke carefully, watching Anos for any hint of his reaction. Despite her thorough explanation, his expression remained unreadable. After a long silence, Anos finally placed his teacup back on the table and leaned forward slightly. "Losta, you''ve reported well. But I trust you understand numbers and growth projections are secondary. What I want is the long-term vision for Tru Kingdom. I expect more than just economic expansion," Anos said, his voice steady but commanding. Losta nodded earnestly, understanding the underlying challenge in his words. Anos was not just a ruler concerned with immediate success he sought to build a legacy that would establish the Tru Kingdom as an unshakable power in the South Blue. --- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading! 154. Lostas incompetence --- After the teacup was placed on the table, the atmosphere in the hall remained silent. Anos stared at Losta quietly. After nearly a minute of this tense silence, Losta grew restless. She stood up respectfully, lowered her head, and folded her hands in front of him. "Losta, do you know why you were appointed as the Minister of Commerce?" Anos finally spoke. His tone was casual, but Losta felt an unmistakable weight in his words. Nervously, she thought back to her actions over the past few months, wondering if she had made any mistakes. "The reason I became the Minister of Commerce is entirely due to Your Majesty''s trust!" After some hesitation, Losta could only respond this way. "You''re correct. My trust is indeed a factor. In your position, you hold immense responsibility and knowledge far more than most others in the Tru Kingdom. But tell me, how have you managed this responsibility in the past three months?" Anos''s voice grew colder as he spoke. "Please, Your Majesty, I await your guidance!" Losta replied with deep respect. "It''s not just about how much revenue industrialization can generate right now," Anos said. "As long as the basic needs of the people are met, that is sufficient for the time being. While you''ve done some things well, in other areas, you''ve fallen short of expectations." "Tell me, why do all the officials in the kingdom reek of alcohol including you? Is this the kind of behaviour that should be displayed in times like these?" "And regarding the Fourth Phase Plan, what were my orders? I specifically instructed that it should not be implemented unless under extraordinary circumstances. Yet, how have you handled it?" "In the past three months, you''ve failed to report any significant events occurring in the Tru Kingdom. Are you suggesting that the kingdom is so peaceful that there''s been nothing to report? What do you think this nation will look like in a few months if this continues?" Anos''s tone gradually softened, but the reproach in his words was clear.If you discover this tale on Amazon, be aware that it has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road. Please report it. Losta''s expression betrayed her nervousness. She clasped her hands tightly as beads of sweat began to form on her forehead. Swallowing hard to suppress her anxiety, she replied, "Your Majesty, I didn''t wish to disturb you while you were attending to matters with the World Government." "Furthermore, there haven''t been any notable events in the Tru Kingdom. As for the Fourth Phase Plan, I believe the timing was right. That is indeed my fault. I ask for Your Majesty''s forgiveness!" Anos observed her silently. He didn''t mind minor infractions or hidden motives after all, no one was perfect. Losta was a talented and intelligent individual, and right now, the Tru Kingdom needed people like her. As long as Losta could keep everything under control, he didn''t care about minor missteps. "Losta, we''ll discuss business plans and strategies later. In half a month, we''ll leave for Alabasta. You will remain there to oversee the kingdom''s commerce." Leaning back on the sofa, Anos casually propped his feet on the coffee table. Hearing this, Losta grew even more anxious. Unsure of the reason behind this decision, she quickly knelt on one knee and pleaded, "Your Majesty, I admit my shortcomings. I shouldn''t have acted impulsively. Although I''m originally from Crimea, that nation is where my parents perished. That''s why I resorted to activating the Fourth Phase Plan. Please forgive me!" "Do you think I care about Crimea?" Anos responded with a dismissive tone. "That nation will be dealt with in due time." "I''m not concerned about your personal ambitions, but you need to understand this: there are tasks I allow you to handle freely, and there are others that I do not. Do not cross that line." "If you wish to seek revenge, I won''t stop you, but the condition is that you must perform your duties with precision. Do you think you''ve done that?" "You haven''t," he continued. "And I''m not sending you to Alabasta for leisure. You''re to finalize the business plans, familiarize yourself with the preparations we''ve made, and open new trade routes along the Grand Line. I trust you won''t disappoint me again." Anos''s tone was calm, but the warning in his words was unmistakable. Losta''s heart sank. She understood this was a clear admonishment. Her previous actions and hidden motives had been entirely exposed. Any attempts at justification would be meaningless now. "Thank you for Your Majesty''s understanding. I promise I will not make the same mistakes again!" "Making mistakes isn''t the issue," Anos said. "What matters is whether you learn from them. You''ve earned my trust to hold this position, and I''ve given you the freedom to act. However, that freedom comes with the responsibility to uphold your duties impeccably. I expect you to understand this." He gestured for Losta to rise. "Now, sit down. Let''s discuss the Alabasta mission in detail." "Yes, Your Majesty!" Relieved, Losta returned to her seat. Looking at Anos, her admiration for the king deepened. For Losta, rising from obscurity to becoming the kingdom''s chief minister was nothing short of a dream. Yet, this opportunity had become a reality for her. Anos, on the other hand, understood the dynamics of leadership. He knew when to wield authority and when to offer encouragement. People with hidden agendas weren''t necessarily dangerous, as long as they could be guided and controlled. For a king like Anos, managing such individuals was merely a matter of skill. ----- For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon: P@treon/iamxeno Thank you so much for your support and for reading!